Last Day

Events
 by
F. T. WRIGHT

The Sabbath Rest Advent Church

Waldstraße 37
57520 Dickendorf
Germany

First Printing
July, 1992
COVER PICTURE:

The cover picture was taken in north-western Portugal in the

summer of 1990 when a terrible drought had the land in its
deadly grip. The grass was tinder dry, the streams had dried up,
grass and forest fires were blazing out of control, and the sun un-
masked by clouds, burned with destructive power. Fortunately re-
lief finally came when rain eventually arrived.
The conditions existent where and when this picture was
taken provide us with an accurate preview of the much, much
worse situation which will develop during the fourth plague, one
of the last day events. Then the sun will scorch men with great
heat, the sky will be black with smoke, there will be no water, and
man and beast will die in immense numbers.
The entire progression of last day events will be from bad to
worst, except in the camp of the saints, although even there, con-
ditions will not be entirely comfortable.
Sound indeed is the message from on high to come out of
Babylon so that we escape from suffering her plagues, the most
dreadful scourges ever to have been known to mortals. Those
who put forth the effort to thoroughly understand the last day
events will know for themselves that: "There is a very earnest,
solemn question before us. The time has come when every soul
should understand that he has a soul to save or a soul to lose, a
heaven to win and a hell to shun. We need to understand what we
shall do to be saved. . . ." The Upward Look, 56.
 Contents
Introduction 1-8
1. The Image of the Beast 9-18
2. The Rise of the Beast 19-29
3. The Rise of the Image 30-41
4. The Role of Spiritualism 42-57
5. The Four Angels 58-67
6. The Marriage Prophecy 68-79
7. The Marriage Prophecy-Part II 80-96
8. Babylon the Great 97-105
9. The Message Swells 106-114
10. A Worldwide Union 115-123
11. The Great, Final Test 124-136
12. The Timing of the Judgment of the Living 137-151
13. Two Entirely Different Separations 152-162
14. In the Sanctuary Service 163-176
15. The Shut Door 177-187
16. The Sealing Work 188-198
17. The First Seal 199-208
18. The Former and Latter Rain 209-219
19. The Second Seal 220-230
20. The Loud Cry Begins 231-239
21. The Loud Cry Develops 240-253
22. The Final Shaking 254-264
23. Tried to the Uttermost 265-276
24. Joshua and the Angel 277-286
25. The Duration of Jacob's Trouble 287-295
26. Plagues, and Last Plagues 296-304
27. The Unknown Hour 305-315
28. The First Four Plagues 316-324
29. The Fifth Plague 325-334
30. The Hour of Deliverance 335-343
31. The River Euphrates 344-353
32. The Sixth Plague 354-362
33. Jacob's Trouble 363-371
34. A Sinless People 372-382
35. Cleansing from Earthliness 383-393
36. The Seventh Plague 394-404
37. The Special Resurrection 405-413
38. Last Hours of the Wicked 414-421
39. Jesus Comes Again 422-430
40. The Scapegoat Transaction 431-439
41. The Millennium 440-449
42. The Great Judgment Day 450-461
Appendix: One's Own Image of the Beast 462-466
Scripture Index 467-469
Spirit of Prophecy Index 469-471
Bibliography 471

Unless otherwise stated, all Scripture references are from the

New King James Version of the Bible.
 Introduction
A certain wise man remarked that one secret of being a success-
ful politician is to be able to accurately predict what would happen in
a year's time, and then be able to explain why, when the time came,
his prediction did not eventuate.
This is the predicament in which the least to the greatest of those
who are not the children of God, find themselves. The future is the
great, dark, uncertain, fear-inspiring unknown for them, but this is
not so for the humble, God-fearing child of the Most High who, ac-
cording to God's instructions, searches the Scriptures to know what
is coming upon the world.
"But you, brethren, are not in darkness, so that this day should
overtake you as a thief.
"You are all sons of light and sons of the day. We are not of the
night nor of darkness.
"Therefore let us not sleep, as others do, but let us watch and be
sober." 1 Thessalonians 5:4-6.
"And so we have the prophetic word confirmed, which you do
well to heed as a light that shines in a dark place, until the day dawns
and the morning star rises in your hearts." 2 Peter 1:19.
Nor is this all, for we have the Word of God to us also that says,
"Surely the Lord God does nothing, unless He reveals His secret to
His servants the prophets." Amos 3:7.
This does not say that He will always reveal just when He will ful-
fill His prophetic word, but it does make the wonderful assertion that
He will do nothing, which is to say, not one single thing, but first He
reveals it to His servants the prophets. Sometimes that also includes
the announcement of the day in which the prophesied event will take
place such as the time prophecies of Daniel and Revelation.
Although so many subscribe to a different opinion, the prophe-
cies are not difficult to understand. The Word of God describes them
as being a light which is shining in a dark place dispelling that which
in the darkness ahead, is mysterious and uncertain. The very word-
ing of Scripture indicates that there is no mystery about these things.
True, the prophecies are written in a code language where symbols
are used to identify righteous and evil forces. This device is em-
ployed in order to deprive the dedicated enemies of the gospel of in-
formation which would assist them in their warfare against the truth.
To His enlightened ones, God supplies the key to the code together
2 LAST DAY EVENTS

with the wonderful guidance of that great and marvellous Teacher,

the Holy Spirit. No one need be in the least doubt or uncertainty as
to what these messages mean to them.
"The Bible was designed to be a guide to all who wish to become
acquainted with the will of their Maker. God gave to men the sure
word of prophecy; angels and even Christ Himself came to make
known to Daniel and John the things that must shortly come to pass.
Those important matters that concern our salvation were not left in-
volved in mystery. They were not revealed in such a way as to per-
plex and mislead the honest seeker after truth. Said the Lord by the
prophet Habakkuk: 'Write the vision, and make it plain, . . . that he
may run that readeth it.' Habakkuk 2:2. The word of God is plain to
all who study it with a prayerful heart. Every truly honest soul will
come to the light of truth. 'Light is sown for the righteous.' Psalm
97:11. And no church can advance in holiness unless its members
are earnestly seeking for truth as for hid treasure." Great Contro-
versy ,521, 522.
It is a great comfort for the child of faith to receive the assurance
that the symbolic prophecies can be readily understood provided
there is diligent, faithful study of the living word under the guidance
and inspiration of the Holy Spirit. Let none rest content in the notion
that they have grasped all that there is to be learned of these great
subjects, or that a casual, superficial understanding will suffice to see
us through the dark days of our immediate future. Rather, all must
push back the frontiers of Scriptural knowledge, ever comprehend-
ing the truth more and more deeply until they know for and within
themselves, the nature of the struggle looming ahead. All must en-
gage in this vital work with an urgency befitting the deadly serious-
ness of the crisis which will take the world by surprise.
It is a very important principle of revelation that the unfolding of
truth is progressive, so that, to any generation there is available all
the accumulated light given to previous generations plus their own
gift of present truth.
This statement does not ignore the fact that during those long pe-
riods when the church had sunk into the deep darkness of terrible
apostasy, much of that which had been previously revealed was lost,
but it was only for a time. When revival and reformation formed a
fresh movement, its founding fathers laid the foundations and built
the structure with the truths given to their forebears. Once they had
grasped those mighty revelations from the past, the Holy Spirit led
them forward into fresh vistas of powerful knowledge. Thus they ex-
perienced the truth of the Scripture: "But the path of the just is like
the shining sun, that shines ever brighter unto the perfect day."
Proverbs 4:18.
INTRODUCTION 3

As surely as the unfolding of saving truth is progressive, so it

must be that more light is available to us today than there ever has
been in the past. This is both a wonderful blessing and an awesome,
increased responsibility.
"In these last days we have the accumulated light that has been
shining through all the ages, and we shall be held correspondingly
responsible." Review and Herald, November 25,1884.
"If those who believed in God during the old dispensation were
enjoined to arise and shine, how much greater is the obligation to-
day to arise and shine, when our light is brighter, and shines with
clearer and more steady rays. Our obligation to shed forth light is as
much greater than was the obligation of the people of ancient times,
as our light is more clear and definite." Signs of the Times, October
1,1895.
This can only mean that much more light on the prophetic word
is to shine upon us as we near the end of time. Therefore, there is no
way by which this book can be the final revelation on the order of last
day events. All it can do is to record the extent of that which the
Heavenly Teacher has been able to make known to us up to the point
when the book is written. Yet, the book will never become valueless
in its role as a bridge spanning the past and the present, and reach-
ing beyond the present into the future. Well would it be if we had a
realistic evaluation of how little we know and how much we need to
know. We would then never be guilty of assuming that we had re-
ceived all the light there is to be received. There were some in Sister
White's day who subscribed to this limited view:
"Some have asked me if I thought there was any more light for
the people of God. Our minds have become so narrow that we do not
seem to understand that the Lord has a mighty work to do for us. In-
creasing light is to shine upon us; for 'the path of the just is as the
shining light, that shineth more and more unto the perfect day.' "
Review and Herald, June 18,1889.
On another occasion, her reply to the same question was even
more emphatic:
"The question has been asked me, 'Do you think the Lord has
any more light for us as a people?' I answer that He has light that is
new to us, and yet it is precious old light that is to shine forth from
the word of truth. We have only the glimmerings of the rays of light
that is yet to come to us. We are not making the most of the light
which the Lord has already given us, and thus we fail to receive the
increased light; we do not walk in light already shed upon us." Re-
view and Herald, June 3, 1890.
"A living Christian is one who lives a life of continual prayer.
The path of the just is as a shining light, that shineth more and more
4 LAST DAY EVENTS

unto the perfect day.' The Christian's life is one of progression. He

goes forward from strength to strength, from grace to grace, and
from glory to glory, receiving from Heaven the light which Christ, at
infinite cost to Himself, made it possible for man to obtain." Bible
Echo and Signs of the Times, February 1,1893.
Despite the fact that the prophecies are not difficult to under-
stand, their meaning remains hidden from everybody whether he be
friend or foe until the time comes for them to be present truth. This
even includes the prophets through whom the light was transmitted
in the first case.
"Even the prophets who were favored with the special illumina-
tion of the spirit did not fully comprehend the import of the revela-
tions committed to them. The meaning was to be unfolded from age
to age, as the people of God should need the instruction therein con-
tained." Great Controversy, 344.
One has but to study the history of prophetic interpretation to
see that, as each generation of Christ's followers came upon the
scene, they understood the prophecies which were the guidelines for
their own day while those that were to be fulfilled in a far future gen-
eration were not opened to them fully by the Holy Spirit. They were
opened to them to an extent but not in the fullness of the light with
which they were revealed to the later generation whom they more di-
rectly concerned.
Thus, for instance, it is clear that in the days of the early Chris-
tians the image of Daniel 2, and the four beasts of Chapter seven
were clearly understood to symbolize the four great world empires of
Babylon, Medo-Persia, Greece, and Rome, but they did not under-
stand the meaning of the little horn, nor of the three to be plucked up
by the roots. They had no light on the time, times, and half a time,
the 2300 days, the image of the beast, the battle of Armageddon,
and so forth.
But when the Middle Ages arrived with apostasy at its darkest
depths, the children of God were able to identify the little horn
power as the dreaded oppressor, the papacy. Even so, the meaning
of "a time and times and half a time", remained hidden from them
until the period of the 1260 years which they symbolized, was al-
most ended. Then the light on that time period broke so clearly on
their minds that leading students of Bible prophecy were able to pre-
dict 1798 as the year when the deadly wounding of the papacy would
break her awful power. The event occurred in the very year their
study of Bible prophecy had led them to expect it.
Up till 1798, little if any thought was given to Daniel 8, and es-
pecially not to the vital verse 14, but once 1798 had come and gone,
there was a forward shift of interest on both sides of the Atlantic to
INTRODUCTION 5

Daniel 8:14. This took place under the tutelage of the Holy Spirit,
for there was no other mastermind who could have coordinated this
advance from Daniel 7 to Daniel 8, without the students being
aware they were all moving in the same direction at the same time.
This newly undertaken area of study gave birth to the great sec-
ond advent movement, the main Scriptural inspiration for which was
Daniel 8 & 9, and Revelation 14:6-12. Today, as we face the loom-
ing storm clouds of the final effort on the part of the beast and his
image to establish his claims, the areas of understanding now have
gone beyond what the advent pioneers understood. The whole of
Daniel and Revelation is now open to our understanding.
This is not to say that we understand all that is contained in those
two books. We are far from that, for, it remains the truth that "we
have only the glimmerings of the rays of light that is yet to come to
us." But none of these two books are closed to us, for we have
sound, basic understandings of the whole of both of these remark-
able revelations of prophetic truth.
The study of this unfolding of prophetic understanding is a fasci-
nating and illuminating search indeed and is dealt with very fully in
the four volume research report by L. E. Froom, entitled The Pro-
phetic Faith of Our Fathers, Review and Herald Publishing Associa-
tion, Takoma Park, Washington, D.C., USA.
Those who shall be alive and in God's army when the final battle
shall be fought must have a deep comprehension of the heights,
depths, and breadths of the mighty conquering truths that the Lord
has revealed and will yet make known. None can afford to come
short on a single point. No one understands our desperate need bet-
ter than Jesus Christ, the mighty General of the Lord's army. He
knows as no other can, how great is our need, and we can be certain
that He will abundantly supply that need.
We are to be assured then that "Increased light will shine upon all
the grand truths of prophecy, and they will be seen in freshness and
brilliancy, because the bright beams of the Sun of Righteousness will
illuminate the whole." Evangelism, 198
We know that this promise is being fulfilled to us today. There
has come much in the way of clear and precise understanding of the
prophetic word in regard to the events of the last days, and it is this
light that we wish to discuss in the pages ahead.
The subjects under consideration will be the setting up of the im-
age of the beast, the fall of great Babylon, the Latter rain, the har-
vest, the judgment of the living, the sealing, the close of probation,
the marriage, the shakings, the plagues, and so on. In other words, it
will be the study of last day events.
From the outset, it is important that every student of the study of
6 LAST DAY EVENTS

last day events, be fully aware of what Bible prophecy is, and is not.
Firstly, it is not a survey in advance of political events from which the
children of God will be detached as mere spectators of the battle.
It must be understood that the-rise and fall of certain nations is
recorded only because those kingdoms are the source of power for
the malignant forces which would war against God and His people.
Satan, whose kingdom is Babylon, depends on people-power and
money-power to build his empire. Let these be dried up, and his fall
is certain. Down through history, world dominions have given their
mighty powers to the service of Satan, and, accordingly, these are
identified, and their history foretold in Bible prophecy.
None can identify our enemies so expertly as the Omniscient
One who never makes a misjudgment. His eye penetrates the visible
facade behind which our crafty foes parade and deceive so many,
and exposes to view the real character hidden within.
Thus, when ancient Babylon ruled the world, most men only saw
a powerful nation, a golden rich economy, and a highly developed
culture. But God saw all that as being nothing more than the people-
power and the money-power by which the real Babylon was able to
operate. God correctly identified the great system of utterly rebel-
lious, defiant iniquity called by Him, "The Abomination of Desola-
tion", as being in truth the real city on the Euphrates.
When that mighty river was dried up, the Chaldean army de-
feated, the proud buildings razed to earth, the king and his people
slaughtered, and the divine decree had gone into effect that it should
never again be built or inhabited, Babylon, the Antichrist, and mys-
tery of iniquity, did not cease to exist, but simply re-established its
base of operations in a new location.
That powerful confederacy of evil is even now rising to its last and
mightiest manifestation of defiance against God. The whole world
shall give their money-power and their personal power to support her
candidacy for the position of supreme ruler of this planet. Billions of
deceived humans will align themselves under her banner, and will
commit themselves to total warfare against God on her behalf.
God will meet this threat to the eternal peace and everlasting life
which is found only under His righteous and just government, by
committing His troops to the field. Fearful will be the ensuing con-
flict, terrible the sacrifices which will be made, but all-glorious the
victory when the very spirit of Antichrist will be swept away, never to
rise again.
The development of the forces both of good and evil for the "bat-
tle of that great day of God Almighty", is the subject matter of the
study of last day events. It will not be an investigation into politics,
INTRODUCTION 7

for the Christian has a much greater need than to be informed on this
subject.
The great subject of Bible prophecy is righteousness and its ulti-
mate triumph over iniquity and the last enemy—death. We will see
that God's cause triumphs, not because He has omnipotent physical
power, by which He can instantly obliterate all the rebels against
Him, but because it is righteousness in itself. Even though evil ap-
pears to be overwhelmingly in the commanding position, it must fall,
never to rise again, for it carries within itself the seeds of its own de-
struction. The more vigorously evil seeks to establish itself, the more
speedily and totally it comes to its eternal ending, even though, in
the meantime, it will appear that the right must perish and the cause
of truth be forever lost. But, in the end, when it seems that nothing
more can be done to halt the assumption of all power by the forces of
darkness, it will be seen that truth is indestructible, that it is everlast-
ing and immortal. It will be revealed that those who possess that
truth as a living principle of life and light within themselves, cannot
in the end perish, but have everlasting life.
But if you would gain the best from this series of studies, you
must already have an understanding of that which has been revealed
in the unfolding of the scroll. The better versed we all are on the
great basic prophecies of Daniel 2, 7, 8, 9, 11, & 12, and the corre-
sponding chapters of Revelation, the better we shall be able to un-
derstand and appreciate the truths in this book.
There are some things that will be taken for granted as basic
knowledge as we progress, else this series would never be finished.
The Bible principle is that God gives more light to those alone who
have taken all that their opportunities have permitted of the light al-
ready revealed.
With what diligence then we should study the great prophetic
word. Note the words of counsel in this quotation: "Yet while it was
not given to the prophets to understand fully the things revealed to
them, they earnestly sought to obtain all the light which God had
been pleased to make manifest. They 'inquired and searched dili-
gently,' 'searching what, or what manner of time the Spirit of Christ
which was in them did signify.' What a lesson to the people of God in
the Christian age, for whose benefit these prophecies were given to
His servants! 'Unto whom it was revealed, that not unto themselves,
but unto us they did minister.' Witness those holy men of God as they
'inquired and searched diligently' concerning revelations given them
for generations that were yet unborn. Contrast their holy zeal with
the listless unconcern with which the favored ones of later ages treat
this gift of heaven. What a rebuke to the ease-loving, world-loving in-
8 LAST DAY EVENTS

difference which is content to declare that the prophecies cannot be

understood!" Great Controversy, 344.
The only book in all the Bible which contains a specific blessing
in both its introduction and its conclusion, is the book of Revelation,
the great book of prophecy in the New Testament. Note the words of
these verses in the first chapter. "The Revelation of Jesus Christ,
which God gave Him to show His servants—things which must
shortly take place. And He sent and signified it by His angel to His
servant John,
"who bore witness to the word of God, and to the testimony of
Jesus Christ, to all things that he saw.
"Blessed is he who reads and those who hear the words of this
prophecy, and keep those things which are written in it; for the time
is near." Revelation 1:1-3.
Now compare this with the same equally wonderful promise in
the last chapter: "Then he said to me, These words are faithful and
true.' And the Lord God of the holy prophets sent His angel to show
his servants the things which must shortly take place.
"Behold, I am coming quickly! Blessed is he who keeps the words
of the prophecy of this book." Revelation 22:6, 7.
Revelation is much more than an interesting, informative, and
fascinating field of learning. In addition to all that, it imparts a bless-
ing the value and power of which are beyond computation. Those
who are now faced with participation on God's side in the closing bat-
tle with the forces of darkness, need every promised blessing which is
available to them. Let all pray the Lord that He will open our hearts,
minds, and lives so that He can pour into us a veritable flood of the
promised blessing after which, revived and strengthened, we can suc-
cessfully endure the coming time of trouble, and triumph gloriously.
There is a great deal more that could be said by way of introduc-
tion but it is more important that we get on with the actual study of
these great events and the themes that they in their turn and in their
order unfold. As we enter upon this investigation, let us remember
that we are not the children of the darkness but of the light, for we
have also that more sure word of prophecy whereunto we do well to
take heed as a light shining in the dark place of the otherwise un-
known future. Let us remember that this is no mystery to the child of
God who has the Holy Spirit for his Teacher. Let us remember that it
is to be a study that the Lord declares to be essential and that there is
to be a great blessing to those who do embark on this inspiring,
blessed journey into the future.
 Chapter 1

The Image
of the Beast
In the determination of the correct sequence of last day events, it
is necessary at the outset to correctly locate the dominant land-
marks. Once these are secured in their rightful positions, it becomes
a fairly simple matter to fill in the finer details. This organized ap-
proach to the subject under the inspired tutelage of that Master-
Teacher, the Holy Spirit, is guaranteed to build an accurate structure
of truth.
So, we look for the event which stands out as the one up to and
beyond which the lines of sequence can be drawn, which event we
find to be the setting up of the image of the beast as described in
Revelation 13:11-18.
"Then I saw another beast coming up out of the earth, and he
had two horns like a lamb and spoke like a dragon.
"And he exercises all the authority of the first beast in his pres-
ence, and causes the earth and those who dwell in it to worship the
first beast, whose deadly wound was healed.
"He performs great signs, so that he even makes fire come down
from heaven on the earth in the sight of men.
"And he deceives those who dwell on the earth by those signs
which he was granted to do in the sight of the beast, telling those
who dwell on the earth to make an image to the beast who was
wounded by the sword and lived.
"He was granted power to give breath to the image of the beast,
that the image of the beast should both speak and cause as many as
would not worship the image of the beast to be killed.
"He causes all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and
slave, to receive a mark on their right hand or on their foreheads,
"and that no one may buy or sell except one who has the mark or
the name of the beast, or the number of his name.
"Here is wisdom. Let him who has understanding calculate the
number of the beast, for it is the number of a man: His number is
666."
10 LAST DAY EVENTS

As stated in the introduction to this book, it is assumed that the

readers will have a sound and basic understanding of the prophecies
of Daniel and the Revelation, and will therefore know that the first
beast referred to in this passage and as set forth in the first ten verses
of the chapter, is none other than the papal power which ruled su-
preme over the world for the 1,260 years from 538-1798 A.D. It will
also be understood that the lamblike beast who rises to power after
the temporary demise of the first beast, is none other than the power
of Apostate Protestantism especially as cradled in the United States
of America.
Before locating the setting up of the image, it is necessary to un-
derstand just what this symbol portrays. A correct and accurate iden-
tification of this power is essential at this stage, for, without it, we
would start down the wrong road.
So, what is an image?
It is a likeness or a reproduction of that which was there before;
the same thing all over again.
Normally, we think of an image as being a piece of carved stone
in the form of a person, animal, or something else, whom other men
wish to honor. It may also be cast in concrete, bronze, or a precious
metal such as gold or silver. Though the making of a graven image is
expressly forbidden in the second commandment, there are certain
professedly Christian churches which have installed in their houses
of worship, from a few up to considerable numbers of images of
what they imagine Christ and His mother looked like. They believe
that in those "works of art", they have reproduced an accurate like-
ness of the originals, and that the Lord looks upon their "devotion"
with unqualified approval.
But none of these images qualify to be the special case before
us—the image of the beast.
In the first case, the images of stone, concrete, bronze, gold, and
silver are all inanimate, whereas the image for which we are looking,
is both living and intelligent; having the power to speak and to en-
force its will under penalty of death. These capacities are plainly re-
vealed in these words:
"He was granted power to give breath to the image of the beast,
that the image of the beast should both speak and cause as many as
would not worship the image of the beast to be killed." Revelation
13:15.
This certainly is no inanimate carving or casting, but is a living
force determined to obtain submission to his will no matter what the
cost to others might be. It is the lamblike beast, which later speaks
with the voice of the dragon himself, that will give breath to the im-
age. To put breath into the image is to impart life to it so that it be-
IMAGE OF THE BEAST 11

comes a living power. Thus it is that the image of the beast

"speaks". He demands that he, the image of the beast, should be
worshipped, and decrees that those who refuse to render him hom-
age shall suffer the death decree.
It is highly significant and of great value to us that he is declared
to be the "image of the beast", for this alerts us to the fact that he is
but a reappearance of a power which has already run its course in
history. What the former did previously, his image is certain to do
again, which means that the better we understand the spirit, charac-
ter, policies, and operations of the unrighteous beast, the better we
will know what to expect from his iniquitous image.
So then, who was the beast whose image is given life in these last
days?
Here, in the inspired Word, is the answer:
"By this first beast is represented the Roman Church, an ecclesi-
astical body clothed with civil power, having authority to punish all
dissenters. The image to the beast represents another religious body
clothed with similar powers." Story of Redemption, 381.
The question as to who was the first beast is clearly answered. It
is the papacy who, with the authority and might of the civil powers,
held the world in bondage from 538-1798. Its use of these forces to
arbitrarily enforce her will upon all earth dwellers, is a readily identi-
fiable characteristic of its existence, for it is the nature of the beast in
question here to operate thus.
When another church organization which, on a worldwide scale,
acquires the authority of the state and uses that to enforce its own
worship, then there has been created a reproduction or image of the
first. The beast belongs to the past and has come and gone although
its spirit and teachings live boldly on, while the image is still in the
future. When it comes, it will be far more powerful than the Roman
Church of the Middle Ages, and every bit as ruthless and remorse-
less. Terrible indeed is the struggle through which God's people are
soon to pass. It will require the faith of Jesus to conquer the image of
the beast.
This all indicates that there will be remarkable and extensive
changes away from the blessed freedom to worship God according
to our own personal convictions, or if we choose, not to worship
Him at all. Let us make the most of our precious opportunities which
we now enjoy, for they are not here to stay. All too soon, religious op-
pression and fearful persecution are to be the weapons by which the
image of the beast will seek to establish its undisputed supremacy.
Today, we long for the latter rain to fall and pray most earnestly for
the reception of that wonderful blessing without realizing the awful
nature and extent of the image's response to this challenge to its
[LDE2]
IMAGE OF THE BEAST 13

man hierarchy, and the infliction of civil penalties upon dissenters

will inevitably result." Great Controversy, 445.
"The 'image to the beast' represents that form of apostate Prot-
estantism which will be developed when the Protestant churches
shall seek the aid of the civil power for the enforcement of their dog-
mas." Great Controversy, 445.
'Romanists declare that "the observance of Sunday by the
Protestants is an homage they pay, in spite of themselves, to the
authority of the [Catholic! Church." '—Mgr. Segur, Plain Talk
About the Protestantism of Today, page 213. The enforcement of
Sunday keeping on the part of Protestant churches is an enforce-
ment of the worship of the papacy—of the beast. Those who, under-
standing the claims of the fourth commandment, choose to observe
the false instead of the true Sabbath, are thereby paying homage to
that power by which alone it is commanded. But in the very act of en-
forcing a religious duty by secular power, the churches would them-
selves form an image to the beast; hence the enforcement of Sun-
daykeeping in the United States would be an enforcement of the wor-
ship of the beast and his image." Great Controversy, 448, 449.
Thus is answered the question, "At what point of time will the
image of the beast be set up?" It will be set up when the leading
churches of the United States, uniting upon such points of doctrine
as they hold in common, shall obtain the power of the civil authori-
ties to enforce as law the decrees and injunctions of the Church itself
especially in regard to Sunday legislation.
Signs that this terrible state of vile apostasy is soon to be enacted
are appearing with increasing rapidity. Already the movement for
church unity is well advanced and strides have been made in this di-
rection that would not have been thought possible but a few short
years ago. Many see in this unity a great blessing for the world and it
is true that the prayer of Christ is for the unity of His people. But, let
us never forget that the unity for which Jesus prayed, is not the root,
but the fruit. Firstly, each member of Christ's body becomes a mem-
ber by virtue of the establishment of the life and truth of Jesus within
him. Perfect unity is then found in each believer's having the same
common bond of Jesus' life, love, and truth in his inward spiritual na-
ture. No one can be a part of the unity for which Christ prayed, un-
less he actually experiences that miraculous change by which the old
evil sin master is eradicated, and replaced by the seed of Christ.
Those who are not familiar with these truths, should diligently
study those publications from Destiny Press which clearly explain
this aspect of the message. I refer to books such as From Bondage to
Freedom, Acceptable Confession, Revival and Reformation, and
The Living and the Dead.
14 LAST DAY EVENTS

The unity for which the churches of the world are working does
not involve a transformation of nature, but only a change of alle-
giance. This principle is powerfully illustrated in the behavior pat-
terns which were exhibited at the time of the French Revolution
when there was a tremendous change in the people of France. Up
until the masses rose against the priests and the nobility, they were
devout Roman Catholics, but with the coming of the national insur-
rection, they suddenly changed into atheists. This realignment of
their allegiance required no change of character whatsoever. The ha-
tred and spirit of revenge so violently manifested once the revolution
had begun, was but the revelation of what was resident, but re-
strained, within them prior to the outbreak of anarchy. There was no
change of character in those who either instigated or carried forward
the abandoned fury which all but destroyed France.
The same principle was in operation when the collapse of Com-
munism took place in eastern Europe in 1989. There the change was
in the opposite direction from that in the French Revolution where it
had been from Catholicism to atheism. In the fall of Communism, it
was from atheism back to freedom of religion, but still without
change of character.
For an atheist, an apostate Protestant, a Roman Catholic, a Mos-
lem, a Hindu, or a heathen to become a member of the body of
Christ requires an actual transformation of his inner nature from the
state of sinfulness to that of holiness or righteousness. Without that,
there can be none of the unity for which the Saviour prayed.
In the final conflict, a unity other than that which emanates from
Christ will produce a situation in which the forces of the earth will be
one in mind and one in spirit.
"There will be a universal bond of union, one great harmony, a
confederacy of Satan's forces." SDA Bible Commentary 7:983.
The unity proposed here is not on a platform of truth, but is a tac-
tic designed for gaining a substitute power in the place of God's
power which they will have lost through their rejection of the third
angel's message, the gospel of Jesus Christ. The only power to
which the churches can rightfully look, and to which alone they
should turn, is the almighty omnipotence of the Most High, but those
churches who have lost that power do not do that. Instead, they seek
to fill the vacuum from other sources—money-power and people-
power.
Of that power, earthly civil governments are the custodians, the
source of supply. Therefore, in order to acquire that power, the
churches must go to the state. This they cannot do separately, but
must make their approach as a united body—all for one, and one for
all. Hence the all-powerful drive for unity.
IMAGE OF THE BEAST 15

Some may feel that the image of the beast must already be set up
because there are numerous Sunday laws upon the State books
throughout the United States as well as in Australia and Europe. But,
at the present time, these stand largely unenforced while the time
will come when, in the face of human-existence threatening crises,
there will be a strong uniting of the churches followed by a very defi-
nite enforcement of the law in America first. It will be a nationwide
affair that will involve rewriting portions of the American Constitu-
tion. It will be "national apostasy which will end only in national
ruin." SDA Bible Commentary 7:976.
It should now be clear that when the civil authorities of the
United States use their powers on behalf of the churches, to enact
and enforce the national Sunday law, the image of the beast will have
been set up in that land. No true Christian who studies the sure word
of prophecy will have the least difficulty in recognizing the event
when it comes.
The United States will be the world leader, for the image will be
established by her government before it will be adopted in turn by
every nation on the globe.
"As America, the land of religious liberty, shall unite with the Pa-
pacy in forcing the conscience and compelling men to honor the
false sabbath, the people of every country on the globe will be led to
follow her example." "Foreign nations will follow the example of the
United States. Though she leads out, yet the same crisis will come
upon our people in all parts of the world." Testimonies 6:18, 395.
It must be self-evident by now that the setting up of the image of
the beast is a most significant event. It is a development which brings
the world to a certain point of acute crisis and ushers in a series of
chain reactions that end only in the seven last plagues, the coming of
the Lord in glory, and the total destruction of all the wicked. Hence
the importance of putting this peg in its sure place at the very outset
of this book.
Consider the fearful implications of the fact that the setting up of
the image is the act of national apostasy, firstly in the United States,
and then in each country in turn, until the whole world has plunged
itself into global apostasy.
"When our nation, [USA] in its legislative councils, shall enact
laws to bind the consciences of men in regard to their religious privi-
leges, enforcing Sunday observance, and bringing oppressive power
to bear against those who keep the seventh-day Sabbath, the law of
God will, to all intents and purposes, be made void in our land; and
national apostasy will be followed by national ruin." Review and
Herald, December 18, 1888.
16 LAST DAY EVENTS

This will be no minor apostasy, but total descent into separation

from the Lord of glory. These next statements declare this:
"By the decree enforcing the institution of the papacy in viola-
tion of the law of God, our nation [USA] will disconnect herself fully
from righteousness. When Protestantism shall stretch her hand
across the gulf to grasp the hand of the Roman power, when she shall
reach over the abyss to clasp hands with spiritualism, when, under
the influence of this threefold union, our country shall repudiate
every principle of its constitution as a Protestant and Republican
government, and shall make provision for the propagation of papal
falsehoods and delusions, then we may know that the time has come
for the marvellous working of Satan and that the end is near.
"As the approach of the Roman armies was a sign to the disci-
ples of the impending destruction of Jerusalem, so may this apos-
tasy be a sign to us that the limit of God's forbearance is reached,
that the measure of our nation's iniquity is full, and that the angel of
mercy is about to take her flight, never to return." Testimonies
5:451.
Fearful will be the consequences of this irreversible descent into
godlessness which will bring the entire nation and, in turn, the whole
world to spiritual, moral, social, financial, and economic ruin. The
stock market crashes we have known so far, are nothing compared to
what is coming. It will bring ruin so total that there will not be the
slightest hope of the least recovery.
"When Protestant churches shall unite with the secular power to
sustain a false religion, for opposing which their ancestors endured
the fiercest persecution, then will the papal Sabbath be enforced by
the combined authority of church and state. There will be a national
apostasy, which will end only in national ruin." Evangelism, 235.
"It is at the time of the national apostasy, when, acting on the
policy of Satan, the rulers of the land will rank themselves on the
side of the man of sin—it is then the measure of guilt is full; the na-
tional apostasy is the signal for national ruin." Selected Messages
2:373.
These statements need no further comment. They plainly tell us
that the act of passing and enforcing the national Sunday law as an
act of homage to the papacy; is national apostasy so deep and dark
that it brings complete severance from all righteousness, fills up the
measure of their guilt, and causes the angel of mercy to leave, never
to return. It is no wonder that this is a significant event and one
which is fraught with fearful consequences. It is the great point of no
return. Once that step is taken, the powers of this earth will have
gone too far to return and their destruction is certified.
By the setting up of the image, the device of Satan is perfected.
IMAGE OF THE BEAST 17

Then he will be fully armed and equipped for the final battle. For a
long time the Devil has been working to bring the whole world under
his complete control by uniting its people into one vast army of con-
federated opposition against the people and the truth of God. But,
he could not accomplish this while his forces were scattered and pit-
ted against one another. To perfect his device, he has to terminate
this infighting and enlist the legions throughout the entire world to
fight under his command alone in the common commitment against
the Sovereign of the universe.
Now at last his device will be perfected and he will be fully pre-
pared for the final confrontation by which he cherishes the futile
hope that he will be able to force God to recognize him as a legiti-
mate part of the divine kingdom.
"When the legislature frames laws which exalt the first day of the
week, and put it in the place of the seventh day, the device of Satan
will be perfected." Review and Herald, April 15, 1890.
The perfecting of Satan's device makes God's law of no effect in
the hearts and minds of those who have rejected truth and support
the devil's claims.
"A time is coming when the law of God is, in a special sense, to
be made void in our land. The rulers of our nation will, by legislative
enactments, enforce the Sunday law, and thus God's people will be
brought into great peril. When our nation, in its legislative councils,
shall enact laws to bind the consciences of men in regard to their re-
ligious privileges, enforcing Sunday observance, and bringing op-
pressive power to bear against those who keep the seventh-day Sab-
bath, the law of God will, to all intents and purposes, be made void
in our land; and national apostasy will be followed by national ruin."
Review and Herald, December 18,1888.
Very naturally this will bring the great test for the people of God.
"The Lord has shown me clearly that the image of the beast will
be formed before probation closes; for it is to be the great test for the
people of God, by which their eternal destiny will be decided. . . .
[Revelation 13:11-17 quoted.l. . .
' This is the test that the people of God must have before they are
sealed. All who proved their loyalty to God by observing His law, and
refusing to accept a spurious Sabbath, will rank under the banner of
the Lord God Jehovah, and will receive the seal of the living God.
Those who yield the truth of heavenly origin, and accept the Sunday
sabbath, will receive the mark of the beast." SDA Bible Commen-
tary 7:976.
For the people of God the time will have come to take flight from
the cities: "As the siege of Jerusalem by the Roman armies was the
signal for flight to the Judean Christians, so the assumption of power
18 LAST DAY EVENTS

on the part of our nation in the decree enforcing the papal sabbath
will be a warning to us. It will then be time to leave the large cities
preparatory to leaving the smaller ones for retired homes in secluded
places among the mountains." Testimonies 5:464, 465.
This, as shall be shown later in the book, is when the message
can and will go forth that Babylon the Great is fallen. The proclama-
tion will not be that the hour of her fall has come, nor that she is
about to fall, but that she is fallen.
"After these things I saw another angel coming down from
heaven, having great authority, and the earth was illuminated with
his glory.
"And he cried mightily with a loud voice, saying, 'Babylon the
great is fallen, is fallen, and has become a dwelling place of demons,
a prison for every foul spirit, and a cage for every unclean and hated
bird!
" 'For all the nations have drunk of the wine of the wrath of her
fornication, the kings of the earth have committed fornication with
her, and the merchants of the earth have become rich through the
abundance of her luxury.' " Revelation 18:1-3.
There can be no question then in the light of the foregoing evi-
dences from the prophetic Word, that the setting up of the image of
the beast is a very significant and important event indeed, a waymark
which must not be ignored. It marks a definite and decisive point of
development in the great final conflict, and we must be thoroughly
acquainted with all the facts that concern it. These facts will take on
even greater significance as we proceed with the study, and witness
the bearing that they will have on the crisis.
 Chapter 2

TheRise
of the Beast
The setting up of the image of the beast is the product of the play
and counter play of the titanic forces of the last days in rebellion
against God. Its assumption of absolute power and authority is now
long overdue, because there is pitted in opposition to its rise to su-
premacy, the restraining power of the mighty angels who hold back
the four winds of strife. These will continue to do so until the tardy
people of the Lord are fully prepared to win the battle which shall
bring about his eternal downfall.
But, despite the effective ministry of the four withholding angels,
wickedness and violence are rapidly increasing and the angels are
gradually releasing their hold. Inevitably and eventually, there will be
insufficient resistance to the setting up of the image, and religious
and political leaders will be quick to grasp their long awaited oppor-
tunity. God's people must be fully readied when that day arrives.
When the image is finally set up, it will be a development which
will not have happened without a cause. Rather it will be the result of
the outworking of certain steps and crucial decisions which have
been made over quite a period of time. It is something to which the
church and the state, having once set their feet in certain paths, must
of necessity come in the end.
For us who are called upon by God to be faithful Bible students, it
is not enough to know that the image is to be set up and to be able to
identify it when it is. We must also understand the factors which
bring about such a terrible development. As far as it is revealed, and
as far as it is possible for the human mind aided by the Spirit of God
to understand these weighty matters, we must comprehend the out-
working of the principles which lead up to this situation. Otherwise
we will not be equipped to recognize its rising to supremacy until it is
too late to escape its deceptive power. Each must be swift to detect in
himself any presence of those factors which lead to a person having
the image of the beast developed in himself. If he should permit this
20 LAST DAY EVENTS

to happen, he will be the prisoner of that deception by which the im-

age will hold him and the entire world captive.
The question now is: How shall we arrive at a clear under-
standing of those factors which even now are working in the building
of the image of the beast?
The answer to that question was given in the last chapter. To un-
derstand what brings about the image of the beast, study what
brought about the rise of the beast before it, for therein the answer
will be found. The image is an image in every way. The forces that
set up the beast will be the same forces, except at a later date, which
will set up the its image. What caused the one will cause the other.
Therefore to understand that which is yet to be, we must study care-
fully that which has already been.
What was it then that led to the setting up of the beast in the first
instance? That is the question, to which the answer is clearly and
plainly given in these words: "It was apostasy that led the early
church to seek the aid of the civil government, and this prepared the
way for the development of the papacy—the beast. Said Paul, 'There'
shall 'come a falling away, . . . and that man of sin be revealed.' 2
Thessalonians 2:3. So apostasy in the church will prepare the way
for the image of the beast." Great Controversy, 443, 444.
This statement takes us directly to the heart of the matter by de-
claring the sequence which developed the beast—the papacy. It all
began with apostasy which robbed God's professed children of the
powers of heavenly origin without which they could not operate as
God's representatives. That was followed by the church's quest for,
and acquisition of, the power of the state for enforcing the laws and
authority of the church.
In the same manner the image of the beast will be formed. The
apostasy which will give rise to it is already here and is rapidly be-
coming terminal. Soon now, the fallen churches will unite with the
civil authorities to enforce the will of the church upon the people,
and then and there will be the beast's image.
But why is it that apostasy is the cause of the church's assump-
tion of civil power, and the framing of laws designed to rigorously en-
force religion on the entire world? Why is it that the setting up of the
beast and then of the image is the natural and inevitable conse-
quence of the apostasy?
Apostasy is that falling away from the pure principles of the truth
of God—the at first imperceptible decline in the faith of Jesus—by
which the church departs from the light and walks further and fur-
ther into darkness. This rejection of divine light can take quite a long
time to develop, but when, sooner or later, it becomes total, it pro-
duces a system of unbelievably cruel, restrictive oppression.
RISE OF THE BEAST 21

The falling away which gave rise to the papal beast, was seeded
in the pure and holy apostolic church, by men who had the best inter-
ests of the church at heart, but who did not understand the principles
of absolute religious freedom. These men who had not fully left the
spirit of the oppressor behind when they left Judaism, felt it their
duty to control and direct the workers in the cause of truth. At this
time, the power of the state was not available to them to enforce their
wills, but they brought to bear upon the situation all the pressure
they could.
This was the sprouted seed, which, once the fullness of the apos-
tasy rested heavily on the whole earth, had grown to be the papal
beast, and terrible were the consequences. See Entering Into God's
Sabbath Rest, Chapters 10 & 11, by F. T. Wright, available from
Destiny Press.
Many chapters could be written at this point detailing how the
majority in the Christian Church drifted from one depth of unfaithful-
ness to a deeper one still, but, in this book there is insufficient space
for such a detailed treatment. It is recommended that Great Contro-
versy, Chapter 2, entitled "Persecution in the First Centuries", be
diligently studied.
It will be found there that at first Satan tried to destroy the church
by killing off its membership, but this failed to produce the desired
result. Instead, it kept the church free from those who were not genu-
ine, and multiplied its membership.
"In vain were Satan's efforts to destroy the church of Christ by
violence. The great controversy in which the disciples of Jesus
yielded up their lives did not cease when these faithful standard-bear-
ers fell at their post. By defeat they conquered. God's workmen were
slain, but His work went steadily forward. The gospel continued to
spread and the number of its adherents to increase. It penetrated into
regions that were inaccessible even to the eagles of Rome. Said a
Christian, expostulating with the heathen rulers who were urging for-
ward the persecution: You may 'kill us, torture us, condemn us. . . .
Your injustice is the proof that we are innocent . . . . Nor does your
cruelty . . . avail you.' It was but a stronger invitation to bring others to
their persuasion. The oftener we are mown down by you, the more in
number we grow; the blood of Christians is seed.'—Tertullian, Apol-
ogy, paragraph 50.
"Thousands were imprisoned and slain, but others sprang up to
fill their places. And those who were martyred for their faith were se-
cured to Christ and accounted of Him as conquerors. They had
fought the good fight, and they were to receive the crown of glory
when Christ should come. The sufferings which they endured
brought Christians nearer to one another and to their Redeemer.
22 LAST DAY EVENTS

Their living example and dying testimony were a constant witness

for the truth; and where least expected, the subjects of Satan were
leaving his service and enlisting under the banner of Christ." Great
Controversy, 41, 42.
When Satan saw the indestructible nature of the church kept
pure by the refining process of persecution, he knew he had to adopt
different procedures, which he did.
"Satan therefore laid his plans to war more successfully against
the government of God by planting his banner in the Christian
church. If the followers of Christ could be deceived and led to dis-
please God, then their strength, fortitude, and firmness would fail,
and they would fall an easy prey.
"The great adversary now endeavored to gain by artifice what he
had failed to secure by force. Persecution ceased, and in its stead
were substituted the dangerous allurements of temporal prosperity
and worldly honor. Idolaters were led to receive a part of the Chris-
tian faith, while they rejected other essential truths. They professed
to accept Jesus as the Son of God and to believe in His death and
resurrection, but they had no conviction of sin and felt no need of re-
pentance or of a change of heart. With some concessions on their
part they proposed that Christians should make concessions, that all
might unite on the platform of belief in Christ.
"Now the church was in fearful peril. Prison, torture, fire, and
sword were blessings in comparison with this. Some of the Chris-
tians stood firm, declaring that they could make no compromise.
Others were in favor of yielding or modifying some features of their
faith and uniting with those who had accepted a part of Christianity,
urging that this might be the means of their full conversion. That was
a time of deep anguish to the faithful followers of Christ. Under a
cloak of pretended Christianity, Satan was insinuating himself into
the church, to corrupt their faith and turn their minds from the word
of truth.
"Most of the Christians at last consented to lower their standard,
and a union was formed between Christianity and paganism. Al-
though the worshipers of idols professed to be converted, and united
with the church, they still clung to their idolatry, only changing the
objects of their worship to images of Jesus, and even of Mary and
the saints. The foul leaven of idolatry, thus brought into the church,
continued its baleful work. Unsound doctrines, superstitious rites,
and idolatrous ceremonies were incorporated into her faith and wor-
ship. As the followers of Christ united with idolaters, the Christian
religion became corrupted, and the church lost her purity and power.
There were some, however, who were not misled by these delusions.
RISE OF THE BEAST 23

They still maintained their fidelity to the Author of truth and wor-
shiped God alone." Great Controversy, 42,43.
Note in particular that "As the followers of Christ united with
idolaters, the Christian religion became corrupted, and the church
lost her purity and power." Great Controversy, 43.
A corrupted church is an apostate church which is marked by im-
purity and weakness. Such a body is ineffective; having no influence
with sinners to win them to Christ. Possessing no power to attract
members, the number of its adherents ever diminishes, as it sinks
from weakness to greater weakness.

While, as Christ's bride, the

church in the years succeeding the
resurrection and ascension of
Christ, maintained her purity and
power, Satan sought to destroy
her from the face of the earth by
launching against her a fierce
storm of bitter persecution. To his
dismay, he discovered that this
tactic only worked against him,
for the martyrs' blood was seed
which served to multiply Chris-
tians.
So, he directed the world to
show a friendly face to the Chris-
tians which led many of the Lord's
children to compromise as can be
seen in the painted lips of this
bride, the symbol of a corrupted
church. This plan worked all too well producing deep apostasy as a result,
and led to the establishment of the beast who reigned supreme in the Mid-
dle Ages.

Powerless to accomplish any thing of God's blessed purposes at

all, such a church has lost the right to exist. Christian in name only, it
is a curse to God and man.
But, another factor is introduced. When the church has the truth
of God, then it also has the Spirit of God, the spirit of loving, humble
service to others even to death if need be. But when the truth of God
is lost, then that spirit of selfless service also disappears and is re-
placed by the desire to be served rather than to serve; to be lord, and
not to be a servant. While the church had the truth of God and the
power and Spirit of God, then it naturally attracted many people to
her and to them she rendered loving service. But once she had lost
that truth and that power, then she had nothing at all with which to
24 LAST DAY EVENTS

attract the people, and the church found herself drifting more and
more into insignificance.
The priests, filled with the spirit of self-seeking, saw in all this the
loss of their position, honor, and prestige to say nothing of their live-
lihood. So, the pressure was really on them to rescue themselves
from the problem which confronted them.
What could they do? They no longer had the truth, God's power,
or His Holy Spirit with which to successfully build God's kingdom on
the earth, having apostatized from all that. Nor had they any disposi-
tion to recognize or acknowledge the true cause of their appalling
weakness, so there was no possibility of their being able to solve
their problem in the right way.
Therefore, they had to seek another power to attract the people
other than the power of God. But what other power was there?
There was only one other, and that was the power of force. If the
people would not of themselves come to the churches and support
them, then they must be compelled to do so.
But the power of force rested not in the hands of the priesthood.
The state was the custodian of that. Therefore it followed that by
some means or the other, the church had to win the support of the
state until the decrees of the church ordering all men to worship as
the church dictated, were put into effect by the civil authorities.
And this is exactly what they did. Having lost the power of God,
and being possessed of the spirit of self-seeking, they could not do
otherwise than that. And they were successful in gaining the power
and the support of the sword in the enforcement of their decrees and
the sustaining of their institutions. And thus it was that the beast was
set up.
A. T. Jones sets out the principles involved in this clear way:
"The church was fully conscious of her loss of the power of God
before she sought the power of the State. Had she not been, she
never would have made any overtures to the imperial authority, nor
have received with favor any advances from it. There is a power that
belongs with the gospel of Christ, and is inseparable from the truth
of the gospel; that is, the power of God. In fact, the gospel is but the
manifestation of that power; for the gospel 'is the power of God unto
salvation to every one that believeth.' As long, therefore, as any or-
der or organization of people professing the gospel of Christ main-
tains in sincerity the principle of that gospel, so long the power of
God will be with them, and they will have no need of any other
power to make their influence felt for good wherever known. But just
as soon as any person or association professing the gospel loses the
spirit of it, so soon the power is gone also. Then, and only then,
RISE OF THE BEAST 25

does such an organization seek for another kind of power to supply

the place of that which is lost.
"Thus was it with the church at this time. She had fallen, deplor-
ably fallen, from the purity and the truth, and therefore from the
power of the gospel. And having lost the power of God and of godli-
ness, she greedily grasped for the power of the State and of ungodli-
ness. And to secure laws by which she might enforce her discipline
and dogmas upon those whom she had lost the power either to con-
vince or to persuade, was the definite purpose which the bishopric
had in view when it struck that bargain with Constantine, and lent
him the influence of the church in his imperial aspirations." Great
Empires of Prophecy, 472.
It had taken several centuries to come to the place where they
had sunk so low, but, as surely as the church leaders had rejected the
divine solution of restoration to God's adequate sufficiency, they
were faced with no other possible outcome than this. Step by step
they had been led by their ever increasing separation from God,
deeper and deeper into this situation of frustrating, humiliating,
spiritual feebleness.
Thus the conditions were established and the way fully prepared
for the next step to be taken by the church—the securing of the Em-
peror's enforcement of the church's will upon the people. They
could see no other option to satisfy the grasping need of what had
now become a purely selfish and self-exalting church, than the seek-
ing of the one other power outside of the power of God—the power
of force. And inasmuch as that power is firmly held in the possession
of the secular authorities who have been put in the world to rule
those that cannot rule themselves, it follows that the Church must
gain the control of the State in order to achieve her aims and appear
to all as a creditable and effective institution. And when that is ac-
complished, then the beast is formed.
The time had come, as noted above, when the churches so lacked
the power of God that they could no longer attract the people at all,
and on Sunday and special feast days, the priests found that the peo-
ple would rather work than come to church. This practise the priests
could never permit to continue, for not only was it a serious blow to
their pride and prestige, but a decided threat to their livelihood. Hav-
ing in the meantime gained great favor and influence with the Em-
peror, they went to him and secured the law which forbad all work on
the first day of the week, in the mistaken belief that when the people
could not labor on Sunday, they would assuredly fill the churches.
A. T. Jones, in Great Empires of Prophecy, 487, quotes Nean-
der as saying, "By a law of the year 386, those older changes ef-
fected by the Emperor Constantine were more rigorously enforced;
26 LAST DAY EVENTS

and, in general, civil transactions of every kind on Sunday were

strictly forbidden. Whosoever transgressed was to be considered, in
fact, guilty of sacrilege."
Commenting on this, A. T. Jones writes: "As the direct result of
this law, there soon appeared an evil which, under the circumstances
and in the logic of the case, called for further legislation in the same
direction. The law forbade all work. But as the people had not such
religion as would cause them to devote the day to pious and moral ex-
ercises, the effect of the law was only to enforce idleness. Enforced
idleness only multiplied opportunity for dissipation. The natural con-
sequence was that the circuses and the theaters throughout the em-
pire were crowded every Sunday." Great Empires of Prophecy,
487,488.
To their chagrin and acute disappointment, the priests found that
their attempt to have the people come to church by forcing them to
refrain from work on Sunday, did not produce the desired result. In-
stead, the owners of the circuses and theaters were the ones who
prospered.
The question which then arose was: "What is to be done now?"
The answer was simple. Having entered upon this wholly wrong
course, there was nothing left for them but to go further along that
path and accordingly they worked till they had a law which closed
the theaters on Sunday. At the Council of Carthage in June, A.D.
401, the following Canon was enacted:
"Canon 5. On Sundays and feast days, no plays may be per-
formed.
"That this canon might be made effective, the bishops in the
same council passed a resolution, and sent up a petition to the em-
poror Honorius, praying 'that the public shows might be transferred
from the Christian Sunday and from feast-days, to some other days
of the week.'—Neander. . . . The church members had not enough
religion or love of right to do what they professed to believe was
right; therefore the State was asked to take away from them all op-
portunity to do wrong; then they would be Christians! Satan himself
could be made that kind of Christian in that way—and he would be
the devil still." Great Empires of Prophecy, 489, 490.
In A.D. 425 this became law and the priests were confident that,
now that the competition had been nullified, the churches would be
filled with a people, having been strictly forbidden to either work or
to play on Sunday, would now come to church. But again they were
disappointed, for the people would rather do nothing at all than
come to a church which held nothing for them. Accordingly they
rested at home on Sunday leaving the churches as empty as ever.
Thus, up to this point, the religious leaders had not achieved
RISE OF THE BEAST 27

their objective, yet they would never admit defeat, but pressed for-
ward regardless. The devil and his agents are to be admired for their
determination, tenacity, and persistence. A typical example of this is
found in the behavior of a defiant Queen Jezebel after the crushing
defeat suffered by her and her followers on Mount Carmel.
There, God had demonstrated His mighty power, the people en
masse had declared their positive and emphatic conviction that,
The Lord, He is God,' the priests of Baal had been executed to the
last man, the drought was broken, and the King was mightily shaken.
With all that going against her, the wicked Queen should have been
cowering in fear that her own life was about to end. But no! She was
so unconquered and defiant that she could issue a threat against Eli-
jah's life so charged with menace that he took ignominious flight to a
place of safety far away.
Such is the way of Satan and his followers—they never give up,
whereas God's people, by contrast, are usually too ready to surren-
der. They need to learn that "Faith is the living power that presses
through every barrier, overrides all obstacles, and plants its banner
in the heart of the enemy's camp." SDA Bible Commentary 2:995.
When, under God's command, we move out to face the enemy
and find ourselves succumbing to his intimidating power till failure
seems certain, then let these words rally your flagging faith, zeal, and
courage:
"But when we give ourselves wholly to God and in our work fol-
low His directions, He makes Himself responsible for its accomplish-
ment. He would not have us conjecture as to the success of our hon-
est endeavors. Not once should we even think of failure. We are to
co-operate with One who knows no failure." Christ's Object Les-
sons, 363.
The dogged determination of Satan and his followers never to ca-
pitulate no matter how much the battle goes against them, will be
more than matched by God's people in the final struggle. Not once
will they permit themselves to even think of failure though they will
be powerfully tempted to do so.
In the meantime, we are to be ever conscious that we face foes
who know no such tactics as retreat. So it was that when their suc-
cessive laws forbidding the populace from working or playing on
Sunday, failed to bring the laity to the house of worship, the priests
did not even think of abandoning their cause. Instead, they pressed
upon the Emperor their plea that worship on Sunday be made com-
pulsory. So the people, whether they liked it or not, were not permit-
ted to work, play, or rest at home on Sunday. They had to go to
church or suffer the full penalty provided in the law, even to a mar-
tyr's death.
[LDE3]
28 LAST DAY EVENTS

Again, A. T. Jones describes the development in these words:

"In the logic of this theory there was one more step to be taken.
To see how logically it came about, let us glance at the steps taken
from the first one up to this point: First, the church had all work on
Sunday forbidden, in order that the people might attend to things di-
vine; work was forbidden, that the people might worship. But the
people would not worship; they went to the circus and to the theater
instead of to church. Then the church had laws enacted closing the
circuses and the theaters, in order that the people might attend
church. But even then the people would not be devoted, nor attend
church; for they had no real religion. The next step to be taken there-
fore, in the logic of the situation, was to compel them to be devoted—
to compel them to attend to things divine.
"This was the next step logically to be taken, and it was taken.
The theocratical bishops were equal to the occasion. They were
ready with a theory that exactly met the demands of the case; and
one of the greatest of the Catholic Church Fathers and Catholic
saints was the father of this Catholic saintly theory. He wrote:—
" 'It is, indeed, better that men should be brought to serve God
by instruction than by fear of punishment or by pain. But because
the former means are better, the latter must not therefore be ne-
glected. . . . Many must often be brought back to their Lord, like
wicked servants, by the rod of temporal suffering, before they attain
the highest grade of religious development.' Augustine." Great
Empires of Prophecy, 490, 491.
So it was that, along this course of development, which step by
step was the only possible outcome of the long-standing and ever
deepening apostasy, the beast rose to absolute power. Of course, the
majority of people who before did not have enough religion to take
them to church now went, for they did not have enough religion in
them either to discern the nature of this authoritarianism, or to offer
any resistance to it.
But now the true people of God began to find themselves in diffi-
culty. They could obey a civil law which prohibited their working on
the first day of the week, and the law which forbad them from going
to the circuses and the theaters did not touch them either, for they
found no pleasure in the entertainment offered there. But, when a re-
quirement was imposed upon them demanding that they worship
God on the false sabbath, they found that they had to disobey that
law.
This disobedience of an unjust and unrighteous law which the
Sovereign of the universe had never given any man the right or the
authority to make, very quickly attracted severe civil punishments on
the real Christians. It was all done in the interests of a Church which,
RISE OF THE BEAST 29

having lost the power of God, had no right to even exist as a Church.
And when the Church found that such punishments as were inflicted
did not cause the true ones to waver and to obey, then, in the ulti-
mate, they brought in the death decree and, as history attests, they
slew with savage and heartless cruelty the defenceless millions who
would not yield, but would obey God rather than man no matter what
the price might be.
Such was the history of the setting up of the beast.
"It was apostasy that led the early church to seek the aid of the
civil government, and this prepared the way for the development of
the papacy." Great Controversy, 443.
As it was with the rising of the beast—the papacy—so it must be
with the developing of the image of that beast. The one is a matter of
the past, but the other is yet in the future and terrible will be the
repetition.
In the annals of history is recorded the coming of the beast into
existence; in the Prophetic Word is revealed the emergence of his im-
age. The beast has been the subject of this chapter—his image the
subject of the next.

For further study on the information presented in this chapter,

see The Great Empires of Prophecy, Chapter 32, by A. T. Jones,
available from Destiny Press under the title Opposing Principles.
Chapter 3

The Rise
of the Image
So far in this study of the order of last day events, we have noted
that the setting up of the image of the beast is a landmark in the un-
rolling of the scroll. It is accomplished when the churches, having se-
cured the support of the power of the State, have the national Sun-
day law passed and enforced. Such an act, we learned, would bring
about the complete fall of Babylon. It will have brought the powers of
church and state to the point of no return and there will be left only
the calling out of the true children of God before the judgments on
Babylon fall in deadly earnest and destroy her completely.
Such a point of disaster will not have been reached in a moment.
Rather, it will be the outworking of certain forces over quite a period
of time. The object of our study at the moment is to understand this
outworking, so that we can follow it as it develops and know that all
things are at hand in the final and finishing movements of this
world's history.
We are fortunate that already such an outworking has taken
place, for, as we have already seen from the words in Great Contro-
versy, 443, 444, the development of the image of the beast is the ex-
act reproduction of the development of the beast before it. There we
read, "It was apostasy that led the early church to seek the aid of the
civil government, and this prepared the way for the development of
the papacy—the beast. Said Paul, There' shall 'come a falling away,
. . . and that man of sin be revealed.' 2 Thessalonians 2:3. So apos-
tasy in the church will prepare the way for the image to the beast."
The word "so" means, "in just the same way." This means that,
as the apostasy in the early church led to the rise of the papacy, so, in
exactly the same way, apostasy in the modern church will lead to the
rise of the image of the beast. The development of these things is
sufficiently matured at the time of writing this book that it is not diffi-
cult to see the approach of the image of the beast.
So then, having seen in our last chapter, the relationship be-
tween the development of the rise of the apostasy and the conse-
RISE OF THE IMAGE 31

quent rise of the beast in the early centuries, let us now study the step
by step progression of events which will lead to the full development
of the image in these last days.
Between the years 1831-1844, the Lord of heaven and earth
sent to the Protestant churches who were then the churches of God
in the world, the glorious light of the Advent message. Had that light
been received as the Lord planned that it should have been, then
those churches would have become a mighty power in the world.
Soon the gospel would have been carried to every nation, kindred,
tongue, and people, and the kingdom of Christ would have been
established.
But the light which was sent was unwelcome and was fiercely re-
jected. The inevitable consequence was a serious spiritual fall. "The
second angel's message of Revelation 14 was first preached in the
summer of 1844, and it then had a more direct application to the
churches of the United States, where the warning of the judgment
had been most widely proclaimed and most generally rejected, and
where the declension in the churches had been most rapid. But the
message of the second angel did not reach its complete fulfillment in
1844. The churches then experienced a moral fall, in consequence
of their refusal of the light of the advent message; but that fall was
not complete. As they have continued to reject the special truths for
this time they have fallen lower and lower." Great Controversy,
389.
That rejection of light there, was a step which could only end in
the full formation of the image of the beast. There is no other possi-
ble outcome than this. The setting up of the image of the beast and
all the oppression and persecution which will go with it, was from
that moment on, an unavoidable certainty. It is such not by any arbi-
trary decree of God, nor even basically by the will and choice of man,
but simply because effect will follow the cause in this field as reliably
as in any other. Just as surely as the cause is there, then just so cer-
tainly will the effects follow.
All that is required to verify this truth is to make a survey of the
history of the Protestant churches subsequent to their rejection of
the great second advent message which the King of the universe sent
to them to separate them from sin and the world, and to fit them to
stand for the right in the final conflict.
But no matter how comprehensive the survey may be, we will
never understand the true nature of that uprising, unless we recog-
nize what it was in fact that was rejected at that crucial time. Obvi-
ously, it had to be something very serious in order to effect such dras-
tic consequences, which were no less than their eternal loss of God's
32 LAST DAY EVENTS

presence, guidance, and blessing. As church organizations, they fell

never to rise again.
So, what was it that was spurned at that time!
Was it simply some special point of truth, was it an urgent warn-
ing, or was it a point of prophecy?
It can be stated that it was all of those without truly comprehend-
ing the real issue of the hour. That which was rejected by those
churches was the saving gospel of Jesus Christ, "the power of God
to salvation for everyone who believes. ..." Romans 1:16.
That this is so is verified by Revelation 14:6, in which verse it is
revealed that the angel who symbolizes the first angel's movement
has in his possession the gospel of Jesus Christ. Firstly, he has it;

OPPOSITE PAGE: The gospel is something which every Bible student,

professed Christian, church member, and so forth, is confident he truly
understands and possesses. He may hold and teach views at serious vari-
ance from those held by other religious bodies, yet will believe that they
are all united in the gospel of Jesus Christ.
But, the real facts are that very few know what the gospel actually is,
and what they are rejecting when they turn their backs on the gospel of Je-
sus Christ.
The gospel of Jesus Christ according to the Holy Spirit speaking
through the mighty, inspired apostle Paul, is the power of God sent into
the world to save mankind from sinfulness and sinning. Even when this
much is accepted as a definition of the all-powerful gospel, it is not
enough. The application of this power must be accurately seen. God did
not send His mighty power into the sinful world to restrain men from sin-
ning, that is, He does not solve the sin problem by giving men the power to
suppress their evil natures, and force them to do the right.
Instead, by His creative power, the gospel, He recreates in the repen-
tant one a new nature whose only disposition is to do right. Such an in-
credible achievement can only be attained by the gospel, not as a theory,
nor as a teaching, nor as power to suppress a man from doing what, by na-
ture, he desires to do, but as the creative might by which a sinner is cre-
ated into a saint.
Only those who have been blessed with this ministry, and have actu-
ally been recreated into the spiritual image of Christ can be said to have
and to teach the gospel of Jesus Christ.
Throughout the created world as pictured in this impressive scene
from nature in which elements both massive and beautiful are assembled,
one has the opportunity to gain some concept of the power of God and its
capacity to deliver a person from sinfulness and sinning. It sets those in
bondage free, and lights up the darkness. It emancipates those in spiri-
tual slavery, and, once it truly comes to you, it never leaves you as it found
you.
This glorious deliverance is what the churches despised and rejected
when the gospel was offered to them in the years leading up to 1844.
Once they did, they set their feet on a course which could only bring them
to the erection of the image of the beast, an organization as bereft of the
gospel as it is possible to be.
34 LAST DAY EVENTS

secondly, he preaches it to every nation, tribe, tongue, and people.

Therefore, for the churches in 1844 to become a part of the move-
ment symbolized by the mighty angel flying with power and speed in
the midst of heaven, they had to come into possession of what the
angel had—the everlasting gospel—and to do what he was said to
do—preach it effectively throughout the globe, as it is written:
"Then I saw another angel flying in the midst of heaven, having
the everlasting gospel to preach to those who dwell on the earth—to
every nation, tribe, tongue, and people—" Revelation 14:6.
This saving gospel is further revealed as the solution to the terri-
fying hour of judgment which commenced for the dead at the close
of the 2,300 year time period, and will open for the living at that fu-
ture moment when probation shall finally close. It has the power
through the ministry of Jesus Christ, to so perfect a man that he can
successfully measure up to the standard of perfection required by
God's holy law. No sinning person will gain admittance to heaven,
and no one can attain to the level of character excellence in which
sinlessness is the way of life, except by the gospel, the power of God
to save—not in—but from sin.
Through the angel messenger, God designed that His church
should be the custodians of His purity and His power, for in no other
way can fitness for heaven be attained, and in no other way could the
churches be able to bring salvation to the lost and perishing. This is
her high and holy destiny.
"To His church, Christ has given ample facilities, that He may re-
ceive a large revenue of glory from His redeemed, purchased posses-
sion. The church, being endowed with the righteousness of Christ, is
His depository, in which the wealth of His mercy, His love, His
grace, is to appear in full and final display. The declaration in His in-
tercessory prayer, that the Father's love is as great toward us as to-
ward Himself, the only-begotten Son, and that we shall be with Him
where He is, forever one with Christ and the Father, is a marvel to
the heavenly host, and it is their great joy. The gift of His Holy Spirit,
rich, full, and abundant, is to be to His church as an encompassing
wall of fire, which the powers of hell shall not prevail against. In their
untainted purity and spotless perfection, Christ looks upon His peo-
ple as the reward of all His suffering, His humiliation, and His love,
and the supplement of His glory—Christ, the great center from which
radiates all glory. 'Blessed are they which are called unto the mar-
riage supper of the Lamb' " Testimonies to Ministers, 18, 19.
One would expect that to be the recipient of such glorious gifts
from God, would establish in the churches the most earnest desires
to obtain these incredible provisions of divine grace, but, to the
amazement of God's true children, in 1844, the churches despised
RISE OF THE IMAGE 35

the light sent to them in love from heaven, treating it as a deadly

enemy.
Now, if they who needed the saving power of God so much re-
fused to receive it, then they did not have it, for no one can refuse the
gift of God and have it at the same time. That is obvious, but even
though obvious, it needs to be stated, for we must understand that
the churches stood devoid not only of the truth, but also of the power
of God in that truth.
Pitted against the church is the power of sin and the church is in
the world to save men from sin. But in order to accomplish this mis-
sion and to fulfill the very purpose of its existence, the church must
be equipped with power sufficient for the task. The power of sin is a
mighty power—of that there can be no question. And it is the truth
that the only power in existence which can meet and conquer the
power of sin is the power of God.
Now either the church has that power or she does not. It is not
the smooth running of a great and splendid organization, nor the
large number of people that serve the church, nor the amount of
money under her command, nor any other of these things which
gives to a church this power. That which gives to a church such
power is the acceptance of the truth of God as it is brought to the
church by God. This acceptance of the truth must go much deeper
than merely grasping the theory of the truth. In order to provide the
church with the power needed for the execution of her appointed
mission, the power of the living God must be present as a vitalizing,
creating force in that truth, and within the believers who hold to the
light from heaven.
In 1844, the churches rejected the truth of God in the experience
and power of it, and thus were left without the sufficiency needed to
combat the power of sin. This deficiency left them powerless, de-
fenceless, and destitute of all that which is needed to attain to right-
eousness. Worst of all, they became so blind to their true condition
that they believed themselves true to God when in fact they were the
slaves of the arch rebel.
Out of such a condition of things, certain predictable develop-
ments had to arise, and they have. Sinfulness in its various forms of
infidelity, immorality, violence, iniquity, and perversion of God's
truth, have flourished as a direct result of the rejection of light, even
though hidden in part from human sight behind that cloak of pro-
fessed righteousness. This is the only possible outworking of the
situation. Such a cause must be followed by the certain effects of that
cause. History itself attests to the reliability of these principles of op-
eration as we read: "The iniquity and spiritual darkness that pre-
36 LAST DAY EVENTS

vailed under the supremacy of Rome were the inevitable result of her
suppression of the Scriptures." Great Controversy, 586.
As it was in the past so it will be in the present and in the future,
for the same rejection of the truth of God will bring the same sad
results.
The message of the everlasting gospel as brought in the light of
the Advent truth of 1844, called upon men to obey all the command-
ments of God including the seventh-day Sabbath. Truly understood,
received, and obeyed, the Sabbath of God is the evidence of the
presence of the power of God, and therefore its place in the teaching
of the last message of mercy to the world is vital and necessary. It has
to be there or the message is incomplete and lacking in vital power
and strength. For further information on this vital point, study Liv-
ing Righteousness and the Sabbath of God, by F. T. Wright.
But the Sabbath is particularly objectionable to those who reject
the message, and are led to cast aside the whole law in order to avoid
the claims of the Sabbath. But the work of Sabbath reform extends
nevertheless, and the more it does, the more it is resisted by the
churches. In this way their rejection of the truth of God becomes the
more confirmed, and inevitably the power of sin makes the more de-
termined and effective inroads into the world. Thus the very
churches that are in the world as the channels by which the salvation
of God is to come to the world, become the very means by which sin
is strengthened and entrenched.
Thus we read: "As the work of Sabbath reform extends, this re-
jection of the divine law to avoid the claims of the fourth command-
ment will become well-nigh universal. The teachings of religious
leaders have opened the door to infidelity, to spiritualism, and to
contempt for God's holy law; and upon these leaders rests a fearful
responsibility for the iniquity that exists in the Christian world."
Great Controversy, 587.
This is utterly true.
None but those who knew nothing of history can honestly deny
it. Up till 1844, the churches were strong teachers of the obligations
of the law of God and the period is recognized as one of the most cir-
cumspect and moral of history. True, there was the worldly class who
lived wickedly, but the hard core of society was religious and law
abiding. It was a period when there were men and women of decided
strength of character and moral worth. The divorce and crime rates
were low and the family was a solid and well bound unit on the whole.
But then came the added light of the Advent Message in 1844,
and as has been noted already, the churches led out in a rejection of
that message. Ever since that time there has been around the world
an ever increasing disregard for the requirement of obedience to
RISE OF THE IMAGE 37

God's law. The family unit is no longer stable. Juvenile as well as

adult crime is of such fearful proportion as to be a major concern to
the powers that be. Divorce is common, violence is rampant, and ter-
rorism is a fearful threat to all. And all this is rapidly on the increase.
These are facts, and no one can honestly deny them. The world
is not getting to be a better place. It is becoming worse and worse at
a fearful rate just as the Scriptures warned us it would.
"But know this, that in the last days perilous times will come:
"For men will be lovers of themselves, lovers of money, boasters,
proud, blasphemers, disobedient to parents, unthankful, unholy,
"unloving, unforgiving, slanderers, without self-control, brutal,
despisers of good,
"traitors, headstrong, haughty, lovers of pleasure rather than lov-
ers of God,
"having a form of godliness but denying its power. And from
such people turn away!" 2 Timothy 3:1-5.
We are in the last days, and this situation exists right now. The
common man can see it. The officials can see it. The church can see
it. And the leaders of the nations can see it. Everyone can see it. And
it is because they can, and because they are disturbed by it, that it be-
comes the issue even on political platforms.
The situation is very really and terribly here. Men will advance a
number of different reasons for its presence or even be at a loss to
give a reason at all, but let it be known on the authority of the Word
of God that there is but one reason for it, and that is the rejection of
the truth sent to the churches from heaven. This is the reason. Hav-
ing rejected the truth of God, they have rejected the power of God
and thus have no defence against the power of sin in the world.
Daily it floods in stronger and stronger, and the only way to save
the situation would be for the churches to "be zealous and repent",
and take up the very message and the very power of it which they re-
fused to receive when it was offered to them in the past.
But will they?
The sure Word of Prophecy indicates that they will not.
Then what will they do instead? They are the ones who are sup-
posed to have the answer to the problems of sin in the world, but the
ever increasing crime, violence, and immorality provides an ever
strengthening indictment against the churches for their failure. Such
a situation then imposes on them an ever increasing pressure to
come up with an answer that will either solve the problem or at least
remove the blame from themselves.
This brings us to the next step in the inexorable march to the set-
ting up of the image of the beast.
38 LAST DAY EVENTS

They have rejected the truth of God—the Sabbath of God—the

power of God.
The barrier to sin removed, it has swept in like a flood.
Now what?
Already quoted above is this statement: "The teachings of relig-
ious leaders have opened the door to infidelity, to spiritualism, and to
contempt for God's holy law; and upon these leaders rests a fearful
responsibility for the iniquity that exists in the Christian world."
Great Controversy, 587.
Though perfectly correct and truthful, this charge is a heavy one
to make, and difficult to maintain, for it is leveled against men who
make the highest professions of loyalty to God, whose appearance
and demeanor match their lofty profession, and who denounce sin in
thunderous tones. Yet they truly are wolves in sheep's clothing, a
fact which becomes clearly visible when their teachings are carefully
examined and analyzed.
For instance, they assure their listeners that the law is no longer
binding on Christians, for, they say, it was nailed to the cross after
having been kept by Christ in our stead. They further assert the law
cannot be kept anyway. What an invitation to sinful man this is to
cast off all restraint and sin all he likes in the belief that where sin
abounds grace is even more abundant! Week after week, those who
are bewitched by such teachings, return from their attendance at
their churches with no conviction of sin, no restraint from God's
holy word, and no fear of coming judgment. It is no wonder that
God, through the Spirit of Prophecy has declared:
"The teachings of religious leaders have opened the door to infi-
delity, to spiritualism, and to contempt for God's holy law; and upon
these leaders rests a fearful responsibility for the iniquity that exists
in the Christian world." Great Controversy, 587.
Now there immediately follows these words: "Yet this very class
put forth the claim that the fast-spreading corruption is largely attrib-
utable to the desecration of the so-called 'Christian Sabbath,' and
that the enforcement of Sunday observance would greatly improve
the morals of society." Great Controversy, 587.
It is a principle of life that the committing of one wrong act opens
the door for the next. Thus, when David committed adultery with
Bathsheba the wife of Uriah the Hittite, he had the option of making
a clean cut confession of it, or of committing murder to cover up the
first sin. So the churches, having rejected the Sabbath of God and
the power of God, add further sin to the first sin by charging the
trouble to Sunday desecration when it is not that at all. This is an act
in support of Sunday and therefore is a further act in the rejection of
the Sabbath—the truth and the power of God.
RISE OF THE IMAGE 39

This then can only drive them still further away from God, still
more deeply into the power of sin, and thus more widely open the
door to the inroads of immorality, sin, and spiritualism. Thus the
churches are found to be in a descending spiral of ever frightening
proportions until a crisis is reached of such dimensions as will de-
mand drastic and immediate action to solve the problem. It will be a
situation in which God alone can effectively fill the position of prob-
lem-solver, but in which men will seek to take over the responsibility,
as they have done so consistently from the beginning of the great
controversy.
At the time of the writing of this book, there is no problem in see-
ing that a crisis of worldwide proportions is developing both for the
church and the world.
The world is facing an intensifying, life threatening time of
trouble in every aspect of its existence such as it has never previously
known. Natural disasters in the form of volcanic eruptions, floods,
earthquakes, tornadoes, great conflagrations and such like, of in-
creasing frequency and destructive power, are wiping out whole
communities of people, while famines made more terrible through
the ravages of war, exact a fearful toll of human life.
Deadly diseases such as cancer, aids, and other incurable
scourges defy man's best and most expensive efforts to find a cure
for these disorders.
Crime is out of control as law enforcers wage a losing battle
against the lawless elements of society.
Savage wars ravage the earth exacting a fearful toll of human life
and property.
All this adds up to a cost so fearful that the total extinction of all
life on this planet becomes an ever more obvious prospect. Men will
be desperate for a solution, and will turn to any and every proposi-
tion which seems to offer hope, excepting the way of the Lord.
Politicians and administrators are the ones to whom the people
look to effectively solve the woes of a lost world, but they are proving
very incompetent at this task, and there is manifest today an increas-
ing loss of confidence in their capacity to fill this role.
To whom then can frantic mankind turn in his distress when he
should be turning to God alone?
There is but one other institution—the churches. But, the prob-
lem is that they too suffer a severe lack of confidence in them by the
people. Millions who once placed their implicit trust in the religious
leaders, now turn from them charged with skepticism. Add to these
those who were always irreligious, and the churches are left with but
few of the supporters they need to erect the image of the beast.
This loss of implicit faith in the church is nowhere better mani-
40 LAST DAY EVENTS

fested in recent times than in events which took place in the Roman
Catholic church over the issue of birth control.
For a long time the Catholic world awaited the Pope's declaration
on this matter. In view of the staggering problem of a rapidly increas-
ing world population to the point and beyond which it would be im-
possible to support the billions on the planet, it was anticipated that
the Pope would take a practical and common sense view of the mat-
ter and endorse certain means of birth control. But no such stand
was taken by the head of that Church. Instead, he held to the hard
line of the old traditions.
For a brief moment the world caught its breath and then a wave
of rebellion swept through the ranks of the Catholic Church that was
as surprising in its proportions as it was outspoken and definite. Sud-
denly the world became aware of the fact that the Papacy does not
hold over its people the power and the authority which it once had.
This is not to say that the encyclical on birth control brought
about this decay in Papal authority. By no means. Such a decay is the
work of a long period of time. There were many factors that contrib-
uted to it. The above mentioned incident only triggered off the reac-
tion which revealed a situation that already existed but of which the
majority was not aware.
So serious did the situation become that the Pope called a special
council for October, 1969, to discuss the matter and to discover what
steps might be taken to counteract the problem. This is nothing
short of an admission on the part of the Papal hierarchy, of their
consciousness of the loss of power over many of the people. And this
is also admission of their loss of the power of God. This is an essen-
tial development immediately preceding the seeking on the part of
the Church of the power of the state. We quote again the statement
from A. T. Jones which was quoted in the last chapter. "The church
was fully conscious of her loss of the power of God, before she
sought the power of the State. Had she not been, she never would
have made any overtures to the imperial authority, nor have received
with favor any advances from it." Great Empires of Prophecy, 472.
The very fact that once again the church is becoming fully con-
scious of her loss of the power to reach and to hold the people is a
clear indication that soon she will again seek the power of the state.
And in this thing the Protestant churches will actually lead out as we
know from our study of Revelation 13. Conscious of the fact that
they are powerless to reach and hold the people, and of the fact that
they cannot stem the rising tide of evil, the churches will be forced to
seek power where it can be found. But they have rejected the power
of God and have confirmed themselves in that rejection to the point
where they have no mind to confess the sin and return to the Lord.
RISE OF THE IMAGE 41

Therefore they must find some other power, and they will. The only
other power that is available is the power of force, the means
whereby a man is compelled to do that which it is not in him to do.
But such power is vested, not in the church, but in the state. It is
not the way of God to force anyone to do anything. God desires only
willing and cheerful obedience. He looks for a people who will do
right because it is right and good and proper. But the power of the
state is such that it can obtain obedience to its law only by force. It
has no other means. Therefore, when the church has lost the power
to appeal to the heart of man, and needs the power of force to com-
pel men to obey even against their wills, then she will go to the State
and obtain from it the power which it has, the power of force, and,
when she has obtained that, then she will have set up the image of
the beast. But such a situation will not have arrived in a moment. It
will be the culmination of a long process beginning with the rejection
of the power of God, followed by the consequent inroads of immoral-
ity, vice, spiritualism, violence, rebellion, and such like, and ending
with the formation of the image of the beast.
If they were but to see that this is the outworking of their own
mischievous course of action and thus be led to repent of that which
caused the problem, then well and good. But instead, the one wrong
action leads to another and then another until the matter reaches cri-
sis proportions and a desperate church calls in the power of the state
to do that which she is powerless to do.
This is the procedure, long and remorseless, which leads up to
the image of the beast. Already this is well advanced and shortly we
shall see the fruition of it all.
Chapter 4

The Role of
Spiritualism
In the work of restoring the beast in the person of his image, the
important and powerful role of Spiritualism is not to be overlooked,
for it will play a major part in this return to ecclesiastical dominance
and oppression. In the Scriptures, explicit warnings have been given
concerning this factor of which John wrote:
"Then the sixth angel poured out his bowl on the great river
Euphrates, and its water was dried up, so that the way of the kings
from the east might be prepared.
"And I saw three unclean spirits like frogs coming out of the
mouth of the dragon, out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the
mouth of the false prophet.
"For they are spirits of demons, performing signs, which go out
to the kings of the earth and of the whole world, to gather them to
the battle of that great day of God Almighty.
" 'Behold, I am coming as a thief. Blessed is he who watches,
and keeps his garments, lest he walk naked and they see his shame.'
"And they gathered them together to the place called in Hebrew,
Armageddon." Revelation 16:12-16.
Two major pieces of information are provided in this Scripture.
One is that the kings of the earth and of the entire world will be gath-
ered to participate in the battle of the great day of God Almighty,
which confrontation we know to be the awful battle of Armageddon.
The other vital piece of information is that this gathering of the
kings of the earth and of the whole world will be brought about by
the work of miracle-working spirits of demons, or, in other words, by
spiritualism.
It is important that we recognize that the gathering to Armaged-
don of the powers who rule the earth, is in fact the erection of the
image to the beast. They are one and the same event. Understanding
this depends on our knowing what the battle of Armageddon will be,
and therefore what it will not be. It is not, as so many suppose, a ti-
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 43

tanic struggle between eastern and western nations to be fought out

on the plains of Megiddo in Palestine.
Those who draw this conclusion, interpret the Bible according to
the principles of geographic interpretation. In this system, where
you are determines who you are, so that, if a kingdom lies to the east
of Palestine, it is a king of the east. Therefore, this type of reasoning
identifies Iraq, Iran, Pakistan, India, Japan, and so forth as kings
from the east, and sees them fighting against those kings located to
the west of Palestine, in the final battle which is called Armageddon.
But God does not judge you by where you come from geographi-
cally, but by what you are in character. With the Sovereign of the uni-
verse, tuhatyou are, determines luhoyou are.
Those who believe in the geographical interpretation are not
able to consistently apply their method of explaining the messages in
the prophecies. For instance, Babylon plays a very large role in the
final scenes of the last great conflict, but no one in her ranks comes
today from a geographical location called Babylon. So, if we are
looking for a power coming from the great city which was once
physically Babylon, we will find nothing, for the great capital lies in
ruins to this day and will never be rebuilt nor ever be dwelt therein
again.
But, if without the slightest regard for where she came from, we
look for a kingdom or kingdoms with the character, policies, aims,
and methods of ancient Babylon, then we have found the "Mystery,
Babylon the Great, The Mother of Harlots and of the Abominations
of the Earth." Revelation 17:5. No matter where she is found, be it
north, south, east, or west of Palestine, she is the same Babylon, and
is therefore known by that name because of what she is.
While those who are tied to a geographical interpretation of Bi-
ble prophecy inevitably expect Armageddon to be an armed clash be-
tween eastern kings and the rest of the world powers, there is not a
single reference to be found in the Spirit of Prophecy supporting
such a view. Instead, "the battle of that great day of God Almighty",
Revelation 16:14, is declared to be a conflict between God and
those who are obedient to His law on the one side, and Satan and
those who are disobedient on the other. This is declared in the plain-
est of language in statements such as the following:
"Two great opposing powers are revealed in the last great battle.
On one side stands the Creator of heaven and earth. All on His side
bear His signet. They are obedient to His commands. On the other
side stands the prince of darkness, with those who have chosen
apostasy and rebellion." SDA Bible Commentary 7:982, 983.
There are more statements to this same effect in the Spirit of
Prophecy, but as this is not a specific study on Armageddon, but of
[LDE4]
44 LAST DAY EVENTS

ARMAGEDDON
WILL BE
THE LAST GREAT BATTLE
OF THE AGES

BUT IT WILL NOT BE

A TITANIC STRUGGLE
BETWEEN WESTERN
AND EASTERN NATIONS

NOR WILL IT BE THE

FINAL CONFRONTATION
BETWEEN ONE GROUP
DISOBEDIENT TO GOD
AND A SECOND GROUP
DISOBEDIENT TO GOD

BUT IT WILL BE
THE FINALLY DECISIVE
BATTLE BETWEEN
CHRIST AND HIS ARMIES
AND SATAN AND HIS ARMIES
THE DISOBEDIENT
VERSUS THE OBEDIENT

"Two great opposing powers are revealed in the

last great battle. On one side stands the Creator of
heaven and earth. All on His side bear His signet.
They are obedient to His commands. On the other
side stands the prince of darkness, with those who
have chosen apostasy and rebellion." SDA Bible
Commentary 7:983.
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 45

last day events, then we will not take the space to quote them all
here. For more information on the nature of this titanic struggle,
study The Seven Angels, by F. T. Wright, available from Destiny
Press.
The fact is that Revelation 13,16,17,18 and 19, are all descrip-
tions of the forces aligned against each other in the Battle of Arma-
geddon, even though only in Revelation 16 is it called by that name.
Each of these great prophetic chapters are revelations of the disobe-
dient at war against Him of whom it is written that: "in righteousness
He judges and makes war." Revelation 19:11.
In Chapter 13:1-10, this picture of all the earthly powers being
united against the King of kings is clearly portrayed:
"And all the world marveled and followed the beast. . ..
"Then he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God, to blas-
pheme His name, His tabernacle, and those who dwell in heaven.
"It was granted to him to make war with the saints and to over-
come them. And authority was given him over every tribe, tongue,
and nation.
"And all who dwell on the earth will worship him, whose names
have not been written in the Book of Life of the Lamb slain from the
foundation of the world." Verses 3, 6-8.
As these verses are read, two points stand out: Firstly, it is de-
clared that, except for God's true people, the entire world will be
united under the papal head, and that, secondly, these united forces
are led against the Most High and not against each other. There is no
interest taken by the prophecy in any struggles that might break out
between various nations before or during the assembling of these
forces under Satan's banner. The only concern is that they go to war
against the armies of the Lord. No other conflict apart from this is
the subject of these prophecies.
To God's children the message is plain: Do not engage in the fu-
tility of trying to discover some political event or particular interna-
tional conflict in Bible prophecy, for battles between nations are not
the subject of prophecy unless they are an event in Babylon's war
against God and His people.
While it is true that the verses quoted above from Revelation
13:1-10, refer to what is now past history, they will be even more
true in the future, for, whatever is a description of the beast, is like-
wise a revelation of what the image will be and do. In fact, it will be in
the future that the greatest fulfillments of Revelation 13:1-10 will be
manifested.
Let our attention now be drawn to Revelation 16 in which chap-
ter we are informed that the kings of the entire earth will be gathered
to Armageddon, to pit themselves against the Almighty. They will
46 LAST DAY EVENTS

not come as a divided people, but will be joined together in a world-

wide unity of spirit, purpose, and action as is made plain in these
words;
"The ten horns which you saw are ten kings who have received
no kingdom as yet, but they receive authority for one hour as kings
with the beast.
"These are of one mind, and they will give their power and
authority to the beast.
"These will make war with the Lamb, and the Lamb will over-
come them, for He is Lord of lords and King of kings; and those who
are with Him are called, chosen, and faithful." Revelation 17:12-
14.
" These have one mind.' There will be a universal bond of un-
ion, one great harmony, a confederacy is Satan's forces." SDA Bible
Commentary 7:983.
Those who believe Armageddon to be a confrontation between
two great divisions of Satan's forces, certainly would find no support
for their understanding in this statement. It provides for "a universal
bond of union", which is a unity encompassing every individual on
the globe. There will be only "one great harmony", not two or more,
and every member of this global "confederacy of Satan's forces" will
unreservedly follow the devil into battle against the Almighty. That is
the nature of the impending battle of Armageddon. Every man,
woman, and child then living will be on the one side or the other of
this struggle for supremacy on the devil's part.
In Revelation 19, the same picture is again presented. First
Christ, the mighty champion on the righteous side of the conflict, is
portrayed in the following verses:
"Now I saw heaven opened, and behold, a white horse. And He
who sat on him was called Faithful and True, and in righteousness
He judges and makes war.
"His eyes were like a flame of fire, and on His head were many
crowns. He had a name written that no one knew except Himself.
"He was clothed with a robe dipped in blood, and His name is
called the Word of God.
"And the armies in heaven, clothed in fine linen, white and
clean, followed Him on white horses.
"Now out of His mouth goes a sharp sword, that with it He
should strike the nations. And He Himself will rule them with a rod
of iron. He Himself treads the winepress of the fierceness and wrath
of Almighty God.
"And He has on His robe and on His thigh a name written: KING
OF KINGS AND LORD OF LORDS." Revelation 19:11-16.
The next few verses reveal the outcome of the showdown—utter
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 47

defeat for the forces of darkness. Their annihilation will be so total

that not one survivor will be found throughout the entire world. Here
is the prophetic record of what is coming:
"Then I saw an angel standing in the sun; and he cried with a
loud voice, saying to all the birds that fly in the midst of heaven,
'Come and gather together for the supper of the great God,
" 'that you may eat the flesh of kings, the flesh of captains, the
flesh of mighty men, the flesh of horses and of those who sit on
them, and the flesh of all people, free and slave, both small and
great.' " Revelation 19:17,18.
Once more it is reiterated that it is against Christ and His armies
that Armageddon will be fought and lost.
"And I saw the beast, the kings of the earth, and their armies,
gathered together to make war against Him who sat on the horse and
against His army." Revelation 19:19.
It will be an incredible achievement for Satan to unite, apart from
God's faithful remnant, every living person under his leadership, to
fight for his personal cause. He has worked to realize this ambition
ever since Adam and Eve were banished from Eden, but to date, he
has never fully gained his objective.
Others too have tried to rule the whole world—men in the per-
sons of mighty generals in command of seemingly invincible armies;
astute politicians who were skilled in moving the masses according
to their desires; religious leaders who knew how to instill deadly fear
into the souls of men or to sway them with flattery or the offer of
high positions; and unscrupulous business men with access to virtu-
ally unlimited money-power; have dedicated their lives to bringing
the world under their sole control, but none have achieved this elu-
sive dream.
When one considers the difficulties to be overcome, one begins
to realize what it would require even for Satan to bring everyone
completely under his personal leadership. Think of the problems to
be overcome. There is personal ambition driving powerful men who
are interested, not in building Satan's'kingdom or anyone else's, but
only their own. Weigh the factors of bitter personal hostilities, inter-
national mistrust, universal suspicion, the absence of unselfish re-
gard for the rights of others. Then try to assess the effects on human
relationships of destructive pride, seething hatred, lust for revenge,
unholy desire, love of praise, and so forth, and we will have some
idea of what it will take to unite "the kings of the earth and the whole
world", into "one great harmony".
Yet it will be accomplished. Spiritualism has the capacity to do
this. The ten kings will come to the place where there will be "a uni-
versal bond of union", one vast "confederacy of Satan's forces".
48 LAST DAY EVENTS

But how will it be achieved? How will the seemingly impossible

be established?
The answer is iterated and reiterated in the Scriptures. It will be
accomplished through the employment of spiritualism's power to de-
ceive. Satan must resort to persuasion by deception in order to gain
his objectives, for he does not have the power, as some might sup-
pose, to take over the unlimited command of human lives except in
the cases of demon possession.
Satan is not the sin-master, for he himself is the slave to sin. He is
not in control of himself even, for like all other sinners, ". . . he is
moved by a power from beneath". Testimonies to Ministers, 407.
But, while he cannot control men and women as he wishes he
could, he understands human nature and the forces in control of it,
and is practised in the art of manipulating mankind by making things
appear what they are not. Note the repeated assertions in the follow-
ing Scriptures that it will be by deception that the devil will persuade
human beings to follow him without reservation.
"Then the beast was captured, and with him the false prophet
who worked signs in his presence, by which he deceived those who
received the mark of the beast and those who worshiped his image.
These two were cast alive into the lake of fire burning with brim-
stone." Revelation 19:20.
"For false christs and false prophets will rise and show great
signs and wonders to deceive, if possible, even the elect." Matthew
24:24.
It is worth noting that, whenever a satanic force employs "great
signs and wonders", they are always lying signs and wonders. They
are never truthful and honest workings of God's law.
"Fearful sights of a supernatural character will soon be revealed
in the heavens, in token of the power of miracle-working demons.
The spirits of devils will go forth to the kings of the earth and to the
whole world, to fasten them in deception, and urge them on to unite
with Satan in his last struggle against the government of heaven. By
these agencies, rulers and subjects will be alike deceived. Persons
will arise pretending to be Christ Himself, and claiming the title and
worship which belong to the world's Redeemer. They will perform
wonderful miracles of healing and will profess to have revelations
from heaven contradicting the testimony of the Scriptures." Great
Controversy, 624.
So it will be that the image of the beast shall be brought into be-
ing by the exercise of the deceptive power of the kingdom of dark-
ness. Note how specifically this is stated in Revelation 13:11-14:
"Then I saw another beast coming up out of the earth, and he
had two horns like a lamb and spoke like a dragon.
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 49

"And he exercises all the authority of the first beast in his pres-
ence, and causes the earth and those who dwell in it to worship the
first beast, whose deadly wound was healed.
"He performs great signs, so that he even makes fire come down
from heaven on the earth in the sight of men.
"And he deceives those who dwell on the earth by those signs
which he was granted to do in the sight of the beast, telling those
who dwell on the earth to make an image to the beast who was
wounded by the sword and lived."
Now that we begin to realize that the devil has so great deceptive
power at his command that he will induce the entire world, apart
from God's true people, to follow him without reservation, we have
some appreciation of that with which we shall have to contend. We
know now that we shall not be confronted only by mere human be-
ings, powerful as some of them are, but by the devils themselves—su-
pernatural beings possessed with supernatural power.
This enables us to more clearly understand what Paul meant
when he said:
"For we do not wrestle against flesh and blood, but against prin-
cipalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness of this
age, against spiritual hosts of wickedness in the heavenly places."
Ephesians6:12.
The Scriptures do not provide a list of the different deceptive mir-
acles to be performed, but they do mention one in particular—the
bringing of fire down from heaven:
"He performs great signs, so that he even makes fire come down
from heaven on the earth in the sight of men." Revelation 13:13.
It has been proposed by some that the fires here foretold are the
blinding flashes of nuclear explosions.
But this cannot be, for the detonating of nuclear devices does not
delude people. It terrifies them. Furthermore, their destructive
power is so great that if fires were to break forth from them on a
worldwide basis, there would be no survivors to support the devil's
cause. Therefore, it would be completely against Satan's interests to
flood the earth with atomic fire. So, dispensing with all preconceived
ideas, we search the Scriptures for the explanation of these words.
Prominent among the wicked will be false christs and false proph-
ets who, by performing impressive miracles including the bringing
down of fire from heaven, will thereby seek to establish their false
identity. Their achievement of a successful impersonation requires
that they garb themselves with what appears to be the garments of
Christ. Therefore, the bringing of fire down from heaven must be in
the form of something that men have come to associate with the true
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 51

Christ and His prophets. In other words, it must be a counterfeit of

the true fire.
When these spirits of devils appear, it will be at the time when
the true Christ and His messengers will be endowed with the great-
est power the church has ever manifested in all its long history. That
coming era of glory is foretold in Joel:
"And it shall come to pass afterwards that I will pour out My
Spirit on all flesh; your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, your
old men shall dream dreams, your young men shall see visions.
"And also on My menservants and on My maidservants I will
pour out My Spirit in those days.
"And I will show wonders in the heavens and in the earth: Blood
and fire and pillars of smoke.
"The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood,
before the coming of the great and awesome day of the Lord.
"And it shall come to pass that whoever calls on the name of the
Lord shall be saved. For in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem there shall
be deliverance, as the Lord has said, among the remnant whom the
Lord calls." Joel 2:28-32.
This promise has received a most wonderful fulfillment when the
Holy Spirit descended in mighty power upon the waiting disciples at
Pentecost.
"When the day of Pentecost had fully come, they were all with
one accord in one place.
"And suddenly there came a sound from heaven, as of a rushing
mighty wind, and it filled the whole house where they were sitting.
"Then there appeared to them divided tongues, as of fire, and
one sat upon each of them.
"And they were all filled with the Holy Spirit and began to speak
with other tongues, as the Spirit gave them utterance." Acts 2:1-4.
There cannot be the slightest doubt that this outpouring of the
Holy Spirit was the first mighty fulfillment of the prophecy of Joel,
for the Holy Spirit, through the inspired Peter, declared it was. There
is no higher or more trustworthy authority for the truth than the

OPPOSITE PAGE: It will be by the manifestation of fire descending

from heaven, that the final generation of mankind will be deceived into
aligning themselves fully with Satan. Some have interpreted this fire to be
from the blasts of nuclear explosions, but this cannot be, for these have
no capacity to deceive but only to terrify. Therefore, a different fire is here
referred to, which will be spiritualism counterfeiting the descent of the
tongues of fire on the day of Pentecost. That will certainly deceive. The
multitudes will be totally convinced that the true God has visited them,
and that they are His favored ones, when in fact they will have sold out to
the great imposter.
52 LAST DAY EVENTS

Holy Spirit, for He as God is equal with God. Here is His verification
that the prophecy of Joel was fulfilled by the gift of the early rain:
"But Peter, standing up with the eleven, raised his voice and said
to them, 'Men of Judea and all who dwell in Jerusalem, let this be
known to you, and heed my words.
" 'For these are not drunk, as you suppose, since it is only the
third hour of the day.
" 'But this is what was spoken by the prophet Joel.' " Acts 2:14-
16.
It was in that day when the words of Joel were first fulfilled that
fire came down from heaven in the sight of men as a testimony that
the Holy Spirit had come in power on the people of God. That was a
demonstration of the way in which this prophecy was to be fulfilled,
a fact of which the devil is well aware. Inasmuch then as he is deter-
mined to appear as the all-powerful Christ, it follows that through
the agency of Spiritualism, or the spirits of devils working miracles,
he will make it appear that the outpouring of the Holy Spirit has
come upon his followers, that Pentecost is being repeated among
those who worship the beast and his image.
Therefore, as in the first fulfillment of the prophecy of Joel fire
came down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men as a testi-
mony of the arrival of the true Holy Spirit, we know we can expect
the same to happen in the second and final fulfillment of the same
prophecy. This expectation is not limited to the true people of God
but is widespread throughout all the fallen churches. Before the time
comes for the predicted event to occur, Satan must counterfeit it.
Thus the fire which the spirits of devils will bring down from heaven
will be the counterfeit outpouring of the Holy Spirit.
The coming down of the fire from heaven which marked the de-
scent of the Holy Spirit on the day of Pentecost, was immediately fol-
lowed by miracles of healing. Likewise we can expect to see miracles
of healing sweeping through those churches which, having rejected
the light of truth and the message of Sabbath Reform, have opened
the door to the inroads of Spiritualism.
There are two doctrines in particular which give Satan great
power in his determined effort to bring the entire world under his
control.
"Through the two great errors, the immortality of the soul and
Sunday sacredness, Satan will bring the people under his decep-
tions. While the former lays the foundation of spiritualism, the latter
creates a bond of sympathy with Rome. The Protestants of the
United States will be foremost in stretching their hands across the
gulf to grasp the hand of spiritualism; they will reach over the abyss
to clasp hands with the Roman power; and under the influence of
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 53

this three fold union, this country will follow in the steps of Rome in
trampling on the rights of conscience." Great Controversy, 588.
There was a time when this was a prophecy. That time is no
longer. Already much of it is fulfilled. The Protestant churches have
already stretched their hand over the gulf to grasp hands with Spiritu-
alism and with Rome, and the influence is already here which will
lead to the trampling on the rights of conscience.
There is neither time nor space to quote even a small percentage
of the mountain of evidence to the truth of the above paragraph.
True, this news is not generally reported in the newspapers—yet.
That will come when the movement breaks open and really begins to
make its impact felt in the world.
But we will quote from one source as an evidence of the above.
The quote is from the Full Gospel Businessmen's Voice Magazine
of September, 1962. In this issue is a report of a mighty outpouring
of "the spirit" at Seattle, Washington, in July of that same year. The
report reads as follows: "Thousands who yearn for the fullness of
Christ, with complete freedom to worship Him as they desire, as-
sembled in Seattle, Washington, July 2-6, for the tenth annual con-
vention of the Full Gospel Businessmen's Fellowship International.
"Christ met the people's faith in a mighty way as He poured out
His Holy Spirit upon them.
"If you were there, you know what happened. The power of God
could be felt as if He had swooped down in the flesh! If you were not
fortunate enough to attend this great meeting, then you undoubtedly
missed something that could have meant the highlight of your own
Christian experience!
"The Holy Spirit came down upon the people, assembled in one
accord in the grand ballroom of the Olympic Hotel. Scores received
the precious baptism of the Holy Ghost, and spoke in tongues, as the
early Christians did on the Day of Pentecost almost 2,000 years ago!
(Acts 2:4).
"There were representatives of many faiths assembled for a com-
mon purpose: Presbyterians, Episcopalians, Dutch Reformed Lay-
men, Methodists, Lutherans, Nazarenes, Baptists, Seventh Day Ad-
ventists all meeting at the feet of Jesus."
To all appearances this was the great work of God. The lovely
unity, the beautiful love, and the awesome power manifested there,
proclaimed to those present that what appeared to be the divine
presence, was in fact just that. It was a most convincing perform-
ance. Certainly the people involved in the experience as well as
many, many others looking on, thought that it was none other than
the mighty outpouring of the Holy Spirit.
But, this happened to a large company who have rejected the
54 LAST DAY EVENTS

third angel's message and are firm believers in Sunday sacredness

and the immortality of the soul. We know that, on such a people, the
latter rain will never be poured out. Therefore, we must conclude
that that had to be an occasion when the developing image to the
beast brought down false fire "on the earth in the sight of men."
"And he" deceived "those who dwell on the earth by those signs
which he was granted to do in the sight of the beast, telling those
who dwell on the earth to make an image to the beast who was
wounded by the sword and lived." Revelation 13:13,14.
So plainly have we been warned of what Spiritualism as the work-
ing force in the image of the beast can do, that there is no excuse for
being deceived by his miracle-working power. Therefore we are to
know that it is not safe to accept every apparent appearance of the
Holy Spirit as the visitation of the power of God.
What we have witnessed so far is not the full dimension of what is
yet to appear. Not yet have God's people been fully tested on the de-
ceptive power of the image, but that time is rapidly coming. As true
spirituality decreases throughout the earth, the power of Spiritual-
ism grows:
"The line of distinction between professed Christians and the un-
godly is now hardly distinguishable. Church members love what the
world loves and are ready to join with them, and Satan determines to
unite them in one body and thus strengthen his cause by sweeping all
into the ranks of spiritualism. Papists, who boast of miracles as a cer-
tain sign of the true church, will be readily deceived by this wonder-
working power; and Protestants, having cast away the shield of
truth, will also be deluded. Papists, Protestants, and worldlings will
alike accept the form of godliness without the power, and they will
see in this union a grand movement for the conversion of the world
and the ushering in of the long-expected millennium." Great Con-
troversy, 588, 589.
But the true people of God will not be deceived. They will know
that the work of these forces will be upholding error, and suppress-
ing truth. Therefore, without hesitation, they will turn their backs on
the alluring temptation to join in the building of the image to the
beast. As false Christs are presented to them, they will say, "This is
not my God, nor is that my God! I do not accept or follow them!"
But when Jesus at last appears in the clouds of heaven, then the
true children of God will say, "Behold, this is our God; we have
waited for Him, and He will save us. This is the Lord; we have waited
for Him; we will be glad and rejoice in His salvation." Isaiah 25:9.
There is yet another means that the Devil is using in his effort to
bring all the people into subjection to himself and that is the instru-
ment of calamity and trouble. While on the one hand through Spiri-
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 55

tualism he heals the people and thus appears as the benefactor of the
race, on the other hand he works in his true role of destroyer. His ca-
pacity for manipulating the mighty forces of nature is most
astonishing. A revelation of this is given in the destructive storm
which Satan marshalled against Job for the purpose of destroying
him, an objective he would have achieved if the Lord had not pro-
tected his faithful servant.
So today still, "it is God that shields His creatures and hedges
them in from the power of the destroyer. But the Christian world
have shown contempt for the law of Jehovah; and the Lord will do
just what He has declared that He would—He will withdraw His
blessings from the earth and remove His protecting care from those
who are rebelling against His law and teaching and forcing others to
do the same." Great Controversy, 589.
The removal of God's protection leaves the door open for Satan
to work his will. He will not treat all the same, but as it will best suit
his purpose. "Satan has control of all whom God does not especially
guard. He will favor and prosper some in order to further his own de-
signs, and he will bring trouble upon others and lead men to believe
that it is God who is afflicting them." Great Controversy, 589.
Since the far off time when he afflicted Job, Satan's under-
standing of the powers in nature has been greatly extended, and his
skill in deploying them likewise has advanced. Now he has even
greater power to destroy than previously. Thus we read:
"While appearing to the children of men as a great physician
who can heal all their maladies, he will bring disease and disaster, un-
til populous cities are reduced to ruin and desolation. Even now he is
at work. In accidents and calamities by sea and by land, in great con-
flagrations, in fierce tornadoes and terrific hailstorms, in tempests,
floods, cyclones, tidal waves, and earthquakes, in every place and in
a thousand forms, Satan is exercising his power. He sweeps away the
ripening harvest, and famine and distress follow. He imparts to the
air a deadly taint, and thousands perish by the pestilence. These visi-
tations are to become more and more frequent and disastrous. De-
struction will be upon both man and beast. 'The earth mourneth and
fadeth away,' 'the haughty people . . . do languish. The earth also is
defiled under the inhabitants thereof; because they have trans-
gressed the laws, changed the ordinance, broken the everlasting
covenant.' Isaiah 24:4, 5." Great Controversy, 589, 590.
Here is further sobering evidence in support of the fact that Sa-
tan is an exceedingly powerful being, against whom no human being
is any match. What man upon this earth has the capacity to gener-
ate, stop, or re-direct a fierce tornado, a terrific hail-storm, a tidal
wave, or an earthquake? The answer is that no man can, but the
56 LAST DAY EVENTS

devil does have that kind of power. Each time you see a violent, de-
structive storm bearing down on you, remind yourself that you are
being given a revelation of Satan's incredible might and skill. It will
help you to realize that only in Christ can the victory be gained.
It must be impossible to be unaware of the sharp increase in natu-
ral disasters which have been mounting over the past few years. Vol-
canic eruptions, devastating earthquakes, consuming conflagra-
tions, searing droughts, and flooding rivers, coupled with unre-
strained terrorism, violent crime, deadly pestilences, and wanton
wars, have become more and more frequent, at the cost of a greater
and still greater sacrifice of human life.
The messages to be read in all this are that God's protective care
is being steadily withdrawn from the earth, in response to increasing
rejection of Him and His righteousness, and this has afforded the
devil the opportunity to exercise his extraordinary power to lay the
earth waste so far as he is permitted. This frightening state of affairs
will become much, much worse, but the more it does, the nearer to
the end we have been brought.
But, Satan has no intention of permitting mankind to understand
who is the real force behind all this destruction, suffering, death, and
loss, so he works to make it appear that God is the cruel destroyer,
while he, without revealing who he really is, presents himself as the
benign benefactor of the people and the saviour of the race.
"And then the great deceiver will persuade men that those who
serve God are causing these evils. The class that have provoked the
displeasure of Heaven will charge all their troubles upon those
whose obedience to God's commandments is a perpetual reproof to
transgressors. It will be declared that men are offending God by the
violation of the Sunday sabbath; that this sin has brought calamities
which will not cease until Sunday observance shall be strictly en-
forced; and that those who present the claims of the fourth com-
mandment, thus destroying reverence for Sunday, are troublers of
the people, preventing their restoration to divine favor and temporal
prosperity. Thus the accusation urged of old against the servant of
God will be repeated and upon grounds equally well established:
'And it came to pass, when Ahab saw Elijah, that Ahab said unto
him, Art thou he that troubleth Israel? And he answered, I have not
troubled Israel; but thou, and thy father's house, in that ye have for-
saken the commandments of the Lord, and thou hast followed
Baalim.' 1 Kings 18:17, 18. As the wrath of the people shall be ex-
cited by false charges, they will pursue a course toward God's am-
bassadors very similar to that which apostate Israel pursued toward
Elijah." Great Controversy, 590.
Though the charges will be the opposite from the truth, they will
ROLE OF SPIRITUALISM 57

be readily believed by the multitudes eager to find a scapegoat on

whom they can fasten the blame for all their troubles. Thus God's
people will become the recipients of the most bitter persecution and
will be forced to suffer much for the truth's sake.
The participation on the part of the wicked in the laying of false
charges against God's people, still further alienates them from God,
increases their iniquity, and reduces the level of protection God can
give them. This can only serve to open the door wider for Satan to
bring more trouble on the one hand, and, on the other, to lead to still
greater wickedness in the land, in the face of which there will be a
more urgent agitation for the strict enforcement of the Sunday law.
So, events will move in an ever steepening spiral to the one possible
end—the setting up of the image of the beast.
Thus it is that all of these diabolical forces are working toward this
end. The mighty power of Spiritualism masquerading as true religion,
will be the great motivating and unifying force in the movement.
Those who will stand resolute for truth and righteousness in the
face of the awesome power of Spiritualism as it exercises its capabili-
ties in these last days, will have had to have made the most diligent
preparation for the ordeal. Now is the time to prepare. Let us make
the most of these few golden hours of opportunity which yet remain.
Chapter 5

The Four Angels

As has been noted already in these studies on the order of last
day events, the setting up of the image of the beast is a landmark. It
is an event toward which and from which we can work in our tracing
of the important developments yet to bring the earth's history to its
tragic closure.
Thus far we have traced the factors and forces which bring the
churches to the point where they must make the image to the beast.
These churches, having rejected the living power of God as offered
to them in the truth of God, are no longer in any sense of the word
the true people of God but only His enemies despite their high pro-
fession and appearances of piety and virtue. Therefore, we have
been tracing so far the development of the enemies of God toward
their final role in the last conflict.
This development will bring the world to a point of fearful and
terrible crisis wherein it will appear that the enemies of the truth
have triumphed and that the whole world has gone over to the ranks
of the devil.
But God is never caught by surprise. He knows what is coming
and long before it ever comes, He has worked out the perfect and
complete solution to the whole problem. Thus it will be when the
time of this vast confederacy of defiance and rebellion against God is
formed in the world. God will meet it with the power of His might
and will utterly defeat and destroy it, but not without a very terrible
and bitter battle indeed. The armies of the living God will take the
field in this great spiritual warfare to be waged in the last days. The
weapons to be used by this army will not be the regular munitions of
war, but the Sword of the Spirit which is the Word of God.
The preparation of this army of the living God is a work occupy-
ing quite some period of time. Certainly it is taking longer than is
needful, not because there is any shortcoming on the part of God,
but because of the slowness of heart and the unbelief of His people.
But it is important for us to understand the development of the peo-
ple through whom God will work in the final and finishing conflict,
for this battle cannot be fought without the use of the frail human
agency. God might have committed the entire task to the heavenly
THE FOUR ANGELS 59

angels, but it is needful to the proper outworking of the plan of salva-

tion for the task to be committed to men under the protection and
guidance of the angels.
Our last chapter brought us right up to the formation of the image
of the beast, an event which, at the time of the writing of this chap-
ter, is yet future. Now we will need to go back and in a similar manner
trace the development of the army of the Lord, which is to meet and
to defeat the powers of darkness.
Clear down through history God has had an unbroken line of
faithful people.
"From the beginning, faithful souls have constituted the church
on earth." Acts of the Apostles, 11.
These constitute the church of God, and these are the people of
God, although they are usually scattered, few in number, and unrec-
ognized by the world. Yet, it is a reasonably simple thing for the spiri-
tually enlightened to trace this church through from generation to
generation. Therefore, it is not necessary for us to begin our survey
of who constituted the church of God beginning with Adam, but we
can begin in much more recent times.
Unquestionably, Christ is the one true Head of the Christian
Church. Therefore, those whom He is leading are the people of God
and the Church of God. Thus, in His own day upon the earth, the
apostles and their converts to Christianity, were the true people of
God. But with the falling away of those who followed the early lead-
ers came the rise of the apostate Church, the man of sin foretold in
prophecy. But despite this, there were true followers of the Lord in
all lands, people who suffered terribly at the persecuting hands of the
Roman Church.
Then came the revival of the truth through the Reformers, the
first of whom was John Wycliffe, followed by Huss and Jerome, after
which came Luther and his associates. With the word of God in their
hands opened to the seventh chapter of Daniel, by the sure word of
prophecy, they identified the papacy as the Antichrist of history.
Mighty indeed was the work which they did, but their under-
standing and experience was not sufficient to finish the work. More
was needed for the preparation of the people who were to finish the
work of God in all the world. They did not understand the great
prophecies of Daniel 8:14 and of Revelation 13-19. More truth was
yet to be revealed and for this purpose, God brought into being the
Great Second Advent Movement of the 1831-1844 period.
Once again let us state here that we presuppose our readers have
a clear knowledge of the history of the rise of this movement so that
we do not intend to give a detailed history here. Should any find

[LDE5]
60 LAST DAY EVENTS

themselves at a loss on this point, then we shall be glad to supply ma-

terial to cover the period.
We are concerned here with certain facts and conclusions which
appertain to the rise and development of the movement of God's
people which will be in force when the image of the beast is formed.
A thorough knowledge of the rise of the message and the movement
will enable all to understand these facts and conclusions more
clearly.
There is not the slightest excuse for anyone finding himself un-
able to positively identify God's true people at the time when the set-
ting up of the image approaches. This event will not catch God by
surprise, and He has long since formulated the perfect answer to it.
That is wonderful enough, but what is more wonderful is the glorious
fact that He has not kept this knowledge to Himself, but has revealed
it through His prophets as He has declared He would in these words:
"Surely the Lord God does nothing, unless He reveals His secret
to His servants the prophets." Amos 3:7.
Here is a most comforting and assuring promise, and we are glad
of it. It assures us that there in not even one single thing which the
Lord will do in His determination to resolve the mounting crisis,
without firstly announcing it to His people through the Prophetic
Word.
Therefore, it follows that the development of the people of God
in preparation for the last final conflict will all be traced in advance in
His prophecies. And it is. The principal prophecies which cover this,
are found in Revelation 14 and 18, and in Matthew 22. Let us turn
to these to find in their messages for us a clear revelation of the way
the final movement shall be developed to the place where its people
will be instruments in God's hands; fit to finish the great controversy.
Nowhere is the rise of God's final movement through which He
will conclusively channel His closing answer to the long, dark reign of
sin, better portrayed than in Revelation 14:6-12, and 18:1-4.
"Then I saw another angel flying in the midst of heaven, having
the everlasting gospel to preach to those who dwell on the earth—to
every nation, tribe, tongue, and people—
"saying with a loud voice, 'Fear God and give glory to Him, for
the hour of His judgment has come; and worship Him who made
heaven and earth, the sea and springs of water.'
"And another angel followed, saying, 'Babylon is fallen, is fallen,
that great city, because she has made all nations drink of the wine of
the wrath of her fornication.'
"Then a third angel followed them, saying with a loud voice, 'If
anyone worships the beast and his image, and receives his mark on
his forehead or on his hand,
THE FOUR ANGELS 61

" 'he himself shall also drink of the wine of the wrath of God,
which is poured out full strength into the cup of His indignation. He
shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the
holy angels and in the presence of the Lamb.
" 'And the smoke of their torment ascends forever and ever; and
they have no rest day or night, who worship the beast and his image,
and whoever receives the mark of his name.'
"Here is the patience of the saints; here are those who keep the
commandments of God and the faith of Jesus." Revelation 14:6-
12.
"After these things I saw another angel coming down from
heaven, having great authority, and the earth was illuminated with
his glory.
"And he cried mightily with a loud voice, saying, 'Babylon the
great is fallen, is fallen, and has become a dwelling place of demons,
a prison for every foul spirit, and a cage for every unclean and hated
bird!
'For all the nations have drunk of the wine of the wrath of her
fornication, the kings of the earth have committed fornication with
her and the merchants of the earth have become rich through the
abundance of her luxury.'
"And I heard another voice from heaven saying, 'Come out of
her, My people, lest you share in her sins, and lest you receive of her
plagues.' " Revelation 18:1-4.
Here is brought to view the existence and ministry of four angels,
mighty in power, and resplendent in glory. All of these play a key
role in the concluding of the great controversy. These angels each
symbolize a movement of people under their protection, guidance,
and instruction. This is made plain in the second and third chapters
of Revelation, where each church is symbolized by an angel. Thus
the word reads again and again, "To the angel of the church of Ephe-
sus . . . Smyrna. . . Pergamos . . . Thyatira . . . Sardis . . . Philadel-
phia . . . Laodicea" in their turn. But the messages are in reality be-
ing addressed to the people in those churches. Therefore, it is evi-
dent that an angel is a symbol of a movement of people, to whom he
is a messenger.
This truth is further confirmed by the following statement:
"Of Babylon, at the time brought to view in this prophecy, it is
declared: 'Her sins have reached unto heaven, and God hath remem-
bered her iniquities.' Revelation 18:5. She has filled up the measure
of her guilt, and destruction is about to fall upon her. But God still
has a people in Babylon; and before the visitation of His judgments
these faithful ones must be called out, that they partake not of her
sins and 'receive not of her plagues.' Hence the movement symbol-
62 LAST DAY EVENTS

ized by the angel coming down from heaven, lightening the earth
with his glory and crying mightily with a strong voice, announcing
the sins of Babylon. In connection with his message the call is heard:
'Come out of her, My people.' These announcements, uniting with
the third angel's message, constitute the final warning to be given to
the inhabitants of the earth." Great Controversy, 604.
This statement clearly establishes the point that the angel is the
symbol of the movement.
But notice that each of the angels follows the one before him.
They do not all come at the same time but in succession. This indi-
cates that rather than there being the one movement, there is a suc-
cession of them. Yet at the same time we speak of the Great Second
Advent Movement as if it were one movement only. This is also true,
but the fact remains that there is a succession of movements within
the overall movement.
This is the fact of the case as we witness it in history and, in the
rise of the movement, we shall see a significant pattern emerging.
The warning message began to be given under the call and direction
of the Lord within the Protestant churches which at that time, 1831,
were the churches of God upon the earth. It was light beyond that
which they had yet found in their march away from the darkness of
Rome, but it was not given by the leadership of the churches, and
only a small proportion of those in the churches actually accepted
the light and followed it.
Now there is a consistent and basic pattern which is repeated
with every new angel coming upon the scene, and with every new
movement being formed, beginning with that of the first angel. Let
us put the facts of it down again so that it is clear in mind.
First of all, when the first angel's movement began to form, it was
in response to light beyond that which the churches already had re-
ceived. It was the message of the impending judgment based upon
Daniel 8:14, and Revelation 14:6, 7
Secondly, it was proclaimed, not by the established and recog-
nized leaders of the churches, but by laymen of God's own choosing.
William Miller was the founding father of the first angel's movement
in America with other capable men joining him as time went by.
Thirdly, not all of those who were in the churches took their
stand for the message. The remainder fought it most vigorously.
Only the minority stood for it.
So the first angel's movement was formed, and it was then largely
a church within the churches. Separation was not a clear cut and ab-
solute matter although the gulf between believer and unbeliever grew
daily wider. Yet they still physically remained in the churches,
though they were separate in spirit, and therefore in fact.
THE FOUR ANGELS 63

But the second angel followed the first. In the summer of 1844
began to sound the message, "Babylon is fallen, is fallen", and a
new movement took shape.
Now once again the same pattern is repeated.
First, here was light in advance of that sounded by the first an-
gel's movement. But at the same time they held to and taught all the
truth which had been revealed through the first angel.
Secondly, it was begun, not by Miller nor his leading associates,
but the beginning voice of the second angel's message was that of
Charles Fitch who had a place in the first angel's movement but was
not a prominent leader.
Thirdly, not all those who had stood for the message of the first
angel were prepared to go on into the second message and move-
ment. They showed then that they were willing to follow the Lord but
not as far as He wanted to lead them. Thus they turned from follow-
ing Him and lost the truth and the salvation which comes through
the truth. But others came in to take their places until the numbers
had swelled to over 50,000 in the days which led up to October 22,
1844.
But the second angel did not complete the work either. He was
but a stage further in the program of last day events. The third angel
follows the first and the second according to the prophecy in Revela-
tion 14. And the fact of history is that this third movement began im-
mediately after the second had taken the people as far as it could for
the time being. On October 22, 1844, came the Great Disappoint-
ment as their expectations of seeing the Lord return were not real-
ized. The very next day, after a long night of prayer, the clarifying
light began to dawn, and the third angel's movement began.
Again the pattern was repeated.
First, there was additional light not given by either the first or the
second angel. It was the light which showed the special work of
Christ in the most holy place of the heavenly sanctuary. It showed
the real nature of the cleansing of the sanctuary and explained why
they had been disappointed in their expectations. But let it be seen
that nothing of what they now received led them to reject the great
basic truths received under the first and the second angel. The new
light only added to and confirmed the previous light given, and they
could preach all that and the extra light with even greater conviction
and power.
Secondly, a new voice was to begin the light of the third angel.
This time is was Hiram Edson who received the first rays of light on
Christ's ministry in the holiest place in the heavenly sanctuary. He
too was not a prominent individual in the previous movement. And,
according to the pattern of the former two movements, he was
 Progressive Development of the
Four Angels' Messengers, Messages, and Movements
Close of
1831 1844 1844 1888 1893 1950 Probation

First Second Third Fourth Delay Fourth

Angel Angel Angel Angel Angel

Each angel symbolized and led a new movement.

Each movement is led by a fresh human leader.

William Charles Hiram Waggoner No Final

Miller Fitch Edson & Jones Messenger Messengers

Each messenger brings added light not revealed before.

Each causes a shaking and a separation.

The Ministry of all Four is Essential

for the Finishing of the Work
THE FOUR ANGELS 65

joined by others in proclaiming the new light from the Lord. With
each new movement, we find new individuals rising to prominence,
while those who were prominent in the former movement were usu-
ally the last to accept the new light. This fact is brought out in the fol-
lowing statement:
"Those who had formerly led in the cause were among the last to
join in this movement." Great Controversy, 402. Though this state-
ment was written concerning the reaction of the former leaders to
the Midnight Cry, the historical facts reveal that, with few excep-
tions, it is a pattern that repeats itself every time new light is re-
vealed that forms a new movement.
Thirdly, not all those who took their part in the second angel's
message found their way into the third. In fact, only a remnant did.
Of the 50,000 who looked for the Lord to return on October 22, only
a very, very few remained the next day to pray and to wait for the
added light. They also showed that their faith was of a nature which
could not endure the trials which awaited them and they failed the
test and then cast away what truth they had. Thus they too lost their
eternal life.
There are those today who believe that they are members of the
third angel's movement, and are confident that, at the same time,
the movement to which they belong is God's final people through
whom He will channel the last light ever to be transmitted to perish-
ing mankind. But in this they are sadly mistaken, for there are four
more movements to be called of God before the end can come. The
first of these to follow the third is the fourth angel whose work is de-
scribed in Revelation 18:1-4. Altogether, there will be seven angels'
movements, and not merely three.
For a more detailed study of these, see The Seven Angels, by F.
T. Wright.
Already laid down for us is the clear cut pattern of what this will
mean. It will mean that there is a great deal of additional light to be
added to the light already given. It means that it will be championed
by new leaders. It means that the vast majority of those who are
numbered as members of the third angel's movement will reject this
light and persecute those who do accept it. It means though that
they will lose their eternal life in so doing, for they will demonstrate
that they are prepared to follow their Lord so far and no further.
Such are not fit for the kingdom of God as we read:
"No one, having put his hand to the plow, and looking back, is fit
for the kingdom of God." Luke 9:62.
Those words are as plain as they are solemn. The messages
which God sends into the world are life and death messages, and we
dare not treat them lightly. While on the one hand we must be careful
66 LAST DAY EVENTS

not to accept error, yet at the same time we must be afraid lest we re-
ject the truth. Truth is not measured by the channels through which it
comes, but only by the Word.
But there is more evidence yet to prove that this situation will be
as indicated in the previous paragraphs, namely that the fourth angel
will institute a fresh movement as did the previous three, with added
light, new leadership, and only a remnant of the personnel of the
previous movement going on into it.
In closing this chapter, let us turn to statements in the Inspired
Word giving us the sure truth in very fact.
There will be light brought by the fourth angel not seen and deliv-
ered by the people of the third angel's movement. This is evident
from the following:
"Hence the movement symbolized by the angel coming down
from heaven, lightening the earth with his glory and crying mightily
with a strong voice, announcing the sins of Babylon. In connection
with his message the call is heard: 'Come out of her, My people.'
These announcements, uniting with the third angel's message, con-
stitute the final warning to be given to the inhabitants of the earth."
Great Controversy, 604.
Here then is the plain declaration that there will be truths from
heaven which reveal as never before the real nature of the apostasy,
which will be united with the light already understood under the third
angel's message. Exactly as it was in the previous three angel's mes-
sages in their turn, so it will be in the giving of the last message. And
notice too that this angel is the symbol of a definite movement.
There can be no doubt, but the angel referred to in this quotation is
the angel of Revelation, 18, and this angel symbolizes a movement.
The statement makes that very clear indeed.
Secondly, there will be new leadership. The following statement
bears this out as it speaks about the time when the mark of the beast
is to be urged upon the peoples of this earth.
"The days are fast approaching when there will be great perplex-
ity and confusion. Satan, clothed in angel robes, will deceive, if pos-
sible, the very elect. There will be gods many and lords many. Every
wind of doctrine will be blowing. Those who have rendered supreme
homage to 'science falsely so called' will not be the leaders then.
Those who have trusted to intellect, genius, or talent will not then
stand at the head of rank and file. They did not keep pace with the
light. Those who have proved themselves unfaithful will not then be
entrusted with the flock. In the last solemn work few great men will
be engaged. They are self-sufficient, independent of God, and He
cannot use them. The Lord has faithful servants, who in the shaking,
testing time will be disclosed to view." Testimonies 5:80, 81.
THE FOUR ANGELS 67

Just as in every other previous movement the old leadership is no

longer usable, so it will be again. The pattern will be repeated. This
does not necessarily mean that all former leaders will apostatize, but
it does mean that, with few exceptions, they will not hold prominent
positions of leadership in the next movement.
Finally, not all who belong to the third angel's movement will
pass on into the fourth. Many such predictions as these are to be
found.
"Many a star that we have admired for its brilliancy will then go
out in darkness. Chaff like a cloud will be borne away on the wind,
even from places where we see only floors of rich wheat. All who as-
sume the ornaments of the sanctuary, but are not clothed with
Christ's righteousness, will appear in the shame of their own naked-
ness." Testimonies 5:81.
Today God is leading out a people and preparing them for the
great and final work to be done in all the world. At the same time He
is sifting and winnowing so that all who are content to cling to the
convenience of a comfortable church organization rather than go
forward with the truth, will be left behind and perish with the reject-
ers of the message. We must today keep pace with the advancing
light and be prepared to leave the movement of the third angel and
enter into the fourth as it develops.
This chapter provides an over all picture of the situation. It is
now time to turn to a more detailed prophecy of the same period.
This we will do in the next chapter.
Chapter 6

The Marriage
Prophecy
The prophecy of the four angels which we have just studied in the
previous chapter clearly reveals what will happen, and in fact is in
the process of happening among those who profess to be God's peo-
ple once the fourth angel began his mighty work. It reveals both
those in the church who genuinely love the truth of God and those
who only give lip service to present truth.
At the opening of this chapter, we would do well to briefly sum-
marize the last day events as they develop among the professed peo-
ple of the Lord, for, as the wicked are closing ranks in preparation
for their role in the last conflict, God's true people must simultane-
ously be coming into line.
Firstly, God sends a messenger with a powerful presentation of
the gospel in a present truth setting perfectly adapted to meet the
needs of the hour. The messenger called by God and used by Him to
channel this light to the people does not come with the approval of
the church authorities.
At first, many are roused to soul-searching, but, when they find
that they must abandon their cherished sins, they turn from the light
to war against the message, and to despise the messenger. By so do-
ing, they close the door of mercy against themselves forever, perma-
nently separate themselves from the Lord, and consequently are no
longer the movement under His blessing and guidance.
This tragic outcome took place in 1844 as it is written:
"I was shown in vision, and I still believe, that there was a shut
door in 1844. All who saw the light of the first and second angels'
messages and rejected that light, were left in darkness. And those
who accepted it and received the Holy Spirit which attended the
proclamation of the message from heaven, and who afterward re-
nounced their faith and pronounced their experience a delusion,
thereby rejected the Spirit of God, and it no longer pleaded with
them.
"Those who did not see the light, had not the guilt of its rejec-
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY 69

tion. It was only the class who had despised the light from heaven
that the Spirit of God could not reach. And this class included, as I
have stated, both those who refused to accept the message when it
was presented to them, and also those who, having received it, after-
ward renounced their faith. These might have a form of godliness,
and profess to be followers of Christ; but having no living connection
with God, they would be taken captive by the delusions of Satan.
These two classes are brought to view in the vision—those who de-
clared the light which they had followed a delusion, and the wicked
of the world who, having rejected the light, had been rejected of
God. No reference is made to those who had not seen the light, and
therefore were not guilty of its rejection." Selected Messages 1:63,
64.
This principle of the termination of salvation for those who reject
the light from heaven, is repeated every time the Lord sends forth a
message to awaken and test His people.
On the other hand, there is revealed to view a minority of those
who are prepared to forsake all for Christ and His righteousness, and
the separation between the two becomes inevitable.
Thus it is that a new movement is formed with new truth under
new leadership comprised of a remnant only of those in the previous
movement.
This is the normal pattern of behavior despite witness after wit-
ness in the Scriptures warning of the peril of rejecting the light and
walking separately from the truth of God. The condemnation for
such a course would be bad enough if what I have presented so far
was the only witness to this effect. But it is not. The Bible has laid
down the principle, that: "By the mouth of two or three witnesses
every word shall be established." 2 Corinthians 13:1.
That means two or three at least, and the Lord has provided am-
ple witnesses to ensure that we do not miss the message. Accord-
ingly, the Word of God has not left this important matter to be de-
pendent upon one witness only. Quite a number more are given,
each one as clear and specific as the prophecy already studied. To
cover all these would require a separate book which I hope will be
produced when time permits.
One might fear that such a repetition would be tedious. If each
witness were merely a repetition of the facts given by the previous
one, then this could well be so. However, no two witnesses ever give
their testimony from the same standpoint, and therefore each one,
while giving the same basic picture as the others, presents a view of
things which introduces aspects of the case not given by the others.
Therefore, each witness is complementary to the others. Each must
be studied in order to gain the complete picture.
70 LAST DAY EVENTS

We turn our attention then to another witness which confirms

the truth that, in response to the final messages ever to be given,
there will be a new movement formed with new truth under new
leadership. It will be under the command of the fourth angel that
God's people will confront the image of the beast.
The second witness to which I now direct your attention is the
parable of the marriage as contained in Matthew 22:1-14.
"And Jesus answered and spoke to them again by parables and
said:
'' The kingdom of heaven is like a certain king who arranged a
marriage for his son,
" 'and sent out his servants to call those who were invited to the
wedding; and they were not willing to come.
" 'Again, he sent out other servants, saying, "Tell those who are
invited, 'See, I have prepared my dinner; my oxen and fatted cattle
are killed, and all things are ready. Come to the wedding.' "
" 'But they made light of it and went their ways, one to his own
farm, another to his business.
" 'And the rest seized his servants, treated them spitefully, and
killed them.
'But when the king heard about it, he was furious. And he sent
out his armies, destroyed those murderers, and burned up their city.
" Then he said to his servants, "The wedding is ready, but those
who were invited were not worthy.
' "Therefore go into the highways, and as many as you find, in-
vite to the wedding.''
" 'So those servants went out into the highways and gathered to-
gether all whom they found, both bad and good. And the wedding
hall was filled with guests.
'But when the king came in to see the guests, he saw a man
there who did not have on a wedding garment.
'So he said to him, "Friend, how did you come in here without
a wedding garment?" And he was speechless.
" Then the king said to the servants, "Bind him hand and foot,
take him away, and cast him into outer darkness; there will be weep-
ing and gnashing of teeth."
" 'For many are called, but few are chosen.' "
There are some who will object that a parable cannot be an out-
line prophecy, for, they argue, parables are intended only to present
some devotional type of message, not prophetic outlines. But this is
not so. A number of parables are very specific outline surveys of
coming events and must be respected as such. This we shall see very
clearly as we proceed to the study of the parabolic prophecy of the
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY 71

marriage. In fact, the pen of inspiration describes the parable of

Zechariah 3 as being a prophecy:
"In the beautiful parabolic prophecy of Zechariah, the high priest
Joshua, standing clothed in filthy garments before the angel of the
Lord, represents the sinner. And the word is spoken by the Lord,
Take away the filthy garments from him. And unto him He said, Be-
hold, I have caused thine iniquity to pass from thee, and I will clothe
thee with change of raiment.' " Christ's Object Lessons, 206.
Generally, we think only of two ways by which prophecy is given.
We think of its being given through visions and dreams as in the
prophecies of Daniel and the Revelation.
Then again the word of God came directly to the prophet without
there being an accompanying vision. An example of this is the pre-
diction concerning the duration of Israel's captivity in Babylon as re-
corded in Jeremiah 25:12.
While there is no question about the validity of these two meth-
ods of revelation, we must not overlook the third by which prophecy
is revealed. This is by means of some of the parables. It is true that
not all the parables are prophecies, but there are certain ones which
are.
An excellent example is found in Matthew 21:33-46. Even the
most casual reading of the parable reveals that it was a prophecy ac-
curately fulfilled by the way in which the Jews treated the prophets
and finally Jesus Christ, the Son of God.
Another such example is the prophecy of the parable of the ten
virgins as found in Matthew 25:1-13, of which it is written:
"I am often referred to the parable of the ten virgins, five of
whom were wise, and five foolish. This parable has been and will be
fulfilled to the very letter, for it has a special application to this time,
and, like the third angel's message, has been fulfilled and will con-
tinue to be present truth till the close of time." Review and Herald,
August 19,1890.
Other parables are devoted to the teaching of certain truths and
are not prophecies in the sense of revealing a progression of events,
but the ones we have looked at here are definitely such.
In approaching the study of the parabolic prophecy of Matthew
22, we need to be very careful to see that we place no human con-
struction or interpretation upon it. Therefore, we shall follow a very
systematic method of study.
First we shall take the prophecy itself and set it out point by point
without making any attempt to match it with the fulfillment, for the
time being.
Then, when we have the prophecy clearly in mind, we shall take
the first fulfillment as outlined in the book Christ's Object Lessons,
72 LAST DAY EVENTS

and match the fulfillment with its prediction. At this stage we shall
see how accurate the prophecy is and that it has been fulfilled to the
very letter indeed.
Finally, we shall take the prophecy as it appears in our day and in
its final fulfillment. Once again we shall see the exact nature of the
prophecy and how it is being fulfilled to the very letter.
This then will be our systematic study procedure, and if we ask
only, "What does the Word say?" then we cannot possibly go wrong.
The first event in the prophecy is the making of the marriage by
the king for his son. Let us not concern ourselves yet with who the
king and his son are. That knowledge will come when the study of
the interpretation begins.
It is important to understand here that the making of the mar-
riage is not the marriage itself, but is the preparation for it, and in-
cludes the making of the guest list and the inviting of those guests to
the marriage.
Now in the normal order of things, and especially when it is a
king's invitation, the guests come at the appointed time, but in this
case things are not normal. Inexplicably, they do not come, and it be-
comes needful for the king to send his servants to call those who had
been bidden to come to the marriage. Make a special note of two
things at this point. Firstly, please understand that the making of the
marriage is not the first call, even though it involves the issuing of in-
vitations to those who hereafter are identified as "the bidden ones".
Secondly, it is to this class that the first call is directed. Noting the
amazing fact that none of the previously bidden guests have re-
sponded to His invitation, the king sends his servants "to call those
who were invited to the wedding; and they were not willing to
come."
This is the first call. It is given by the servants of the King to those
who had already been bidden and who should have responded to the
invitation by coming to the wedding. But, surprisingly enough, they
still refuse to come.
Despite the fact that this is nothing short of an outright insult to
the king, he is very patient and sends out other servants to make a
second call to those same bidden ones.
But it is as if the king has insulted the guests by inviting them to
the marriage of his son, for some treat the third invitation with con-
tempt while the rest actually persecuted the king's own servants in a
cruel way.
Now the king can see that these guests have no intention of ever
coming to the marriage. Their action is one of complete rebellion
against his kingdom and authority, so he condemns them to the de-
struction which such an attitude merits.
74 LAST DAY EVENTS

should come before the call to the highways and hedges and not after
the examination of the guests as stated in this study and the accom-
panying diagram.
But we shall see that it is the way of the Word of God to carry
through one phase of the story to the very end first and then come
back and trace through the emerging alternative phase. Thus the ul-
timate fate of the bidden ones is recorded to complete their picture,
then the prophecy goes back to reveal the alternative call and the re-
sponse to it which, in actual fact, happens before the destruction of
the bidden ones takes place.
This will become clearer still in the tracing of the fulfillment of
the prophecy to which study we now turn.
The First Fulfillment
This prophecy has received a most exact fulfillment in the history
of the Jews. With this past fulfillment, we are no longer so deeply
concerned except as it serves as a clear cut picture of how the proph-
ecy will be fulfilled again. What happened then must happen again
as we shall clearly see very shortly.
Very obviously the King in the picture is God the Father. The
Son, for whom the marriage is made, is Christ.
But what is the marriage?
"By the marriage is represented the union of humanity with di-
vinity." Christ's Object Lessons, 307.
Therefore the making of this spiritual marriage must be the bring-
ing together of these two divided parties—God and His church. That
which separates them is sin in the individual members of the church,
so the call to the marriage must of necessity be the preaching of the
gospel as the power of God to really remove sin.
At any time at all in the history of the world, individuals can ac-
cept the gospel and become bound in marriage relationship to God,
but it is not possible for the church as a people to become the fully
consummated bride of Christ at any time.
The whole teaching of this parable will show that, while individu-
als did respond to the call, the body did not. The acceptance by a mi-
nority of individuals within the body is not mentioned in the parable.
It is concerned, not with this, but with the response of the body as a
whole. This therefore shows the marriage under consideration to be
that of the church to Christ, and not of individuals to Him.
It was impossible for the Jewish Church as the body of Christ to
have entered into the close marriage relationship with Christ during
their period of captivity in Babylon. As slaves they were not free to
put away all sin until there was nothing between them and their God.
Except for a faithful few including Daniel and his companions, they
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY 75

all entered Babylon already gripped by the power of sin, and there-
fore divorced from their true spiritual Husband. But the Lord brought
them into freedom again for the express purpose of removing all sin
from them thus establishing them in a position where they could
have come into the closest marriage relationship with Him.
To achieve this, He gave them the gospel, the power of God to
separate them from sin, and thus end their separation from Him.
The sanctuary, which is a picture of the gospel, was restored to
them. These provisions of divine grace set the church up in a posi-
tion in which the Hebrews had unimpeded opportunity as individu-
als, as a Church, and as a nation to experience the marriage with
Christ through to its complete consummation. So for them, His pre-
cious chosen people, the marriage was made and they were bidden
to it. He gave them opportunity to see that the real purpose in His
rescuing them from Babylon, was not that they might merely resume
their life in their own land, but that they might enter into a total and
everlastingly enduring marriage relationship with Him. Nor were
they to dally in this work forever, for a time limit of 70 weeks or 490
years was apportioned to them in these unmistakable terms;
"Seventy weeks are determined for your people and for your holy
city,
To finish the transgression;
To make an end of sins;
To make reconciliation for iniquity;
To bring in everlasting righteousness;
To seal up vision and prophecy;
And to anoint the Most Holy." Daniel 9:24.
Thus there were allotted to the Jewish church 70 prophetic
weeks or 490 years beginning in 457 B.C. in which this work was to
be done. The very conditions both in heaven and on earth whereby it
might be done had been brought about. The marriage was made and
the guests were invited. Their attendance at the wedding involved
the work of making an end of sins and bringing in everlasting right-
eousness. The stage was set, the opportunity made, and when the
work would have been accomplished, then the marriage would be
consummated, for when an end has been made to all sin, and right-
eousness everlastingly brought in, then all division between divinity
and humanity is gone.
But the Jews missed the divine purpose and permitted instead a
terrible reversion into apostasy, so that when Jesus came toward the
end of their allotted time to lead them into the final fullness of the
marriage of humanity with divinity, they, who ought to have been
walking very close to God, had wandered very far from him. A mar-

[LDE6]
76 LAST DAY EVENTS

riage was quite impossible under these conditions wherein every day
saw the two parties walking further and further apart.
So then, they who had been bidden to the marriage in 457 B.C.,
needed a special call sent to them to come to the marriage.
The important next step is to positively and unmistakably identify
the first call to the members of the Jewish church at the time when
they were the ones who had been bidden to the marriage.
There is not the slightest danger of making a mistake here, for we
are specifically told by Inspiration that the first call was given by the
twelve and the seventy disciples before the crucifixion of Christ. Of
this we read:
"The call to the feast had been given by Christ's disciples. Our
Lord had sent out the twelve and afterward the seventy, proclaiming
that the kingdom of God was at hand, and calling upon men to re-
pent and believe the gospel. But the call was not heeded. Those who
were bidden to the feast did not come." Christ's Object Lessons,
308.
Thus came the first call and the rejection of it.
But this did not yet close the door of opportunity on the Jewish
Church. We are familiar with the specific nature of Bible prophecy.
In Daniel for instance, are foretold four world empires, not three,
nor five, but four. Now if history had produced three or five instead of
four, what would we do with the prophecy of Daniel?
We would certainly reject it as false!
So in this prophecy there are two calls to the bidden ones, no
more and no less. Therefore when the first call was ended, the sec-
ond was yet to come, but it would be the last. The Jewish Church had
a total of three opportunities to enter, as a Church, into a full mar-
riage relationship with Christ. Their rejection of these would seal
their fate as a Church.
The second call came in the giving of the gospel in the power of
the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. The fact of this is declared in the imme-
diate continuation of the statement quoted above. "The servants
were sent out later to say, 'Behold, I have prepared my dinner; my
oxen and my failings are killed, and all things are ready: come unto
the marriage.' This was the message borne to the Jewish nation af-
ter the crucifixion of Christ; but the nation that claimed to be God's
peculiar people rejected the gospel brought to them in the power of
the Holy Spirit. Many did this in the most scornful manner. Others
were so exasperated by the offer of salvation, the offer of pardon for
rejecting the Lord of glory, that they turned upon the bearers of the
message. There was 'a great persecution.' Acts 8:1 Many both of
men and women were thrust into prison, and some of the Lord's
78 LAST DAY EVENTS

his armies, and destroyed those murderers, and burned up their

city.' The judgment pronounced came upon the Jews in the destruc-
tion of Jerusalem and the scattering of the nation." Christ's Object
Lessons, 308, 309.
The third call to the feast represents the giving of the gospel to
the Gentiles. The king said that the wedding is ready, but they which
were bidden are not worthy. So He instructed His servants to go
therefore into the highways, and as many as they found to bid to the
marriage.
Mention was made earlier in this chapter of the system of Bible
revelation wherein the fate of one class is carried through to its con-
clusion before we return back a little in time to see the emerging al-
ternative group. So here we are carried through to A.D. 70, where the
destruction of Jerusalem by the Roman armies is portrayed after
which we turn to the giving of the gospel to the Gentiles which began
in earnest upon the termination of the 490 years in A.D. 34.
Thus the call turned to the highways and the hedges and another
class was given the invitation the Jews had spurned.
With great patience, God had waited for the work to be com-
pleted through the Jewish people, but He had been disappointed.
Next, He looked for it to be finished through the Apostolic Church,
but again He was disappointed, for, after having reached a certain
glorious peak, they fell away into the deep apostasy of the Dark
Ages, during which period the Church bore the same dark burden of
desperate oppression as was suffered by Israel under Babylon in
Daniel's day. Speaking of the relentless persecution which began in
the apostolic era and ended a short while before 1798, the pen of in-
spiration wrote:
"God's church on earth was as verily in captivity during this long
period of relentless persecution as were the children of Israel held
captive in Babylon during the period of the exile." Prophets and
Kings, 714.
Under such conditions the consummation of the marriage of the
Church with Christ was impossible. The union of Christ with His
people can only be made by a movement of those who are totally
free, and therefore, the finishing of the great controversy can be ac-
complished only by a people completely liberated from bondage.
This is a truth the power of which must be seen and understood by
each one of us. Then we shall comprehend why it is that the 144,000
must and do attain to a state of sinless perfection.
This happy conclusion to the marriage would have been realized
in the days of the apostles if the believers in Jesus had truly made an
end to all sin and brought in everlasting righteousness, but instead,
they carried over into the Christian Church quite a number of the
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY 79

concepts which belonged to Babylon and should have been left be-
hind forever. For further study on this point, see Entering into
God's Sabbath Rest, by F. T. Wright, 130-204.
This mixing of Babylonian and Christian concepts crippled the
servants, robbed the Church of God's power, and thus prevented the
complete gathering from the highways and the byways of the Gentile
harvest. This in turn prevented the examination of the assembled
guests by the King of glory, which is the investigative judgment of
those who profess to be God's people. Therefore, this first fulfill-
ment of the prophecy is incomplete, and the whole drama had to be
re-enacted. Again there had to be the making of the marriage; again
there had to be two calls to the bidden ones; again there had to be
the final rejection of the bidden ones, the call to whom will be ex-
tended to another class; and again there will be the final destruction
of the bidden ones and those who came improperly clad to the
wedding.
This time, fully emancipated from all Babylonian concepts, deliv-
ered from all sin, and filled with the awesome power of the latter
rain, the King's servants will be entirely successful in gathering the
guests. The final call and warning will be literally carried to every in-
dividual of every nation, kindred, tongue, and people. There will not
remain a single living person who will have failed to make his deci-
sion one way or the other.
The guests will be gathered, the investigative judgment of the liv-
ing shall take place, the rejecters of God's gracious invitation will
suffer destruction, the marriage of the Lamb with His people will be
consummated, and thus the end will come.
It is in this second complete and final fulfillment of this prophecy
that we are most interested and most vitally concerned, and to the
study of which we will devote the next chapter.
Chapter 7

The Marriage
Prophecy-PART II
Before He, who is King of Kings and Lord of Lords, can return in
the clouds of Heaven, there must be the consummation of the mar-
riage between Christ and His Church. In other words, before the end
of probationary time can take place, God must have a church upon
this earth, "not having spot or wrinkle or any such thing". Ephe-
sians 5:27. An end must have been made of all sin in every one in
this church forever, and everlasting righteousness must have been
brought into every one of the members.
Otherwise they could never endure the time of Jacob's trouble
which follows the close of probation and also precedes the second
advent of Christ. And if they should fail then, and thus place them-
selves where Satan "could blot them from the earth, his triumph
would be complete." Great Controversy, 618. For Satan's triumph
to be complete is but to say that God's cause would be defeated as
completely. Therefore, the steadfastness of God's people in this final
crisis and conflict is a serious matter.
So there has to be a marriage and this will be consummated be-
fore Jesus leaves the Most Holy Place of the heavenly sanctuary. The
fact of this is stated in Early Writings, 280. Having brought us down
in the unrolling of the scroll to that time when probation has closed,
it says:
"Every case had been decided for life or death. While Jesus had
been ministering in the sanctuary, the judgment had been going on
for the righteous dead, and then for the righteous living. Christ had
received His kingdom, having made the atonement for His people
and blotted out their sins. The subjects of the kingdom were made
up. The marriage of the Lamb was consummated. And the kingdom,
and the greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven, was given
to Jesus and the heirs of salvation, and Jesus was to reign as King of
kings and Lord of lords.''
In achieving this condition of spotless perfection, God has the
major responsibility, but He cannot fulfill His part unless the human
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 81

side of the covenant fulfills theirs. We can be assured that there is

neither failure nor delay on God's part. If those problems assert
themselves, as they certainly have, the fault lies entirely with us.
All the power and resources of heaven are set for the consumma-
tion of this marriage. So far, its achievement has not been success-
fully reached and for this reason time tarries. But nothing of the fail-
ure can be attributed to the Lord, for every provision on heaven's
side has been more than adequately made up.
This truth is stressed a number of times throughout the proph-
ecy. Firstly, we are told that the King made the marriage for His Son.
This means that He did not merely intend to make it, or that He
made a good start without bringing the work to completion, but that
He actually made the marriage. And thus it was that He could posi-
tively say, "All things are ready! Come to the marriage!" A careful
reading of the prophecy shows the delay to be caused, not by any un-
readiness or slackness on the Lord's side, but by the persistent re-
fusal of His people to come at His invitation. "To come" in this set-
ting is not the physical walk to a designated geographical location,
but the work of soul preparation involved in the putting away of sin
from the life, which sin in the life is the element which keeps the two
parties in the marriage separate from each other. In this separation,
it is not He who walks apart from us, but we who walk apart from
Him.
But, as already stated, the work of God cannot be ended and
Christ return without there first being the consummation of the mar-
riage through the complete perfection of the believers in Jesus.
All things were ready when Jesus ministered on earth, and the
Lord told them so, but the Jews refused to come despite their earnest
claims to be the one and only chosen nation. The Lord, after doing
all He could do to restore the relationship between His people and
Himself, then gave the opportunity to the members of the early
Christian Church, but they too failed to gather the guests, and come
to the marriage. Instead, they walked further and further from the
side of their divine Leader until the deep darkness of the great Baby-
lonian apostasy encompassed and imprisoned them.
Thus ended God's noble and commendable attempt to consum-
mate the marriage between humanity and divinity at this particular
time in history. This left Him with no other choice but to patiently
wait until another day of opportunity had arrived.
That precious new day of opportunity could not be set up until
the power of the Papacy was broken, for it is only with a people free
from the bondage of sin that the marriage can be finalized. There-
fore, it must be plainly seen that there could be no consummation of
the marriage during the long captivity of the Dark Ages. So God
82 LAST DAY EVENTS

waited with infinite patience until the time came when He could
again make the marriage for His Son. The best which could be done
then was to hold things together so the Church could not be de-
stroyed entirely, while at the same time working toward the creation
of a situation wherein the marriage could again be made and the
guests called to it for the consummation.
And in 1844 such an objective was realized. There again, the
marriage was made by the King for His Son and guests were bidden
to it, through the proclamation of the Midnight Cry, "Behold, the
Bridegroom is coming; go out to meet Him." Matthew 25:6.
Everyone who is familiar with the history of the rise of the Advent
Movement will know that the marriage was made in 1844. There are
explicit statements confirming this. However, we will spend a little
time establishing this as a fact beyond contradiction.
In the book Early Writings is given a description of what took
place in the heavenly sanctuary at the close of the 2,300 years which
ended on October 22, 1844. This is a more detailed description of
Daniel 7:9, 10 which says, "I watched till thrones were put in place,
and the Ancient of Days was seated; His garment was white as snow,
and the hair of His head was like pure wool. His throne was a fiery
flame, its wheels a burning fire;
"A fiery stream issued and came forth from before Him. A thou-
sand thousands ministered to Him; ten thousand times ten thousand
stood before Him. The court was seated, and the books were
opened."
The Most Holy or second apartment of the heavenly sanctuary is
the judgment room so that here in Daniel at the right point in the se-
quence of events in this prophecy, the Ancient of Days, who is God
the Father, is seen taking His place in that room. This event occurred
at the close of the 2,300 years of Daniel 8:14.
In the passage from Early Writings under consideration, the Fa-
ther and the Son are seen sharing a throne which we soon learn is in
the Holy Place or the first apartment of the heavenly sanctuary. This
is in harmony with the vision of John in Revelation 4 and 5, where
the Father and the Son are seen together in the apartment wherein
were the seven golden candlesticks which we know were always in
the first apartment of the sanctuary. It is in harmony too with He-
brews 1:3 and 8:1 where Jesus is shown as being seated on the right
hand of the throne in the heavens.
But, at the ending of the 2300 years in 1844, the ministry of the
Holy Place gave way to the ministry in the Most Holy Place which re-
quired a moving of the Father and the Son to this apartment. This is
pictured as quoted above in Daniel 7:9, 10, and also in verse 13
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 83

where, the Son of Man is brought before the Ancient of Days to re-
ceive His Kingdom.
In closer detail the scene is described thus in Early Writings, 55,
"I saw the father rise from the throne, and in a flaming chariot go
into the holy of holies within the veil, and sit down." For what pur-
pose? The answer is to make the marriage for His son.
This is evident from the following statement. "Then Jesus rose
from the throne . . . Then He raised His right arm, and we heard His
lovely voice saying, 'Wait here; I am going to my Father to receive the
kingdom; keep your garments spotless, and in a little while I will re-
turn from the wedding and receive you to Myself.' " Early Writings,
55.
If in coming out from what He was going into, He returned from
the wedding, then He must have been going into the wedding which
His Father had gone ahead to prepare for Him.
This fact is most plainly stated in Great Controversy, 427. "The
proclamation, 'Behold, the Bridegroom cometh,' in the summer of
1844, led thousands to expect the immediate advent of the Lord. At
the appointed time, the Bridegroom came, not to the earth, as the
people expected, but to the Ancient of Days in heaven, to the mar-
riage, the reception of His kingdom."
These references make it very clear then that the marriage was
made by the Father for His Son in 1844. This involved the creation
of a people who were classified as the "bidden ones".
But who were they? How shall we identify them?
They were those who met the parallel specifications of those
who were the bidden ones in 457 B.C. They had been in bondage to
spiritual Babylon, but had responded to the message of the second
angel to come out of her to do the work of rebuilding the glorious
sanctuary truth, just as the small remnant had come out of Babylon
to rebuild the sanctuary in the days of Ezra and Nehemiah. They
were the ones who had been bidden to the marriage. They had given
heed to the call of the Midnight Cry, "Behold, the Bridegroom is
coming: go out to meet Him." Matthew 25:6.
This is to say that in 1844 God brought His people to the same
point of opportunity and advantage as that to which He had brought
them in 457 B.C., when He had appointed to them a specific period
of time, namely 490 years, in which to make an end made of sins,
and bring in everlasting righteousness.
In 1844 He called upon them to do the same work without speci-
fying the allotted portion of time which would be appointed them.
This time, it was described in these words: "But in the days of the
sounding of the seventh angel, when he is about to sound, the mys-
tery of God would be finished." Revelation 10:7.
84 LAST DAY EVENTS

The finishing of the mystery of God is the finishing of the work of

Christ being fully formed within each believer, as it is written: "To
them God willed to make known what are the riches of the glory of
this mystery among the Gentiles: which is Christ in you, the hope of
glory." Colossians 1:27.
Is not this the making of an end of sins and the bringing in of ev-
erlasting righteousness? And when that work is done, then will not
every separating barrier between God and man have been removed?
Will not this mean that the marriage will have been consummated as
the union is completed?
The finishing of the mystery of God is the consummation of the
marriage.
In 1844, everything had been brought to a point of readiness
wherein this work could speedily have been done. The power of the
Papacy was broken, the people were free as never before, the glori-
ous light of the everlasting gospel was shining upon them, and the
King had already come in for the inspection of the characters of the
righteous dead.
The marriage was made. All things were ready and all that was
left was for the people of God to make speedy work of having the
mystery of God finished in them, so that Christ could come and re-
ceive them to His kingdom.
But, exactly as pictured in the prophecy, they did not come when
they were originally bidden. Instead there came a sad falling away,
time tarried, and the Bridegroom and His Father were kept waiting
and waiting.
"Had Adventists, after the great disappointment in 1844, held
fast their faith and followed on unitedly in the opening providence of
God, receiving the message of the third angel and in the power of
the Holy Spirit proclaiming it to the world, they would have seen the
salvation of God, the Lord would have wrought mightily with their ef-
forts, the work would have been completed, and Christ would have
come ere this to receive His people to their reward." Evangelism,
695.
This was penned in 1883 and shows clearly that the bidden ones
should, before that, have gone into the marriage, but they did not.
Therefore, just as the prophecy indicates, and just as had been
necessary in the first fulfillment in regard to the Jews, the King had
to send a special call to those who had been bidden. Insomuch as
there have been numerous stirrings and messages among the people
of God, our task is to identify just what event actually fulfilled the
prediction.
The prophecy calls for the sending by the King of His servants to
His people, the bidden ones, with a call to come to the marriage.
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 85

Such a message must reveal much more than the knowledge of

what they should be, but also had to explain to them how to attain to
the divine standard of perfection, and, as well, introduce to them the
almighty power of the gospel, by A which alone the work

could be effective. These necessities were brought home to my mind with

It was in the autumn of 1844 that the marriage was made by God for
His beloved Son for the last time. Then it was that the Everlasting Father
left the Holy Place of the heavenly sanctuary, and entered the most holy
place, into which Jesus, our great High Priest, followed Him. At the same
time on earth, conditions were established by which all sin could be re-
moved from the believers. The papal bonds had been broken, the people
had religious freedom, and the needed light was shining through to enable
them all to make a complete and final end of all sin and sinning. Though
not yet consummated, the marriage had been made.

telling force one night in Johannesburg, South Africa. On this occa-

sion, I was presenting a study on Romans 7 and 8. Methodically, I
had explained the sin problem as a situation wherein the sinner is in
86 LAST DAY EVENTS

helpless bondage to the sin-master. I demonstrated from the Scrip-

tures that we unwillingly commit sin because we have no power to do
otherwise until we are set free from this slavery. I pointed to the
plight of the hapless Hebrews in Egypt as an illustration of our spiri-
tual problem, thus revealing what we ought not to be, and what we
should be.
This part of the presentation had occupied forty-five minutes,
and I suggested a break of fifteen minutes before continuing.
Immediately, one man in the audience spoke up:
"The other Sabbath, the pastor preached a sermon in which he
spelled out the sin-problem just as you have done. He told us the law
of God could be kept to perfection and that this is the level at which
it must be kept by those who will be given a place in Paradise re-
stored. But that is as far as he went before sitting down, his sermon
being ended.
"I immediately stood to my feet earnestly pleading with him not
to stop at this point, but to go on and tell us how to achieve this
standard of excellence.
"Slowly the preacher rose to his feet again and confessed that he
had told them all that he knew, that, while he understood that perfec-
tion is attainable, that sin is to be forever ended, and perfect right-
eousness everlastingly brought in, he could not explain how it could
be achieved."
The man then challenged me with these words: "Will you, like
that preacher, offer us the experience of righteousness, but fail to ex-
plain to us how it is to be attained?"
How thankful I was that the fourth angel's message, which is the
call to the marriage, clearly explains the simple step by step proce-
dure whereby the righteousness of Christ becomes the righteousness
of the saints. I assured my questioner that the living message which I
bore contained all the answers he needed, and which would be pre-
sented in the next study. So they were, and he went home a very
happy man that night.
Before we proceed any further, it is critically important that we
understand what constituted the first call to the bidden ones sub-
sequent to the making of the marriage in 1844. It is a very easy mat-
ter to do this, for there is only one event which qualifies, namely the
presentation of the message of Christ our righteousness through
God's delegated messengers, Elders Waggoner and Jones, between
1888 and 1893.
The call to come to the marriage can be no other than an appeal
on God's part to His people to eradicate from their lives that which
divides them from Christ—namely, their sinfulness, as it is written:
"But your iniquities have separated you from your God; and your
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 87

sins have hidden His face from you, so that He will not hear." Isaiah
59:2.
God requires nothing from His people unless He supplies the
means for its achievement. All His commands are accompanied by
His enablings. "As the will of man co-operates with the will of God,
it becomes omnipotent. Whatever is to be done at His command may
be accomplished in His strength. All His biddings are enablings."
Christ's Object Lessons, 333. Paul clearly understood this and di-
rects our attention to it in these words:
"Now may the God of peace Himself sanctify you completely;
and may your whole spirit, soul, and body be preserved blameless at
the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.
"He who calls you is faithful, who also will do it." 1 Thessaloni-
ans 5:23,24.
Therefore, any call to the marriage must be a clear explanation of
the sin problem, must reveal the practical procedures by which our
escape can be made, and must make available the power for the ef-
fecting of our deliverance. In all, God's holy law must be enthroned
in its rightful place. When this is done, there will be salvation from
the mistake so commonly made in regard to the role of the law, which
is the tendency to reason that if the breaking of the law robs us of
righteousness and health—which it certainly does—then the keeping
of the law will restore these things to us—which it does not!
If the law is preached to us without the saving power of the gos-
pel being revealed as the means whereby its lofty standard can be
reached, the listener becomes depressed with discouragement, and
his soul becomes darkened with despair.
This is what happened to Adventism during the years subsequent
to their becoming Laodicean from 1858 onwards. Destitute of the
faith which works by love and purifies the soul, of the white raiment
of Christ's righteousness, and of the eye salve of spiritual discern-
ment, they had preached "the law until we are as dry as the hills of
Gilboa that had neither dew nor rain." Review and Herald, March
11, 1890. For a more detailed analysis of the general condition of
Adventism between 1858 and 1888, study The Destiny of a Move-
ment, 156-163, by F. T. Wright.
I ask you now to look carefully at that period, the years between
1858 and 1888, to see if there was any call to the bidden ones during
that interval of time. Can you find a message being carried by God's
personally chosen messengers, not to the world, but to the church,
the bidden ones? If you can locate a message directed to the bidden
ones, was it the living power of the gospel of Jesus Christ, His right-
eousness, the call to put away all sin, to finish transgression, and to
bring in everlasting righteousness?
88 LAST DAY EVENTS

Search as you might, you will find no such event taking place.
The call to the bidden ones was not sounded between 1858 and
1888.
There is but one event which could possibly meet all of these
specifications, and that was the sending by the Lord of His servants,
Elders Waggoner and Jones, to the bidden ones, the Advent people,
between the years 1888 and 1893, with the message of the everlast-
ing gospel as the power of God to save from sin.
Compare the specification of the prophecy which reads as fol-
lows: He "sent out His servants to call those who were invited to the
wedding", Matthew 22:3, with these words describing the coming
of the men and the message in 1888: "The Lord in His great mercy
sent a most precious message to His people through Elders Wag-
goner and Jones." Testimonies to Ministers, 91.
The event exactly matched the prediction. This was the first call
to the Advent people. Note how the twelve and the seventy disciples
were bidden to bring their message only to the lost sheep of the
house of Israel, which they did. In like manner Waggoner and Jones
bore their message to the Advent people. They were not evangelists
to the world, but to the Church. They had not chosen that it should
be that way. It was the Lord who had decreed that it should be thus,
and they were simply obedient to His will.
But how sad the outcome!
Looking with prophetic vision down the stream of time, Jesus
had said, "They were not willing to come." Matthew 22:3. And He
was exactly correct in His forecasting as He, the greatest of all the
prophets, could only be, for the Advent people were not willing to re-
spond to the gracious invitation.
A great deal of argument and debate has arisen as to whether the
Church of 1888 did in fact reject the message sent to it. The Sev-
enth-Day Adventist Church organization of today in fact claims the
message was never rejected in the end, but rather that out of the cri-
sis arose a healthier and a better church. To support this view, they
point to the fact that there were indeed some who did receive it, that
there was no official decision taken by majority vote to reject the
message, and that a large section were uncertain as to which stand to
take.
But such argument is only a determined effort to cover up the real
story of that day and thus to avoid a facing up to the consequences
and the humiliation of the repentance and confession which such a
recognition of the true state of affairs would require.
We will not enter into any lengthy argument here to substantiate
the fact of this for there is no need. That the purpose of God was
frustrated is evident on three counts.
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 89

In the first case, there was the prophetic prediction that the bid-
den ones would not come to the marriage. Long before it ever hap-
pened, God had stated prophetically that the people would refuse to
accept the call. God who, knowing all things from the beginning and
is therefore never caught by surprise, declared far in advance what
they would do. And, despite the clear warning, they went right on
and did that very thing. They utterly refused to accept the light,
which refusal is nothing short of rejection.
In the second case, when it did happen, the Lord through His ser-
vant gave, in unmistakable language, His evaluation of what really
took place in Minneapolis during the years 1888-1893. He said,
"The prejudices and opinions that prevailed at Minneapolis are not
dead by any means." Testimonies to Ministers, 467.
Prejudice and opinion are never found at work on the side of the
Lord. Never! They are the weapons of the enemy of all righteousness
whereby he seeks to vanquish the truth. There are times when he is
very successful, and in fact it seems to be most of the time. The word
"prevailed" means to gain the upper hand, to be the victor in the con-
test. Therefore it is plain that the victory in 1888 was not gained by
the Lord and His message, but by the enemies of that message. There
is just no other meaning that could be taken from this statement.
True, men will take evidences from the history of what hap-
pened, and will reason from those evidences as men will, in an at-
tempt to make the record appear to be different from the Lord's
evaluation of it. But when the Lord has spoken and told us that it was
prejudice and opinion which prevailed at Minneapolis, then that is
the last word on the matter. Let all argument cease and let us in hu-
mility confess the fact of it and ask in sincerity as to how we can re-
cover the ground which has been lost.
But this is not the only word from the Lord to this same effect.
Again we read, "An unwillingness to yield up preconceived opinions,
and to accept this truth, lay at the foundation of a large share of the
opposition manifested at Minneapolis against the Lord's message
through Brethren Waggoner and Jones. By exciting that opposition
Satan succeeded in shutting away from our people, in a great meas-
ure, the special power of the Holy Spirit that God longed to impart to
them. The enemy prevented them from obtaining that efficiency
which might have been theirs in carrying the truth to the world, as
the apostles proclaimed it after the day of Pentecost. The light that is
to lighten the whole earth with its glory was resisted, and by the ac-
tion of our own brethren has been in a great degree kept away from
the world." Selected Messages 1:234, 235,
Again, what language could be plainer than this. It was Satan who
was the successful one in this struggle to bring the light and the effi-
90 LAST DAY EVENTS

ciency of the last warning to a perishing world. This was not due to
any failure on the Lord's part, for when His plans are obeyed, "there
can be no such thing as failure, loss, impossibility, or defeat..." De-
sire of Ages, 490. The failure is on the part of the human element
alone, and this is what kept the message from being received and ac-
cepted as it was His plan that it should have been.
Now in the third case, the simple witness of time has declared
that it was never accepted by the Church in sufficient proportion to
make it a victory for the Lord. If it had been, then the loud cry would
long ere this have been sounded, and today the faithful would be in
the kingdom.
But we are not.
Nothing is to gained by refusing to frankly confess that the mes-
sage was rejected back there, that the first call to the bidden ones
was rejected just as God foretold it would be.
So then, does this mean that we are locked in a situation from
which there is no escape? No, it does not, for, as individuals, each
one can repent as the entire Church could and should have done.
This has been but a brief discussion of the first call to the bidden
ones and their rejection of it. It is recommended that a careful study
be made of The Destiny of a Movement, by F. T. Wright. In this
book, evidences are assembled which convincingly demonstrate that
the guests refused to come when called.
It must be emphasized that the failure to accept the first call does
not bring the Church to the fatal point where the Lord says to His ser-
vants, "They which were bidden are not worthy. Pass them by and
go to another class of people."
It does not bring the church to this point because there yet re-
mains the second call, and until it is given, the Church continues to
be the divinely acknowledged people of the Lord, from which no one
should yet separate. Just as Christ and the Apostles remained with
the Jewish Church, despite the depth of her apostasy, until, but not
beyond the rejection of the second call, so there was to be no separa-
tion from the Church until the second call had been completely
rejected.
That it would be rejected is certified by the prophecy describing
the way the Church would treat the second call. It is the tragic picture
of a much more scornful and violent reaction than that with which
the first call was received. One class of bidden ones would become
violent, while the others would make light of the message, and go
about their own affairs.
The advent of the second call is the final opportunity for the
Church to respond to the invitation to come to the marriage of divin-
ity with humanity. There will never be a third call to them; never an-
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 91

other opportunity. From that time when the second call has come
and has been rejected, there never will be a third call to the Church,
which will then be as completely on her own without God as the
Jews ever have been from A.D. 34 onwards.
The question now remains as to whether or not that second call
has come to the present day bidden ones, the members of the
Seventh-day Adventist Church. To discover the answer we have but
to survey the period between 1893 and now to see if God has again
sent forth other servants with the true message of Christ and His
righteousness to make an end of sin, and to bring in everlasting
righteousness.
As is to be expected, a number of different movements have
arisen, each one of which claims to be sent by God, but a careful ex-
amination of each reveals that only one of them meets the specifica-
tions of the prophecy. That one alone comes with the gospel, the liv-
ing power of God to make a complete end of sin and establish ever-
lasting righteousness in its place.
One of the movements which fails to qualify, really preaches the
law, but without presenting the gospel as the means by which it can
be obeyed. Others have special positions on prophecy and doc-
trines, which are certainly not in harmony with the fourth angel's
message and movement. These arise with great promise, but sooner
or later come to nothing.
In the meantime, between 1888 and 1950, the books by Elders
Waggoner and Jones in which are preserved the messages God sent
through those men, had disappeared from all sight. The names of
those two men were unknown in the churches, and their sermons
were never referred to. What happened in Minneapolis, Minnesota,
U.S.A., was forgotten. Obviously, the Church leaders wanted it that
way.
But with the coming of 1950, the sleeping message could no
longer be hidden from sight. Things began to happen, and a crisis
developed which reached its climax in 1962. In fact, a great deal of
history is packed into the period between 1950-1962. It is far more
than could be reported in the limited scope of this volume, and it is
intended that a much more comprehensive work be produced to
cover this period.
We will give here, therefore, only a brief summary of these events
with something of their significance.
At the beginning of the decade, 1950-1960, two missionaries,
Elders Wieland and Short, approached the General Committee of
Seventh-day Adventists, and expressed their concern in regard to de-
velopments in the Church, and stated their conviction that there was

[LDE7]
92 LAST DAY EVENTS

an urgent need to revive the actual message of 1888 and make it

available to the Church.
Upon instruction to put the matter in writing, they produced a
volume entitled, 1888 Re-Examined, the specific argument of
which emphasized the fact that the mighty power of God could never
be seen in the Church till the mistake of 1888 was acknowledged and
rectified.
By the reply of the leaders, it is evident that they clearly under-
stood the nature of the appeal, and as equally and clearly rejected it.
Wieland and Short virtually let the matter rest there but the Lord
did not, for at the same time as the leaders were faced with this ques-
tion, the Lord so organized events that at the level of the lay people,
the message itself began to simultaneously sound again in different
lands.
Throughout the world, there were those who had been longing
for deliverance from sin, and these eagerly grasped the proffered
blessing, but among the leaders in the church, the response was
swift and decided. They saw in it something they considered danger-
ous exactly as had been prophesied they would:
"There is to be in the churches a wonderful manifestation of the
power of God, but it will not move upon those who have not hum-
bled themselves before the Lord, and opened the door of their heart
by confession and repentance. In the manifestation of that power
which lightens the earth with the glory of God, they will see only
something which in their blindness they think dangerous, something
which will arouse their fears, and they will brace themselves to resist
it. Because the Lord does not work according to their expectations
and ideal, they will oppose the work. 'Why,' they say, 'should we not
know the Spirit of God, when we have been in the work so many
years?' Because they did not respond to the warnings, the entreat-
ies, of the messages of God, but persistently said, 'I am rich, and in-
creased with goods, and have need of nothing.' " Review and Her-
ald, December 23, 1890.
As zealous for the cause of God as they were misguided in that
zeal, they began to apply various forms of pressure in order to keep
the light from entering the churches. Anyone who possessed and
read the writings of Elders Waggoner and Jones was labelled heretic,
schismatic, and dangerous. To be seen talking with this class was to
place yourself under suspicion of being one of them.
The conflict became more and more intense, until quite a number
were stripped of their positions, and disfellowshipped from Church
membership. Families were divided, old friendships were termi-
nated, and deep divisions were created. It was a period when you had
94 LAST DAY EVENTS

to know what you believed and just where you stood, or you would be
swept away in the general confusion, as so many were.
But not all adopted the role of persecutor, for there were those
who rejected the invitation "in the most scornful manner." Christ's
Object Lessons, 308.
This class made light of the call, and chose not to pay any atten-
tion to it, but went their own way, one to the cultivation of his farm,
the other to the bartering of his merchandise. At no time was this at-
titude more manifest than when the General Conference of Seventh-
day Adventists met in 1962.
As the time for this session approached, those of us who loved the
message and stood loyally for it regardless of the cost to ourselves,
saw with increasing clarity that this conference represented the last
hope that the church would accept the message. During the previous
twelve years, we had seen the light rejected at every level except the
General Conference in session. Should the delegates from all over the
world elect to support the stand taken at every lower level during
those twelve years, the rejection by the bidden ones would be com-
plete, and the Seventh-day Adventist Church would forever cease to
be the people of the Lord. They would be exactly as the Jews were at
the end of the 490 years, for the same reasons.
With the deepest concern both for the truth and the Church we
loved so dearly, we united in earnest prayer that, under the ministry
of the Holy Spirit, the delegates in session would recognize what
they should do in order to be right with God. In addition, there were
those of us who were able to attend that critical session, and ap-
pealed in person that the matter of the message be given its rightful
place.
But the matter was completely ignored. There was no discussion
of the issue, no call for repentance, and no acknowledgement that
their appalling spiritual destitution was due to their continued walk-
ing in the pathway of rejection laid down by their spiritual forbears.
By so doing they rejected the second call to them, the bidden ones,
in the most scornful manner.
The rejection was complete. The second day of opportunity had
come and gone forever, and there would never be a third.
From that day to this, the true 1888 message, the message of liv-
ing righteousness, cannot be found within that Church except as it is
brought to individuals from outside of that Church.
In whatever way one may question the channels, methods, and
instrumentalities the Lord used to bring the second call to the mar-
riage, the fact is clear that the issues involved in the second call were
held before the Church with more than sufficient clarity and pressure
as to compel the Church to give an equally clear and definite answer.
THE MARRIAGE PROPHECY-PART II 95

And at every official level from the topmost to the lowest, the an-
swer was clear, definite, and unequivocal—the Church had no time
for the message.
Of course, the leaders of the denomination claim that they have
never rejected the light, and that they truly believe in and earnestly
proclaim the Lord our righteousness. True, in an effort to disguise
and confuse the issue, she today has set forth another message
which she claims is the message of 1888, and then points to her ac-
ceptance of that as proof that she never rejected the real message.
But those who know and have experienced the power of the mes-
sage of living righteousness sent in 1888 and again today, are not
deceived.
With the finality of its answer to the question put to her for the
second time as to what she would do with the invitation to the mar-
riage, this Church has placed herself exactly where the Jews placed
themselves in A.D. 34.
This development is an extremely important one in the progres-
sion of last day events. In harmony with His principles of working,
the Lord could not turn to another class of people to give the loud cry
until the Church had confirmed her refusal to do their work.
That question is now settled. The Lord therefore commissions
another class of people to do the work which the bidden ones might
have done but have now irrevocably declared they will not.
In the prophecy it is made abundantly clear that the Seventh-day
Adventist Church will never give the loud cry in the power of the lat-
ter rain. Just as in the chapter entitled, The Four Angels, we saw that
another movement succeeds the third, so here it is clearly shown that
not the bidden ones, but the servants who gave the final call, are the
ones who become that fourth movement.
Here is the prophetic word to tell us so. "Then He said to His ser-
vants, The wedding is ready, but those who were invited were not
worthy.
" Therefore go into the highways, and as many as you find, in-
vite to the wedding.' " Matthew 22:8,9.
Those whom God is leading and directing are His people, His
Church. Who at this time is He leading? Is it the bidden ones who
have rejected His call for the second time? Or is it the servants who
gave the second call?
There is no question about the answer. The bidden ones are not
the ones to whom the King gives instructions nor the ones whom He
is leading. Instead, it is the little company of servants to whom this
high honor is extended. They are the ones to whom the King issues
His commands, while He only talks about the bidden ones who have
distanced themselves from Him. They continue to follow their own
96 LAST DAY EVENTS

way apart from him. It is to be noted here that further study in the
prophecies will show that not all the servants who took part in the
giving of the message to the bidden ones will come through to the fi-
nal work. Many are shaken out and left by the way.
The call to those in the highways and the hedges is the repre-
sentation of the loud cry given in the power of the latter rain. There
is no problem deducing this because of the fact that it is the last mes-
sage ever to be given. By this means the guests are gathered to the
marriage, and, just so soon as they are, the judgment of the living
takes place symbolized by the entrance of the King to examine the
guests. With this event, human probation ends. While those who are
clad in the wedding garment remain in the marriage chamber, those
who are dressed in the robe of their own works are expelled and con-
signed to destruction.
This prophecy would seem to indicate that the gathering in from
the highways, which is the going forth of the loud cry, takes place im-
mediately after the rejection of the second call. However, other
prophecies such as that of the Ten Virgins and the Shaking show that
a period of time elapses between the final rejection by the bidden
ones of the second call, and the commencement of the loud cry. Dur-
ing that interval, the Lord prepares the little company for their tre-
mendous work of giving the last message of mercy to a perishing
world.
Today we are in that period. Soon will come the image of the
beast and the beginning of the loud cry. By the sure word of proph-
ecy it is certain that it will be, not the bidden ones, but those servants
who will give the loud cry.
By this prophecy, we are able to tell at what point we have arrived
in the unfolding of last day events. In 1844, the marriage was made,
and the bidden ones were invited but failed to come. In 1888,
through His servants, Elders Waggoner and Jones, the first call to
those who had been bidden to the marriage was issued and rejected.
The second and final call to the bidden ones was made between
1950 and 1962, and again was flatly rejected, with the result that the
Seventh-day Adventist denomination forever ceased to be the
Church of God.
All these events are now in the past. Today, other servants are
God's channel of light during this tarrying time, and the next event
will be the outpouring of the latter rain and the giving of the loud cry.
By these revelations each of God's people can know with certainty
just where to take his stand.
 Chapter 8

Babylon
The Great
Every true believer in Jesus looks and longs for the happy day
when the forces of darkness shall have been forever vanquished, and
the kingdom of righteousness established eternally in a world where
there "shall be no more death, nor sorrow, nor crying; and there
shall be no more pain, for the former things have passed away."
Revelation 21 A.
But this day cannot come until the purpose of the great contro-
versy has been fully and permanently achieved. The law of God must
be so vindicated as the only way of life, that evil will never again have
the least opportunity to intrude itself. The only way to arrive at this
total rejection of evil and unreserved acceptance of righteousness, is
to reveal God's lovely character at its radiant best, while exposing
wickedness at its ugly worst. For a fuller study on this point, see The
Seven Angels, by F. T. Wright, Chapters 14-18.
Certainly, this climactic condition of things has not yet fully de-
veloped, but, be assured, the day of its coming to complete maturity
is steadily approaching. Moment by moment, mankind is sinking
steadily into the last great pit of apostasy, while, on the other hand,
the true people of the Lord are being separated from the world and
its corruptions. It is in the light of these purposes that we must study
the setting up of the image to the beast on the one hand, and the per-
fecting of the saints on the other.
So, the battle lines are being drawn up. While the devil is mar-
shalling his forces, the Lord is also preparing His. This is an encour-
aging picture especially when we are able to recognize these events
as fulfillments of prophecy, and know they will surely come to pass.
Unfortunately, the resolution of these issues is taking much
longer than it should have done, for God certainly did not need six
thousand years in which to solve the sin-problem introduced into the
universe by Satan. The fault lies with us, His people, who because of
unbelief have caused delay after delay. Generations have come and
gone, and movements have been raised up only to fail over and over
98 LAST DAY EVENTS

again. Thus what might have been has never yet eventuated. Though
delayed however, the promise of complete and eternal victory is
assured.
For this reason the four winds of strife are held in check until this
preparation is complete. Then every element of strife will be totally
set free to confront every element of good in the last great conflict
between the beast and his image on the one hand, and the armies of
the living God on the other. This will be the final and the finishing
conflict which will bring down the curtain on this world's history and
usher in the glorious second advent of our Lord and Saviour, Jesus
Christ. It is a conflict in which everyone living at the time will be ines-
capably involved. None will be permitted to adopt a neutral, uncom-
mitted position. In this conflict every man, woman, and child
throughout the entire earth will be compelled to take a stand on the
one side or the other. There will be no neutrals then. The very force
of the pressures of the great conflict will demand this be so, and each
must and will have to give his answer to accept one way or the other.
Therefore the subject of that conflict must be one which is of vital in-
terest to all who live upon the earth at this time.
The issues in this warfare are spiritual, but this is not to say that
the weapons of force are not going to be employed by those who are
accustomed to gaining their ends by these means. But on the side of
the truth of God, the weapons will be spiritual and not carnal, and
God through His Church, will resist the powers of darkness by the
proclamation of the mighty message contained in the first part of
Revelation 18.
As we are interested in the order of last day events here, let us
look at this Scripture from that point of view. Considerable light is
thrown on the matter by comparing it with a very similar message
which is found in Revelation 14:8 where we read, "And another an-
gel followed, saying, 'Babylon is fallen, is fallen, that great city, be-
cause she has made all nations drink of the wine of the wrath of her
fornication.' "
This is the message of the second angel, and "The second an-
gel's message of Revelation 14 was first preached in the summer of
1844 . . . ." Great Controversy, 389. Its proclamation followed the
sounding forth of the first angel's message which went before it, and
declared the result of the rejection of the first angel's presentation of
the everlasting gospel and the warning of impending judgment. Note
carefully the difference in the wording between these two messages.
In the first angel's message the proclamation was that the hour of
God's judgment had come, which is another thing than saying,
"God's judgment is come,"
The first statement, "the hour of the judgment is come," does
BABYLON THE GREAT 99

not say that judgment has actually come, but that we are within the
hour when it will come. Therefore, this message declares the immi-
nence of the judgment, but not the actual arrival of it.
The other statement, "The judgment is come", cannot be truth-
fully preached until the judgment has actually commenced. Thus, be-
tween 1831 and October 22, 1844, it was proper to preach that
"the hour of God's judgment is come", but since that time, it has
been proper to announce that, for the righteous dead, the judgment
itself has come.
This distinction must be clearly established in our minds in order
to understand the difference between the first and second angel's
messages. Reference to the second angel's message shows that it
was written in the present tense. It declares, not that the hour of
Babylon's fall is come, but that she is fallen. Therefore that message
could not be proclaimed until it could be proclaimed in truth. That is
to say that first Babylon must fall, and then, and only then, could go
forth the message, "Babylon is fallen."
The judgment of the dead commenced in October, 1844, at the
end of the 2,300 year prophetic period, but the message announcing
that the hou r of God's judgment had come was preached for thirteen
years before that, as it was quite proper to do. As a result of the rejec-
tion of that message, Babylon fell.
"The churches then experienced a moral fall, in consequence of
their refusal of the light of the advent message . . . ." Great Contro-
versy, 389. So fell the Babylon which was under the test and trial of
God's truth at that time. And immediately after it had fallen, the Lord
commissioned the second angel to announce the fact of it and to call
the true people of God out of the fallen churches.
But, let this point be noted with care—it is a simple fact of history
that that message did not go until it could be proclaimed as present
truth. And it would never have been truth to say that Babylon is
fallen, if that event was still future. God does not lie in His messages.
They speak the truth. Therefore, when He sends a message that
Babylon is fallen, then that message does not come until Babylon is
fallen.
So then, this brings us to the point where we can compare with
profit the second angel's message of Revelation 14:8, and the mes-
sage of the angel of Revelation 18:1-4. At first they may seem to be
identical but there is a very vital difference and it is this. The second
angel announces that Babylon is fallen, while in Revelation 18 the
announcement is that Babylon the Great is fallen. It is very much in
order here to raise the question as to what difference there is be-
tween Babylon and Babylon the Great.
As stated at the outset of this series, it will be assumed that our
100 LAST DAY EVENTS

readers possess certain background information so that it will be un-

necessary to go back through all that here. But a few basics will be
repeated. Babylon is the Bible name given to apostate and corrupt
forms of religion at war with God, just as the term Israel is the identi-
fying name given to the loyal and true people of God. And, in the
New Testament period through to the second advent of Christ, these
two, Babylon and Israel, uphold respectively the same principles,
evil and righteous, as were held by the Babylon and the Israel of the
Old Testament.
The Papacy as well as ancient Rome, held the principles of Baby-
lon and in unrighteousness warred against God and His truth in the
person of His saints. But they were not the Babylon which fell in
1844, for they had been in a fallen condition for centuries before
that time. The Babylon which fell at that time was the Protestant
churches to whom God had sent the light of truth and who flatly re-
fused to receive that truth.
"Babylon is said to be 'the mother of harlots.' By her daughters
must be symbolized churches that cling to her doctrines and tradi-
tions, and follow her example of sacrificing the truth and the ap-
proval of God, in order to form an unlawful alliance with the world.
The message of Revelation 14, announcing the fall of Babylon must
apply to religious bodies that were once pure and have become cor-
rupt. Since this message follows the warning of the judgment, it must
be given in the last days; therefore it cannot refer to the Roman
Church alone, for that church has been in a fallen condition for many
centuries." Great Controversy, 382, 383.
So, since 1844, the membership of Babylon has been increasing
and its depth of sinfulness has also been developing as we read in the
following statement.
"But the message of the second angel did not reach its complete
fulfillment in 1844. The churches then experienced a moral fall, in
consequence of their refusal of the light of the advent message; but
that fall was not complete. As they have continued to reject the spe-
cial truths for this time they have fallen lower and lower. Not yet,
however, can it be said that 'Babylon is fallen, . . . because she made
all nations drink of the wine of the wrath of her fornication.' She
has not yet made all nations do this. The spirit of world conforming
and indifference to the testing truths for our time exists and has been
gaining ground in churches of the Protestant faith in all the countries
of Christendom; and these churches are included in the solemn and
terrible denunciation of the second angel. But the work of apostasy
has not yet reached its culmination." Great Controversy, 389.
But the churches cannot continue to fall forever. There must
come a time when the two sides are developed and the last confron-
102 LAST DAY EVENTS

plied to it, for this last Babylon exhibits the greatest unity and great-
est hostility towards God of any Babylonian group in history.
Now the message of the Revelation 18 angel is concerned with
Babylon the Great and announces, not that the hour of her fall has
come, but that she is fallen. Therefore, in the light of the above facts
regarding the first and second angel's messages, it is evident that the
message of the Revelation 18 angel cannot and will not go under
God's direction and leadership until the fact of it is accomplished and
it can be stated in very truth that Babylon the Great is fallen.
This immediately raises the question as to whether this is already
present truth or is it a situation yet to be reached. If Babylon the
Great is not yet fallen, what further depths of apostasy must yet be
reached before this becomes the case?
From Great Controversy, 603, we learn that that message was
still future at the time of the writing of the last edition in 1911. After
quoting the scripture from Revelation 18:1, 2, 4, the text goes on to
say, "This scripture points forward to a time when the an-
nouncement of the fall of Babylon, as made by the second angel of
Revelation 14, (verse 8) is to be repeated, with the additional men-
tion of the corruptions which have been entering the various organi-
zations that constitute Babylon, since that message was first given,
in the summer of 1844."
The time referred to in the above statement is not a moment of
time but a period of time. It is the period of time, as yet of unknown
length, during which the message goes forward announcing the fall
of Babylon and calling on the true people of God to come out of her.
It was still future at the time of the writing of the above statement,
but for how long in the future? Inasmuch as we know that there will
never be another message based on definite time, then we cannot ex-
pect that we shall be informed anywhere in the Word of God of the
exact date, but we can expect to be told of the exact conditions
which will bring Babylon the Great to the place where the message
can go forth in truth that she is fallen.
Let us then begin to assemble the information by which we can
determine the answer to these questions. On the very next page to
that quoted above we read, "Of Babylon, at the time brought to view
in this prophecy, it is declared, 'Her sins have reached unto heaven,
and God hath remembered her iniquities.' Revelation 18:5. She has
filled up the measure of her guilt, and destruction is about to fall
upon her. But God still has a people in Babylon; and before the visi-
tation of His judgments these faithful ones must be called out, that
they partake not of her sins and 'receive not of her plagues.' " Great
Controversy, 604.
The time brought to view in this prophecy is the time when the
BABYLON THE GREAT 103

message goes forth that Babylon the Great is fallen, never to rise
again. This will be because the sins of Babylon will have reached as
high as heaven and she will have filled up the measure of her guilt. In
other words, she will have defied God to the uttermost limit. Her re-
bellion against the Almighty, the Creator of the heavens and the
earth, will know no bounds, and will finally be supported by every
man, woman, and child in the world, apart from the true people of
God.
And we are able to ascertain from the Word of God just what
event will bring them to the place where their sins will have reached
unto heaven. Here are two statements, which, when read together,
give us the information we are seeking. In the first one you will read
that the law of God is to be made void when the Sunday law is
passed. This is the time of the setting up of the image to the beast as
we learned earlier in this book. Then the second statement tells us
that the sins of the world will have reached unto heaven when the law
of God is made void. So, these words tell us as plainly as it ever could
be told that the point of time when Babylon the Great is finally fallen
is that point of time when the law of God is made void in the land by
the enforcement of the Sunday law, by which act they fill up the
measure of their guilt, and their sins will reach unto heaven above.
Read the truth of it in these statements.
"A time is coming when the law of God is, in a special sense, to
be made void in our land. The rulers of our nation will, by legislative
enactments, enforce the Sunday law, and thus God's people be
brought into great peril. When our nation, in its legislative councils,
shall enact laws to bind the consciences of men in regard to their re-
ligious privileges, enforcing Sunday observance, and bringing op-
pressive power to bear against those who keep the seventh-day Sab-
bath, the law of God will, to all intents and purposes, be made void
in our land; and national apostasy will be followed by national ruin."
Review and Herald, December 18,1888.
"The sins of the world will have reached unto heaven when the
law of God is made void; when the Sabbath of the Lord is trampled in
the dust, and men are compelled to accept in its stead an institution
of the papacy through the strong hand of the law of the land. In exalt-
ing an institution of man above the institution ordained of God, they
show contempt for the great Lawgiver, and refuse His sign or seal."
Review and Herald, November 5,1889.
In addition to the above there is also the statement from Testimo-
nies 5:451, where the same truth is expressed as follows: "By the
decree enforcing the institution of the papacy in violation of the law
of God, our nation will disconnect herself fully from righteousness."
To disconnect one's self fully from righteousness is to come to
104 LAST DAY EVENTS

the place where one can go no further in departing from the living
God. This is to fill up the measure of iniquity and guilt and to have
one's sins reach to heaven itself. And when will this be accom-
plished? It will be accomplished by the making of the decree which
will enforce the worship of the institution of the Papacy which we
know to be the enforcement of the Sunday law.
It is of course apparent that at the time of the writing of this
study, that event is still future. Not yet have the churches secured the
power of the law of the land in the United States first of all, to en-
force their decrees and to sustain their dogmas. But that time is com-
ing with the utmost certainty, and as surely as it comes, then as
surely will the fall of Babylon the Great be complete. And then, just
so surely will the time have come when the message announcing that
fall will ring out under the direction of the angel who lightens the
whole earth with his glory. It will go then as a present truth in very
fact.
As stated previously in this series, the point of time when the im-
age of the beast is set up is a positive land mark. It is a point of time
when a stage of committal by both the world and the true Church of
God is reached from which there can be and will be no turning back
by either party. It is a point to which the devil is now developing the
apostasy in the churches under his control and it is also a point to-
ward which the Lord is developing a faithful remnant to fight His bat-
tles in that decisive day. These two lines of development will come to
the same focal point at the same time and already both are well ad-
vanced in their development. There is but little yet to be fulfilled be-
fore that critical hour is reached. Already the unity of the churches,
an event which immediately precedes the enforcement of the Sunday
law and of which we learned in chapter one of this series, is very near
to being a fully accomplished fact, and when it is an accomplished
fact, then the image of the beast will be formed, the sins of Babylon
the Great will have reached unto heaven, the cup of iniquity will be
full, and her fall complete. Then the time will have come for the mes-
sage to go forth, "Babylon the great is fallen."
This proclamation is a most important development in the gen-
eral giving of the loud cry, and it will be given with a power which
will lighten the whole earth with the glory of the angel. This is made
very clear in the following statement:
"I saw angels hurrying to and fro in heaven, descending to the
earth, and again ascending to heaven, preparing for the fulfillment of
some important event. Then I saw another mighty angel commis-
sioned to descend to the earth, to unite his voice with the third an-
gel, and give power and force to his message. Great power and glory
were imparted to the angel, and as he descended, the earth was light-
BABYLON THE GREAT 105

ened with his glory. The light which attended this angel penetrated
everywhere, as he cried mighty, with a strong voice, 'Babylon the
great is fallen, is fallen, and is become the habitation of devils, and
the hold of every foul spirit, and a cage of every unclean and hateful
bird.' The message of the fall of Babylon, as given by the second an-
gel, is repeated, with the additional mention of the corruptions
which have been entering the churches since 1844. The work of this
angel comes in at the right time to join in the last great work of the
third angel's message as it swells to a loud cry. And the people of
God are thus prepared to stand in the hour of temptation, which they
are soon to meet. I saw a great light resting upon them, and they
united to fearlessly proclaim the third angel's message." Early Writ-
ings, 277.
Then it is plain and clear that the order of events is that, just as
soon as the powers of church and state combine to enforce the de-
crees of the church in respect to the Sunday law, then the fall of
Babylon is complete. This will be the signal for the descent of the
mighty angel of Revelation 18:1-4, who joins the powerful work of
the third angel as his ministry swells to a loud cry.
Chapter 9

The Message
Swells
It is most important to understand that, "The work of this angel
[that is, the Revelation 18, or fourth angel] comes in at the right
time to join in the last great work of the third angel's message as it
swells to a loud cry." Early Writings, 277.
So then, before the image of the beast is set up, and the fall of
Babylon the Great is thereby completed, such outpourings of spiri-
tual power will take place as will cause the message of the third angel
to swell to the loud cry. This means that we do not have to wait until
the passing of the law enforcing Sunday worship, for the first out-
pourings of spiritual power. Thus, the people of the Lord will be in-
creasingly endowed with fitness to meet the mounting crisis in the
world and in the churches. At the same time, as I will shortly demon-
strate, these manifestations of divine power through God's faithful
children, will be a significant factor in bringing about the fall of Baby-
lon the Great.
The same thought of the third angel's message swelling to the
point where the entire earth is filled with the glory of the angel, is ex-
pressed in a number of statements such as the one following:
"The third angel, flying in the midst of heaven and heralding the
commandments of God and the testimony of Jesus, represents our
work. The message loses none of its force in the angel's onward
flight, for John sees it increasing in strength and power until the
whole earth is lightened with its glory. The course of God's com-
mandment-keeping people is onward, ever onward. The message of
truth that we bear must go to nations, tongues, and peoples. Soon it
will go with a loud voice, and the earth will be lightened with its
glory. Are we preparing for this great outpouring of the Spirit of
God?" Testimonies 5:383.
It is also evident that the forming of the Sunday law is not some-
thing that will steal upon us so secretly that we will not know of its
coming before it is actually made. On the contrary, it will be seen to
THE MESSAGE SWELLS 107

be approaching, and when it is, the third angel will exhibit a power
unseen before. The following statement verifies this:
"Heretofore those who presented the truths of the third angel's
message have often been regarded as mere alarmists. Their predic-
tions that religious intolerance would gain control in the United
States, that church and state would unite to persecute those who
keep the commandments of God, have been pronounced groundless
and absurd. It has been confidently declared that this land could
never become other than what it has been—the defender of religious
freedom. But as the question of enforcing Sunday observance is
widely agitated, the event so long doubted and disbelieved is seen to
be approaching, and the third message will produce an effect which
it could not have had before." Great Controversy, 605, 606.
This picture of a message growing in power, brightness, and
spiritual force, is further witnessed to in these words written in the
context of what took place around Pentecost:
"And today God is still using His church to make known His pur-
pose in the earth. Today the heralds of the cross are going from city
to city, and from land to land, preparing the way for the second ad-
vent of Christ. The standard of God's law is being exalted. The Spirit
of the Almighty is moving upon men's hearts, and those who re-
spond to its influence become witnesses for God and His truth. In
many places consecrated men and women may be seen communicat-
ing to others the light that has made plain to them the way of salva-
tion through Christ. And as they continue to let their light shine, as
did those who were baptized with the Spirit on the Day of Pentecost,
they receive more and still more of the Spirit's power. Thus the earth
is to be lightened with the glory of God." Acts of the Apostles, 53.
It will be readily discerned that, seemingly, we are confronted
with two contradictory pictures in regard to the sounding of the final
warning. One of these reveals a message given in the power of the
latter rain which cannot go forth until the fall of Babylon is complete.
Such is the picture given by Revelation 18:1-4. The impression is
thus gained of the fourth angel being absolutely silent until Babylon's
fall has reached its uttermost limits, whereupon he suddenly gives
voice to his message under full power. It is a seeming leap from noth-
ing to everything which seems to direct our minds back to the sudden
descent of the Holy Spirit both at Pentecost and at the Midnight Cry
during the summer and autumn of 1844.
In seeming contradiction to this concept, we are faced with other
statements which picture a swelling of the great light of the message
up till the time when the work of the fourth "angel comes in at the
right time to join in the last great work of the third angel's message
as it swells to a loud cry." Early Writings, 277.
[LDE81
108 LAST DAY EVENTS

These other statements give no support for the idea of going

from nothing to everything, but rather support the idea of growth
until the time of surging growth takes place due to a considerable in-
crease in the amount of rain. There will also be continued growth
during the loud cry.
The facts are that both sets of statements are correct. Prior to the
sudden outpouring of the latter rain, there will be a mighty swelling
in the power of the third angel's message, without which Babylon
would not completely fall. This swelling in the work of the third angel
is essential for achieving either the salvation or the utter desolation
of earth's last dwellers. This situation will be developed through the
application of the principle that gospel truth either hardens or it sof-
tens. Never does it leave a person the way it found him.
"Let ministers and people remember that gospel truth hardens
when it does not save. The rejection of light leaves men captives,
bound about by chains of darkness and unbelief. The soul that re-
fuses to listen to the invitations of mercy from day to day can soon
listen to the most urgent appeals without an emotion stirring his
soul." Testimonies5:681.
Pharaoh of Egypt provides an excellent example of this princi-
ple. When Moses first arrived in the monarch's presence, the king
was far from being the hardened, ruthless potentate he had become
by the time he had rejected ten loving appeals from the Sovereign of
the universe. Each entreaty rejected produced an evil effect on Phar-
aoh's character until he had completely sold himself to Satan.
"God destroys no man. Everyone who is destroyed will have de-
stroyed himself. Everyone who stifles the admonitions of conscience
is sowing the seeds of unbelief, and these will produce a sure har-
vest. By rejecting the first warning from God, Pharaoh of old sowed
the seeds of obstinacy, and he reaped obstinacy. God did not compel
him to disbelieve. The seed of unbelief which he sowed produced a
harvest of its kind. Thus his resistance continued, until he looked
upon his devastated land, upon the cold, dead form of his first-born,
and the first-born of all in his house and of all the families in his king-
dom, until the waters of the sea closed over his horses and his chari-
ots and his men of war. His history is a fearful illustration of the truth
of the words that 'whatsoever a man soweth, that shall he also reap.'
Galatians 6:7. Did men but realize this, they would be careful what
seed they sow." Christ's Object Lessons, 84, 85.
The same outworking is to be seen in the development of the
deepest apostasy in the Jewish leaders who resisted and rejected
Christ's ministry of love. When the Saviour appeared on earth, these
men were far from being filled with the fanatical pride and seething
hatred which controlled them as they screamed to Pilate to crucify
THE MESSAGE SWELLS 109

the blessed Saviour. Each day on which they had come in contact
with the divine character of Jesus, their refusal to yield and repent
had a fearful hardening effect on them, until, by the time Jesus stood
in Pilate's judgment hall, those men were in the deepest apostasy.
While many of the priests and people were still open to receive
the light, those leaders who had rejected and warred against Christ,
received no benefit from the former rain whatsoever. Their first step
was taken in the hardening of their hearts when they refused to sub-
mit to the convicting power of the Holy Spirit in the ministry of John
the Baptist. Once they had taken that step, they never ever after-
wards placed their feet in the right pathway again, as the following
statement declares:
"I was pointed back to the proclamation of the first advent of
Christ. John was sent in the spirit and power of Elijah to prepare the
way of Jesus. Those who rejected the testimony of John were not
benefited by the teachings of Jesus. Their opposition to the message
that foretold His coming placed them where they could not readily re-
ceive the strongest evidence that He was the Messiah. Satan led on
those who rejected the message of John to go still farther, to reject
and crucify Christ. In doing this they placed themselves where they
could not receive the blessing on the day of Pentecost, which would
have taught them the way into the heavenly sanctuary. The rendering
of the veil of the temple showed that the Jewish sacrifices and ordi-
nances would no longer be received. The great Sacrifice had been of-
fered and had been accepted, and the Holy Spirit which descended
on the day of Pentecost carried the minds of the disciples from the
earthly sanctuary to the heavenly, where Jesus had entered by His
own blood, to shed upon His disciples the benefits of His atonement.
But the Jews were left in total darkness. They lost all the light which
they might have had upon the plan of salvation, and still trusted in
their useless sacrifices and offerings. The heavenly sanctuary had
taken the place of the earthly, yet they had no knowledge of the
change. Therefore they could not be benefited by the mediation of
Christ in the holy place." Early Writings, 259, 260.
The same principles operated in the sounding of the three an-
gel's messages in 1844.
"Those who rejected the first message could not be benefited by
the second; neither were they benefited by the midnight cry, which
was to prepare them to enter with Jesus by faith into the most holy
place of the heavenly sanctuary. And by rejecting the two former
messages, they have so darkened their understanding that they can
see no light in the third angel's message, which shows the way into
the most holy place. I saw that as the Jews crucified Jesus, so the
nominal churches had crucified these messages, and therefore they
THE MESSAGE SWELLS 111

have no knowledge of the way into the most holy, and they cannot be
benefited by the intercession of Jesus there. Like the Jews, who of-
fered their useless sacrifices, they offer up their useless prayers to
the apartment which Jesus has left; and Satan, pleased with the de-
ception, assumes a religious character, and leads the minds of these
professed Christians to himself, working with his power, his signs
and lying wonders, to fasten them in his snare." Early Writings,
260,261.
God intended that the outpouring of the former rain would have
fitted the members of the Church for translation, but the Church
drifted instead into apostasy.
Likewise, God planned that the mighty outpouring of the Holy
Spirit by which the Midnight Cry was given, would have fitted the Ad-
vent people for translation as is clearly stated in these words:
"The history of ancient Israel is a striking illustration of the past
experience of the Adventist body. God led His people in the advent
movement, even as He led the children of Israel from Egypt. In the
great disappointment their faith was tested as was that of the He-
brews at the Red Sea. Had they still trusted to the guiding hand that
had been with them in their past experience, they would have seen
the salvation of God. If all who had labored unitedly in the work in
1844, had received the third angel's message and proclaimed it in
the power of the Holy Spirit, the Lord would have wrought mightily
with their efforts. A flood of light would have been shed upon the
world. Years ago the inhabitants of the earth would have been
warned, the closing work completed, and Christ would have come for
the redemption of His people." Great Controversy, 457, 458.
But the Lord will not fail. He will make a total and final end of
sins, and will bring in everlasting righteousness, by exposing sin at
its ugly worst side by side with righteousness at its shining best.
It will be through the messages carried by the three angels, and

^ STEPPING UPWARD

In the kingdom and work of God the opportunities for greater attain-
ment will never cease. There is no stopping place, no level at which we can
say that now we know everything that there is to be known, have done all
that there is to be done, and have attained to infinity of excellence. Thus,
unfolding light which shines more and more unto the perfect day, is re-
vealed through never-ending sets of ascending steps by which we are ele-
vated from one level of life and light to the next.
So it is that in the closing up of the work, increasing light is a vital fac-
tor necessitating the ministry of a number of angels, each one of whom
adds his contribution to those who have preceded him. Thus the message
will swell to the loud cry.
112 LAST DAY EVENTS

the fourth angel, that this victory shall be gained. Therefore, we

need to understand the roles of the angels in bringing Babylon the
Great to the place where her disguise is swept away, and she stands
exposed for what she is, the ultimate manifestation of evil, "the
mother of prostitutes and of the abominations of the earth". Revela-
tion 17:5.
This was to have been accomplished by the presentation of the
first, second, and third angel's ministries shortly after 1844, but by
1858, the Advent people had sunk into the Laodicean condition, in
which state they were destitute of the gospel, and therefore had no
power with which to unmask Babylon the Great. So time tarried, the
end of all things being delayed.
Then, in 1888, came the advent of the fourth angel. See The
Seven Angels, chapter eleven entitled, "The Fourth Angel". This
angel's message is a restatement of the messages of the first, sec-
ond, and third angels, which come with even greater force, depth,
and clarity than during the first presentation.
Of necessity, the angel had to firstly do his work among the Ad-
vent people before he could proclaim his truths to the world. This is
because the Advent people who should have been thoroughly con-
versant with the message, had lost it so completely that they were
unable to recognize it for what it is—the third angel's message in ver-
ity, and had to ask Sister White to identify the message for them as
she wrote:
"Several have written to me, inquiring if the message of justifica-
tion by faith is the third angel's message, and I have answered, 'It is
the third angel's message in verity.' " Review and Herald, April 1,
1890.
"This message was to bring more prominently before the world
the uplifted Saviour, the sacrifice for the sins of the whole world. It
presented justification through faith in the Surety; it invited the peo-
ple to receive the righteousness of Christ, which is made manifest in
obedience to all the commandments of God. Many had lost sight of
Jesus. They needed to have their eyes directed to His divine person,
His merits, and His changeless love for the human family. All power
is given into His hands, that He may dispense rich gifts unto men, im-
parting the priceless gift of His own righteousness to the helpless hu-
man agent. This is the message that God commanded to be given to
the world. It is the third angel's message, which is to be proclaimed
with a loud voice, and attended with the outpouring of His Spirit in a
large measure." Testimonies to Ministers, 91.
That is exactly the message which possesses the capacity to fin-
ish the work by bringing all men to make their final decision. Of the
appearance of that message in 1888, it is written:
THE MESSAGE SWELLS 113

"The time of test is just upon us, for the loud cry of the third an-
gel has already begun in the revelation of the righteousness of Christ,
the sin-pardoning Redeemer. This is the beginning of the light of the
angel whose glory shall fill the whole earth." Review and Herald,
November 22, 1892.
But, while the message of the loud cry was sounding in the Sev-
enth-day Adventist Church, the loud cry had not yet begun out in the
world, nor do we see the message swelling toward the loud cry out-
side of the Church. What we do see is the first steps of what would
have become the loud cry at full power. That development should
have fully taken place subsequent to the advent of the fourth angel
between 1888 and 1893, who, having taught the message to the Ad-
vent people, would lead them to give the final warning to all
mankind.
The plan was never implemented due to the stubborn unbelief of
the ministry followed by the people, which means that we have yet to
see the first four angels doing their appointed ministries by which the
end will be brought about.
At the time of writing this book, the fourth angel has returned as
the teacher of righteousness to the tiny remnant of the Advent peo-
ple who have proved themselves faithful to their divine Leader. With
eager expectation, we, the faithful ones, wait with longing for the
outpouring of the latter rain.
Furthermore, the message of the third angel must be swelling to
the loud cry at the time leading up to the entry of the Revelation 18
angel into the sphere of activity.
Therefore, we are to expect to see more and still more of the
Holy Spirit being poured out under the ministry of the third angel,
even though there are no visible sightings yet of the actual enforce-
ment of the Sunday laws.
In summary then the sequence leading up to the entry of the pow-
erful Revelation 18 angel in latter rain power to the outside world to
whom is given the final warning, is as follows:
Firstly, the mighty angel comes down and reveals the message of
the third angel in verity to the spiritually responsive among the Ad-
vent people.
This inevitably leads to the faithful ones becoming cast out from
among and by their former brethren.
The fourth angel continues his work of educating the faithful
ones. His work is made much more effective by their being
separated.
The time comes as the apostasy in the world around God's chil-
dren deepens, that they will be constrained by the Holy Spirit to pro-
claim the truth of Christ and His righteousness. This will be a quiet
114 LAST DAY EVENTS

work at first, but, under the Holy Spirit's guidance and blessing, will
swell toward the loud cry.
At the right moment, just when the image of the beast is set up,
the fourth angel will join the third as the message of the latter swells
into the loud cry.
It is then that the last great battle in the great controversy will be-
gin in earnest, and will not end until a full and final decision is
reached by everyone on earth.
 Chapter 10

A Worldwide
Union
Babylon is a power which is not limited to a single geographical
location, but is found throughout the length and breadth of the
earth. Therefore, she will manifest the same spirit, and work toward
the same ends in every part of earth as, having gained control of all
the governmental powers in the various nations of the world, she will
be able to do. So it will be that the image of the beast will be formed
in every locality where men dwell, and the complete fall of Babylon
the Great will be global in magnitude. What a collapse that will be!
The falling will begin in the United States of America, where the im-
age of the beast will first be formed, followed by country after coun-
try putting the image to work in territory after territory, and thus
bringing about their falls, each in their turn.
It is difficult enough to accept the eventuality of the total depriva-
tion of personal freedom to worship God according to the guidelines
of an enlightened conscience even in the so-called Christian nations,
in this age when personal freedom is regarded as an inalienable
right, but it is much more difficult to believe it will happen within
those nations where the Christian God is not recognized at all.
Consider first of all the mammoth difficulty of great Babylon's as-
sembling all the so-called Christian nations in one united body under
her sole leadership and control. While it is true that the Pope of
Rome enjoys more respect than ever before from many both of
Catholic and non-Catholic persuasion, there are deep divisions
within the Church itself. She is not yet able to present a united front
to the world. There are many who have not forgotten the Protestant
Reformation, and there are other religions which are anti-Catholic.
Yet, all these differences will be dissolved as the terrible pres-
sures are brought to bear on the peoples of the earth. They will not
agree on every fine detail, but will unite with each other "upon such
points of doctrine as are held by them in common." Great Contro-
versy, 445.
It will be a time of dreadful suffering, for:
116 LAST DAY EVENTS

"Every century of profligacy has treasured up wrath against the

day of wrath; and when the time comes, and the iniquity is full, then
God will do His strange work. It will be found a terrible thing to have
worn out the divine patience; for the wrath of God will fall so signally
and strongly that it is presented as being unmixed with mercy; and
the very earth will be desolated. It is at the time of the national apos-
tasy, when, acting on the policy of Satan, the rulers of the land will
rank themselves on the side of the man of sin—it is then the measure
of guilt is full; the national apostasy is the signal for national ruin."
Selected Messages 2:372.
It will be a horrific reaping such as no pen could portray nor voice
describe. Committed to the concept that the objective is so essential
for mankind to even survive, that the end justifies even the most un-
lawful means which may be employed to secure it, the various fac-
tions dividing Christendom will seize upon any solution which prom-
ises deliverance. The churches will claim that only a "return to obe-
dience to God", will suffice to save them, and under the increasing
desperation of their life-threatening situation, even those so-called
Christians who had previously warred against the Papacy, will give
the system their unqualified support.
So too will the nations who do not in any way recognize any God
but their own, cast in their lot with the Papacy. I think of such mighty
earthly powers as Russia and China, and lesser such forces of Viet-
nam, Korea, and Cuba. Then there is the Moslem world where Chris-
tianity is held to scorn. Think of Hinduism, Buddhism, Shintoism,
and many more. Look upon the incredible depth of hatred of the Jew
and the Arab against each other. All these have manifested what
seemed to be implacable hatred against Christianity and for one an-
other. So bitter and enduring has been the hostility against each
other, that it is most difficult to believe the day would ever come
when all of them at the same time will be united in the common
cause of setting up the image of the beast.
Despite the seeming impossibility of there being one union of
every one of Satan's forces, the Word of God unhesitatingly predicts
that there will be one vast confederacy of evil, all the members of
which will be working under a single head toward the same objec-
tives. This being so, we must consider the evidences contained in the
prophecies. Familiarization with these will save us from delusion,
our understanding being established, not by what we might believe
will happen, but by what the Lord, through the Scriptures, says will
happen.
So we take our unaided eyes off the confusing and discordant
world scene, and look instead upon the Word of God and ask that
Word by His Spirit, the grave question which is before us, and, in
A WORLDWIDE UNION 117

that Word, we shall find that nothing less than the whole world will
give its allegiance to the Papacy. Every nation, kindred, tongue, and
people on the face of the whole earth will do this and nothing less. It
matters not that the witness of sight and circumstances may appear
to deny this at the time when this is written. The fact is that the Lord
has said that it will be so and therefore that is how it will be. God has
spoken, and it is only a matter of time before that which He has spo-
ken will most certainly be fulfilled.
Let us turn to the Word of God and see the truth of it written
there. In Revelation 13:8, after reading of the restoration of the Pa-
pacy to power, comes this statement, "And all who dwell on the
earth will worship him, whose names have not been written in the
book of life of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world.''
In this verse are brought to view two classes. There are those
whose names are written in the Lamb's book of life, and obviously
they are the ones who serve God in spirit and in truth in every na-
tion, kindred, tongue, and people. These are the only exceptions
given. All the rest of those who dwell on the earth shall worship the
beast. In that day, we shall be numbered among the one or the other
of these two classes whether we like it or not. Either we shall be
among those who have their names written in the book of life and
therefore have the power to resist the beast and his image, or we
shall be worshipers of that beast and his image.
How this will be is made plain from previous verses in the chap-
ter. In verse 4, it is evident that a situation arises wherein the beast is
able to make such a display of power as to intimidate the rest of the
world to the place where they say, "Who is like the beast? Who is
able to make war with him?" This is but another way of saying that
the beast is too powerful to give anyone the slightest hope of victory
in any contest with him. And so it is then that, "he was given author-
ity over every tribe, tongue, and nation." verse 7, as a result of
which all who dwell upon the earth shall worship him willingly or un-
willingly except for those whose names are written in the book of
life.
We look upon the world today and we see that the nations of the
earth are divided in their attitude to the Papal power with the larger
proportion of the earth's people in positive, open hostility to the Pa-
pacy, and we ask as to how it could ever be that such could come to
the place where they would worship this potentate.
But when we do look upon that scene as it is today and draw the
conclusions we do, we do so without realizing that our conclusion is
dependent upon our holding a certain concept as to what worship is.
We naturally think of worship as being a willing reverence of the one
whom we worship—of being something that is given because we
118 LAST DAY EVENTS

want to give it. Without a doubt this must be true so far as the wor-
ship of God is concerned, for it is the only kind of worship accept-
able to Him, but it is not true so far as the worship of the beast and
his image is concerned. This is a worship which is forced from the
worshiper because the power of the potentate is of such magnitude
as to command that worship be given whether the person desires to
give it or not.
For every truth in the New Testament there is a type in the Old,
and the type of the enforcing of Sunday worship on the part of
modern Babylon is to be found in the enforcement of the worship of
the golden image on the plains of Dura in the days of King
Nebuchadnezzar.
He was the pope of that day, and he it was who called the people
of every nation to the worship of his golden image, in response to
which call, the people or their representatives came, for they dared
not stay away. The conditions explicitly stated in that call were: Obey
or die.
In Revelation 13, we read that the death penalty hangs over the
head of all those who do not worship the beast and his image. This is
but the antitype of the type found in the days of King Nebuchadnez-
zar, for he threatened with death all those who refused to bow down
before the golden image. As it was then, so it is again today.
At that time there were gathered together the rulers of the people
of all the nations of the whole world over which Babylon then had
power. And every one of them was required to worship the power of
Babylon under pain of death. Knowing well the spirit of rebellion
which dwells in the hearts of the conquered, we can know that many
of those who bowed that day bowed, not because they had a mind to
worship the golden image, the symbol of the power of Babylon, but
because they had a mind not to go into the burning fiery furnace.
They worshiped, it is true, but not because of any love for Babylon,
but rather because of fear of her power, and because they were so
held in the grip of her power that they had no option but to obey or
to perish.
That which has been will be. Therefore the hatred which these
nations possess for the Papacy and the western world which protects
and fosters the Papacy, is not evidence at all in the case for not be-
lieving that the Papacy will gain the worship of the whole world. She
will do so because she will obtain the power to do so. A situation will
develop through the power of spiritualism and the power of the
United States under the leadership of spiritualism, which will give
back to the Papacy the supremacy of the world.
On the plains of Dura there were two classes of people standing
before that image and two only. They were the people of the whole
A WORLDWIDE UNION 119

world who bowed before the image, and there were the faithful few,
only three in number, who had no fear of the power of Babylon and
whose names were written in the Lamb's book of life. These alone
did not bow before that image, and so it will be again. A faithful few
will know the power of God, and thus will be able to stand against
the power of Babylon the Great.
It is the third angel who gives the specific warning against the
worship of the beast and his image and against receiving his mark in
his forehead or in his hand. To whom does he give this warning? The
answer must be to those who are in danger of doing the very thing
against which this warning is given. It therefore must be that the an-
gel will go wherever the people of the earth are in peril of making so
terrible a mistake. If there is no danger to any particular people from
this peril, then he will not take the specific warning against the beast
and his image to them, but will sound another warning to cover the
particular peril in which they stood. That is to say, if, in the last days,
Russia and China will not worship the beast and his image, then
there would be no point in warning the people of those lands against
something with which they would never be faced. Therefore, the
third angel would not go to them.
But the third angel does go to them. This is made certain by the
word of the prophecy which states that "a third angel followed
them," that is, the other two angels. Of the first of the other two it is
specifically stated that he goes to "every nation, tribe, tongue, and
people" with his message. Therefore, if the third angel follows him,
it can only be that he too takes his message to every nation, kindred,
tongue, and people and warns every such person of their danger of
worshiping the beast and his image. This can only mean that the
beast shall be worshiped by people of every nation, kindred, tongue,
and people, for otherwise the warning would not go to every such
person. If there was to be another test to the people of other lands,
then a different angel would carry a different warning to them.
Here now are some specific statements which tell in just so many
words that the crisis will be the same in every part of the world.
"As America, the land of religious liberty, shall unite with the pa-
pacy in forcing the conscience and compelling men to honor the
false sabbath, the people of every country on the globe will be led to
follow her example. . . . Foreign nations will follow the example of
the United States. Though she leads out, yet the same crisis will
come upon our people in all parts of the world." Testimonies 6:18,
395.
These statements need no comment as their message is too plain
to be misunderstood. Along with them go the following: "History
will be repeated. False religion will be exalted. The first day of the
120 LAST DAY EVENTS

From the remotest parts of the earth, to its most densely popu-
lated areas, the warning of the third angel will sound against the
worship of the beast and his image. This means that the test im-
posed by this evil power will have penetrated every corner of the
globe before the third angel sounds his warning there.

week, a common working day, possessing no sanctity whatever, will

be set up as was the image at Babylon. All nations and tongues and
peoples will be commanded to worship this spurious sabbath. This is
Satan's plan to make of no account the day instituted by God, and
given to the world as a memorial of creation.
"The decree enforcing the worship of this day is to go forth to all
the world. . . .
"Trial and persecution will come to all who, in obedience to the
Word of God, refuse to worship this false sabbath. Force is the last
resort of every false religion. At first it tries attraction, as the king of
Babylon tried the power of music and outward show. If these attrac-
tions, invented by men inspired by Satan, failed to make men wor-
ship the image, the hungry flames of the furnace were ready to con-
A WORLDWIDE UNION 121

sume them. So it will be now. The Papacy has exercised her power to
compel men to obey her, and she will continue to do so. We need the
same spirit that was manifested by God's servants in the conflict with
paganism." Signs of the Times, May 6, 1897.
"The world is filled with storm and war and variance. Yet under
one head—the papal power—the people will unite to oppose God in
the person of His witnesses." Testimonies 7:182. Inasmuch as the
subject matter of this statement is the world, then the people who
will unite, even though they now are at war and variance with each
other, must be the people of the whole world, not a part of it. They
will have one head and that will be the Papal head, Babylon the
Great.
Thus "there will be a universal bond of union, one great har-
mony, a confederacy of Satan's forces. . . .
"In the warfare to be waged in the last days there will be united,
in opposition to God's people, all the corrupt powers that have apos-
tatized from allegiance to the law of Jehovah." SDA Bible Commen-
tary 7-.983.
The question is: How many of earth's inhabitants are included in
the classification? And the answer is: "all the corrupt powers that
have apostatized from allegiance to the law of Jehovah."
We are apt to limit the classification of those who are in apostasy
from God and His law, to the members of religious organizations
who were once loyal to God, but, in the meantime have turned away
from Him, when we should see all people on the earth included.
But let us not forget that there was a time when the first men
upon the earth were loyal to God and from that loyalty everyone who
does not today love the Lord has apostatized. Therefore, every man,
woman, and child upon the face of the earth who does not serve the
Lord, is an apostate from the law of Jehovah and all such will stand
united in the last great conflict in the worship of Babylon the Great.
There is to be, "a universal bond of union, one great harmony, a con-
federacy of Satan's forces." The word "universal" means "world-
wide", and in this universal or worldwide bond of union, there is to
be, not two or three different camps, but one great harmony, one
confederacy of Satan's forces.
These statements leave no doubt whatsoever as to the fact that
the same image to the beast will be made in every other land as it is
in America. It leaves no doubt but that Russia and China will be
among those nations who will join in this last great apostasy, not so
much because they have a mind to do so, but because they will have
a mind to escape the punishment that Babylon will surely inflict on
all those who do not submit to her authority. They will do so, not be-
cause they want to largely, but because, not having the power of God
122 LAST DAY EVENTS

in them as did Meshach, Shadrach, and Abed-Nego, they will have

nothing with which to resist and overcome the power of Babylon the
Great. They will do so because they will have no choice except to
perish.
But should it be that there are still some who cannot accept that
China and India for instance, will bow to the Papal power, then here
is a statement actually naming these two lands as countries where
the test of the beast and his image will be imposed upon the people.
"Among earth's inhabitants, scattered in every land, there are
those who have not bowed the knee to Baal. Like the stars of heaven,
which appear only at night, these faithful ones will shine forth when
darkness covers the earth and gross darkness the people. In heathen
Africa, in the Catholic lands of Europe and of South America, in
China, in India, in the islands of the sea, and in all the dark corners of
the earth, God has in reserve a firmament of chosen ones that will
yet shine forth amidst the darkness, revealing clearly to an apostate
world the transforming power of obedience to His law. Even now
they are appearing in every nation, among every tongue and people;
and in the hour of deepest apostasy, when Satan's supreme effort is
made to cause, 'all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and
bond,' to receive, under penalty of death, the sign of allegiance to a
false rest day, these faithful ones, 'blameless and harmless, the sons
of God, without rebuke,' will 'shine as lights in the world.' Revela-
tion 13:16; Philippians 2:15. The darker the night, the more bril-
liantly will they shine." Prophets and Kings, 188, 189.
This prophecy paints a most encouraging picture of faithful be-
lievers in Jesus standing unmoved in the dark corners of the earth
where the Papacy will fight to achieve undisputed authority. We are
assured that the darker the night and the deeper the apostasy, the
brighter these lights will shine.
Thus the fall of Babylon the Great begins in the United States
first of all but, what is done there is but the beginning of a wave
which will sweep around the entire world until every nation has fol-
lowed in her train. These movements will be so rapid that, as they
engulf nation after nation, and people after people, they will soon
come to the last one with the exception only of those whose names
are written in the Lamb's book of life.
When that time comes, then the close of probation will also
come. Beyond that point of time, there will be no more day of grace
for anyone. Then it is that the God of heaven will arise in vengeance
and the plagues on Babylon will be poured out without measure into
the cup of His indignation. "The substitution of the laws of men for
the law of God, the exaltation, by merely human authority, of Sun-
day in the place of the Bible Sabbath, is the last act in the drama.
A WORLDWIDE UNION 123

When this substitution becomes universal, God will reveal Himself.

He will arise in His majesty to shake terribly the earth. He will come
out of His place to punish the inhabitants of the world for their iniq-
uity, and the earth shall disclose her blood and no more cover her
slain." Testimonies 7:141.
It is coming, surely coming upon the earth, this one, last, vast
universal bond of allegiance to the Papal power. Those alone will
have the power to stand then who have received within themselves
the power of the living God today. We know what is coming upon the
earth and upon the people of God. It is coming. The time has been
long delayed but it will come as surely as the night follows the day.
When the night comes, it will be too late to be making preparation
for it then. Today is the day of preparation. Let us make sure and cer-
tain work of it in the fear of the living God who alone can meet and
vanquish the power of Babylon the Great.

[LDE9]
Chapter 11

The Great,
Final Test
Through our study so far of last day events, we can clearly see
that the fall of Babylon the Great coincides with the setting up of the
image to the beast, the event which will have been accomplished
when the united churches shall have secured the authority of the civil
powers to make and enforce the observance of the first day of the
week as the day of worship in the place of the seventh-day Sabbath.
It will be in the United States of America that these oppressive laws
will first be established, but every nation on the face of the earth will
quickly follow the American lead, until the people of the whole world
shall have given their allegiance to Babylon the Great.
It is now time to study more closely the development of the test to
which the people of God are to be subjected, beginning when Baby-
lon's fall is complete. The question is: Does this test come with full
pressure and weight upon them the moment the Sunday law is
passed or does it come with progressively increasing pressure as the
struggle develops toward the climax? This is a very important ques-
tion, for the accurate placement of the great final test determines the
position of the judgment of the living, the giving of the final seal of
God, and has a great bearing on the relationship of the sealing to the
latter rain.
That is to say then that if we have an incorrect understanding of
the nature of the great final test, we would locate it at a wrong point
of time, a mistake which will very seriously affect our understanding
of the other events which will take place during the very last days.
Therefore, it is important at this stage that we accurately understand
the nature and scope of the great final test, and locate it at its rightful
position.
There is one statement which above all others serves as the key
to unlock the mystery of the order of last day events from the setting
up of the image of the beast down to the close of human probation.
This statement reads as follows:
"In the last great conflict of the controversy with Satan those
THE GREAT, FINAL TEST 125

who are loyal to God will see every earthly support cut off. Because
they refuse to break His law in obedience to earthly powers, they will
be forbidden to buy or sell. It will finally be decreed that they shall be
put to death." Desire of Ages, 121, 122.
This statement tells us very plainly that the people of God will be
forbidden to buy or to sell because they have refused to break the law
of God in order to obey the powers of earth. A moment's reflection
will soon reveal that there is only one law which can produce a situ-
ation like this—namely, the coming Sunday law. No true Christian
will refuse to obey any of the laws of the land which forbid murder,
stealing, or such like. The only law the people of God would refuse to
obey is the law by which men will seek to enforce Sunday observance
in the place of God's expressed command to honor and keep the sev-
enth-day Sabbath.
It is also clear that there can be no refusal of obedience to a law
which does not in fact exist. Therefore, the disobedience referred to
in this statement can only be manifested after the National Sunday
Law is actually passed, which means that this refusal begins at the
point of time when the fall of Babylon the Great takes place, which is
the time when the mighty angel of Revelation 18 descends to lighten
the whole earth with his glory, which is also the time for the outpour-
ing of the latter rain, and the sounding forth of the loud cry. The co-
inciding occurrence of all these events makes this to be an extremely
important landmark in the order of future events.
During the lead-up to the time when all these concurrences will
take place, the people of God, even though their ministry is swelling
toward the loud cry, will be still an obscure people little known to the
authorities, if known by them at all. Here is a statement describing
this situation in the immediate lead-up to the formation of the image
of the beast, and of the decreeing of the death penalty on all those
who would not bow to the Sunday law:
"I saw the nominal church and nominal Adventists, like Judas,
would betray us to the Catholics to obtain their influence to come
against the truth. The saints then will be an obscure people, little
known to the Catholics; but the churches and nominal Adventists
who know of our faith and customs (for they hated us on account of
the Sabbath, for they could not refute it) will betray the saints and re-
port them to the Catholics as those who disregard the institutions of
the people; that is, that they keep the Sabbath and disregard Sunday.
"Then the Catholics bid the Protestants to go forward, and issue
a decree that all who will not observe the first day of the week, in-
stead of the seventh day, shall be slain. And the Catholics, whose
numbers are large, will stand by the Protestants. The Catholics will
give their power to the image of the beast. And the Protestants will
126 LAST DAY EVENTS

work as their mother worked before them to destroy the saints. But
before their decree bring or bear fruit, the saints will be delivered by
the Voice of God." Spalding and Magan Collection, 1.
This statement covers quite a period of time, from when the
saints are an obscure people on through the time when the endow-
ment of the Holy Spirit in latter rain power projects them into the
very forefront of public interest and influence, and generates such
bitter persecution culminating in the passage of the death decree.
So then, if the saints are so little known as to be an obscure peo-
ple when the Sunday law is passed, then they cannot be the world-
problem which men will seek to solve by issuing the decree exalting
the first day of the week. Something else must be the factor which
will drive men in desperation to enforce this solution on worldwide
mankind. What it will be will become evident as we move along, but
for now, we can rest assured that it will not be the powerful opposi-
tion of God's people which will lead men to bring the Sunday laws
into force.
But, once the Holy Spirit begins to manifest Himself in power to
the point at least where the people of God become a force threaten-
ing to dismember the grand scheme to establish the new world order,
then the law will be directed against the Lord's people with ever in-
creasing severity. First of all they will be threatened with fines and
imprisonment and, when that fails to terminate their effective pro-
test, the next step will be to pass the buy and sell decree forbidding
them to do business of any kind. But this will not prove sufficient to
break the loyalty of God's people, and so the world will take the ulti-
mate measures to silence the voice of dissent and reproof. They will
pass the death decree on all those who will refuse to honor the day
instituted by man in place of the Sabbath of God.
It must be evident that all this will occupy a period of time. It will
not take place in a moment.
The sequence of events then which is clearly portrayed in this
particular statement from Desire of Ages, is that first the Sunday law
is passed. Then comes the refusal on the part of God's people to
obey that law, which brings at some future point of time the passing
of the buy and sell decree. But this added threat to their survival will
not succeed in breaking the sanctified wills of God's faithful ones,
whose continued refusal to yield obedience to human edicts will im-
pel the godless authorities into bringing in the death decree.
Thus the test becomes progressively stiffer and stiffer until it
reaches the ultimate of its pressure in the passing of the death decree
against the people of God. This fact is brought to view very plainly in
the The Spirit of Prophecy 4:444, 445, which reads as follows:
"In the last conflict the Sabbath will be the special point of con-
128 LAST DAY EVENTS

troversy throughout all Christendom. Secular rulers and religious

leaders will unite to enforce the observance of the Sunday; and as
milder measures fail, the most oppressive laws will be enacted. It will
be urged that the few who stand in opposition to an institution of the
church or a law of the land ought not to be tolerated, and a decree
will finally be issued denouncing them as deserving of the severest
punishment, and giving the people liberty, after a certain time, to
put them to death. Romanism in the Old World, and apostate Protes-
tantism in the new, will pursue a similar course toward those who
honor the divine precepts.''
It will become apparent as we plunge more deeply into the study
of last day events that the people of God are not particularly tested
when the Sunday law is first produced. The reason for this lies in the
fact that, at that time they will be a people so few in number and of
such minor significance in the affairs of this world, that the powers
that be will not even be concerned about them in the passing of this
law. The Sunday law will be introduced as a measure on the part of
the churches to secure to them a power to replace the power which
they have lost in their turning away from the living power of the living
God. This we learned in a previous chapter and we suggest that you
turn again and read chapters two and three in this series.
We shall also learn as we progress, that the first measure taken
against the people of God will not be persecution but will be argu-
ment. When this fails, then persecution will be generated against
them, and when that fails, they will be hauled up before the courts of
the land. When that fails, the buy and sell decree will be imposed
against them, and when that fails, ultimately will come the death
decree.
We shall learn too as we progress that the people of God do not
find themselves faced with the ultimate test at the very moment
when the Sunday law is passed. The key statement already given,
shows that it is the result of the refusal of the people of God to obey
that law which brings the test upon them.
And as we progress, we shall learn from the evidences of the pro-
phetic word, that the refusal of the people of God to bow to the im-
age will not be a quiet, passive stand, but will be shining Protestant-
ism at its radiant, vocal best—a loud cry! It will not only be a refusal
on their part to conform, but it will also be an exposure under the
mighty power of the Holy Spirit of the evil nature of what has been
done by church and state.
We shall learn that the act of setting up of the image of the beast,
having caused the complete downfall of Babylon the Great, brings
the world to the point where it is ripe to receive the destructive judg-
ments of the seven last plagues. It is the point of tremendous and ul-
THE GREAT, FINAL TEST 129

timate crisis to which the world will be brought, and the Lord will not
let its peoples perish without one final warning, and a calling of all of
God's true children to come out of Babylon before it is forever too
late.
The giving of the final warning will be an act of divine love, but it
will not be so regarded by those for whose benefit it will be given. In
their blindness, they will see in it only something dangerous, and
they will brace themselves to resist it. Quite rightly, they will recog-
nize that the loud cry is exposing the true nature and end-result of
their propositions for solving all mankind's woes, but they will be so
intoxicated by false doctrine that they will not heed the warning
given in love and power.
Instead they will become filled with rage which will be directed
against God's faithful people, who will be thus threatened with de-
struction unless they yield their faith and come into line with the rest
of the world. In other words, the great final test comes upon the peo-
ple of God in consequence of their protest against the forming of the
image to the beast, not at the point when the image is actually
formed.
This is to say then that the order of last day events in brief is as
follows: The image is formed and Babylon's fall is complete. The
people of God are filled with the power of the latter rain and go forth
refusing to obey the laws of the land in respect to the Sunday Law
and at the same time exposing the evil heart in the whole plan. This
turns the wrath of the devil and his supporters on their heads, exert-
ing tremendous pressure to have them yield their faith. This is the
test which mounts in intensity till the ultimate pressure is reached
under the death decree, some considerable time after the image is
formed. A careful study of Great Controversy, 606-609, will make
this fact very clear.
Let us then become firmly established on the truth that the great
final test does not come at the point of time when the image is set
up, but much later as a consequence of the refusal of the people of
God to obey the Sunday law.
We need now to locate as closely as we can the timing of the buy
and sell decree and the death decree in their turn. The buy and sell
decree will be located somewhere well on down during the loud cry
period sometime after the passing of the Sunday law, but before the
imposition of the death decree. It is a more severe measure than
fines and imprisonment, but less drastic than the death decree. It is
in fact also a death decree, for a person who cannot buy food most
certainly will die of starvation after some time.
One might argue that one could live off the land, but at that time,
130 LAST DAY EVENTS

droughts, fires, locust plagues, and other ravaging forces will have
completely eaten up all foods from that source.
But we are able to pinpoint more accurately the position of the
death decree in its relation to the order of last day events. It is true
that many people hold the view that the death decree actually is
made after the close of probation. There is, of course, no contro-
versy over the fact that the date for its execution is placed after the
close of probation, this date being the time coinciding with the fifth
and the sixth plagues, both of which fall after the close of probation.
Careful study reveals that the making of the death decree and the
imposing of its threat upon the people of God, take place just before
the close of human probation. It takes place just before the judgment
of the living which, in turn, takes place just before the beginning of
the time of Jacob's trouble.
We turn now to a number of evidences contained in the written
word which establishes the truth that the death decree will be legis-
lated just before the close of probation, and imposes the great final
test at that point of time.
The first statements which we shall consider confirm the truth
that Satan is a deep and thorough student of the Scriptures, who un-
derstands "their true import", and therefore knows exactly when the
death decree will be passed and what will happen when it is.
"Let the son of deceit and false witness be entertained by a
church that has had great light, great evidence, and that church will
discard the message the Lord has sent, and receive the most unrea-
sonable assertions and false suppositions and false theories. Satan
laughs at their folly, for he knows what truth is." Testimonies to
Ministers, 409.
This statement tells us very plainly that Satan knows what truth
is. Men upon this earth are being deceived day by day, many of them
all the while holding what they think to be the truth. Crises and is-
sues spring up in the Church of God. Sides are taken and men think
that they are standing stiffly for God's truth, when in fact they are
definitely deceived, but Satan is not deceived because he knows what
the truth is.
Satan has always been a very keen student of prophecy. When
Jesus was about to appear the first time, he worked to make certain
that the Jewish leaders did not understand the prophecies which so
clearly foretold the nature of Christ's work and kingdom.
"Satan excited the evil passions of men, in order to fasten his
rule upon them. When God's written word was given, Satan studied
the prophecies of the Saviour's advent. From generation to genera-
tion he worked to blind the people to these prophecies, that they
might reject Christ at His coming." Desire of Ages, 115.
THE GREAT, FINAL TEST 131

We know only too well that the Jews were deceived by Satan as to
the true nature of the first advent of Christ. But we know too that Sa-
tan, as an accurate student of these prophecies, was not. He under-
stood those revelations. He laughed at the folly of the Jews for he
knew what the truth was.
"He still appears as an angel of light, and makes it evident that
he is acquainted with the Scriptures, and understands the import of
what is written." Desire of Ages, 124.
"When God's written word was given through the Hebrew proph-
ets, Satan studied with diligence the messages concerning the Mes-
siah. Carefully he traced the words that outlined with unmistakable
clearness Christ's work among men as a suffering sacrifice and as a
conquering king. In the parchment rolls of the Old Testament Scrip-
tures he read that the One who was to appear was to be 'brought as a
lamb to the slaughter,' 'His visage . . . so marred more than any man,
and His form more than the sons of men.' Isaiah 53:7; 52:14. The
promised Saviour of humanity was to be 'despised and rejected of
men; a man of sorrows, and acquainted with grief; . . . smitten of
God, and afflicted;' yet He was also to exercise His mighty power in
order to 'judge the poor of the people.' He was to 'save the children of
the needy,' and 'break in pieces the oppressor.' Isaiah 53:3, 4;
Psalm 72:4. These prophecies caused Satan to fear and tremble; yet
he relinquished not his purpose to thwart, if possible, the merciful
provisions of Jehovah for the redemption of the lost race. He deter-
mined to blind the eyes of the people, so far as might be possible, to
the real significance of the Messianic prophecies, in order to prepare
the way for the rejection of Christ at His coming." Prophets and
Kings, 686, 687.
So then, it is clear that Satan has an accurate knowledge of the
prophecies in the light of which, he instructs his angels as they plan
their battle strategy for the final conflict. What he says to his own an-
gels is not designed to deceive them, but to inform them of what in
fact will happen as the struggle progresses. Therefore, even though
the words reported here in the next statement are the words of Satan
to his angels, they are spoken in his sure knowledge of the accuracy
of Bible prophecy, and so are the truth. Thus, knowing that the
death decree will impose the great final test upon the people of God
before probation closes, he says:
"When death shall be made the penalty of violating our sabbath,
then many who are now ranked with commandment keepers will
come over to our side." Testimonies to Ministers, 473.
There will be no further changing of sides once probation has
closed. Therefore any event, decree, enforcement, or infliction of a
penalty which produces a shaking out of one side into the other must
132 LAST DAY EVENTS

occur before probationary time shall close. This statement clearly

says that the death decree will produce a large transfer of those who
professedly were serving God, into the ranks of the master deceiver.
Therefore, the death decree which produces this shaking must be
written into the Sunday laws before probation closes.
Together with this statement, we have further evidence from Tes-
timonies 5:212, 213: " 'And at that time shall Michael stand up, the
great prince which standeth for the children of thy people: and there
shall be a time of trouble, such as never was since there was a nation
even to that same time: and at that time thy people shall be deliv-
ered, everyone that shall be found written in the book.' When this
time of trouble comes, every case is decided; there is no longer pro-
bation, no longer mercy for the impenitent. The seal of the living
God is upon His people. This small remnant, unable to defend them-
selves in the deadly conflict with the powers of earth that are mar-
shaled by the dragon host, make God their defense. The decree has
been passed by the highest earthly authority that they shall worship
the beast and receive his mark under pain of persecution and
death."
This statement describes the conditions which will exist when a
certain point of time has been reached—the moment when Michael,
our great High Priest, has ended His ministry in the heavenly sanctu-
ary, probationary time has ended, and the great time of trouble has
commenced.
When this time of trouble comes,
1. every case is decided;
2. there is no longer probation;
3. no longer mercy for the impenitent;
4. the small remnant make God their defense;
5. the decree has been passed by the highest authority that they
shall worship the beast and receive his mark under pain of persecu-
tion and death. In other words the death decree has been passed
when this time of trouble comes.
There is an objection which is raised against the use of this state-
ment in this way which objection declares that the time of Jacob's
trouble begins at some point after the close of Christ's intercession in
heaven. But this objection is met and answered by the following
statement:
"When Christ shall cease his work as Mediator in man's behalf,
then this time of trouble will begin." Patriarchs and Prophets, 201.
Further evidence that the death decree will be made before the
close of probation is found in the following statement:
"It is in a crisis that character is revealed. When the earnest voice
proclaimed at midnight, 'Behold, the Bridegroom cometh; go ye out
THE GREAT, FINAL TEST 133

to meet Him,' and the sleeping virgins were roused from their slum-
bers, it was seen who had made preparation for the event. Both par-
ties were taken unawares; but one was prepared for the emergency,
and the other was found without preparation. So now, a sudden and
unlooked-for calamity, something that brings the soul face to face
with death, will show whether there is any real faith in the promises
of God. It will show whether the soul is sustained by grace. The great
final test comes at the close of human probation, when it will be too
late for the soul's need to be supplied." Christ's Object Lessons,
412.
Unquestionably, the great final test is the test imposed on the
people of the Lord by the pressure of the death decree. The state-
ment itself indicates that, as it speaks of the soul being brought "face
to face with death."
When does this great final test come?
It comes at that point when the judgment is opened for the living
and they will have no further opportunity therefore to change their
position. Prior to this point, probation has closed for each individual
at death, but such individual closings are not the close of human pro-
bation. That time comes suddenly upon all who are still living. And it
is at that point of time that the death decree, as the great final test,
comes upon all. Each makes his final decision for right or for wrong,
and the judgment of the living immediately follows, in which the deci-
sion made is forever sealed in each individual either for life or death.
Jesus removes the sin from the sanctuary and then steps out to put
on the garments of vengeance and come to the earth for the second
advent.
Thus this statement plainly teaches that the death decree comes
before Jesus leaves the sanctuary in heaven.
Another clear evidence that the great final test of the death de-
cree comes before the close of human probation is given to us in the
book Great Controversy, 615, 616.
"As the Sabbath has become the special point of controversy
throughout Christendom, and religious and secular authorities have
combined to enforce the observance of the Sunday, the persistent re-
fusal of a small minority to yield to the popular demand will make
them objects of universal execration. It will be urged that the few
who stand in opposition to an institution of the church and a law of
the state ought not to be tolerated; that it is better for them to suffer
than for whole nations to be thrown into confusion and lawlessness.
The same argument eighteen hundred years ago was brought against
Christ by the 'rulers of the people.' 'It is expedient for us,' said the
wily Caiaphas, 'that one man should die for the people, and that the
whole nation perish not.' John 11:50. This argument will appear
134 LAST DAY EVENTS

conclusive; and a decree will finally be issued against those who hal-
low the Sabbath of the fourth commandment, denouncing them as
deserving of the severest punishment and giving the people liberty,
after a certain time, to put them to death. Romanism in the Old
World and apostate Protestantism in the New will pursue a similar
course toward those who honor all the divine precepts." Great Con-
troversy, 615, 616.
This statement begins with events which will transpire when the
Sabbath has become the special point of controversy, and religious
and secular leaders have combined to enforce Sunday observance.
That is when the image of the beast has been formed. The refusal of
God's minority to comply generates fearful persecution which
reaches its most extreme level in the proclamation that the Sabbath-
keepers have been deprived of all protection from the rage of the
masses who are given "liberty, after a certain time, to put them to
death". This is the structure of the terrible death decree.
Now then, what immediately follows?
"The people of God will then be plunged into those scenes of af-
fliction and distress described by the prophet as the time of Jacob's
trouble. Thus saith the Lord: We have heard a voice of trembling, of
fear, and not of peace. . . . All faces are turned into paleness. Alas!
for that day is great, so that none is like it: it is even the time of Ja-
cob's trouble; but he shall be saved out of it.' Jeremiah 30:5-7."
Great Controversy, 616.
So the sequence is that the death decree is followed by the com-
mencement of Jacob's trouble, which means that the death decree
comes before the close of probation, for, as we read in Patriarchs
and Prophets, 201:
"When Christ shall cease His work as mediator in man's behalf,
then this time of [Jacob's] trouble will begin."
There is at least one more statement which adds its weight to the
truth that the death decree will be passed before probation closes. It
reads as follows:
"The Lord has shown me clearly that the image of the beast will
be formed before probation closes; for it is to be the great test for the
people of God, by which their eternal destiny will be decided. . . .
[Rev. 13:11-17 quoted.]...
' 'This is the test that the people of God must have before they are
sealed. All who proved their loyalty to God by observing His law, and
refusing to accept a spurious sabbath, will rank under the banner of
the Lord God Jehovah, and will receive the seal of the living God.
Those who yield the truth of heavenly origin and accept the Sunday
sabbath, will receive the mark of the beast." SDA Bible Commen-
tary 7:976.
THE GREAT, FINAL TEST 135

To adequately understand this statement requires that we see the

full development of the image of the beast. We must fully grasp the
truth that the test imposed on God's people is one which increases
in severity from a relatively mild beginning to a peak of maximum
pressure. The test will not be complete until the image of the beast
has exhausted all his resources for bringing the people of God in par-
ticular, and the world in general, to give their full support to the con-
federacy of evil.
To clarify what constitutes the full range of the test of the image,
Sister White firstly quoted Revelation 13:11-17. Then she wrote,
"This is the test that the people of God must have before they are
sealed."
So then, Revelation 13:11-17 contains a description of the ele-
ments of the tests emanating from the image of the beast. The first
testing comes through the signs and wonders performed by miracle
working demons, who come with the capacity to deceive all but the
very elect.
Next, the image itself is formed, and imposes the buy and sell de-
cree, and in turn, the death decree.
All of this and nothing less, adds up to the complete test of the
image of the beast, which the people of God must endure before they
can receive the seal of the living God, and then be plunged into the
time of Jacob's trouble.
Those who will pass this test "by which their eternal destiny will
be decided", must overcome at every point. One victory will not suf-
fice for all the rest. Thus many of those who will number themselves
among God's people when the protest against the Sunday Law be-
gins to go forth, will fall away when the first pressures are brought to
bear upon them. For them, that will be the end of the testing pro-
cess, for, if they cannot endure the milder test, they certainly will not
be able to withstand the tougher ones. They have been eliminated
from the Lord's army, and any further testing is pointless.
But those who pass the first test at the lowest levels, do not then
at that point, have their eternal destinies decided. As they come up
to each point and overcome, they find themselves facing a tougher
test at every higher level of attainment until the full and final pres-
sure of the image beast is brought to bear upon them in the death de-
cree, provided they do not fall at some level on the way up.
The most extensive falling away will be as they approach the end-
ing of this testing period and the storm of persecution is about to
burst upon them as it is written:
"As the storm approaches, a large class who have professed faith
in the third angel's message, but have not been sanctified through
obedience to the truth, abandon their position and join the ranks of
136 LAST DAY EVENTS

the opposition. By uniting with the world and partaking of its spirit,
they have come to view matters in nearly the same light; and when
the test is brought, they are prepared to choose the easy, popular
side. Men of talent and pleasing address, who once rejoiced in the
truth, employ their powers to deceive and mislead souls. They be-
come the most bitter enemies of their former brethren. When Sab-
bathkeepers are brought before the courts to answer for their faith,
these apostates are the most efficient agents of Satan to misrepre-
sent and accuse them, and by false reports and insinuations to stir up
the rulers against them." Great Controversy, 608.
So then, according to these statements, the full pressure of the
image of the beast including the death decree, will be brought to bear
upon the people of the Lord before they are sealed, which means
that the death decree is made before probation closes.
This series of statements then makes it very clear that the death
decree will be passed just before the close of probation. This must
not be confused with the time for its execution. This will be after the
close of probation and the date for its execution must be distin-
guished from the date when it is passed and when its full weight and
threat as the great final test is felt by the people of God.
It is indeed vital to our eternal life to understand that when that
final test does come, it will be too late to have the lack in our experi-
ence supplied. That work is for today. May it be then that every one
of our readers will make the most thorough, daily preparation for
that event so that not one will be unprepared for it.
 Chapter 12

The Timing
of the Judgment
of the Living
It was stated back in chapter eleven that one's understanding of
the timing of the death decree must affect one's understanding of the
timing of the judgment of the living. The time has now come to de-
termine when the judgment of the living will come to those who are
living upon the earth.
Generally speaking, there are two positions held today in regard
to this question. There is the position advanced by some that the
judgment of the living commences with the setting up of the image
of the beast and that only those who have passed its searching scru-
tiny can receive the latter rain and go forth and give the loud cry.
Then, as the message goes forward and souls are gathered in from
Babylon, they each in turn are judged, sealed, and filled with the
Holy Spirit in latter rain power to join in the giving of the loud cry.
This procedure continues until the last person is judged and sealed
and the work is completed with the close of human probation. This is
one position as held today.
The other position and the one held by this author, is that the
judgment of the living comes upon the people of God at the end of
the loud cry period when the mission of the gospel is completed.
This time will come suddenly upon all, and not one by one as the
other position seeks to prove.
There are some who may ask what it matters anyway which posi-
tion we hold so long as we are ready day by day. But it is not so simple
as all that. If it were, then why did the Lord go to so much trouble to
give us the sure Word of prophecy if we did not really need it? That
Word was given for us to study and to understand; to know when
these things would come to pass in their correct order, so that we
can rightly relate ourselves to the events of the last days and be found
in the very place and position in which the Lord would have us.
138 LAST DAY EVENTS

Think of the fatal delusion which would fasten upon the mind of
one who believed that the reception of the latter rain could only
come after he had been judged and sealed with the seal of the living
God! It would mean that the very moment in which he received the
outpouring of the Holy Spirit in latter rain power, (although it would
never be possible for one to receive it who was so erroneously incor-
rect in his understanding of the truth), he must conclude that he had
been judged and sealed and that therefore he was now eternally se-
cure and had the guarantee of his place in heaven.
But the reception of the latter rain cannot indicate that the work
in the individual is completed so that he is eternally sealed, for it is
the latter rain which brings to completion the work of God's grace in
the soul. Note how clearly this is taught in the following quotation:
" 'Ask ye of the Lord rain in the time of the latter rain; so the
Lord shall make bright clouds, and give them showers of rain.' 'He
will cause to come down for you the rain, the former rain, and the
latter rain.' In the East the former rain falls at the sowing time. It is
necessary in order that the seed may germinate. Under the influence
of the fertilizing showers, the tender shoot springs up. The latter
rain, falling near the close of the season, ripens the grain and pre-
pares it for the sickle. The Lord employs these operations of nature
to represent the work of the Holy Spirit. As the dew and the rain are
given first to cause the seed to germinate, and then to ripen the har-
vest, so the Holy Spirit is given to carry forward, from one stage to
another, the process of spiritual growth. The ripening of the grain
represents the completion of the work of God's grace in the soul. By
the power of the Holy Spirit the moral image of God is to be per-
fected in the character. We are to be wholly transformed into the like-
ness of Christ.
"The latter rain, ripening earth's harvest, represents the spiritual
grace that prepares the church for the coming of the Son of man. But
unless the former rain has fallen, there will be no life; the green blade
will not spring up. Unless the early showers have done their work,
the latter rain can bring no seed to perfection.
"There is to be 'first the blade, then the ear, after that the full
corn in the ear.' There must be a constant development of Christian
virtue, a constant advancement in Christian experience. This we
should seek with intensity of desire, that we may adorn the doctrine
of Christ our Saviour." Testimonies to Ministers, 506.
So then, it is by the power of the latter rain at work over a period
of time that the living saints are brought to a state of readiness to pass
the judgment which will require spotless perfection of character.
"We are now living in the great day of atonement. In the typical
service, while the high priest was making the atonement for Israel,
JUDGMENT OF THE LIVING 139

all were required to afflict their souls by repentance of sin and humili-
ation before the Lord, lest they be cut off from among the people. In
like manner, all who would have their names retained in the book of
life should now, in the few remaining days of their probation, afflict
their souls before God by sorrow for sin and true repentance. There
must be deep, faithful searching of heart. The light, frivolous spirit
indulged by so many professed Christians must be put away. There is
earnest warfare before all who would subdue the evil tendencies that
strive for the mastery. The work of preparation is an individual work.
We are not saved in groups. The purity and devotion of one will not
offset the want of these qualities in another. Though all nations are
to pass in judgment before God, yet He will examine the case of each
individual with as close and searching scrutiny as if there were not
another being upon the earth. Everyone must be tested and found
without spot or wrinkle or any such thing." Great Controversy,
489, 490.
The task of lifting a soul from the depths of sinful degradation, to
the heights of spotless purity fit for life in the presence of holy heav-
enly beings, can only be accomplished by God and Christ through
the ministry of the Holy Spirit. The work is commenced by the for-
mer rain under which ministry it is brought to a certain level short of
completeness. The work of finishing the perfecting of the image of
God in the saints is then committed to the latter rain. But it is not
done in a moment. Instead, it requires a period of time. How long
that will be we cannot tell at the present moment, but whatever it will
be, it will be adequate for those who diligently avail themselves of the
grace thus made available to them. It will be a wonderful experience
of growing up into the righteousness of Christ.
' 'As the members of the body of Christ approach the period of
their last conflict, 'the time of Jacob's trouble,' they will grow up into
Christ, and will partake largely of His spirit. As the third message
swells to a loud cry, and as great power and glory attend the closing
work, the faithful people of God will partake of that glory. It is the
latter rain which revives and strengthens them to pass through the
time of trouble. Their faces will shine with the glory of that light
which attends the third angel." Testimonies 1:353.
It follows from all this that, if the judgment of the living were to
take place before the latter rain falls, then it would have to be an ex-
amination of guests in whom the work of God's grace had not been
completed in the soul, the moral image of God had not been per-
fected in the character, and they had not been wholly transformed
into the likeness of Christ.
To confirm this, consider again part of the previously quoted pas-
sage from Testimonies to Ministers, 506:
[LDE10]
140 LAST DAY EVENTS

"As the dew and the rain are given first to cause the seed to ger-
minate, and then to ripen the harvest, so the Holy Spirit is given to
carry forward, from one stage to another, the process of spiritual
growth. The ripening of the grain represents the completion of the
work of God's grace in the soul. By the power of the Holy Spirit the
moral image of God is to be perfected in the character. We are to be
wholly transformed into the likeness of Christ."
I also recommend a study of Facing the Judgment, by F. T.
Wright.
So those on whom the latter rain does not fall will not reach this
standard no matter how earnestly and diligently they may search for
it, for no one else can execute the work of the Holy Spirit but the
Holy Spirit. Therefore, the judgment would, as a certain conse-
quence, find all such unfit for translation, and would declare them to
be eternally lost.
I trust that my readers understand the difference between those
who pass through the grave on their way to heaven, and thus are not
wholly transformed into the image of Christ by the latter rain, and
those who are alive when the judgment of the living takes place in
preparation for which they have been blessed with the fullness of the
latter rain by which they have been wholly transformed into the im-
age of Christ!
What is the difference?
The difference is that those who shall be alive on the earth after
probation has closed, must "stand in the sight of a holy God without
a Mediator". Great Controversy, 425. This means that the ministry
of Christ in the heavenly sanctuary is terminated. Therefore, any sin
still unconfessed and unforsaken, even to the slightest speck, has to

OPPOSITE PAGE: Harvest time, whether it be for fruit, vegetables, or

grain, is a happy time of each year. A good and plentiful harvest assures
all that there will be ample food supplies throughout the winter. For the
produce to be brought to readiness for gathering, the rains must have
fallen at the right time and in the right quantity.
In middle eastern lands, the farmers depend on the former rain to ger-
minate the grain and carry the growth forward to a certain point. They
then wait for the latter rain to complete the work of preparing the grain
for the sickle. Without the latter rain no barley or wheat would ever be
ready for the harvest.
In the work of spiritual preparation for the coming of Christ, the same
principle of operation is valid. The latter rain of the Holy Spirit, because
it, and it alone, completes the work of God's grace in the soul, must pre-
cede the judgment of the living, which will admit only those into the Sav-
iour's harvest in whom the work of God's grace has been completed. If the
latter rain were to come after the judgment of the living and the sealing, it
would be too late to prepare anyone for the judgment and all those then
living would be lost.
JUDGMENT OF THE LIVING 141

remain in the person forever, for, the sanctuary being closed, there is
no longer any means of separating it from him. To admit him to
heaven would be to re-establish sin there, a step which will never be
permitted. Therefore, all must be spotless at that time or perish.
This truth is clearly stated in the following paragraph:
"Those who are living upon the earth when the intercession of
Christ shall cease in the sanctuary above are to stand in the sight of a
142 LAST DAY EVENTS

holy God without a mediator. Their robes must be spotless, their

characters must be purified from sin by the blood of sprinkling.
Through the grace of God and their own diligent effort they must be
conquerors in the battle with evil. While the investigative judgment
is going forward in heaven, while the sins of penitent believers are
being removed from the sanctuary, there is to be a special work of
purification, of putting away of sin, among God's people upon
earth. This work is more clearly presented in the messages of Reve-
lation 14." Great Controversy, 425.
So then, the mighty ministry of the Holy Spirit in latter rain
power prepares God's people to meet and pass the exacting scrutiny
of the judgment of the living. That being so, the whole duration of
the latter rain must be located before and not after the judgment of
the living.
Because the vital ministry of the Holy Spirit in latter rain power
cannot fulfill its work without the intelligent co-operation of the be-
liever, it is essential that the child of God be conversant with what
the Spirit is doing for him at every stage in his growth toward ulti-
mate perfection.
We turn now to a study of other prophetic evidences which so
clearly show that the judgment of the living comes suddenly upon all
at the end of the loud cry period and not at the beginning of it.
The very first fact which we need to have fixed very clearly in our
understanding is that not one of us can receive the final seal of God
until after we have passed the great final test. In other words, there
comes to us first of all the great final test and we either pass it or we
fail under its pressure. If we successfully withstand it in the power of
the living God, then we receive the seal of God and are made eter-
nally secure from the tempter's devices. I will refer you back now to a
statement which was quoted in the last chapter to reveal that the
judgment of the living followed the period of time during which the
latter rain falls. We will now see that it also teaches us that the seal of
the living God will be placed only on those who have passed the
great final test, and have been accepted in the judgment as fit to en-
ter heaven. Here is the statement once more:
"The Lord has shown me clearly that the image of the beast will
be formed before probation closes; for it is to be the great test for the
people of God, by which their eternal destiny will be decided. 'And I
beheld another beast coming up out of the earth; and he had two
horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.
'And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him,
and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the
first beast, whose deadly wound was healed.
JUDGMENT OF THE LIVING 143

" 'And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come

down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men.
" 'And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of
those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast;
saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an im-
age to the beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live.
" 'And he had power to give life unto the image of the beast, that
the image of the beast should both speak, and cause that as many as
would not worship the image of the beast should be killed.
" 'And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free
and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads:
" 'And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark,
or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.' Revelation
13:11-17.
"This is the test that the people of God must have before they are
sealed. All who proved their loyalty to God by observing His law, and
refusing to accept a spurious sabbath, will rank under the banner of
the Lord God Jehovah, and will receive the seal of the living God.
Those who yield the truth of heavenly origin and accept the Sunday
sabbath, will receive the mark of the beast." SDA Bible Commen-
tary 7:976
After the quotation from Revelation 13:11-17, the very next
words say, "This is the test that the people of God must have before
they are sealed." Obviously then the test referred to by the word,
"this", can only be the test as outlined in the quotation given imme-
diately before. Look again at that quotation and it will be seen that it
outlines the following steps in the growing severity of the test to its
final and full pressure.
First of all there is the revelation of the miracle working power of
Spiritualism. This will test the people of God and no doubt there will
be those who are among the children of the Lord, who will be de-
ceived thereby. Then there is the making of the image itself. As we
learned previously, the people of God will refuse to obey the law im-
posed by this image, and this will bring the buy and sell decree listed
in these verses. Then will ultimately come the death decree upon
those who refuse to comply. It will be only when this point is reached
that the fullness of the test imposed by the image beast will be felt.
When it is first formed, only milder measures are employed in the de-
termination to coerce obedience. It is only as these recourses fail to
achieve their objectives, that the pressures are increased to the point
where the uttermost limits have been reached in the imposition of
the death decree.
Having outlined all this in these verses, it then says, "This is the
test that the people of God must have before they are sealed."
144 LAST DAY EVENTS

Therefore, all that is listed there must be included in that test, not
only a part of it.
Inasmuch then as we have learned from the previous chapter that
the death decree is imposed with all its awful weight upon the people
of God just before the close of human probation, and inasmuch as
we learn here that the death decree is included in the great final test,
and inasmuch as we have learned that we must pass this test before
we are sealed, then it follows that the seal of God will come upon the
people of God just before the commencement of Jacob's trouble,
which is quite a distance of time from when the image is first set up.
Now then, none of us can receive the final seal of the living God
until we have been judged and had our sins blotted from the heavenly
sanctuary. Therefore, if only those who have passed this test suc-
cessfully can receive the seal of God, then only those who have
passed the same test can pass the judgment of the living successfully.
If the receiving of the seal is contingent on the passing of that test,
then the passing of the judgment must be equally contingent on it.
This can only mean that the judgment of the living will not com-
mence until the final test has come upon the world. We now know
perfectly well that "the great final test comes at the close of human
probation." Christ's Object Lessons, 412.
This means that it comes at the end of the latter rain period when
the mission of the gospel is completed, and that therefore the judg-
ment of the living must also come at the end of the latter rain period,
and most certainly not at the beginning of it as some believe.
Let us now consider a further statement which confirms the
truths being taught here:
"When the third angel's message closes, mercy no longer pleads
for the guilty inhabitants of the earth. The people of God have ac-
complished their work. They have received 'the latter rain,' 'the re-
freshing from the presence of the Lord,' and they are prepared for
the trying hour before them. Angels are hastening to and fro in
heaven. An angel returning from the earth announces that his work
is done; the final test has been brought upon the world, and all who
have proved themselves loyal to the divine precepts have received
'the seal of the living God.' Then Jesus ceases His intercession in the
sanctuary above. He lifts His hands, and with a loud voice says, 'It is
done;' and all the angelic host lay off their crowns as He makes the
solemn announcement: 'He that is unjust, let him be unjust still: and
he which is filthy let him be filthy still: and he that is righteous, let
him be righteous still: and he that is holy, let him be holy still:' Reve-
lation 22:11. Every case has been decided for life or death. Christ
has made the atonement for His people and blotted out their sins.
The number of His subjects is made up; 'the kingdom and dominion,
JUDGMENT OF THE LIVING 145

and the greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven,' is about
to be given to the heirs of salvation, and Jesus is to reign as King of
kings and Lord of lords." Great Controversy, 613, 614.
This statement is very helpful in that it assembles in their order
the events which will happen around the close of probation. A cer-
tain angel returning from the earth announces that his work is done.
What is his work? It is stated in the very same sentence! It is the work
of bringing the final test of the Sabbath truth to the world, so that the
destiny of each class is then eternally established. Those who have
proved themselves loyal in the face of that test, receive the seal of the
living God, while the remainder obviously have the mark of the
beast, in each case, forever.
In the very moment when this work is accomplished, Jesus
ceases His work in the sanctuary above, making the solemn an-
nouncement which can only be made once the judgment is com-
pleted, that all are to remain forever as they then are. The un-
righteous are to remain unrighteous, and the righteous are to remain
righteous. Nevermore thereafter, can there be any changing of sides.
The destiny of each class is forever fixed.
This alignment of humanity into two fixed parties is achieved by
the great final test which comes simultaneously upon the entire
world, compelling all men to make their final decisions for or against
God, and immediately thereafter the work in the sanctuary comes to
its end. This establishes the fact that once the final test comes,
which all must have before they are sealed, then immediately follows
the judgment of the living, the work in the sanctuary is finished, and
there is no more work of grace for the soul. And all this proves that
the judgment of the living is not followed by the latter rain but by the
time of Jacob's trouble only. The latter rain must and does come be-
fore the judgment of the living.
The evidence considered so far is more than sufficient to estab-
lish the truth that the latter rain precedes the judgment of the living.
In other words, no part of either runs concurrent with any part of the
other.
But there is much more evidence contained in the Word of Truth
to strengthen this point and to enlarge our understanding of it. Let us
turn now to the parable of the wheat and the tares.
"Another parable He put forth to them, saying: The kingdom of
heaven is like a man who sowed good seed in his field;
" 'but while men slept, his enemy came and sowed tares among
the wheat and went his way.
" 'But when the corn had sprouted and produced a crop, then the
tares also appeared.
146 LAST DAY EVENTS

" 'So the servants of the owner came and said to him, "Sir, did
you not sow good seed in your field? How then does it have tares?"
" 'He said to them, "An enemy has done this." The servants said
to him, "Do you want us then to go and gather them up?"
" 'But he said, "No, lest while you gather up the tares you also
uproot the wheat with them.
" ' "Let both grow together until the harvest, and at the time of
harvest I will say to the reapers, 'First gather together the tares and
bind them in bundles to burn them, but gather the wheat into my
barn.' " ' " Matthew 13:24-30.
The specific point of evidence supplied by this parable in respect
to the matter under consideration is that the wheat and the tares are
to grow together until the harvest. At that point they are separated
so that thereafter, they walk together no more at all. Just how this
point of evidence does serve to support the position that the latter
rain comes before and not at all after the judgment of the living, can
be made clear only as we understand what the symbols of the parable
mean.
Jesus Himself explained what He meant by the parable. The
sower He declared to be the Son of Man; the field is the world; the
good seed or the wheat which springs forth from it, are the children
of God; the tares are the children of the wicked one, and the evil
sower is the devil.
There now arises the problem of defining what the "world" is in
the parable. The problem is solved by the following statement:
" 'The field,' Christ said, 'is the world.' But we must understand
this as signifying the church of Christ in the world. The parable is a
description of that which pertains to the kingdom of God, His work
of salvation of men; and this work is accomplished through the
church. True, the Holy Spirit has gone out into all the world; every-
where it is moving upon the hearts of men; but it is in the church that
we are to grow and ripen for the garner of God." Christ's Object
Lessons, 70.
The tares are not to be confused with the thorn and the thistle.
These are obviously not wheat, whereas the tare is so like the wheat
that none but the expert can pick them apart until the harvest, and
then it is clearly seen as to which is which.
OPPOSITE PAGE: The unproductive curse of the wheat fields is the
tare, which so closely resembles the good grain, that, in its early stages
especially, it is virtually impossible to distinguish from the wheat. But
with the coming of the latter rain, both grow rapidly to full maturity, and
then it can be readily seen which is the valuable plant, and which is the
cumberer of the ground.
148 LAST DAY EVENTS

Now, inasmuch as both must grow together in the church until

the harvest, and inasmuch as this is the point in which we are most
interested, it follows that we must now ascertain what the harvest is.
In explaining the parable Jesus said, "the harvest is the end of the
age [world; K.J.V.]." Matthew 13:39. In a very definite sense this
parable finds a general application to the second coming of Christ
when the tares and the wheat are forever separated, but it must be
understood that the end of probationary time is, to all intents and
purposes, the end of the world.
Again this truth is plainly taught in the Inspired Word. Thus we
read: "The tares and the wheat are to grow together until the har-
vest; and the harvest is the end of probationary time." Christ's Ob-
ject Lessons, 72.
"The looker-on may discern no difference; but there is One who
said that the tares were not to be plucked up by human hands lest the
wheat be rooted up also. Let both grow together until the harvest.
Then the Lord sends forth His reapers to gather out the tares and
bind them in bundles to burn, while the wheat is gathered into the
heavenly garner. The time of the judgment is a most solemn period,
when the Lord gathers His own from among the tares. Those who
have been members of the same family are separated. A mark is
placed upon the righteous." Testimonies to Ministers, 234.
Both of these statements show that the end of probationary
time, the judgment of the living, is the harvest when the Lord sepa-
rates the wheat from the tares. Until that time they are both to-
gether, but beyond that time they are forever separated.
Those who argue that the latter rain comes only on those who
have been judged, argue that probationary time has closed for some
when the image of the beast is first made and the latter rain begins,
so that, during the loud cry period, the Church which gives that final
warning is a pure Church composed of wheat only. And if it could be
proved and shown that during the loud cry period there will be only
wheat in the Church, then they would have an argument, but the fact
is that the Word of God shows the opposite to be true.
In other words, inasmuch as the wheat and the tares grow to-
gether only until the harvest; and inasmuch as the harvest is the judg-
ment of the living at the end of probationary time; then it follows that
when we find the wheat and the tares no longer co-mingled, then we
know that the judgment has taken place. If we find then that the
wheat and the tares are not still co-mingled during the loud cry pe-
riod, then we can know that the judgment of the living has com-
menced, but if they are still so mingled, then we can know with equal
certainty that it has not yet commenced. We shall find from the Word
JUDGMENT OF THE LIVING 149

of God that during the loud cry period the wheat and the tares are
still growing together toward the harvest. Let us read it.
In the marriage parable, is pictured the giving of the very last call
to mankind. After the second call had been rejected by the bidden
ones, then the King said to His servants, " 'The wedding is ready,
but those who were invited were not worthy.
Therefore go into the highways, and as many as you find, in-
vite to the wedding.'
"So those servants went out into the highways and gathered to-
gether all whom they found, both bad and good. And the wedding
hall was filled with guests. "Matthew 22:8-10.
The main point of this parable is that the marriage is delayed be-
cause the people of God had refused to come as the guests. The very
moment that the guests are supplied, then the work is done, the mar-
riage may proceed to its consummation, and the way made fully clear
for the immediate return of Jesus. This parable tells how and when
the work will finally succeed in finding the guests to fill the wedding
and we know that will be the work of the loud cry or the final warn-
ing. That is the last evangelistic work in the world, and it will be suc-
cessful in filling the wedding with guests.
But does this parable teach that only wheat is brought into the
Church during this final gathering of guests to the wedding? It most
certainly does not! Rather, it most distinctly says that both good and
bad come in to present themselves at the judgment.
"So those servants went out into the highways and gathered to-
gether all whom they found, both bad and good. And the wedding
hall was filled with guests." Matthew 22:10.
These, both the bad and the good, are gathered into the
Church—the loud cry Church, where they grow together until the
judgment, the coming in of the King, when at last they are forever
separated, the one from the other.
The coming in of the king to examine the guests is the investiga-
tive judgment of the living.
"By the king's examination of the guests at the feast is repre-
sented a work of judgment. The guests at the gospel feast are those
who profess to serve God, those whose names are written in the
book of life. But not all who profess to be Christians are true disci-
ples. Before the final reward is given, it must be decided who are fit-
ted to share the inheritance of the righteous. This decision must be
made prior to the second coming of Christ in the clouds of heaven;
for when He comes, His reward is with Him, 'to give every man ac-
cording as his work shall be.' Revelation 22:12. Before His coming,
then, the character of every man's work will have been determined,
150 LAST DAY EVENTS

and to every one of Christ's followers the reward will have been ap-
portioned according to his deeds.
"It is while men are still dwelling upon the earth that the work of
investigative judgment takes place in the courts of heaven. The lives
of all His professed followers pass in review before God. All are ex-
amined according to the record of the books of heaven, and accord-
ing to his deeds the destiny of each is forever fixed." Christ's Object
Lessons, 310.
So then, the coming in of the king to examine the guests is the
investigative judgment.
Now then, when does this coming in take place? Will it be during
the gathering of the guests? Do the two events coincide somewhat?
Does the king arrive before the guests are assembled in anticipation
of their being gathered for their examination?
The answer in each case is "No!".
First the guests are found and gathered and when the furnishing
of the wedding with guests is completed, then and only then does the
king come in to examine the guests. Once more the evidence shows
that the judgment of the living takes place at the end and not the be-
ginning of the latter rain period.
Another statement which shows that the wheat and tares are still
co-mingled during the loud cry period reads as follows:
"There will be those among us who will always want to control
the work of God, to dictate even what movements shall be made
when the work goes forward under the direction of the angel who
joins the third angel in the message to be given to the world." Testi-
monies to Ministers, 300.
What class of people have the disposition to control and dictate
in the Church of God? Are these wheat or tares? They are tares!
And where will they still be found when the Revelation 18 angel
joins the third angel in the last message to be given to the world?
They will be right there among the wheat, right in the Church trying
to dictate and control the work of God. In other words, right there in
the loud cry Church there will still be wheat and tares co-mingled
among those who are giving the message, that is, among the ser-
vants who go out and gather the guests to the wedding.
Thus we learn that those who are brought in to the Church during
the loud cry period and those who give the message and gather in
the rest, are both composed of wheat and tares. This is not to say
that the tares will receive the infilling of the latter rain and do a
mighty work for God, but it is to say that they will still be growing to-
gether with the wheat during this period and will continue to do so
until the judgment separates them from the wheat at the end.
One has but to compare the role of the latter rain in nature with
JUDGMENT OF THE LIVING 151

the role of the latter rain in the work of grace to see that it is never at
the beginning but only at the end of the latter rain that the final sepa-
ration takes place between the wheat and the tares. The latter rain
does something for the tares as well as for the wheat. Just as it brings
to full maturity the goodness in the wheat, so likewise the same rain
brings to full maturity the nature of the tares. It must never be forgot-
ten that during the period of early growth, it is not easy to distinguish
the difference between the tare and the wheat. They are so much
alike.
"The tares closely resembled the wheat while the blades were
green; but when the field was white for the harvest, the worthless
weeds bore no likeness to the wheat that bowed under the weight of
its full, ripe heads. Sinners who make a pretension of piety mingle for
a time with the true followers of Christ, and the semblance of Christi-
anity is calculated to deceive many." Christ's Object Lessons, 74.
Thus neither the wheat nor the tares come to full maturity until
the latter rain has done its work. In nature the early rain germinates
the seed and causes it to grow, but it is the latter rain which fills out
the heads of grain and ripens them for the sickle. And it is the same
latter rain which causes the tares to grow to full maturity also. One
may ask how this could be true in the spiritual realm, until one recog-
nizes the fact that where the gospel appears at its best, there sin ap-
pears at its worst. At the cross of Calvary where righteousness ap-
peared at its very best, there the malignancy of sin appeared at its
very worst. So when the latter rain is falling, it imposes a test and a
call upon those who are not in tune with it, and they are forced to
make a stand against it. The more powerful the latter rain becomes,
the more this resistance is developed, until all pretense is swept away
and the real character of the individual is seen for what it is.
So in the very nature of the case the wheat and the tares must
grow together until the harvest which is the end of probationary time,
the commencement of the judgment of the living. Then they are for-
ever separated. And this is but to say that the judgment of the living
could never come elsewhere but at the end of the latter rain. No
farmer is ever going to go out and harvest his crop the moment the
latter rain begins. He will wait till the latter rain has done its needed
work and the sunshine of the summer heat has hardened the grain
ready for the sickle. Then and then only, at the end of the latter rain,
does he harvest the grain. So too it will be in the heavenly garner.
Thus we have seen evidence upon evidence so far showing that
the judgment of the living will come at the end and not at the begin-
ning of the latter rain period. In our next chapter we shall explore
still further evidence to consolidate our thinking and knowledge on
this vital question.
Chapter 13

Two Entirely
Different Separations
In the last chapter we examined some of the evidences in the Pro-
phetic Word which so clearly show that the latter rain comes before,
and not after the judgment of the living commences. Because this
point is so important, we will not leave it until we have examined still
further evidence to show the same truth.
"When the mission of the gospel is completed, the Judgment will
accomplish the work of separation. .. .
"When the work of the gospel is completed, there immediately
follows the separation between the good and the evil and the destiny
of each class is forever fixed." Christ's Object Lessons, 122, 123.
This statement is of particular interest to us, because of its close
connection in thought with the statements considered in the last
chapter in regard to the wheat and the tares. This is concerned with
the same thing exactly but under a different symbolism. The symbol-
ism here is that of good and bad fish, whereas in the other it was
wheat and tares.
The teaching of Christ under consideration here is another par-
able, that of the fishing net. Jesus said, "Again, the kingdom of
heaven is like a dragnet that was cast into the sea and gathered some
of every kind,
"which, when it was full, they drew to shore; and they sat down
and gathered the good into vessels, but threw the bad away.
"So it will be at the end of the age. The angels will come forth,
separate the wicked from among the just,
"and cast them into the furnace of fire. There will be wailing and
gnashing of teeth." Matthew 13:47-50.
"The casting of the net is the preaching of the gospel. This gath-
ers both good and evil into the church." Christ's Object Lessons,
122.
Just as the wheat and the tares grow together in the Church until
the harvest, so the gospel net gathers both the good and the bad fish
into the Church until the harvest, when the two are forever sepa-
TWO DIFFERENT SEPARATIONS 153

rated. Thus we see that between the parable of the wheat and the
tares, and the fishing net, there is a very close connection in thought
and that they are both teaching the same truth in regard to the final
separation.
This parable is even more specific than the parable of the wheat
and tares when it comes to spelling out the relationship between the
judgment of the living and the loud cry.
The main thought is contained in these words:
"when the mission of the gospel is completed, the Judgment will
accomplish the work of separation. . . . When the work of the gospel
is completed, there immediately follows the separation between the
good and the evil, and the destiny of each class is forever fixed."
Christ's Object Lessons, 122,123.
Let us ask some questions, the answers to which will be found in
these sentences.
For how long do the good and the bad fish remain together in the
ship which is the Church?
They remain there until the mission of the gospel is completed,
and then they are forever separated from each other.
When will the mission of the gospel be completed? Will it be at
the beginning or at the end of the latter rain period?
If the mission of the gospel were to be completed at the beginning
of the latter rain period, then what would be the need for the latter
rain and loud cry? It is the latter rain which finishes the work of
God's grace not only in the soul of each living believer, but also in the
work of calling the true children of God into the full knowledge of the
truth in those last days. Therefore, it is when the latter rain has come
to its end and only then that the mission of the gospel will have been
completed.
What comes at this point to accomplish the work of final
separation?
It is the judgment which comes at this point of time. This can
only be the judgment of the living which is intended here, for the
judgment for the dead has been going forward ever since 1844. One
could hardly expect to find a statement which more clearly states that
the latter rain comes before the judgment of the living than this one.
It specifically and directly says it, and leaves no argument in the
matter.
In Early Writings, 269-272, is described the shaking, and it is as
plainly told there as it can be that this shaking precedes the latter
rain. There are many who immediately assume that this shaking is
the dividing of the wheat from the tares, the wise from the foolish vir-
gins, the good from the bad fish, and is the same shaking as the one
already studied in this and the previous chapter of this series.
154 LAST DAY EVENTS

Now to make this assumption, and to draw this conclusion, is to

make a very serious mistake. It is to fail to understand the difference
between things which are different and yet are called by the same
name. While it is very true that there is a shaking or separation be-
fore the loud cry begins, it is to be understood that this is not the
same shaking as comes at the end of the loud cry period at the judg-
ment of the living. They are two very different shakings at two very
different points of time, caused by different factors altogether. It is
important that these differences be understood or we shall find our-
selves making wrong conclusions which will lead to our taking very
wrong positions in the final and finishing conflict.
Before discussing these different shakings so as to make this
point clear, let us first establish the principle of Bible interpretation
wherein there are often two things called by the same name yet they
are in all other respects different. As Bible students we must learn to
understand this difference although it is never explicitly pointed out
in the Scriptures.
The simplest and clearest example of this is found in the two ad-
vents of Jesus Christ, the first of which is now in the past and the sec-
ond is yet to be. Both of these events are called, "the advent of
Christ", because that is exactly what each is. No other words better
describe the event in each case. But there the similarity ends, for in
practically every other respect they are entirely different.
Let us compare these differences.
In the first advent, He came in complete obscurity, but in the sec-
ond He will come in all the brilliant glory of His Father and all the
holy angels and every eye shall see Him. There will be nothing ob-
scure about that advent.
In the first He came in poverty, but in the second He will appear
with all the riches of His Father.
In the first He came as a babe, but in the second He will be at full
maturity and stature.
In the first He came tabernacled in mortal, sinful flesh, but in the
second He comes to minister in glorious immortality.
So we might go on and compile quite a list of differences, but this
is sufficient to make the point intended. Now then, while both of
these advents were described in the Old Testament, never once are
we told therein that there were to be two of them. Always it simply
spoke of the advent of Christ as the Messiah, or the Saviour, or the
King, without specifying which advent was being described. The stu-
dent of the sacred word is left to distinguish which appearing was the
subject of the prophecy and to apply the information accordingly.
What would happen no doubt, was that the Lord showed to a
prophet a vision of the first advent of Christ, and the prophet would
TWO DIFFERENT SEPARATIONS 155

simply write down what was shown to him. Another prophet would
be given a view of the second advent of Christ, and he would write
down what was shown him, but in neither case were they specifically
shown that one was the first or the second. It was left with the care-
ful, prayerful student of the Word of God to understand and to know
this under the guidance of the Holy Spirit.
Now for you and for me today, this matter of discerning the dif-
ference between the two advents of Christ presents no problem.
Automatically, without thinking, we apply the appropriate texts in
their right places because we understand that there are to be two ad-
vents of Christ at least, and we understand the differences between
these two. For instance, when we read this text, we immediately ap-
ply it to the second advent, and correctly so: "Our God shall come,
and shall not keep silent; a fire shall devour before Him, and it shall
be very tempestuous all around Him.
"He shall call to the heavens from above, and to the earth, that
He may judge His people," Psalms 50:3, 4, These words certainly
do not apply to the first advent of Christ. We know that it would not
fit there. Proof that they apply to the second advent and not to the
first, is provided in the following statement:
"When the divine Presence was manifested upon Sinai, the glory
of the Lord was like devouring fire in the sight of all Israel. But when
Christ shall come in glory with His holy angels the whole earth shall
be ablaze with the terrible light of His presence. 'Our God shall
come, and shall not keep silence: a fire shall devour before Him, and
it shall be very tempestuous round about Him. He shall call to the
heavens from above, and to the earth, that He may judge His peo-
ple.' Psalms 50:3, 4. A fiery stream shall issue and come forth from
before Him, which shall cause the elements to melt with fervent heat,
the earth also, and the works that are therein shall be burned up.
The Lord Jesus shall be revealed from heaven with His mighty an-
gels, in flaming fire taking vengeance on them that know not God,
and that obey not the gospel.' 2 Thessalonians 1:7, 8." Patriarchs
and Prophets, 339, 340.
But when we read Isaiah 53:4, 5, "Surely He has borne our
griefs and carried our sorrows: yet we esteemed Him stricken, smit-
ten by God, and afflicted.
"But He was wounded for our transgressions, He was bruised for
our iniquities; the chastisement for our peace was upon Him, and by
His stripes we are healed," we know we are reading about the first
advent of Christ.
While this is to us no problem, it was certainly not so easy for the
people who lived in expectation of the advent of the Messiah at His
first appearance. In fact, they did not see and understand that there
[LDE11]
 THE TWO COMINGS OF CHRIST
confirm the principle that in the Scriptures, there are often two things called by
the same name but are in all other respects different from each other. As Bible
students we must learn to distinguish these differences.

Both comings First Coming Second Coming

are foretold in
the Old Testa- I
ment but only As a Baby In Full Maturity
as the comings
of Christ, not In Obscurity In Glory
as the First
and Second In Sinful, Mortal Flesh In Holy, Immortal Flesh
comings of In Poverty In Riches
Christ.
To Die a Sacrifice To Reign Forever

Because the Jews failed to understand this principle, they looked for Christ to come at
His First coming as He was due to come at the Second coming. Because He did not come
according to how their study of the Scriptures led them to expect Him, they rejected Him
at the cost of their eternal lives.
TWO DIFFERENT SEPARATIONS 157

were to be two advents of Christ, but saw and understood that there
would be only one when they should have understood two. There
can be no blame on the part of God for their misunderstanding. The
Holy Spirit was as available to them as He is to us, to teach them
these guiding principles of interpretation so that they did not need to
err at all.
But they did, even though they had no excuse for making this fa-
tal mistake, and we have less still, for not only do we have the advan-
tage of the same Teacher as they, but as well as we have the lesson
that their mistake can, and must teach us.
"Had they [the Jews] with humble minds and spiritual discern-
ment, studied the prophecies, they would not have been found in so
great error as to overlook the prophecies which pointed to His first
advent in humility, and misapply those which spoke of His second
coming with power and great glory. The Jewish people had been
striving for power. They were ambitious for worldly honors. They
were proud and corrupt, and could not discern sacred things. They
could not distinguish between those prophecies which pointed to the
first advent of Christ, and those that described His second, glorious
appearing. The power and glory described by the prophets as at-
tending His second advent, they looked for at His first advent." Re-
view and Herald, December 17,1872.
The measure of the seriousness of their mistake can be seen only
as we realize that it cost them their eternal life, for, as a result, they
were so mistaken as to the nature of the particular advent involved,
that when Jesus appeared exactly as prophesied, they rejected Him
on the basis of their understanding of the prophecies. Blinded by
pride, they had carefully assembled every prophecy describing
Christ's second Advent, while completely ignoring each and every
statement detailing the manner in which He would come at His first
advent.
It is a sobering truth that once they became established on this
faulty procedure, the more diligently they studied, the more Scrip-
tural support they found for their position, the more they were
locked into their expectations of how the Saviour-king would appear,
and the more certain they were to reject the Messiah. That is why
"the learned doctors of the law" were Christ's bitterest opponents.
From all this comes the solemn warning that it is not enough to
spend a great deal of time in the study of God's Word, important as it
is to do so. In addition, we must study according to the correct princi-
ples of Bible interpretation. Otherwise, the more time we spend
studying the Scriptures, the more deeply embedded in error we shall
be. This is why all the professedly Christian churches have each ar-
rived at different points of doctrinal error all from the same Bible.
158 LAST DAY EVENTS

So then, we dare not think lightly that we are immune to the same
mistake. True, we will not do this in respect to the two advents of
Christ, but we have to face the same test of our humility and willing-
ness to learn what the Word would teach us as distinct from what we
might wish it to teach us in other areas.
Just as there were two advents of Christ, so there are two shak-
ings or separations, two seals of God, two marriages, two blottings
out of sin, and two justifications, to name some of the things which
are called by the same name and yet are different. To escape arriving
at wrong conclusions in respect to these and other couplets, we must
faithfully and consistently apply the same safe principles of Bible in-
terpetation as those which reveal the two advents of Christ.
Let us do that in respect to the two very different shakings or
separations, noting first of all that nowhere does the inspired writer
state that there are two different shakings. We are alerted to the pos-
sibility that there are two when we begin to find two different de-
scriptions of shakings which cannot be matched.
Once we have become aware that two different shakings are in-
volved, the next task is to search out as many statements describing
the shakings as can be found, and then sort them into two catego-
ries—those detailing one kind of shaking, versus those detailing the
other kind. We will then find a very wonderfully harmonious pattern
appearing.
It is not often that the two things which are different are covered
in the same prophecy. Usually they are not mentioned together and
their relationship to each other is not so plainly shown. In this par-
able, the differences between these two separations are made so
clear that none need err in understanding them. Let us look then at
the parable of the fishing net for a moment or two.
The net which is a symbol of the teaching of the gospel through
human lips chosen by God, is let into the sea of the world and brings
forth fish both good and bad. Note very carefully that it does not
bring all the good and all the bad from the sea in any one dipping,
nor does it ever bring all the bad from the sea either. In other words,
in this separation, some good and some bad are separated from the
rest in each casting of the gospel net.
These good and bad fish are deposited together in the ship and
the net dips again and again to gather more good and bad into the
same ship. Eventually the mission of the fisherman is completed and
then he sails to the shore where he sits down and examines each fish,
separating the good from the bad and casting the bad back into the
sea once again.
That is the story briefly outlined. Now let us examine the differ-
ences in detail.
TWO DIFFERENT SEPARATIONS 159

In the first shaking or separation, the preaching of the gospel by

human messengers accomplishes the work, but the second is accom-
plished by the fish being put through a test. Each is individually ex-
amined to see if it meets the required standard.
Therefore, while human messengers bring the message which
accomplished the first separation, only God in heaven through the
angels can accomplish the second separation. It is a work which is
not committed to human hands to do. It is to the second separation
and not to the first that the statements so often quoted about the an-
gels doing the work of separation, must be applied. The statements
referred to, are ones such as these two.
"Let both tares and wheat grow together until the harvest. Then
it is the angels that do the work of separation."
"The work of separation is given to the angels of God, and not
committed into the hands of any man." Selected Messages 2:69;
Testimonies to Ministers, 47.
The first separation separates good and bad from the rest, but
the second separates the good from the bad among those who were
participants in the first separation. Note carefully that the second
separation is not concerned with any who were never caught up in
the first separation. This should be a solemn warning to those who
insist on remaining in the old hopelessly apostate church organiza-
tion when God sends a separating gospel message. They have the
false idea that they will come out when the final test comes. This
they will not do, for, unless they have had a part in the first separa-
tion, they will not even be considered in the second.
The first separation occupies a process of time as the net dips
again and again until the mission of the gospel is completed, but the
second is very short as each fish is put through the screening of the
final test to determine its acceptance or rejection for the harvest.
The first gathers the good and the bad into the Church, the sec-
ond separates the good for the kingdom of heaven.
Therefore the fact that one is involved in the first separation is no
guarantee that he will be in the kingdom but, those good fish who
are separated from the world in the first separation, and then go on
to be parted from the bad fish in the second separation, will as-
suredly be taken to heaven.
The first must be complete before the second can begin.
These differences between the two shakings or separations are
very real indeed. They are just as real as the differences between the
two advents of Christ and, like them, must on no account be con-
fused with each other. If we are careful to understand these differ-
ences, then we shall find not the least difficulty in identifying which
of the two shakings is referred to whenever we read a prophecy of
160 LAST DAY EVENTS

THE PARABLE OF THE FISHING NET

THE
CHURCH SORTING
TABLE

Separation
Number Two

Separates good from

Separation bad by an
examination.
Number One
Only those involved in
Separates good and bad the first separation
fish from the rest of the can have any part in
good and bad, into the the second.
Church
Not the work of the
Gospel net dips again gospel, but of the
and again until its mission judge who by exami-
is completed. nation determines who
It is by the gospel will go back into the
that the separation sea or into the
is accomplished harvest—the kingdom.

the one or the other, just as a clear and distinct understanding of the
differences between the two advents of Christ, removes all difficulty
when needing to apply the various prophecies to the one or the other
of the two events.
This then brings us back to the shaking before the latter rain. In
the light of the above information, we shall have no difficulty in see-
ing the difference between this shaking and the one we have been
TWO DIFFERENT SEPARATIONS 161

studying in the parable of the wheat and the tares. Knowing as we do

that the first shaking is caused by the test of a message, while the
second is caused by the test of persecution, we have but to ask the
question as to what is the cause of the shaking mentioned in Early
Writings, 269-272, to find out which of the two shakings it is. So we
read, "I asked the meaning of the shaking I had seen and was shown
that it would be caused by the straight testimony called forth by the
counsel of the true witness to the Laodiceans." Page 270.
Could any language be plainer than this? Here we are told that
the cause of this shaking which comes before the latter rain, is the
bringing of a message to the Laodicean Church and that message is
the Laodicean message. Nowhere in this description of the shaking
and its cause and effect, is any mention made of the death decree be-
ing imposed upon the people of God as being the cause of this shak-
ing. Such a situation God would never permit, for He knows that
Laodiceans have no hope of withstanding such a fearful test as the
death decree would impose.
The Laodicean message is addressed to a people in a lukewarm
condition, who, thinking they are rich and increased with goods and
having need of nothing, are in fact destitute, poor, blind, naked, and
in desperate need. Such a people, while in that condition, could
most certainly never stand against the pressures of the image of the
beast. They would not be able to refuse the law which demanded
they worship the beast and his image, and therefore against such a
people the beast would never need to be brought, because the church
and the state would have won with lesser pressure than that.
This is to say that such a people in such a condition would never
generate the fearful persecution which is the essence of the great fi-
nal test, which accomplishes the second and final separation. When-
ever did a lukewarm church stir the enmity and the anger of the
world against it. This never has been the case, and never will be. In-
stead, the process is that the Church is found standing in a lukewarm
condition and lacking the living presence of the mighty power of
God. To such a church comes the message of living righteousness
and the result is that there is a shaking, a division, a separation, the
majority going in the path of their own choosing, while the minority
who prize victory and salvation enough to give anything for it, go in
the ways of the Lord. See the picture of this in the days of Christ and
the Apostles. See the picture of this in any age and generation.
As the Church becomes filled with the power of God and the
truth of God, and goes forth to overthrow the strongholds of evil,
then it is that perscution follows. In the situation to be faced in the
last days, this will lead the people of God inexorably into the great
final test which will come as a result of their own empowered witness
162 LAST DAY EVENTS

for the truth, and their protest against the evil of the time. And the
great final test in turn will accomplish the final work of separation.
Thus there can be no excuse for confusing the separation which
takes place before the latter rain and which is caused by the message
sent from heaven, and the separation caused by the great final test,
which comes at the end of the latter rain, when the mission of the
gospel is completed as is shown in the parable of the net.
This also explains the fact that during the latter rain period the
wheat and the tares or the wise and the foolish virgins are still co-
mingled. We now know that the first separation brings out good and
bad from the rest. Therefore the separation which takes place before
the latter rain does not divide the wheat from the tares but simply
gathers the wheat and the tares into the Church of God, where they
continue to grow together until the harvest when the judgment will
accomplish the work of separation and the destiny of each class will
be forever fixed.
Both classes need the latter rain to bring them to maturity and
the evidences presented in this chapter show in the plainest possible
terms that the judgment of the living does not commence until the
end and not at the beginning of the latter rain. The parable of the
wheat and the tares and the fishing net show this very distinctly.
These words are too plain to be misunderstood: "When the mission
of the gospel is completed, the judgment will accomplish the work of
separation." Christ's Object Lessons, 122.
Understanding as we do that this separation is the separation of
the wheat from the tares, enables us to understand that the shaking
which does take place before the latter rain is not the shaking re-
ferred to here and therefore is no argument at all against the position
that the judgment comes at the end and not at the beginning of the
latter rain. This is the only way it could be as we shall understand and
see better and better as we proceed.
So far, we have gathered evidence from teachings in the direct
written Word of God, but it is essential that we see that this too is
taught in the sanctuary, the great object lesson of the way of salva-
tion. If we cannot find this truth in the sanctuary, then we have no
reason at all to believe it. So it will be that we shall turn to that source
of light and truth in the next chapter to see that the latter rain does
indeed come before the judgment of the living.
 Chapter 14

In the
Sanctuary Service
The scriptural evidences investigated so far, clearly show the re-
lationship of the judgment of the living to the latter rain so far as the
time sequence is concerned. These evidences leave no doubt but
that the judgment of the living comes at the end and not at the begin-
ning of the loud cry. One might feel that this is enough, but so impor-
tant is the sanctuary service and our understanding of it, that we
must not leave off this study without looking into that wonderful ob-
ject lesson to find the same truth taught there with equal clarity, for
that is where God's way is found, as it is written:
"Your way, O God, is in the sanctuary; who is so great a God as
our God?" Psalm 77:13.
The order of last day events, the judgment of the dead and of the
living, the seal of God, and the great final separation are all a part of
the gospel plan to save men and, as such, are all prefigured in the
sanctuary service.
It is in the sixteenth chapter of Leviticus that the order of the
service of the final atonement is described. This service, as we well
know, prefigures the judgment, first of the righteous dead, and then
of the righteous living. In the order of that service, we shall find the
most perfect harmony with the other truths already studied in regard
to the order of last day events.
This service reveals that before Aaron offered the sacrifices for
the people generally, he made a special offering of the final atone-
ment for himself and for his family. This is recorded in Leviticus
16:11-14:
"And Aaron shall bring the bull of the sin offering, which is for
himself, and make atonement for himself and for his house, and shall
kill the bull as the sin offering which is for himself.
"Then he shall take a censer full of burning coals of fire from the
altar before the Lord, with his hands full of sweet incense beaten
fine, and bring it inside the veil.
' 'And he shall put the incense on the fire before the Lord, that the
164 LAST DAY EVENTS

cloud of incense may cover the mercy seat that is on the Testimony,
lest he die.
"He shall take some of the blood of the bull and sprinkle it with
his finger on the mercy seat on the east side; and before the mercy
seat he shall sprinkle some of the blood with his finger seven times."
Having completed the work of taking the blood of the bullock
into the most holy place and sprinkling it upon the mercy seat for
himself and for his household, the high priest took the goat of the sin
offering which was for the people and brought this blood into the
sanctuary, and did with it exactly as he had done with the blood of
the bullock.
"Then he shall kill the goat of the sin offering, which is for the
people, bring its blood inside the veil, do with that blood as he had
done with the blood of the bull, and sprinkle it on the mercy seat and
before the mercy seat.
"So he shall make atonement for the Holy Place, because of the
uncleanness of the children of Israel, and because of their transgres-
sions, for all their sins; and so he shall do for the tabernacle of meet-
ing which remains among them in the midst of their uncleanness.
"There shall be no man in the tabernacle of meeting when he
goes in to make atonement in the Holy Place, until he comes out,
that he may make atonement for himself, for his household, and for
all the congregation of Israel.
"And he shall go out to the altar that is before the Lord, and
make atonement for it, and shall take some of the blood of the bull
and some of the blood of the goat, and put it on the horns of the altar
all around.
"Then he shall sprinkle some of the blood on it with his finger
seven times, cleanse it, and sanctify it from the uncleanness of the
children of Israel." Leviticus 16:15-19.
A brief summary can now be made of what took place on the
great day of Atonement at least insofar as we are concerned with the
type of the order of last day events. On this day, first of all, two kids
of the goats had been set aside, one kid as the Lord's goat, the other
as the scapegoat, in addition to a bullock which was to be the offer-
ing for Aaron and his household. Now first of all Aaron sacrificed the
bullock in order that the final atonement might be made for himself
and for his sons, by his taking the bullock's blood right into the most
holy place and sprinkling that blood upon the mercy seat.
Then he sacrificed the goat appointed to be the Lord's goat and
went through the same final atonement procedure with its blood as
he had followed through with the blood of the bullock. By this means
the final atonement was made for those of the people who met the
THE SANCTUARY SERVICE 165

conditions required, and the sanctuary itself and its furniture were
cleansed.
No one should have any difficulty seeing that there is a final
atonement made for one class of people before it is made for an-
other. One class is symbolized by Aaron and his sons; the other class
by the Levites and the rest of the congregation.
To appreciate this distinction, we must understand in what way
the two classes are different. This is made clear in the following
statement:
"By divine direction the tribe of Levi was set apart for the service
of the sanctuary. In the earliest times every man was the priest of his
own household. In the days of Abraham the priesthood was regarded
as the birthright of the eldest son. Now, instead of the first-born of all
Israel, the Lord accepted the tribe of Levi for the work of the sanctu-
ary. By this signal honor He manifested His approval of their fidelity,
both in adhering to His service and in executing His judgments when
Israel apostatized in the worship of the golden calf. The priesthood,
however, was restricted to the family of Aaron. Aaron and his sons
alone were permitted to minister before the Lord; the rest of the tribe
were entrusted with the charge of the tabernacle and its furniture,
and they were to attend upon the priests in their ministration, but
they were not to sacrifice, to burn incense, or to see the holy things
till they were covered." Patriarchs and Prophets, 350.
God was very specific in His detailing the scope of the work to be
performed by Aaron and his sons, and of the limitations imposed on
the remainder of the Levites.
Aaron and his sons were responsible for offering the sacrifices
and were directed to enter the tabernacle to make Atonement for the
people, and for the cleansing of the holy places, but the ministry of
the Levites was restricted to activities outside the sanctuary, that is,
in the courtyard and out among the people.
Nonetheless, despite the limitations imposed on them, they were
very busy individuals, for they were the teachers of the people, and
they were those who gathered the congregation to the various con-
vocations of which the final atonement was the most solemn. In
many ways they ministered to the spiritual and physical needs of the
people, but they could not, and they dared not, enter into the sanctu-
ary itself.
Aaron and his sons were part of the house of Levi, and they
could do all that the Levites did, but, while the house of Aaron was a
part of the house of Levi, yet the Levites were not a part of the house
of Aaron. This distinction must not be overlooked or ignored.
This can only mean then, that when Aaron offered the bullock for
himself and his household in the making of the final atonement for
166 LAST DAY EVENTS

them, this did not include the Levites. That offering was not for
them, for whom a different sacrificial symbol had been divinely ap-
pointed. They must and did receive their final atonement from the
one other offering available and that was the offering of the Lord's
goat. As this was for the people generally, then it stands that the
Levites' offering was included with the people and at the same time
as the rest of the people. The simple fact of the case then is that
Aaron and his sons received their final atonement before the Levites
and the people generally, and the Levites received theirs at the same
time as the people.
Do not deduce from this distinction that one of the two groups
receives its final atonement through Christ's sacrifice, and the other
through somebody else. This cannot be, for Christ's propitiatory sac-
rifice is the only one by which the final atonement can be made for
anybody. The bullock slain on behalf of Aaron and his sons symbol-
ized Christ just as the goat slain to make the final atonement for the
house of Levi and the rest of Israel also symbolized Christ. We must
never lose sight of the glorious saving truth that the entire range of
sacrifices listed in the typical services of the Old Testament, all point
to the one sacrificial death of Jesus Christ our Saviour. The reason
for the use of a variety of symbols is to disclose to view different ap-
plications of the blood of Christ.
To understand the message taught in the sacrificing of the bul-
lock to provide the final atonement for Aaron and his sons on the one
hand, and the lamb for the house of Levi on the other, we need to dis-
cern who are the antitypes of these symbols. Once that is done, the
message from the sanctuary becomes clear.
The identification of Aaron, the high priest, is a simple, straight-
forward matter. His position and attendant ministry point to Christ
in His role as the High Priest of the sanctuary in heaven, a truth to
which Paul testified again and again.
"Now this is the main point of the things we are saying: We have
such a High Priest, who is seated at the right hand of the throne of
the Majesty in the heavens.
"a minister of the sanctuary and of the true tabernacle which the
Lord erected, and not man." Hebrews 8:1, 2.
Now two questions emerge here at once. The first question is, If
Aaron as a type of Christ offers a final atonement for himself, is he in
the offering of that final atonement for himself, also giving to us a
type of what Christ must also do for himself? And the answer must be
yes!
It is true of course that Jesus Christ has no sin of His own either
by natural inheritance or subsequent misdeed, for which He needs to
offer a final atonement. But let it never be forgotten that Jesus Christ
THE SANCTUARY SERVICE 167

has taken upon Himself the sins of all the world and that, as a man
and as a God, He bears that sin in the sanctuary above. That awful
burden of guilt which was on and in us, He has taken upon Himself. It
cannot remain there forever, however, but must be taken and placed
on the scapegoat to be sent away into perpetual banishment. This
will necessitate a final atonement being made for Him as well as for
us. With us of course, it is the blood of Another by which that propi-
tiation is made, but in Christ's case it is His own blood, because in
the symbol, He is both the priest and the sacrifice on the great Day of
Atonement.
But now the question must be raised, Who then are the antitypi-
cal sons of Aaron? They cannot symbolize the people of God upon
the earth, for none of us, even though we are sons of our great High
Priest, are ministers with Christ in the antitypical sanctuary in
heaven. We are not there carrying golden censors from which issue
the sacred incense which is the righteousness of Christ, nor are we
there presenting the prayers of earthbound Christians before the
eternal Father. We are very much here and not at all there!
But cannot we be there by faith?
We can be there by faith, but only as a suppliant and as one who
follows his great High Priest by faith as He goes in before God, and
not as a priest. To be a ministering son of the High Priest requires
your being in the sanctuary in person, physically, and in fact, and not
merely by faith.
So, who then are the antitypical sons of the High Priest?
They are those of God's children who were either translated to
heaven, as are the cases of Enoch and Elijah, or were raised from the
dead and taken there as in the cases of Moses and those who were
resurrected with Christ on His resurrection morning. Of them it is
written:
"Jesus, when He had cried out again with a loud voice, yielded
up His spirit.
"And behold, the veil of the temple was torn in two from top to
bottom; and the earth quaked, and the rocks were split,
"and the graves were opened; and many bodies of the saints who
had fallen asleep were raised;
"and coming out of the graves after His resurrection, they went
into the holy city and appeared to many." Matthew 27:50-53.
"As Christ arose, He brought from the grave a multitude of cap-
tives. The earthquake at His death had rent open their graves, and
when He arose, they came forth with Him. They were those who had
been co-laborers with God, and who at the cost of their lives had
borne testimony to the truth. Now they were to be witnesses for Him
who had raised them from the dead." Desire of Ages, 786.
168 LAST DAY EVENTS

"When he ascended on high after his resurrection, he led captiv-

ity captive, and gave gifts unto men. Those who had transgressed
the law of Jehovah had fallen in death. Although they had confessed
and forsaken their sins, Satan had claimed them as his lawful sub-
jects and prisoners. He said they were his victims; but when Christ
came out of the grave, he led forth from the prison-houses of the en-
emy a multitude of captives as a sample of the general resurrection.
And when he comes again, it will be to break the fetters of the tomb,
to call forth the prisoners of hope from their prison-houses, to clothe
them with a glorious immortality." Signs of the Times, June 17,
1889.
When these privileged beings arrived in heaven, they were as-
signed positions within the sanctuary from where they were to minis-
ter to their brethren on the earth below. It was while they occupied
these positions, and performed these duties, that John was given a
view of them. What he saw and heard, he recorded in Revelation 4
and 5.
Firstly, he relates how he responded to an invitation to be in-
formed of future events, whereupon he beheld "a throne set in
heaven, and one sat on the throne.
"And He who sat there was like a jasper and sardius stone in ap-
pearance; and there was a rainbow around the throne, in appear-
ance like an emerald.
"Around the throne were twenty-four thrones, and on the
thrones I saw twenty-four elders sitting, clothed in white robes; and
they had crowns of gold on their heads.
"And from the throne proceeded lightnings, thunderings, and
voices. And there were seven lamps of fire were burning before the
throne, which are the seven spirits of God.
"Before the throne there was a sea of glass, like crystal. And in
the midst of the throne, and around the throne, were four living crea-
tures full of eyes in front and behind." Revelation 4:2-6.
Without question, the wonderful being seated on the throne
could be none other than God the Father, and the throne room was
the first apartment of the sanctuary in heaven as is indicated by the
"seven lamps of fire burning before the throne, which are the seven
spirits of God", and confirmed by the following statement:
"The holy places of the sanctuary in heaven are represented by
the two apartments in the sanctuary on earth. As in vision the apos-
tle John was granted a view of the temple of God in heaven, he be-
held there 'seven lamps of fire burning before the throne.' Revela-
tion 4:5. He saw an angel 'having a golden censer; and there was
given unto him much incense, that he should offer it with the
prayers of all saints upon the golden altar which was before the
THE SANCTUARY SERVICE 169

throne.' Revelation 8:3. Here the prophet was permitted to behold

the first apartment of the sanctuary in heaven; and he saw there
the 'seven lamps of fire' and 'the golden altar,' represented by the
golden candlestick and the altar of incense in the sanctuary on
earth. Again, 'the temple of God was opened' (Revelation 11:19),
and he looked within the inner veil, upon the holy of holies. Here he
beheld 'the ark of His testament,' represented by the sacred chest
constructed by Moses to contain the law of God." Great Contro-
versy, 414, 415.
So then, in this inspired revelation, God is the all powerful Being
seated on the throne in the first apartment of the heavenly sanctuary.
Some may have difficulty accepting God's being in this location, for
they have always confined Him in their thinking to the second apart-
ment where they envisioned Him abiding perpetually above the
mercy seat, between the cherubim. Because of the limited nature of
the object lesson which was the Old Testament sanctuary, there is
the danger of developing this fixed-position concept of our heavenly
Father.
This limited view of an immobile God, has given support to those
who reject the presence of a two-apartment sanctuary in heaven, in
which Christ firstly administers a daily atonement, followed by the fi-
nal atonement. These numerous rejecters of truth teach that when
Christ returned to heaven, He went directly into His Father's pres-
ence in the most holy place of the sanctuary in heaven. Directly into
His Father's presence He went, it is true, but that was in the first, not
the second apartment.
Several Scriptures confirm that Jesus went directly into His Fa-
ther's presence when He ascended on high. Here are several of
them:
"God, who at various times and in different ways spoke in time
past to the fathers by the prophets,
"has in these last days spoken to us by His Son, whom He has ap-
pointed heir of all things, through whom also He made the worlds;
"who being the brightness of His glory and the express image of
His person, and upholding all things by the word of His power, when
He had by Himself purged our sins, sat down at the right hand of the
Majesty on high." Hebrews 1:1-3.
"Now this is the main point of the things we are saying: We have
such a High Priest, who is seated at the right hand of the throne of
the Majesty in the heavens,
"a Minister of the sanctuary and of the true tabernacle which the
Lord erected, and not man." Hebrews 8:1, 2.
"To him who overcomes I will grant to sit with Me on My throne,
170 LAST DAY EVENTS

as I also overcame and sat down with My Father on His throne."

Revelation 3:21.
This wonderful throne of matchless power and glory is not an im-
mobile fixture, but has the capacity to move at incredible speed, so
fast in fact that God can transfer from heaven to earth in minutes.
Christ demonstrated this capacity on His resurrection day when He
ascended to His Father and returned to earth on the same day.
To Ezekiel was given a vision which revealed among other things,
the capacity of God on His throne to move with blinding speed from
anywhere to everywhere. The entire first chapter of Ezekiel 1 is de-
voted to describing the living nature of God's throne made up of
cherubim, wheels within wheels, and living creatures of whom the
prophet saw that:
"the living creatures ran back and forth, in appearance like a
flash of lightning." Ezekiel 1:4. The whole chapter is too long to
quote here in full, but I recommend that it be read carefully more
than once or twice.
So, there is no question about God's capacity to move Himself
and His living throne with incredible speed, to any place, at any
time.
And He has so moved it.
The Father and the Son were together in the first apartment of
the heavenly sanctuary from at least as late as the triumphant return
of Christ to heaven after His crucifixion and resurrection, until Octo-
ber 22, 1844, when the Father left the first apartment and travelled
into the second apartment. This was an event of such immense im-
portance, that we must expect to find detailed descriptions of it in
the authoritative, inspired writings, and so we do.
To Daniel was given a vision revealing the grand entry of the Al-
mighty into the judgment room or second apartment of the sanctu-
ary in heaven. He saw thrones being put in place, the everlasting Fa-
ther seating Himself, the books being opened, and the commence-
ment of the judgment. Here is his inspired vision of these events
which happened on time at the end of the 2,300 year prophecy:
"I watched till thrones were put in place, and the Ancient of Days
was seated; His garment was white as snow, and the hair of His head
was like pure wool. His throne was a fiery flame, its wheels a burning
fire;
"A fiery stream issued and came forth from before Him. A thou-
sand thousands ministered to Him; ten thousand times ten thousand
stood before Him. The court was seated, and the books were
opened." Daniel 7:9, 10.
A still more detailed description which explains that the Father,
THE SANCTUARY SERVICE 171

at the close of the 2300 years in 1844, transferred to the second

apartment ahead of Christ, reads as follows:
"I saw the Father rise from the throne, and in a flaming chariot
go into the holy of holies within the veil, and sit down. Then Jesus
rose up from the throne, and the most of those who were bowed
down arose with Him. I did not see one ray of light pass from Jesus to
the careless multitude after He arose, and they were left in perfect
darkness. Those who arose when Jesus did, kept their eyes fixed on
Him as He left the throne and led them out a little way. Then He
raised His right arm, and we heard His lovely voice saying, 'Wait
here; I am going to My Father to receive the kingdom; keep your gar-
ments spotless, and in a little while I will return from the wedding
and receive you to Myself.' Then a cloudy chariot, with wheels like
flaming fire, surrounded by angels, came to where Jesus was. He
stepped into the chariot and was borne to the holiest, where the Fa-
ther sat. There I beheld Jesus, a great High Priest, standing before
the Father. On the hem of His garment was a bell and a pomegran-
ate, a bell and a pomegranate. Those who rose up with Jesus would
send up their faith to Him in the holiest, and pray, 'My Father, give us
Thy Spirit.' Then Jesus would breathe upon them the Holy Ghost. In
that breath was light, power, and much love, joy, and peace. Early
Writings, 55.
So there is no problem with God's being in the first apartment in
John's time, nor with His transferring to the second apartment in
1844. The Father and the Son were together in both of the sanctu-
ary apartments in their turn. They were not separated from each
other up till the commencement of the judgment, by Christ's being in
the outer apartment, while His Father remained sequestered in the
most holy place.
The next step in our investigations is to identify the twenty-four
elders, and the four living beings who are seen in the first apartment
together with the Father and with the Lamb. This poses no difficulty,
for they themselves witness as to who they are. They are redeemed
ones who were already in heaven by John's time, including, Enoch,
Moses, Elijah, and those who were raised with Christ and went home
with Him. Here is their personal testimony as to who they are:
"Now when He had taken the scroll, the four living creatures and
the twenty-four elders fell down before the Lamb, each having a
harp, and golden bowls full of incense, which are the prayers of the
saints.
"And they sang a new song, saying: 'You are worthy to take the
scroll, and to open its seals; for You were slain, and have redeemed
us to God by Your blood out of every tribe and tongue and people
and nation,
[LDE12]
172 LAST DAY EVENTS

" 'And have made us kings and priests to our God; and we shall
reign on the earth.' " Revelation 5:8-10.
Only human beings who have been saved from sin and death can
testify of Christ that He has redeemed them by His blood out of
every tribe, tongue, people, and nation.
These redeemed ones are declared to be kings and priests, are
seen ministering before the Father in the first apartment in heaven,
and each carries a golden bowl, "full of incense, which are the
prayers of the saints".
This is clearly the antitype of the ministration of the priests in the
Old Testament sanctuary. Just as Aaron and his sons offered sacri-
fices and ministered within the tabernacle, so Christ and His sons do
the same in the heavenly. These are they who, both in type and an-
titype, receive the final atonement cleansing before the rest of Israel.
In the typical situation, the rest of Israel apart from Aaron and his
sons, was made up of two classes of people—the Levites and the re-
mainder of the congregation, or the Levites and the other twelve
tribes, bearing in mind that there were thirteen tribes altogether.
What was the difference between these two groups?
The Levites were the leaders in the worship of God, they were
the instructors of the people, and the assistants of the priests in the
work connected with the sanctuary. They were the ones who gath-
ered the people and led them to the sanctuary for the great Day of
Atonement.
The same two classes, apart from those already in heaven, must
be in evidence in the antitype. So who are symbolized by the Levites
today? They are those who, through the third angel's message, are
well versed in the knowledge of the sanctuary truth, and who, in con-
sequence, will be filled with the power of the latter rain, and sent
forth to minister to those of God's children who as yet know nothing
of these great truths. They will be the teachers of this great multi-
tude, and will gather them to the sanctuary for the great day of final
atonement.
So then, in the typical service, there were three classes of human
beings for whom the final atonement had to be made. There were the
high priest and his sons, the Levites, and the rest of Israel. But, there
were only two services for the three groups, which meant that two of
the three were obliged to share one of the two available services.
Those two were the Levites and the rest.
There is a very obvious reason for this. The great day of final
atonement was not scheduled to commence until October, 1844, but
in the divine plan to fill important, and in fact essential positions,
long before that time, there was the need to bring certain of the sons
of the High Priest into the service of the heavenly sanctuary. We
THE SANCTUARY SERVICE 173

have observed from the light contained in Revelation 4 and 5, that

He did this.
We know perfectly well that these redeemed ones who have been
taken to heaven in advance of all the rest, could not go there unless a
totally successful work had been done in them: "to finish the trans-
gression, to make an end of sins, to make reconciliation for iniquity,
to bring in everlasting righteousness." Daniel 9:24.
That means that every atonement necessary to complete these
works in them, including the final atonement, must have been made
for them so that they could be cleared for entry into heaven. And, be-
cause these sons of the High Priest were taken to heaven long before
their brethren, they had to receive a special final atonement service
long before 1844. How simply and beautifully this provision of di-
vine grace was made available, so that Christ's sons could take up
their appointed ministry in the sanctuary in heaven!
While those who are already in heaven received their final atone-
ment before all the rest, no such precedence is either needed by, or
granted to the other two classes of believers.
Consider what took place on the great day of final atonement
when all Israel were gathered at the sanctuary. Ten days before, the
trumpets had begun to sound their warning of the rapidly approach-
ing day of judgment and final atonement. Throughout the year, the
Levites had labored to prepare all for the solemn assembly, and now
they called for all to gather at the sanctuary to receive the blessing of
the final atonement.
Let it be emphasized that the Levites did not gather at the sanctu-
ary first, there received the final atonement, and then went out to
gather the hosts of Israel to the sanctuary for them in their turn to re-
ceive their final atonement. That is not the way it was.
Instead, the Levites gathered the people to the sanctuary, and to-
gether with them, received all the blessings to be received of the
Lord on that solemn day.
What took place in the typical service is the revelation of what
happens in the antitype. Those of us who understand the messages
of present truth are the people typified by the Levites. Like them we
will not come to the sanctuary first to receive the final atonement,
and then go forth in the latter rain power of the Holy Spirit to gather
the rest of the yet hidden hosts of Israel to receive their final atone-
ment. If this were the procedure, type and antitype would be hope-
lessly at variance.
Instead, we who know the final messages, will be endowed with
the Holy Spirit in latter rain power, with which we will go out to the
entire world to gather all Israel to the great day of judgment. Then,
174 LAST DAY EVENTS

when this mission of the gospel is completed, we with them will re-
ceive the benefits of the final atonement.
Thus the sanctuary and its services harmonize with the truth that
the latter rain and its resulting loud cry come before the judgment of
the living, and the sealing of all the living saints.
It is well worth noting that, if it were true that the judgment of the
living, the final atonement, and the sealing will precede the outpour-
ing of the latter rain, it would then follow that the people of God
would not need to live by faith during the loud cry and the subsequent
time of Jacob's Trouble. This would be so because, if the outpouring
is to come after the final sealing, its reception by an individual would
be the absolute guarantee that he was eternally sealed. After the re-
ception of this incontrovertible sign, he would no longer need to live
by faith, for he would have the witness that he was secure for eternity.
But this cannot be, for this will be the greatest test of faith ever
imposed on God's people anywhere, at anytime. It will be the period
when the saints will have to agonize in order to gain the victory. It is
quite impossible for us to realize beforehand what a testing time that
is going to be.
"The season of distress and anguish before us will require a faith
that can endure weariness, delay, and hunger—a faith that will not
faint though severely tried. The period of probation is granted to all
to prepare for that time. Jacob prevailed because he was persevering
and determined. His victory is an evidence of the power of importu-
nate prayer. All who will lay hold of God's promises, as he did, and
be as earnest and persevering as he was, will succeed as he suc-
ceeded. Those who are unwilling to deny self, to agonize before God,
to pray long and earnestly for His blessing, will not obtain it. Wres-
tling with God—how few know what it is! How few have ever had
their souls drawn out after God with intensity of desire until every
power is on the stretch. When waves of despair which no language
can express sweep over the suppliant, how few cling with unyielding
faith to the promises of God." Great Controversy, 621.
The objection which has been raised against this argument is that
we will not know when the latter rain has fallen on us. To support
this contention the statement is quoted which says: "It may be falling
on hearts all around us, but we shall not discern or receive it." Testi-
monies to Ministers, 507.
This statement is used to convey the thought that the latter rain
will all be so quiet an affair that it will come and go without our even
knowing that it has been and gone. But such a concept arises from a
failure to note carefully the meaning of the word, "discern." To dis-
cern is to rightly evaluate a thing for what it is.
When the latter rain has fallen, the entire world is going to know
THE SANCTUARY SERVICE 175

that something powerful and mighty is going on just as did the Jew-
ish leaders when the former rain was poured out. "The power at-
tending the message will only madden those who oppose it." Great
Controversy, 607. But, while they are very much aware that some-
thing mighty is going on, and while they bend all their energies to re-
sist it, the fact remains that they will not discern it for what it is. To
them that which is the power of God, is nothing but the power of
Satan.
The outpouring of the latter rain will be the final and complete
fulfillment of the prophecy in Joel 2. This prophecy received a first
fulfillment in the experience of the disciples in the outpouring of the
former rain. Peter, speaking by the inspiration of the Spirit of God,
recognized the event as the fulfillment of prophecy when he said,
"But this is what was spoken by the prophet Joel." Acts 2:16. How
much more certainly will the people of God in their understanding of
prophecy and under the inspiration of the Spirit of God, know that
the latter rain has come, that Joel 2:28-32 is being fulfilled for the
second and final time.
The people of God will know that the latter rain has come, from a
number of evidences. They will know it because the image has been
formed and the fall of Babylon is complete. They will know it by the
very nature of the message which will be proclaimed. They will know
it because the Spirit of God will tell them so.
In fact, one has but to read the sentence before the one so often
quoted in Testimonies to Ministers, 507 to see this. It reads:
"Unless we are daily advancing in the exemplification of the ac-
tive Christian virtues, we shall not recognize the manifestations of
the Holy Spirit in the latter rain. It may be falling on hearts all around
us, but we shall not discern or receive it."
Here is an urgent warning that we will not recognize the Holy
Spirit in latter rain power, if we are not daily advancing with Christ.
Therefore, if we are daily advancing with Christ, we will recognize
the Holy Spirit in the latter rain, will receive it, and will know that we
have received the real endowment of light and power.
But the people of God will live by faith alone until the very end,
because the outpouring of the latter rain will never be a message that
we are eternally secure. Not until the voice of God delivers them dur-
ing the final stages of the plagues, will they at last have the visible
evidence that they are eternally secure.
A common argument is that the latter rain will be given only to
those who are fully secure and can never fall again, that God would
never trust His Spirit to anyone who might fall away later. But such
an argument overlooks two facts. The first is that it is the latter rain
which does bring the work of God's grace in the soul to completion.
176 LAST DAY EVENTS

Therefore no one who waits till they are fully perfected before they
accept the latter rain could ever receive it, for they must have the lat-
ter rain to bring them to that state. When the latter rain is finished
with us and not before, will we be ready for translation.
The second fact is that the gift of the Spirit is in proportion to our
capacity to receive it, not on the guarantee of our never falling away
again. There are many men in history who have received the Spirit in
power and yet will never see the kingdom. Two examples are king
Saul who prophesied under the inspiration of the Spirit of God, and
Judas who received the power along with the other disciples to go
out and heal the sick and work other miracles.
Likewise the fact that one has received the outpouring of the
Spirit when the latter rain falls is no guarantee that one will stand
right through. No child of God will be eternally secure until the voice
of God shall deliver His people during the falling of the sixth plague,
very, very close to the second advent of Christ. Until then, it would
be most dangerous to relax and imagine that one is now eternally se-
cure and could not fall again. One could fall and it will be needful to
watch unto prayer and study as never before to ensure that you stand
without faltering.
"Those who exercise but little faith now, are in the greatest dan-
ger of falling under the power of satanic delusions and the decree to
compel the conscience. And even if they endure the test they will be
plunged into deeper distress and anguish in the time of trouble, be-
cause they have never made it a habit to trust in God. The lessons of
faith which they have neglected they will be forced to learn under a
terrible pressure of discouragement." Great Controversy, 622.
So we see that evidence piles upon evidence to show the nature
of the order of last day events. Soon these will be upon us and it be-
hoves all to understand and to know that we must be ready and
watching so that the Lord can fill us with His Spirit and see the work
ended at last.
 Chapter 15

The Shut Door

In many inspired statements such as the one following, we are di-
rected to draw our conclusions from the weight of evidence:
"There is no excuse for doubt or skepticism. God has made am-
ple provision to establish the faith of all men, if they will decide from
the weight of evidence. But if they wait to have every seeming objec-
tion removed before they believe, they will never be settled, rooted,
and grounded in the truth. God will never remove all seeming diffi-
culties from our path. Those who wish to doubt may find opportu-
nity; those who wish to believe will find plenty of evidence upon
which to base their faith. The position of some is unexplainable,
even to themselves. They are drifting without an anchor, beating
about in the fog of uncertainty. Satan soon seizes the helm and car-
ries their frail bark wherever he pleases. They become subject to his
will. Had these minds not listened to Satan, they would not have
been deceived by his sophistry; had they been balanced on the side
of God they would not have become confused and bewildered." Tes-
timonies 4:583, 584.
Yet it is always an amazing thing that after the presentation of
solid and irrefutable evidence revealing an important aspect of pre-
sent truth, some objector will come forward with a single brief and
obscure statement, which, taken alone, could support his contrary
view, while rendering of none effect the power and truth of the mes-
sage. To this he will cling with tenacious and blind obstinacy, choos-
ing to pin his entire faith and belief on his understanding of this lone
piece of evidence, while rejecting the veritable mountain of evidence
revealing the full truth. But just as the straw in the clutching hands of
a drowning man will serve only to give a fleeting moment of final
hope, so the statements to which these cling also give but a fleeting
false hope. Careful consideration of what the statement actually does
say soon makes it plain that there is no contradiction between it and
the general body of evidence.
A typical such statement is this one:
"The time of God's destructive judgments is the time of mercy
for those who have no opportunity to learn what is truth. Tenderly
will the Lord look upon them. His heart of mercy is touched; His
178 LAST DAY EVENTS

hand is still stretched out to save, while the door is closed to those
who would not enter. Large numbers will be admitted who in these
last days hear the truth for the first time." (Review and Herald, July
5, 1906). SDA Bible Commentary 7:979.
Here is a plain statement announcing that the fate of two differ-
ent classes of people will be sealed at two different points of time.
While the door of mercy remains open for one group, it is fast closed
against another. This means that probationary time has expired for
the one, but there remains a period of it for the other.
From these facts we are in danger of arriving at some wrong con-
clusions, simply because we tend to associate the close of probation
with the judgment of the living only. Now it is certainly true that the
instant a person's name will be called for the investigative judgment,
that person's probationary time has gone forever. In this closing of
the final day of opportunity, all those who have professed Christ's
name come for investigation together at the same time, for, as we
have seen, there will not be two groups—one at the beginning, and
the other at the end of the latter rain.
But the statement under consideration could be interpreted
falsely, to support such a view until the point is made that there have
been numerous closures of probationary time which have not been
connected to the final investigative judgment of God's professed
people.
Now the incorrect assumption is, that because probation has
closed for the rejecters of the message of warning and reproof, it has
also closed for the accepters of the message. In all eternity both past
and future, there is only one closure of probation which occurs at the
same time for both those who have accepted salvation and those
who have rejected it, and that will be when, at the end of the loud cry,
all human probation closes for the commencement of the judgment
of the living.
The very first closing of a probation developed with the great re-
bellion of Lucifer. For a long time, God kept the door of mercy open.
"In great mercy, according to His divine character, God bore
long with Lucifer." Patriarchs and Prophets, 39.
But, eventually his probationary time ran out, and he and his fol-
lowers were expelled from heaven—forever. So tightly was the door
closed against them, that even though he pleaded for re-admission, it
could not be granted to them.
"After Satan and those who fell with him were shut out of
heaven, and he realized that he had forever lost all its purity and
glory, he repented, and wished to be reinstated in heaven. He was
willing to take his proper place, or any position that might be as-
signed him. But no; heaven must not be placed in jeopardy. All
THE SHUT DOOR 179

heaven might be marred should he be taken back; for sin originated

with him, and the seeds of rebellion were within him. Both he and
his followers wept, and implored to be taken back into the favor of
God. But their sin—their hatred, their envy and jealousy—had been
so great that God could not blot it out. It must remain to receive its
final punishment." Early Writings, 146.
That certainly is a fine example of a probationary time period
which eventually came to an end for Lucifer and his angels. But it
must be remembered that, once Lucifer raised his issues in heaven,
all the angels were on probation so that they might have the opportu-
nity to come to their own decision to remain loyal, or to rebel.
Here now is a point which must not be overlooked. When Luci-
fer's probationary time ran out, it still continued for the loyal angels
until Christ's crucifixion, when, "the last link of sympathy between
Satan and the heavenly world was broken." Desire of Ages, 761. So
then, from the cross forward, the angel's have been so sealed against
Satan and his philosophies, that they no longer need probationary
time. They have irreversibly chosen to remain loyal to God.
There are numerous examples down through history of the door
of mercy being closed against those who despised God's warnings
and reproofs, while it continued to remain open for those who were
still striving to perfect Christian characters in the fear of the Lord.
Here are some of them:
"There was a shut door in Noah's day. There was at that time a
withdrawal of the Spirit of God from the sinful race that perished in
the waters of the Flood. God Himself gave the shut-door message to
Noah:
'My spirit shall not always strive with man, for that he also is
flesh: yet his days shall be an hundred and twenty years' (Genesis
6:3).
"There was a shut door in the days of Abraham. Mercy ceased to
plead with the inhabitants of Sodom, and all but Lot, with his wife
and two daughters, were consumed by the fire sent down from
heaven.
"There was a shut door in Christ's day. The Son of God declared
to the unbelieving Jews of that generation, 'Your house is left unto
you desolate' (Matthew 23:38).
"Looking down the stream of time to the last days, the same infi-
nite power proclaimed through John:
'' These things saith he that is holy, he that is true, he that hath
the key of David, he that openeth, and no man shutteth; and shut-
teth, and no man openeth' (Revelation 3:7).
"I was shown in vision, and I still believe, that there was a shut
door in 1844. All who saw the light of the first and second angels'
180 LAST DAY EVENTS

While the door of mercy is still open for some, it is closed

against those who would not enter.
THE SHUT DOOR 181

messages and rejected that light, were left in darkness. And those
who accepted it and received the Holy Spirit which attended the
proclamation of the message from heaven, and who afterward re-
nounced their faith and pronounced their experience a delusion,
thereby rejected the Spirit of God, and it no longer pleaded with
them.
"Those who did not see the light, had not the guilt of its rejec-
tion. It was only the class who had despised the light from heaven
that the Spirit of God could not reach. And this class included, as I
have stated, both those who refused to accept the message when it
was presented to them, and also those who, having received it, after-
ward renounced their faith. These might have a form of godliness,
and profess to be followers of Christ; but having no living connection
with God, they would be taken captive by the delusions of Satan.
These two classes are brought to view in the vision—those who de-
clared the light which they had followed a delusion, and the wicked
of the world who, having rejected the light, had been rejected of
God. No reference is made to those who had not seen the light, and
therefore were not guilty of its rejection." Selected Messages 1:63,
64.
The first on this list is the shut door of Noah's day. At that time,
both the door of mercy and the wooden door of the ark were forever
closed against those who had refused God's gracious offer of salva-
tion in the time of His retributive judgments. But while probationary
time had ended for everyone outside the ark, it had not for those in-
side that wonderful ship. Both inside and after they emerged from it,
they lived lives of test and trial with the freedom to abandon right-
eousness any time they chose to.
The same conditions held good in the destruction of Sodom and
Gomorrah, and in every other shut-door situation.
With these principles in mind, we can read the statement which
we have been considering, more intelligently. Here it is once more:
"The time of God's destructive judgments is the time of mercy
for those who have no opportunity to learn what is truth. Tenderly
will the Lord look upon them. His heart of mercy is touched; His
hand is still stretched out to save, while the door is closed to those
who would not enter. Large numbers will be admitted who in these
last days hear the truth for the first time." (Review and Herald, July
5, 1906). SDA Bible Commentary 7-.979.
The flooding of the earth in Noah's day, and the burning of
Sodom were certainly times of God's destructive judgments. They
were also times of mercy, or else the world and all its inhabitants
would have been wiped out.
We need to bear in mind that we do not need to wait for a great
182 LAST DAY EVENTS

crisis situation to develop around us in order to deprive ourselves of

probationary time. It can happen to us along the way as it has to
thousands of others. Consider the solemn message contained in
these words:
"God leads His people on, step by step. He brings them up to dif-
ferent points calculated to manifest what is in the heart. Some en-
dure at one point, but fall off at the next. At every advanced point the
heart is tested and tried a little closer. If the professed people of God
find their hearts opposed to this straight work, it should convince
them that they have a work to do to overcome, if they would not be
spewed out of the mouth of the Lord. Said the angel: 'God will bring
His work closer and closer to test and prove every one of His peo-
ple.' Some are willing to receive one point; but when God brings
them to another testing point, they shrink from it and stand back, be-
cause they find that it strikes directly at some cherished idol. Here
they have opportunity to see what is in their hearts that shuts out Je-
sus. They prize something higher than the truth, and their hearts are
not prepared to receive Jesus. Individuals are tested and proved a
length of time to see if they will sacrifice their idols and heed the
counsel of the True Witness. If any will not be purified through obey-
ing the truth, and overcome their selfishness, their pride, and evil
passions, the angels of God have the charge: They are joined to
their idols, let them alone,' and they pass on to their work, leaving
these with their sinful traits unsubdued, to the control of evil angels.
Those who come up to every point, and stand every test, and over-
come, be the price what it may, have heeded the counsel of the True
Witness, and they will receive the latter rain, and thus be fitted for
translation." Testimonies 1:187.
Then there came a time when the door of mercy was forever
closed on the Jewish Church in A.D. 34. But while it was closed then
on those who would not enter, it certainly did not mean that the pro-
bation of those who did pass the test was also eternally settled.
Those apostles who gave the loud cry of the former rain had yet to
pass through a lifetime of test and trial, and the fact that the door had
been closed against those who would not enter did not in the least de-
gree mean that probationary time for the apostles had also ended.
They had passed that test which the Jewish Church had failed, it is
true, but this was no guarantee that they would pass every other test
along the way.
Again, in 1844 there was a shut door. This is plainly attested to
in the Scriptures. "These things says He who is holy, He who is true,
'He who has the key of David, He who opens and no one shuts, and
shuts and no one opens.' " Revelation 3:7. Here the Lord declares
that He opens doors which none can shut, and shuts doors which
THE SHUT DOOR 183

none can open. Then, in the next verse He states very directly to His
own true people, that before them He had set an open door. He did
not say that the door was still open to all, but to them, and if specifi-
cally to them, then to the others it must have been fast closed.
As a result of the rejection of the message by the Protestant
churches generally, there was a closing of the door of mercy on a
large class of people as listed above. But again this did not mean that
they had all passed through the investigative judgment of the living,
since that judgment was still future at that time. Nor did it mean that
the sealing of the accepters of the message was complete.
In short, it is too much to assume that because the door of mercy
has been closed upon the Church in general, this means that the
judgment of the living has commenced. It is also too much to assume
that the close of probation for the rejecters of the message means
that probation has also closed for the accepters of the message. We
cannot, and we must not, read that much into the statement here un-
der consideration.
The difficulty can be further cleared up when we realize that there
is another type of judgment to be considered which is the daily judg-
ment. Day by day there is a judgment going on wherein the Lord
knows the spiritual condition of any individual, church, or nation at
any exact moment. But this must not be confused with the final re-
view which takes place at the close of life for anyone who had lived
since 1844, or at the close of human probation for all those who
come to that time and are still living.
That there is such a daily account kept is made certain by the fol-
lowing references:
"Individuals are tested and proved a length of time to see if they
will sacrifice their idols and heed the counsel of the True Witness. If
any will not be purified through obeying the truth, and overcome
their selfishness, their pride, and evil passions, the angels of God
have the charge: They are joined to their idols, let them alone,' and
they pass on to their work, leaving these with their sinful traits un-
subdued, to the control of evil angels." Testimonies 1:187.
For such a terrible decision to be made, wherein souls are aban-
doned to the control of evil angels, it would be needful for the Lord to
keep a close account of their situation day-by-day. Thus there is a
daily judgment going on, and probations are closing on individuals
while living upon the earth.
In harmony with the above is this statement: "The time has come
when Jerusalem is being searched as with lighted candles. God is at
work investigating character, weighing moral worth, and pronounc-
ing decisions on individual cases." Testimonies to Ministers, 448.
This statement was written long before the close of probation
184 LAST DAY EVENTS

will take place. Yet it describes a judgment of the living, but not the
one which is to take place when "the mission of the gospel is com-
pleted," (Christ's Object Lessons, 122) at the close of the latter
rain. It cannot describe that final event because the timing is wrong.
The only conclusion that can be drawn from this statement is that
there are two judgments of the living—one which occurs on a daily
basis, and the other one, the great and solemn review, which will
come once only at the close of all probationary time.
The fact that there is a day by day judgment of every living indi-
vidual, is to be expected. God has been doing that from the very first
fall of man. Did not the Spirit of God walk no more with King Saul?
Did not the Lord say, "Ephraim is joined to idols, let him alone."
Hosea 4:17? Did not the Lord pronounce the worldlings (at the time
of Noah and of Sodom and Gomorrah) as having passed the limit of
their probation? So we might go on to example after example in the
history of mankind to show that that statement is not introducing
something new, but something which always has been in the history
of man.
"Said the angel, 'God is weighing His people.' " Testimonies
1:186.
Thus it is clear that the Lord is judging His people and the people
of the world day-by-day, and has an instant, ever up-to-the-minute
account of where we all stand. And in such a work of judging, we can
come to the place where the account is full and the door is closed
against us forever, although we go on in life unaware that this has oc-
curred. But the point is, that we do not have to wait till the investiga-
tive judgment of the living at the end of the loud cry for this tragic
condition of things to overtake us. It can, and does, happen before
that time to any who persistently refuse to heed the warnings of His
Spirit and finally reject His appeals.
But as distinct from this day-by-day keeping of accounts, there is
the final review of those accounts, and it is this review which is
termed the investigative judgment. Since 1844, it has been going on
for the dead, but the time will come when it will pass to the cases of
the living. We must be careful to understand the distinction between
these two.
And there should not be the least difficulty in doing this. Com-
pare the foregoing statements with these two, and all difficulty will
disappear.
"The judgment is now passing in the sanctuary above. For many
years this work had been in progress. Soon—none know how soon-
it will pass to the cases of the living. In the awful presence of God our
lives are to come up in review." "As the books of record are opened
in the judgment, the lives of all who have believed on Jesus come in
THE SHUT DOOR 185

review before God. Beginning with those who first lived upon the
earth, our Advocate presents the cases of each successive genera-
tion, and closes with the living. Every name is mentioned, every case
closely investigated. Names are accepted, names rejected. When any
have sins remaining upon the books of record, unrepented of and un-
forgiven, their names will be blotted out of the book of life, and the
record of their good deeds will be erased from the book of God's re-
membrance." Great Controversy, 490, 483.
I have encountered those who experience difficulty in under-
standing why there has to be this review of the cases of those who
profess to be God's children. Whether we understand why it has to
be is not so important as accepting the fact that there will be such a
review of the lives of every child of God.
This point is further clarified by this verse:
"And all who dwell on the earth will worship him, whose names
have not been written in the book of life of the Lamb slain from the
foundation of the world." Revelation 13:8.
The conclusions drawn from this are as follows: We know that no
one ever has his name written in the book of life unless he first of all
comes and makes a living connection with Christ through true re-
pentance and acceptable confession, and so has eternal life resident
in him. When this is done, then his name appears in the book of life
and remains there until the investigative judgment reveals that he
has been found wanting, as is shown in the quotation above.
So then, we have the following situation. Here is a man who has
his name in the book of life. The image to the beast is set up, and
early in the controversy he lets go of God and worships the beast.
But, as shown so clearly in Revelation 13:8, no one, just no one,
whose name continues to be written in the Lamb's book of life will be
doing that. Therefore, before he begins such worship, he whose
name was written in the book of life must have had that name re-
moved from it. If there is one thing that is certain, it is that many will
apostatize, even in the early part of the pressure of the beast and his
image, and from this fact it is deduced that the final judgment of the
living must have taken place so that the name can be removed from
the book of life before the worship of the beast begins. In other
words, this is the conclusion drawn: The test is felt by the individual
whose name is in the book of life; He fails under its pressure; and at
once his name comes up in the judgment of the living and is blotted
out of the book of life; whereupon, he worships the beast and his
image.
Now, while it is true that a person's name can be removed from
the book of life at this or any other time, it is not true that only during
the investigative judgment of the living can a person's name be taken
186 LAST DAY EVENTS

out of the book of life. Evidence will now be advanced to show that
when a man loses his hold on eternal life and closes the door of
mercy on himself so that the Lord is forced to abandon him to the
control of the evil angels, his name is removed from the book of life
then.
And how else could it be, for the book of life is a book of life, not
of death. It would be untruthful for God to retain a name in the book
of life when that name becomes a name of death. Such could not be,
and the fact of it is stated in these words:
"Moses manifested his great love for Israel in his entreaty to the
Lord to forgive their sin, or blot his name out of the book which He
had written. His intercessions here illustrate Christ's love and media-
tion for the sinful race. But the Lord refused to let Moses suffer for
the sins of His backsliding people. He declared to him that those who
had sinned against Him He would blot out of His book which He had
written; for the righteous should not suffer for the guilt of the sinner.
"The book here referred to is the book of records in heaven, in
which every name is inscribed, and the acts of all, their sins, and obe-
dience, are faithfully written. When individuals commit sins which
are too grievous for the Lord to pardon, their names are erased from
the book, and they are devoted to destruction." SDA Bible Com-
mentary 7:987.
So, while it is true that a name once placed in the book of life can
remain there until the investigative judgment at the end of the loud
cry period, yet there are situations wherein this will not be so.
Names, in certain cases, are removed from that book prior to the
judgment. It happens at any time an individual has forsaken the way
of life and is filled, instead, with death and death alone.
Let us then apply these facts to the time of test. A certain man, as
mentioned above, has his name in the book of life, and faces the in-
itial test of the Sunday law. At first he stands stiffly for the truth, and
his name remains in the book, but as the pressure grows, he weak-
ens. He does endure ridicule and even rough persecution, but when
he is drawn before the courts of law, the weakness in his character,
due to lack of preparation, causes his breakdown, and he yields to
the powers that be. The issues at that time will be too clear-cut and
the available power of God much too present for there to be any ex-
cuse whatsoever for disobedience, and having made this decision, it
is final. In that moment when he lets go of the power of God and de-
clares his intention of worshiping the beast and his image, he com-
mits a sin too grievous to be pardoned, and at once his name is re-
moved from the book of life, so that, as he bows to worship that
beast, he does it without having his name in that book. He did not
have to wait for the judgment of the living at the end of the loud cry to
THE SHUT DOOR 187

have that name removed. It came out before. But others, who have
passed tests so far, must go on to the final test before they can be
made eternally secure.
The great and solemn lesson to be learned from these facts, is
that, because we have passed one test and come out on the right side
of that crisis, we are not to relax with the thought that we are now
eternally secure. The fact that others around us have come out on
the wrong side and closed the door of mercy upon themselves for-
ever, is not to say that we are secure the other way. If they could not
face a given test, then there is no point in their being subjected to fu-
ture tests. But for those of us who do face and pass that test, there is
still a further and tougher testing time to come, and not one of us will
be eternally secure until that final seal is affixed at the close of human
probation.

[LDE13]
Chapter 16

The Sealing Work

The work of sealing the people of the Lord for time and eternity
is one of the most interesting as well as one of the most important
among last day events. It is the work which once accomplished to the
point where the people of God are sealed with the final seal of the
living God, provides the certainty of an eternal life in the perfection
of God's everlasting kingdom. It is a state of being to which every
child of the holy God will put forth every power of mind and body
under the saving ministry of the Holy Spirit to obtain.
Back in chapter thirteen, I established the principle that in the
Scriptures there are often two things called by the same name, but
which in practically every other respect are quite different. A prime
example of the application of this principle is found in the two very
different advents of Christ. Both are called "the advent" of Christ,
because that is what each is—"the advent of Christ." There is no bet-
ter word to describe the event than that.
Because the Jews proved themselves to be too spiritually blind to
understand and apply this principle, they looked for one advent
where they should have seen two, with the tragic result that they
were not able to match the first appearing of Jesus with the prophe-
sied details of that appearing, for which blunder, they paid the ap-
palling price of the total loss of everything, even their eternal lives.
We today have no difficulty with the knowledge that there is to be
a second advent of Christ, from which the first advent was com-
pletely different, but, unless we learn the vital lessons to be gained
from the Jewish mistake, we shall repeat it with the penalty remain-
ing the awful same—the appalling loss of eternal life.
It is with these words of caution that we approach the study of
the sealing work, for there are two seals, both of which are called by
the same name yet in almost every other particular are quite different
from each other.
That which alerts us to the possibility that there are two seals is
the discovery that the information coming to us through the Scrip-
tures seems to be so contradictory, that it appears to be irreconcil-
able, and in fact can never be harmonized so long as we see one seal
where we should see two. Some people try to solve the problem by
THE SEALING WORK 189

forcing the meaning of the statements, or by ignoring those which do

not harmonize with their concept of what the sealing is.
But the statements must be taken to mean just what they say and
no attempt must be made to change that meaning. Of course, there
can be several different meanings to be found in a given statement of
which at best, only one can be correct, but that is no problem, for the
Bible is its own dictionary by means of which the Scriptural meaning
of words is made very clear. It is by the way in which words are used
in the Bible, that is, according to the definition found there, that we
are to understand Holy Writ. See Behold Your God by F. T. Wright,
pages 96-118, for further explanation of this subject.
So it is then that no sooner do we begin a serious and careful
study of the sealing work, than we become aware of the fact that
there are two distinct and separate seals. They are totally different
from each other and must not be confused with each other. Each has
its place and role in the plan of God and no one can enter the heav-
enly kingdom unless he has both of them. We observe too that the
Bible does not say that there are two seals just as it does not say there
are two advents of Christ, or two laws, or two of any of the other two
things which in Scripture are different and yet called by the same
name.
Let us turn now to some references which clearly speak of a seal
which up till this time no person living on the earth at present has
received.
"The Lord has shown me clearly that the image of the beast will
be formed before probation closes; for it is to be the great test for the
people of God, by which their eternal destiny will be decided. . . .
(Revelation 13:11-17 quoted.). . . This is the test that the people of
God must have before they are sealed. All who proved their loyalty to
God by observing his law, and refusing to accept a spurious sabbath,
will rank under the banner of the Lord God Jehovah, and will receive
the seal of the living God. Those who yield the truth of heavenly ori-
gin and accept the Sunday sabbath, will receive the mark of the
beast." SDA Bible Commentary 7:976.
This statement makes it very certain that no one can receive the
seal of the living God spoken of here, until he has passed the test im-
posed by the setting up of the image of the beast. That test comes
first and then the seal of God follows on all those who have passed
this fearful test. Now the image of the beast, as an active, effective
agency, has not at the time of this writing been set up, and as certain
as this is so, the test of that image is not before the people yet.
Therefore there is not a soul living on the face of the earth who has
passed that test and equally surely then, no one living has that seal
upon him at this time.
190 LAST DAY EVENTS

The truth of the above is further borne out by this statement from
Great Controversy, 613. "When the third angel's message closes,
mercy no longer pleads for the guilty inhabitants of the earth. The
people of God have accomplished their work. They have received the
'latter rain,' 'the refreshing from the presence of the Lord,' and they
are prepared for the trying hour before them. Angels are hastening to
and fro in heaven. An angel returning from the earth announces that
his work is done; the final test has been brought upon the world, and
all who have proved themselves loyal to the divine precepts have re-
ceived 'the seal of the living God.' ''
This, like the statement quoted before it, makes it very clear in-
deed that the great final test must come, and only those who remain
loyal in the face of that pressure, will receive the seal of God. There
is no difficulty then in seeing that this test and this seal are still very
much in the future.
So then, in the light of these clear facts it is plain that it is a differ-
ent seal of which Paul and others speak, when they tell of a seal
which was obtained by those living in their time. Let us read of this
first in Ephesians 1:12, 13.
' That we who first trusted in Christ should be to the praise of His
glory.
"In Him you also trusted, after you heard the word of truth, the
gospel of your salvation; in whom also, having believed, you were
sealed with the Holy Spirit of promise."
Here then were a people to whom Paul was speaking, and to
whom he said that they were already sealed with the Holy Spirit. He
did not speak of their receiving a seal in the future but as of having
received it at their present time. Did this mean that they had passed
the great final test? No indeed. Yet they were sealed. It is evident that
this must be, and indeed was, a different seal from that to which ref-
erence is made in the first two statements above. The seal referred to
in those two statements can be placed upon a faithful soul only after
he has passed the great final test, whereas, the one of which Paul
speaks, has already been placed on God's true children.
There are still further references to this seal in the Scriptures.
Here is another:
"They were commanded not to harm the grass of the earth, or
any green thing, or any tree, but only those men who do not have the
seal of God on their foreheads." Revelation 9:4.
The fact that they were to hurt only those men without the seal of
God, is a clear indication that there were those with the seal of God
in their foreheads at that time.
And what time was that?
It is certainly not the end of time when the great final test will
THE SEALING WORK 191

have been brought to bear in all its awesome power upon God's peo-
ple, but has to be located before October, 1844.
How can we know this with positive certainty?
We know it by the fact that this command to hurt only those who
did not have the seal of God in their foreheads, went forth as a part
of the fifth trumpet, a prophecy recorded in Revelation 9:1-11. This
prophecy contains a prophetic time period which reads as follows:
"And they were not given authority to kill them, but to torment
them for five months." Revelation 9:5.
Five months of prophetic time equals one hundred and fifty years
of literal time. All such prophetic time periods are located before Oc-
tober, 1844, after which there never again can be a message based
on time as is clearly written in an inspired explanation of the state-
ment made by the angel of Revelation 10:6 that there should be
"time no longer". K.J.V.
"The special light given to John which was expressed in the
seven thunders was a delineation of events which would transpire
under the first and second angels' messages. It was not best for the
people to know these things, for their faith must necessarily be
tested. In the order of God most wonderful and advanced truths
would be proclaimed. The first and second angels' messages were to
be proclaimed, but no further light was to be revealed before these
messages had done their specific work. This is represented by the
angel standing with one foot on the sea, proclaiming with a most sol-
emn oath that time should be no longer.
"This time, which the angel declares with a solemn oath, is not
the end of this world's history, neither of probationary time, but of
prophetic time, which should precede the advent of our Lord. That
is, the people will not have another message upon definite time. Af-
ter this period of time, reaching from 1842 to 1844, there can be no
definite tracing of the prophetic time. The longest reckoning reaches
to the autumn of 1844." SDA Bible Commentary 7:971.
Along with this are a number of other statements confirming that
after 1844, there can never be another message based on definite
time, which means that any prophecy in which is involved a definite
period of time leading up to a predicted event, must be located in his-
tory before 1844. Therefore, both the fifth and sixth trumpets were
fulfilled before October, 1844, because they both contain time
prophecies.
Yet, despite the clarity of the warnings given against any form of
time setting, individuals do arise teaching that, at a certain time, an
event critical to the success of God's work will take place. The time
comes for the event to take place, but there is no sign of it. Un-
daunted, they set new dates as each one fails, until their voices fade
192 LAST DAY EVENTS

from the scene. Some years then pass without any time setting being
urged upon us until someone again arises in defiance of such state-
ments as these:
"As the majority of Adventists rejected the truths concerning the
sanctuary and the law of God, many also renounced their faith in the
Advent movement, and adopted unsound and conflicting views of
the prophecies which applied to that work. Some were led into the
error of repeated time-setting. The light of the third message would
have shown them that no prophetic period extends to the coming of
Christ; that the exact time of his coming is not foretold. But, turning
from the light, they continued to set time after time for the Lord to
come, and as often were disappointed." Spirit of Prophecy 4:290.
"Christ gave to his disciples truths whose breadth and depth and
value they little appreciated, or even comprehended, and the same
condition exists among the people of God to-day. We too have failed
to take in the greatness, to perceive the beauty of the truth which
God has intrusted to us to-day. Should we advance in spiritual knowl-
edge, we would see the truth developing and expanding in lines of
which we have little dreamed, but it will never develop in any line
that will lead us to imagine that we may know the times and the sea-
sons which the Father hath put in His own power. Again and again
have I been warned in regard to time-setting. There will never again
be a message for the people of God that will be based on time. We
are not to know the definite time either for the outpouring of the
Holy Spirit or for the coming of Christ." Review and Herald, March
22,1892.
Further statements alluding to a present seal as distinct from the
future one which is placed only on those who have passed the great
final test, are these:
"The law of God, which is perfect holiness, is the only true stand-
ard of character. Love is expressed in obedience, and perfect love
casteth out all fear. Those who love God, have the seal of God in
their foreheads, and work the works of God." Sons and Daughters
of God, 51.
Again, this seal is not spoken of as something which they will
have, but of something they already possess.
"Just as soon as the people of God are sealed in their foreheads-
it is not any seal or mark that can be seen, but a settling into the
truth, both intellectually and spiritually, so they cannot be moved—
just as soon as God's people are sealed and prepared for the shaking,
it will come. Indeed, it has begun already; the judgments of God are
now upon the land, to give us warning, that we may know what is
coming." SDA Bible Commentary 4:1161.
This statement defines the sealing as being a settling into the
THE SEALING WORK 193

truth both intellectually and spiritually. This pictures a time-absorb-

ing process, for no one settles into the truth instantly. Therefore as
will be shown more clearly a little later in this chapter, this cannot be
the seal acquired on passing the great final test, for that seal will be
God's declaration that the individual has fully settled into the truth,
not that he is still settling into it.
Clearly then, there are two separate sets of statements describing
two different seals. I shall call them the "first seal", and the "second
seal". One may object that no where in the Bible or The Spirit of
Prophecy, are these terms to be found. This is true, but it is also true
that nowhere in these same authorities do we find the expressions,
"the first advent", or again, "the second advent", even though there
are two such advents, and even though we are greatly assisted in our
understanding of the two advents of Christ by using this system of
identification.
It must be clear then that if it is proper to follow this procedure in
respect to the two advents of Christ, then it is equally in order to ap-
ply the same system of identification to the two seals.
Now that we have clearly seen that there are two distinct and
separate seals, the one possessed by the people of God today, and
the other to be placed upon them when the great final test is passed,
the time has come to study into the seals themselves to see what they
actually are. In doing this we will study the first seal and when we
have come to understand that, then we will study the second and fi-
nal seal.
In the process of understanding just what a seal is, it will not be
enough to think in terms of a stamp or a designating mark being the
seal of the living God except as they actually serve in the capacity of
a seal. This, we shall come to learn, means that it must actually seal
righteousness in, and sin out. That is the work of the power of God
in the Sabbath, which will require that our understanding of the Sab-
bath being the seal, will have to significantly broaden.
What then does it mean for something to be sealed?
It simply means that it has been so effectively closed up that noth-
ing of a foreign nature can invade the area sealed off, and in turn,
nothing of value can escape or be stolen away. Thus we seal cans or
bottles of preserves, so that the decomposing agents can find no ac-
cess to turn the food sour. In the days of old the cities were closed up
or sealed against the approaching enemy. To seal letters or docu-
ments so that no one but the one for whom they are intended could
dare to open them, kings and governors would stamp into the sealing
wax an impression bearing the symbols of their authority. Once that
had been done, then that letter was well and truly sealed and could
not be opened by any foreign hand except on pain of death. There-
THE SEALING WORK 195

fore we do well to think of the seal in relation to the individual as be-

ing a protection, a shutting out of something and a sealing in of
something else. And, as we study the various evidences in the living
Word, we shall find that that is just what the seal of God does for the
people of God.
In the first case it is said to be the seal of the Holy Spirit. It is de-
clared that "He [Christl has made provision that the Holy Spirit shall
be imparted to every repentant soul, to keep him from sinning." De-
sire of Ages, 311.
The Holy Spirit, as we learned from Ephesians 1:12, 13, is a
seal. In the above statement we are told that He is to keep us from
sinning. It therefore follows that the Holy Spirit seals us against sin
or seals sin out and righteousness in. It is the covering of protection
through which the fiery darts of the evil one cannot penetrate.
This immediately lifts our concept of the seal of God out of the
realm of its being merely a stamp of approval or of selection, which is
placed upon certain individuals to distinguish them from others, be-
cause they hold a certain code of beliefs, belong to a certain organi-
zation, and have an acceptable attitude of loyalty to those beliefs and
to that organization. That there is a stamp of approval placed upon
certain individuals as distinct from the mark of the beast, we do not
deny, but it is too much to call that stamp, the seal of the living God.
That seal is something much more living and powerful than merely
that. The seal is the actual presence of the Holy Spirit in the life as a
seal against the determined efforts of the devil to tempt us into sin.
The seal of God is therefore the power of God, which is the power
of the Holy Spirit, and it is the power of the living truth of God. When
we have these in us as a living, actual, indwelling part of us, then sin
will most certainly have no dominion over us, and we shall be proof
against its power and might. Therefore the work of the gospel in the
sealing and of the Holy Spirit in the ministry of sealing, are all one
and the same work exactly. Therefore it can be truly said that the lat-
ter rain is the sealing, though it must not be forgotten that with equal
truth the former rain is also the sealing. And all of this comes to us
from Jesus Christ as the Minister of the sanctuary in heaven. And
when the sealing work of the Holy Spirit and of our great High Priest
is complete, then the people of God will be in a state of moral and
spiritual fitness for re-entry into the eternal kingdom.
OPPOSITE PAGE: This mighty mountain of rock is quite immovable by
any power at man's command, so too, those who have settled into the
truth both intellectually and spiritually. They cannot be moved. The
storms may beat upon them, but they stand unshaken by lightning, thun-
der, and the wildest of winds.
196 LAST DAY EVENTS

That the sealing is a work of transforming grace wrought out in

the very nature of man is made plain from these references.
"Just as soon as the people of God are sealed in their foreheads-
it is not any seal or mark that can be seen, but a settling into the
truth, both intellectually and spiritually, so they cannot be moved—
just as soon as God's people are sealed and prepared for the shaking,
it will come. Indeed, it has begun already; the judgments of God are
now upon the land, to give us warning that we may know what is
coming." SDA Bible Commentary 4:1161.
As we have already concluded, and shall better understand later,
this is definitely talking about the first seal. It could not be talking
about the second seal as all settling into the truth will then have been
accomplished as a preparation for the passing of the great final test.
And in talking about the first seal it describes the work of that seal as
a process of settling into the truth of God, both intellectually and
spiritually so that we cannot be moved.
This is not the work of a moment. The word "settling,'' can never
be used to describe a work done instantly or quickly. It is a word de-
scribing a process which takes a period of time to accomplish.
We can say with confidence that it does take time to become re-
ally settled into the truth of God, to the point where our loyalty to
Him is so immovably established that nothing on earth or in hell
could subvert it.
It is very fortunate that time is given us in which to become truly
and adequately sealed against the forces of darkness. When we first
become children of the light, we are far from being firmly established
in Christ. We are but "newborn babes", who are admonished to "de-
sire the pure milk of the word, that you may grow thereby." 1 Peter
2:2. At this stage in our Christian life, we do not have the strength
and maturity to pass the great final test. Successive tests must be
permitted to come to us in the meantime to develop the hardness of
a tried soldier, and fit us to stand anything the devil could possibly
bring against us.
In the meantime, when the testing process seems as if it will de-
stroy us rather than fit us for the sealing, it is comforting to know the
Lord never suffers us to be tempted beyond the strength acquired, as
it is written:
"No temptation has overtaken you except such as is common to
man; but God is faithful, who will not allow you to be tempted be-
yond what you are able, but with the temptation will also make the
way of escape, that you may be able to bear it." 1 Corinthians
10:13.
But there is coming the time when all such protection will have
been removed and the fullness of the test will come whether we have
THE SEALING WORK 197

acquired the hardness to meet it or not. Then those who have made
the diligent preparation by faithfully settling into the truth, both in-
tellectually and spiritually, will stand, while those who have not, will
fall.
This truth is borne out in the following statement.
"Those only who have clean hands and pure hearts will stand in
that trying time. Now is the time for the law of God to be in our
minds, foreheads, and written in our hearts.
"The Lord has shown me the danger of letting our minds be
filled with worldly thoughts and cares. I saw that some minds are led
away from present truth and a love of the Holy Bible by reading other
exciting books; others are filled with perplexity and care for what
they shall eat, drink, and wear. Some are looking too far off for the
coming of the Lord. Time has continued a few years longer than they
expected; therefore they think it may continue a few years more, and
in this way their minds are being led from present truth, out after the
world. In these things I saw great danger; for if the mind is filled with
other things, present truth is shut out, and there is no place in our
foreheads for the seal of the living God. I saw that the time for Jesus
to be in the Most Holy Place was nearly finished and that time can
last but a little longer. What leisure time we have should be spent in
searching the Bible, which is to judge us in the last day.
"My dear brethren and sisters, let the commandments of God
and the testimony of Jesus be in your minds continually and let them
crowd out worldly thoughts and cares. When you lie down and when
you rise up let them be your meditation. Live and act wholly in refer-
ence to the coming of the Son of Man. The sealing time is very short,
and will soon be over. Now is the time, while the four angels are
holding the four winds, to make our calling and election sure." Early
Writings, 58.
As we read through this statement, we are aware that the writing
of the law of God in our foreheads is the equivalent of the placing of
the seal of God in our foreheads. Note the construction of the para-
graph. It begins by saying that the time is now come when the law of
God is to be in our hearts. This is followed by a listing of the dangers
of allowing other things than this law to occupy the mind. All this is
designed to warn us that if these things take the place of the law of
God in the mind, forehead and heart, then there is no place for the
seal of God in the forehead.
The choice is before us. Either we can have the mind filled with
the cares, perplexities, and pleasures of this world, or we can be-
come ever more deeply settled in the truth both intellectually and
spiritually so that the law of God is written in mind, forehead, and
heart. If the former, then we have the seal of the devil, which effec-
198 LAST DAY EVENTS

tively seals out the righteousness of Christ and seals the power of sin
in. But if the latter, then we have that seal of security whereby the
temptations of Satan have neither power nor appeal to the human
heart. When the devil comes against us he will find, not a heart filled
with his own thoughts and ambitions, but filled with the love of God
and the presence of the Spirit of God. From such a heart he will find
no sympathy and no response whatsoever.
This first seal then is very clearly a work done in the heart of the
believer by the mighty power of Jesus Christ through the Holy Spirit.
It is the preparation for the great final test and therefore takes place
day by day before the great final test comes. It is the sealing work
which has been going on all through the ages from the very first fall
of man to the present time, and will go on while ever human proba-
tion continues. As such it is much more than merely an outward
stamp of approval. Those who have depended on their loyalty to a
church and its beliefs as the guarantee of their having the seal of God
need to think again, for much more is involved than this. Only the ac-
tual living presence of the power of Christ and his righteousness can
seal us against the power of sin and of the devil. We can have that
kind of seal today if we will. Let us not rest until we are sure we do
actually have it.
 Chapter 17

The First Seal

The second or final seal is the one in which the most interest is
taken, almost to the exclusion of the first seal. This is because it is
not realized by many that, in order to understand and experience the
second seal, the first must be clearly understood, and personally ex-
perienced especially as it is revealed in the ministry of the sanctuary.
There, a practical demonstration is given of the nature of the seal, its
work, and the effective results of its ministry.
In the last chapter it was established that there are, not one, but
two seals, with the emphasis being placed on the fact that, in almost
everything, they are different from each other.
Now comes the time to study each seal in detail, and for the ac-
complishment of this purpose we shall turn to the sanctuary.
It is a very serious mistake to look to the sanctuary merely for the
purpose of transferring guilt for which forgiveness has been ob-
tained, from one person or another. If that is all the ministry of
Christ achieves, the sin-problem has never been solved, nor ever will
be. God has much higher objectives in mind for the sanctuary than
that. This marvellous, redemptive provision of divine grace has been
introduced into the human scene to deal with sin at its very root, and
thus to guarantee its eternal extermination.
The great question is: "What is sin that it must be completely
eradicated? What exactly is God laboring to eliminate from the
universe?"
Think about how the subject of sin is usually discussed. Usually
the thoughts expressed are about the actions o/sin, the guilt of sin,
the record of sin, and the penalty of sin. But none of these is the sin
itself. They are all of sin. People usually think of removing that
which is of sin—the actions, guilt, record, and penalty—without re-
moving the sin itself. According to this thinking, the guilt, which is
the responsibility incurred by committing the actions of sin, may be
accepted by another person, without transferring the actual sin to
the person upon whom the guilt has been laid.
It must be understood that while the sin itself remains, there will
be the guilt of that sin, for somebody must bear the responsibility for
the transgression. Furthermore, there will be a record of it, and
200 LAST DAY EVENTS

someone must suffer the penalty. The problem then demands first of
all the total elimination of all existing sin, its replacement with right-
eousness, and the absolute sealing of every part of God's kingdom
against its re-infection by this awful destroyer.
This enemy, sin, is the power which dwells within every individ-
ual through natural inheritance by virtue of the fact that we are chil-
dren of fallen Adam. This power can be described as the spirit of re-
bellion, and is far stronger than human power to resist it. In every
contest between any human unaided by the omnipotent power of the
Holy Spirit, and the sin presence, the human is certain to lose.
Paul desperately tried a thousand times and more to get the bet-
ter of the powers of darkness reigning in his life, but failed in every
attempt to gain the victory. His frustration is recorded in Romans
7:1-24. Thus he learned by hard experience the truth of these
words:
"The result of the eating of the tree of knowledge of good and
evil is manifest in every man's experience. There is in his nature a
bent to evil, a force which, unaided, he cannot resist. To withstand
this force, to attain that ideal which in his inmost soul he accepts as
alone worthy, he can find help in but one power. That power is
Christ. Co-operation with that power is man's greatest need. In all
educational effort should not this co-operation be the highest aim?"
Education, 29.
The work of eliminating sin must and does begin with the render-
ing of every believer clean from all existing sin in his life, until there
is nothing left to respond to temptation, followed by his being sealed
both intellectually and spiritually against any further infections of the
disease called sin. The whole purpose and intent of the ministry in
the heavenly sanctuary is to provide us with both this cleansing and
subsequent immunity. It is designed to teach us that through the ac-
tual work in the heavenly sanctuary, of which the earthly was an illus-
tration, the soul which has no protection or seal against sin can be
brought to the condition described as follows:
"When the soul surrenders itself to Christ, a new power takes
possession of the new heart. A change is wrought which man can
never accomplish for himself. It is a supernatural work, bringing a su-
pernatural element into human nature. The soul that is yielded to
Christ becomes His own fortress, which He holds in a revolted
world, and He intends that no authority shall be known in it but His
own. A soul thus kept in possession by the heavenly agencies, is im-
pregnable to the assaults of Satan." Desire of Ages, 324.
The symbolism employed in this paragraph is particularly apt
when studying the sealing work. It is the symbolism of the soul being
THE FIRST SEAL 201

a fortress held in possession by a new power, and effectively resist-

ing the attacks of the enemy.
Its meaning is further clarified by comparing it with the following:
"The season of temptation, under which, it may be, one falls into
grievous sin, does not create the evil that is revealed, but only devel-
ops or makes manifest that which was hidden and latent in the heart.
As a man 'thinketh in his heart, so is he;' for out of the heart 'are the
issues of life.' Proverbs 23:7; 4:23." Mount of Blessings, 60.
"Now, while our great High Priest is making the atonement for
us, we should seek to become perfect in Christ. Not even by a
thought could our Saviour be brought to yield to the power of temp-
tation. Satan finds in human hearts some point where he can gain a
foothold; some sinful desire is cherished, by means of which his
temptations assert their power. But Christ declared of Himself: The
prince of this world cometh, and hath nothing in Me.' John 14:30.
Satan could find nothing in the Son of God that would enable him to
gain the victory. He had kept His Father's commandments, and
there was no sin in Him that Satan could use to his advantage. This is
the condition in which those must be found who shall stand in the
time of trouble." Great Controversy, 623.
From this information we are able to understand that it is not the
enemy without who is to be feared so much as the enemy within.
Think of a fortress against whom an enemy of considerable power
and might is coming. The master of the castle is preparing to meet
the foe by closing every possible avenue of entry. The doors are
locked fast, the windows are all barred and everything is secure. But
the enemy approaches with confidence, for he knows that he has a
secret agent within who will undo the locked doors and let him in.
Thus the fortress is overthrown. It is not sealed against the enemy,
not because every effort had not been put forth to close every avenue
of the castle against the enemy, for this had been done, but because
care had not been taken to see that there were no enemy agents
within who could undo the work of closing up the defences, and thus
provide the opposing army with certain admission. That fortress was
not sealed against the enemy. The personal and physical power of
that one man within is far less than the power of the army without,
yet in his position there he can do far more to overthrow the entire
fortress than all the army outside can do.
And all this is a perfectly splendid illustration of the fortress of
the soul of man. There is the mighty enemy without but, mighty as
he is, he is not to be feared anything like we are to fear the enemy
within. While sin still abides within we may think with all the confi-
dence manifested by Peter of old that we can resist the devil and not
betray the Lord, but as the enemy approaches, some sinful desire
THE FIRST SEAL 203

which we have cherished and failed to give away, provides the access
he is seeking and the citadel of the soul is overthrown. The tempta-
tion from without finds an answering chord from within, the de-
fences crumble into ruins, and the bastion of the soul is overthrown.
But it was not so with Jesus. When the enemy came against Him,
he found nothing in Him that would give the devil the advantage
which he sought, and enable him to gain the victory over Christ. He
found that fortress to be so sealed both intellectually and spiritually,
that his temptations could find no power or advantage over the Sav-
iour. This is the condition in which we must be found if we are going
to pass through the great time of trouble. This is in effect to say that
it is the condition in which we must be found if we are going to pass
the great final test. It is the condition wherein every evil response
has been so totally eradicated that the devil will find nothing in us to
open the door to him.
To many people it is inconceivable that human beings could ever
come to that place. They find it hard to understand how we could
ever be without any sinful desire in the heart and life. But, this condi-
tion of purity can and will be possessed by God's true children in the
end. To help in the understanding of this, consider those who once
were smokers, but who now know in their experience what it means
to have the complete victory over this evil habit. Of you if you are
one of them, it could truthfully be said that you are now a perfect
non-smoker, because every trace of desire for this evil, poisonous
thing has been taken away from your body and mind where once
nicotine ruled as king. Today, the most skilled and persuasive sales-
man in the world could come and do all in his power to entice you to
smoke a cigarette, and he just would not raise the faintest flicker of
interest in you whatsoever. On the contrary, you would experience a
loathing and an abhorrence for it. This is what it means to have the
seal of God, which in this one area you have, and which you can have
in every part of your life.
And you have it intellectually as well as spiritually. So thorough
has your education been as to the destructive, poisonous, and cor-
rupting nature of this evil weed, so well are you versed in your knowl-
edge of what it will do in the human organism, that mentally you are
solidly conditioned against touching that poison. Such a sealing in
the intellectual mind is the product of thorough education as to how
hateful and destructive sin really is. This seal is just as needful as the
seal in the spiritual nature, for we need to be intelligent Christians,
knowing what we believe and why.
But there is the spiritual seal as well. When you have that, the
longing and desire for this indulgence of an evil appetite will have
gone from you forever, and you will have no taste left for it at all. It is
[LDE14]
204 LAST DAY EVENTS

something which is now foreign to your nature and to your very exist-
ence and way of life. If you never saw another cigarette forever, you
would consider it no loss. Thus you know by experience what it
means to have this seal so far as smoking or liquor is concerned. But
we are to know the same experience so far as hatred, malice, bitter-
ness, pride, jealousy, evil temper, and the like are concerned. When
such an experience is obtained both intellectually and spiritually,
then we truly have the fullness of the seal of God and are fitted to
stand and pass the final test.
To obtain such a sealing is the work of this life. The very first step
in such a work is God's part of the program. He is the one who per-
mits the temptation to come to us so as to reveal the evil of our own
hearts. "Temptation is enticement to sin, and this does not proceed
from God, but from Satan and from the evil of our own hearts. 'God
cannot be tempted with evil, and He Himself tempteth no man.'
James 1:13, R.V.
"Satan seeks to bring us into temptation, that the evil of our
characters may be revealed before men and angels that he may claim
them as his own." Mount of Blessing, 116.
The Lord permits this testing and tempting knowing that if we
will but learn the lesson, this can be turned to very good account in
righteousness. The effort of the devil to discourage and bring accusa-
tion does prove the very means of revealing to us the enemy within
who is the foe most to be feared. Of course, we should never have to
go through this experience for, if we would hear the voice of the
Spirit as attempts are made to convict us of our sins and give to us
the needed revelation of ourselves, then we would not have to wait
till we had stumbled in our self-confidence. Peter never needed to
have gone through the humiliation of the denial in the courtyard if he
had learned the lessons which the Saviour had sought so earnestly to
teach him day by day.
Meet the enemy we must. Peter had to meet the enemy there in
the courtyard, but he did not have to meet him with the evil agent
still within. Knowing that such a confrontation would eventually
come and when, Jesus had sought to show Peter the very trouble
within, which would and did cause his downfall, so that prior to the
coming of the enemy he could have been cleansed of that evil and
had the power of God in its place. Then the devil would have found
him sealed against this temptation with no answering chord from
within. But all the effort of the Lord to save him from disaster proved
unavailing, not because of any shortness of power or skill on the part
of the Lord, but because of the blindness and self-will of the disciple.
If he had allowed the work of grace to be done in his heart which the
Saviour designed, then, when he confronted the enemy, he could
THE FIRST SEAL 205

have done so successfully. But when that work of grace was not pos-
sible because of Peter, then he had to learn it the shameful and hu-
miliating way. We can be thankful that he did get the message this
time. At last he saw the enemy within and by the power of God, got
rid of him at once. Then that opening was sealed and made secure
against the enemy. "Now his self-confidence was gone. Never again
were the old boastful assertions repeated." Christ's Object Les-
sons, 154.
So it may be with us. The Lord is anxious that we see the true na-
ture of the enemy within before we go out to do battle with the en-
emy without, but in our blindness we fail to do this. So it is that un-
sealed, we have to face the enemy. The sure result is defeat as the en-
emy within opens the door to the invading army without. But all is
not lost. Probation still lingers, and if we are willing to see, then we
can know where the real trouble lies. And once we know where the
real trouble is, the very first step in the process of sealing has been
accomplished.
The next step is knowing that Jesus does and will truly and fully
deal with the problem by eradicating the enemy within and replacing
him with His own life and power, a life and power which will never
betray the fortress, never open the door to the enemy. If ever the for-
tress is to fall once this new life is within, it must be by the actual
choice of the person himself. It would have to be a capitulation, for
the power within will never betray the fortress. Never!
In the sanctuary as the minister of that life-saving service, Jesus
waits to execute this work. But it is not enough to only know He can
and will do it and fully believe it is an essential second step in the
matter of being sealed. We must come to the sanctuary and there ap-
propriate by true and acceptable confession the blessings of the seal-
ing which are awaiting us there.
The nature of such a confession is vitally important. It is not
enough merely to confess that we have fallen into sin. That does not
get at the real trouble. The confession must reach to the acknow-
ledgement of the real problem, the enemy within, which, in short, is
what we are. Having made a frank and honest confession of that,
then it must be offered to the Lord, with the urgent and uncondi-
tional request that it be taken out of and away from us so that we
shall know it no more, and, into its place, a new and opposite agent
altogether be established.
Now this is the very work that the Saviour is in the sanctuary to
do, and desires more than anything else to do. He cannot do it of
course until he has our willing consent and cooperation, but in the
moment He obtains this, then the work is done with a certainty and
completeness leaving nothing more to be desired at that point.
206 LAST DAY EVENTS

So we come to the door of the sanctuary which is the foot of the

cross, and there make our confession, full and comprehensive, for
the sin which we now know to be resident within us. With equal deci-
siveness we hand it all over to the Saviour who by His blood transfers
that sin to the sanctuary. It is all-important that we understand here
that it is not just the guilt of sin which is removed, but the very sin it-
self, that enemy within who kept us unsealed from the enemy with-
out. This is evidenced from the fact that the transfer of the blood in
the Old Testament type, represented the transfer of the forfeited life
of the sinner, which is clearly taught in Great Controversy, 418.
The life of the sinner is what he is. This is the enemy within and
this must go, before we can have any security against the power of
temptation. His place must be made completely empty as shown in
this statement: "The religion of Christ means more than the forgive-
ness of sin; it means taking away of our sins, and filling the vacuum
with the graces of the Holy Spirit." Christ's Object Lessons, 419,
420.
The sin which was within us is now safely lodged in the sanctuary
where it remains until the great investigative judgment day. The
place where it was became vacant and then into that place came the
indwelling presence of the Holy Spirit so that there has been an ex-
change of life in actual, literal fact. That new life within, variously de-
scribed as "the new nature," "the life of Christ," "the mind of
Christ," "the new heart," "the new creation," "the newborn
babe," "the divine nature," and "the indwelling Holy Spirit," has
taken over the position and place of the old life which was there. But
how opposite is the character of the new. The old was the child and
friend of the devil being his own life in the soul of man, but this is the
child and friend of God, being the very life of God in the soul.
It can be readily seen and understood how that the first life will
always open to the devil in the hour of temptation, but could you
imagine for one moment that the life of God in the soul, the Holy
Spirit, who is given to the human agent for the very purpose of
"keeping him from sinning," is going to open the door and let the
devil in? Never will He do that! He will forever keep the door fast
closed against the enemy, thus sealing the soul against the tempta-
tions of the foe. And because it is the presence of the Holy Spirit in
the soul which thus seals us from the enemy, it is called the seal of
the Holy Spirit. And because the presence of the Holy Spirit is the
presence of the life of God, for the Holy Spirit is God, it is called with
equal truth and certainty "the seal of the living God." It is called by
these names for the very simple reason that this is exactly what it is.
It is important that we understand this. The seal of God and the seal
of the Holy Spirit are just that very life-force itself, the seal against
THE FIRST SEAL 207

the invasion of sin effected by the actual presence of this power in

the soul to preserve us from sinning.
And for the very same reason the Sabbath is the seal of God.
Now, in order for an individual to have the Sabbath of God, he needs
more than simply a Scriptural argument proving that the seventh day
is the correct day upon which to worship. As can be learned from a
careful study of the Sabbath of God, the true Sabbath is to be found
only where the power of God actually is. See Living righteousness
and the Sabbath of God, by F. T. Wright. Of course seventh-day ob-
servance can be found where the power of God is not, but the true
Sabbath of God will always have the power of God. So, the power of
God is the seal of God, which means that, where the true Sabbath of
God is, there the seal of God is.
Of this we shall have more to learn later, but for the moment let
us realize that the nature of the last great conflict between the seal of
God, the Sabbath, and the mark of the beast, Sunday, is something
much more involved than merely the controversy as to which day of
the week we should be keeping. It will be a contest between the
power of God and the power of sin, with the Sabbath being the flag
waving over the one camp, and Sunday as the symbol of the power of
sin waving over the other camp. Not those then who have even the
best arguments for the rightness of the seventh day, but those in
whom is the power of God, the seal of the Holy Spirit, will stand on
the side of the living God.
It hardly needs to be stated here that the first seal is not perma-
nent except as we refuse to let it go. No one, not even the devil him-
self, can take this seal away from us, but we can choose to let it go
just as did the sinless pair in Eden and King David over the matter of
Uriah the Hittite. Although there is no longer the responsive enemy
within, there is the human nature where Satan can make his tempta-
tions felt, and, while the divine nature will strongly call upon the rea-
soning mind of the individual to refuse to yield, the human nature can
exert powerful pressure on the individual to surrender the citadel to
the enemy. It is here that the intellectual seal is so badly needed. This
battle must be fought out in the mind and is a battle which every
Christian must fight to the very end of his days against the powerful
pressures which the enemy will bring to bear against the humanity of
us all. For a splendid example of this, study the experience of Jesus
in the Garden of Gethsemane.
This aspect of the case is important and one which must occupy
a lot of study and thought on the part of Christians, but we do not
have the space in this article to carry it further. Study carefully Re-
vival and Reformation, by F. T. Wright.
This is not to say that the battle will not become more difficult as
208 LAST DAY EVENTS

we go on through life. The truth is of course that the tests and the
temptations will become stiffer, but only in proportion to the power
to meet them. The first sealing of the Holy Spirit is not the last. Pro-
gressively the work of cleansing goes forward, and as our capacity to
receive increases, we shall receive more and more of the presence
and power of the Holy Spirit in the soul of the believer. This seals us
more and more.
The early part of this work is performed in the power of the for-
mer rain. Its finishing stages are accomplished by the outpouring of
the latter rain which achieves "the completion of the work of God's
grace in the soul." Testimonies to Ministers, 506.
Before we summarize the facts concerning the first seal, and pass
on to the understanding of the second and final seal, we need to com-
prehend the work of the former and latter rain as the seal of the living
God. This we shall proceed to do in the next chapter.
 Chapter 18

The Former and

Latter Rain
Nothing could be more important than that we clearly under-
stand in what way it is that both the former rain and the latter rain are
a part of the first seal and, as such, must be distinguished from the
second or final seal, which is not the work of the Holy Spirit at all.
Many hold the concept that the latter rain is different in nature
and work from the former rain; that while the former rain is con-
cerned with a certain aspect of sin, the latter rain is concerned with
another and different aspect of it. However, a careful study of the evi-
dences given in the Word of God will show that this is not so. The
truth is that the latter rain, by the same process exactly as that em-
ployed by the former rain, brings to completion the work begun and
carried forward by the former rain.
To hold another view than this is to destroy the whole symbolism
of the Word of God in this connection. As it is in nature, so it is in
grace, for the same creative laws work in both dominions.
Therefore if we are to understand the work of the former and the
latter rain and their relationship to each other in the spiritual realm,
we must first be clear on their work and relationship to each other in
the physical or earthly realm. If this were not so, then why should the
Lord ever use the falling of the former and the latter rain in nature to
illustrate the falling of the former and the latter rain in the spiritual
world?
It is He who directs our attention to the falling of the rains in the
world of nature and says, in effect, "Study that and understand it.
Then you will be able to learn and understand the plan and the work
of God in the giving of the former and latter rain.''
If it is the Lord Himself who thus directs our minds to the symbol-
ism to be found in the world of nature as the means of understanding
this important subject, then we had better obey that direction and
turn to the world of nature for our information. We can offer no ex-
cuse for not doing so. Nowhere is this truth more clearly expressed
than in the following statement:
210 LAST DAY EVENTS

" 'Ask ye of the Lord rain in the time of the latter rain; so the
Lord shall make bright clouds, and give them showers of rain.' 'He
will cause to come down for you the rain, the former rain, and the
latter rain.' Zecharia 10:1; Joel 2:23. In the East, the former rain
falls at the sowing time, when it is necessary in order that the seed
may germinate. Under the influence of the fertilizing showers, ten-
der shoots spring up. The latter rain, falling near the close of the sea-
son, ripens the grain and prepares it for the sickle. The Lord employs
these operations of nature to represent the work of the Holy Spirit.
As the dew and the rain are given first to cause the seed to germinate
and then to ripen the harvest, so the Holy Spirit is given to carry for-
ward, from one stage to another, the process of spiritual growth. The
ripening of the grain represents the completion of the work of God's
grace in the soul. By the power of the Holy Spirit the moral image of
God is to be perfected in the character. We are to be wholly trans-
formed into the likeness of Christ.
"The latter rain, ripening earth's harvest, represents the spiritual
grace that prepares the church for the coming of the Son of Man. But
unless the former rain has fallen, there will be no life; the green blade
will not spring up. Unless the early showers have done their work,
the latter rain can bring no seed to perfection." Testimonies to Min-
isters, 506.
So that we shall not miss the message of this paragraph, let us fo-
cus our attention on just what it says. First, let us take this sentence
again: "The Lord employs these operations of nature [the falling of
the former and the latter rain and the results they accomplish] to rep-
resent the work of the Holy Spirit.''
Here we have a clear and unmistakable directive to understand
the workings of the rain in nature, as the revelation of the working of
the Holy Spirit in the carrying forward of the work of God's grace in
the soul of man. As it is in the natural world, so it will be in the spiri-
tual. This is not to say that the work of the former and the latter rain
can illustrate the full range of the work of the Holy Spirit. No one les-
son taken from nature can do this, and knowing this, Jesus used
many different illustrations from nature, in order to comprehensively
reveal the full truth. But the former and the latter rain do teach cer-
tain aspects of the work of the Holy Spirit very clearly, and these we
are to know and to understand.
Very naturally then, we are to turn first to a study of the former
and the latter rain in the world of nature. The former rain falls at the
beginning of the season, and it is that which causes the seed to ger-
minate and spring forth. Under the impetus of this rain, the grain ad-
vances in growth into a lusty shoot, which, even though no head has
as yet appeared, promises an abundant harvest.
THE FORMER & LATTER RAIN 211

This is followed by a petering out of the former rain resulting in a

drier period during which the crop survives on occasional showers,
and on moisture stored in the soil from the former rain. During this
interval, growth continues to the point where the immature head of
grain forms on the stalk. It is by no means yet ready for the harvest,
and will never be if there is no latter rain to fill out the head and bring
it to full maturity. So it is, that toward the end of the season, the anx-
ious, waiting farmer is rewarded by the coming of the latter rain
upon the crop. Now he knows there will be a harvest.
It needs to be emphasized that there is no possibility in nature of
the grain's being ready for the sickle at the beginning of the latter
rain. You will find no farmer on the whole earth who will rush out
with his harvesting equipment and begin to gather in the grain the
moment the rain begins to fall. Instead, he will patiently wait until the
falling of the latter rain has given way to dry summer heat. Even then
he will wait until the hot sun has hardened the grain, and turned its
color to gold. Not until this is accomplished will he commence to
reap his crop. The latter rain falls over a period of time, and every
head of grain needs all of this outpouring throughout its full duration
in order to be filled out to full maturity and readied for the harvest.
As the grain thus progresses toward readiness for reaping, the
farmer will watch over it, testing its progress until at last he makes
the final test and pronounces it ready for the ingathering. It is when
the latter rain and the summer sun have completed their work, and
are finished, that the judgment is passed on the grain—all of it—and
then the harvest follows. None of it is judged as fit for the harvest at
the beginning of the latter rain, while all of it is judged as being ready
at the end of the latter rain. As it is in nature, so it must be in grace,
or otherwise, why should the Lord ever have chosen the symbol of
the activities of nature to illustrate the work of things in the spiritual
realm?
Before we proceed to a study of the work of the spiritual rain,
there is a further fact with which we must become familiar. It is that
there is not the least shadow of difference between the former and
the latter rain, so far as its own formula is concerned and so far as the
work it does is concerned. Those who hold to the belief that the lat-
ter rain performs a different kind of work in the soul from that per-
formed by the former rain, certainly can find no justification for their
belief if they were to obey the injunction of the Word of God and use
the activities of nature to illustrate the work in the spiritual world.
They would be obliged to show how the latter rain did a different
work for the plant than the former rain does.
But it does not.
Both are rain—condensed water vapor falling from the sky to be
212 LAST DAY EVENTS

soaked up by the earth wherein it penetrates to the roots of the

plants, which, by the same process of absorption in each case,
gather it with its dissolved plant foods into the plant structure. By the
same identical processes of cell construction, the growth of the plant
is carried forward in both the operation of the former and of the lat-
ter rain. The only difference is in the time when they fall; the one be-
ing at the beginning of the season and the other at the latter end of
the season. This being so, the one completes the work which the
other has begun, but both are outpourings of the same rain exactly.
That is, one is not an outpouring of water, while another is an but-
pouring of some other chemical compound. Both are water.
Each and every person who has experienced the transforming
power of the Holy Spirit in the changing of the life from sin to holi-
ness, and the subsequent steady growth in the Christian life, should
have no difficulty in understanding the work of the former rain at the
beginning of their living experience in Jesus. Each will know that
when they accepted salvation, the work was fresh and wonderful as
the former rain came down in steady abundance. Then there fol-
lowed additional showers after the initial outpouring, and under their
influence, steady growth was made in the development of Christian
character. But in nature, the falling of the former rain is followed by a
dry spell. The sun burns down and something of its heat is felt. This
does not mean that the influence of the rain is withdrawn, for the air
is laden with moisture—evidence of which is given in the dew each
morning—but there is a difference from what it was when the rain
was falling in abundance at the beginning.
So, likewise, in the spiritual counterpart, it has been found that
the first flush of the new experience is followed by a less spectacular
period of quiet, solid development. The Holy Spirit has not been
withdrawn. New each morning is the gentle dew of His presence, but
now there are daily trials and difficulties calculated to stiffen the
moral muscle and prepare us to receive the latter rain, which, if it
came too early, would still fail in the accomplishment of its work.
But the former rain does not, and cannot complete the work of
God's grace in the soul. This is the work of the latter rain, and it
takes all of the latter rain to do it; just as it does in nature. This work
will not be accomplished instantly when the first showers of the latter
rain have fallen. It requires time for the latter rain to completely do
its work. It is a process of growth, and growth always takes time.
This is made clear in the following statement: "As the members of
the body of Christ approach the period of their last conflict, 'the time
of Jacob's trouble,' they will grow up into Christ, and will partake
largely of His Spirit. As the third message swells to a loud cry, and as
great power and glory attend the closing work, the faithful people of
THE FORMER & LATTER RAIN 213

Relationship of the Former Rain and

Latter Rain in Nature
Former Rain Latter Rain
Falls at the sowing time Falls toward the end of
Causes germination the season
First the blade and ear Completes the growth
Without the Former Rain, process
the Latter Rain is Then the full corn in the ear
of no use Without the Latter Rain,
the crop fails

THIS IS RAIN THIS ALSO IS RAIN

These Principles Hold True

in the Spiriitual Realm

God will partake of that glory. It is the latter rain which revives and
strengthens them to pass through the time of trouble. Their faces
will shine with the glory of that light which attends the third angel."
SDA Bible Commentary 7:984.
The time which immediately precedes the time of Jacob's trouble
is the period of the latter rain. Notice, that when describing the ex-
perience of the people of God during this period, the words are
used, "they will grow up into Christ." These words are used with the
thought in mind of the natural world wherein the grain grows up dur-
ing the period of the latter rain into full maturity. So it will be, that
during the spiritual latter rain, the people of God will receive the final
growth into full maturity, which will prepare them to endure the time
of Jacob's trouble and, at the same time, be fitted for translation.
To further bear out the truth that the former rain does not com-
plete the work of God's grace in the soul, we have but to return to the
statement quoted above from Testimonies to Ministers, 506, where
we read: "The ripening of the grain represents the completion of the
work of God's grace in the soul. By the power of the Holy Spirit the
214 LAST DAY EVENTS

moral image of God is to be perfected in the character. We are to be

wholly transformed into the likeness of Christ."
This clearly teaches us that, without the blessing of the latter rain
and the work which it will do in the soul of each and every one who is
alive when it comes time to receive it, the complete work of grace
whereby we are brought to the place where, in actual fact, there is left
no spot or wrinkle or any such thing in the soul, would not be possi-
ble. Therefore then, without the work of God's grace, which the lat-
ter rain will do in the soul, not one of us would ever be ready for
translation. For this reason it is written that: "Those who come up to
every point, and stand every test, and overcome, be the price what it
may, have heeded the counsel of the True Witness, and they will be
fitted by the latter rain for translation." Spiritual Gifts 2:226.
This much must be clear, that the latter rain is needed in order to
reach that final state of perfection which will fit us for translation—
for entry into the kingdom of heaven without seeing death—but it
must be emphasized again, that while the latter rain completes the
work of God's grace in the soul, it is not a different process at all
from the former rain, but the continuation of the very same process
to ultimate and final completion. In other words, the seal of the Holy
Spirit in the former rain is still the seal of the Holy Spirit in the latter
rain. It is one and the same seal.
To illustrate the point, let us think of a team of workmen who, af-
ter reaching a certain point in their construction of a building,
ceased operations on that structure for the time being. Perhaps they
have to wait for a floor of concrete to dry or for some materials to ar-
rive. Later the crew returns to complete the work begun earlier. In
doing so, they use the same procedures, materials, and tools as for-
merly since the building is still the same building as before and has
not changed except that it is getting taller and closer to completion.
Now, to complete the work of construction on this particular
building, required that it be performed in two stages, but when it was
complete, we would not describe it as being two different buildings,
but one. It would not even be two different works but one complete
work—the latter part being but the completion of the first part by the
same workmen using the same methods and tools.
So, the same Workman—the Holy Spirit—comes in the former
rain to begin the work of the character building. Then, at the end, He
comes in the latter rain to complete that which He has begun. If His
work in the beginning is the seal of the Holy Spirit, then His work in
the end is the same seal still. The second seal, as we shall see as the
study continues, is a different seal altogether; not involving the Holy
Spirit at all. The failure to understand this distinction lies at the root
THE FORMER & LATTER RAIN 215

of all the misunderstanding of the nature of the work of the latter rain
and the sealing.
But where does this leave those millions of Christians who died
without ever receiving the latter rain, and who therefore passed to
their graves without having had the work of God's grace completed
in their souls? These certainly were not wholly transformed into the
image of Christ. Will such be lost, or does the Judge of the universe
have a lower standard for these?
There must be some balancing factor, for we know perfectly well
that there will be a great multitude saved in the kingdom, including
the faithful apostles, Moses, the martyrs of the Old and New Testa-
ments, and many, many others who have never received the benefits
of the latter rain. On the surface of it, the one fact would seem to
deny the other, but there can be no contradiction, for there are no
paradoxes in Scripture, despite the fact that many learned and un-
learned claim that there are.
The simple explanation lies in a fact, which many believers rec-
ognize anyhow, that a different level of experience is needed for the
successful passing through the time of Jacob's trouble and transla-
tion without seeing death, than for death and resurrection. It is im-
portant that we note and emphasize that it is a different level of the
same experience, not a different kind of experience which is to be
added to the work to be done by the Holy Spirit under the former
rain. The truth of this is well expressed in the following statement
from the Advent pioneer, James White:
"The mass of people think that if a person is prepared to die, he
is prepared for the coming of the Lord. But they do not consider the
difference between dying and standing alive to meet the Lord at His
appearing. It is one thing to die in the Lord, to yield our spirits to
Him while He is pleading for us before the Father's throne, and quite
a different thing to stand in the time of trouble after Jesus has ceased
to plead in man's behalf, after His priesthood is closed, and He is
preparing to come to redeem His own and take vengeance on His
foes. They who realize these things will bless heaven that means has
been devised in the mercy of God for the perfection of the saints."
Life Sketches of James and Ellen White, 431. This is from the
original Life Sketches, and is not to be confused with the present
book entitled Life Sketches of Ellen G. White.
A little reflection will show the truth of the above statement. A
full revelation of all that stands between us and God is not given to us
at conversion. A simple illustration of this fact is to be found in the
case of the reformers such as Luther and Wesley, who did not in their
whole life times observe the true Sabbath day. But this sin was not
charged to their account, for having committed all things into the
216 LAST DAY EVENTS

hands of their Mediator, they could rest in the assurance that He, and
not they, bore the responsibility of the unknown sins in their lives. In
this way, they had perfect protection from the malice and power of
the evil one and could be saved unto eternal life. This principle of the
believer being responsible to obey only as far as he understands the
truth, is plainly stated in the following reference:
"I saw that the present test on the Sabbath could not come until
the mediation of Jesus in the holy place was finished and He had
passed within the second veil; therefore Christians who fell asleep
before the door was opened into the most holy, when the midnight
cry was finished, at the seventh month, 1844, and who had not kept
the true Sabbath, now rest in hope; for they had not the light and the
test on the Sabbath which we now have since that door was opened.
I saw that Satan was tempting some of God's people on this point.
Because so many good Christians have fallen asleep in the triumphs
of faith and have not kept the true Sabbath, they were doubting
about its being a test for us now." Early Writings, 42.
What God required of them is exactly what He requires of every
soul in every other age of this world's history, and that is, that they
live up to all the light available to them while they lived. As they came
up to test after test and point after point, and consistently showed
that they would rather have Jesus than sin, they were giving an as-
surance that no matter what the Lord might show them, they would
give that up too rather than lose heaven and eternal life with God.
But because they died before the latter rain shall fall, they have
been deprived of the light which would have enabled them to reach a
state of complete moral development into the image of Jesus while in
this life. But they died progressing toward that, and living in perfect
harmony with the will of God, so far as they had been able to know
it. The Lord recognizes this as being the best that they could do, and
He accepts it as the guarantee that if they were to have lived long
enough to receive the latter rain, they would have taken every step
necessary to achieve full character perfection.
So, upon their deaths, which are their personal closings of proba-
tion, the Lord, into whose hands they had committed all things,
transferred to the sanctuary on their behalf all the undisclosed and
unforsaken imperfection remaining in them. In this way, all of their
sin goes beforehand to judgment to be transferred to the scapegoat
on the great day of final accounts.
But, while all those who died in Christ before the Lord shall ap-
pear will have a Mediator standing for them right up to the point of
the close of their personal probation which comes on them at the
moment of death, those who live beyond the point where their pro-
bation closes, will no longer have a Mediator standing on their be-
THE FORMER & LATTER RAIN 217

half. The time when this situation shall prevail is known as the time
of Jacob's trouble. It will be a fearful time.
"Says the prophet: 'Who may abide the day of His coming? and
who shall stand when He appeareth? for He is like a refiner's fire,
and like fullers' soap: and He shall sit as a refiner and purifier of sil-
ver: and He shall purify the sons of Levi, and purge them as gold and
silver, that they may offer unto the Lord an offering in righteous-
ness.' Malachi3:2, 3. Those who are living upon the earth when the
intercession of Christ shall cease in the sanctuary above are to stand
in the sight of a holy God without a mediator. Their robes must be
spotless, their characters must be purified from sin by the blood of
sprinkling. Through the grace of God and their own diligent effort
they must be conquerors in the battle with evil. While the investiga-
tive judgment is going forward in heaven, while the sins of penitent
believers are being removed from the sanctuary, there is to be a spe-
cial work of purification, of putting away of sin, among God's people
upon earth. This work is more clearly presented in the messages of
Revelation 14." Great Controversy, 425
If, once probation has closed, they then have sin in them still,
they would have to bear the responsibility themselves, for there will
be no mediator to bear this for them. But they will not have the
power to act on their own behalf, which means they cannot divest
themselves of sinfulness. Therefore, any person who enters the time
of Jacob's trouble with either known or unknown sinfulness in him,
is joined to that sin for eternity. There will be absolutely no way of
escape for such a person.
It will be a time when the characters of all will be fully revealed, for
both the righteous and the wicked will be placed under the greatest
possible pressure to act out their respective characters. The result
will be that, in and through God's faithful remnant, His righteousness
shall be seen at its shining, radiant best, while in and through those
who have rejected His mercy, iniquity shall appear at its ugly, repul-
sive worst. See The Seven Angels by F. T. Wright. No longer will
there be any hidden sins in anyone, for all will be revealed.
But where then can they send such sin? The sanctuary—the only
place where we can send sin—is closed forever, so that any sin found
in them then will be there forever. Inasmuch as every means by
which sin can be removed from them will no longer be available to
them or anyone else; all such sin must eternally remain in them, so
that wherever they go, the sin must also go. If they were taken to
heaven, the sin would go there too, and inasmuch as this can never
be, then they would never be allowed to go there. If they were, then
why ever did God put sin out of heaven and Paradise in the first case?
Therefore, in the very nature of the case as it stands, those who
218 LAST DAY EVENTS

live right through the time of Jacob's trouble when there will be no
mediator between them and God, must have the ultimate level of
perfection in their experience. The moral image of God must be per-
fected in them, and they must be wholly transformed into the like-
ness of Jesus. Therefore they must all have more light and power
than that available to those who have gone before. Those who have
gone before have had the blessing of the former rain, which took
them so far along the path of development, but left them short of full
maturity in their growth. Therefore they must of necessity pass
through the tomb. But those who live will have the added develop-
ment provided by the latter rain, which will bring them to full matur-
ity. The latter rain completes the sealing work of the Holy Spirit be-
gun by the former rain, but let it be emphasized again that this is not
a different seal or a different kind of work. It is the same Holy Spirit,
doing the same work, and giving the same seal exactly. This is the
first seal. The second seal, as we shall see as this study progresses, is
not given till after the Holy Spirit has completed His work, and both
the former rain and the latter rain are ended.
So far in this study we have seen that the Word of God teaches
that the latter rain completes the work of the perfecting of the believ-
ers, and that without it we could not possibly reach full maturity of
Christian character and be fitted for translation. At once, this runs
counter to the commonly held concept that no one will receive the lat-
ter rain until he has reached ultimate character perfection. It is be-
cause of the holding of this concept that so many have taken the posi-
tion that the judgment of the living comes before the latter rain, so
that, having been judged as reaching complete character perfection,
they can receive the latter rain. But this concept is untenable, as we
have seen from evidences so far in the Word of God; and will see even
more clearly and strongly as we proceed in this series of studies.
But we must not pass on from this point without investigating the
evidences upon which are based the conclusions that the latter rain
comes upon those only who have reached finality of character per-
fection. Here are two statements which can be understood as sup-
porting that view when held in a certain light:
"Today you are to have your vessel purified, that it may be ready
for the heavenly dew, ready for the showers of the latter rain; for the
latter rain will come, and the blessing of God will fill every soul that
is purified from every defilement." Evangelism, 702.
"Those who come up to every point and stand every test, and
overcome, be the price what it may, have heeded the counsel of the
True Witness, and they will receive the latter rain, and thus be fitted
for translation." Testimonies 1:187.
Taken alone without consideration of any other Scriptures, it
THE FORMER & LATTER RAIN 219

must be agreed that these statements would justify the position that
the judgment of the living commences before the latter rain falls. But
there is one thing we cannot safely do. We cannot come to a conclu-
sion in Scripture without comparing Scripture with other Scripture
to see just what the Word means when it uses certain expressions.
Such a comparison will show what the Lord regards as the facing
of every test and the purification from every defilement. When we
successfully face every test which has been brought to us so far, the
Lord regards us as if we had faced them all, because the very same
spirit of submission combined with trust in the Lord's power to save
us from the evil one in that crisis, is that which is required to pass
even the great final test. Our faith will then have to be stronger, of
course, but it will be the same faith exactly, and, as we face today's
trials with power and strength, we give evidence of the determina-
tion to face the final test in the same way. The principle involved is
the same as that wherein the Lord regards as a murderer the man
who has hatred in his heart toward his neighbor.
This does not mean that there is no need for us to pass the great
final test. Even though the passing of every test brought to us, up till
the time of the latter rain, has qualified us to receive the latter rain,
we can still fail during the tests of the closing battle and in the great
final test in particular.
Nothing could be clearer than this: The great final test, which we
must pass before we can receive the final seal, does not come before,
but at the very end of the latter rain. In chapter eleven of this series,
the evidences regarding the great final test were presented, and
these showed that it, as stated in Christ's Object Lessons, 412:
"comes at the close of human probation when it is too late for the
soul's need to supplied." Should the statement from volume one of
the Testimonies mean, that to pass every test, we must pass the
great final test too, before we could receive the latter rain, then the
latter rain could not fall till after the close of probation for all man-
kind, when it would be too late to do any good at all for anyone.
The fact is, that no one will have attained to ultimate finality of
sinless perfection before the outpouring of the latter rain, for it is the
latter rain alone which can bring us to this level, once the former rain
has done its work of preparation. Thus, the former and the latter
rain provide us with the seal of the Holy Spirit whereby we are
brought to the place where the devil will find nothing in us which will
respond to his devices. All those who have this seal and pass the
great final test are fitted to receive the second seal, without which we
can never be finally and eternally secure against the devices of Sa-
tan. The subject of this second and final seal will be the study of our
next chapter.
[LDE15]
Chapter 19

The Second Seal

After having determined from the Word of God that there are two
separate and distinct seals as different from each other as the first
and second advents of Christ, we spent considerable time and space
studying the first of the two seals. It was essential that we do this, for
it is impossible to understand the second and final seal if we do not
firstly have a clear understanding of the first seal. But now that we
have that, we can and will pass on to a study of that second seal, the
final seal, which is so distinct and separate from the first seal.
The first seal as we have seen is:
a work which is done in us day by day;
it is the work of the Holy Spirit, begun by the former rain and
completed by the latter rain;
it is a process of settling
into the truth both intellectually and spiritually and is
therefore the work of this lifetime;
it seals sin out and righteousness in;
it prepares for the great final test;
it must be absolutely complete before the judgment.
It is thus clearly evident that the first sealing is a very comprehen-
sive and wonderful gift to the repenting, believing child of God,
which completes the work of God's grace in the soul. When that seal-
ing work is finished there is no spot, or wrinkle, or any such thing left
in the individual, and the devil can find nothing in him whatsoever to
respond to his temptations. It is very proper and natural to ask then,
If the first seal does all of that for me, then what need do I have for a
second and final seal? What is there yet that I need, for which provi-
sion is not already made in this first seal? If I will then have the com-
plete work of cleansing done in my soul and the moral image of Jesus
completely formed within, then will I not be fit to enter heaven as the
result of Christ's creative workmanship?
These are very good questions, for it is very evident that if the
Lord has completed the work in my soul—and we have seen beyond
any argument to the contrary that this is what the first seal does ac-
complish—then the Lord is not going to do any further work in my
soul in the second seal. And neither will He. Let it be established in
THE SECOND SEAL 221

the mind that the second seal is not concerned with a cleansing of
the soul of man. That work by that time is complete, and you cannot
complete that which has been completed, or perfect perfection.
At the same time, the second seal is still the sealing of the people
of God. It is a work done for them though not in them, and inasmuch
as the meaning of the seal is that it makes them secure against the
entrance of sin, then in a way not accomplished by the first seal, this
seal will give them a final and eternal protection against the intrusion
of sin into their lives. This is but to say then that although they have
the full character perfection within themselves necessary for re-ad-
mission into heaven, they still cannot enter there until this further
work, not accomplished by the first seal, has been done for them. It is
further to say that this work is something beyond the province of the
Holy Spirit, something which even He cannot do for them. He has
done all that He could do in the first seal, but now another must ac-
complish this final service for them.
This is not to limit the power of the Holy Spirit in the least. It is
not to say that He is anything less than omnipotent. He is truly all-
powerful in the fullest sense of the word, but it is not a question of
power but one of province, for Jesus Christ has gained a right to do
certain works by virtue of His sacrifice which none other but He can
do. Thus we shall shortly see that the second seal is the work of the
Saviour Himself and not of the Holy Spirit at all. Even so, while Je-
sus does the actual sealing work in this instance, the Holy Spirit
plays a part in that He will be leading, guiding, and helping the peo-
ple of God to understand this work as it goes forward for them, and
to take the right relationship to it so that they can receive the full
benefit of this final seal.
What then is this final work which gives to the people of God the
second and final sealing against the intrusion of sin? Wherein has the
first seal not provided the full and final protection?
The answer is simple and clear. To understand it we must turn to
the unfolding of the gospel work as revealed in the sanctuary. In our
previous study of the first seal, we saw how that the sin was taken
into the sanctuary, thus removing the enemy from within the be-
liever so that it could no longer open the gates to the enemy without.
In the place of the evil agency, comes the indwelling presence of Je-
sus who will never open the gates to the devil and his temptations.
Thus the soul is sealed against the power of sin, in just the same way
as an earthly fortress would, by the same procedure, be made secure
against an enemy from without.
To illustrate, let us suppose that a group of enemy agents who
had been opening a castle's gates in order to admit enemy troops,
had been detected, captured, and hurried off to a secure prison.
222 LAST DAY EVENTS

While they were held in the prison, they could not open the gates of
the fortress from within to the foe without. So, with every entrance
securely barred, and with the enemy agents held helpless in confine-
ment, the castle was sealed against those who were attacking it from
without.
That is a picture revealing the way in which the first seal is a seal.
The same beautiful picture is portrayed in the following statement:
"When the soul surrenders itself to Christ, a new power takes
possession of the new heart. A change is wrought which man can
never accomplish for himself. It is a supernatural work, bringing a su-
pernatural element into human nature. The soul that is yielded to
Christ, becomes His own fortress, which He holds in a revolted
world, and He intends that no authority shall be known in it but His
own. A soul thus kept in possession by the heavenly agencies, is im-
pregnable to the assaults of Satan." Desire of Ages, 324.
Now while this provision might seem to adequately dispose of the
sin problem, it does not do so entirely. When the sinfulness which
has been taken from the believer is placed in the sanctuary, it has yet
to be finally atoned for and placed on the scapegoat, or permitted to
return onto the sinner. Until that final disposal, we face the fearful
possibility of all that sin being rolled back on us as if we had never
even been cleansed of it in the first case. This was clearly taught by
Jesus in the parable of the unjust steward as recorded in Matthew
18:21-35.
"Then Peter came to Him and said, 'Lord, how often shall my
brother sin against me, and I forgive him? Up to seven times?'
"Jesus said to him, 'I do not say to you, up to seven times, but up
to seventy times seven.
Therefore the kingdom of heaven is like a certain king who
wanted to settle accounts with his servants.
'And when he had begun to settle accounts, one was brought to
him who owed him ten thousand talents.
" 'But as he was not able to pay, his master commanded that he
be sold, with his wife and children and all that he had, and that pay-
ment be made.
" The servant therefore fell down before him, saying, "Master,
have patience with me, and I will pay you all."
Then the master of that servant was moved with compassion,
released him, and forgave him the debt.
'But that servant went out and found one of his fellow servants
who owed him a hundred denarii; and he laid hands on him and took
him by the throat, saying, "Pay me what you owe!"
" 'So his fellow servant fell down at his feet and begged him, say-
ing, ' 'Have patience with me, and I will pay you all.''
THE SECOND SEAL 223

" 'And he would not, but went and threw him into prison till he
should pay the debt.
" 'So when his fellow servants saw what had been done, they
were very grieved, and came and told their master all that had been
done.
" Then his master, after he had called him, said to him, "You
wicked servant! I forgave you all that debt because you begged me.
" ' "Should you not also have had compassion on your fellow
servant, just as I had pity on you?"
" 'And his master was angry, and delivered him to the torturers
until he should pay all that was due to him.
" 'So My heavenly Father also will do to you if each of you, from
his heart, does not forgive his brother his trespasses.' "
The steward was forgiven by his lord of a debt of such magnitude
as to be far beyond the possibility of his ever repaying it. The forgive-
ness was full and complete, and, provided he met the condition of
treating his fellow-servant as he himself had been treated, he would
have been as free of that debt as if he had never incurred it in the first
case. So it is in the work of man's salvation:
"Righteousness is obedience to the law. The law demands right-
eousness, and this the sinner owes to the law; but he is incapable of
rendering it. The only way in which he can attain to righteousness is
through faith. By faith he can bring to God the merits of Christ, and
the Lord places the obedience of his Son to the sinner's account.
Christ's righteousness is accepted in place of man's failure, and God
receives, pardons, justifies, the repentant, believing soul, treats him
as though he were righteous, and loves him as he loves his Son. This
is how faith is accounted righteousness; and the pardoned soul goes
on from grace to grace, from light to a greater light. He can say with
rejoicing, 'Not by works of righteousness which we have done, but
according to his mercy he saved us, by the washing of regeneration,
and renewing of the Holy Ghost; which he shed on us abundantly
through Jesus Christ our Saviour, that being justified by his grace,
we should be made heirs according to the hope of eternal life.' " Re-
view and Herald, November 4,1890.
"It was possible for Adam, before the fall, to form a righteous
character by obedience to God's law. But he failed to do this, and be-
cause of his sin our natures are fallen and we cannot make ourselves
righteous. Since we are sinful, unholy, we cannot perfectly obey the
holy law. We have no righteousness of our own with which to meet
the claims of the law of God. But Christ has made a way of escape for
us. He lived on earth amid trials and temptations such as we have to
meet. He lived a sinless life. He died for us, and now He offers to take
our sins and give us His righteousness. If you give yourself to Him,
224 LAST DAY EVENTS

and accept Him as your Saviour, then, sinful as your life may have
been, for His sake you are accounted righteous. Christ's character
stands in place of your character, and you are accepted before God
just as if you had not sinned." Steps to Christ, 62.
The man in the parable did not treat his fellow who owed him but
a small debt as he himself had been forgiven. When the master heard
that, then the forgiveness was taken away from him, and his debt was
back upon his own head as if he had never been forgiven at all.
The entire parable is taught to make this point, namely that the pen-
alty is rolled back on the person who does not maintain his right-
eousness, as completely as if he had never been forgiven in the first
case.
The story is told to illustrate spiritual truth, Jesus making it very
clear that "So My heavenly Father also will do to you if each of you,
from his heart, does not forgive his brother his trespasses." Mat-
thew 18:35.
And Jesus was but reiterating a truth already made clear in the
Old Testament. "But if a wicked man turns from all his sins which he
has committed, keeps all My statutes, and does what is lawful and
right, he shall surely live; he shall not die.
"None of the transgressions which he has committed shall be re-
membered against him; because of the righteousness which he has
done, he shall live.
"Do I have any pleasure at all that the wicked should die? says the
Lord God, and not that he should turn from his ways and live?
"But when a righteous man turns away from his righteousness
and commits iniquity, and does according to all the abominations
that the wicked man does, shall he live? All the righteousness which
he has done shall not be remembered; because of the unfaithfulness
of which he is guilty and the sin which he has committed, because of
them he shall die." Ezekiel 18:21-24.
Thus the Word of the Living God makes it very clear that there
can be no such thing as once saved, always saved. While it is true
that pardon and cleansing are the very effective means of providing
us with a standing of righteousness in our daily experience, it is also
to be understood that such pardon and cleansing are conditional on
our faithfulness to the end.
Here on this earth we are on probation. Our destiny is not yet fi-
nally and eternally sealed. The sins which we have confessed and
handed over to the Saviour as our High Priest are safe and secure in
the sanctuary until the great day of final atonement, but then, if we
are found to be unfaithful, they will come back on our own heads just
as if we had never been forgiven.
This is also clearly taught in the following extract: "Important
THE SECOND SEAL 225

The First Seal The Second Seal

The work of the Holy Spirit, A single act performed in
begun by the former rain the heavenly sanctuary at
and completed by the the end of probationary
latter rain; time;
The truth both intellectually Not a work done in us but;
and spiritually and is A mighty work done for us;
Therefore the work of this Provided after the great,
lifetime; final test for those alone
Seals sin out and righteous- who pass that test;
ness in; Not the seal of the Holy
Prepares for the great, final Spirit;
test; The work of Christ, as the
Must be absolutely complete great High Priest;
before the judgment. Available only to those who
have received the first
seal;
In every respect, the eternal
sealing and securing
of those who receive it.

truths concerning the atonement are taught in the typical service. A

substitute was accepted in the sinner's stead; but the sin was not can-
celled by the blood of the victim. A means was thus provided by
which it was transferred to the sanctuary. By the offering of blood,
the sinner acknowledged the authority of the law, confessed his guilt
in transgression, and expressed his desire for pardon through a Re-
deemer to come; but he was not yet entirely released from the con-
demnation of the law." Great Controversy, 420.
And there is nothing in the daily service which will bring that full
release. Nor can the first seal provide the protection needed to make
us eternally secure from the return of those sins which have been
separated from us in the daily services. Throughout the hours of our
earthly probation we are still in a position wherein there is the open
door of the possibility of that sin returning upon us again. It is a door
which we need to have sealed forever, so that the sin can never ever
come back upon us. It would be a terrible thing to have all our sins
poised to fall on us for all eternity.
It must be very apparent that the provision for the sealing off of
any possibility of the sin returning upon us from the sanctuary, is a
very different work from that of getting sin out of us and putting it
into the sanctuary in the first case. Yet both, in the truest sense, are a
226 LAST DAY EVENTS

sealing against sin into righteousness. The first work is preliminary

to the second, for if we did not have the first seal, then there would be
no sin in the sanctuary from the return of which we would need to be
protected. Yet while the first is preliminary to the second, it cannot
be complete in itself, and without the second, all that was accom-
plished under the first seal would be of no avail whatsoever.
This is a fact which needs to be made quite clear. Think of the
situation as follows. A believer has faithfully put away every sin
which has ever been shown to him and has laid hold upon the right-
eousness of Jesus to take their place. He has come up to and re-
ceived all the benefit of the latter rain, thus having had the full meas-
ure of the character of Christ developed within him. He has faced
and passed the great final test which comes at the close of human
probation, and thus has all the inward fitness to enter heaven.
But, the final atonement to be made in the sanctuary has not yet
been made for him, even though all the conditions have been met
and the time for it has arrived. Until the ministry of Christ in the most
holy place of the heavenly sanctuary shall provide the final atone-
ment for the sins of the righteous, up there in heaven is the awful ac-
cumulation of all of his past sins with the possibility of their returning
to him in the end. The man has received the full benefit of the work
of the first seal. The Holy Spirit by virtue of the province He occu-
pies, has done all He can do for the individual, but this does not seal
him against the return of that fearful load of evil. That is a different
work. It is the other seal and it can be effected by One Person only
and that is Jesus the High Priest, who by virtue of His spilt blood can
and will, having entered the most holy place of the heavenly sanctu-
ary, sprinkle His blood upon the mercy seat and thus make the final
atonement for our confessed and forsaken sins. At this point every-
thing depends upon Him. Just as Queen Esther was the one person
in existence who could go in before the king and plead for Israel of
old, so Jesus will be the only one in existence who can go in and
plead before the King of kings for Israel.
But He does not do this from obligation merely. His is not a serv-
ice of compulsion other than that of the divine compulsion of an in-
dwelling and unquenchable love. His ever has been and ever will be a
willing sacrifice. Cost Him what it may, we know that He will go
through with the final atonement without the least hesitation. On
this we can rely with the greatest of certainty and assurance al-
though, during the judgment of the living, our confidence that He
will, shall be tested to the uttermost.
But there is a danger that we underestimate the full implications
of what this means to us. Therefore, in an effort both to bring home
to us how vitally important it is that Jesus does make the final atone-
THE SECOND SEAL 227

ment, and to show the nature and work of the second seal, let us sup-
pose that Jesus in the end will refuse to go through with His work.
Now we all know that our great High Priest will not for an instant
refuse to make the final atonement for the sins of the righteous. But,
in order to understand how much depends on Christ's making that fi-
nal atonement, we need to see the awful consequences which would
follow should He refuse. That is to say, we are supposing for the mo-
ment that He would actually refuse to do this vital ministry, when the
time comes for Him to step to the mercy seat and sprinkle His blood
for the final atonement for our sins by virtue of which act He is able
to take all the sins of the true people of God and place them upon the
scapegoat.
What then?
What would this mean to the man here upon this earth at that
time who, while living, had received the full benefit of the daily seal-
ing, the full impression of the Spirit of God in the character of Christ
in his life, the moral fitness for entrance into heaven, and in whose
heart throbbed the hope of translation? We need consider no other
individual than such for the rest cannot receive the benefit of the fi-
nal atonement anyway.
It would mean that his sins could not and would not go onto the
scapegoat, for only by Christ's making the final atonement can this
be achieved. But neither could they remain any longer in the sanctu-
ary from which they must now be promptly cleansed. The limit of
time during which they can remain there has expired. The judgment
has come demanding the cleansing of the sanctuary and it will have
what it demands. Therefore the sin must be taken out of the sanctu-
ary, and it must be sent somewhere. Inasmuch as it cannot under
such circumstances be placed upon the scapegoat, then it must be re-
turned to the individual himself. There is no other alternative, and
such would mean that there would be no salvation for us at all, but
only the darkness of an eternal night. And this would still be so even
though the individual had received all the benefits of the first seal.
In the light of these clear facts, no one should have the least diffi-
culty in seeing that the first seal does not provide us with the protec-
tion from the possibility of the return to us from the sanctuary of all
our confessed sins. At the same time it must not be forgotten that the
first seal is indispensable. It must be experienced in order to receive
the second. It is preliminary but it is not final. Wonderful and perfect
as it is, if it were the only seal received, we could not, in the end, have
salvation.
Thus it is that the first seal takes us so far but leaves us unsealed
against the awful possibility of the return of all of our sins in the great
day of judgment, but when Jesus steps to the mercy seat and sprin-
228 LAST DAY EVENTS

kles His blood as He most certainly will do for every truly repentant
child of God who has received all the benefits of the Holy Spirit's
work in the first seal, then the sin is placed upon the scapegoat and
we are then eternally secure against the return of sin in any shape or
form.
That final work of Jesus in the sanctuary sets a seal of protection
upon us by shutting off forever any possibility of sin regaining its do-
minion over the people of God. This is the second and final seal
which, while still a sealing out of sin and a sealing in of righteousness
as is the first seal in its own way, is different in every other respect
from the first seal.
As we summarized the facts of the first seal let us now summarize
the facts of the second so as to show the difference clearly and dis-
tinctly. The second seal:
is a single act performed in the heavenly sanctuary at the end of
probationary time;
is not a work done in us but;
is a mighty work done for us;
is provided after the great, final test for those alone who pass that
test;
is not the seal of the Holy Spirit;
is the work of Christ, as the great High Priest;
is available only to those who have received the first seal;
is, in every respect, the eternal sealing and securing of those who
receive it.
Before we close off this chapter, we would do well to spend a little
time in studying the implications of not understanding correctly the
differences between the two seals. It is by no means too much to say
that a misunderstanding of these differences will result in the certain
loss of eternal life now that we live in the time when the light is here
and the implications of the two seals are of importance to the living.
When the Pharisees and Jews of old were not able to understand
the differences between the two advents of Christ, it cost them their
eternal lives, for they were led to expect Him to arrive at His first ad-
vent as He was due to arrive at the second. When He did not come in
the way their incorrect method of study had led them to expect Him,
they rejected Him and lost their eternal lives in consequence. It was
as serious as that. So will the wrong understanding of the seals lead
us to take a position which will cost us our eternal lives. Let us see
how this will be.
The difficulty with the Jew of old was that he saw only the one ad-
vent where he should have seen that there were two. Likewise, the
average professed child of God today sees but the one seal where he
should see two or, to make matters even worse he divides the former
THE SECOND SEAL 229

and the latter rain, which is the first seal, into two seals making them
different from each other.
When the false understanding is held that there is only one seal,
the following line of reasoning is inevitable. First of all it is noted that
the seal of God is given to the individual after he has been judged and
his sins are blotted from the sanctuary.
This is true of the second seal only.
Next, it is noted that the sealing is a work done in the believer by
the Holy Spirit especially during the outpouring of the latter rain
whereby the work of character perfection in his soul is brought to
completion. This also is true, but this time of the first seal only.
Here then we have the gathering together of certain facts about
the seals of God. The facts are true, but the mistake is that the stu-
dent has gathered them together as if they were all describing the
same seal, when in fact they are not.
Having thus brought them together as descriptions of the one
seal, then the following conclusions must result. If the seal of God is
given in the judgment, and if that same seal accomplishes the final
work of character perfecting in the saints, then it must follow that we
will come to the judgment with that character work still incomplete,
still with shortcomings, weaknesses, and defects of character to be
removed so that we can stand in full perfection before the Lord. It will
mean that we do not come to the judgment with character perfection,
but that the final cleansing of the soul will follow the judgment.
Furthermore, if we take it that the seal of God is given in the judg-
ment and that the latter rain is that same seal, then it must also be
that the latter rain must follow and not precede the judgment. That is
to say, that the judgment of the living must come to an individual first
and then after he has been judged and found to have fulfilled the re-
quired conditions, then he is given the gift of the latter rain and sent
forth to give the loud cry to others who will in turn be judged, sealed
with the latter rain, and sent forth to gather others until the last one
has been gathered in.
This is the only possible conclusion which can be drawn while
ever the student sees but the one seal instead of the two. Let it not be
overlooked that, while the one seal only is seen instead of two, then
the Scriptures can be powerfully used to support that theory, which
in turn will have convincing weight on the minds of all who see only
the one seal where they should see the two.
But how will this cost one his eternal life?
Your faith and belief govern your character development. Jesus
said, "And you shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you
free." John 8:32. That is to say, only truth will make you free. Error
will not. If you believe that you will be coming to the judgment clad in
230 LAST DAY EVENTS

the filthy garments of a defective character, then that is exactly how

you will come. And as surely as you do, you will be examined and
found to have spots, and wrinkles, and such things. But all who
would gain eternal life, in that day "must be tested and found without
spot or wrinkle or any such thing." Great Controversy, 490. To be
in any other condition is to be cast out and to lose one's eternal life
with dreadful certainty.
And if we believe that the latter rain comes only on those who
have been judged and sealed, then the very moment anyone received
the outpouring of that Spirit, he would immediately assume that he
was now eternally secure and there would be no more need of faith at
the very time when he needed to live by faith the most.
If only the Jews in the days of Christ had understood the differ-
ence between two things which were called by the same name and
yet were different, they would not have lost their eternal lives. And
today, if only we can understand the difference between the two seals
which are called by the same name and yet are different, then we too
shall be saved from the consequences of thus being deceived.
Today is the time to make sure that the law of God is written in
our foreheads and in our hearts and then, we shall have the prepara-
tion to receive the great final seal when that time comes. May each
one make his calling and election sure.
 Chapter 20

The Loud
Cry Begins
In the previous chapters, a number of different aspects of last day
events have been studied by which certain landmarks have been es-
tablished and a number of correct principles have been laid down.
Without this ground-work, we would be unprepared to understand
the sequence of events which transpires during the closing events of
the great and terrible battle between the God of heaven, as the leader
of His people on this earth on the one hand, and the devil, as the
leader of the beast and his image on the other. We would do very well
at this point to briefly review what we have learned so far before we
trace through the step-by-step developments which will culminate in
the restoration of God's eternal kingdom.
The great Second Advent Movement has been in the world since
1831, announcing the present judgment of the dead and the coming
judgment of the living, revealing the wonderful work of Jesus in the
sanctuary in heaven, and proclaiming the Sabbath truth. But the
churches of the world have rejected this light, and this has resulted in
their and the world's moral decay.
This, the leaders will blame on "the desecration of Sunday",
thus further increasing their rejection of God's truth and their sup-
port for the institution of the Papacy, with the result that, through-
out the entire world, the door will be opened still further for rebel-
lion, lawlessness, and spiritualism to manifest themselves. This gives
the devil greater control over the elements, and more and more, he
will unleash the forces of nature over which he has a measure of con-
trol, with the result that devastations of every kind will exact a fearful
toll of life and property.
The church leaders, eager to secure the power of the state to re-
place the lost power of God, will finally unite, and will present to the
civil authorities the argument that all their troubles are due to the dis-
regard for the "sanctity of Sunday", and these troubles will not
cease until Sunday observance shall be enforced as the only means
of restoring law and order. And the authorities, not realizing that this
232 LAST DAY EVENTS

is the very worst thing they could possibly do to restore any law or
order, will bow to the argument, and enforce the Sunday law legisla-
tion. The image of the beast is then set up, and the fall of Babylon
the Great is thus completed; the time having come for the fourth an-
gel to lighten the earth with his glory.
While the world has thus been moving inevitably into the throes
of this final disaster and self-destruction, the Lord has been prepar-
ing His army for the battle. The study of the seven angels of Revela-
tion 14 and 18, shows that the people of the third angel's movement
will not finish the work to be done before probation closes, but the
movement of the fourth angel will.
The prophecy of Matthew 22 further confirms that the bidden
ones who are identified as the professed people of the Lord, will
never give the loud cry. This task will be fulfilled by the faithful ser-
vants who carried the final invitation, warning, and call to the bidden
ones, who so definitely and swiftly rejected their efforts. As the time
approaches for the giving of the loud cry, the faithful servants who
make up the nucleus of the fourth angel's movement, draw into a
very close unity and develop in character and moral worth, so that
the Lord can use them in the final battle.
The rejection of this warning and invitation to the bidden ones
causes a definite shaking among the professed people of God, with
the result that the faithful ones are thrust out—an event already in
the past. Despite this, many are still looking in the future for the
shaking to come, not realizing that there are two shakings; the first
being caused by the straight testimony of the True Witness to the
Laodiceans, and the second by the physical test at the end of the
loud cry period.
The judgment of the living does not commence with the loud cry,
but is located at the end of it, when the great final test of the death
decree is imposed on the people of the Lord. Not one of them can
receive the second and final seal until he has passed that dreadful
test, the passing of which determines whether or not he shall receive
the final sealing. It is the latter rain which completes the work of
God's grace in the souls of the believers as they approach this final
test, thus finishing in them the work of the first seal, in preparation
for the receiving of that final seal.
Having permitted the Word of God to establish these facts for us,
it is time to begin a detailed step-by-step study of the events during
the loud cry itself. Nowhere is this better set out than in the chapter
entitled, "The Final Warning", beginning on page 603 of The Great
Controversy, and it is intended that these pages shall be the basis of
our study for this section. It is interesting to note that in the original
1884 edition, this chapter was entitled "The Loud Cry". The
THE LOUD CRY BEGINS 233

change is merely in the wording, not the meaning, for is not the loud
cry the final warning to the world?
The first three pages of the chapter are devoted to a discussion of
the nature of the issues at stake in the great struggle. Quoted first of
all is the reference from Revelation 18:1, 2, 4, which speaks of the
other angel, who lightens the earth with his glory and proclaims that
Babylon the Great is fallen, followed by the other voice, which calls
upon God's people to come out of her, so that they receive not of her
plagues.
Then immediately comes this interesting and important com-
ment: "This Scripture points forward to a time when the an-
nouncement of the fall of Babylon, as made by the second angel of
Revelation 14, (verse 8), is to be repeated, with the additional men-
tion of the corruptions which have been entering the various
churches that constitute Babylon, since that message was first given,
in the summer of 1844.''
It is important that this statement be kept in mind, for where we
find that these conditions are being fulfilled, we may know that the
loud cry has begun.
We are here informed that a terrible condition of unrighteousness
will have developed at this time as it is written:
"A terrible condition of the religious world is here described.
With every rejection of truth the minds of the people will become
darker, their hearts more stubborn, until they are entrenched in an
infidel hardihood. In defiance of the warnings which God has given,
they will continue to trample upon one of the precepts of the Deca-
logue, until they are led to persecute those who hold it sacred. Christ
is set at nought in the contempt placed upon His word and His peo-
ple. As the teachings of spiritualism are accepted by the churches,
the restraint imposed upon the carnal heart is removed, and the pro-
fession of religion will become a cloak to conceal the basest iniquity.
A belief in spiritual manifestations opens the door to seducing spirits
and doctrines of devils, and thus the influence of evil angels will be
felt in the churches." Great Controversy, 603, 604.
These words are entirely believable, for they describe conditions
into which the world is descending with ever increasing rapidity be-
fore our very eyes. We are witnesses of these fulfilling prophecies
which we know will soon reach complete fulfillment. Unrepentant
mankind is doomed. We need no convincing of the veracity of these
predictions. These statements need no further comment.
As may well be expected, the fall into total apostasy by the world
in general, is but to follow the leadership of her—Babylon the Great—
who will have plumbed those depths ahead of all the rest, and, in do-
234 LAST DAY EVENTS

ing so, will have dragged all those who follow her down with her. It is
no wonder then that at this time it is declared that her fall is complete:
"Of Babylon, at the time brought to view in this prophecy, it is
declared: 'Her sins have reached unto heaven, and God hath remem-
bered her iniquities.' Revelation 18:5. She has filled up the measure
of her guilt, and destruction is about to fall upon her." Great Contro-
versy, 604.
Those few lines are all that are necessary to confirm that, when
these conditions shall have been reached, Babylon the Great will
have totally fallen, never to rise again. But, while the door of mercy
will be closed forever at this time against those who share in Baby-
lon's utter downfall, there will be those who have not identified with
Babylon, and from among these a great harvest of souls is to be gath-
ered. They shall not be left to perish, but will be given the fullest op-
portunity to escape from Babylon forever.
"But God still has a people in Babylon; and before the visitation
of His judgments these faithful ones must be called out, that they
partake not of her sins and 'receive not of her plagues.' Hence the
movement symbolized by the angel coming down from heaven, light-
ening the earth with his glory and crying mightily with a strong
voice, announcing the sins of Babylon. In connection with his mes-
sage the call is heard: 'Come out of her, My people.' These an-
nouncements, uniting with the third angel's message, constitute the
final warning to be given to the inhabitants of the earth." Great Con-
troversy, 604.
Even now they are out there in large numbers hidden among
those in Babylon who have no interest in the truth as it is written:
"Notwithstanding the spiritual darkness and alienation from God
that exist in the churches which constitute Babylon, the great body
of Christ's true followers are still to be found in their communion.
There are many of these who have never seen the special truths for
this time. Not a few are dissatisfied with their present condition and
are longing for clearer light. They look in vain for the image of Christ
in the churches with which they are connected. As these bodies de-
part further and further from the truth, and ally themselves more
closely with the world, the difference between the two classes will
widen, and it will finally result in separation. The time will come
when those who love God supremely can no longer remain in con-
nection with such as are 'lovers of pleasures more than lovers of
God; having a form of godliness, but denying the power thereof.' "
Great Controversy, 390.
"Notwithstanding the widespread declension of faith and piety,
there are true followers of Christ in these churches. Before the final
visitation of God's judgments upon the earth there will be among the
THE LOUD CRY BEGINS 235

people of the Lord such a revival of primitive godliness as has not

been witnessed since apostolic times. The Spirit and power of God
will be poured out upon His children. At that time many will separate
themselves from those churches in which the love of this world has
supplanted love for God and His word. Many, both of ministers and
people, will gladly accept those great truths which God has caused to
be proclaimed at this time to prepare a people for the Lord's second
coming. The enemy of souls desires to hinder this work; and before
the time for such a movement shall come, he will endeavor to pre-
vent it by introducing a counterfeit. In those churches which he can
bring under his deceptive power he will make it appear that God's
special blessing is poured out; there will be manifest what is thought
to be great religious interest. Multitudes will exult that God is work-
ing marvelously for them, when the work is that of another spirit. Un-
der a religious guise, Satan will seek to extend his influence over the
Christian world." Great Controversy, 464.
"Fearful is the issue to which the world is to be brought. The
powers of earth, uniting to war against the commandments of God,
will decree that 'all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and
bond' (Revelation 13:16), shall conform to the customs of the
church by the observance of the false sabbath. All who refuse compli-
ance will be visited with civil penalties, and it will finally be declared
that they are deserving of death. On the other hand, the law of God
enjoining the Creator's rest day demands obedience and threatens
wrath against all who transgress its precepts." Great Controversy,
604.
As stated in this last paragraph, the final showdown will be over
the validity of the seventh-day Sabbath versus the first-day of the
week as the proper day of worship. But, it would be superficiality of
the most dangerous kind to envisage this fearful confrontation as be-
ing merely a great battle aimed at proving which day of the week is
designated as the divinely appointed day of worship. That issue has
long ago been settled, with all the great religious leaders of the de-
nominations large and small, including the Roman Catholic Church,
freely admitting that the seventh day is the day appointed by
Jehovah.
But, while they can live with this admission, they will manifest
the worst kind of hostility towards the Sabbath when it is presented
in its purity and power, and against those who will remain unswerv-
ingly loyal to all that for which it stands. This alerts us to the fact that
there is Sabbath-keeping in the true sense of the word, and there is
seventh-day observance. This latter claims to be the genuine article,
though it is in fact nothing more than a powerless counterfeit. The
more men are deceived by this, the better Satan is pleased.
ILDE16]
236 LAST DAY EVENTS

In the final showdown, the Sabbath of God will be the symbol for
all the issues to be settled in that final, titanic struggle. Where the
Sabbath of God is found, there the power of God is in residence, for
the two are inseparable. See, Living Righteousness and the Sab-
bath of God, by F. T. Wright.
So then, when the almighty power of the omnipotent God spoke
the worlds into existence, there the Sabbath appeared. It required
that same power to structure the kingdom on earth as in heaven, and
once again, there was the Sabbath. The gospel is the power of God
sent into the world in Jesus Christ to save us from our sins. The prod-
uct is the new creation. Again, there is the Sabbath, inseparable
from the power of God.
The Sabbath rightly understood and received, is that which Satan
fears, for the powers at his command and as symbolized by the Sun-
day flag, are totally insignificant. Yet, because he has implanted his
mind and spirit into billions of deceived mortals, he is able to mount a
formidable onslaught against the Lord's people at this time of the
end.
If only he could sweep away all the manifestations and operations
of the power of God, then he will have torn down the Sabbath, the
flag which marks where God's presence and authority reside. With
the departure of God's presence, Satan gains possession of the va-
cant territory. Then, cut off from salvation, we all perish. The devil
too will perish for he depends on God to sustain him. It is no wonder
that: "Fearful is the issue to which the world is to be brought." Great
Controversy, 604.
Many volumes could be written analyzing the nature of the issues
to be forever settled in the last great battle of the ages between good
and evil, but we have only space enough to make the point that the
controversy will be far more comprehensive and profound than argu-
ing over which day of the week is the Sabbath day. Each one who has
determined to stand loyally on the side of truth needs to search
deeply into these things, for, in the rapidly approaching showdown,
every man, woman, and child must make a total commitment to truth
or error, light or darkness, righteousness or sin, the power of God or
the power of Satan, the Sabbath or Sunday.
"With the issue thus clearly brought before him, whoever shall
trample upon God's law to obey a human enactment receives the
mark of the beast; he accepts the sign of allegiance to the power
which he chooses to obey instead of God. The warning from heaven
is: 'If any man worship the beast and his image, and receive his mark
in his forehead, or in his hand, the same shall drink of the wine of the
wrath of God, which is poured out without mixture into the cup of
His indignation.' Revelation 14:9, 10.
THE LOUD CRY BEGINS 237

"But not one is made to suffer the wrath of God until the truth
has been brought home to his mind and conscience, and has been re-
jected. There are many who have never had an opportunity to hear
the special truths for this time. The obligation of the fourth com-
mandment has never been set before them in its true light. He who
reads every heart and tries every motive will leave none who desire a
knowledge of the truth, to be deceived as to the issues of the contro-
versy. The decree is not to be urged upon the people blindly. Every-
one is to have sufficient light to make his decision intelligently."
Great Controversy, 604, 605.
We can be thankful that at that time the issue will not be clouded,
but will be clearly brought before the people, as we read:
"The decree is not to be urged upon the people blindly. Everyone
is to have sufficient light to make his decision intelligently." Great
Controversy, 605.
Of course, the devil will spare no effort or expense to make the
issue as clouded as possible, but despite that, the power attending
the message will clarify every issue so that no one will have any ex-
cuse. For a period of time unknown to us at this moment, and no-
where revealed in the Word of God, the battle will rage on, until at
last, the whole world is brought to the great final test, which, as we
have learned previously, is at "the close of human probation."
Christ's Object Lessons, 412.
Then, as the following statement clearly shows, the one class will
have received the mark of the beast, while the other class will have
received the seal of the living God.
"The Sabbath will be the great test of loyalty, for it is the point of
truth especially controverted. When the final test shall be brought to
bear upon men, then the line of distinction will be drawn between
those who serve God and those who serve Him not. While the obser-
vance of the false Sabbath in compliance with the law of the state,
contrary to the fourth commandment, will be an avowal of allegiance
to a power that is in opposition to God, the keeping of the true Sab-
bath, in obedience to God's law, is an evidence of loyalty to the Crea-
tor. While one class, by accepting the sign of submission to earthly
powers, receive the mark of the beast, the other choosing the token
of allegiance to divine authority, receive the seal of God." Great
Controversy, 605.
Note very carefully that the events in this paragraph are dated by
the statement: "When the final test shall be brought to bear upon
men. . . . " Therefore, knowing as we do that the final test comes
upon men at the very close of human probation when the loud cry
has ended and the final warning has been given, then the division be-
tween those who make their final choice for Sunday and those who
238 LAST DAY EVENTS

make it for the Sabbath will be seen. It is then that all of these two
classes will have received, respectively, the mark of the beast and the
seal of God.
None can receive the seal of the living God until he has main-
tained his unswerving loyalty to God under the awesome pressure of
all the increasingly severe tests leading up to and including the great
final test. As we shall shortly see, there will be a series of increasingly
stiffer and stiffer tests beginning at the present time and ending with
the great final test. The major tests in their order will be: general per-
secution, the threat of fines and imprisonment, the deprivation of
the right to buy and sell, betrayal by family members, friends, and
apostate believers, and the death decree.
Those who run this fearful gauntlet cannot afford to fail at any
point on the way up, for, should they do so, they will, at that point
receive the mark of the beast, and thus be eternally lost. They do not
need to face any more tests after that in order to determine their
eternal destiny, for that will be decided by their failure to measure up
to the test so far. For instance, those who cannot endure the trial im-
posed by the threat of fines and imprisonment, have no hope of sur-
viving the much greater pressure of the buy and sell decree, and the
resistance of all such would, in the face of the death decree, crumble
to powder.
But, on the other hand, the true people of God who will be alive
at that time cannot receive the seal before the great final test, for by
it, and not by any lesser test, the eternal destiny of God's people
shall be decided.
Thus it is plainly written: "The Lord has shown me clearly that
the image of the beast will be formed before probation closes; for it is
to be the great test for the people of God, by which their eternal des-
tiny will be decided. . . . [Revelation 13:11-17 quoted which in-
cludes the death decree.]. . .
' This is the test that the people of God must have before they are
sealed." SDA Bible Commentary 7-.976.
This statement applies to those who are still in the great valley of
decision during the loud cry period, including those who give the
message, for they can still turn back if they should weaken. No one
will be eternally secure until, having passed the judgment of the liv-
ing, his accumulated sins in the heavenly sanctuary are blotted out,
and placed upon the scapegoat. This is the ministry performed by
Christ which finally and eternally seals the believer in everlasting
righteousness.
This will be the time of final separation between those who re-
ceive the seal of God or the mark of the beast.
In truth, then, it is written that,
THE LOUD CRY BEGINS 239

"When the final test shall be brought to bear upon men, then the
line of distinction will be drawn between those who serve God and
those who serve Him not. While one class, by accepting the sign of
submission to earthly powers, receive the mark of the beast, the
other choosing the token of allegiance to divine authority, receive
the seal of God." Great Controversy, 605.
This statement is in perfect harmony with this other from
Christ's Object Lessons, 122,123:
"When the mission of the gospel is completed, the judgment will
accomplish the work of separation. When the work of the gospel is
completed, there immediately follows the separation between the
good and the evil, and the destiny of each class is forever fixed."
Chapter 21

The Loud
Cry Develops
VJe have been studying the first three pages of the chapter in
Great Controversy, entitled "The Final Warning", wherein we have
found revealed the magnitude of the issues to be fought out in the pe-
riod of the falling of the latter rain. That concluded, we are brought
back to the present so that we might be carried forward in a more de-
tailed survey of the events to transpire each in their turn.
It is on the bottom of Great Controversy, 605, that there begins
such a step-by-step description of the events of the loud cry, as is
matched nowhere else in the inspired Word. The first words take us
right back to a point leading immediately to the beginning of the loud
cry and then moves on, step-by-step to the very end of the outpour-
ing of the latter rain. We shall quote these words, pausing every now
and then to draw your attention to the significance of the informa-
tion given.
"Heretofore those who presented the truths of the third angel's
message have often been regarded as mere alarmists. Their predic-
tions that religious intolerance would gain control in the United
States, that church and state would unite to persecute those who
keep the commandments of God, have been pronounced groundless
and absurd. It has been confidently declared that this land could
never become other than what it has been—the defender of religious
freedom. But as the question of enforcing Sunday observance is
widely agitated, the event so long doubted and disbelieved is seen to
be approaching, and the third message will produce an effect which
it could not have had before." Great Controversy, 605, 606.
This paragraph speaks of the things to happen just before the
loud cry actually begins. On the part of the vast majority, there has
been complete disbelief in the possibility of free America ever impos-
ing pressure and persecution on any who would not observe an ordi-
nance of the church, but there comes the time when the event is seen
to be approaching, and then the third angel's message will grow in
power and influence until it is joined by the angel of Revelation 18,
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 241

at which point the loud cry proper begins. It is worth comparing the
statement from Great Controversy with the one from Early Writ-
ings, 211.
"The message of the fall of Babylon, as given by the second an-
gel, is repeated, with the additional mention of the corruptions
which have been entering the churches since 1844. The work of this
angel comes in at the right time to join in the last great work of the
third angel's message as it swells to a loud cry."
This passing of the Sunday law, marking as it does the full and fi-
nal fall of Babylon the Great so that her sins reach clear up to heaven,
brings the world to the greatest point of crisis in its history; for which
the Lord is not left without a solution. His answer is the fullest out-
pouring of His power upon the children which are His, just as in the
past, His Spirit has come upon His faithful children to meet the cri-
ses of the past.
"In every generation God has sent His servants to rebuke sin,
both in the world and in the church. But the people desire smooth
things spoken to them, and the pure, unvarnished truth is not accept-
able. Many reformers, in entering upon their work, determined to ex-
ercise great prudence in attacking the sins of the church and the na-
tion. They hoped, by the example of a pure Christian life, to lead the
people back to the doctrines of the Bible. But the Spirit of God came
upon them as it came upon Elijah moving him to rebuke the sins of a
wicked king and an apostate people; they could not refrain from
preaching the plain utterances of the Bible—doctrines which they
had been reluctant to present. They were impelled to zealously de-
clare the truth and the danger which threatened souls. The words
which the Lord gave them they uttered, fearless of consequences,
and the people were compelled to hear the warning." Great Contro-
versy, 606.
Thus it has always been in the past, and it will be no different in
the future beginning of the loud cry. A fearful crisis will have arisen,
the result of which will be that the whole world will be threatened
with total self-destruction. Into this the Lord will not let them plunge
without one final warning. Therefore He sends His mighty Spirit in a
flood-tide of latter rain power upon His faithful, praying ones.
"Thus the message of the third angel will be proclaimed. As the
time comes for it to be given with greatest power, the Lord will work
through humble instruments, leading the minds of those who conse-
crate themselves to His service. The laborers will be qualified rather
by the unction of His Spirit than by the training of literary institu-
tions. Men of faith and prayer will be constrained to go forth with
holy zeal, declaring the word which God gives them. The sins of
Babylon will be laid open. The fearful results of enforcing the obser-
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 243

vances of the church by the civil authority, the inroads of spiritual-

ism, the stealthy but rapid progress of the papal power—all will be
unmasked. By these solemn warnings the people will be stirred.
Thousands upon thousands will listen who have never heard words
like these. In amazement they will hear the testimony that Babylon is
the church, fallen because of errors and sins, because of her rejec-
tion of the truth sent to her from heaven." Great Controversy, 606.
There are several points which need to be pondered in this para-
graph. In the first case, it must be very clear that this is the descrip-
tion of the opening of the loud cry, and that therefore, the latter rain
which produces the loud cry has fallen in abundance. These are not
events which take place before, but at the very beginning of the giv-
ing of the loud cry, The second sentence in the paragraph makes this
clear reading as it does, as follows: "As the time comes for it to be
given with greatest power," the events thereafter enumerated then
follow, but would not follow nor happen except that time had come;
the time when the message is to be given with the greatest power.
And what is that time?
It is that time when the mighty power of the Revelation 18 angel
joins the third angel's message in the power of the latter rain to be-
gin the loud cry of the final warning. In the 1884 edition of The
Great Controversy, 424, the same sentence reads as follows: "As
the time comes for the loud cry to be given", which makes it so clear
that this is the time of the loud cry which is being described in the
following sentences. What is described in those sentences are events
which transpire under the loud cry.
Further evidence to this is given as we read the very nature of the
warning sounded. Page 603 reveals that Revelation 18 will be ful-
filled during a time "when the announcement of the fall of Babylon,
as made by the second angel of Revelation 14, (verse 8), is to be re-
peated, with the additional mention of the corruptions which have
been entering the various organizations that constitute Babylon,
since that message was first given, in the summer of 1844."
The message of the second angel as given in 1844, announced
the partial fall of Babylon, but, since that time, there has been much
more of which she is guilty, and all of this is to be charged to her ac-
count in the final warning.
"The second angel's message of Revelation 14 was first
OPPOSITE PAGE: The outpouring of the latter rain will be the greatest
outshining of light ever bestowed upon the peoples of this earth, here
symbolized by the waters of this planet's vast oceans. As the morning sun
rises in splendor above the horizon, and grows in strength until high
noon, so too will increase in brilliance and power, the glory of the Son of
righteousness.
244 LAST DAY EVENTS

preached in the summer of 1844, and it then had a more direct appli-
cation to the churches of the United States, where the warning of the
judgment had been most widely proclaimed and most generally re-
jected, and where the declension in the churches had been most
rapid. But the message of the second angel did not reach its com-
plete fulfillment in 1844. The churches then experienced a moral
fall, in consequence of their refusal of the light of the advent mes-
sage; but that fall was not complete. As they have continued to reject
the special truths for this time they have fallen lower and lower. Not
yet, however, can it be said that 'Babylon is fallen, . . . because she
made all nations drink of the wine of the wrath of her fornication.'
She has not yet made all nations do this. The spirit of world conform-
ing and indifference to the testing truths for our time exists and has
been gaining ground in churches of the Protestant faith in all the
countries of Christendom; and these churches are included in the
solemn and terrible denunciation of the second angel. But the work
of apostasy has not yet reached its culmination.
"The Bible declares that before the coming of the Lord, Satan
will work 'with all power and signs and lying wonders, and with all
deceivableness of unrighteousness;' and they that 'received not the
love of the truth, that they might be saved,' will be left to receive
'strong delusion, that they should believe a lie.' 2 Thessalonians
2:9-11. Not until this condition shall be reached, and the union of
the church with the world shall be fully accomplished throughout
Christendom, will the fall of Babylon be complete. The change is a
progressive one, and the perfect fulfillment of Revelation 14:8 is yet
future." Great Controversy, 389.
So it will be that the spiritual state of the churches will have sunk
to the lowest possible level, never to rise anymore. This will be the
time for the powerful announcement to go forth which will an-
nounce that not merely Babylon is fallen, but that Babylon the Great
has gone under.
This will be when, under the ministry of the Revelation 18 angel,
all the additional corruptions which have been entering the churches
since 1844 will be mentioned. These will be:
"The fearful results of enforcing the observances of the church
by civil authority, the inroads of spiritualism, the stealthy but rapid
progress of the papal power . . . ." That covers it all pretty well, and
there is not another thing Babylon could do to increase her guilt, but
not one of these three things was present in 1844. There was no
move then to enforce the Sunday observance by law. It was not agi-
tated nor mentioned. Neither was spiritualism a great power in the
churches, although it did begin to gain a grip on the churches imme-
diately after their rejection of the Advent message.
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 245

Finally, in those days, the papal power was not a force to be reck-
oned with. In 1798 the deadly wound had been inflicted, and thereaf-
ter the fortunes of the Papacy reached a very low ebb indeed, so
much so that many believed that she could never again rise to any po-
sition of world prominence. On November 24, 1848, for instance,
the Pope had to flee from Rome for his life, and then in 1860, the Pa-
pacy lost its lands in Italy, except for the Vatican itself. While, from
there on, the papacy began a slow at first, but ever increasingly rapid
climb back into a position of world power and prominence. At the
time of the giving of the second angel's message in 1844, she was
not a figure of world prominence anymore.
But at the time described in our reference on page 606, all these
corruptions, which have been taking a firm hold in the churches
which constitute Babylon, are vigorously attacked and exposed,
proving beyond a doubt that we are here reading of events within the
early stages of the loud cry.
Now that this is clear in mind, we are ready to proceed with the
next event in the order of last day events as the struggle during the
loud cry develops to its final climax.
As we continue the study of this progression of events, our refer-
ence is still the paragraph on page 606 of The Great Controversy,
which, as has already been shown, describes the opening events of
the loud cry. Before reading further into this paragraph, there is an-
other point to be noticed and kept in mind as we proceed. It is, that
each of the events is dependent on the one before it taking place be-
fore it can transpire. A quick review of the opening events, so far de-
clared to us in this paragraph, will show the truth of this.
First of all, the time comes for the message to be given with
greatest power. That time having come, and not before, the Lord be-
gins to work with greatest power through humble instruments; quali-
fying them with the outpouring of His Spirit. The direct result of this,
which would be quite impossible otherwise, is that they are con-
strained to go forth and declare the words of warning which the Lord
will give them. Thus empowered and directed, they are enabled to lay
open the sins of Babylon, and in so doing, the next direct result is
that thousands upon thousands will listen in amazement, who have
never heard words like these; hearing that Babylon is the fallen
church because of the rejection of the light and the truth of heaven.
Thus, matters have really begun to develop, and our interest natu-
rally centers upon what is to happen next. Of this we are left in no
doubt as we read directly on:
"As the people go to their former teachers with the eager in-
quiry, Are these things so: the ministers present fables, prophesy
smooth things, to soothe their fears and quiet the awakened con-
246 LAST DAY EVENTS

science. But since many refuse to be satisfied with the mere author-
ity of men and demand a plain, Thus saith the Lord,' the popular
ministry, like the Pharisees of old, filled with anger as their authority
is questioned, will denounce the message as of Satan and stir up the
sin-loving multitudes to revile and persecute those who proclaim it."
Great Controversy, 607.
Notice again that each of the events in their succession in this
paragraph is the natural and inevitable consequence of the one be-
fore it.
But observe too, just what are the first measures which are to be
adopted against the people of God. Will it be bitter persecution on
the threat of death? At this stage, it will not be anything so drastic,
for the leaders of the apostate churches will not give much considera-
tion to the tiny remnant of the faithful. At that time, the people of
God will not be a great host, for the Laodicean message will have ef-
fected a great shaking in the Advent Church before the loud cry be-
gins, as is plainly shown in Early Writings, 269-271. History has al-
ways shown that only a tiny minority come out on the right side of
these tests, by which the church is shaken, and so it will be again. In
referring to the people of God at the time when the conflict opens,
the Spirit of Prophecy speaks of them as "the little company who are
standing in the light. . . this faithful few." Testimonies 5:209, 210.
When the Sunday law is first passed, it will not be directed pri-
marily against the people of God, for they will be so small a minority,
having absolutely neither voice nor influence in the affairs of men,
that the churches will regard them as not even worth any considera-
tion the one way or the other.
The Sunday law will be brought in because the churches, having
lost all of the power of God because of their rejection of the truth
sent to them from heaven, will have become powerless to solve the
vast problems which shall have swept over the world, bringing all
men to the brink of universal self-destruction. Seeing their own loss
of face and fearing their own destruction as a result of reactionary
forces caused by their own failure, they turn to the other source of
power—the power of the state—to save themselves and the world
from destruction. This will be their grand and glorious solution, the
final attempt on the part of faltering mankind to be the problem-
solvers in God's place.
The true people of God will understand from their prior educa-
tion in Sabbath rest principles, that any scheme designed by human
problem-solvers will not only be doomed to failure, but will only
worsen the already desperate situation. In deepest love for the
masses being led to destruction, they will warn of the fearful conse-
quences of deposing God as the Solver of all problems, and of re-
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 247

placing Him with mere humans. Powered and inspired by the Holy
Spirit in latter rain power, they will make a tremendous impact on
the scene. Quite suddenly, they, the people of the Lord, whom the
religious leaders had regarded as being inconsequential, will emerge
as highly influential.
The situation finds a parallel in the experience of the Pharisees
who thought that once they had put Christ to death, their troubles
would be over, so little significance did they give to the church of
Christ in that day. How soon they were to learn that the Apostles
were a mighty power to be reckoned with, as reflected in the Jewish
Leaders despairing and angry cry against the early apostles, "You
have filled Jerusalem with your doctrine." Acts 5:28.
So it will be, that when the churches of these last days secure the
power of the state to enforce their decrees, they will think that they
will have no more about which to be worried, but to their surprise
and amazement, they will find that a tiny and insignificant company
of people filled with a strange and wonderful power will arise to lay
bare the true nature of their scheming. Yet even when these people
of God first appear on the scene, the leaders will seriously underesti-
mate the power which is in them, and will think that they can easily
nullify their statements with arguments, whose only force will be the
power of their own authority. For some this will be enough, but oth-
ers will demand a plain, "Thus saith the Lord," which, of course,
these men cannot supply from a Word which condemns in every
phase and principle that which they are doing.
Then, when they find that argument is of none effect, and as they
see all that they have worked, schemed, and striven for threatened,
they will resort to that age-old weapon of the evil one—persecu-
tion—appealing to the credulous mob to attack the faithful messen-
gers of the Lord.
Thus it is plain and clear that the first measure used against the
people of God after the loud cry has begun will not be persecution,
but only argument, based upon the authority of men. Certainly this is
no great test for the people of God. To be able to meet successfully
the arguments of those who oppose the truth is not a painful experi-
ence, but rather a stimulating one, even after making due allowance
for the fact that there is a measure of sorrow in seeing otherwise in-
telligent and rational men take foolish and soul destroying stands
against the God of heaven Himself.
But predominantly, our thought and concern will not be for the
enemies of the truth but for the successful advancement of the truth
itself, and we shall feel at this time that things are going rather well,
as an intense interest takes hold of the people and many show that
they are not content with anything less than solid proof from the
248 LAST DAY EVENTS

word of God. It will be no great trial to belong to the movement at

this time, and most certainly this shows that the great final test will
still be beyond this point. We shall come to it in our study in due
course, and when we do, we shall recognize it for what it is and where
it is.
And, as surely as they have not yet faced the great final test, then
as surely the judgment of the living has not yet commenced at this
time, for this is "the great test for the people of God by which their
eternal destiny will be decided." SDA Bible Commentary 7:976.
That test must come to them, and be successfully passed by them be-
fore they can be judged as worthy of the second and final seal by
which they are rendered eternally secure from the tempter's devices.
Therefore, inasmuch as the great final test has not come upon them
here in the early stages of the loud cry after they have received the
infilling of the Holy Spirit in latter rain power, then they have not yet
been judged and sealed with the second and final seal. Therefore the
latter rain comes before, and not after, we have been judged. No
truth could be simpler or plainer than that.
Despite the efforts of the clergy to suppress the truth, the mes-
sage rapidly grows in power and influence. "As the controversy ex-
tends into new fields and the minds of the people are called to God's
down-trodden law, Satan is astir. The power attending the message
will only madden those who oppose it. The clergy will put forth al-
most super-human efforts to shut away the light, lest it should shine
upon their flocks. By every means at their command they will en-
deavor to suppress the discussion of these vital questions. The
church appeals to the strong arm of the civil power, and in this work,
papists and Protestants unite. As the movement for Sunday enforce-
ment becomes more bold and decided, the law will be invoked
against commandment-keepers. They will be threatened with fines
and imprisonments, and some will be offered positions of influence
and other reward and advantages as inducements to renounce their
faith. But their steadfast answer is, 'Show us from the word of God
our error'—the same plea that was made by Luther under similar cir-
cumstances. Those who are arraigned before the courts make a
strong vindication for the truth, and some who hear them are led to
take their stand to keep all the commandments of God. Thus light
will be brought before thousands who otherwise would know noth-
ing of these truths." Great Controversy, 607.
This paragraph reveals that we have come to the time when the
battle will be heating up toward full intensity, and more definite
measures will be taken by the church against the true people of God.
In studying this paragraph, care must be taken that we do not draw a
wrong conclusion from the statement: "As the movement for Sunday
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 249

The Sequence of Events as They

Transpire Under the Development of the
Loud Cry in the Power of the Latter Rain
The message of the third angel swells to the loud cry;
The image of the beast is set up;
The time comes for the message to go with greatest power,
which means the time has come for the loud cry to begin;
God calls His servants and fills them with His Spirit in
latter rain power;
He sends them forth to give earth's final warning;
The sins of Babylon are laid open, including the evils added
since 1844—Sunday laws, inroads of Spiritualism, and
advances of the papacy;
This is the repeating of the 2nd angel's message by the
Revelation 18 angel;
Thousands upon thousands are stirred;
They go to their ministers with eager enquiries;
These try to make light of the questions;
The people are not satisfied with this but demand Scriptural
answers;
The ministers become angry as their authority is questioned;
In retaliation they stir up persecution;
God's servants refuse to be silenced;
The controversy enters new fields and Satan is astir;
The Sunday laws are called in against God's people;
Some are fined, others are imprisoned, others still are offered
bribes or attractive positions;
They demand Scripture proof;
Fierce and terrible persecution develops;
The buy & sell decree is introduced;
Matters escalate toward a crisis of immense proportions;
As the storm approaches there will be a great shaking;
Multitudes will abandon their position and join with the enemy;
The faith of God's people will be tried to the limit;
Some declare that, if they had foreseen what it would cost
them, they would have kept silent;
As the climax of it all, the death decree is passed;
This is the great final test;
The judgment of the living follows immediately;
Then comes the sealing;
All this is followed by the time of Jacob's trouble and the great
time of trouble including the seven last plagues.
250 LAST DAY EVENTS

enforcement becomes more bold and decided, the law will be in-
voked against commandment-keepers." This could be understood to
mean that the Sunday law has not yet been passed at this stage, until
certain factors are considered.
In the first case, as we have seen before, the passing of the Sun-
day law sets up the image of the beast and accomplishes the com-
plete fall of Babylon the Great. The message of the loud cry angel an-
nounces that Babylon the Great is fallen, and is, therefore, a mes-
sage which cannot be sounded until the fact of it is accomplished. As
surely as this is so, the Sunday law has been passed before the loud
cry begins, and as surely as the loud cry is in progress, so surely has
the Sunday law been passed. Therefore, at the time referred to in the
statement under study at this point, the Sunday law has already been
passed for some time.
There is nothing in this statement to deny that. When the state-
ment is read carefully, it is seen that it does not say that the Sunday
law is passed at this time. It says that the movement for Sunday en-
forcement becomes more bold and decided, and as it does, the law is
invoked against commandment-keepers. The movement for Sunday
enforcement does not cease to exist when it has succeeded in having
the Sunday law passed, especially when all that has been gained at
that time is a general law. After the passing of the law, the movement
will remain very actively in the field to see that the law is enforced.
And as violations of it appear, they will plead for more teeth to be
put into that law to cover hitherto unforeseen possibilities and in-
fringements; as is the case with all human law-making. Having
gained their earlier demands, and as they are confronted with this
powerful protest from a minority group, the movement does indeed
become more bold and decided in its efforts to enforce the already
existing Sunday law. Hitherto the law was not directed against the
Sabbathkeeper, but rather at the irreligious who had no regard for
the worship of God at all; but now there is the need to direct it
against the commandment-keeper.
As the now bolder and more decided movers for Sunday enforce-
ment see this threat, they go to the civil power and succeed in having
them invoke the law against the Sabbath-keeper. Now the word "in-
voke" means very literally "to call in", and you cannot call in some-
thing which does not already exist. The law was not made primarily
as a direct weapon to be used against commandment-keepers, but
now that they have shown that they are powerfully and decidedly
against the Sunday law enforcement, the law is called in specifically
against them for the first time.
Now the people of God will find themselves in the courts of law
testifying for their faith. This is an effort on the part of the devil to
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 251

silence their witness, but because they refuse to be intimidated, they

instead give a powerful testimony for the truth, resulting in thou-
sands hearing the message who would otherwise never hear it, with
some of them deciding to stand for the commandments of God. Thus
instead of stopping the message, these means only serve to further
impel it forward.
Again we ask the question, Has the judgment of the living com-
menced by this time? To answer, we must ask the other question,
Has the great final test come to the people of God at this stage?
The fact is that they have not yet even come to the buy and sell
decree which is a still lesser test than the death decree, especially in
the context in which the death decree will be imposed upon the peo-
ple of the Lord. In fact, that which makes the death decree, as we
shall eventually see, so great a test is not so much the threat of death
in itself, but the implications and the circumstances under which it is
imposed. This we shall understand better when we come to it.
But for now we wish to study the evidence which shows that the
buy and sell decree is still something after the point of time we are
now studying. It says that they are threatened with fines and impris-
onment. The imposition of a fine, which means taking away a por-
tion of a person's money, would be unnecessary if he were under a
decree which forbad him to either buy or sell. Under those condi-
tions his money would be completely worthless to him, and there
would be no punishment in taking it away from him. In other words,
a buy and sell decree is a greater punishment than a fine or imprison-
ment, so at this stage the buy and sell decree is a future development
which will appear in due time.
It would be well to recall again at this point the statement which
reads: "Because they refuse to break His law in obedience to earthly
powers, they will be forbidden to buy or sell. It will finally be decreed
that they shall be put to death." Desire of Ages, 122. This state-
ment clearly shows that the pressure on the people of God mounts
progressively toward the ultimate decree of death. The world takes a
severe measure against them, which they expect will serve the pur-
pose of silencing them, but when this fails, they adopt a more severe
measure still and then others, even more severe, as they find them-
selves unable to silence the voice of reproof and warning.
By combining this statement with the information we have stud-
ied from The Great Controversy, we have the following order of
events revealed: The law is passed, but the people of God refuse to
honor it, for it would mean that they would have to dishonor God to
do so; more than this, in the mighty power of the Spirit, they protest
the law and show that it is fraught with disaster; the Sunday law
movement meets this first of all with argument; then with personal
[LDE17]
252 LAST DAY EVENTS

persecution; then with law suits; the threat of fines and imprison-
ment; and then, because they still refuse to break God's law in order
to obey the law of the land, they impose the buy and sell decree; and
when that, too, fails to silence them, they ultimately impose the
death decree, which, because of the terrible circumstances and situ-
ation involved, becomes the most severe and terrible anyone has
ever faced in human history, apart from what Jesus suffered upon
the cross. Others in the past have faced and stood the test of death
decrees but never any like this one.
From this time on the battle rages with a fierce and terrible inten-
sity. The enemies of God are fully aroused, and nothing is too cruel
or too desperate for them to use in their mad purpose of silencing
the dissenters. "Conscientious obedience to the Word of God will be
treated as rebellion. Blinded by Satan, the parent will exercise harsh-
ness and severity toward the believing child; the master or mistress
will oppress the commandment-keeping servant. Affection will be al-
ienated; children will be disinherited and driven from home. The
words of Paul will be literally fulfilled: 'All that will live godly in Christ
Jesus shall suffer persecution.' As the defenders of truth refuse to
honor the Sunday sabbath, some of them will be thrust into prison,
some will be exiled, and some will be treated as slaves. To human
wisdom all this now seems impossible; but as the restraining Spirit of
God shall be withdrawn from men, and they shall be under the con-
trol of Satan, who hates the divine precepts, there will be strange de-
velopments. The heart can be very cruel when God's fear and love
are removed." Great Controversy, 608.
This is the prospect for all those who in these last days will be
true to the Lord. God does not promise us a sweet and rosy path to
the kingdom, but rather one which is fraught with every kind of hard-
ship, peril, and persecution. It is a path which will require the great-
est faith, courage, and patience, which must be developed in the pre-
sent time if we are going to endure that day.
There will be universal hatred of God's people. When the loud
cry begins, it will be a glorious experience at first, for the message
will go with all-conquering power against the citadels of wrong. But
the devil will not be asleep, nor will he stand idly by as the messen-
gers of righteousness go forth with the truth. At this time the Spirit
of God has been still further withdrawn from the earth, with the re-
sult, that calamities and disasters are more frequent and more terri-
ble; as a result, the earth is being reduced to poverty and starvation.
"And then the great deceiver will persuade men that those who
serve God are causing these evils. The class that have provoked the
displeasure of Heaven will charge all their troubles upon those
whose obedience to God's commandments is a perpetual reproof to
THE LOUD CRY DEVELOPS 253

transgressors. It will be declared that men are offending God by the

violation of the Sunday-sabbath; that this sin has brought calamities
which will not cease until Sunday observance shall be strictly en-
forced: and that those who present the claims of the fourth com-
mandment, thus destroying reverence for Sunday, are troublers of
the people, preventing their restoration to divine favor and temporal
prosperity. Thus the accusation urged of old against the servant of
God will be repeated and upon grounds equally well established:
'And it came to pass, that when Ahab saw Elijah, that Ahab said unto
him, Art thou he that troubleth Israel? And he answered, I have not
troubled Israel; but thou and thy father's house, in that ye have for-
saken the commandments of the Lord, and thou hast followed
Balaam.' As the wrath of the people shall be excited by false charges,
they will pursue a course toward God's ambassadors very similar to
that which apostate Israel pursued toward Elijah." Great Contro-
versy, 590.
The fearful drought which reduced Israel of old to such dire physi-
cal straits was the direct result of the sins of the king and the people,
yet they blamed the trouble upon the very man who had given the
warning, which, if but heeded, would have saved them from all of
their troubles. So it will be again; the whole of the world will be
stirred in enmity against the Sabbath-keeper. The fearful straits to
which the world will be brought will be caused by the sin of the lead-
ers and the people. But they will blame all of their troubles on the
small group of God's people who will have been the very ones who
will be giving the warning, which, if but heeded, would save the
world from all of its troubles.
Never in human history this side of the flood have so many of the
world's population enjoyed such affluence, comfort, and plenty.
They are not accustomed to living in hardship, yet this is the very
generation which will be forced to feel the pinching hand of want
and need. Imagine the fury which will mount toward the people of
God whom they will erroneously imagine to be the cause of all their
troubles. Thus the storm clouds will gather, black and heavy for their
final bursting over the heads of the true children of God. Then will
the courage and faith of all be tested; then will come the final test;
then will come the time when "a large class who have professed faith
in the third angel's message," will "abandon their position and join
the ranks of the opposition."
Of this we shall study further in the next chapter.
Chapter 22

The Final
Shaking-
If there is one thing which should be clear in the study of the de-
velopment of the struggle between the forces of the God of hosts and
the powers of the kingdom of darkness during the loud cry period, it
is that the pressure upon the people of God mounts with increasing
severity as time passes. We have seen that the Sunday law is decreed
in the first case as a means of giving to the churches a power over the
people which they will have lost because of their own apostasy, and
as such will not have in mind the people of God, who at that time will
be so few in number and scattered in the world as to be deemed un-
worthy of consideration. But to the stunned surprise of the worldly
ministry, this unknown and unrecognized minority will appear in-
vested with the power of the Holy Spirit in no mean measure.
At first the opponents of truth will still seriously underestimate
this unforeseen development and will confidently imagine that it can
be met with argument. As this will prove to be of no use at all in the
case of every honest seeker for the truth, their enemies will be driven
to the use of persecution, and a more stringent enforcement of the
Sunday law. By this time, the true believer will find himself the object
of hatred and persecution on every hand, and the experience will be
an exceedingly unpleasant one indeed.
But, fearful as this time will be, it will still only be the gathering of
the fearful storm which will finally break with unbridled fury upon
the children of God. Then will come the great final test, a test of such
severity and magnitude as will discover each and every weak charac-
ter professing to be numbered in the Lord's army. Then, those who
have been in the ranks of Sabbath-keepers as foolish virgins and
tares among the wheat, as bad fish among the good, will be seen to
be what they are and will leave the ranks of the people of God to be-
come their most bitter persecutors, enemies, and opponents. In fact,
many of them will not even wait till the storm actually bursts upon
them, but seeing it approaching and reading the portents of it, they
will desert the ranks beforehand. This is made very clear as we read
THE FINAL SHAKING 255

right on from the last point studied in our reference from The Great
Controversy:
"As the storm approaches, a large class who have professed faith
in the third angel's message, but have not been sanctified through
obedience to the truth, abandon their position and join the ranks of
the opposition. By uniting with the world and partaking of its spirit,
they have come to view matters in nearly the same light; and when
the test is brought, they are prepared to choose the easy, popular
side. Men of talent and pleasing address, who once rejoiced in the
truth, employ their powers to deceive and mislead souls. They be-
come the most bitter enemies of their former brethren. When Sab-
bath-keepers are brought before the courts to answer for their faith,
these apostates are the most efficient agents of Satan to misrepre-
sent and accuse them, and by false reports and insinuations to stir up
the rulers against them." Great Controversy, 608.
It will be necessary to spend a little time and space in the study of
this paragraph before we move on, as several questions raised by it
need clarification. The picture here presented is that of a great shak-
ing among the people of God which takes place, not at the beginning
of the loud cry period, but when it is well advanced, at which time "a
large class who have professed faith in the third angel's message but
have not been sanctified through obedience to the truth, abandon
their position and join the ranks of the opposition.
This is to say that the loud cry church will not be a church free of
unsanctified elements until the very end of its career, when the gath-
ering storm of the great final test will separate the true from the mere
professor. This means that the foolish virgins are still co-mingled
with the wise, right down to the very end.
It is understood that this truth runs directly counter to the con-
cept held by so many as to the constitution of the loud cry church,
which many believe will be a church in which only the pure and the
holy will be found. It is reasoned that during the loud cry period, the
issues will be so clear-cut and the pressures against those who would
stand for the truth so great, that only the true and the genuine would
dare to stand for the truth at this time.
That such a concept is false is evident on two counts in particu-
lar. In the first case, the Word of God distinctly declares that the
wheat and the tares will be together during this period. The inspired
evidences for this have already been presented in the thirteenth
chapter of this series. We suggest that you go back and review it
carefully right now, before proceeding with this study.
In the meantime, here is another statement verifying that the
church of God during the loud cry period will be composed of co-
mingled wheat and tares:
256 LAST DAY EVENTS

"Unless those who can help in are aroused to a sense of

their duty, they will not recognize the work of God when the loud cry
of the third angel shall be heard. When light goes forth to lighten the
earth, instead of coming up to the help of the Lord, they will want to
bind about His work to meet their narrow ideas. Let me tell you that
the Lord will work in this last work in a manner very much out of the
common order of things, and in a way that will be contrary to any hu-
man planning. There will be those among us who will always want to
control the work of God, to dictate even what movements shall be
made when the work goes forward under the direction of the angel
who joins the third angel in the message to be given to the world.
God will use ways and means by which it will be seen that He is tak-
ing the reins in His own hands. The workers will be surprised by the
simple means that He will use to bring about and perfect His work of
righteousness." Testimonies to Ministers, 300.
It is not wise, but foolish virgins who always want to control and
dictate what moves shall be made in the church of God when the loud
cry is in progress. Both "grow together until the harvest; and the
harvest is the end of probationary time." Christ's Object Lessons,
72.
In the second case, the pressure against the people of God is not
so great at the beginning of the period as to keep out the foolish vir-
gins. In fact, the picture is, that the people of God will be a trium-
phant and successful band during the early stages and have the bet-
ter of the situation on every hand. Every effort of the authorities,
both ecclesiastical and civil, to silence them will be defeated. Promi-
nent men, among whom are statesmen and lawyers, take a full stand
for the message, and where great men accept the truth, others will
always blindly follow.
Thus, during the outpouring of the latter rain, the gospel net, as
it always does, will draw forth from the sea for the final separation,
both the good and the bad fish, who will enter into the hold of the
ship—the true church—until the final test accomplishes the work of
final separation. After all, the preaching of the message of the loud
cry is the preaching of the everlasting gospel, as it never will have
been preached before. It will be the dipping of the gospel net into the
sea of the world, and it will bring forth a greater harvest than the net
has ever enclosed before.
By the simple law of averages, there will be more bad fish drawn
forth too. It will be a period when things are really on the move with
tremendous agitation and excitement. This is the very thing which
attracts the foolish virgin, who likes to be where the action is and
seeks to get on the wagon when it is evidently going somewhere. But
when it appears to bog down and all seems lost, then they confess
THE FINAL SHAKING 257

themselves to have been deceived and flee back to the churches

again.
By all this, we are not to understand that the foolish virgins are to
actually receive a personal infilling of the Holy Spirit in latter rain
power along with the wise virgins. Such would not be possible, for
only those who have first been cleansed of the old nature and have
the life of the Spirit within, can, in turn, be used by the Spirit to pro-
claim a mighty message. In the paragraph we are studying, this class
who abandon their position are those who have professed the truth
but have not been sanctified by obedience to it.
This is the exact description of a foolish virgin: "The class repre-
sented by the foolish virgins are not hypocrites. They have a regard
for the truth, they have advocated the truth, they are attracted to
those who believe the truth; but they have not yielded themselves to
the Holy Spirit's working. They have not fallen upon the Rock,
Christ Jesus, and permitted their old natures to be broken up."
Christ's Object Lessons, 411.
So they certainly cannot receive and be filled with the Holy Spirit
in latter rain power. One would conclude, then, that it would be im-
possible for them to co-mingle with the wise, as they would be pain-
fully aware of the difference between them and those who really did
have the power of God. But is this really so? At that time, there will
be a power with the message itself, so that wherever it goes, it is
something to be reckoned with. They will be advocating that mes-
sage, and will be conscious of the power which goes with it. This,
they will interpret as being the power of the Spirit in them. As well,
they will be caught up in the excitement of the battle and will also
feel the enthusiasm of that, as if it were the power of the Spirit in
them. Thus they will go forward, thoroughly self deceived—as the
foolish virgins always have been—until the bursting of the final storm
reveals to them and to others, their sad lack of the oil in their lamps.
These are solemn facts, and it behooves every one of us to con-
sider his own experience in the truth in the light of them. If we are
believers in the message of living righteousness, then we are either
wise or foolish virgins. We cannot be classed as hypocrites. They are
the ones who profess to serve the Lord, but reject the messages He
sends to them at this critical hour. If we are believers in the message
for this time, then we are not hypocrites, and thus can only be either
a wise or a foolish virgin. Our eternal salvation depends upon our
knowing which we are. Therefore let us search our hearts and lives to
discover whether we do have the inward filling of the Holy Spirit—
which is the very life of Christ in the soul replacing the old evil life
which was there before. Then cultivate the new life with all the pow-
ers which the Lord has given; looking to Him to give the increase as
258 LAST DAY EVENTS

we do our part. Then, and then only, will we be able to stand when
the final test is brought to bear upon men. Make your calling and
election sure while there is still the time and the opportunity. Let no
price stand between you and the truth of God.
A second point to be considered in the study of the paragraph un-
der discussion right here is the two separations. There is described in
this paragraph a separation in which those who have not been sanc-
tified by the truth separate themselves from the faithful and walk
with them no more. Thus, a mighty shaking, or separation takes
place, after which the church is pure and clean of all unsanctified ele-
ments and the promise is fulfilled:
"Awake, awake! put on your strength, O Zion; put on your beau-
tiful garments, O Jerusalem, the holy city! For the uncircumcised and
the unclean shall no longer come to you." Isaiah 52:1.
No clear understanding of this shaking, its nature, and what it ac-
complishes can be obtained unless we realize the principle that there
are two shakings, each with its own distinctive characteristics, com-
ing at two entirely different points of time, and in every other respect
different from each other. This principle has been thoroughly dis-
cussed and clearly set forth in chapter thirteen of this series, and
once again we suggest a careful review of the facts therein pre-
sented. So that we can determine which of the two separations is be-
ing described here in the paragraph we are studying, we will first of
all briefly list the main differences which are as follows:
The first separation described as the dipping of the net into the
sea, is accomplished by the test of a message sent by God to the
Church and not by pressure and persecution. It is the second and fi-
nal separation which is accomplished by a test or trial and persecu-
tion. A study of the parable of the ten virgins makes this very clear. In
that parable the message goes forth and both the wise and the fool-
ish separate from the rest, who show no interest in going forth to
meet the Bridegroom. The wise and the foolish virgins then co-min-
gle in the Church, just as the good and the bad fish are together in
the ship which is a symbol also of the Church. Then comes the end,
when the mission of the gospel is completed and both the wise and
the foolish are tested. Then it is seen which of them has the inward
presence of the Spirit and can thus go in with the Bridegroom to the
marriage.
Thus while in both the cases of the parables of the fishes and the
virgins, the first separation separates the good and the bad from the
rest, the second separation separates the good from the bad, the
wise from the foolish.
As some confuse the separation described in Great Contro-
ersy, 608, with that in Early Writings, 269-271, we would do well
THE FINAL SHAKING 259

The Location of the Two Final Shakings

The Laodicean The Great
Message comes Storm
to the professed Bursts on
people of God the Wise
before the Loud and Foolish
Cry.
' THE GREAT
THE SHAKING FINAL The Death
RESULTS The message SHAKING Decree
goes forth with power /

The Shaking of The Shaking of Jacob's

E.W. 269-271 G.C. 608 Trouble

The Loud Cry Period

The first shaking caused by the bringing of the Laodicean

Message to the professed people of God before the loud cry
commences, must be clearly distinguished from the great,
final shaking which is caused by the bursting of the storm
which comes upon them as the result of giving the last
warning message.

to make the differences very plain. There must be no doubt in our

minds that these are not the same separations either in point of time
or in kind. In the first case the separation described in Early Writ-
ings takes place before the loud cry even begins, while the one de-
scribed in Great Controversy takes place when the loud cry has
about come to its conclusion. There should not be the least difficulty
in seeing this. Nothing is clearer in Early Writings than the fact that
that shaking comes before the loud cry begins while it is equally clear
that the one described in Great Controversy takes place later, dis-
tinctly separated in point of time from the other.
Equally clear is the fact that the shaking described in Early Writ-
ings is caused by the proclamation of a message while that described
in Great Controversy is caused by the bursting upon them of a furi-
ous storm of the bitterest possible persecution. That the first shaking
being discussed here is caused by the proclamation of a message is
made clear by these words: "I asked the meaning of the shaking I
had seen and was shown that it would be caused by the straight testi-
mony called forth by the counsel of the True Witness to the
260 LAST DAY EVENTS

Laodiceans. This will have its effect upon the heart of the receiver,
and will lead him to exalt the standard and to pour forth the straight
truth. Some will not bear this straight testimony. They will rise up
against it, and this is what will cause a shaking among God's peo-
ple." Early Writings, 270.
The true preaching of the Laodicean message is the preaching of
the everlasting gospel. Many have the idea that it is a message of de-
nunciation, so that when they rise up and declare in trumpet tones
the wrongs and departures of the Church from the truth, they are
therefore proclaiming the Laodicean message. This is a bad mistake
which has been made by all too many, for, what they have failed to
see is that the Laodicean message is something far more than de-
nunciation and exposure, and unless they are preaching what the
message really is, they are not preaching the message at all.
Clear proof of this lies in the fact that so many so-called reform-
ers have arisen proclaiming what they imagined to be the Laodicean
message but which was in fact nothing more than a tirade of denun-
ciation, and yet have caused no shaking at all, whereas the true
preaching of the true Laodicean message will cause a mighty shak-
ing among the people of God as some will not bear the straight truth
but will rise up against it.
Never in all of history has a message which consisted in denun-
ciation ever succeeded in creating a shaking and a true reformation.
In his book, Lessons from the Reformation, 102, (page 66, Destiny
Press edition), A. T. Jones points out that "the Reformation did not
and does not consist in exposure and denunciation of the iniquities
of the Roman Church." He acknowledges that that is there as an in-
cident, as an indispensable part of it, but it was not the message it-
self. "If," he argues, "exposure and denunciation of iniquities of
that church could have wrought reformation, then The Reformation
would have been in the world more than five hundred years before it
was."
There had been no want of men who saw the wrongs in the
Church, who feared the ultimate outworking of those evils, and who
were not afraid to raise their voices in protest and condemnation of
what they saw. "These Reformers" included popes, bishops,
priests, laymen, and princes who for five hundred years before the
reformation began, rose up one after the other and spoke forth their
mind on the wrongs they saw, but it is the solemn and clear fact of
history that not any one of them alone, or all of them together, ever
even began to work reformation in the Roman Church. But when
men arose with the living gospel and preached that, then the Refor-
mation had begun and with it the shaking and the separation which
must inevitably follow.
THE FINAL SHAKING 261

The principle involved is well stated in these words:

"Not until you feel that you could sacrifice your own self-dignity,
and even lay down your life in order to save an erring brother, have
you cast the beam out of your own eye so that you are prepared to
help your brother. Then you can approach him and touch his heart.
No one has ever been reclaimed from a wrong position by censure
and reproach; but many have thus been driven from Christ and led to
seal their hearts against conviction. A tender spirit, a gentle, winning
deportment, may save the erring and hide a multitude of sins. The
revelation of Christ in your own character will have a transforming
power upon all with whom you come in contact. Let Christ be daily
made manifest in you, and He will reveal through you the creative
energy of His word—a gentle, persuasive, yet mighty influence to re-
create other souls in the beauty of the Lord our God." Thoughts
from the Mount of Blessing, 128,129.
In just the same way, the preaching of the Laodicean message
will accomplish a work of decided reformation and a clear cut shak-
ing because it will be the preaching, not of denunciation of wrong
primarily, but of the everlasting gospel. The message itself clearly
tells us that. Look again to see what it really does say, and, in look-
ing, let us go past the verse which speaks about being wretched, and
miserable, and poor, and blind, and naked, to the one which says, "I
counsel you to buy from me gold refined in the fire, that you may be
rich; and white garments, that you may be clothed, that the shame of
your nakedness may not be revealed; and anoint your eyes with eye-
salve, that you may see." Revelation 3:18.
The gold is the faith and love which purifies the soul and implants
in it the character of Jesus Christ; the white raiment is the garment of
Christ's righteousness; and the eyesalve is spiritual discernment.
This is that which is offered by the gospel, and this is that which is
received by all who accept the gospel of Jesus Christ.
This is the 1888 message, which we are told presented the same
three gifts in just the same order. "It presented justification through
faith in the surety; it invited the people to receive the righteousness
of Christ, which is made manifest in obedience to all the command-
ments of God. Many had lost sight of Jesus. They needed to have
their eyes directed to His divine person, His merits, and His change-
less love for the human family." Testimonies to Ministers, 91, 92.
This statement proves, then, that the message of Christ and His
righteousness which was presented in 1888 and in the following five
years to the Advent people, was none other than the Laodicean mes-
sage, which in turn is the everlasting gospel, the living power of God
to save from all sinfulness and all sinning.
When it was presented then, many rose up against it and sue-
THE FINAL SHAKING 263

sage, he did return to the Advent people, who, exactly as prophesied

in Matthew 22, rejected their second call. But the dipping of the gos-
pel net by means of the preaching of the Laodicean message was not
without results, so that fish—good and bad—were gathered from the
sea. All this takes place before the loud cry begins.
Then, when it does begin to sound, those who have received the
light of truth take that selfsame message of the fourth angel in the
mighty power of the Spirit to the churches of the world with the re-
sult, that once again, the gospel net dips into the sea, bringing forth
the fish, good and bad.
Finally, there comes the closing scene when the great final test di-
vides the good from the bad. The lesson to be learned from this is,
that even though we have come out on the right side of every issue so
far, this is not the guarantee of final victory. That great final test is
still awaiting us.
The majority of those who will be shaken out at this time will be
those who have come in during the loud cry period. There will be
some as well, who will have joined the movement before the latter
rain begins to fall. Some of these are already with the movement.
They have done well so far, and are more likely than many others to
endure to the end. These are they who have successfully come
through on the right side in the first shaking, but this is no guarantee
they will emerge triumphantly from the great test which produces
the last all-purifying shaking.
While those who come out on the right side of the first shaking
must still pass the test which produces the second, those who fail the
first will have no part in the second. The parable of the fishing net
confirms that there is nothing more certain than that. The majority
of the Advent believers are shaken out when the Laodicean message
comes to them, and thus do not, and cannot figure again in a later
shaking.
Fearful indeed will that time be. Then everything which can be
shaken will be shaken, and only those who have the truth as a living
principle in the heart will be able to stand.
"Satan will work his miracles to deceive; he will set up his power
as supreme. The church may appear as about to fall, but it does not
fall. It remains, while the sinners in Zion will be sifted out—the chaff
separated from the precious wheat. This is a terrible ordeal, but nev-
ertheless it must take place. None but those who have been overcom-
ing by the blood of the Lamb and the word of their testimony will be
found with the loyal and true, without spot or stain of sin, without
guile in their mouths. We must be divested of our self-righteousness
and arrayed in the righteousness of Christ." Selected Messages
2:380.
264 LAST DAY EVENTS

"Now is the time for God's people to show themselves true to

principle. When the religion of Christ is most held in contempt, when
His law is most despised, then should our zeal be the warmest and
our courage and firmness the most unflinching. To stand in defense
of truth and righteousness when the majority forsake us, to fight the
battles of the Lord when champions are few—this will be our test. At
this time we must gather warmth from the coldness of others, cour-
age from their cowardice, and loyalty from their treason. The nation
will be on the side of the great rebel leader." Testimonies 5:136.
 Chapter 23

Tried to
the Uttermost
Having established in our study thus far that the shaking de-
scribed in The Great Controversy, 608, is the second and final shak-
ing, we are now prepared to study in more detail the nature of the
great final test which shall come upon the people of God, and which
test they must have before they can be sealed. Heretofore, we have
seen only that the great final test is the death decree, but now we are
to see that it is much more than facing death which makes it so great
a test. What will make it to be so terrible an experience will be the
peculiar setting and circumstances in which it is imposed upon the
believers.
We are all well aware of the fact that a certain test given to us un-
der one set of circumstances can be incredibly more trying and fear-
ful than the same test given under more favorable circumstances. So
we are now to learn, that not only are we to face the supreme test of a
death decree, but that it must be faced under the most difficult cir-
cumstances possible, so that the pressure and the dread of it will be
felt to the utmost. The martyrs faced the death sentence again and
again, but never in the setting in which the saints of the last days will
have to face it. Their test was great, it is true, but never to be com-
pared with the test to be faced by the faithful of the very last days.
The picture of this unfolds as we continue the reading and study
of our chapter from The Great Controversy. Let us read right on
from where we left off.
"In this time of persecution the faith of the Lord's servants will
be tried. They have faithfully given the warning, looking to God and
to His word alone. God's Spirit, moving upon their hearts, has con-
strained them to speak. Stimulated with holy zeal, and with the di-
vine impulse strong upon them, they entered upon the performance
of their duties without coldly calculating the consequences of speak-
ing to the people the word which the Lord had given them. They
have not consulted their temporal interests, nor sought to preserve
their reputation or their lives. Yet when the storm of opposition and
266 LAST DAY EVENTS

reproach bursts upon them, some overwhelmed with consternation,

will be ready to exclaim; 'Had we foreseen the consequences of our
words, we would have held our peace.' They are hedged in with diffi-
culties. Satan assails them with fierce temptations. The work which
they have undertaken seems far beyond their ability to accomplish.
They are threatened with destruction. The enthusiasm which ani-
mated them is gone; yet they cannot turn back. Then, feeling their
utter helplessness, they flee to the Mighty One for strength. They re-
member that the words which they have spoken were not theirs, but
His who bade them give the warning. God put the truth into their
hearts, and they could not forebear to proclaim it." Great Contro-
versy, 608, 609.
There are three sentences in this paragraph which make it plain
that it is describing how things will be right at the end of the loud cry
period. They are these: "They have faithfully given the warning . . .
They are threatened with destruction . . . The enthusiasm which ani-
mated them is gone."
The first of the three sentences reveals that the giving of the
warning is by this time a thing of the past. It does not say that they
"are giving" but that they "have given" the warning. The former
would be present tense, while the latter is past tense and is used to
describe that which has been done—in this case the final warning to
mankind. In harmony with this is the statement that they are threat-
ened with destruction. This reveals that the death decree now hangs
over their apparently defenceless heads. Knowing as we do that the
death decree comes as a result of the evidence presented in the
twelfth chapter of this series, we can know to what point of time the
sentence, "They are threatened with destruction", brings us. It
brings us to that point of time just before the close of probation when
the great final test is brought to bear against the people of God.
Some may reason that the buy and sell decree will threaten us
with destruction, and in a certain sense, this is true. More likely, it
threatens us with starvation, under which conditions a man can live
for quite a long time, especially if he is able to scratch some nourish-
ment from whatever he can pick up. The threat of destruction im-
plies a more immediate ending of one's life, such as would be under a
death decree.
The third sentence tells us that the "enthusiasm which animated
them is gone." This is a definite indication that the latter rain has
dried up. It cannot, and does not fall forever, either in nature or in
grace. Once its work is done, then it no longer is needed and it dries
up. It would be impossible for the people of God not to be animated
with enthusiasm while the Holy Spirit was still flooding through
them in latter rain power. Therefore the very fact that the "enthusi-
THE UTTERMOST 267

asm which animated them is gone", indicates that the time has been
reached when the last work which can be done by the Holy Spirit has
been accomplished, and the latter rain has dried up, leaving them
seemingly powerless and helpless.
This is not to say that the Holy Spirit has forsaken them. By no
means! His presence in them will be just as real and actual at that
time as ever before, but He will no longer be flowing through them;
not because of any fault or failure on their part, but because of the
fault and failure on the part of men in the world to receive the gra-
cious warning given them.
It is when the Spirit is flowing through us in power that we are
most conscious of it, and joyful in His presence; whereas He can be
in us without there being any physical consciousness or witness that
He is there.
There are three distinct phases of the work of the Spirit on our
behalf. The first is when He comes to us on the outside and convicts
of sin and uncleanness. This is a painful experience, and one of
which we are very much aware while it is happening. If the Spirit is
successful in bringing us to true repentance, then He is able to come
in and dwell in us, but mark this point with care, He can only dwell in
the person upon whom He has first successfully worked by bringing
him through personal conviction to true repentance. Now there fol-
lows quiet and peace where there had been turmoil and strife. For a
short time the Spirit leaves us to glory in this new-found life, and
then comes the schooling for the eternal home. Soon we find our-
selves in trials and hard places, and at times the Spirit seems to have
forsaken us, but we come to learn that this is only apparent and not
real, for He is as present in these difficult passages as ever He was in
the new birth experience.
All this is a preparation for service and for witnessing, which is
the third work of the Holy Spirit, as He who had worked so efficiently
on us, and then comes to dwell in us, now works through us to the
saving of others. This is the most joyful part of the experience in the
Holy Spirit—the time when we are most conscious of His presence.
But the Spirit will only work through us provided we maintain the
proper connection with Him while there is a field in which to work.
When the hearts of those within the sphere of our influence become
so hardened as to be settled in their rejection of the Spirit's ministry
through the believer, then the Spirit is withdrawn, not from the be-
liever, but from the rejecter. But in thus being withdrawn, it ceases to
flow as a current through the believer, to rest, instead, within him un-
til such time as there is a further opportunity for the Spirit to flow out
to a needy soul.
It is at this point that the faith of the believer is really tested. He
[LDE18J
THE UTTERMOST 269

has been experiencing the very real thrill of the working of the Spirit
through His life, but then quite suddenly this dries up. He is at once
tempted to think that the Spirit has forsaken him and begins to cast
around in his own life to see what he has done to grieve the heavenly
Guest. At the same time he is conscious of the pain, of the discour-
agement, and disappointment over the refusal of the souls for whom
he has been laboring; which is a real test of faith in the truth in itself,
because we know that every time a soul refuses the truth, it makes us
wonder if we have the truth after all.
Another thing which affects us is that the higher the pitch and the
greater the intensity of the previous experience under the working of
the Spirit's power, the greater the reaction when the termination of
that experience arrives. An excellent example of this is the experi-
ence of Elijah at the gates of Jezreel. All day he had battled the priests
of Baal at the altars on Mount Carmel. Empowered by the Holy Spirit,
he had stood ceaseless guard over the situation, never daring for a
moment to relax his vigilance. Then had come the triumph and the
vindication of the truth of God, the slaughter of the wicked priests of
Baal, the lonely intercession for the rain, the answer to his prayer,
and the heaven empowered run in the driving rain back to the gates of
Jezreel. Then suddenly it was all over. Physically and mentally ex-
hausted, he sank down into a deep sleep from which he was awak-
ened to hear the dread threat of Jezebel—the death sentence.
No longer was the Spirit flowing through him, for at that moment
there was nowhere for it to flow, and Elijah felt desperately alone and
forsaken, even though, in fact, he was anything but that. Yet, that
was all that he could see and feel, and seeing and feeling only that, he
turned and ran for his very life. The higher the peak of spiritual activ-
ity while the Spirit is flowing through us, the greater the sense of let-
down when that current ceases to flow when the work is done.
Thus it was with Elijah back then, and thus it will be with the peo-
ple of the Lord when the loud cry is finished. That which makes the
OPPOSITE PAGE: While the access to the channels is open, the water,
a symbol of the Holy Spirit, will flow freely, as it carries its life-giving,
life-sustaining ministry through the countryside, but let the access be
blocked, and the streams will cease to flow.
In the closing up of the final ministry of the Holy Spirit, the outpour-
ing of the latter rain, there will be an immense outflowing of the Holy
Spirit while the ways into the souls of men are still open. This will be a pe-
riod of wonderful inspiration for God's people until the last rejecter of
God's mercy has closed his heart against the light, and thus blocks off all
access to the channels. The latter rain will then have completely ceased to
flow thus giving the impression to the saints that they are the cause of this
sudden destitution. This will be a factor which will greatly increase the in-
credibly severe trial through which they will be passing.
270 LAST DAY EVENTS

illustration from the life of Elijah even more to the point, is that he is
the type of the very people who will give the loud cry. He battled the
Ahab and Jezebel of his day, who are the type of the great apostate
system of the last days, for exactly as Ahab and Jezebel were a com-
bination of church and state, united to enforce the worship of Baal in
defiance of the God of heaven, so will the Ahab and the Jezebel of
these last days be a union of church and state combined to enforce
the worship of Baal in defiance of the God of heaven.
Ordaining that type would meet antitype in the last days, the
Lord declares that the symbolic name of the people who will fight the
beast and his image will be the Elijah people, and just as the original
Elijah was translated without seeing death, so those who are the Eli-
jah people of these last days will pass from this earth to heaven with-
out seeing death. Just as the Elijah of that day experienced a day of
power and triumph in the battle with Ahab and Jezebel, so too, the
Elijah people of this day will experience a day of power and triumph
as they battle the Ahab and Jezebel of these last days. At the end of
that day came the anti-climax with the ceasing of the flow of God's
power through him at the very time when his physical energies were
exhausted, and so too will it be for the faithful in this last struggle. It
was at that point of time, when the threat of death would and did
have the greatest possible impact, that that woman, Jezebel, issued
her decree.
So, too, there will come the ending of the day of power for the
people of the Lord as the Holy Spirit ceases to flow through them,
and with that will come the experience of anti-climax and depletion.
It will be at that moment that the Jezebel of these last days, filled with
wrath beyond description, will level against them the decree of death.
Coming at that moment, it will have an impact which it could not oth-
erwise have had, and like Elijah, they shall long to flee away from it all.
Thus it is that we read in the paragraph we are considering:
"Yet when the storm of opposition and reproach bursts upon
them, some, overwhelmed with consternation, will be ready to ex-
claim, 'Had we foreseen the consequences of our words, we would
have held our peace.' " Great Controversy, 609.
Note that it says that "some" but not all, would feel over-
whelmed. This means that some will have a tougher battle to fight
because they have failed to learn how to develop living faith sufficient
to give them a better experience. Of them it is written:
"Those who exercise but little faith now, are in the greatest dan-
ger of falling under the power of satanic delusions and the decree to
compel the conscience. And even if they endure the test they will be
plunged into deeper distress and anguish in the time of trouble, be-
cause they have never made it a habit to trust in God. The lessons of
THE UTTERMOST 271

faith which they have neglected they will be forced to learn under a
terrible pressure of discouragement." Great Controversy, 622.
We are beginning to see that it is not just the death decree but the
setting in which it is suddenly thrust upon the people of God, as it
was upon Elijah of old, which makes the death decree far more of a
test for them than it was for the martyrs of old. And, if that is all that
there will be to it, it would be bad enough, but there is more yet.
The key to the understanding of more yet, is found in this same
paragraph where we read:
"The work which they have undertaken seems far beyond their
ability to accomplish.''
At first glance this would appear to be a contradiction to the
other information in the same paragraph, which indicates that at this
time the loud cry has ended and the work finished. The moment,
however, in which we remember that the people of God are not go-
ing to know when the work is actually finished, the contradiction dis-
appears. While it is true that in the cases of some, the rejection of
the message will be so clear and definite, that there remains no ques-
tion as to where they stand, yet in the cases of many others, it will
not be possible for the finite mind to determine whether for them the
work is done. Let us not forget too, that Satan, ever at work to de-
ceive, will make it appear that many on his side are truly converted,
appearing as if they need only the special truths for this time to make
them ready for eternity. To us in that day, it will truly seem that the
great work is but just begun, when, in fact, it has already come to its
end. God will know it is finished. The Holy Spirit and the angels will
know it is finished, but it will not be given to the saints of God to
know this.
Now the fact that the work seems far from finished, while at the
same time the power of the latter rain has dried up, will suggest to
them that the loud cry has failed of doing its work, the awful implica-
tions of which being that the last opportunity for gaining the total
and final victory over sin will be forever lost. This will be the fearful
witness of sight and circumstances in that hour—a witness which the
devil has always sought to exploit to the uttermost, as he did at the
Red Sea crossing for the children of Israel, and for Christ on the
Mount of Temptation. At that time, "to triumph" means to stand
upon the Word of God and refuse to believe the all too convincing
and very present witness of sight and circumstances, and so it will be
again in this last and closing conflict. It was by faith that the Israelites
crossed the Red Sea, and it was by faith that the Saviour overcame
on the mount with Satan, and it will be by faith, and by faith alone,
that the righteous will conquer in the closing scenes of the great final
struggle of the ages.
272 LAST DAY EVENTS

The true child of God will know, as he enters upon the closing
conflict, that the loud cry is a do-or-die affair. Like Queen Esther,
who is also a type of the people who face the great final test, we shall
go into this conflict with the words: "If we perish, we perish." The
possibility of it was neither distant nor inviting for her, and the same
will be true for us in the end. Enter upon this conflict we must, with
all of its terrible possibilities, but if we should fail, there never will be
another opportunity, either for us or for any other generation of
mankind.
We have the Word of God that it will not fail, for has He not said:
"For He will finish the work and cut it short in righteousness, be-
cause the Lord will make a short work on the earth." Romans 9:28.
But against that word is the awful witness of sight and circum-
stances; the most formidable of which is the memory that never in
history has Satan failed to bring to an early end every great revival
and reformation which the Lord instituted. Never has this been be-
cause of any failure or short-coming on the part of the Lord, but ever
and always because of the unwillingness of the children of God to fol-
low Him to the end and finish the work so well begun. Always they
have come short of the noble work; which coming short has given to
the devil the opportunity he seeks to turn the tide and kill the revival.
Had the will of the Lord been fulfilled, then the work would have
been finished long ere this, and the people of God would now be in a
world made new. Instead, we are still here in this wretched world of
darkness and death.
When Israel entered the land of Canaan long ago, it was the plan
of God that they should be a righteous people who would develop
and spread until the whole world was filled with the presence of the
Lord, and the devil driven out. They began so well, but they left little
pockets of evil here and there, which grew in power until they were
driven out instead. See Judges 1:27-36. In David, another day of op-
portunity was given them (Hebrews 4:7), but again they failed the
Lord. Again the devil succeeded in bringing the good work to none
effect. In Daniel 9:24-27, the Lord appointed them 490 years in
which to "finish the transgression, to make an end of sins, to make
reconciliation for iniquity, to bring in everlasting righteousness, to
seal up the vision and the prophecy, and to anoint the Most Holy.''
The making of an end of sins can only be accomplished when on
the one hand it has been forever brought to its end in the lives of the
people of God, and on the other, when all sin and sinners have been
destroyed. When such a work is done, then the defeat of the devil is
final and absolute, and the kingdom of God is forever established.
That it was God's plan that this should be accomplished for, and
through Israel within the compass of those 490 years, is clear from
THE UTTERMOST 273

the text before us, and that the devil succeeded in preventing that
which the Lord had planned is equally clear from the testimony of
history.
Then came the Apostolic Church. If ever there was a church in-
vested with the power to finish the work, it was that one. Led by men
who had personally walked and talked with the Saviour, and who had
witnessed His life and sacrifice, bound together by the cords of a
wonderful and heavenly love, filled with the Spirit and mighty in the
Scriptures, they seemed filled with the certainty of carrying the work
through to its completion. Neither were they unaware of the peril of
failure, for Paul reminded them of the generations which had gone
before in which the day of opportunity had passed, and then called
upon them in this earnest entreaty:
"Therefore, since a promise remains of entering His rest, let us
fear lest any of you seem to have come short of it." Hebrews 4:1.
Come short of it they did, so that once more the work of God
failed, and the devil triumphed.
But never could the devil wholly triumph, although the slender
thread of truth became so fine at times as to seem to disappear alto-
gether. But, living and unquenchable, it rose again, strong and vigor-
ous to make another effort to finish the work.
The fifth such effort began in 1831, only to result in the now fa-
miliar pattern of failure and defeat for the forces of the Lord. We are
familiar with the many statements which state that if the people of
the Lord had been faithful, then long ere this the work would have
been finished and we would have as surely been in the kingdom, but
it is not so. See Evangelism, 695, 696; Great Controversy, 458;
Desire of Ages, 633, 634.
Then came the sixth day of opportunity for entrance into the
promised land in the mighty message of righteousness by faith which
began to sound in 1888. Once again the stage was set for the speedy
finishing of the work, and once again:
"Satan succeeded in shutting away from our people, in a great
measure, the special power of the Holy Spirit that God longed to im-
part to them. The enemy prevented them from obtaining that effi-
ciency which might have been theirs in carrying the truth to the
world, as the apostles proclaimed it after the day of Pentecost." Se-
lected Messages 1:234, 235.
So it will be, that the enemy of souls will enter the final conflict
with a record of unbroken, though not complete success, behind
him. This will give him the courage to believe that he can succeed
again, only this time conclusively and permanently. He has the op-
portunity to do so as it is written:
"If he could blot them from the earth, his triumph would be com-
THE UTTERMOST 275

plete." Great Controversy, 618. In that case, he would gain that

which has always so narrowly eluded him.
And so it will be, that at the end of the loud cry period, every wit-
ness of sight and circumstances will loudly declare that he has done
so again. Satan will exult in this, and will press the picture upon the
saints in its hardest possible lines so as to break their faith in the
promises of God and thus effect their certain defeat. He will point to
the fact that the Spirit is no longer flowing through them, declaring
that this is certain evidence that God has forsaken them. He will tell
them that the work is anything but finished, and will argue that the
Spirit has left them because they have grieved away His presence.
He will point to the vast numbers on his side; he will display his
power in miracles and the wonders of apparent conversions; he will
declare that they are not even Christians, for by their wanton stub-
bornness they are causing the whole world to lie under the heavy
hand of calamity and destruction; he will point to the large numbers
who have just abandoned them and become their worst accusers; he
will play up the picture of their being forsaken of God and man; he
will lay before them the history of their past lives and will declare that
they are nothing but abject and absolute failures. His arguments will
appear neither foolish nor weightless, for every witness of sight and
circumstances will loudly declare that he is telling the truth and noth-
ing but the truth. Never could a situation appear more desperate nor
their effort to preserve the truth more futile. Ponder the picture of it.
Try to gain some concept of what it will be like, for no words and no
imagination can truly picture the fearful nature of that test and that
experience. None will ever know the full truth of it until they have ex-
perienced it.
It will be in that setting and at that time that the death decree will
be levelled against them as it was against Elijah. Then Satan will
press his final argument as death stares them in the face. "What is to
be gained by dying?" he will argue. "The martyrs of old died as con-
querors, for they knew their blood would be seed to raise many more
for the truth, but this is the hour of ultimate defeat for the truth of
God. All is lost and nothing is to be won by your death." In its hard-
est possible features and most desperate lines will the devil press the
situation on the faithful in that day.
Thus, by no means the death decree alone, but the death decree
in the setting of all of this, is as it can only be, the great final test
which all must have before they can, while living, receive the second
and final seal of the living God. Needless to say, only those will sur-
vive, who have learned to live by faith and faith alone; those who
have so committed themselves to the Lord that they will say, "God is
our God; and even if He has failed, then we shall fail with Him. We
276 LAST DAY EVENTS

would rather go down with Him in righteousness than to stand with

the devil in sin."
Thus the evil one and the righteous become locked in the last
desperate struggle. The ranks of God's people are finally purified,
they come to the judgment of the living where their sins are blotted
out, and they receive the seal of the living God.
It is indeed a sobering prospect for the people of the Lord who
can expect to live through this time. Not one of us will face and pass
that test successfully unless we are facing and passing the lesser tests
of today. The person today, who cannot overcome pride and selfish-
ness now, certainly will not stand then.
May the understanding of these coming events stir each reader to
a more consecrated work of soul cleansing and development, so that
we shall each be able to stand in that dark and desperate hour.
 Chapter 24

Joshua and
_ the Angel
Thus far in our study we have seen something of the fearful expe-
rience that the righteous will pass through as they come up to the
great, final test. We have seen that that which will make the death
decree so terrifying will be the setting in which it will be imposed
upon us. It will come charged with all the fury of the Jezebel of the
last days, when every witness of sight and circumstances will be
loudly proclaiming that the Lord has withdrawn Himself from us and
forsaken us to the will and malice of our arch foes. That in itself will
make it a test which would seem beyond the possibility of human en-
durance, but that, as we have seen, is not all, for the test will come
upon a people who will face, what every appearance declares to be,
the failure of their mission. We will have entered that last and finish-
ing conflict with the understanding that this is the final settlement
the one way or the other of the long standing controversy. For six
thousand years the contest has waged back and forth. There are
times in that history when the truth has gone forth conquering and
to conquer, and at other times the devil has been the one in the up-
per position.
Both powers have struggled to obtain a conclusion to the whole
matter, but neither has succeeded. If error could have blotted truth
from the world at any time, then the victory would have stood there,
but there has always been a thin line of survivors for God even when
things have been at their lowest. On the other hand, truth has never
gone right through to the final vanquishing of evil either. Thus the
contest has raged back and forth, but now in the end, the two con-
testants have entered the lists, each grimly knowing that this is it.
One or the other will emerge from this the supreme and final victor,
while the losing party will be vanquished forever. At first, when the
loud cry begins, every promise will be there that the righteous will be
on the victor's side, but as thousands desert the ranks, as the storm
approaches, leaving a tiny scattered remnant, and as the latter rain
dries up, every appearance will suggest that the work has failed, and
278 LAST DAY EVENTS

that, once again, evil is emerging as the final victor. This will impose
a tremendous pressure on the faithful to go over to what appears to
be the winning side. Never could things look darker or more hope-
less. Never could the death decree, which will be loaded with hate
and revenge, be imposed with more deadly effectiveness than at this
moment.
And yet, this is still not all that the people of the Lord will have to
endure at this time, for, in addition to all this, their names at this very
time come up in review in the judgment of the living. That would be
enough on its own to worry about without all the other, and we can
be very sure that the evil one will make the very most of the opportu-
nity to break the faith of the people of God. What the people of God
will have to pass through in this respect alone is made clear in the
parable of Joshua and the Angel, but before we study this, there are
certain evidences in the paragraph on page 609 of The Great Con-
troversy, which we are currently studying, that help to certify that
the judgment of the living does take place at this final point of time.
There are some who mistakenly teach that the great, final test
comes to the believer before he can receive the latter rain and give
the loud cry message. Such understand that the judgment of the liv-
ing commences before the loud cry does, and that those only who
have successfully passed that test have been judged as worthy of
eternal life in the judgment of the living, have received the blotting
out of sins, and have received the seal of the living God, can take
part in the giving of the final warning under the power of the latter
rain.
The paragraph before us gives further evidence to prove that this
is very much a mistaken and erroneous idea. Note the wording of it:
"In this time of persecution the faith of the Lord's servants will
be tried. They have faithfully given the warning, looking to God and
to His word alone. God's Spirit, moving upon their hearts, has con-
strained them to speak. Stimulated with holy zeal, and with the di-
vine impulse strong upon them, they entered upon the performance
of their duties without coldly calculating the consequences of speak-
ing to the people the word which the Lord had given them. They
have not consulted their temporal interests, nor sought to preserve
their reputation or their lives. Yet when the storm of opposition and
reproach bursts upon them, some, overwhelmed with consternation,
will be ready to exclaim: 'Had we foreseen the consequences of our
words, we would have held our peace.' " Great Controversy, 608,
609.
Does not this paragraph make it very clear that the storm of per-
secution which bursts upon them comes as a consequence of their
speaking forth the words of God in the power of the Spirit? See how
JOSHUA AND THE ANGEL 279

it states that they have given the warning; entering upon the work
without any real awareness of what the result is going to be. At the
beginning there was no special threat to their possessions or their
lives, because at that time none of these things figured in the picture.
But they went forth to declare the words of God, and, as surely, trig-
gered the reaction from those who hate the truth. Then, as the storm
bursts upon them, some will be ready to cry out that if they had but
known where all this would lead them, they would never have gone
forward.
Things have thus developed to the point where they are being
menaced and denounced on every side by those who were even their
former friends. Satan has enlisted the powers of the nations to pass
the death decree to ensure that they will be destroyed. They are but a
little company now who are left standing in the light. This is the pic-
ture of things as they will be, as a result of the giving of the loud cry
message.
And this is exactly the picture given to us of how things will be
when the experience of Joshua and the Angel begins, so far as the
peculiar application to the experience of the people of the Lord is
concerned in the closing up of the great day of atonement. Let us
read the evidence of this from Testimonies 5:472, 473:
"Zechariah's vision of Joshua and the Angel applies with pecu-
liar force to the experience of God's people in the closing up of the
great day of atonement. The remnant church will be brought into
great trial and distress. Those who keep the commandments of God
and the faith of Jesus will feel the ire of the dragon and his hosts. Sa-
tan numbers the world as his subjects, he has gained control of the
apostate churches; but here is a little company that are resisting his
supremacy. If he could blot them from the earth, his triumph would
be complete. As he influenced the heathen nations to destroy Israel,
so in the near future he will stir up the wicked powers of earth to de-
stroy the people of God. All will be required to render obedience to
human edicts in violation of the divine law. Those who will be true to
God and to duty will be menaced, denounced, and proscribed. They
will 'be betrayed both by parents, and brethren, and kinfolks, and
friends.' "
The closing up of the great day of atonement is the judgment of
the living. It is then that the remnant church is brought into great trial
and distress. This is the time when "Satan numbers the whole world
as his subjects", when "he has gained control of the apostate
churches." This is the time when all that stands between him and
complete triumph is this little company, which is very evidently made
up of the ones left after the great shaking occasioned by the bursting
of the storm of persecution described in The Great Controversy,
280 LAST DAY EVENTS

608, 609, which comes in consequence of the giving of the final

warning in the power of the latter rain. This is that time when he will
stir up the wicked powers of the earth to destroy the people of God,
which they will attempt to do by making a death decree against
them. This is that time when: ' 'Those who will be true to God and to
duty will be menaced, denounced, and proscribed. They will 'be be-
trayed both by parents, and brethren, and kinfolks, and friends.' "
Match the facts given in this statement with the information al-
ready studied in The Great Controversy, and no reasonable doubt is
left but that the judgment of the living comes at the end of the loud
cry period. Here is just one more evidence to add to the many others
which we have seen in the previous chapters of this series.
Some may wonder why we are going to such pains as to give so
accurate and comprehensive a picture of the terrible experience
through which the people of God are to pass. There is very good rea-
son for this. In the first case, just as the Jews expected the Messiah
to come and usher in for them a wonderful day of glory and military
supremacy in the world, so the commonly held concept of the com-
ing latter rain has been that of a glorious period of triumph, vindica-
tion, and spiritual supremacy in the church. But, while it is true that
the loud cry begins that way, there is the dreadful deterioration into
the situation pictured above, wherein the spiritual sinew and muscle
of the true children of God will be tested to the uttermost limits of
endurance.
By approaching the advent of the Messiah with their wholly erro-
neous concept of His appearing, the Jews suffered terrible, and in
most cases, eternal loss. In like manner, if we approach the final con-
flict with an erroneous concept of what it is going to be, we shall also
suffer great loss, which in many cases would serve to destroy the
faith which otherwise would stand. The very purpose of giving to us
the sure Word of prophecy, is to prepare us for what is coming, so
that when it happens, we are not in the least degree caught by
surprise.
Therefore if we understand that which we have been studying in
these chapters and remember them so that we enter the final conflict
expecting that this is what is to be, then when it comes, we shall not
be caught by surprise, but will be strengthened in the knowledge that
what is happening is exactly what the Lord had warned us would
happen. So let it be settled in our minds right from here on out, that
the future is going to be a very grim and terrible battle indeed, that
the pathway to the kingdom is not lined with roses, and that we shall
have to overcome by faith and dogged patience.
At the very time when the cup of woe will be already so well filled
for the faithful, they will be called upon to face the judgment of the
JOSHUA AND THE ANGEL 281

living. That this is not something which passes off automatically and
distantly in the courts of heaven without involving them emotionally,
spiritually, and therefore, physically, is made plain, both by the type
of the experience of the children of Israel as they came up to the
great day of atonement, and by the illustration given in the experi-
ence of Joshua and the Angel. To understand this, we need to briefly
summarize the nature of the work in the sanctuary, both in the daily
and in the final service.
Sin, as we have learned from the studies on living righteously, is
not so much "what we do" as "what we are"—the dispositions and
nature resident within the individual. This is the root of the trouble,
and there can never be good fruit in the life unless there is first of all a
new root and a new tree. The whole purpose of the sanctuary serv-
ice is to take this sin out of us, and dispose of it forever, so that we
shall know it no more. The first stage of this work is the removing of
the sin from the individual and placing it in the holy place of the heav-
enly sanctuary where it remains; pending the final disposition onto
the scapegoat at the end of the time of human probation.
It is right here that the first application of the parable of Joshua
and the Angel is made. The picture as outlined in Zechariah 3:1-5:
"Then he showed me Joshua the high priest standing before the An-
gel of the Lord, and Satan standing at his right hand to oppose him.
"And the Lord said to Satan, The Lord rebuke you, Satan! The
Lord who has chosen Jerusalem rebuke you! Is this not a brand
plucked from the fire?'
"Now Joshua was clothed with filthy garments, and was standing
before the Angel.
"Then he answered and spoke to those who stood before him,
saying, Take away the filthy garments from him.' And to him he
said, 'See, I have removed your iniquity from you, and I will clothe
you with rich robes.'
"And I said, 'Let them put a clean turban on his head.' So they
put a clean turban on his head, and they put the clothes on him. And
the Angel of the Lord stood by.''
Joshua is a symbol of the people of God. As the high priest is the
representative of that people, the filthy garments which he wears
represents our defective characters, which is our iniquity. Joshua's
standing before the Angel of the Lord—who is Jesus the Saviour and
heavenly High Priest—all clad in filthy garments is a picture of the re-
pentant sinner standing before Christ with all his iniquity, pleading
for pardon and cleansing. But as he does so, the enemy is there to
discourage him from doing this, so that he will not reap the promised
blessing.
In order for us to receive the blessing of forgiveness, we must un-
282 LAST DAY EVENTS

derstand our own personal need. We must be able to see that our real
problem is not what we are doing but what we are. Next, we must
know that, not only has Jesus promised to take this very thing away
from us, but He has all the power and the willingness to do so. Be-
lieving that He will do this, we must come and we must ask and re-
ceive. If we do not do our part, then the Saviour can never do His.
Satan knows this, and so he works very hard to keep the sin in us, for
he knows that if he can succeed here, then there is neither fear nor
danger that the sin will ever come upon him in the end. So he works
to make our sin appear so bad that we would be led to fear that it is
too much for the Saviour to ever forgive. Knowing that if he can
break our faith in the power of the High Priest to cleanse and forgive,
then the Lord can do nothing for us. It must be remembered at all
times that, when considered as an illustration of the daily services,
the Joshua and the Angel experience is a picture of the transfer of sin
from the individual to the sanctuary.
But Joshua is shown as one who does come to the sanctuary, and
for him the encouraging word is spoken:
"Take away the filthy garments from him and clothe him with a
change of raiment.
Now it must be obvious that if the garments are taken away from
him, then he does not have them any more. Instead, he now has the
spotless garments of Christ's righteousness in the place of the old
filthy garments, which are now in the sanctuary above.
Thus Satan has lost the first round of the battle but not yet the fi-
nal round. Those sins are not yet on him, and while it is true that
they are one step nearer to him, the final court case has not yet taken
place, and he can and will present himself at that grand and final as-
size to defend himself and plead his cause. In that day he will not be
in the least concerned about any person who is still wearing his own
filthy garments, no matter how zealous that person may be over mat-
ters of religion nor how high and wonderful his profession. Satan

OPPOSITE PAGE: The role of the sanctuary in the immediate and ulti-
mate disposal of sin, is so essential to our eternal welfare, that every can-
didate for eternal life must give the most careful and prayerful considera-
tion to this subject until it is thoroughly understood by him. Each must
know for himself that the daily services serve only to remove the sin from
the person of the sinner and store it in the sanctuary. That is the applica-
tion of the parable of Joshua and the Angel to the daily services.
But we must also be aware of the critical need to remove the sin from
the sanctuary, and to send it away on the scapegoat. This is the applica-
tion of the parable to the final atonement.
Only when our iniquity has been firmly loaded on the scapegoat by
way of the sanctuary, and sent away beyond any possibility of ever return-
ing to us again, are we rendered secure.
284 LAST DAY EVENTS

knows that every such person is secure in his power and that that in-
dividual's sins will never come onto him.
But he will be fearfully concerned over every individual whose
filthy garments are in the sanctuary, for he is in very imminent dan-
ger of their coming right onto him for eternity.
The situation which faces the faithful people of God at the end of
the loud cry period, right along with all their other troubles and prob-
lems at that time, is that they have an accumulation of sin in the
sanctuary, which, unless they do their part in that grim and desper-
ate hour, will come right back onto their own heads again with eter-
nally fatal consequences. To fail now is to fail forever and to lose eter-
nal life. They have a very vital part to play; the nature of which is il-
lustrated in the service of the great day of atonement in the ancient
sanctuary service. Then the people had to gather around that build-
ing, understand what the high priest was doing, afflict their souls by
thorough heart searching, and follow the priest by faith as he went in
before the Lord.
So it will be in the last days that the people of God will have to
understand exactly what their own personal need will be at that time.
They will have to understand that the accumulation of all the sin
which they have sent beforehand into the sanctuary must now be fi-
nally and fully atoned for by the sprinkling of the blood for them on
the mercy seat, by virtue of which it can and will be taken out and
placed upon the head of the scapegoat. They will know that this is
something they cannot do for themselves in any sense or degree
whatsoever. There is only One Person who can do this for them, and
that is Jesus, the High Priest of the heavenly sanctuary. They must
believe that He can and will do this, and believing that, they must
come and actually and specifically commit this work into His charge.
Everything will depend upon their maintaining a steadfast faith in
that hour; an hour when to maintain faith will be the toughest assign-
ment ever given to mortals.
Satan knows this, and with desperate and ruthless cunning, he
will muster every weapon in his armory in order to break their faith
in the promises of God. Already we have seen that he will mightily
use the witness of sight and circumstances in an effort to convince
them that the work of God is a complete failure, and that nothing is
to be gained by dying under these conditions and circumstances. He
will point to the evidences which suggest that they have been for-
saken by both God and man, he will point to the power which is still
with him, to the vast numbers—including a multitude of their recent
associates who are now numbered as his followers—and will cun-
ningly suggest the "wisdom" of following the multitude to safety.
By all this, he hopes to reduce them to a state of weakness and
JOSHUA AND THE ANGEL 285

uncertainty before striking with his final weapon. This is the soften-
ing-up barrage as used in warfare before the main assault. Having re-
ally put them through this gruelling process, he will then come at
them as the chief prosecutor in the judgment scene, and as they,
with anxious hearts, turn their eyes toward the final work of their
great High Priest in the sanctuary above, he will present before them
the picture of their sinful past in such an evil light as to guarantee
that they are much too sinful to ever be forgiven by Jesus, the spot-
less and pure One.
"The tempter stands by to accuse them, as he stood by to resist
Joshua. He points to their filthy garments, their defective charac-
ters. He presents their weakness and folly, their sins of ingratitude,
their unlikeness to Christ, which has dishonored their Redeemer. He
endeavors to affright the soul with the thought that their case is
hopeless, that the stain of their defilement will never be washed
away. He hopes to so destroy their faith that they will yield to his
temptations, turn from their allegiance to God, and receive the mark
of the beast." Testimonies 5:473.
Thus the faithful will be assailed with all the power, pressure, and
cunning which the devil can gather, and it will be no mild experience
to have to pass through. Look back into your own past experience,
and remember how hard it was to believe when the witness of sight
and circumstances gathered the dark clouds around us. Then think
forward to that far greater test and see, that if it was hard to believe
when those few dark clouds were there, what is it going to be like
when that final storm gathers, of which we have but the faintest con-
cepts at the moment?
Small wonder, then, that this is described as the great, final test.
The final test is the one designed to bring out any weaknesses, which
previous tests have not been able to find, and it is also final, because
there is no other test which can be devised to follow it. So likewise,
Satan will have exhausted his resources in this final test, and there
will be nothing further which he can bring against them after this but
that he has already let them have it by this time.
For the very reason that the great, final test is designed to reveal
any weaknesses not previously found under the lesser tests, so the
Lord could not and will not give the seal to any until they have passed
that test. Some will endure the persecution in the early stages of the
loud cry period, and then fall off when the buy and sell decree is
passed. Others will pass both of those tests, but when the great, final
test comes, will fail then. As Satan says: "when death shall be made
the penalty of violating our sabbath, then many who are now ranked
with commandment keepers will come over to our side." "He knows
what truth is." Testimonies to Ministers, 473, 409, and as he is
286 LAST DAY EVENTS

speaking to his angels here of what he knows will be, we can see that
there will be those who will successfully endure the lesser tests but
will fail in the great, final test. Therefore, how could the Lord give
the seal of final certification to the people while there is still the pos-
sibility of their failing Him in the crisis hour? The answer is, that He
obviously could not. This makes it very plain that those who teach
that the judgment of the living and the placing of the final seal comes
before the latter rain, have only the faintest ideas of what constitutes
the great, final test, when it will come, and what it will mean to the
people of the Lord.
Understandably, then, there will be a great shaking in that day, a
shaking which will take out every soul who has failed to make the
most earnest and diligent preparation for the event. But in that hour
there will be a remnant who will stand, who will endure, and who will
be true to God no matter what the implications might appear to be.
They will be a people who in this life have learned not to be terrified
by the witness of sight and circumstances; a people who have
learned to live by faith in every experience of life; who know their Re-
deemer; and who know that He lives for them in the sanctuary
above. They will be a people who have it forever settled in their
minds that they are on the side of the Lord, and will let nothing
swerve them from that allegiance. They will be a people who in these
days of probation have gained the victory over the claims of appetite,
the love of dress and display, the pleasures of sin, and over all the fol-
lies of the world. They will be men and women of great strength and
character. They will be the one hundred and forty-four thousand
who will never see death, and who will follow the Lamb wherever He
goes throughout all eternity. They will be men and women wondered
at.
But that character, that kind of faith, and that endurance is not
won in a day. It is the result of a lifetime of consecrated and thorough
preparation. It is the result of gaining the little victories day by day. It
is the result of living victoriously over every sin and every besetment
as it assails us in the present walk of life; for you can be assured that
if you do not have the victory over every sin today, then you certainly
will not stand then. Therefore, while it is still called today; while the
angels in heavenly mercy and patience hold back the four winds of
strife; while there is still, as it were, a fragment of time, let us make
our calling and election sure in and through the mighty power of the
gospel of Jesus Christ. The Lord will bless and help everyone who
will really get down and do this as the first and the most important
matter in his whole life.
 Chapter 25

The Duration
of Jacob's Trouble
During the past several chapters of this series, we have been
studying that part of the chapter in The Great Controversy entitled,
"The Final Warning", wherein we saw traced from the opening of
the loud cry to its end the development of that final call to men upon
this earth. Having brought us to the point where the work is ended
and the people of God are forced to flee to the Mighty One for
strength as the devil presses upon them with all his power and cun-
ning and with all the power of evil men, we are brought also to the
end of a section in the chapter. The remainder is devoted to giving
general descriptions and facts about the final warning which will be
given in the power of the latter rain.
Now we are interested to learn those events and conditions
which shall follow the situation that will have developed as the latter
rain comes to its end with the finishing of the mission of the gospel.
We have seen that the evil one and the people of the Lord are locked
in a titanic struggle at this time. Satan will be working with all his
might and skill to break the faith of the people of God, especially as
they stand in the judgment of the living, while they, on the other
hand, will be determined to hang on and gain the victory. The time
of the judgment of the living having commenced in heaven, the
books of record will be opened, so that from the accounts contained
therein, a determination can be made as to the disposition of the sins
which stand in the sanctuary—those filthy garments which have pre-
viously been removed from the repentant ones and placed there on
their behalf until this very time.
As the true and the faithful upon the earth successfully endure
the great final test, because they have been cleansed from all sin and
unrighteousness, as has been confirmed by the records in heaven,
and as they plead for the Saviour, as their High Priest and Repre-
sentative before the Father in the judgment, to blot out their sins, Je-
sus steps to the mercy seat and confesses their sins as He sprinkles
His blood thereon. By virtue of this confession on His part in the
288 LAST DAY EVENTS

most holy place, all the sins which He has confessed therein, ever
since He entered that apartment in 1844, first for the righteous
dead, and at last for the righteous living, will be taken out of the sanc-
tuary and placed upon the scapegoat—Satan—when Christ reaches
this earth. Of this we shall learn later when we come to that point of
time in our study.
Then, at the time when Jesus makes that final confession over
the mercy seat, human probation is closed, and mercy no longer
pleads for the human family. Then will be uttered those awfully sol-
emn words: "He who is unjust, let him be unjust still; he who is filthy,
let him be filthy still; he who is righteous, let him be righteous still; he
who is holy, let him be holy still.
"And behold, I am coming quickly, and My reward is with Me, to
give to every one according to his work." Revelation 22:11, 12.
"At that time Michael shall stand up, the great prince who stands
watch over the sons of your people; and there shall be a time of
trouble, such as never was since there was a nation, even to that
time. And at that time your people shall be delivered, every one who
is found written in the book." Daniel 12:1.
The closing of human probation is the beginning of the great
time of trouble and of the time of Jacob's trouble. While these two
times of trouble have a common beginning in time and run concur-
rently for quite a period, one extends beyond the other, and the two
are not the same. The great time of trouble is that which the wicked
experience, while the time of Jacob's trouble is that which the right-
eous alone pass through. The former reaches right down to the ac-
tual second advent of Jesus, while the latter will terminate before
that when the voice of God delivers His people from the wrath of
their enemies. This we shall see more clearly as we proceed.
Before studying the events of these periods in their sequence, we
would do well to clarify the question as to the duration of this time of
trouble. It has generally been held in the past that the time of trouble
will occupy a whole year, from the close of human probation to the
second advent of Jesus in the clouds of heaven. This concept was
based upon a certain understanding of Revelation 18:8, which reads
as follows:
"Therefore her plagues will come in one day—death and mourn-
ing and famine. And she will be utterly burned with fire, for strong is
the Lord God who judges her.''
Knowing as we do the well established principle that a day in
prophecy is symbolic of a actual year, then it is all too easy to quickly
arrive at the conclusion that this means that the seven last plagues
will be one year in falling. But such a conclusion can only be held by
overlooking several important facts. In the first case, there are three
DURATION OF JACOB'S TROUBLE 289

other verses in the same chapter which state that they will come "in
one hour" (See verses 10, 17, and 19). Now one hour is just as much
a time symbol as one day, which means that we seem to have a con-
flicting witness in this chapter. One could take the weight of evi-
dence and conclude that there are three texts which state that they
will come in one hour, to the one which states that they will come in
one day, and, therefore, conclude that the plagues will occupy one
twenty-fourth part of a year, which is just about fifteen days, more or
less.
However, to take this position cannot be satisfactory while there
is that text which distinctly says one day. The only remaining posi-
tion to take is that the year-day principle is invalid at the time spoken
of in this chapter, and this is the correct position to take. It is correct,
because we have been distinctly told that after the close of the two
thousand three hundred day prophecy, prophetic time had ceased.
The infallible word of the mighty Angel, who is no less a Person
than Christ Himself (SDA Bible Commentary 7:971), has declared
that: "There should be time no longer." Revelation 10:6. K.J,V.
As this was spoken at the time of the bitter-sweet experience, we
know that it applies to the termination of the great two thousand
three hundred year prophecy, which ended in October 22, 1844. In
commenting on this statement, the spirit of Prophecy has this to say:
"This time, which the angel declares with a solemn oath, is not
the end of this world's history, neither of probationary time, but of
prophetic time, which should precede the advent of our Lord. That
is, the people will not have another message upon definite time. Af-
ter this period of time, reaching from 1842 to 1844, there can be no
definite tracing of the prophetic time. The longest reckoning reaches
to the autumn of 1844." SDA Bible Commentary 7:971.
By this clear declaration, we can know that after 1844 the year-
day principle of interpretation no longer applies, so we are not to un-
derstand that either the use of the word "day" or "hour" in Revela-
tion 18, is intended to reveal to the Bible student the exact length of
time in which the plagues will fall. Rather, the idea which is being
conveyed is that it will all come suddenly and in a very short period
of time. In actual fact, we have no real indication of how long the
time of trouble will extend, beyond certain evidences which suggest
it will be very much less than a year in duration.
In the first case, we have so clearly seen in our past study that the
death decree will have already been passed before the great time of
trouble actually begins, and that the day set for its execution will fall
during this time of trouble. This fact should tell us that the time of
trouble would have to be much less than a year. In respect to this we
must remember that the fearful calamities and disasters which deso-
290 LAST DAY EVENTS

late the world during the seven last plagues do not fall upon a world,
enjoying, at the time of the beginning of this period, a glorious and
sunny prosperity. This will be far from the case, for as the world pro-
gressively stiffens its resistance to the truth, the devil has greater and
greater control over the elements, so that calamities and disasters in-
crease and spread even before the loud cry begins. One has but to
look out today on the world scene to know that things in this field are
growing worse and worse, and will continue to do so as the rejection
of the truth of God increases:
"While appearing to the children of men as a great physician
who can heal all their maladies, he will bring disease and disaster, un-
til populous cities are reduced to ruin and desolation. Even now he is
at work. In accidents and calamities by sea and by land, in great con-
flagrations, in fierce tornadoes and terrific hailstorms, in tempests,
flood, cyclones, tidal waves, and earthquakes, in every place and in
a thousand forms, Satan is exercising his power. He sweeps away the
ripening harvest, and famine and distress follow. He imparts to the
air a deadly taint, and thousands perish by the pestilence. These visi-
tations are to become more and more frequent and disastrous. De-
struction will be upon both man and beast. 'The earth mourneth and
fadeth away,' 'the haughty people . . . do languish. The earth also
shall be defiled under the inhabitants thereof; because they have
transgressed the laws, changed the ordinance, broken the everlast-
ing covenant.' " Great Controversy, 589, 590.
If problems are worsening now, what will it be like in the earth as
the loud cry progresses? Under the flood-tide of that light, the rejec-
tion of the truth will become more and more defiant until the close of
probation when it will be absolute, and Satan will have full control of
the finally impenitent and of the elements of nature. Therefore, dur-
ing the loud cry period we can know that disasters and calamities will
very rapidly increase until the world is in a very sorry state, even be-
fore the seven last plagues are poured out.
Some question why it is that Satan brings destruction upon his
own subjects and kingdom when it would appear that he would do
better to make a happier and cleaner world in which men could live.
But Satan is not concerned so much with making a better world for
anyone as he is in saving his own skin. The only way he can do this
now is to prove that God is wrong. To do this, he must prevent God
from doing what He said He would do: "finish the work and cut it
short in righteousness." Romans 9:28. Already Satan has suc-
ceeded in greatly extending his own life-span by preventing the fin-
ishing of the work in the past, and if he could finally destroy the work
of God out of the earth, then he would succeed in proving God
wrong; that God could not keep His word, that the power of sin was
DURATION OF JACOB'S TROUBLE 291

so great that it was impossible for created beings to be victorious

over its power, and that God was demanding too much in expecting
created beings to obey His law. Should he succeed in doing this, then
he would take away the power of God to punish him with eternal de-
struction, and would win the fight for reinstatement into heaven on
his own terms.
As a means to this end, there is a calculated purpose in his de-
structive activity in the world which brings him a twofold dividend. In
the first case, he causes men to charge God with his work, thus lead-
ing them to hate God and join him in his fearful rebellion against the
Creator who destroys no one. In the second case "the great deceiver
will persuade men that those who serve God are causing these evils.
The class that have provoked the displeasure of Heaven will charge
all their troubles upon those whose obedience to God's command-
ments is a perpetual reproof to transgressors." Great Controversy,
590.
Thus the devil is able to provide himself with an instrument with
which he can accomplish his long cherished ambition of destroying
the people of God, for "if he could blot them from the earth, his tri-
umph would be complete." Testimonies 5:473.
This is the awful truth. All the devil has to do is to prevent the for-
mation of the one hundred and forty four thousand by slaying all
those who would be numbered among them, and he has won the
great controversy and will have proved his point. He does not even
have to wait till then, for if he could destroy every faithful child of
God today, then his triumph right now would be complete. But let us
praise the God of heaven that "The angel of the Lord encamps all
around those who fear Him, and delivers them." Psalm 34:7, and
will do so until the very end.
"As the Sabbath has become the special point of controversy
throughout Christendom, and religious and secular authorities have
combined to enforce the observance of the Sunday, the persistent re-
fusal of a small minority to yield to the popular demand will make
them objects of universal execration. It will be urged that the few
who stand in opposition to an institution of the church and a law of
the state ought not to be tolerated; that it is better for them to suffer
than for whole nations to be thrown into confusion and lawlessness.
The same argument eighteen hundred years ago was brought against
Christ by the 'rulers of the people.' 'It is expedient for us,' said the
wily Caiaphas, 'that one man should die for the people, and that the
whole nation perish not.' John 11:50. This argument will appear
conclusive; and a decree will finally be issued against those who hal-
low the Sabbath of the fourth commandment, denouncing them as
292 LAST DAY EVENTS

deserving of the severest punishment and giving the people liberty,

after a certain time, to put them to death. . . .
"The people of God will then be plunged into those scenes of af-
fliction and distress described by the prophet as the time of Jacob's
trouble." Great Controversy, 615, 616.
Already through the world news services, we have witnessed the
wrath of the people and what that can do when street rioting breaks
out unrestrained, but how much worse it will be when the wrath of
the people will be stirred to fever pitch when they have been de-
prived of homes, lands, loved ones, health, food, and the comforts
of life by, as they imagine, a stubborn minority who refuse to bow to
the will of the majority, the church, and the state. What will these
frenzied exhibitions of rage be like when the whole world is united in
their hatred against a class so small that it would seem but the work
of a moment to blot them out of existence.
They cannot do this while probation still lingers, because the
four angels are still holding back the four winds of strife: "While Je-
sus had been standing between God and guilty man, a restraint was
upon the people; but when He stepped out from between man and
the Father, the restraint was removed and Satan had entire control of
the finally impenitent." Early Writing, 280.
This is to say, that from that moment when probation closes, the
devil has unrestricted and unconstrained control of the masses of
mankind who have rejected the truth of God. Therefore he can do
just as he pleases with them. Inasmuch as they share his hatred of
the true and the faithful, he and they are joined in a common, des-
perate, and consuming anxiety to rid the earth of this pestilential mi-
nority. Is it reasonable to conclude, in the light of all these facts, that
he and they are going to wait for almost a whole year before they
carry out the plan to execute the death decree? Why, of course not!
Both the devil and his followers will seek to have this done as soon as
it is possible to have it done.
At the same time, Satan does not want to make any mistake
about it. He knows that to be too hasty would spoil the opportunity
too, so he plans the whole scheme with the most careful and thor-
ough finesse, so that not one of the righteous will be left to perpetu-
ate the truth of God and guarantee his destruction.
So it will be as it was in the days of Esther; the death decree will
be drawn up by the leading men of the earth at some meeting place
acceptable to them all. It will be first the work of the ecclesiastical
authorities, who must then have it ratified by the powers of the
earth; just as the Jezebel of old wrote out the death warrant for
Naboth, the faithful, obedient servant of God, in the king's name,
and sealed it with his seal. See 1 Kings 21:8.
DURATION OF JACOB'S TROUBLE 293

This decree, as we read above, will give the people the right to be
the executioners, which conferring of legal power must be legally
done by transmitting copies of the decree to every part of the world,
just as the writings of the decree in the days of Esther had to be sent
first to every part of the realm before the actual plan of slaughtering
the people of God could take place.
Knowing as we do that the experience of the people in the days
of Esther was a type or a preview of how it will be in the last days, we
can know how it will be again, and this fact is confirmed in the fol-
lowing statement:
"Then I saw the leading men of the earth consulting together,
and Satan and his angels busy around them. I saw a writing, copies
of which were scattered in different parts of the land, giving orders
that unless the saints should yield their peculiar faith, give up the
Sabbath, and observe the first day of the week, the people were at
liberty after a certain time to put them to death." Early Writings,
282, 283.
Such will not require a great deal of time. Under present condi-
tions, once the decree had been drawn up and passed, the printing
and packaging of it, and its dispatch to the farthermost ends of the
earth, would be all accomplished in a matter of a few days. Due al-
lowance must be made for the fact that there will be considerable dis-
ruption to world communications at that time because of the heavy
hand of blight and destruction upon the world, so it might take a little
longer, but by no means a whole year. At the most, it could only take
a week or two.
Therefore it is most reasonable to conclude that the time of Ja-
cob's trouble will be of relatively short duration, and for this we can
well be thankful, for one would really wonder how human nature
could possibly endure twelve months of the agony of Jacob's trouble.
I went through twenty-four hours of that kind of experience once, in a
much milder form, and then I feared I would break down mentally. Re-
lief came before that, for which I was very thankful, and after passing
through that experience, I do not know how one could endure twelve
months of it without total disintegration, mentally and spiritually.
A statement which is worth some consideration on this question
of the length of the duration of the time of trouble is this one from A
Word to the Little Flock, page 12: "The Lord has shown me in vi-
sion, that Jesus rose up, and shut the door, and entered the Holy of
Holies at the seventh month, 1844; but Michael's standing up,
(Daniel 12:1) to deliver His people, is in the future.
"This, will not take place, until Jesus has finished His priestly of-
fice in the Heavenly Sanctuary, and lays off His priestly attire, and
294 LAST DAY EVENTS

puts on His most kingly robes and crown, to ride forth on the cloudy
chariot, to 'thresh the heathen in His anger,' and deliver His people.
"Then Jesus will have the sharp sickle in His hand, (Revelation
14:14) and then the saints will cry day and night to Jesus on the
cloud, to thrust in His sickle and reap.
"This, will be the time of Jacob's trouble, (Jeremiah 30:5-8) out
of which the saints will be delivered by the voice of God.''
This statement tells us that as soon as Jesus has completed the
work in the sanctuary as the High Priest, He changes his priestly gar-
ments for the kingly robes of justice and vengeance, and immediately
following, He rides forth on the journey from heaven to this earth to
deliver His people. While He is thus riding forth, the saints upon the
earth will be calling upon Him to thrust in the sickle and reap the
harvest. Then we are told that the time of Jacob's trouble is the time
when this is going on, by which we would instantly know the dura-
tion of the time of trouble if we knew how long it will take for Jesus to
lay off the priestly attire, put on the garments of vengeance, and fly
down from heaven to the earth.
Nowhere are we told just how much time will be occupied on this
journey, though we certainly do know that it can be accomplished in
seven days and even possibly less, for that is the length of time it will
take to make the return journey. The evidence for this is given in
Early Writings, page 16:
"We all entered the cloud together, and were seven days ascend-
ing to the sea of glass.''
That much is clear, then, that the journey need occupy but seven
days. However, we cannot take the definite position from this that
there will be exactly the same length of time taken by Christ. There
may well be some other factors not revealed to us, which may extend
the period a little, or reduce it somewhat, but it does indicate to us
that the length of time will be a great deal less than one whole year.
In reading of the experience of the saints during the time of Ja-
cob's trouble, we find the following in Spirit of Prophecy 4:447.
"Could men see with heavenly vision, they would behold compa-
nies of angels that excel in strength stationed about those who have
kept the word of Christ's patience. With sympathizing tenderness,
angels have witnessed their distress, and have heard their prayers.
They are waiting the word of their Commander to snatch them from
their peril. But they must wait yet a little longer. The people of God
must drink of the cup, and be baptized with the baptism. The very
delay, so painful to them, is the best answer to their petitions. As
they endeavor to wait trustingly for the Lord to work, they are led to
exercise faith, hope, and patience, which have been too little exer-
cised during their religious experience. Yet for the elect's sake, the
DURATION OF JACOB'S TROUBLE 295

time of trouble will be shortened. The end will come more quickly
than men expect. The wheat will be gathered and bound in sheaves
for the garner of God; the tares will be bound as fagots for the fires of
destruction."
The evidence available is that, though of fearful intensity, the
time of Jacob's trouble will certainly be much less than a year in
length, and will in fact be of quite short duration. To those who have
to pass through it, it will seem like a thousand years while it is going
on, but terrible and trying though it will be and seemingly beyond the
power of human endurance, the strength of the Lord will be the vic-
tory of His people, and in that time they shall come off more than
conquerors.
Chapter 26

Plagues,
and Last Plagues
Having determined from the study in our last chapter that the ac-
tual time of trouble will be much, much shorter than has been gener-
ally supposed, it is time to study just what is to happen during that
period. To do this, it will be necessary to study the period in general
terms first. Then we will consider the sequence of events through
which the righteous pass, after which we will look at what the wicked
will suffer.
It should already be clear, from what we have studied together,
that the close of probation marks the very beginning of this time of
trouble such as never was. Nevertheless, we would do well to really
establish this point from the evidences in the Word of God. The fact
we shall see is that the time will come when Jesus will bring to an end
the high priestly ministry in the most holy place of the heavenly sanc-
tuary, and will step out from that position so that there will be no
Mediator for man. When that point of time comes, then the wicked
are left fully exposed to the power of Satan, who will then plunge the
whole world into such trouble as would never have been thought
possible.
This is clearly stated in the following reference: "When He
[Christ] leaves the sanctuary, darkness covers the inhabitants of the
earth. In that fearful time the righteous must live in the sight of a holy
God without an intercessor. The restraint which has been upon the
wicked is removed, and Satan has entire control of the finally impeni-
tent. God's long-suffering has ended. The world has rejected His
mercy, despised His love, and trampled upon His law. The wicked
have passed the boundary of their probation; the Spirit of God, per-
sistently resisted, has been at last withdrawn. Unsheltered by divine
grace, they have no protection from the wicked one. Satan will then
plunge the inhabitants of the earth into one great, final trouble. As
the angels of God cease to hold in check the fierce winds of human
passion, all the elements of strife will be let loose. The whole world
PLAUGES, & LAST PLAGUES 297

will be involved in ruin more terrible than that which came upon Je-
rusalem of old.
"A single angel destroyed all the first-born of the Egyptians, and
filled the land with mourning. When David offended against God by
numbering the people, one angel caused that terrible destruction by
which his sin was punished. The same destructive power exercised
by holy angles when God commands, will be exercised by evil angels
when He permits. There are forces now ready, and only waiting the
divine permission, to spread desolation everywhere." Great Con-
troversy, 614.
"At that time Michael shall stand up, the great prince who stands
watch over the sons of your people; and there shall be a time of
trouble, such as never was since there was a nation, even to that
time. And at that time your people shall be delivered, every one who
is found written in the book." Daniel 12:1.
"When Christ shall cease His work as mediator in man's behalf,
then this time of trouble will begin. Then the case of every soul will
have been decided, and there will be no atoning blood to cleanse
from sin. When Jesus leaves His position as man's intercessor before
God, the solemn announcement is made, 'He that is unjust, let him
be unjust still: and he which is filthy, let him be filthy still: and he that
is righteous, let him be righteous still: and he that is holy, let him be
holy still.' Revelation 22:11. Then the restraining Spirit of God is
withdrawn from the earth. As Jacob was threatened with death by
his angry brother, so the people of God will be in peril from the
wicked who are seeking to destroy them. And as the patriarch wres-
tled all night for deliverance from the hand of Esau, so the righteous
will cry to God day and night for deliverance from the enemies that
surround them." Patriarchs and Prophets, 201.
These statements make it very clear that the cessation of the
ministry of Christ in the most holy place of the heavenly sanctuary
will mark the point when the restraining presence of the Holy Spirit
shall be entirely withdrawn, with the result that the time of trouble
will begin fully and in earnest. For the wicked, that will mean the out-
pouring of the seven last plagues, which is the unmingled wrath of
God against the transgressor. That the seven last plagues begin with
the closing of the ministry in the sanctuary, is made certain by the
following statements:
"When Christ ceases His intercession in the sanctuary, the un-
mingled wrath threatened against those who worship the beast and
his image and receive his mark (Revelation 14:9, 10), will be poured
out. The plagues upon Egypt when God was about to deliver Israel
were similar in character to those more terrible and extensive judg-
298 LAST DAY EVENTS

ments which are to fall upon the world just before the final deliver-
ance of God's people." Great Controversy, 627, 628.
"Then I saw that Jesus would not leave the most holy place until
every case was decided either for salvation or destruction, and that
the wrath of God could not come until Jesus had finished His work in
the most holy place, laid off His priestly attire, and clothed Himself
with the garments of vengeance. Then Jesus will step out from be-
tween the Father and man, and God will keep silence no longer, but
pour out His wrath on those who have rejected His truth." Early
Writings, 36.
"As Jesus moved out of the most holy place, I heard the tinkling
of the bells upon His garment; and as He left, a cloud of darkness
covered the inhabitants of the earth. There was then no Mediator be-
tween guilty man and an offended God. While Jesus had been stand-
ing between God and guilty man, a restraint was upon the people;
but when He stepped out from between man and the Father, the re-
straint was removed, and Satan had entire control of the finally im-
penitent. It was impossible for the plagues to be poured out while Je-
sus officiated in the sanctuary; but as His work there is finished, and
His intercession closes, there is nothing to stay the wrath of God,
and it breaks with fury upon the shelterless head of the guilty sinner,
who has slighted salvation and hated reproof." Early Writings, 280.
These statements make it very clear that until the ministry of Je-
sus is completed in the most holy place of the sanctuary in heaven,
the seven last plagues cannot, and will not be poured out on the
guilty inhabitants of the earth. But just as soon as that mediation
comes to its end, then they will be poured out. There will be no delay
in the matter whatsoever. Therefore we are established on this
truth—that when the ministration of Jesus in the most holy place
ends, He puts on the garments of vengeance, and at once the seven
last plagues begin to fall upon the unprotected heads of the wicked,
while at the same time the people of God upon the earth are plunged
into the experience of the time of Jacob's trouble. This much is clear.
The true and accurate understanding of the Word of God is not
for the careless and superficial reader, but for the careful, thoughtful,
prayerful student who is prepared to compare Scripture with Scrip-
ture, and let every word have its true and proper weight. Thus it is,
that the first reading of the statements above would give the impres-
sion that the beginning of the seven last plagues will be a dramatic
entry; introducing a situation so vastly different from that which went
before, that all will not have the slightest difficulty in seeing that the
seven last plagues have begun.
A careful study of the related events of the time shows that this
will not be so, but rather the seven last plagues will be but the final
300 LAST DAY EVENTS

intensification of plagues in the world, which are already there as a

result of the universal apostasy. So terrible will be these plagues
which shall fall before the close of probation, that the coming of the
seven last plagues will not be anything new and strange to the peo-
ple of the earth, but rather the same thing in greater severity. The
ones which come before the close of probation will blend into those
which come after, and no man will be able to tell when those which
come before give place to those which come after, no matter how
good a Bible student he may be. In fact, not even Satan, who is the
best Bible student of all, will be able to tell the difference. The evi-
dences for all this we must now search out and study.
In the very first case, the expression used over and over in the
Spirit of Prophecy, "the seven last plagues", is in itself very mean-
ingful. They are not called simply the seven plagues, but the seven
last plagues. If these are the last, then there must be a former plague
or more, because something can only be last if there is a first to go
before it.
Now we have learned from the statements quoted above that the
seven last plagues come entirely after the close of probation, and in-
asmuch as they begin the moment that human probation closes, then
the first plagues must all be located before the close of probation.
Furthermore, we are plainly told that these seven last plagues are
the antitype of the plagues which fell on Egypt when God was about
to deliver His people from the power of the oppressor back then.
"The plagues upon Egypt when God was about to deliver Israel
were similar in character to those more terrible and extensive judg-
ments which are to fall upon the world just before the final deliver-
ance of God's people." Great Controversy, 627, 628.
A comparison of that time and the coming period will show how
truly the first is the type of the second, and was, therefore, recorded
as a lesson of great value for the people of God who will pass
through the closing scenes of this world's history.
In both cases, the death decree had been passed upon the people
of God with the intention of destroying them from the face of the
earth. Of this death decree in the days of Pharaoh, we read:
"Then the king of Egypt spoke to the Hebrew midwives, of whom
the name of one was Shiphrah and the name of the other Puah;
"and he said, 'When you do the duties of a midwife for the He-
brew women, and see them on the birthstools, if it is a son, then you
shall kill him; but if it is a daughter, then she shall live.' " Exodus
1:15,16.
Such a decree can only result in the extermination of the race, for
when there were no men left, there could be no next generation.
When this decree failed because of the faithfulness of the midwives,
PLAUGES, & LAST PLAGUES 301

then the king made a second decree which was even more deadly:
"So Pharaoh commanded all his people, saying, 'Every son who is
born you shall cast into the river, and every daughter you shall save
alive.' " Verse 22.
Pharaoh was then the highest earthly power, and so it will be the
highest earthly powers again which will make a decree designed to
exterminate the people of God. But just as God sent those ten terri-
ble plagues before He delivered His people back there, so He will
again send the plagues of the last days before the final deliverance of
His people. As it was then, so it will be. This would lead us to the
conclusion that if there were ten plagues back then, there will again
be ten plagues in the last days. If this is so, and if, as we know, the
seven last of them are located after the close of probation, then the
first three must come before the close of probation.
We are not aware of any place where we can find three exact
plagues listed as coming before the close of probation, but we can
find abundant evidence to show that the earth will be plagued with
disasters and calamities of staggering proportions before that time
shall come. In fact, such troubles are already in the land, and becom-
ing worse as the years go by.
Let us trace this through once again in the chapter entitled, "The
Impending Conflict", from The Great Controversy, pages 582-592.
As we have spent some time in this chapter and previously in chapter
four of this series, we will but touch the high points here as an intro-
duction to the truth in regard to the seven last plagues, which we
need to understand.
Since the year 1844, the great truths of Sabbath reform and the
true keeping of the law of God have been held up before the people
and the churches of the world. The call has not only gone unheeded,
but it has been flatly rejected and strongly resisted by these churches.
Now the simple fact is, that it is quite impossible to resist the call of
God without suffering terribly as a result. Cause is followed by effect.
Every action has its equal and opposite reaction. These churches
have sown to the wind, and they will as surely reap the whirlwind.
"As the work of Sabbath reform extends, this rejection of the divine
law to avoid the claims of the fourth commandment will become will-
nigh universal. The teachings of religious leaders have opened the
door to infidelity, to Spiritualism, and to contempt for God's holy
law; and upon these leaders rest a fearful responsibility for the iniq-
uity that exists in the Christian world." Great Controversy, 587
It is of the utmost importance that these leaders hide from the
people the real cause of the troubles which are coming upon them
with mounting severity, so that they will turn and blame the desecra-
tion of Sunday for it. And this act on their part is a still further rejec-
302 LAST DAY EVENTS

tion of the claims of God upon them as they seek to set up the false
day of worship. So we read:
"Yet this very class put forth the claim that the fast-spreading
corruption is largely attributable to the desecration of the so-called
'Christian sabbath,' and that the enforcement of Sunday observance
would greatly improve the morals of society." Great Controversy,
587.
Such an act only serves further to open the doors to the entrance
of infidelity and Spiritualism and as Spiritualism is the power through
which Satan works, this gives the evil one greater power to work his
will in the earth. It is the plan and the work of this wicked one to ap-
pear to men as the benefactor of the race while in actual fact he
comes as its destroyer. Thus we read:
"Through spiritualism, Satan appears as a benefactor of the
race, healing the diseases of the people, and professing to present a
new and more exalted system of religious faith; but at the same time
he works as a destroyer. . . .
"While appearing to the children of men as a great physician
who can heal all their maladies, he will bring disease and disaster, un-
til populous cities are reduced to ruin and desolation. Even now he is
at work. In accidents and calamities by sea and by land, in great con-
flagrations, in fierce tornadoes and terrific hailstorms, in tempests,
floods, cyclones, tidal waves, and earthquakes, in every place and in
a thousand forms, Satan is exercising his power. He sweeps away the
ripening harvest, and famine and distress follow. He imparts to the
air a deadly taint, and thousands perish by the pestilence. These visi-
tations are to become more and more frequent and disastrous. De-
struction will be upon both man and beast. The earth mourneth and
fadeth away,' 'the haughty people . . . do languish. The earth also is
defiled under the inhabitants thereof; because they have trans-
gressed the laws, changed the ordinance, broken the everlasting
covenant.' Isaiah 24:4, 5." Great Controversy, 589, 590.
There are two points which bear notice in this statement. First of
all we are told that' 'Even now he is at work.'' Those words were writ-
ten something like ninety years ago, having appeared in volume four
of The Spirit of Prophecy, page 407. Not only were we told that he
was then at work, but that "These visitations are to become more
and more frequent and disastrous." Those who are living today are
witnesses to the awesome truth of these words. These visitations are
indeed becoming more and more frequent and disastrous. The past
year—1992—was certainly marked by a fearful train of disasters of
awful magnitude. Yet, so inured has the world become to such things
because of their repeated severity and frequency, that it hardly took
more than passing notice of the events.
PLAUGES, & LAST PLAGUES 303

But the serious Bible student notes that these things are becom-
ing more frequent and disastrous as the moral and spiritual tone of
the world descends to ever lower and still lower depths. That descent
has never been more rapid than it has been in the past few years. It
seems that men are casting off all restraint and abandoning them-
selves to the pursuit of all and every kind of wickedness, using their
bodies in the performance of the vilest lusts and pleasures.
This situation must now become inevitably worse and worse, the
result being that the Spirit of God will be withdrawn more and more
from the earth, while the power of Spiritualism will become more
and more manifest, until these things assume plague proportions.
We know that when the loud cry shall begin, things will have come
to the place where it will be said of the churches of the world, that:
"Babylon the great is fallen, is fallen, and has become a habita-
tion of demons, a prison for every foul spirit, and a cage for every un-
clean and hated bird!
"For her sins have reached to heaven, and God has remembered
her iniquities." Revelation 18:2, 5.
This reveals that a state of things is coming when the power of
Spiritualism will be far greater even than it is today. Then the church
will have become the very habitation of devils and will be the hold of
every foul spirit; things being so serious that her sins will have
reached clear up to heaven. This means that Satan will then have un-
limited power within those churches through whom he will exercise
to the fullest extent the malignant and destructive power of
Spiritualism.
Today, things have not yet come to quite that point and will not
until the churches have all become united in one purpose against the
truth of God. But that time is coming, and if the destruction in the
world is as bad as it is today—with Satan not yet possessing full
power in the churches—then what will it be like when he does exer-
cise unlimited power in and through the churches: It is too frighten-
ing even to think about.
But this will by no means be the worst of it, for that will be, as we
have learned previously, only the beginning of the loud cry period.
At that time the devil will have full control of the churches, but not
yet of the world. Therefore Spiritualism will still have some limita-
tions on its power. The contest during the loud cry period will be for
the minds of men in general. At the beginning of that time the
churches will be fully committed to the devil, and the people of God
will be committed to the Lord, but there will be the masses of the
earth who will not yet have made their final decision one way or the
other. But during the loud cry period such decisions must be made;
304 LAST DAY EVENTS

and we know that the vast majority will make their decisions on the
wrong side.
The point is, that every man who makes his decision on the
wrong side thereby increases the power of Satan—which is the
power of Spiritualism. The greater the power of Spiritualism, then
the more the enemy of souls is able to make it appear that he is a
benefactor of the race, while at the same time, the more he is able to
work as a destroyer. The whole thing is in direct proportion, so, as
the loud cry progresses and more and more people make their final
decision for wrong, then greater becomes the power of Spiritualism
and the more extensive and terrible the destructions which will fall
upon the earth.
If the destructions which we see in the earth today are as exten-
sive and disastrous as they are while the power of Satan is still lim-
ited, then what must they be like during the loud cry as he gains
greater and greater power in his steady climb to the pinnacle of that
power to be realized when the time of probation ends? The whole
world will stagger from blow after terrible blow as the calamities of
the earth reach plague proportions before probation finally closes.
Then, as the devil gains the final and complete control over all the
earth, apart from those whose names are written in the Lamb's book
of life, Spiritualism will reach the full and final height of its destruc-
tive power as probation closes, and that power will be manifest in
the seven last plagues.
Thus it is to be seen that the plagues which fall upon the earth
just prior to the close of probation are scarcely less terrible than
those which fall immediately after probation closes, and, therefore,
those who are living at that time will be unable to tell the difference
between the one or the other, or to know when the one ends and the
other begins. This is a very important point, and one which we need
to keep well in mind as we proceed in this study.
The same is true of the withdrawal of the Spirit of God from the
earth. This also is progressive. So far as Babylon herself is con-
cerned, that withdrawal is already complete at the very beginning of
the loud cry period—quite some time before the final close of proba-
tion. But for the world in general, that final withdrawal is not com-
plete until the close of human probation.
Thus we can know that things are going to become worse and
worse as time goes by, until we reach the great time of trouble, the
like of which this world has never known. Knowing what is coming
calls forth from every intelligent Christian the determination to make
the most thorough and careful preparation for what is before us, for
only those who have really set their hearts to serve the Lord will
stand in that day.
 Chapter 27

The Unknown Hour

The close of human probation, which comes with the ending of
the ministration of Christ in the sanctuary in heaven and ushers in
the seven last plagues, is an event of the most momentous propor-
tions to the human family. Then the fate of every human being will
have been decided for eternity; some for everlasting life and the re-
mainder to eternal destruction.
Most of the human race is unaware of the definite coming of such
a day, but those who are, usually believe that the day will not pass
without their knowing exactly when the event will take place. It is
generally believed that some sign will be given whereby the saints on
earth will be made aware that probation has closed and that the time
of trouble has come upon mankind. But will this be so? We need to
carefully examine the evidences to see if there will be an indication
to the living that the time of probation has passed and that there is
no further opportunity for salvation.
In the first case, let us look and see if the wicked people of the
earth will be aware that their probation has passed on to eternity. To
find the answer we have but to read The Great Controversy, 615,
where, in the plainest of terms, we are told that the wicked will not
know that mercy's voice is no longer pleading with them to repent
and that their fate is forever settled.
"When God's presence was finally withdrawn from the Jewish
nation, priests and people knew it not. Though under the control of
Satan, and swayed by the most horrible and malignant passions,
they still regarded themselves as the chosen of God. The ministra-
tion in the temple continued; sacrifices were offered upon its pol-
luted altars, and daily the divine blessing was invoked upon a people
guilty of the blood of God's dear Son and seeking to slay His minis-
ters and apostles. So when the irrevocable decision of the sanctuary
has been pronounced and the destiny of the world has been forever
fixed, the inhabitants of the earth will know it not. The forms of relig-
ion will be continued by a people from whom the Spirit of God has
been finally withdrawn; and the satanic zeal with which the prince of
evil will inspire them for the accomplishment of his malignant de-
signs, will bear the semblance of zeal for God."
306 LAST DAY EVENTS

When the irrevocable decision of the sanctuary has been pronounced

and the destiny of the world has been forever fixed, the inhabitants of the
earth will know it not. The forms of religion will be continued by a people
from whom the Spirit of God has been finally withdrawn; and the satanic
zeal with which the prince of evil will inspire them for the accomplishment
of his malignant designs, will bear the semblance of zeal for God.
THE UNKNOWN HOUR 307

To this plain and clear testimony may be added these further

words from the same source, pages 490, 491:
"When the work of the investigative judgment closes, the destiny
of all will have been decided for life or death. Probation is ended a
short time before the appearing of the Lord in the clouds of heaven.
Christ in the Revelation, looking forward to that time, declares: 'He
that is unjust, let him be unjust still: and he which is filthy, let him be
filthy still: and he that is righteous let him be righteous still: and he
that is holy, let him be holy still. And, behold, I come quickly; and My
reward is with Me, to give every man according as his work shall be.'
Revelation 22:11,12.
"The righteous and the wicked will still be living upon the earth
in their mortal state—men will be planting and building, eating and
drinking, all unconscious that the final, irrevocable decision has been
pronounced in the sanctuary above."
These statements clarify the question as to the wicked in that
great day. They will not know that the great day of investigative judg-
ment has concluded in the sanctuary above and that there is no
longer probation for the guilty inhabitants of the earth. This is quite
consistent with the type given in the ancient sanctuary service where
we find that the heathen round about knew nothing of the fact that
the service of the great day of atonement was going on in the sanctu-
ary of God in Israel. Neither did they know when the service was fin-
ished and the priest had come out to the waiting people. So, like-
wise, they will not know in the great antitype.
The enemy of God and man is a very diligent student of prophecy
and of the Bible generally. In this he displays some wisdom, as do the
generals of the armies of this world who study most carefully the
writings of their enemies and become as closely acquainted with the
plans of the enemy as they possibly can. The Bible in which God has
revealed His movements in advance is a book which is freely avail-
able to all, and Satan does not miss the opportunity. The following
statements will clearly show, that not only is Satan a Bible student,
but that he understands clearly and accurately what he is reading and
studying.
"Let the son of deceit and false witness be entertained by a
church that has had great light, great evidence, and that church will
discard the message the Lord has sent, and receive the most unrea-
sonable assertions and false suppositions and false theories. Satan
laughs at their folly, for he knows what truth is." Testimonies to
Ministers, 409.
"Satan excited the evil passions of men, in order to fasten his
rule upon them. When God's written word was given, Satan studied
the prophecies of the Saviour's advent. From generation to genera-
308 LAST DAY EVENTS

tion he worked to blind the people to these prophecies, that they

might reject Christ at His coming." Desire of Ages, 115.
"He still appears as an angel of light, and he makes it evident
that he is acquainted with the Scriptures, and understands the im-
port of what is written." Desire of Ages, 124.
"Satan is a diligent Bible student. He knows that his time is
short, and he seeks at every point to counterwork the work of the
Lord upon this earth." Testimonies 9:16.
One might expect, therefore, that if there was anyone who would
know when the time of human probation was ended, it would be Sa-
tan, and yet we find that he does not know it either. This is stated
clearly in the following statements:
"As Satan influenced Esau to march against Jacob, so he will stir
up the wicked to destroy God's people in the time of trouble. And as
he accused Jacob, he will urge his accusations against the people of
God. He numbers the world as his subjects; but the little company
who keep the commandments of God are resisting his supremacy. If
he could blot them from the earth, his triumph would be complete.
He sees that holy angels are guarding them, and he infers that their
sins have been pardoned; but he does not know that their cases have
been decided in the sanctuary above." Great Controversy, 618.
"In the time of trouble, Satan stirs up the wicked, and they encir-
cle the people of God to destroy them. But he does not know that
'pardon' has been written opposite their names in the books of
heaven. He does not know that the command has been given, 'Take
away the filthy garments' from them, clothe them with 'change of
raiment,' and set 'a fair miter' upon their heads." Review and Her-
ald, November 19, 1908.
The question is plainly settled as to whether the wicked and their
master will know if probation has actually closed at the time when
this event takes place. The answer is, that they will not.
We need now to study the question as to whether the saints them-
selves will yet know if this event has passed in the sanctuary above.
This at once raises the question: If they will know it, then how will
they know it?
The event itself takes place in heaven wherein all that happens
there is hidden from the sight of men. We can only know what is hap-
pening there by the fulfillment of a prophesied event down here on
the earth or by some God-given sign that is designed to tell us that
the event has taken place above. As an illustration of this, we have
the prophecy of the two thousand three hundred days, the termina-
tion of which declared to the people of God on earth that an event
had taken place in heaven—the ending of the ministry in the first
apartment and the beginning of the ministry in the most holy place
THE UNKNOWN HOUR 309

of the heavenly sanctuary. Thus it was, that when the appointed time
came, then, by the sure word of prophecy, the people of God knew
what had taken place in the heaven above.
But there is no time in prophecy to tell us when the end of proba-
tion will come. This time, for very good reasons, has not been re-
vealed to the sons of men. Of course there are, exactly as has been
prophesied that there would be, men in the world today who declare
that they know and can tell the very year in which probation will
close. These are sadly deceived souls to whom we need not listen,
and in fact must not listen, for we have been warned that:
"Should we advance in spiritual knowledge, we would see the
truth developing and expanding in lines of which we have little
dreamed, but it will never develop in any line that will lead us to
imagine that we may know the times and the seasons which the Fa-
ther hath put in His own power. Again and again have 1 been warned
in regard to time-setting. There will never again be a message for the
people of God that will be based on time. We are not to know the
definite time either for the outpouring of the Holy Spirit or for the
coming of Christ." SDA Bible Commentary 6:1052.
"God has not revealed to us the time when this message will
close, or when probation will have an end. Those things that are re-
vealed we shall accept for ourselves and for our children; but let us
not seek to know that which has been kept secret in the counsels of
the Almighty." SDA Bible Commentary 7:989.
Therefore it must be clear to all that we cannot know in advance
as to when that day will come, and neither can the devil, for there is
nothing in the Word of God to tell us the time. This is something
which has been kept secret in the counsels of the Father.
Having settled the question as to whether they will know in ad-
vance, the next logical question to ask is whether there is a predicted
event which, when it happens, will tell us that at the same time the
great event is happening in the sanctuary above or has just hap-
pened. This is not a difficult question to answer, and has in fact been
partly answered already, for we have seen that the devil is a sound Bi-
ble student, and we have also seen that he will not know, even after
probation has closed, that the event has actually taken place.
Now these plain facts admit of one conclusion, and it is that there
is not one predicted event in the Word of prophecy, the coming of
which will mark the close of probation and, therefore, stand as a sign
to the people of God that the event has taken place in heaven. If
there were such an event marked down in prophecy, then Satan
would know it just as well as the people of God, and better, so that
the moment it came, then he would know that probation had closed.
But he will not know it. Therefore, no human will know it either. This
310 LAST DAY EVENTS

argument is quite conclusive in itself and would be all that is needed

to supply us with this vital information, but the Lord has given us
other evidences besides this. Let us take a second look at The Great
Controversy, 491:
"The righteous and the wicked will still be living upon the earth
in their mortal state—men will be planting and building, eating and
drinking, all unconscious that the final, irrevocable decision has been
pronounced in the sanctuary above."
If the situation was to be that the people of the Lord, as students
of prophecy, were to be aware of the event, while the wicked were
not, then the distinction would have appeared in this statement in-
stead of the exact opposite. The words plainly tell us that both the

"The righteous and the wicked will still be living upon the earth in
their mortal state—men will be planting and building, eating and drink-
ing, all unconscious that the final, irrevocable decision has been pro-
nounced in the sanctuary above." Great Controversy, 491.
THE UNKNOWN HOUR 311

righteous and the wicked will be "all unconscious that the final, ir-
revocable decision had been pronounced in the sanctuary above."
At once some may raise the question as to how this can be when
the beginning of the seven last plagues marks the beginning of the
time of trouble, which can, in turn, only begin with the closing of
probation. It is argued that, as the plagues cannot come until the
ministry of Jesus in the sanctuary above has come to its end, then
the appearance of the plagues will be a certain sign that the time of
probation is ended.
If it were a case of the seven last plagues appearing upon a
plague-free earth, then the argument would be of some weight, but
as we saw in the study of the plagues and last plagues in the last
chapter, the seven last plagues come as the culmination of a mount-
ing plague-ridden situation. To such proportions will the former
plagues have developed that the coming of the seven last plagues
will appear as nothing new or out of the ordinary, and it will not be
possible for the devil to even distinguish that point of time when the
former plagues close and the last plagues begin. Added to this will be
the exaggerated state of confusion and destruction, so that it will be
impossible to interpret any events of the earth with any degree of ac-
curacy. If the devil, excellent, comprehensive, and accurate a Bible
student as he is, cannot tell that probation has closed, then the saints
certainly will not be able to either.
Clear and distinct as is the evidence pointing to the fact that the
close of probation will be unannounced on this earth, there are some
who bring forth arguments to say that it will be. We will spend a little
time now in studying to see what true weight these arguments have
in the case.
At one time in particular, a few years ago a statement was being
circulated, purportedly from the pen of inspiration, which stated that
when Jesus leaves the sanctuary, literal darkness, such as that which
fell upon the earth when Jesus was crucified, will fall upon the earth
once again, and this will be a sign to the people of God that the close
of probation has come.
As this statement, if it were true, stands in direct contradiction to
the other witnesses in the Word of events in the last days, a careful
effort was made to check its authenticity. This check has failed to
find any proof that the statement is a genuine Spirit of Prophecy
statement, and, therefore, it must be discounted entirely. It is true
that there are statements which do state that darkness covers the
earth when Jesus leaves the sanctuary, but every one of these is re-
ferring to spiritual darkness. Otherwise, how could the wicked be go-
ing on planting and building, all unaware that the event had taken
place, if the earth was filled with intense darkness? It is not until the
312 LAST DAY EVENTS

fifth plague that literal darkness covers the earth which happens five
plagues after the close of probation. If darkness came at the close of
probation, then how could the fifth plague darken an already dark-
ened world?
The very wording of the falling of the darkness, which takes
place at the beginning of the time of trouble, indicates that this is
spiritual and not literal darkness.
"When He leaves the sanctuary, darkness covers the inhabitants
of the earth." Great Controversy, 614.
If this were a literal darkness, then it would have said that dark-
ness covers the earth, instead of so specifically saying that darkness
covers the inhabitants of the earth.
In that grim day when the fall of Jerusalem was imminent, some
faithful ones in the days of Jeremiah hid the sacred ark of the most
holy place of the sanctuary. In it was the law of God. That ark with
the law is still hidden and preserved to this day as the following state-
ment tells us:
"Among the righteous still in Jerusalem, to whom had been
made plain the divine purpose, were some who determined to place
beyond the reach of ruthless hands the sacred ark containing the ta-
bles of stone on which had been traced the precepts of the Deca-
logue. This they did. With mourning and sadness they secreted the
ark in a cave, where it was to be hidden from the people of Israel and
Judah because of their sins, and was to be no more restored to them.
That sacred ark is yet hidden. It has never been disturbed since it was
secreted." Prophets and Kings, 453.
But it is not always to remain hidden. There is coming the day
when it will be brought out as an exhibit in the judgment as the fol-
lowing statements plainly tell:
'And He [Christ] gave unto Moses, when He had made an end
of communicating with him upon Mount Sinai, two tables of testi-
mony, tables of stone, written by the finger of God.' Nothing written
on those tables could be blotted out. The precious record of the law
was placed in the ark of the testament and is still there, safely hidden
from the human family. But in God's appointed time He will bring
forth these tables of stone to be a testimony to all the world against
the disregard of His commandments and against the idolatrous wor-
ship of a counterfeit Sabbath." SDA Bible Commentary 1:1109.
"There are abundant evidences of the immutability of God's law.
It was written with the finger of God, never to be obliterated, never
to be destroyed. The tables of stone are hidden by God, to be pro-
duced in the great judgment-day, just as He wrote them." SDA Bible
Commentary 1:1109.
"When the judgment shall sit, and the books shall be opened,
THE UNKNOWN HOUR 313

and every man shall be judged according to the things written in the
books, then the tables of stone, hidden by God until that day, will be
presented before the world as the standard of righteousness. Then
men and women will see that the prerequisite of their salvation is
obedience to the perfect law of God. None will find excuse for sin.
By the righteous principles of that law, men will receive their sen-
tence of life or of death." SDA Bible Commentary 1:1109.
Now some have seized upon these statements to prove that the
beginning of the judgment of the living will be announced upon this
earth by the bringing forth of the sacred ark and the holy ten com-
mandment law written on the two tables of stone. Inasmuch as the
judgment of the living, as we have seen in previous chapters, comes
at the close of human probation, then, it is argued, the close of pro-
bation will be clearly announced by this discovery and presentation.
To the superficial reader, this provides a very convincing case, but
the earnest seeker for truth is more careful in his judgments.
He will not jump at once to the conclusion that the investigative
judgment of the righteous is the one being referred to. He is aware
that there is more than the one judgment, and he will wish to see
clearly which it is. As he studies carefully, he is left in no doubt as to
which he is being referred; as the statements themselves clearly spec-
ify which judgment it is. We have but to look to see:
"The tables of stone are hidden by God, to be produced in the
great judgment-day, just as He wrote them." "When the judgment
shall sit and the books shall be opened, and every man shall be
judged according to the things written in the books, then the tables
of stone, hidden by God until that day, will be presented before the
world as the standard of righteousness."
The judgment day, then, when the law is to be brought forth, will
be the "great" judgment day when the cases of "every" man shall be
judged.
Over and again we are told that in the investigative judgment,
prior to the close of human probation, only the professed people of
God are judged. "In the typical service only those who had come be-
fore God with confession and repentance, and whose sins, through
the blood of the sin offering, were transferred to the sanctuary, had a
part in the service of the Day of Atonement. So in the great day of
final atonement and investigative judgment the only cases consid-
ered are those of the professed people of God. The judgment of the
wicked is a distinct and separate work, and takes place at a later pe-
riod." Great Controversy, 480.
By this we know that the time when every person is judged out of
those things written in the books, is not the judgment prior to the
close of probation, because then, only the smallest proportion of
314 LAST DAY EVENTS

mankind are judged. This can only be fulfilled at the end of the thou-
sand years when every man having been resurrected from the dead
will be standing before the throne of God. This is the final judg-
ment—the great judgment day when every question of truth or error
will be forever settled. Then it will be that the Lord will portray be-
fore the wondering eyes of the multitudes the scenes of the tempta-
tion and fall and the other significant events in the history of the
great controversy; especially the scenes of Christ's crucifixion and
resurrection. Then, just as in an earthly court case, the various "ex-
hibits" are brought out, likewise then, the exhibits will be presented
to show that there never was any excuse of any kind for sin, that the
law has never been done away with, and that it will stand eternally in
the new kingdom.
Then it will be that the Saviour will be seen seated upon the
throne of judgment, and they will "see in His hands the tables of the
diving law—the statutes which they have despised and trans-
gressed." Great Controversy, 668. Then there will be point and
purpose in bringing out the commandments, for then the question
must be settled forever as to the authority and the righteousness of
that law. If it were brought out at the time of the judgment of the liv-
ing, it would be at a time when it would not do the slightest amount of
good whatsoever. The cases of all the professed people of God
would have been decided, and the rest who were bent on destroying
the people of God could not be changed then, for it would be forever
too late.
It must be clear, then, to the thoughtful, prayerful student of the
Word of God, that the ten commandments, written by God's own
finger on the tables of stone, will not be brought forth till the end of
the thousand years, there to appear as convincing exhibits in the fi-
nal and closing scenes of the great controversy when every man will
at last acknowledge that God is altogether true.
Thus it is clear that there will be no particular sign given to an-
nounce the close of probation, and the event will pass without the
devil, or his followers, or the righteous being aware of it.
This is, as must be expected, in harmony with the type of the
sanctuary service in the Old Testament. Then the people, even as we
do today, knew that the high priest had gone into the most holy place
of the heavenly sanctuary. As we do today—by faith and not by
sight—they followed him as he went before the mercy seat, but they
could not, and did not know at what moment of time he sprinkled the
blood upon the mercy seat above the ark. It was not until he ap-
peared at the door of the tabernacle that they could know that the
service within had been completed. So, too, it will not be until the
THE UNKNOWN HOUR 315

voice of God delivers His people and the sign of the Son of Man is
seen that we shall know that the service has been completed.
It is essential that during that period of time, we be unaware that
the great day of atonement has passed, for it is only as we live by faith
and not by sight through that time that it is possible for us to see Sa-
tan for what he really is and thus lose every last trace of sympathy
with him. The wicked as well will be brought to their turning point.
For now, our great work is to make ready for that day, which has-
tens greatly and shall come upon us, we know not when.

[LDE21J
Chapter 28

The First
Four Plagues
Several facts have been established as a result of the study con-
tained in the last two chapters or more. They are that the seven last
plagues do not commence to fall on the guilty inhabitants of earth
until the work of Jesus in the most holy place of the heavenly sanctu-
ary is completed; the seven last plagues will be the final culmination
of a mounting series of plagues and desolations upon the earth prior
to the close of probation; so severe will be the troubles before proba-
tion closes, that they will simply blend into the ones which come af-
ter, so that no one will be able to know when the ones before end and
the ones after begin. We learned, too, that the Lord has kept secret
the time when probation will close and has given no sign whereby
the people on this earth or the devil will be able to know that the
time of mercy is passed.
With these facts before us we are now prepared to study and to
understand the plagues themselves as they occur in their order. They
are described in Revelation 16:1-21, while some fuller details of
them are given in the following chapter. In their order they are as fol-
lows: The first is a terrible sore which eats away the bodies of those
who have the mark of the beast and worship his image. In the second
the sea becomes as the blood of a dead man, and every living soul
dies in the sea. The third is the same scourge but upon the rivers and
fountains of waters, so that the angel cries out that the Lord is just in
giving them blood to drink, in view of the fact that they have slain the
saints of God. In the fourth plague, the sun increases in heat-power
to the place where men and beasts are scorched with the ferocity of
it.
As we shall see better as we proceed, these first four plagues can
be classified together, while the remaining three have a relationship
to each other. The fifth plague is the descent of thick and impenetra-
ble darkness upon the seat of the beast. The sixth is the drying up of
the great river Euphrates. The final one is the fearful earthquake,
combined with the falling of the hail.
THE FIRST FOUR PLAGUES 317

The Great Controversy gives little comment on the exact nature

of the first four plagues; though quite some space is spent telling of
the results of those first four scourges upon the earth. There is no
reason to believe that they are symbolic, but rather they will fall upon
man just as they read.
The first will be an unspeakably painful and incurable sore which
will appear on the bodies of those who have followed after and sup-
ported the beast and his image in their warfare against the God of
heaven. Medical science, already baffled by the appearance of hith-
erto unknown maladies and diseases, will be absolutely unable to
help in this situation. Not only will they not have anything which will
cure the disease, but even if they did, their facilities would be unable
to cope with the tremendous demands made by millions of people
rushing in to get relief. To make matters worse still, the doctors
themselves will be so stricken with the disease that they will be un-
able to work for the others. No words of man today could ever truly
picture the fearful nature of that plague when it falls upon the human
family. The very thought of it should be sufficient to stir us all to
greater effort to ensure that we will not be among those who have, by
that time, been worshipping the beast and his image. And that will
be only the first of the seven.
The second and third plagues are very similar; the only difference
really being, that while the second turns the sea to blood, the third
does the same to the rivers and fountains of waters. This will be a
repetition of the first plague which fell upon Egypt when that nation
refused to release the children of Israel from bondage. As in the case
of the Egyptians, so again the living creatures in the sea will die, and
the evil smell of their rotting carcasses will pollute the air that the
people need to breathe in order to live. Think of the desperate nature
of the water shortage which will be felt by the great cities in that day,
the great cities which draw their water from the lakes and the
streams.
These plagues, as we have seen, are not the direct act of God, but
the outworking of the sins of Babylon herself. They are the result of
her sins; punishments which the Lord would have saved them from
suffering if they had been prepared to let the Lord save them, but
when they would not put their trust in Him, then with His protection
being withdrawn, they are left to the outworking of their own evil
course of action.
It is as this fearful situation develops in the earth that the angel
observers speak out in comment on the justice of the sentence: "And
I heard the angel of the waters saying: 'You are righteous, O Lord,
the one who is and who was and who is to be, because You have
judged these things.
318 LAST DAY EVENTS

" 'For they have shed the blood of saints and prophets, and You
have given them blood to drink, for it is their just due.'
"And I heard another from the altar saying, 'Even so, Lord God
Almighty, true and righteous are Your judgments.' " Revelation
16:5-7.
This is the fearful outworking of the law, the truth of which we
see every day in the world of nature around us, that as we sow, so, in
turn, comes the reaping; which reaping is usually in abundance in
comparison with the sowing. We sow one seed, especially in a world
so productive of evil, and the reaping is one hundred fold. So these
evil workers of the last times will have plotted the deaths of the peo-
ple of God, will have taken their houses and lands, and cut them off
from all life support, thereby sowing the seed for an abundant har-
vest of retribution. As surely as they have done this, so surely will it
come. What a fearful death toll must come during this plague, as the
people, driven to desperation by the fever in their bodies, occa-
sioned by the sores upon them, seek for water to quench their burn-
ing thirst, and there is none to drink!
The testimony of the angels regarding the justice of God brings
to view a very interesting and valuable truth, so far as the experience
of the saints during this time is concerned. It raises the question as to
whether there will be an extensive martyrdom in the last days. This
subject is both interesting and important, for those who will face that
time need to know what to expect. As John saw the seals being
opened one by one, the time came when the fifth was opened as fol-
lows: "When he opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls
of those who had been slain for the word of God and for the testi-
mony which they held.
"And they cried with a loud voice, saying, 'How long, O Lord,
holy and true, until you judge and avenge our blood on those who
dwell on the earth?'
"And a white robe was given to each of them; and it was said to
them that they should rest a little while longer, until both the number
of their fellow servants and their brethren, who would be killed as
they had been was completed.'' Revelation 6:9-11.
The picture here is clear. Following the great martyrdoms of the
earlier centuries, these millions cried out, as it were, for the restitu-
tion of their lives and the retribution on their persecutors. This is not
to be understood in any kind of revengeful spirit but only in the spirit
of justice and properness. The great question is, How long will it be
before justice is done? The answer is given, that they would have to
rest there until at some later time there would be others who would
suffer the martyr's death as they had had to do. The question imme-
diately arises as to when that great martyrdom will take place. This
THE FIRST FOUR PLAGUES 319

point is quite clear, that up till the present, we are still waiting for it
to happen.
The answer is plainly given in these words: "When the fifth seal
was opened, John the Revelator in vision saw beneath the altar the
company that were slain for the Word of God and the testimony of
Jesus Christ. After this came the scenes described in the eighteenth
of Revelation, when those who are faithful and true are called out
from Babylon."SDA Bible Commentary 7:968.
Therefore those who will be slain, as they were, will suffer this in
the very last scenes of this earth's history when the final work is com-
ing to its conclusion. Further evidence to support this is found in
Revelation 20:4, wherein is described the company of those who
will, among others, live and reign with Christ a thousand years in
heaven:
"And I saw thrones, and they sat on them, and judgment was
committed to them. And I saw the souls of those who had been be-
headed for their witness to Jesus and for the word of God, who had
not worshipped the beast or his image, and had not received his
mark on their foreheads or on their hands. And they lived and
reigned with Christ for a thousand years."
Here we are told that there will be those in the kingdom who will
have been beheaded because they had not worshipped the beast and
his image. Such a refusal and such a beheading could only be possi-
ble in the future when the reign of the beast and his image is a fact.
Such evidences strongly indicate that many are going to face the
martyr's death and shed their blood at the hands of the wicked in the
last and final scenes.
There are at least two statements to support this reasoning. They
read as follows:
"The two armies will stand distinct and separate, and this dis-
tinction will be so marked that many who shall be convinced of truth
will come on the side of God's commandment-keeping people.
When this grand work is to take place in the battle, prior to the last
closing conflict, many will be imprisoned, many will flee for their
lives from cities and towns, and many will be martyrs for Christ's
sake in standing in defense of the truth. They will be brought before
kings and rulers, and before councils to meet the false, absurd, and
lying accusations brought against them, but they must stand firm as a
rock to principle, and the promise is, 'As thy days so shall thy
strength be.' (Deuteronomy 33:25). You will not be tempted above
what you are able to bear. Jesus bore all this and far more. The ex-
press command of God must be obeyed, for God has been working.
Luke 21:8-19." TheEllen G. White 1888 Materials, 484. See also
Selected Messages 3:397, and Maranatha, 199.
320 LAST DAY EVENTS

"God's word has given warning of the impending danger; let this
be unheeded, and the Protestant world will learn what the purposes
of Rome really are, only when it is too late to escape the snare. She is
silently growing into power. Her doctrines are exerting their influ-
ence in legislative halls, in the churches, and in the hearts of men.
She is piling up her lofty and massive structures in the secret re-
cesses of which her former persecutions will be repeated. Stealthily
and unsuspectedly she is strengthening her forces to further her own
ends when the time shall come for her to strike. All that she desires is
vantage ground, and this is already being given her. We shall soon
see and shall feel what the purpose of the Roman element is. Who-
ever shall believe and obey the word of God will thereby incur re-
proach and persecution." Great Controversy, 581.
Yet, if this is so, some very interesting problems are raised which
require that we study a little deeper. In the first case, we are told that
these last-day martyrs will be "killed as they were," which shows
that the same methods of death employed by the persecutors of old
will be repeated in these last days. How was it done back there? Al-
ways the Church made the decrees and then went to the state to have
them enforced, just as Jezebel "wrote letters in Ahab's name," and
"sealed them with his seal" 1 Kings 21:8, when she made the death
decree against Naboth the Jezreelite. Indeed, the whole emphasis of
the symbolism of the image of the beast is to teach and tell us that the
ways of the Roman Church, as a persecutor, will be the ways of the
modern church in its persecuting role. That is to say, that once again
the church will make the laws, and it will be the state which will en-
force them.
Now we know that there will be no death decree made until the
very close of the loud cry period, and even then the date for its exe-
cution will be deferred until well after the close of probation. Prior to
the date for the execution for this decree it will be illegal to kill any of
them. We know that no saint will be killed after the death decree is
passed nor during the time of trouble. (See Great Controversy, 631,
634.) We know that it will be determined to strike the blow all over
the world in one night, thereby utterly silencing the protesting voice
of God's people; and they will come very close to accomplishing
their evil purpose. But at the very moment when the swords are
about to fall upon the helpless heads of the victims, the darkness
blots out the scene, and the purpose of death is defeated.
Under these conditions, how can there be any large scale martyr-
dom in the last days? The fact will be, that while the one hundred and
forty-four thousand do not actually shed their blood and are not actu-
ally beheaded, every one of them will be the martyrs spoken of pro-
phetically in Revelation 6:11 since the martyring of no others ex-
THE FIRST FOUR PLAGUES 321

cept the one hundred and forty-four thousand could result in the re-
lease of the martyrs of old. So far as experience is concerned, they
will taste and know all that the martyrs of the past knew and under-
stood. Like them, they will have stood for the unpopular truth and
been persecuted for it. They will stand for that truth despite the
mounting pressure upon them, until, like the martyrs of old, they
hear the sentence of death pronounced upon them. Like those of
yore, they flee, are hunted and pursued, and are finally found and
driven into a corner from which there is no escape. Then, as they
bow in prayer with the shadow of death over them, the swords,
poised for a single moment over their heads, are ready to flash down
on their mission of death. They wait for it, tensed and expectant. As
the weapons of old struck, sudden darkness enveloped the con-
sciousness as the saints fell to rise no more till the resurrection
morning. Likewise, the one hundred and forty-four thousand will, at
the selfsame critical moment, be enveloped in the densest darkness,
and they will feel death as surely as if they are dead. Thus they will
experience all that the martyrs ever experienced, and, therefore, in
God's sight they will be counted as if they had actually given their
lives. While in the sight of God the wicked will be counted as if they
had actually taken their lives.
In describing the second and third plagues, reference is made in
The Great Controversy, 628, to the justice of God in giving them
blood to drink: "Terrible as these inflictions are, God's justice stands
fully vindicated. The angel of God declares: 'Thou art righteous, O
Lord, . . . because Thou hast judged thus. For they have shed the
blood of saints and prophets, and Thou hast given them blood to
drink; for they are worthy.' Revelation 16:2-6. By condemning the
people of God to death, they have as truly incurred the guilt of their
blood as if it had been shed by their hands."
Note how the Bible simply states that "they have shed the
blood," but in the explanation of this in The Great Controversy, it is
stated that they are as guilty as if they had shed it. This implies quite
clearly that the blood is not actually shed, but the wicked are no less
guilty because of this in view of the fact that the intent was there,
and, as far as it could be carried forward, it was. The guilt is upon the
wicked as if they all had done it, and the experience has been passed
through by the righteous as if they had actually died.
While these facts preclude a great, actual shedding of martyr
blood in the final scenes, it does not preclude the possibility of some
losing their lives through mob violence, murder, or secret torture
during the loud cry period. Time alone will reveal the full extent of
the malicious activities of the enemies of the truth then.
The first plague will have afflicted many of the inhabitants of the
322 LAST DAY EVENTS

earth with that fearful and painful sore. The following two will have
cut off vast water supplies and filled the air with the stench of death.
Now, if men ever needed cool relief, it will be then, but worse fol-
lows, for the fourth plague brings a scorching sun with insufferable
temperatures. Imagine the torture to those who in that time are liv-
ing unsheltered from these calamities. Foretastes of this have been
experienced when heat waves have gripped areas of the earth for a
period, but never has there been a heat wave of the proportions of
this one coming, when men, already groaning under the plagues
which will have already come, can least endure this added horror.
The death toll of both man and beast will be fearful, adding further to
the burden of the living. Food will be so short that famine will stalk
the land, while destructive fires will burst forth to heighten the tem-
peratures, imperil and take the lives of many more, and destroy al-
ready disastrously diminished food supplies.
The book Great Controversy directs our attention to the Old
Testament prophecies of this time and situation. "The prophets thus
describe the condition of the earth at this fearful time: The land
mourneth; . . . because the harvest of the field is perished. . . . All the
trees of the field are withered: because joy is withered away from the

The terrible suffering caused by the first four plagues will be felt by
domestic farm animals just as much as by humans.
"The prophets thus describe the condition of the earth at this fearful
time: 'The land mourneth;... because the harvest of the field is perished.
. . . All the trees of the field are withered: because joy is withered away
from the sons of men.' 'The seed is rotten under their clods, the garners
are laid desolate. . . . How do the beasts grown! the herds of cattle are
perplexed, because they have no pasture.... The rivers of water are dried
up, and the fire hath devoured the pastures of the wilderness.' 'The songs
of the temple shall be bowlings in that day, saith the Lord God: there shall
be many dead bodies in every place; they shall cast them forth in silence.'
Joel 1:10-12,17-20; Amos 8:3." Great Controversy, 628.
THE FIRST FOUR PLAGUES 323

sons of men.' The seed is rotten under their clods, the garners are
laid desolate. . . . How do the beasts groan! the herds of cattle are
perplexed, because they have no pasture. . . . The rivers of water are
dried up, and the fire hath devoured the pastures of the wilderness.'
The songs of the temple shall be howlings in that day, saith the Lord
God: there shall be many dead bodies in every place; they shall cast
them forth in silence.' Joel 1:10-12, 17-20; Amos 8:3." Great Con-
troversy, 628.
Of that coming time, a more terrible picture could not be given
than this. That the inhabitants of the earth are not entirely cut off, is
due to the fact, alone, that these first four plagues are not world-
wide. After referring to these first four, our reference above then
says: "These plagues are not universal, or the inhabitants of the
earth would be wholly cut off. Yet they will be the most awful
scourges that have ever been known to mortals. All the judgments
upon men, prior to the close of probation, have been mingled with
mercy. The pleading blood of Christ has shielded the sinner from re-
ceiving the full measure of his guilt; but in the final judgment, wrath
is poured out unmixed with mercy." Great Controversy, 628.
As we shall see, the following three plagues will be universal, but
not so with the first four. They are limited to certain areas of the
earth; another reason why it will be difficult to know that it is the
seven last plagues which have begun. But, when it is stated that they
will be limited to certain areas of the earth, this is not to be under-
stood that the areas will be small, but rather vast with commensurate
loss of life and property. The trouble which comes then will be like
the bursting of a torrent of destruction upon the world. The suffering
will be horrible and unbelievable.
This is that time when this promise is to be fulfilled: "A thousand
may fall at your side, and ten thousand at your right hand; but it shall
not come near you.
"Only with your eyes shall you look, and see the reward of the
wicked.
"Because you have made the Lord, who is my refuge, even the
Most High, your habitation,
"No evil shall befall you, nor shall any plague come near your
dwelling." Psalm 91:7-10.
The very same world in which the wicked will be suffering so ter-
ribly and dying from the result of the plagues, will be the world in
which the righteous will still be found. Hitherto, they have been as
dependent on the earth for sustenance as have any other of the sons
of men, and now, if they had no better protection than the wicked,
they would perish along with them. To some extent, they will suffer
along with the wicked, but it will not be from the direct effect of the
324 LAST DAY EVENTS

plague, but somewhat from the situation of want which the plagues
will produce.
"The people of God will not be free from suffering; but while per-
secuted and distressed, while they endure privation and suffer for
want of food they will not be left to perish. That God who cared for
Elijah will not pass by one of His self-sacrificing children. He who
numbers the hairs of their head will care for them, and in time of
famine they shall be satisfied. While the wicked are dying from hun-
ger and pestilence, angels will shield the righteous and supply their
wants. To him that 'walketh righteously' is the promise: 'Bread shall
be given him; his waters shall be sure.' 'When the poor and needy
seek water, and there is none, and their tongue faileth for thirst, I the
Lord will hear them, I the God of Israel will not forsake them.' Isaiah
33:15, 16; 41:17.
" 'Although the fig tree shall not blossom, neither shall fruit be in
the vines; the labor of the olive shall fail, and the fields shall yield no
meat; the flock shall be cut off from the fold, and there shall be no
herd in the stalls;' yet shall they that fear Him 'rejoice in the Lord'
and joy in the God of their salvation. Habakkuk 3:17, 18." Great
Controversy, 629.
These are the Elijah people, and like Elijah, their needs in this
time of famine and pestilence will be supplied by the angels of
heaven. This did not mean that Elijah did not suffer from privation
and distress, for he did in that barren and lonely spot, but he did not
suffer from the plague back then, as did the rest of sinful Israel. So
likewise, even though they will suffer some as an indirect effect of
the plagues, the actual plagues themselves will not come nigh the
righteous, and they will be sustained with food from heaven.
Their real suffering through this period is the suffering of Jacob's
trouble, which is the fearful mental agony occasioned by the fear that
they may betray their Lord through the weakness of the flesh, or be-
cause they have not put away every sin of which they have been
guilty.
Thus, a dying world will writhe in the agony of those terrible
scourges which will come upon all mankind as a result of the wanton
transgression and sin of this old world. Yet even these four plagues
are not the total end—the full and final climax. There is yet to come
three more—the fifth, the sixth, and the seventh. When they have
completed their work of destruction, then there will be none left alive
upon the earth, for the subjects of those plagues will all have been
destroyed, either by the plagues or by violence among themselves.
May the Lord so have His way in the directing of our lives that we
shall be accounted worthy to escape the plagues, which are soon to
come upon the earth.
 Chapter 29

The Fifth Plague

Having spent some time and space considering the first four
plagues, the time has come for us to study the last three. These are
the most significant and extensive of the seven, and it will be seen
that while the first four are not universal, because if they were, they
would wholly cut off the inhabitants of the earth, the last three are
universal, and do cut off the remaining inhabitants of the earth.
The first of these last three plagues consists of a dense and im-
penetrable darkness which falls upon the seat of the beast, the next
is the drying up of the great River Euphrates, and the last is the fear-
ful outpouring of hail, combined with the great earthquake which
shakes the whole world as no earthquake has ever shaken it before.
At this time whole islands will disappear from view, mountain chains
will sink, and seaports will be swallowed up by the raging ocean,
while the descending hailstones each weighing fifty-six pounds or
twenty-five kilograms will smash the proud cities to ruins. It is be-
yond the mind of man, even though he had been witness to the de-
struction of the worst wars, to fully picture and imagine the carnage,
desolation, and ruination which will be occasioned by those final
plagues.
The first of those last three, as noted above, will be the pouring
out of the darkness upon the seat of the beast, whereby his kingdom
becomes filled with darkness:
"Then the fifth angel poured out his bowl on the throne of the
beast, and his kingdom became full of darkness; and they gnawed
their tongues because of the pain.
"And they blasphemed the God of heaven because of their pains
and their sores, and did not repent of their deeds." Revelation
16:10,11.
Once again we must emphasize the need of noting just what the
Scriptures actually say. The verse before states that the darkness is
poured out on the seat of the beast, and that thereby the whole king-
dom becomes filled with darkness. Does this mean that the darkness
is first poured out on one localized spot, and that it then spreads
forth until the whole kingdom becomes filled with darkness? The
text does not say this. It states that the plague of darkness is poured
326 LAST DAY EVENTS

out upon the seat of the beast, and that being done, the whole king-
dom was full of darkness. This would immediately suggest that the
seat of the beast and the kingdom of the beast are one and the same
thing, each being equal to the other and not one of them a small cen-
tral part of the other.
Without reading the text to see explicitly what it says, one would
be inclined to draw the conclusion that the darkness fell on but the
one spot, namely, that which is generally considered to be the seat of
the beast—Rome. But when it is seen that the entire kingdom of the
beast becomes filled with darkness, then we must know that the
darkness is much more extensive than just this localized area, for the
kingdom of the beast at that time will truly and literally fill the whole
earth. There is no truth which is more clearly taught in the sure Word
of prophecy than that the beast will at that time rule the entire world,
even though at the present time the witness of sight and circum-
stances would decree that this was the most impossible development
which could ever be. But we have learned that the Word of prophecy
is far more to be relied upon than the witness of our senses, with its
seeming denial of all that which the Word of God predicts.
Let us, then, turn to that Word for the verification of the situation
as it shall stand in those last days. In Revelation 13:8, after telling of
the final restoration of the Papacy, it is written that:
"And all who dwell on the earth will worship him, whose names
have not been written in the book of life of the Lamb slain from the
foundation of the world."
In this verse are brought to view two classes of people. They are
those whose names are written in the Lamb's book of life, and there
are all the rest of whom every single one will be worshipping the
beast, so the entire territory of the earth will then be his kingdom. It
can be said that the entire earth will then comprise the kingdom of
the beast, despite the presence of the people of God in the earth, for
the very simple reason that the people of God will have been dispos-
sessed of any territory in the earth at that time. They will be but fugi-
tives and outlaws with no place in the whole earth which they could
in any sense call their own. Against them the entire world will stand
united under the banner of the evil one.
It is true that today there are many nations and kingdoms which
are openly hostile to the papal system and have pledged themselves
to perpetual hostility toward that system; but there are great changes
to take place in the world, and many things will soon be very differ-
ent indeed. It is hard to believe that such bitter and implacable ene-
mies, as the Jews and the Arabs are, could ever stand side-by-side as
common defenders of the papal system, but this is yet to be. Nor
should we deem this as being beyond the limits of possibility, for
THE FIFTH PLAGUE 327

have we not seen that nations, which in the past were for a time
locked in deadly combat with each other, have turned to become
great allies and trading partners but a few years later.
There are plain and explicit statements which state in just so
many words that there will be this universal union of the powers of
this earth under the leadership of the beast. Let us review some of
them:
"As America, the land of religious liberty, shall unite with the pa-
pacy in forcing the conscience and compelling men to honor the
false sabbath, the people of every country on the globe will be led to
follow her example. . . . Foreign nations will follow the example of
the United States. Though she leads out, yet the same crisis will
come upon our people in all parts of the world." Testimonies 6:18,
395.
"History will be repeated. False religion will be exalted. The first
day of the week, a common working day, possessing no sanctity
whatever, will be set up as was the image at Babylon. All nations and
tongues and peoples will be commanded to worship this spurious
sabbath. This is Satan's plan to make of no account the day insti-
tuted by God, and given to the world as a memorial of creation.
"The decree enforcing the worship of this day is to go forth to all
the world.. ..
"Trial and persecution will come to all who, in obedience to the
Word of God, refuse to worship this false sabbath. Force is the last
resort of every false religion. At first it tries attraction, as the king of
Babylon tried the power of music and outward show. If these attrac-
tions, invented by men inspired by Satan, failed to make men wor-
ship the image, the hungry flames of the furnace were ready to con-
sume them. So it will be now. The papacy has exercised her power to
compel men to obey her, and she will continue to do so. We need the
same spirit that was manifested by God's servants in the conflict with
paganism." SDA Bible Commentary 7:976.
"The world is filled with storm and war and variance. Yet under
one head—the papal power—the people will unite to oppose God in
the person of His witnesses." Testimonies 7:182.
"There will be a universal bond of union, one great harmony, a
confederacy of Satan's forces.. . .
"In the warfare to be waged in the last days there will be united,
in opposition to God's people, all the corrupt powers that have apos-
tatized from allegiance to the law of Jehovah." SDA Bible Commen-
tary 7:983.
These statements leave no doubt in the mind but that in the end
the whole world will have given their allegiance to the power of the
enemy of God and man, as symbolized in the prophecy by the beast.
328 LAST DAY EVENTS

This, then, makes it equally clear that the kingdom of the beast will
encompass the whole world and will have given their allegiance to
that kingship, while the people of God who are not of this world will
have been dispossessed of any property which was theirs in this
world. By this we can know that the darkness of the fifth plague will
not be something confined to a limited geographical area such as the
city of Rome, but will, indeed and in fact, cover the entire earth. It
will be a universal plague such as the first four are not, and, as such,
will be the first of the three universal plagues which will bring Baby-
lon's judgment to completion.
It is usually understood that the seat of the government in a king-
dom is a relatively small geographical area in the center of the king-
dom. Some difficulty may be experienced by the student of the Word
in understanding how it can be that the pouring out of the vial on the
seat of the beast serves to fill the entire kingdom with darkness.
However, this difficulty is completely cleared up when we under-
stand who the beast actually is and against whom he is warring.
There are a number of beasts who appear in the prophecies of
Daniel and the Revelation. There is the lion, the bear, the leopard,
the great dragon of Daniel seven, the ram and the he-goat of Daniel
eight, the great dragon of Revelation ten, the leopard-like beast, the
lamb-like beasts of Revelation thirteen, the beast from the bottom-
less pit of Revelation eleven, and the scarlet colored beast of Reve-
lation seventeen.
We have thought of these as being the great powers of the earth
such as Babylon, Medo-Persia, Greece, Rome, the Papacy, the rise
of Atheism, the apostate Protestant powers, and finally the great ulti-
mate confederacy of apostasy; and in this no mistake has been made.
Yet, there is a broader and more accurate view to be taken which,
while it does not deny the conclusions so far held, does extend our
understanding of those symbols. Instead of thinking of those powers
as being the direct enemies of God as such, let us think of them as
being the agencies upon this earth through the power of which the
great enemy of God has worked to destroy His cause. In other words,
let us think of Satan as being the beast who, while himself invisible to
mankind, has appeared before the world and the people of God in
the visible form of the powers under his control. The visible form,
then, such as Babylon or Rome is but the physical manifestation of
Satan's power and presence. Therefore he is the real beast.
Justification for this is given in two references at least. The first is
in Ezekiel 28:12: "Son of man, take up a lamentation for the king of
Tyre, and say to him, Thus says the Lord God: "You were the seal of
perfection, full of wisdom and perfect in beauty." ' "
Here is a direct message about the king of Tyre, or so it would ap-
THE FIFTH PLAGUE 329

pear, but as we read on, it speaks not of the human being upon the
earth, but of the arch and first apostate, Satan himself. The king of
Tyre who sat physically upon the material throne of that city has
never been in the city of God and walked "back and forth in the
midst of fiery stones." Verse 14. But, then, neither was he the real
king of Tyre. He was but the earthly figurehead through whom the
devil worked his will, so that, therefore, Satan, and not the king of
Tyre, was the real king of Tyre and the real ruler of that kingdom. So
it was, too, with Babylon and the other kingdoms through whom the
devil worked. The devil, and not the earthly monarchs, is the real
beast of the prophecies.
In Revelation twelve, the evil beast there appears as a great red
dragon intent on devouring the offspring of the woman, which child
would bring deliverance to the church of God upon this earth. We
know only too well that pagan Rome was the earthly kingdom
through whom the devil worked at this time, yet the Bible distinctly
names this dragon as being Satan who was cast out of heaven back in
the beginning of things: "So the great dragon was cast out, that ser-
pent of old, called the Devil and Satan, who deceives the whole
world; he was cast to the earth, and his angels were cast out with
him." Revelation 12:9.
This truth is further borne out by this statement from The Great
Controversy, 438: "A correct interpretation of the symbols em-
ployed is necessary to an understanding of this message. [Revela-
tion 14:9, 10.] What is represented by the beast, the image, the
mark?
"The line of prophecy in which these symbols are found begins
with Revelation 12, with the dragon that sought to destroy Christ at
His birth. The dragon is said to be Satan (Revelation 12:9); he it was
that moved upon Herod to put the Saviour to death. But the chief
agent of Satan in making war upon Christ and His people during the
first centuries of the Christian Era was the Roman empire, in which
paganism was the prevailing religion. Thus while the dragon, primar-
ily, represents Satan, it is, in a secondary sense, a symbol of pagan
Rome."
This, then, makes it quite clear that only in a secondary sense are
the powers of earth the beasts of prophecy. Primarily they are Satan,
the different beasts symbolizing the different guises through which
he works upon this earth.
When the devil first fell in heaven from his spiritual perfection, he
sought to set up the seat of his government and authority right there
in the kingdom above, but the war which resulted thrust him out into
space, though it did not succeed in curbing his unholy ambitions.
What he had failed to do in heaven, he determined to do upon this
330 LAST DAY EVENTS

earth, after he had gained a foothold here through the deception and
fall of Adam and Eve. Through the centuries, he has labored to estab-
lish his complete supremacy in the earth so that it will be his base of
operations against the kingdom of heaven. It is not a single spot on
this earth which is to be his seat of power, but the whole earth as it is
pitted against the kingdom of God in the rest of the entire universe.
Therefore we must think of this earth as a complete whole, as being
the seat of the beast, a great base of hostile operations against the
kingdom of God. How proper, then, that the darkness should over-
whelm the seat of the beast fully, and not partially, when
the fifth plague falls.

The fifth plague is the outpouring of impenetrable darkness on

the seat of the beast. To limit this seat to a single geographical lo-
cation such as Rome, would be to miss the real meaning of this ex-
pression, for the peoples of the entire world, having given their to-
tal, unqualified support to the man of sin, constitute the seat of the
beast, his base of operations against God's universal government.
His entire kingdom is his seat so that to plunge his seat into dark-
ness, is to fill his kingdom with darkness.

But there is another good reason why the entire earth is blotted
out with thick darkness at this time, and it has to do with the effort
on the part of the wicked to utterly destroy God's people from the
face of the earth so that the triumph of Satan can be complete.
As was noted in the last chapter, the description of the seven last
THE FIFTH PLAGUE 331

plagues is taken up in the last half of the chapter in The Great Con-
troversy, entitled "The Time of Trouble". The first four plagues are
mentioned in their order, and the remainder of that chapter is de-
voted to the setting out of the results of those first four plagues. This
is a picture of horror, starvation, famine, drought, and pestilence
during which the people of God are miraculously preserved as was
Elijah at the brook. It cannot be allowed that the first four plagues
would be described in their order, without the remaining three also
being described in their order. So it is that the very next chapter
opens with the events leading up to the outpouring of the final three
plagues upon the earth.
The day will have come when the time for the execution of the
death decree will be drawing very near, and the peoples of the earth
will have decided to exterminate in one night the hated ones whom
they imagine have brought all the trouble upon them. It is at this
point that the chapter opens.
"When the protection of human laws shall be withdrawn from
those who honor the law of God, there will be, in different lands, si-
multaneous movement for their destruction. As the time appointed
in the decree draws near, the people will conspire to root out the
hated sect. It will be determined to strike in one night a decisive blow,
which shall utterly silence the voice of dissent and reproof." Great
Controversy, 635.
It is important that it be understood that the people of God are
not at this time gathered into one place on the earth, but are scat-
tered throughout the length and breadth of it. This is further verified
by this statement from The Review and Herald, November 19,
1908:
"Then in the day of fierce trial he will say, 'Come, My people, en-
ter thou into thy chambers, and shut thy doors about thee; hide thy-
self as it were for a little moment, until the indignation be over past.'
What are the chambers in which they are to hide?—They are the pro-
tection of Christ and holy angels. The people of God are not at this
time all in one place. They are in different companies, and in all
parts of the earth; and they will be tried singly, not in groups. Every
one must stand the test for himself.
It is because the saints of God will be scattered throughout the
world then, as they are now, that Jesus will send His angels to the
four corners of the earth to gather them when He comes in the
clouds of heaven. Thus it is written:
"And He will send His angels with a great sound of a trumpet,
and they will gather together His elect from the four winds, from one
end of heaven to the other." Matthew 24:31.
They will not then be gathered at Jerusalem, or any other one
[LDE22]
332 LAST DAY EVENTS

place in the earth. The statement in Early Writings, page 75, makes
it very clear that the people of God will not be gathered in old Jerusa-
lem at this, or any other time. For we are told that "Old Jerusalem
never would be built up," Early Writings, 75, and that, therefore,
the people of God were neither to anticipate or plan to go there
again.
So it will be, that all over the world in different places the wicked
will be preparing for the work of death planned to sweep the right-
eous out of existence.
"The people of God—some in prison cells, some hidden in soli-
tary retreats in the forests and the mountains—still plead for divine
protection, while in every quarter companies of armed men, urged
on by hosts of evil angels, are preparing for the work of death. It is
now, in the hour of utmost extremity, that the God of Israel will inter-
pose for the deliverance of his chosen. Saith the Lord: 'Ye shall have
a song, as in the night when a holy solemnity is kept; and gladness of
heart, as when one goeth . . . to come into the mountain of the Lord,
to the Mighty One of Israel. And the Lord shall cause his glorious
voice to be heard, and shall show the lightning down of his arm, with
the indignation of His anger, and with the flame of a devouring fire,
with scattering, and tempest, and hailstones.' Isaiah 30:29, 30."
Great Controversy, 635.
Thus the stage is set for the final attempt by the forces of evil to
win the battle against truth and righteousness; in which dark hour
the Lord will interpose to deliver His people. The moment agreed
upon by the wicked comes, and they rush madly on to destroy the
righteous entirely.
"With shouts of triumph, jeering, and imprecation, throngs of
evil men are about to rush upon their prey, when, lo, a dense black-
ness, deeper than the darkness of the night, falls upon the earth."
Great Controversy, 635, 636.
It is to be noted that the wicked have conspired to strike the blow
at night. No doubt they had determined the hiding places of the
saints previously, and surrounded them in the daylight hours to wait
impatiently until the hour agreed upon by them for the slaughter.
Then in the midnight hour they rush upon their prey; no doubt carry-
ing lights to illuminate the work of death and destruction. The whole
plan goes successfully forward until that moment when the weapons
are raised to cut down the people of God, at which instant the dark-
ness of the fifth plague falls upon the earth. It is a darkness so dense
that everything is blotted from view, despite the lights they carry,
and it will be so sudden that the upraised weapons will never fall on
their intended victims. This absolutely unexpected event will serve to
completely upset the plans of the wicked to destroy the people of
THE FIFTH PLAGUE 333

God. That is what will make it a plague of fearful proportions and

significance for Babylon the Great. The devil, the real king of Baby-
lon, knows at this time that everything now depends on his being
able to destroy the people of God from off the face of the earth. He
has not succeeded in making them sin, so they must be destroyed so
that the Holy Spirit, whereby the presence of God remains upon the
earth, will have no foothold whatsoever in the earth, and, thus, Sa-
tan would have undisputed control over all the earth at last.
For six thousand years he will have been battling for such a situ-
ation as this, and here he will have come to the very point when suc-
cess is but the blow of a weapon away, when the darkness stops the
whole thing—with the saints still living—by being safely hidden from
view in the depths of an impenetrable darkness, far deeper than the
darkness of the night itself. Can we even begin to imagine the agony
of frustration, the terror occasioned by the implications of this de-
feat, and the horror which will overspread the wicked and their lead-
ers as they see what this is all going to mean to them: It is no small
wonder the Bible says, "and they gnawed their tongues because of
the pain." Revelation 16:10.
The wicked servants of the woman Jezebel, the great apostate
system of ecclesiastical oppression, have been thoroughly convinced
by the priests and leaders that the plagues, which have swept away
all they have and reduced them to such terrible straits, are caused by
the refusal of the hated minority to yield to the Sunday sabbath and
that there is no hope of any relief and return to temporal prosperity
until these are destroyed. Glad anticipation of this relief will spur
them on to the work of murder, only to find in the last moment that
the prey eludes them in the dense darkness.
On the other hand the leaders know that all hope for final su-
premacy rests in the destroying of the people of God, as does also
their master, the devil, and likewise they are dismayed to despera-
tion and horror by this development.
For the people of God, the experience is equally terrible at first.
There they are bowed in prayer, pleading with the Lord for deliver-
ance, with every appearance telling them that their last moment has
come. They are aware of the uplifted weapons, and they brace them-
selves for the blow. The wicked are screaming in their hatred and
rage. All is terror and confusion with bright lights flashing on them.
They are expecting death in the next instant, and in that next instant
they are plunged into impenetrable darkness in which everything is
blotted out of sight.
That is exactly the experience of the martyrs of old. They were
hunted and pursued until the weapons were raised aloft above their
heads. The next instant there descended upon them the impenetra-
334 LAST DAY EVENTS

ble darkness of death. Thus the one hundred and forty-four thousand
will experience death without actually dying. In fact, it will be worse
than that which the martyrs experienced, for the darkness for them
was the cessation of consciousness and, therefore, of experience,
but for these last martyrs, they will retain consciousness in the midst
of the darkness. Therefore they will think that they are dead, and at
the same time experience the fearful sense of horror at the thought
of it. It will mean to them that all is lost, for they, too, understand
that everything in the final victory depends upon their retaining life
till the very end.
Thus the fifth plague of dreadful, suffocating darkness is a terri-
ble experience for all concerned. But it does mark the turning point
for the people of God and the beginning of the great awakening for
the wicked, which leads to their completely withdrawing their sup-
port from Babylon the Great, whereby her total and final fall is ac-
complished. But, while Babylon's suffering is the coming to the end
of her existence, for the righteous, the suffering is but the birth ago-
nies into life eternal.
How important and needful it is that today, while it is called to-
day, we make our calling and election sure so that we escape the
plagues which are to fall upon Babylon the Great.
 Chapter 30

The Hour
of Deliverance
The inky, impenetrable darkness of the fifth plague marks the be-
ginning of quite dramatic changes in the whole scene of the closing
events of this earth's history. For the wicked, it means the complete
frustration of all their plans to exterminate the people of God and
thus gain the victory for the devil, which for six thousand years he
has worked to achieve. The darkness so completely hides the right-
eous from the view of the wicked that they cannot find them to do
them harm at all.
But this is not all. Immediately after, there appears a shining rain-
bow encircling each of the praying companies as the witness of the
special regard and consequent protection which the Lord has for His
people. This is no ordinary rainbow, for it is written that it shines
with the glory of God. The wicked are conscious of the supernatural
nature of this glory, and as a result, they are absolutely stopped in
their tracks, and, unable to move, they witness the divine recogni-
tion of the hated of all the earth. In the last chapter, the paragraph
The Great Controversy which told of this darkness is the paragraph
which goes on to tell of the arresting of the wicked in their onrush to
destroy the saints. To gain the connection, the entire paragraph is
quoted here:
"With shouts of triumph, jeering, and imprecation, throngs of
evil men are about to rush upon their prey, when, lo, a dense black-
ness, deeper than the darkness of the night, falls upon the earth.
Then a rainbow, shining with the glory from the throne of God,
spans the heavens and seems to encircle each praying company. The
angry multitudes are suddenly arrested. Their mocking cries die
away. The objects of their murderous rage are forgotten. With fearful
forebodings they gaze upon the symbol of God's covenant and long
to be shielded from its overpowering brightness." Great Contro-
versy, 635, 636.
Thus for the wicked, the darkness is followed by even greater dis-
may and terror as they see that the very ones whom they believed to
336 LAST DAY EVENTS

be the cause of the judgments of God upon the earth are, instead,
the ones whom the Lord loves and is protecting. Thus the great on-
rushing river of vengeful humanity is stopped in its flow, after which,
as we shall shortly see, it is dried up, so far as its intended course is
concerned, to roll back as a great destroying flood upon Babylon
herself.
But that which for the world is terror and confusion, is for the
people of God the opening of a new day of hope and expectation. In
fact, this is the point of time when the agony of Jacob's trouble
comes to its end; they are released from that into the joy of their eter-
nal deliverance. The darkness, having been followed by the glory of
the rainbow, is now followed by the voice from heaven directing
them to look above to the glory of the heavens where they see the
Son of man seated on His Father's throne.
"By the people of God a voice, clear and melodious, is heard,
saying, 'Look up,' and lifting their eyes to the heavens, they behold
the bow of promise. The black, angry clouds that covered the firma-
ment are parted, and like Stephen they look up steadfastly into
heaven and see the glory of God and the Son of man seated upon His
throne. In His divine form they discern the marks of His humiliation;
and from His lips they hear the request presented before His Father
and the holy angels, 'I will that they also, whom Thou hast given Me,
be with Me where I am.' John 17:24. Again a voice, musical and tri-
umphant, is heard, saying: They come! they come! holy, harmless,
and undefiled. They have kept the word of My patience; they shall
walk among the angels;' and the pale, quivering lips of those who
have held fast their faith, utter a shout of victory." Great Contro-
versy, 636.
While it would be true that the wicked are not able to see all that
the people of God can see, yet they see enough to make them realize
the implications of the terrible and eternal loss which they are now to
sustain. For them, this is the great moment of revelation of the truth
as it really is.
In the chapter under consideration in The Great Controversy,
the subject we are looking at is the experience of the people of God,
while the next chapter, "The Desolation of the Earth", carries us
along over the same ground, but this time from the point of view of
the experience of the wicked. On page 654, reference is made back
to a point of time mentioned in the previous chapter, from which the
above quotations have been taken. "When the voice of God turns the
captivity of His people, there is a terrible awakening of those who
have lost all in the great conflict of life."
The voice of God will turn the captivity of His people, as can be
seen from the study of page 636 of The Great Controversy, immedi-
THE HOUR OF DELIVERANCE 337

ately after the darkness of the fifth plague and the appearing of the
rainbow around the people of God. That is the time when the wicked
have their great awakening; the time when the deceptions of the en-
emy of souls lose their power over their minds. The whole of pages
654 and 655 describe this awakening. This is too lengthy to be
quoted in full here, but it is recommended that the reader take the
book and read it over for himself. Here, though, are the main
thoughts and developments of this time.
"While probation continued they were blinded by Satan's decep-
tions, and they justified their course of sin." Great Controversy,
654. It is very important that it be understood that the devil is not the
direct master of the human race. They are controlled by their evil na-
tures which fires the evil passions of their corrupt and fallen human-
ity. The clear proof that the devil is not the undisputed master is
given in the fact that he has to send forth his evil spirits to work mir-
acles to deceive the world into following him. Note how clearly this
is testified to in the following statements:
"Fearful sights of a supernatural character will soon be revealed
in the heavens, in token of the power of miracle-working demons.
The spirits of devils will go forth to the kings of the earth and to the
whole world, to fasten them in deception, and urge them on to unite
with Satan in his last struggle against the government of heaven. By
these agencies, rulers and subjects will be alike deceived." Great
Controversy, 624.
If the devil was the supreme master of the earth and of every indi-
vidual in it who is possessed of the carnal nature—as the people of
the earth mostly are—then it would not be necessary for Satan to de-
ceive them into giving to him their power and allegiance. Instead, he
would command them to line up their forces under his supervision
and get behind his cause against God in Heaven. The great problem
with the kingdom of Satan is, that it is motivated by the spirit of self-
supremacy, so that each and every individual within it desires to be
the king, with all the others serving him. Both Satan and his subjects
are motivated "by a power from beneath." Testimonies to Minis-
ters, 407.
That power is the power of sin. That is the controlling power
which Satan seeks to stir up and inflame, and at the same time con-
trol and channel into full and undivided support for himself in his
warfare against heaven. All too often, though, his plans misfire as his
subjects devote their time and energies to the development of their
own interests and their own kingdoms. Thus the whole of the devil's
kingdom is filled with strife and confusion. See how at the present
time the Arabs and the Israelis, for instance, are spending their
strength and energies in fighting one another, when Satan desires
338 LAST DAY EVENTS

that they pool their resources and power in the combined support of
his warfare against God. The time will come when they will do this,
but not without a great deal of cunning, deceptive persuasion on the
part of the evil one and his angels.
The methods by which he will make this persuasion effective will
be a combination of destruction and of favoring.
"Satan has control of all whom God does not especially guard.
He will favor and prosper some in order to further his own designs,
and he will bring trouble upon others and lead men to believe that it
is God who is afflicting them." Great Controversy, 589.
The statement that Satan has control of all those whom the Lord
does not especially guard may seem to contradict the facts revealed
in the statements already quoted, until it is seen from the context of
the above that it is referring to the control which Satan has over the
bodies and possessions of these people. He can destroy or prosper
them at will, but this does not mean that he can control their behav-
ior or command their allegiance at will.
The ones upon whom he will bring great affliction will be those
who are slow in coming into line with his organization and planning,
while those whom he will prosper are those who are co-operative.
As the power of Spiritualism increases, so will the fearful troubles in
the world, until it is reduced to a state of economic ruin and disaster.
"While appearing to the children of men as a great physician
who can heal all their maladies, he will bring disease and disaster, un-
til populous cities are reduced to ruin and desolation. Even now he is
at work. In accidents and calamities by sea and by land, in great con-
flagrations, in fierce tornadoes and terrific hailstorms, in tempests,
floods, cyclones, tidal waves, and earthquakes, in every place and in
a thousand forms, Satan is exercising his power. He sweeps away the
ripening harvest, and famine and distress follow. He imparts to the
air a deadly taint, and thousands perish by the pestilence. These visi-
tations are to become more and more frequent and disastrous. De-
struction will be upon both man and beast. The earth mourneth and
fadeth away,' 'the haughty people . . . do languish. The earth also is
defiled under the inhabitants thereof; because they have trans-
gressed the laws, changed the ordinance, broken the everlasting
covenant.' Isaiah 24:4, 5." Great Controversy, 589, 590.
Men will exhaust the powers of mind and body in their efforts to
solve the multiple crises which shall thus come upon them. Kings,
dictators, presidents, and prime ministers will be forced, through
sheer desperation, to recognize that the situation is quite beyond
them. It has always been the way of sinful men to look for help from
God when the troubles of the earth multiply around and upon them,
and so it will be again that they will turn toward God for help. But
THE HOUR OF DELIVERANCE 339

this generation has cast off the God of heaven, and even in the hour
of calamity they have no mind to have their hearts and their ways
changed. Satan knows this too well, and so he who is the cause and
executor of all the troubles which will have brought the world to this
place, then declares deceitfully that it is the God of heaven who is
manifesting his displeasure over the desecration of the Sunday.
"And then the great deceiver will persuade men that those who
serve God are causing these evils. The class that have provoked the
displeasure of Heaven will charge all their troubles upon those
whose obedience to God's commandments is a perpetual reproof to
transgressors. It will be declared that men are offending God by the
violation of the Sunday sabbath; that this sin has brought calamities
which will not cease until Sunday observance shall be strictly en-
forced; and that those who present the claims of the fourth com-
mandment, thus destroying reverence for Sunday, are troublers of
the people, preventing their restoration to divine favor and temporal
prosperity." Great Controversy, 590.
Thus the devil, having divorced men from God by causing them
to hate and despise the messages of truth, will then have unsheltered
mankind at his mercy, a situation of which he will take the utmost ad-
vantage. He will reduce what will be left of the unprotected human
family to a state of utter desperation in which they will see God as
their only hope. But, to his intense satisfaction, Satan will under-
stand that his victims have no desire to be saved from his power
within, but only from the plagues, destructions, and pestilences
without. The great enemy will then present himself before the
masses of the world as the god whom they can accept, the one who
will return them to temporal prosperity. As proof of his power and
willingness to use it for the benefit of the perishing, he performs the
most remarkable miracles in the sight of the multitudes who are to-
tally deceived by this performance.
Having gained total allegiance from the peoples of the entire
world, Satan, with great and convincing authority, will point to the
true God's faithful ones as being they who will have incurred the
wrath of Jehovah on all mankind whose troubles, he declares, shall
not cease until these troublers of the people are exterminated.
With great care and patience the evil one has formulated and
built this plan, the whole success of which depends upon deception,
for the people of the world will instantly cease to serve him, should
they discover they are being duped. This provides the devil with an
added incentive to destroy the faithful, because both their lives and
the witness of their message are perfectly calculated by God to un-
cover the real nature of the work of Satan. With what anxiety, then,
must he approach the moment when the death decree is to be exe-
340 LAST DAY EVENTS

cuted, and with what terror, alarm, and dismay must he view the
coming of the fifth plague, with the following glory of the encircling
rainbows and the delivering voice from heaven. Then, with despair-
ing and quaking fear will he see the mask of deception torn away, so
now in his real character he stands exposed before the eyes of those
who but so shortly before will have been giving him their full and un-
divided support. Then the wicked will know and understand that
they have been serving Satan instead of the God of heaven. They will
be filled with regret, but it will not be the regret of having been at war
with God, but instead, that this position has cost them their suprem-
acy and kingship.
"The wicked are filled with regret, not because of their sinful ne-
glect of God and their fellow men, but because God has conquered.
They lament that the result is what it is; but they do not repent of
their wickedness. They would leave no means untried to conquer if
they could." Great Controversy, 654.
As fully as the whole world, apart from the sealed saints of God,
will be on the side of Satan, they will, in turn, see that they have
been deluded, and as fully turn against him so that there will not be a
single individual on his side. He will have staked all to win all, but
will, instead, find that he will lose all. Both the people, who are the
deceived masses and the ministry, who will be the principal agents in
executing this work of deception, will see the path along which they
will have been led, and will react with violent and blood-thirsty
speed.
"The people see that they have been deluded. They accuse one
another of having led them to destruction; but all unite in heaping
their bitterest condemnation upon the ministers. Unfaithful pastors
have prophesied smooth things; they have led their hearers to make
void the law of God and to persecute those who would keep it holy.
Now, in their despair, these teachers confess before the world their
work of deception. The multitudes are filled with fury. 'We are lost!'
they cry, 'and you are the cause of our ruin;' and they turn upon the
false shepherds. The very ones that once admired them most will
pronounce the most dreadful curses upon them. The very hands that
once crowned them with laurels will be raised for their destruction.
The swords which were to slay God's people are now employed to
destroy their enemies. Everywhere there is strife and bloodshed."
Great Controversy, 655, 656.
Thus the very last opportunity for Satan to win the great contro-
versy this side of the advent of Jesus will have passed away forever.
Those servants upon whom, through the power of deception, he has
depended for success, now prove to be his enemies and would-be de-
stroyers. Thus the coming of the fifth plague does indeed introduce a
THE HOUR OF DELIVERANCE 341

vast and sudden change in the whole framework of the end times. It
is the beginning of the final ending of the plots and plans of wicked-
ness, and it is the time for the deliverance of the people of God.
So great and tremendous will this change in proceedings be, that
even nature itself will be turned upside down and out of its course. It
is time to return now to page 636, whereon is to be found the direct
reference to the coming of the darkness, the glory of the encircling
rainbow, and the opening of the heavens to the saints, whence they
hear the voice delivering them from the power of the kingdom of
darkness. Here we learn that it will be "at midnight that God mani-
fests His power for the deliverance of His people. The sun appears,
shining in its strength. Signs and wonders follow in quick succession.
The wicked look with terror and amazement upon the scene, while
the righteous behold with solemn joy the tokens of their deliverance.
Everything in nature seems turned out of its course. The streams
cease to flow. Dark, heavy clouds come up and clash against each
other. In the midst of the angry heavens is one clear space of inde-
scribable glory, whence comes the voice of God like the sound of
many waters, saying, 'It is done.' Revelation 16:17."
This statement confirms that the attempt to destroy the righteous
does indeed take place in the dead of the night. It is reasonable to
conclude that the wicked will be using artificial light to locate and kill
the people of the Lord. This give us some idea of the denseness of
the darkness, which is so great that it is darkness far exceeding that
of the darkness of night itself. If this darkness had descended during
the brightness of the noonday hour, the contrast would have been
very great, but we would have had but little to enable us to under-
stand how truly dark that darkness will be. But when we see that it is
darkness greater than the physical hour of darkness in which the act
is to be done, then we can see that it is darkness of the deepest kind;
a darkness through which even the brightest electric lights will not be
able to shine. As such it will be symbolic of the depth of the darkness
to which the wicked will have descended.
Then, in that midnight hour the sun appears, shining in its
strength. A greater convulsion of nature than a switch from midnight
to midday is hardly possible, and it is understandable, that "every-
thing in nature" will seem to be turned "out of its course." Ominous
to the wicked with the portent of oncoming destruction will be the
coming up of the dark, heavy clouds which will, in the violence of
their coming as generated by the complete turning of the whole
world out of its natural course, clash wildly and stormily against one
another. In the midst of all this fury and thundering will be that one
clear space of indescribable glory from which will utter forth the
342 LAST DAY EVENTS

voice of God Himself, with the brief and climactic declaration, "It is
done!"
Reference to Revelation 16:17, shows that this voice is heard
immediately upon the outpouring of the seventh vial upon the earth.
Reading further on to page 637 of The Great Controversy, it is seen
that the full fury of the seventh plague does follow right on in the cor-
rect order on this page. There is the earthquake and the hail, by
which the total destruction of all the palaces and temples, the busi-
ness houses, and the houses of sin are brought down to final and to-
tal ruin.
However, the study of the sixth plague must come before that of
the seventh. Thus far, it does not seem to have appeared. The fifth
plague is described on the top lines of page 636, while at the bottom
of the same page is found the declaration from God, which is the
very first event of the seventh plague. Elsewhere we have found that
both in the Bible and in The Great Controversy, the plagues are in-
troduced in their order, so that we would naturally be led to expect
that the fifth and the seventh plagues should appear here with the
sixth in between them.
Yet, it is true that there is no mention made at all of the great river
Euphrates, by actual name, on this page under consideration. There
is the darkness of the fifth plague with the events which follow right
on thereafter, but not a word of the river Euphrates, by name, nor of
the nations which are located on or around that river.
Does this mean that the sixth plague is omitted from this study as
set out in The Great Controversy? Does this mean that that plague
which has been the focal point of so much interest and study should
have no mention at all in this book? There are many who have ex-
pressed with considerable surprise the thought that nothing is said in
the Spirit of Prophecy writings in regard to the drying up of the great
river Euphrates, and so little in regard to the great and final battle of
Armageddon.
But it is to be seen that the sixth plague has not been recognized
as such, and, therefore, has not been seen for what it actually and re-
ally is on this page of The Great Controversy where it should and
does appear between the fifth and the seventh plagues. A failure to
understand the true principles of prophetic interpretation has led so
many to look for the wrong thing, even though they look in the right
place. This is not an uncommon mistake in history. The Jews are still
looking for the coming of the Messiah—without knowing that He has
already come and gone—simply because they were and are looking
for a very different kind of person from the One who actually ap-
peared, even though they looked where and when they should have
been looking, and even though He came exactly as prophesied.
THE HOUR OF DELIVERANCE 343

Having studied in some detail the first five plagues and having
reached the point of time in our study when the sixth plague is to be
seen and understood exactly and actually as it is, we shall turn, then,
to the study of the principles of interpretation, which will plainly
show just what the sixth plague actually is. Then we shall have not
the least difficulty in seeing it right there in its proper place in The
Great Controversy, right between the fifth and the seventh plagues.
Chapter 31

The River Euphrates

The sixth plague is the drying up of the great river Euphrates so
that the way of the Kings from the East might be prepared.
"Then the sixth angel poured out his bowl on the great river
Euphrates, and its water was dried up, so that the way of the kings
from the east might be prepared." Revelation 16:12.
There is material in this text to provide a great deal of study for
the earnest student of the Word of God, but there will not be space
enough to cover it all here. Rather, an effort will be made to lay down
the main points concerning this climactic event, and leave the reader
to pursue the topic further for himself. A separate series on this topic
alone is planned in the future.
A beginning must be made in understanding just what the sixth
plague is by asking the question, What is the river Euphrates and
what is the drying up of it?
This question will at once turn the mind of the average reader to
the river Euphrates which flows through modern Iraq into the Per-
sian Gulf. This, in turn, revives visions of that great city, Babylon,
which in ancient times sat astride that river, and continued to do so
until the waters of it were dried up as a preparation for the coming of
the king from the East, Cyrus, the anointed of the Lord. Then came
the fall of that city, never to rise again.
But the physical river itself still flows on its way down to the sea,
much as it did in those far gone times. When the river again appears
in the book of Revelation, as still having significance in these last
days, then the minds of the average students turn to that geographi-
cal feature, and look in that spot on the earth for the fulfillment of
the text now under consideration. It is concluded by them that the
countries which dwell astride the river must be dried up, so that the
way of the kings from the eastern nations of China and Japan can
find an unobstructed way of access to the plains of Esdraelon where,
as they suppose, the battle of Armageddon is to be fought.
This is unfortunate, for this method of interpretation is in viola-
tion of one of the most fundamental and most easily proved of all
principles of interpretation. Furthermore, it is a violation of the basic
THE RIVER EUPHRATES 345

principles of the gospel as it attaches more significance to where you

are than it does to what you are.
It is essential to see and understood that where you are is not the
important thing, so far as God is concerned. That which is the great
concern of the Lord is what you are, no matter where you may be.
Therefore it is to be seen that geography has nothing at all to do with
the identification of Bible symbols in the sure Word of prophecy.
This principle is easily proved. Long ago there rested astride the
great river Euphrates a great city named Babylon, which was de-
scribed by Jeremiah again and again as the King of the North—the
great destroyer and enemy of God's people. It is a mistake, however,
to suppose that when God looked down upon that city, He saw it as a
political power in a fixed geographical location. What God saw was a
great apostate religious system at war with the most basic principles
of the gospel and in full support of the devil. What God saw was that
religious system using the power of the armies of that city for the fur-
therance of her war against Heaven, so that the political machine in
the geographical location of that place served but to further the ends
of the apostasy.
The time came when the city, as a geographical location, was re-
duced to utter ruin at the same time as the political power of Babylon
passed away, never to rise again. But Babylon, the apostasy which
was Babylon—as God saw Babylon—did not pass away. True, it
ceased to be found in that geographical location, but this did not
mean that she ceased to be found, for in her new geographical loca-
tion, Babylon was still Babylon in every sense of the word. She was
exactly the same in character, in intentions, in spirit, and in her sub-
tle camouflaged warfare against heaven. Her geography had
changed, but her character and work had not, and as surely as the
Lord called her Babylon when she was upon the banks of the
Euphrates, so surely does He call that same evil power Babylon
wherever she finds a base of operation. It is not a matter of where she
is, but what she is, which determines her name.
No one seems to have any difficulty in seeing this in regard to
Babylon. When the modern Bible student reads the references to
Babylon in Revelation, his mind does not go seeking her within the
geographical limitations of the location of the ancient city by that
name. He seeks, instead, the real Babylon which was within that city
and rode upon her political and military power, and he finds her in all
the world, marshalling the political and military powers of the whole
earth in preparation for her final attempt to overthrow the govern-
ment of God, and to establish her own supremacy in its place.
This same principle must, and does hold good for every other
identification of last day powers. Israel is the name which was held by
346 LAST DAY EVENTS

a nation of people in ancient times, but again God did not see there a
political kingdom with the power of its money and armies, but He
looked down and saw His truth and the people who held to that
truth.
I am not saying that every Israelite was a power for the truth, for
there were the false mingled with the true. Those who were faithful
to the light from heaven were those whom Jehovah recognized as be-
ing true Israel, not the rebels, the careless, or the apostates.
The political power of Israel still exists today, but the truth is no
longer there, except for the possibility of there being some faithful
souls hidden from our view. There will certainly be some found there
when the loud cry breaks.
But in the meantime, we do not find the truth there, nor do we
find the people of the truth there. Both have moved away to find ref-
uge in other geographical regions, and as surely as the truth of God
has never ceased to exist, then just so surely Israel has never ceased
to exist. Israel is to be found wherever the truth of God and the peo-
ple of God are to be found.
This is also true of the third and one remaining power—Egypt—
the king of the south. While Babylon is apostate and counterfeit re-
ligion, and Israel is the truth of God, Egypt is atheism, for she waged
open, avowed warfare against the God of heaven, such as is the
stand of the Communist and heathen worlds of today. Just as both
Babylon and Israel appear in the last book of the Bible, so does
Egypt—the king of the south. The reference is found in Revelation
11:8. No doubt or question as to who and where Egypt is at the time
referred to in the prophecy is left in our minds, because in The Great
Controversy, 269, we are most plainly told that it was to be found in
the land of revolutionary France at that time.
Here is the statement:
The great city' in whose streets the witnesses are slain, and
where their dead bodies lie, is 'spiritually' Egypt. Of all nations pre-
sented in Bible history, Egypt most boldly denied the existence of the
living God and resisted His commands. No monarch ever ventured
upon more open and highhanded rebellion against the authority of
Heaven than did the king of Egypt. When the message was brought
him by Moses, in the name of the Lord, Pharaoh proudly answered:
'Who is Jehovah, that I should hearken unto His voice to let Israel
go? I know not Jehovah, and moreover I will not let Israel go.' Exo-
dus 5:2, A.R. V. This is atheism, and the nation represented by Egypt
would give voice to a similar denial of the claims of the living God
and would manifest a like spirit of unbelief and defiance. 'The great
city' is also compared, 'spiritually,' to Sodom. The corruption of
Sodom in breaking the law of God was especially manifested in licen-
THE RIVER EUPHRATES 347

tiousness. And this sin was also to be a pre-eminent characteristic of

the nation that should fulfill the specifications of this scripture."
A careful reading of this statement shows that not the least con-
sideration is given to geography when identifying the power referred
to as Egypt. The only consideration given was to the character of the
power sought. When that character was discovered, then spiritual
Egypt was rediscovered; not then located on the banks of the Nile,
but over in France, as it then was, that is, during the French Revolu-
tion. Likewise, today Egypt is still with us, and is to be found wher-
ever the spirit of open, avowed warfare against God is alive.
These evidences should be sufficient to show that geographical
considerations have nothing to do with the identification of pro-
phetic symbols, which did have geographical locations in ancient
times. Therefore, there is no need to even begin to look in the direc-
tion of the modern, physical river Euphrates to find what the river
signifies in Revelation in order to learn what the drying up of the
river signifies. Instead, we must find the character of the river as it
appeared in Old Testament times, and then trace that character
through to the end. Then, when we have found that, we shall know
where and what the river is today, and will be able to understand the
drying up of it as well.
The river Euphrates first appears in the Garden of Eden, and was
one of the rivers of life which supported the living creatures in that
perfect creation. As the river of life in the paradise of God, it was
clearly symbolic of the living power of God's Spirit flowing out to the
sustenance of both the physical and spiritual life of the human family,
and it would be the plan and purpose of God that it would always be
that. God never intended that any other power should supplant His
power in the support of the creatures made by His hands.
This is not because God is highly possessive of that which He has
made, and jealously and selfishly refuses to share this dominion with
another, as is the case with earthly and Satanic potentates. God
knows that He is the only One with the power to sustain life and pro-
vide for the happiness of all His creatures. He knows that His is not
just the best way, but that it is the only way of fulfillment and happi-
ness. There are no alternatives. Every other way is a way of sorrow,
ending in death. It is from this that the Lord desires to save His crea-
tion, and it is for this reason, a reason which is entirely in their inter-
ests, for which He is responsible, that the Lord intends that no
authority shall replace His own.
But this is not understood by those who have been deceived by
Satan's sophistries. Accordingly, they turn away from the River of
Life which in Eden was called "the Euphrates". The living waters
carried God's sustaining, healing power to all who drank from it, just
[LDE23]
348 LAST DAY EVENTS

as the River of Life in the new earth will do the same for all who will
drink from it there.
No longer is physical Eden, the Garden of God, located on this
earth, and therefore, the Euphrates, which is the River of Life, is not
to be found down here either. There is another stream—the outflow-
ing of the Holy Spirit who is the living presence of the power of God
in the earth and in the soul—which today sustains the believer in Je-
sus and which is symbolized by the flowing of the great river
Euphrates as it was found in the Garden of Eden. When that dries up
by our grieving away the Holy Spirit, the soul is left destitute of the
power of God.
Fearful as this loss is, the soul is unaware that the Spirit of God
has departed from him, and blames the world around him for his
troubles, rather than recognizing that it is in himself that the trouble
now lies. Then it is that the evil one is right there to offer the substi-
tute power—the power of compulsion and force, which is the way of
his kingdom—as an alternative to the power which has been lost.
This is accepted quite eagerly and gladly, and wherever it is, there
you find Babylon built, not now upon the river of God, but upon the
river of sin. That is but to say, that it is built, not upon the power of
God and His Spirit, but upon the power of force and compulsion,
whereby each individual is forced to do the will of the powers that be.
See this in ancient Babylon, when, the image having been
erected, the king commanded that all should bow and worship it, or
suffer, as the alternative, a fearful death in the burning fiery furnace.
Nor was the furnace there merely as a threat which the king did not
really intend to carry out, for when those three, who alone of all that
company were filled with the Holy Spirit, demonstrated that there
was a power in them greater than the power of Babylon, they were
thrown into that furnace from which they escaped only by the power
and presence of God.
Perhaps nowhere is this better illustrated than in the way in
which the beast was formed in the rise to power of the Roman Catho-
lic system in the early ages. The following quotation from Great Em-
pires of Prophecy, 472, by A. T. Jones, plainly sets forth the facts of
this:
"The church was fully conscious of her loss of the power of God
before she sought the power of the State. Had she not been, she
never would have made any overtures to the imperial authority, nor
have received with favor any advances from it. There is a power that
belongs with the gospel of Christ, and is inseparable from the truth
of the gospel; that is, the power of God. In fact, the gospel is but the
manifestation of that power; for the gospel 'is the power of God unto
salvation to everyone that believeth.' As long, therefore, as any or-
THE RIVER EUPHRATES 349

der or organization of people professing the gospel of Christ main-

tains in sincerity the principle of that gospel, so long the power of
God will be with them, and they will have no need of any other
power to make their influence felt for good wherever known. But just
as soon as any person or association professing the gospel loses the
spirit of it, so soon the power is gone also. Then, and only then,
does such an organization seek for another kind of power to supply
the place of that which is lost.
"Thus was it with the church at this time. She had fallen, deplor-
ably fallen, from the purity and the truth, and therefore from the
power, of the gospel. And having lost the power of God and of godli-
ness, she greedily grasped for the power of the State and of ungodli-
ness. And to secure laws by which she might enforce her discipline
and dogmas upon those whom she had lost the power either to con-
vince or to persuade, was the definite purpose which the bishopric
had in view when it struck that bargain with Constantine, and lent
him the influence of the church in his imperial aspirations." Empha-
sis original.
It follows, then, that Babylon is built upon the coerced powers of
the people. In fact, one has but to read the history of the Papacy and
of the Protestant Reformation to see that the papal church was pow-
erless to do anything unless she had the authority of the king behind
her. There were times when the church determined the death of cer-
tain Protestants, but because she could not secure the authority of
the king, she was not able to execute her baleful will. Therefore God
has but to take away the power of the state, which is the power of the
people, from Babylon and she is powerless, having neither the
power of God to win the people, nor the power of the state to force
them. This is exactly how the Lord reduced the power of the papacy
by the power of His written Word, when its messages were made
clear by the presence and power of His Holy Spirit. It was the pres-
entation of the Holy Scriptures which robbed the Papacy of the sup-
port of kings and princes, and brought about her complete downfall.
Now the important point is this: When the church turns away
from the power of God and takes up the alternative people-power,
and money-power, she does not do this in open, avowed warfare
against God, but rather declares that she is still the servant and
vicegerent of God in the earth. To convince the world, the apostate
church adopts a counterfeit of everything which belongs to the true.
Thus it is that everything in that system is the counterfeit of the
real and the original, and because it is a counterfeit, intended to de-
ceive, that deception could not be complete nor completely effective
unless the counterfeit was called by the same name as the true. Now
everything in that system which has been counterfeited includes the
350 LAST DAY EVENTS

The great symbolical river, the Euphrates, on which Babylon de-

pends for her support, is money-power and people-power. Let that
be dried up, and Babylon's fall is an absolute certainty. On the
other hand, God's true people are not in the least dependant on
these resources, for God's power is sufficient for them.

power which sustains it, which power, while they claim it to be the
power of God in their midst, is nothing of the kind, but rather the
power of human support and Satanic support.
The power of God, as symbolized by the river of Life—the great
river Euphrates in the Garden of Eden—was the great original.
Therefore, if every other thing which appertained to the kingdom of
God was counterfeited and in its counterfeited form was given the
same name as the original, either in symbolic or real form, then must
THE RIVER EUPHRATES 351

we not expect that the name of the river of God, as a symbol of God's
power, should be given to the river of Satan as the symbol of his
power?
In the Paradise of God in the Garden of Eden, the kingdom of
God was built around the great river Euphrates. Satan knew this,
and, as it was his plan to reproduce as perfect a counterfeit as possi-
ble of the kingdom of God in this world—the masterpiece of that be-
ing Babylon of old—he chose to have it built astride the great river
Euphrates, so that men, when looking for the real, might find the
false with no detail missing, and thus be induced to serve the false in
the place of the true.
The river Euphrates was, indeed and in fact, a river of life to an-
cient Babylon. It provided both sustenance and protection to the
city. Babylon was no ordinary city wherein the inhabitants usually
lived within the protection of the walls and then went outside to farm
the land and provide food and clothing for themselves. The walls of
the city enclosed well over a thousand acres. Within those walls
there was space for farming, to the extent that they were able to grow
enough food to withstand a siege indefinitely, even though there
should come a drought upon the land. The everflowing river pro-
vided a reliable and ceaseless supply of water. Thus the river was a
source of physical sustenance to the dwellers within.
But it also provided protection, for around the city was a wide,
deep moat which was fed and kept filled by the waters of the river.
This made the storming of the walls an impossibility. Thus the river
also provided protection for the city, making it a river of life in the
double sense that it preserved the existing life of Babylon from the
danger of attack, and it sustained the life of the city by guaranteeing
it a permanent water supply, both for drinking and for agriculture. It
is important that this be noticed, for it has a bearing on the river
Euphrates of the last days.
All that Babylon was back there in that confined geographical lo-
cation was a type of what Babylon is and will be in the last days of
earth's history, and has, in fact, ever been, wherever and whenever
the devil has rebuilt her. And this is so because the intentions and
purposes of Satan have never changed. He has a determination to
set up a rival kingdom against God, and to lead the whole world into
the service of that kingdom, so that he can establish his claims
against the God of heaven.
Therefore, when he failed to achieve that, as a permanent dy-
nasty on the physical banks of the ancient river, he neither aban-
doned his intentions nor sought to achieve it in any other way. This,
then, is to say that he will again build his city—Babylon—and again
he will sit it astride the great river Euphrates. Only this time we do
352 • LAST DAY EVENTS

not look for a physical city of buildings as the geographical confines

of that attempt, nor do we look for a physical river of actual water on
which that mystical city will be standing.
To find the city, we look for the same system, the same character,
the same rule of force, the same counterfeiting of all that is God's or
that is called God, and the same relentless hatred against the true
people of the Lord. Having found that, we have found that great city
Babylon. Then, to find the river, we look for that to which she looks
for sustenance and protection; for the modern river Euphrates,
which is connected to Babylon in the closing up of the earth's his-
tory, must bear the same relationship to Babylon today as it did back
there in the days of Daniel.
The same power to which the great city looks today for her suste-
nance and protection is the power of the people; which is the power
of kings and presidents. We are distinctly told in Revelation 17:15,
that:
"The waters which you saw, where the prostitute sits, are peo-
ples, multitudes, nations, and tongues."
These words are spoken to us to explain the picture as given in
verse one where John was told he would be shown
"the judgment of the great prostitute who sits on many waters.''
In verse five her name is revealed as being "MYSTERY, BABY-
LON THE GREAT, THE MOTHER OF PROSTITUTES AND OF
THE ABOMINATIONS OF THE EARTH.''
Exactly then, as we find in the Old Testament Satan's early at-
tempt to build an everlasting counterfeit of the kingdom of God, (the
great city Babylon was then built astride the waters of that river
Euphrates, which was the symbol of the power and the life that was
both the protection and sustenance of that city), so the picture given
to us of the Babylon of the last days is that she is sitting astride many
waters, which are a symbol of the power of the peoples and nations
of the earth. It is most obvious that if the counterfeit name given to
the symbol of Babylon's power back then was Euphrates, then inas-
much as Babylon claims she "never errs nor can err," there can be
no change in the counterfeit name of the powers to which she now
turns in the place of the power of God. Those many waters upon
which symbolic and mystical Babylon ride are indeed the waters of
the Euphrates River.
In the original fall of Babylon, it was the drying up of those wa-
ters which prepared the way for the kings of the East, namely Cyrus
and his armies. And in the final fall of Babylon, those waters, which
will then be the support of the masses of the people, will be com-
pletely dried up to open the way for the kings of the East, who, as we
will learn, will be the perfect counterpart or antitype of King Cyrus.
THE RIVER EUPHRATES 353

It follows, then, that if we are going to understand the fall of mod-

ern Babylon, we must be conversant with the fall of ancient Babylon;
for the very way in which the Lord took away her protection and sup-
port then, is the same way in which He will take away her protection
and support in the near future.
Chapter 32

The Sixth Plague

In our search to understand just what is meant by the drying up of
the river Euphrates so that the way of the kings of the East might be
prepared, it has been found that in the interpretation of last day sym-
bols, geography has no weight and no bearing whatsoever. We have
learned that originally the Euphrates was found in the Garden of
Eden, as the river of life in that Garden; so it was a symbol of the liv-
ing power of God to sustain the life of all creation.
We saw that when men turn away from the power of God, they
seek an alternative, which is the power of force vested by God in the
hands of the earthly kingdoms. We saw how Satan built his kingdom
astride the Euphrates as the counterfeit of the kingdom in the Gar-
den of Eden which was built around the original Euphrates river.
That kingdom, built in the days of the mighty Nebuchadnezzar, hav-
ing failed, the devil in the last days seeks to rebuild mystical Babylon
again on the waters of the symbolic Euphrates, which waters are the
vast river of human support upon which Babylon is dependent for
sustenance and protection.
The rebuilding of Babylon will be by the self-same warfare which
the evil one has waged against the Lord from the dawn of time, and
the Lord's reply to it will be the unchanging answer of righteousness.
Therefore the Lord will deal with the building of Babylon the Great
today exactly as He dealt with the Babylon of Daniel's day; by which
we can be assured that the study of the way in which the original
Babylon fell will be to us a clear revelation of the way in which mod-
ern Babylon will fall.
One has but to compare the history of what happened there with
the declaration in Revelation of the fall to come, to see that it will be
the most exact repetition of events, though on a much wider and
grander scale.
Back there Babylon had reached the height of her apostasy when
she was prepared to take the sacred vessels of the Lord and drink
from them in her drunken exaltation of her system of worship. So,
too, in the last days the sins of Babylon will have reached to heaven
when she takes the sacred things of God and uses them for her own
worship.
THE SIXTH PLAGUE 355

Back there the Euphrates was dried up so that the way of the
kings from the East might be prepared, by which they entered the
city which fell in one night, never to ever rise again. So, too, the
Word of prophecy in Revelation 16:12 declares that the sixth angel
will pour "out his bowl on the great river Euphrates, and its water"
will be "dried up, so that the way of the kings from the east might be
prepared."
Back there that city fell to rise no more. Likewise, modern Baby-
lon will fall, never to rise again.
Not only is this parallel true for the rising and falling of Babylon
in those first and final instances, but it is true wherever we find Baby-
lon. Some will point to Revelation 9:14, and claim that the principle
is violated there, because, as they believe, the Euphrates there sym-
bolizes Turkey. But this is to misunderstand the symbolism of the
chapter. The river Euphrates in this chapter represents exactly what
it represents in any other chapter of the Bible. In the first instance
when in Eden, it represents the power of God. In the second in-
stance, it represents the power which takes the place of the power of
God; which power is the power of force or the power of sin. In Reve-
lation 9, there is neither deviation from, nor denial of this principle.
The whole subject of Revelation 9 is the battle between the King
of the North, which is Babylon, as centered in Rome at that time,
and the King of the South, which is atheism, centered in the Otto-
man Empire at that time. Atheism is the Beast from the bottomless
pit, as is made plain from the prophecy in Revelation 11. There is
not the space to explore this fully here, but the proof of this is found
by comparing Revelation 11:8 with The Great Controversy, page
269. The comparison of these two references will make it quite clear
that the power which comes up out of the bottomless pit is atheism.
Then turning to the beginning of the ninth chapter of Revela-
tion, we find that, to the star was given the key of the bottomless pit,
which he opens, and out of it, not out of the Euphrates, comes these
Mohammedan powers which went forth when released against the
empires under the control of and in support of the Papacy.
The Papacy is the Babylon of the Middle Ages. She sat in the city
of Rome, protected on all sides by a vast circle of nations, which not
only sustained her by pouring their wealth in a never ending flow into
her coffers, but protected her from her enemy, the King of the South.
In order for the powers of the Turks to reach and destroy Rome, they
would first have to cross the waters or peoples in between, or effec-
tively dry up those waters.
But there is only One who can dry up the waters and that is God.
This is true, even though it was an atheistic general from what had
become an atheistic nation which took the Pope prisoner in 1798.
356 LAST DAY EVENTS

But it was not the power of atheism which had dried up the river of
human support so that the Pope found himself without a protector at
that time. It was the power of the gospel in the Reformation which
had taken away his power. No one can study the history of the Refor-
mation without coming to this conclusion.
The picture in Europe during the Middle Ages was that there was
Babylon surrounded by the nations of Europe, which, being the peo-
ple of the land, were symbolized by waters; as the people of the
world always are in Bible prophecy. But they were the water which
gave their sustenance and support to Babylon. Therefore, they must
be the waters of the Euphrates. Then beyond those nations, at the
very banks, as it were, of the Euphrates, were those atheistic nations
which had come up out of the bottomless pit and which lusted to
pass through those waters to destroy the heart of Babylon.
This they could not do while the four angles held in check the
four winds of strife. In order to hold back that strife, these angels
must stand between the two powers facing each other. If we think of
Europe as the Euphrates—the nations of Europe upon which water
Rome was built and sat—then you must think of the Turks as being at
the very banks of that mighty stream with the angels who hold back
the four winds of strife between them and Rome which then was
Babylon. This would mean that the four angels would be at the very
banks of the Euphrates, bound there to do their work of restraint un-
til they should be loosed. Then when they were loosed, the Turks
would have nothing to restrain them from advancing into the waters
on their journey to Rome.
The rendering of the text in the authorized or old King James
Version of the Bible tends to be misleading in this respect, for it
speaks of the four angels being bound in the great river Euphrates,
whereas the German translation and the Revised Standard Version
both render the text "at the great river Euphrates." This is a more
accurate version of this particular text, and conveys the true mean-
ing of the prophecy. It is worthwhile noting that although at this time
the physical Euphrates was there in the territory of the Turks, it had
nothing to do with the symbolism of the prophecy. Its being there did
not make it the symbol of the Turkish Empire at all, and it would be a
serious mistake to suppose that it did, for to do so would mean violat-
ing the principles of prophetic interpretation.
One may raise the question as to what river was dried up in the
fall of Babylon in 1844. This is a valid question, for Babylon can
never fall except there be the drying up of the river first. Yet it is true
that in 1844, there was no river of human support dried up.
In reality, we should not expect that there would be, for the fall
which overtook Babylon in 1844 was not the same fall which over-
THE SIXTH PLAGUE 357

took Babylon in the days of Daniel and which will overtake Great
Babylon again in the end of time. This fall in Daniel's day was the
physical and material fall into permanent destruction, whereas the
fall in 1844 was the spiritual fall into the true Babylonian condition,
which spiritual fall is the drying up of the true river Euphrates of
which the river in the Garden is the symbol.
In 1844, as a result of their rejection of the message of the first
and the second angels, the Spirit of God left the churches, and they
became destitute of the river of life which flows from the throne of
God to His true people. This, then, leads the churches to turn to an-
other source of power and strength, the support of the power of the
state, which is the power of nations and kindreds and tongues and
peoples.
Intensely, the churches are courting the world today, until the
time will come when they will have gained the full protection and
support of the powers of this world, who will finally go forth in obe-
dience to her will to destroy God's people from off the face of all the
earth. Thus it has to be seen, that in the experience of all those who
are finally lost, there must be two falls following the two dryings up
of the two Euphrates; the first is the drying up of the true, the second
is that of the counterfeit.
First, the river of God's power—the indwelling presence of His
Spirit—dries up as a result of the rejection of the truth. This is a fall
into spiritual death and apostasy. Then there is the turning to the al-
ternative power of force, which power serves only as long as the
great deception continues. Then it dries up to leave no other sources
of life and sustenance, with the result that the fall which then comes
is one from which there is no rising.
When these principles are understood, there is not the least diffi-
culty in seeing the sixth plague as being located exactly where it
should be located; right there between the fifth and the seventh
plagues, on page 636 of The Great Controversy.
As the fifth is about to fall, we see the vast multitudes of all the
earth rushing in one predetermined night upon the true people of
God to effect their destruction. Like a mighty, destructive flood, this
torrent of humanity bears down upon its prey. This is the time when
Babylon holds full sway over all the world as a result of her having de-
ceived all nations, and kindred, and tongues, and peoples into giving
to her their sustenance and support. But there will be this one class
of people, few in numbers, scattered throughout the whole world,
and despised of all nations, who will have refused to bow to the su-
premacy of Babylon, and who, because of the power of God within
them, threaten the security of Babylon through their power to un-
mask the deception by which she alone is able to continue.
358 LAST DAY EVENTS

THE GREAT ORIGINAL RIVER EUPHRATES

AND ITS COUNTERFEIT
The River of Life was in the Garden of Eden
When Sin Entered, Man had no Access to that River
The People suffered a Spiritual Fall
They Then Turned to People-power and Money-power
This was a Counterfeit Euphrates
This was Babylon's Supporter.

THE DRYING UP OF THE RIVER EUPHRATES

IN THE COMPLETE FALL
OF ANCIENT BABYLON
The Babylonians Were an Apostate Religious System
They Depended on that Great River for Life Support and
Protection
They Depended on it in the Place of the River of Life
For a Time it Fulfilled that Purpose in Respect to Physical Life
By Drinking Babylonian Wine From Sanctuary Vessels, Their
Apostasy became Complete.
The Kings from the East, led by King Cyrus, Dried up the River
Thus the Way of the Kings from the East was Prepared
Babylon, Long Since Spiritually Fallen, now Fell Physically
She Would Never Rise again
Cyrus was a Type of Christ Who Alone has the Power to
Destroy Babylon
King Cyrus was Called of God to Set the Captives Free

THE GREAT RIVER EUPHRATES

UNDER THE SIXTH TRUMPET
The Application of the Symbol (The Euphrates) must be
Consistent
So, the Euphrates Here Must be the Multitudes Supporting
Babylon
They were the Nations of Europe which Surrounded Rome and
Saved her
The Locusts From the Bottomless Pit were Atheistic Powers
These (the Mohammedans) Aimed to Dry up the River but
Failed
Even so, they Effected an Immense Toll of Human Life
THE SIXTH PLAGUE 359

THE DRYING UP OF THE GREAT RIVER

EUPHRATES UNDER THE SIXTH PLAGUE
The Drying up of the Euphrates Prepares the Way for the
Kings from the East
Christ and His Armies are the Kings from the East
There can be no Second Coming until the Waters are Dried Up
When the Waters are Dried Up, Babylon's Fall will be
Complete
There will Come the Night when a Great Flood of the Wicked
will Rush out to Kill the Saints Under Babylon's Commands
Their Weapons Will be Raised to Destroy
Before They Can Fall, the Blackness of the Fifth Plague
Intervenes
The Angry Multitudes (the Great River Euphrates) are
Suddenly Arrested
Then a Rainbow Encircles Each Praying Company
The Voice of God Delivers His People
The Great River of Support for Babylon, Euphrates,
Completely Dries Up
This is the Sixth Plague
The Earthquake and Hail of the Seventh Plague Follow
The Kings from the East, Christ and His Armies, Appear
Great Babylon Has Fallen, Never to Rise Again Anymore

Therefore this great mass of people, who are doing the will of
Babylon thereby provide her protection and her support, and, there-
fore, are those waters which symbolically are called Euphrates. This
is the water to be dried up under the sixth plague to make way for the
coming of the Kings of the East. But, at this moment, Babylon will be
very confident that so vast and so united a stream of loyal humanity,
opposed by so few, could never be dried up, so she will exult that
complete victory is within her grasp.
In the very last possible moment of time remaining, wherein the
blow will not yet have fallen upon the saints of God, darkness blots
the whole scene from view. The wicked are unable to direct their
weapons, and the people of God escape from the death, which a mo-
ment before, seemed to be so certain.
Then, in the next moment, there appears the rainbow, shining
with that glory from the throne of God, which not one of the wicked
would either dare or have the power to penetrate. "The angry multi-
360 LAST DAY EVENTS

tudes are suddenly arrested. Their mocking cries die away. The ob-
jects of their murderous rage are forgotten. With fearful forebodings
they gaze upon the symbol of God's covenant and long to be shielded
from its overpowering brightness." Great Controversy, 636.
The great river is suddenly drained of all forward motion, just as it
was when Cyrus diverted its flow into the side trenches which led to
the marshes. But worse is to come. Upon their startled senses, scene
after scene passes in rapid succession, each one, in turn, arousing
new areas of awareness in their minds. At first the suspicion is im-
planted that maybe they have made a terrible and fearful mistake:
that they are the subjects of a mighty deception. Then, as they hear
strange voices from heaven, obviously in communication with those
whom they had but a moment before been determined to kill; as they
see the lighting up of the countenances of those who were but so re-
cently the subjects of the most bitter persecution; as they hear the
shouts of victory; as they see the sun appear at midnight; the com-
plete reversal and upheaval of all nature; the streams ceasing to flow;
the dark angry clouds rolling in violent clashings and thunderings
against one another, there in the midst of the heavens—that one
clear space of indescribable glory—the voice of God like the sound of
many waters is heard proclaiming that all is accomplished.
By the time they have been witnesses to all this, suspicion has de-
veloped into the firm and terrible conviction that they are totally lost
and all because of the fearful deception practiced upon them by
Babylon. So obvious is the fact of this, that even the ministers
frankly confess their work of deception. Now the fury of the multi-
tudes will know no limits as with bloodthirsty and revengeful vio-
lence they turn upon the ministry—the prime servants of Babylon.
Euphrates will again have dried up and Great Babylon comes to her
end and finds that she has none to help her. She has turned away
from the power of God, so she can find no help there. She has basely
deceived the nations into helping and sustaining her, and now that
they see the deception practiced upon them to their utter ruin, they
withdraw all their help from her, leaving her nakedly exposed to their
vengeance. There is no one else to turn to; nowhere else to go and no
place to hide. All is lost and as the millstone which the angel flings
into the deepest depths of the ocean sinks to rise no more, so does
Babylon the Great go down to rise no more at all.
It is worthy of note that the very river which was to Babylon both
protection and sustenance became, in turn, the medium of her de-
struction, for it provided the very way into the heart of Babylon by
which she fell. So again, those very peoples who will be providing
both the sustenance and the support of Babylon will become the
THE SIXTH PLAGUE 361

very means whereby she is brought to final destruction, for it will be

the weapons in their hands which will slay the ministry.
That great river is dried up to prepare the way for the Kings of the
East. This, then, raises the question, Who are the Kings of the East?
Those who look to a geographical interpretation, look to the na-
tions in the east such as India, China, and Japan as the ones who are
to fulfill this prophecy. But the fact is, that in the last days all the
kings of the whole earth will be united under the banner of the Pa-
pacy. There will be that one vast confederacy of evil; that one united
front against God. If the whole world is in the one camp, then what
nations of the earth are left to come from the East? The answer must
be that there will be none!
There were kings from the east in the destruction of the original
Babylon, and the only way to understand who are the kings from the
East in the final battle is to go back and study the character and work
of the kings of the east back there. Then we shall understand who
will be the kings from the East in the final battle.
The sure Word of prophecy had quite a deal to say about King
Cyrus before he was even born. Such divine predictions are to be
found in Isaiah 41 and 45. First, the questions are asked in reference
to Cyrus, "Who raised up one from the east? Who in righteousness
called him to his feet? Who gave the nations before him, and made
him rule over kings? Who gave them as the dust to his sword, as
driven stubble to his bow?" Isaiah 41:2.
"Thus says the Lord to his anointed, to Cyrus, whose right hand I
have held—to subdue nations before him and loose the armour of
kings, to open before him the double doors, so that the gates will not
be shut. . .
"I have raised him up in righteousness, and I will direct all his
ways; he shall build my city and let my exiles go free, not for price
nor reward." Isaiah 45:l, 13.
Here are given to us a list of the details concerning him who was
the king from the east in the old time. And because that king was the
type of the final King from the East, then what was said concerning
him, so far as he was the type, will be true in regard to the King in the
end.
Here is the list: He was called in righteousness to be the instru-
ment of God in the destruction of Babylon, the great enemy of God;
He was God's anointed; All his ways were directed of God; He built
the city of God, Jerusalem; He let go the captives of Babylon, nei-
ther for price nor reward.
Could the non-Christian nations of the far east ever fulfill these
specifications as laid down in the type? Are they called in righteous-
ness? Will all their ways be directed of God? Will they build the city of
362 LAST DAY EVENTS

God, which is the church of God, and will they set free the captives
of Babylon when they will be a part of the city themselves? The an-
swer to all this is a very obvious, No!
Then who is the anointed of the Lord who will lead forth these
armies which will destroy Babylon? Who alone in these last days has
the power to dry up the waters and take away her dominion forever
and ever? Who alone can build the church of God, and who alone
can set free the captives of Babylon without price or reward? The
One called in righteousness from the East, Christ, the Wonderful Re-
deemer. He is the great King from the East who will do all these
things in the end.
But the Scriptures use the plural. It does not say that the way of
the King of the East is prepared, but that the way of the Kings of the
East will be prepared. How can this be when Christ is but the one
King? The fact is, that Christ will not come alone. With Him will be
other kings, such as Elijah, Moses, Enoch, and the others who were
raised when Christ was raised. All of these are kings in heaven now,
as all the redeemed will be in the eternity to come. Does not the
Word say, that "If children, then heirs—heirs of God and joint heirs
with Christ." "And has made us kings and priests to His God and Fa-
ther." "To him who overcomes I will grant to sit with Me on My
throne, as I also overcame and sat down with My Father on His
throne." Romans 8:17; Revelation 1:6; 3:21.
These Scriptures, along with others, make it very plain that the
saints of God will be kings when they go to heaven, therefore,
Moses, Enoch, and Elijah are most certainly kings in the kingdom of
heaven at this very time. Equally certain is the fact that when Jesus
comes again, they will come with Him. So it will not be but the one
King coming from the East, but it will be a number of kings.
Those kings cannot come until the purpose of the great contro-
versy has been fulfilled. That purpose is the revealing of the charac-
ter of Satan on the one hand to the point where all forsake him, and
the character of God on the other where all men see that He is just
and kind and good. In the drying up of the Euphrates, all the wicked
see that they have been deluded, and the ministry even confess their
work of deception, which means that Satan has not one single fol-
lower to stand by him. The purpose of the controversy thus being ful-
filled, there is nothing further to delay the advent of the Saviour, and
He will then return; it being in this sense that the drying up of the
Euphrates makes way for the coming of the Kings of the East.
Thus it will be, that the sixth plague will bring about the end of
Babylon so that she will rise no more forever.
 Chapter 33

Jacob's Trouble
The whole story of the great time of trouble, which follows the
close of probation and sees the coming of the plagues in their order,
is the story of two parallel experiences; the experience of the wicked
as they suffer the judgments of God, and the experience of the right-
eous as they go through the agony and the uncertainty of that terri-
ble time. It is impossible to trace through the experiences of either
party without reference to the other, and yet it is not possible to
cover both of them fully at the same time. Thus, so far, the study has
been concerned with the falling of the seven last plagues which do
have some effect upon the experience of the righteous, but which are
fully felt by the rejecters of the truth. Therefore the study of the seven
last plagues is essentially a study of the events which shall befall the
wicked.
However, during this time the righteous will not be mere specta-
tors of the drama, but will be passing over some difficult and trying
ground themselves. The fifth and sixth plagues mark the end of trou-
blous times for the righteous, for thereafter, they will have been re-
leased from all struggle and agony to watch spellbound the final fate
of their enemies. Before proceeding to the study of the seventh
plague and the second advent of Christ, it would be well to go back to
the close of probation and trace through the experience of the peo-
ple of God up till the beginning of the seventh plague.
Just as the close of human probation is the point of time when
the seven last plagues shall begin to fall, so it will also be the time
when Jacob's trouble will begin. This is made quite clear in the fol-
lowing quotation:
"Jacob's experience during that night of wrestling and anguish
represents the trial through which the people of God must pass just
before Christ's second coming. The prophet Jeremiah, in holy vision
looking down to this time, said, 'We have heard a voice of trembling,
of fear, and not of peace. . . . All faces are turned into paleness. Alas!
for that day is great, so that none is like it: it is even the time of Ja-
cob's trouble; but he shall be saved out of it.' Jeremiah 30:5-7.
"When Christ shall cease His work as Mediator in man's behalf,
then this time of trouble will begin." Patriarchs and Prophets, 201.
ILDE24]
364 LAST DAY EVENTS

This will be the time for the flight of the people of God to the
most solitary and desolate hiding places on the face of the earth. Be-
fore this time, they will, to a large extent, have withdrawn from soci-
ety, for the decree enforcing the papal sabbath—which is the setting
up of the Beast and his Image—will be the sign to leave the large cit-
ies in preparation for the final flight. This is made clear in the follow-
ing statement:
"It is no time now for God's people to be fixing their affections or
laying up their treasure in the world. The time is not far distant,
when, like the early disciples, we shall be forced to seek a refuge in
desolate and solitary places. As the siege of Jerusalem by the Roman
armies was the signal for flight to the Judean Christians, so the as-
sumption of power on the part of our nation in the decree enforcing
the papal sabbath will be a warning to us. It will then be time to leave
the large cities, preparatory to leaving the smaller ones for retired
homes in secluded places among the mountains." Testimonies
5:464, 465.
The making of the image will be the indication of very troublous
times ahead for the people of God, and they will completely aban-
don the large cities at that point of time. Of course, those who are
well aware of the directions of the Lord will have sought country
homes long before that, for the people of God should today be living
out of the large cities altogether. Those who cannot immediately ex-
tricate themselves from their work and businesses should be plan-
ning, for their own sakes, to do this as soon as possible. Otherwise
they will lose all, as did Lot in Sodom, and subject themselves to tri-
als far in excess of that which they would have to bear in the country.
The wise instruction to escape from the cities is a general order
from the Most High, designed by Him to prepare us for receiving and
obeying the specific order which will not only tell us when and how
we are to depart, but will direct us to the refuge prepared for us. See
the Chapter titled "General and Specific Orders", in the book God's
Sabbath Rest, available from Destiny Press.
It is to be expected, however, that there will be at least a number
of city dwellers who will receive the message of the loud cry and will
thus be called out, not only from Babylon the church, but also from
Babylon the cities to join with those who will already have come out
of both.
That coming out of the large cities will be but the first movement
toward ultimate flight. As the death decree is imposed upon them so
that the entire protection of human laws is removed from them, and
they are abandoned to the executioners, then they will take their
flight into the most remote and solitary places on the earth.
Of this flight it is written: "I saw the saints leaving the cities and
JACOB'S TROUBLE 365

villages, and associating together in companies, and living in the

most solitary places. Angels provided them food and water, while the
wicked were suffering from hunger and thirst." Early Writings, 282.
This flight will not pass unnoticed by the enemies of God's peo-
ple, who will by this time be keeping a very close watch over them.
Because of the opposition which they have manifested to the Sunday
decrees, and because of their absolute refusal to enter into the keep-
ing of Sunday, they are marked men and women upon whom the
whole blame will be resting for all the troubles in the world.
The wicked, therefore, will be thirsting for revenge and ever
watchful and suspicious that the righteous may be plotting some new
scheme to further increase their suffering. So it will be, that:
"As the saints left the cities and villages, they were pursued by
the wicked, who sought to slay them." Early Writings, 284.
The blood of the martyrs was seed from which sprang up an
abundant harvest of precious souls and a strong and powerful Prot-
estantism, but in the time of Jacob's trouble no such good fruits from
the death of the righteous are any longer possible, for all who can be
saved will be saved, and the harvest will be complete.
Furthermore, it would be entirely a victory to the devil if he could
have power over the lives of the faithful in that time. Therefore, just
as the three faithful Hebrew youth who refused to either eat the
king's meat or bow before his image, were delivered from death, so
the true and the faithful will not be permitted to fall under the en-
emy's power at this time.
"I was pointed back to faithful Noah. When the rain descended
and the flood came, Noah and his family had entered the ark, and
God had shut them in. Noah had faithfully warned the inhabitants of
the antediluvian world, while they had mocked and derided him. And
as the waters descended upon the earth, and one after another were
drowning, they beheld that ark, of which they had made so much
sport, riding safely upon the waters, preserving the faithful Noah
and his family. So I saw that the people of God, who had faithfully
warned the world of His coming wrath, would be delivered. God
would not suffer the wicked to destroy those who were expecting
translation and who would not bow to the decree of the beast or re-
ceive his mark. I saw that if the wicked were permitted to slay the
saints, Satan and all his evil host, and all who hate God, would be
gratified. And oh, what a triumph it would be for his satanic majesty
to have power, in the last closing struggle, over those who had so
long waited to behold Him whom they loved! Those who have
mocked at the idea of the saint's going up will witness the care of
God for His people and behold their glorious deliverance." Early
Writings, 284.
366 LAST DAY EVENTS

So it will be, that as the saints leave the cities and villages to find
their hiding places in the most desolate places of the earth, and as
the wicked rush after them to cut off their escape and destroy them
then and there, even before the time of the death decree, the angels
will intervene to protect them from this fate. Of this it is written:
"But the swords that were raised to kill God's people broke and
fell as powerless as a straw. Angels of God shielded the saints. As
they cried day and night for deliverance, their cry came up before the
Lord." Early Writings, 284, 285.
This experience of deliverance from the wicked is one which oc-
curs before the deliverance when the fifth plague of darkness falls,
for here we see that the people of God continue their agonizing cries
for deliverance after the wicked fail to destroy them, whereas their fi-
nal deliverance from the last attempt of the wicked to destroy them,
is followed by that great shout of victory and thankfulness. It would
appear that when the first attempts to destroy the fleeing saints are
prevented by supernatural power, the wicked, ascribing, as they will,
this power to the power of the devil, whose servants they are quite
convinced the saints are, will determine to plan more thoroughly and
securely the death of the saints. For this reason a certain night will
be chosen, so that they will determine to strike in one night that deci-
sive blow by which the voice of reproof will be forever silenced. They
plan by sheer weight of numbers to overpower the people of God,
despite the great and mighty power which has been working on their
behalf. No greater mistake could they make, as they will learn to their
endless sorrow.
The fact that the wicked do seek to destroy the saints before the
official time for it, is further established in this statement:
"In some places, before the time for the decree to be executed,
the wicked rushed upon the saints to slay them; but angels in the
form of men of war fought for them. Satan wished to have the privi-
lege of destroying the saints of the Most High; but Jesus bade His an-
gels watch over them. God would be honored by making a covenant
with those who had kept His law, in the sight of the heathen round
about them; and Jesus would be honored by translating, without
their seeing death, the faithful, waiting ones who had so longed ex-
pected Him." Early Writings, 283.
It is during this time, from the close of probation right through
until the voice of God delivers them from the power of the enemy for-
ever, that the believers pass through the time prophetically de-
scribed as the time of Jacob's trouble. This is the antitype of Jacob's
experience when he returned to his own country after the long exile
in a strange land.
Just so, the people of God will be returning to their own land, the
JACOB'S TROUBLE 367

land of the heavenly Canaan, when they will pass through the same
experience. In fact, just as they will be on the very borders of that
heavenly land, so it was that Jacob had reached the borders of the
earthly land of Canaan.
But Jacob was not allowed to enter the land of his fathers without
the fearful threat of total destruction at the hand of his twin brother.
This was the brother who had been born with identical opportunities
as himself, and with him should have possessed the fullness of a true
connection with God and have inherited the spiritual birthright. But
Esau had sold it for the things of the flesh and, thus, had lost it for-
ever. He had chosen the transitory things of this world instead, and
now, with the prospect of the return of Jacob, he was fearful that
even this was to be taken from him. Therefore in order to preserve
that which to him was of prime value, he determined to slay his
brother.
So it will be, that in these last days the wicked will be those who
had the same opportunities to enjoy the spiritual blessings as had the
true people of God, but they will have chosen to cherish the things of
this world as being of the first value. In the time of trouble they will
see these things passing away from them in drought, disaster, and
pestilence, and they will be as convinced as Esau was, that it is the
righteous who are depriving them of all their earthly possessions.
So, they will determine to destroy the saints, just as Esau determined
to destroy Jacob.
It is worthy of quite serious thought to realize that Esau had con-
siderable justification for his attitude, even though it was still, strictly
speaking, unjust for him to feel the way in which he did. But he could
not forget the deception practiced upon him by his brother when he
went in before their father and deceived him into thinking that he
was Esau, when he was in fact Jacob. Thus Jacob had secured the
blessing for himself which Esau desired to have. Jacob had desired
the spiritual blessing, but Esau only desired the material blessing that
he might prosper and be wealthy and influential. It was really unjust
for Esau to feel revengeful after this, for he had deliberately and wan-
tonly sold the birthright to Jacob, and, therefore, no longer had any
just claim to it, but this did not justify Jacob in practicing deception
on his father in order to get in ahead of his brother. This gave ample
occasion to Esau, who, sinful man as he was, did not even stop to
consider the rightness or the wrongness of his cause, but only that
Jacob's behavior had given him excuse to gain the revenge which he
sought. He was motivated only from the question of his own per-
sonal interest and gain. Nothing else concerned him.
As Jacob approached the land of Canaan, under the leadership
and guidance of the Lord, he heard the news that Esau was ap-
368 LAST DAY EVENTS

In the birthright which was inherited by the eldest son in the

family when Jacob and Esau contended for their rights, were incor-
porated both the promise of spiritual blessing as well as material
wealth. To Jacob, the spiritual blessings were those upon which he
placed the greater value, while Esau fixed his affections on mate-
rial wealth.
Today, there are those in the vast majority whose entire interest
and effort are concentrated on acquiring material wealth. So suc-
cessful has this generation been in this quest that we live in an era
of unparalleled prosperity and financial power.
But there are still many Jacob's who see only one prize worthy
of their pursuit—the spiritual and the heavenly. Of such is the king-
dom of heaven.

preaching at the head of a band of armed men with the intention of

slaughtering his whole company. Jacob could well have met this dan-
ger without fear, but for the consciousness that his own sin had
brought this threatened disaster upon his head. This filled him with
the unspeakable dread that because of his sin, he could not possibly
escape his impending fate. He had no army to defend him, carried
no weapons of his own, and, therefore, to all earthly appearances,
he was doomed. This did not worry him so much, so far as his own
person was concerned, but he was terribly burdened for the honor of
God's name and the future of God's cause. He understood that the
righteous Seed by which all men should be saved was to come down
JACOB'S TROUBLE 369

through the royal line of Judah, his son, and should he be destroyed,
then the whole plan and promise of God would come to nothing, and
all would be lost. God had spoken, and declared that the righteous
seed should come and that He would come as the Son of Abraham.
The power of God is in that word, and the devil has labored right
down the stream of time to make that Word of none effect. If Satan
could cut off the sons of Abraham so that the promise could not be
fulfilled through them, then he would have proved that he had power
to break the Word of God, and this would have been but to assure to
him the whole victory in the contest.
For Jacob to realize that his own sin had brought about this
threat to the whole plan of God was that which filled him with the
greatest soul agony. This fact is clearly stated as follows:
"On reaching the borders of the land, he was filled with terror by
the tidings of Esau's approach at the head of a band of warriors,
doubtless bent upon revenge. Jacob's company, unarmed and de-
fenseless, seemed about to fall helpless victims of violence and
slaughter. And to the burden of anxiety and fear was added the
crushing weight of self-reproach, for it was his own sin that had
brought this danger." Great Controversy, 616.
There is but one place to which he could now turn, and it was to
the pardoning love of his great Redeemer.
"His only hope was in the mercy of God; his only defence must
be prayer. Yet he leaves nothing undone on his own part to atone for
the wrong to his brother and to avert the threatened danger. So
should the followers of Christ, as they approach the time of trouble,
make every exertion to place themselves in a proper light before the
people, to disarm prejudice, and to avert the danger which threatens
liberty of conscience." Great Controversy, 616.
Little do we realize today how things, which may seem even inno-
cent in themselves, will be taken up in those days and used as an oc-
casion against us. If innocent enough matters will be thus used, then
how much more those things which have been mistakes and sins. It
will be with an intensity never reached before that the devil will ap-
pear at this time as "The accuser of our brethren." Revelation
12:10.
Through the agency of his servants upon the earth, whom he will
endow with marvelously sharp memories, he will recall all the sins
and mistakes of the people of God and heap these upon them to
cause them to despair that the Lord could ever deliver them. This
grim experience begins with the judgment of the living. It does not
stop there, but carries right on through into the time of Jacob's
trouble. Then, as it was with Jacob, so with them it will be that "their
only hope is in the mercy of God; their only defense will be prayer.
370 LAST DAY EVENTS

As Joshua was pleading before the Angel, so the remnant church,

with brokenness of heart and earnest faith, will plead for pardon and
deliverance through Jesus their Advocate. They are fully conscious
of the sinfulness of their lives, they see their weakness and unworthi-
ness, and as they look upon themselves they are ready to despair.
The tempter stands by to accuse them, as he stood by to resist
Joshua. He points to their filthy garments, their defective charac-
ters. He presents their weakness and folly, their sins of ingratitude,
their unlikeness to Christ, which has dishonored their Redeemer. He
endeavors to affright the soul with the thought that their case is
hopeless, that the stain of their defilement will never be washed
away. He hopes to so destroy their faith that they will yield to his
temptations, turn from their allegiance to God, and receive the mark
of the beast.
"Satan urges before God his accusations against them, declaring
that they have by their sins forfeited divine protection, and claiming
the right to destroy them as transgressors. He pronounces them just
as deserving as himself of exclusion from the favor of God. 'Are
these,' he says, 'the people who are to take my place in heaven and
the place of the angels who united with me? While they profess to
obey the law of God, have they kept its precepts? Have they not
been lovers of self more than of God? Have they not placed their
own interests above His service? Have they not loved the things of
the world? Look at the sins which have marked their lives. Behold
their selfishness, their malice, their hatred toward one another.'
Testimonies 5:473, 474.
This will be indeed a terrible time for the people of God, as Satan
thus casts all the sins of their past lives before them. This will pro-
vide added fuel to the fury of the heathen against them, providing
them with what they will regard as more than ample justification to
destroy them.
May the people of God today learn what this means and stretch
every effort to remove every occasion which can be used against
God in those last days. Let us put away every disposition to tell, out-
side the church of the Lord, the troubles which the devil stirs within
it because of the frail humanity with which we are still cursed and the
lack of faith to conquer it. Every such story will be eagerly listened to,
stored away in memory's hall, matured to an evil fullness, and
brought out again in the last days in a form which will both amaze
and horrify us. Then how much we would give to have never betrayed
the church of God today.
There has been a tendency among the Advent people to become
very sharp in business, to see to it that we always get the best end of
a bargain, paying the least possible price for what we buy, and selling
JACOB'S TROUBLE 371

at the best possible price. This leads us to consider ourselves as be-

ing good business men, and there is no question but that the Lord ex-
pects us to buy and sell wisely. But there is a difference between this
and being a hard bargainer. How often the professed people of the
Lord come away from a transaction feeling very pleased with them-
selves over the deal they have made, but little realizing that the men
of the world with whom they have dealt have marked them as men to
be watched and guarded against. There is nothing the world despises
more than a professed Christian who is sharp and exacting in busi-
ness. All our business dealings should ever be marked with modest,
Christian courtesy, wherein we are prepared to pay fair value for the
thing which is offered to us, and not fight to get the very last possible
concession out of the other man. We may feel that we have done
very well today, but our thoughts will be very different in the day
when these things come back on our heads again.
Let us learn to treat all the business people, our neighbors, and
the people we come in contact with but once in our lifetimes with
that Christian courtesy and love which will recommend the people of
God and the truth of God to them, and which will store up for the
people of God a credit of good works against the last days. We will
thus escape much suffering then, but what is most important, we
shall thus avoid giving occasion for the enemies of the truth to rail
against the God whom we represent. Let us never have the attitude
toward anyone that they are there to serve us, that they owe us
something or the like. Let us make it plain by our attitude that we ap-
preciate the burdens and problems of their work, and we would do all
in our power to lighten those burdens if we could. Let us learn to
genuinely feel that whatever we ask them to do for us in the course of
business is not an obligation which they owe us and had better give
us, but rather that they are doing us a fine favor. If we unaffectedly
feel and act this way, they will detect it and be influenced to think fa-
vorably of the God we represent.
Such are among the preparations needed for the coming day.
"Let your light so shine before men, that they may see your good
works and glorify your Father in heaven." Matthew 5:16.
Chapter 34

A Sinless People
In the time for the closing of probation, the righteous will be
"fully conscious of the sinfulness of their lives, they" will "see their
weakness and unworthiness; and they" will be "ready to despair."
Prophets and Kings, 588.
That will be serious enough, but what is still worse will be the
consciousness that the wicked will also know the worst there will be
to know about them, and will use this knowledge to justify their bid
to exterminate the righteous from the face of the earth, and thus gain
the victory for the devil in his long standing controversy against
Christ. This will be a trial to the righteous of considerable propor-
tions, but it will not be the only burden which they will have to bear
during that period. They will also be living with the fear that they
themselves have not yet been cleansed of every sin which is in them.
It is important that we understand that by this time the saints will
in fact be a sinless people. They will have to be in order to pass
through this time without a Mediator in the sanctuary. Once the Me-
diator pronounces that His work in the mediatorial office has been
completed, the sanctuary will be forever closed against the receiving
of any more sin of any kind whatsoever. Probationary time will have
ended when the time of Jacob's trouble begins.
This tells us that the sanctuary will have been cleansed of all the
defilement which had been taken into it as a result of the confessions
of God's people. Once the sanctuary in heaven has been cleansed, it
will never be defiled again, not by so much as a spot, or a wrinkle, or
any such thing.
Therefore any sin in anyone after the close of probation must re-
main within him forever, for there is no place to send it. From that
time forward, wherever he goes, the sin must also go. Inasmuch as
that sin will then be forever inseparable from him, and inasmuch as
no person with sin in him can ever go into heaven, then such a per-
son cannot be numbered among the people of God, nor be assigned
a place in heaven.
Anyone who is to be numbered as a child of God then, must be
cleansed of all sin forever. God will have a pure people at this time,
and as surely as He will, then just as surely will that people be a sin-
A SINLESS PEOPLE 373

less people. At that time there will be no halfway mark, no place in

between righteousness and iniquity. Either we will be holy or we will
be unholy, righteous or unrighteous, clean or unclean. It will be at
the close of human probation when Jesus ends His work as Mediator
for the human race that He will stand up and say: "He who is unjust,
let him be unjust still; he who is filthy, let him be filthy still; he who is
righteous, let him be righteous still; he who is holy, let him be holy
still.
"And behold, I am coming quickly, and My reward is with Me, to
give to every one according to his work." Revelation 22:11,12.
Thus when probation closes there will be but the two classes of
people; those who are righteous and those who are unclean and un-
holy. It is to be noted that this uncleanness is the actual, literal un-
cleanness of sin, while the righteousness is the actual state of being
righteous. In neither case will it be a standing of uncleanness or of
cleanness, but the actual state of it. No one will have the least diffi-
culty in understanding that when Jesus will say of the unrighteous,
let him be unrighteous still, that those words indicate that that per-
son is in an actual state of unrighteousness in himself. That will be a
description of his actual condition, not a description of something
apart from him which will be reckoned against him. If those words
mean that in regard to the unholy and the unclean, how can we place
a different interpretation on the words: "he who is righteous, let him
be righteous still." This cannot be done! As surely as the words "be
unholy" mean what they say, then so surely do the words "be right-
eous", mean what they say.
The fact remains, that the people of God will be a people com-
pletely without sin during the time of Jacob's trouble and for that
matter for the eternity of life, which will be theirs thereafter.
"Those who are living upon the earth when the intercession of
Christ shall cease in the sanctuary above are to stand in the sight of a
holy God without a mediator. Their robes must be spotless, their
characters must be purified from sin by the blood of sprinkling.
Through the grace of God and their own diligent effort they must be
conquerors in the battle with evil." Great Controversy, 425.
These words are clear, yet there are those who hold the view that
the people of God will not be cleansed from all sin until the day when
Jesus comes in the clouds of heaven. Such a view is refuted, not only
by the fact of the closing of the sanctuary at the close of human pro-
bation some time prior to the actual appearing of the Saviour in the
clouds of heaven, but also by the plain words of the following
statement:
"We are preparing to meet Him who, escorted by a retinue of
holy angels, is to appear in the clouds of heaven to give the faithful
374 LAST DAY EVENTS

and the just the finishing touch of immortality. When He comes He is

not to cleanse us of our sins, to remove from us the defects in our
characters, or to cure us of the infirmities of our tempers and disposi-
tions. If wrought for us at all, this work will all be accomplished be-
fore that time. When the Lord comes, those who are holy will be holy
still. Those who have preserved their bodies and spirits in holiness,
in sanctification and honor, will then receive the finishing touch of
immortality. But those who are unjust, unsanctified, and filthy will
remain so forever. No work will then be done for them to remove
their defects and give them holy characters. The Refiner does not
then sit to pursue His refining process and remove their sins and
their corruption. This is all to be done in these hours of probation. It
is now that this work is to be accomplished for us." Testimonies
2:355.
In no plainer words could it be shown that Jesus will not cleanse
us from sin when He comes in the clouds of heaven. All such cleans-
ing work must be done before that time. What is more, we are plainly
told how long before that time this work will have to be accom-
plished. It will be during these hours of probation. This limits the
time, then, in which this work can be done; that limitation being
while probation lasts. This means that, if the work is not completed
while probationary time lingers, then all opportunity for it to be com-
pleted will be forever past, and we will then have to perish in our
sins.
Thus it is made very clear and plain that the righteous will have
become truly and fully righteous and will have no sin in them, or on
them, whatsoever during this period. But while this will be true in
fact, it will not be known to them. Instead, they will be distressed by
the terrible fear that there is still some hidden root of evil still within
them during this time of fearful trouble.
If they could know that probation has ended, then they might re-
sign themselves to whatever their fate might turn out to be, but they
will not know that probation has closed; they will not know that their
eternity is sealed to them, and, because they do expect that the end
will come very soon, they will fear that it will come upon them while
they are unprepared to stand sinless without a mediator through
those final and trying scenes.
A truly sinless person is a truly selfless person. A selfless person
is one whose concern is not for a moment in regard to himself and
what will happen to him, but he is concerned only for the cause for
which he is responsible, in part or in whole, as the case may be. The
believers will be, therefore, a selfless people during the time of Ja-
cob's trouble, so the fear and the trouble which they experience will
A SINLESS PEOPLE 375

not be on any account of concern for themselves, but rather for the
Lord with whose cause they are concerned.
All around them they will see the wickedness of the wicked,
which will arouse within them the strongest possible desires to see
the whole chapter of sin and rebellion brought to a close.
"On every hand they hear the plottings of treason and see the ac-
tive working of rebellion; and there is aroused within them an in-
tense desire, an earnest yearning of soul, that this great apostasy
may be terminated and the wickedness of the wicked may come to an
end." Great Controversy, 619.
But they will understand that this work of making of an end of
sins and bringing in everlasting righteousness on this earth, cannot
be accomplished unless it first will have been done in the lives of the
children of the Lord. They know that the power of Satan in the world
cannot be ended until it first be ended in them. By this fact they will
understand that if there is still sin in them, then the Lord cannot
close the work and bring evil to its end.
But, as was set out in Chapter 24 of this series, it will be a time
when it will appear as if the whole of God's work has once again
failed under the masterful attacks of Satan. It will appear that the
loud cry has come to nought, just as every other revival in the past
has done. This appearance of things will be so overwhelmingly con-
vincing, that it will constitute a fearful trial to the saints of God at this
time. They will know, even as we know already, that the work of God
never fails because of any shortcoming on His part, but only because
the people of God themselves have come short of the full provisions
of His power and might. Therefore they will be persuaded that the
whole failure of the battle, as it appears to be in their eyes and as Sa-
tan seeks to press this conviction upon them, is the direct result of
their failure to put away every sin and uncleanness.
If it would be but their own lives and interests which will be at
stake, this would be but a small thing in their eyes, but they will know
that the issues are far more tremendous than that. They will know
that the Lord is depending on their faithfully standing by Him in this
crisis so that He can finish the work and make an end of the horror of
sin forever. But they will feel that they have let the Lord and His
cause down just when He needed them the most. It will be from this
fear and this conviction that the real agony of the time of Jacob's
trouble will arise just as it was with Jacob of old.
But while they search their hearts with the closest self-examina-
tion, they cannot bring to light any sinfulness in themselves—the sim-
ple reason being that they will not be able to find what is not there to
be found. They cannot find sin where there is no sin to be found.
Some may wonder about this and suggest that when a person
376 LAST DAY EVENTS

reaches a state of sinlessness, surely he would know it. However, we

have but to look back on our own experience in salvation from sin to
see how this would not be so. When we first came to the Lord in the
new birth experience, and He washed away the very nature of sin
from us so that we became new creations in Christ Jesus, then
search our hearts as we might, we could find no further sin there for
the time then present. But as the days went by and the work of edu-
cation and reformation went a little further along, then the Lord
brought up to us things which we had never even thought about be-
fore and showed them to us. In turn, we put that away to enjoy, once
again, freedom from the possession of conscious sin, only, in turn, to
find later that there were other things still which needed to be seen
and delivered over to the great Cleanser from all sin.
Each time could well have been the last so far as we could see, for
it seemed that during every such exercise in heart-cleansing, we had
reached and been cleansed of the last of our sins, only to find that
there was another one ahead.
It reminds me of an experience I once had in climbing a tall
mountain. From the base of the mountain, all we could see was the
first lowly ridge, and it looked like the one and only one from where
we stood. But, on conquering this first ridge, we found another con-
fronting us, while the summit remained hidden from view. So,
throughout the long day, it was a case of coming to many points
lower than the actual summit, which we were led to believe was the
last, only to find another before us.
So then, when we do actually come to the last cleansing, how are
we going to distinguish this one from the previous experiences,
which were always followed by the appearance of hitherto unrecog-
nized and unsuspected faults? The simple answer is that we will not.
When the last sin is removed, we will not know that the bottom of the
barrel has been reached. This being so, it is easy to understand how
it will be that during the time of Jacob's trouble we will still be
searching our hearts to see if there is still something there which
needs to be dealt with; something which is preventing the Lord from
doing His final and finishing work in the world. We will not know un-
til the voice of God announces the deliverance of His people right
down under the sixth plague, that we are sealed for eternity and sin-
less in fact.
But if we were able to bring to light any unconfessed sins then, it
would be impossible for us to stand in that hour.

OPPOSITE PAGE: The spotless purity, beauty, and perfection of this

lovely flower is a fitting illustration of the spotless perfection of character
in which the saints will be found during the period of Jacob's trouble.
378 LAST DAY EVENTS

"Had not Jacob previously repented of his sin in obtaining the

birthright by fraud, God would not have heard his prayer and merci-
fully preserved his life. So, in the time of trouble, if the people of
God had unconfessed sins to appear before them while tortured with
fear and anguish, they would be overwhelmed; despair would cut off
their faith, and they could not have confidence to plead with God for
deliverance. But while they have a deep sense of their unworthiness,
they have no concealed wrongs to reveal. Their sins have gone be-
forehand to judgment and have been blotted out, and they cannot
bring them to remembrance." Great Controversy, 620.
Without studying further, some have concluded that this state-
ment declares that the righteous will have suffered a complete loss of
memory so far as the sins of their past lives are concerned. But the
Bible meaning of the word "remembrance" goes somewhat deeper
than that, and it is to be seen that one may have no sins to bring to
"remembrance", and yet have a full memory of all the experiences
of his past life. This underlines the fact that we must never interpret
the words of the Bible according to our understanding of those
words, but only in the sense in which the Bible uses them. There is
nothing unusual or strange about this, as any traveler has learned.
Words assume different meanings as you travel from land to land and
from age to age.
To illustrate this point, let me relate the following experience
which I had in Tennessee in 1967. We had been invited to present
the message of living righteousness to a group of Sabbath observing
people a few miles to the south of Chattanooga. After the presenta-
tion we suggested that they might like to join us for the Sabbath af-
ternoon study which would be several days later. The lady of the
house stated that so far as she was concerned she would be more
than pleased to come, but she would have to check with her husband,
and if he had no objections, they would be there for certain. She
asked us to telephone her on Friday afternoon for her answer, after
she had consulted her husband. The decision rested with him.
So it was that we called by telephone on Friday afternoon to re-
ceive this reply: "My husband does not care to come, so we will be
there." English was her normal language and she knew no other, yet
I would have been very confused by her reply if I had interpreted her
words the way in which I would have used them. I would have said:
"My husband does not care to come, so I am sorry to say we will not
be there." For me to understand the message she intended to con-
vey, I had to understand what she meant when she said those words,
not what I would have meant had I used them. What she was really
saying was that it was no care or burden for her husband to attend, so
they would be there.
A SINLESS PEOPLE 379

So in the Word of God, which was translated so long ago, and in

the Spirit of Prophecy which speaks the same language as the Bible,
we must ask the question, What does the Word of God mean when it
uses certain expressions? To find the answer, we do not interpret the
words according to our usage of such words, but in accordance with
the way in which the Bible uses them. We will always find clear exam-
ples of this somewhere in the Word.
In respect to the meaning in Bible terms of the word "remem-
brance", we have but to go back to the word of God as recorded in
Deuteronomy 25:17-19. "Remember what Amalek did to you on
the way as you were coming out of Egypt,
"how he met you on the way and attacked your rear ranks, all the
stragglers at your rear, when you were tired and weary; and he did
not fear God.
"Therefore it shall be, when the Lord your God has given you
rest from your enemies all around, in the land which the Lord your
God is giving you to possess as an inheritance, that you will blot out
the remembrance of Amalek from under heaven. You shall not forget
it."
The judgment was to be deferred for close to four centuries until
they had settled in the promised land, but they were never to forget
to "blot out the remembrance of Amalek from under heaven."
"For four hundred years the execution of this sentence had been
deferred; but the Amalekites had not turned from their sins. The
Lord knew that this wicked people would, if it were possible, blot out
His people and His worship from the earth. Now the time had come
for the sentence, so long delayed, to be executed." Patriarchs and
Prophets, 627.
Israel did not forget this instruction. They did utterly and com-
pletely blot out that foul' 'remembrance''.
At first glance this usage of the word "remembrance" would
seem to be as contradictory as the statement by the lady in Tennes-
see, but only because we have our own definition for the word "re-
membrance", which differs from the usage of the word in the Bible.
To understand the text, we have to understand what the Word of God
says when it uses that expression, not what we would mean if we
would us it.
It must be clear that there is a difference in the mind of God, be-
tween "memory" or "recollection", and "remembrance". The
whole record of Amalek's sin is right here in the Word of God, which
in turn will be in heaven during the thousand years as a source book
in the judgment of the wicked. If the blotting out of the "remem-
brance" of the sin of Amalek involved the destruction of the very
memory of their sin, then why did not God instruct them to erase
[LDE25]
380 LAST DAY EVENTS

from the sacred writings the chapters which tell of their sin? It is be-
cause there is a difference between the two.
Today, every "remembrance" of the Amalekites has been erased
from the face of the earth. King Saul was commissioned to destroy
them, as recorded in 1 Samuel 15. However, while he destroyed all
whom he could capture, except for the king and the cattle, there
must have been some who escaped from him, for it was the
Amalekites who later burned Ziklag while David was away. He pur-
sued after them and destroyed all but five hundred men who escaped
on camels. See 1 Samuel 30. The last we read of them in the Bible is
when certain Simeonites "defeated the rest of the Amalekites who
had escaped." 1 Chronicles 4:43.
Thus was fulfilled the command of God to blot out the "remem-
brance" of the Amalekites. Today, every trace of that people has
vanished from the face of the earth. Nothing is left of their writings,
their culture, their buildings, or anything else which is a "remem-
brance" of that people. It is all gone, even though the historical ac-
counts of their existence and deeds remain. In other words, it is im-
possible to find anywhere in the world any "remembrance" of that
people—any tangible, material thing which would be a "remem-
brance" of their being on the earth. All that is left is the written re-
cord of their being what they were, and of what they did to the peo-
ple of God back there.
Likewise, the people of God will not be concerned during the
time of trouble with the sins which they can remember having com-
mitted throughout their past lives. These they know have been safely
taken care of by being sent on beforehand into the sanctuary for the
judgment. That which they will be concerned about will be any sin
which is still in them, which has not been sent on to the sanctuary.
To find if this is true, they search to see if there is any residue of the
evil habits, theories, and ideas remaining—anything which in itself is
the "remembrance" of the thing itself, just as a ruined building, a
writing on clay tablets, or some relic of the Amalekites would be a
"remembrance" of their existence. But search as they might, they
cannot find any living presence of sin in them. It has all been taken
away. Every "remembrance" is gone, just as every "remembrance"
of the Amalekites has been cleansed out of the earth by the living
power of God through His people. The very purpose of the record-
ing of the experience of Israel with the Amalekites is to provide us
with an illustration in the Old Testament of the way we are to under-
stand the experience of God's people when they cannot bring their
sins to "remembrance".
For a more detailed study on the differences between the "mem-
ory" of sin and the "remembrance" of it, see God's Way in the
A SINLESS PEOPLE 381

Sanctuary, the chapter entitled, "The Blotting Out of Sins", by F. T.

Wright.
Thus the period of Jacob's trouble will be the period of the final
contest between truth and error; between righteousness and un-
righteousness. For his part the devil will be doing his uttermost to
break the faith of God's people in the cause of God so that he can
have them also on his side. If he could do this, then he would prevent
his final exposure before the eyes of men, thus preventing the fulfill-
ment of the purpose of the long standing controversy, which pur-
pose, as we have seen, is to bring things to that place where Satan is
fully and truly seen by both men and angels to be what he is. Only a
people who under the utmost pressure can maintain the fullness of
righteousness at its best, can expose sin at its very worst and thus re-
move all support from Satan.
It is essential, then, that during this period the believers live by
faith and by faith alone. Never will there be a time when the people
of God will have been so fully deprived of any witness of sight or cir-
cumstances in favor of their faith, or found piled against them such a
formidable mountain of sight and circumstances calculated to deny
their faith. Every appearance within them and around them will tes-
tify that the Lord's cause is a failure, and that only defeat and de-
struction await them if they stay faithful to God. Under the fearful
pressure of that hour, that alone which will bring them through, will
be the fact that through the gospel they will have lost all self-interest,
and will be interested only in the cause and the work of God. If this
were not so, then they could never stand in that time, for self-interest
would cause them to abandon God in order to save their own lives.
In the light of this, we can understand why it is that the Lord will
not reveal the time when the close of probation has taken place. If
He did, then the people of God would not need to live by faith but by
sight. They would know that the fate of each one of them was unal-
terably sealed and that it would be pointless to search their hearts or
give any ear to Satan's arguments and pressures.
It is for this reason that we must learn to live by faith today and
become very strong in this experience. When the time comes for us
to live by faith in the absolute sense of the word, then it will be too
late to develop the kind of faith which alone will see us through.
"The season of distress and anguish before us will require a faith
that can endure weariness, delay, and hunger—a faith that will not
faint though severely tried. The period of probation is granted to all
to prepare for that time. Jacob prevailed because he was persevering
and determined. His victory is an evidence of the power of importu-
nate prayer. All who will lay hold of God's promises, as he did, and
be as earnest and persevering as he was, will succeed as he sue-
382 LAST DAY EVENTS

ceeded. Those who are unwilling to deny self, to agonize before God,
to pray long and earnestly for His blessing, will not obtain it. Wres-
tling with God—how few know what it is! How few have ever had
their souls drawn out after God with intensity of desire until every
power is on the stretch. When waves of despair which no language
can express sweep over the suppliant, how few cling with unyielding
faith to the promises of God.
"Those who exercise but little faith now, are in the greatest dan-
ger of falling under the power of satanic delusions and the decree to
compel the conscience. And even if they endure the test, they will be
plunged into deeper distress and anguish in the time of trouble, be-
cause they have never made it a habit to trust in God. The lessons of
faith which they have neglected, they will be forced to learn under a
terrible pressure of discouragement.
"We should now acquaint ourselves with God by proving His
promises. Angels record every prayer that is earnest and sincere. We
should rather dispense with selfish gratifications than neglect com-
munion with God. The deepest poverty, the greatest self-denial,
with His approval, is better than riches, honors, ease, and friendship
without it. We must take time to pray. If we allow our minds to be ab-
sorbed by worldly interests, the Lord may give us time by removing
from us our idols of gold, of houses, or of fertile lands.
"The young would not be seduced into sin if they would refuse to
enter any path save that upon which they could ask God's blessing. If
the messengers who bear the last solemn warning to the world would
pray for the blessing of God, not in a cold, listless, lazy manner, but
fervently and in faith, as did Jacob, they would find many places
where they could say: 'I have seen God face to face, and my life is
preserved.' Genesis 32:30. They would be accounted of heaven as
princes, having power to prevail with God and with men.
"The 'time of trouble, such as never was,' is soon to open upon
us; and we shall need an experience which we do not now possess
and which many are too indolent to obtain. It is often the case that
trouble is greater in anticipation than in reality; but this is not true of
the crisis before us. The most vivid presentation cannot reach the
magnitude of the ordeal. In that time of trial, every soul must stand
for himself before God. 'Though Noah, Daniel, and Job' were in the
land, 'as I live, saith the Lord God, they shall deliver neither son nor
daughter; they shall but deliver their own souls by their righteous-
ness.' Ezekiel 14:20." Great Controversy, 621-623.
 Chapter 35

Cleansing from
Earthliness
In the previous chapter considerable emphasis was laid on the
fact that the people of God will have been cleansed from all sin prior
to the beginning of Jacob's trouble, so that they will be a sinless and
a selfless people during that period of time. It has been shown that,
inasmuch as the way for the removing of sin from the actual life of
any individual will be closed forever before the time of Jacob's
trouble begins, then it is of necessity that all sin must be removed
from them before this period commences.
One may well ask then, how it is that the following words are
written in regard to the experience of the righteous during that self-
same period of which it has been testified that they no longer and, in
fact, can no longer have any sin in them at all.
"Jacob's history is also an assurance that God will not cast off
those who have been deceived and tempted and betrayed into sin,
but who have returned unto Him with true repentance. While Satan
seeks to destroy this class, God will send His angels to comfort and
protect them in the time of peril. The assaults of Satan are fierce and
determined, his delusions are terrible; but the Lord's eye is upon His
people, and His ear listens to their cries. Their affliction is great, the
flames of the furnace seem about to consume them; but the Refiner
will bring them forth as gold tried in the fire. God's love for His chil-
dren during the period of their severest trial is as strong and tender as
in the days of their sunniest prosperity; but it is needful for them to
be placed in the furnace of fire; their earthliness must be consumed,
that the image of Christ may be perfectly reflected." Great Contro-
versy, 621.
Here is a picture which speaks of a refining and cleansing proc-
ess which will consume their earthliness until the image of Jesus is
perfectly reflected. What is more, this is to take place after the close
of probation, during the period of Jacob's trouble.
This certainly appears to contradict the truth that all sinfulness
must be cleansed from the righteous before the time of Jacob's
384 LAST DAY EVENTS

trouble begins. When confronted with a seeming contradiction such

as this one, the natural human tendency is to choose which of the
two statements is more appealing, while ignoring the other com-
pletely, or by forcing the meaning of them. This is not the approach
of the true Christian who willingly accepts both statements as valid
truth, trusts the Lord to remove the seeming contradictions, and
patiently waits for Him to do so. Such a procedure will never bring
disappointment.
The facts are that in the cases of those who shall pass alive
through Jacob's trouble, absolute sinless perfection must firstly be
attained, but their earthliness will not be cleansed away until the end
of Jacob's trouble.
Those who hold the view that we cannot be sinless until the sec-
ond advent of Christ, when the Lord shall change these vile bodies
into the likeness of His glorious body so that incorruption will take
the place of corruption and immortality the place of mortality, take
the word earthliness to mean sinfulness. However, to do this is to ad-
mit that there is a contradiction in the Scriptures, but this there can
never be, for there is only the most perfect consistency in the writ-
ten, as well as the spoken Word of God. God never contradicts Him-
self, for the moment that He does, then He would make Himself to
be a liar. That is to say, if He spoke what was truth in one place, and
elsewhere spoke that which was a contradiction of that truth, then
the second statement could not also be the truth. It would have to be
a denial of the truth, and this is a lie. Therefore, there can be no real
contradictions in the Scriptures, even though many may seem to be
present in the Bible and the Spirit of Prophecy. Even then they only
appear to be contradictions, because we have not learned to see and
understand the Word of God correctly.
Thus it is, that we have before us clear statements which show
that all sinfulness must be removed from the people of God before
the close of probation, so that they, even when under the greatest
pressure of discouragement and trial designed to reveal the slightest
imperfection, shortcoming, or weakness, cannot even find the least
existence of any remembrance of sin in them.
On the other hand, we have this statement which speaks of a re-
fining and purifying process designed to completely consume all our
earthliness, so that the image of Jesus might be fully and perfectly
revealed. It is our task by diligent, prayerful, thoughtful study to
come to the place where we understand just what earthliness is, and
why it is not fully removed before the close of probation, even though
all the sinfulness of the character is.
To assist us in this understanding, we turn to the following state-
CLEANSING FROM EARTHLINESS 385

ment from The Review and Herald, August 12, 1884, (also in Our
High Calling, 321).
"The time of trouble is the crucible that is to bring out Christlike
characters. It is designed to lead the people of God to renounce Satan
and his temptations. The last conflict will reveal Satan to them in his
true character, that of a cruel tyrant, and it will do for them what
nothing else could do, uproot him entirely from their affections. For
to love and cherish sin, is to love and cherish its author, that deadly
foe of Christ. When they excuse sin and cling to perversity of charac-
ter, they give Satan a place in their affections, and pay him homage.''
One must take care not to misinterpret the first sentence in this
statement. It does not say that the time of trouble will give us Christ-
like characters, but that it will bring out Christlike characters. It is
the truth that affliction can only bring out what is already there. If we
have an evil character, then the crucible of affliction will bring out
the evil which is already in us, and develop it to a higher pitch of evil,
but if we have a Christlike character already, then the crucible of af-
fliction will bring that out into full and beautiful display and develop-
ment. It is for this reason that Paul said,
"Knowing that tribulation worketh patience." Romans 5:3
K.J.V.
Everyone knows by experience that tribulation works impa-
tience, because this is the truth in the lives of the unregenerate, and
all of us have been in that state. But Paul is not here speaking of the
unregenerate but of those who, "having been justified by faith . . .
have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ,
"through whom also we have access by faith into this grace in
which we stand, and rejoice in hope of the glory of God." Romans
5:1,2.
The real point and message of the statement quoted above is that
during the time of Jacob's trouble, the people of God will so come to
see Satan in his true light and character that they will forever re-
nounce all affection and sympathy for him. It will bring about a con-
dition of such hatred for his principles that a full and total separation
from him will be effected.
Some may argue that this is equivalent to a further and final
cleansing from sin, but there is a difference. The difference is re-
vealed in the experience of the unfallen angels who were brought to
the same place where their affections for Satan were finally uprooted
by the demonstration of the fullness of righteousness upon the cross
of Calvary. This truth is made plain in the following words which de-
scribe, first the way in which the evil one went to war upon Christ at
the cross, and then goes on to show the result of this, so far as he
and the loyal angels were concerned.
386 LAST DAY EVENTS

"Could one sin have been found in Christ, had He in one particu-
lar yielded to Satan to escape the terrible torture, the enemy of God
and man would have triumphed. Christ bowed His head and died, but
He held fast His faith and His submission to God. 'And I heard a loud
voice saying in heaven, Now is come salvation, and strength, and the
kingdom of our God, and the power of His Christ; for the accuser of
our brethren is cast down, which accused them before our God day
and night.' Revelation 12:10.
"Satan saw that his disguise was torn away. His administration
was laid open before the unfallen angels and before the heavenly uni-
verse. He had revealed himself as a murderer. By shedding the blood
of the Son of God, he had uprooted himself from the sympathies of
the heavenly beings. Henceforth his work was restricted. Whatever
attitude he might assume, he could no longer await the angels as
they came from the heavenly courts, and before them accuse Christ's
brethren of being clothed with the garments of blackness and the de-
filement of sin. The last link of sympathy between Satan and the
heavenly world was broken." Desire of Ages, 761.
Now in this statement the word "sympathy" is used in regard to
the connection still held between Satan, who was once Lucifer, the
greatly beloved of the angels in heaven, and the loyal angels who had
never fallen into actual sin. One may argue that there is a difference
between sympathy and affection, and it is true that there is. How-
ever, this difference does not deny the fact that there was a lingering
affection for Satan in the hearts of the loyal angels up until the time
of Christ's death on the cross. This is made clear enough in this fol-
lowing statement:
"In this choice [that of the Jews and Romans in Christ's trial and
crucifixionl the principles of Satan were made manifest; and the
hosts of heaven, and all the worlds that God had created, judged that
Satan was an accuser of the brethren, a liar, and a murderer. In
heaven and among the unfallen worlds the question of Satan's deceiv-
ing power, of his malignant principles, was settled, and the perfect
purity and holiness of Christ, who was bearing the test and trial in be-
half of fallen man, was forever proved. Through the development of
Satan's character and principles, he was forever uprooted from the
affection of the unfallen worlds, and the controversy concerning his
claims and the claims of Christ was forever settled in heaven. The
righteousness manifested in the character of Christ was forever to be
the anchor, the saving hope, of the world. Every soul who chooses
Christ can say with faith, 'The Lord my righteousness.' " Selected
Messages 1:348.
These statements, then, establish the fact that until the crucifix-
ion, the loyal angels were still loyal to God, but not without reserva-
CLEANSING FROM EARTHLINESS 387

THE SITUATION WHICH

EXISTED IN GOD'S
KINGDOM BETWEEN
Before the THE FALL OF SATAN At the
Fall of Cross God's
Lucifer AND THE CROSS Character was
there were Revealed at its
no Questions Radiant Best
about God's and Satan's at
Character. its ugly Worst.

For More Than 4000 Years

The rebellious angels were deceived by Satan

to whom they gave their unreserved allegiance.

The loyal two-thirds were not able to answer

the charges against God's government yet still
served God despite these questions. They did
so by living faith for more than 4000 years.

During that period, Satan, though shut out of

heaven, awaited the loyal angels as they left
the heavenly courts, to taunt them with ques-
tions they could not answer. Consequently,
they served God with reservations. They could
not give God totally unreserved and loyal
service. This did not make them to be sinful.

But at the cross every question of truth and

error was forever answered for the loyal
angels.

But men have not yet seen all that the angels
have seen. The time must come when they too
must be delivered from all sympathy with
Satan's lies by their seeing all that the angels
saw at Calvary.

Then the End will come.

388 LAST DAY EVENTS

tions. They still possessed a degree of affection for Satan, and a cer-
tain level of sympathy still existed between him and them. This was
because, in the first case, they had had a very deep love for him and a
rich and wonderful fellowship with him, which gave considerable
weight to his arguments in respect to the faults which he claimed to
have found in the government of God. Those arguments were so
convincingly and cunningly presented that they could not be lightly
dismissed and passed over, all of which bound the angels in a degree
of sympathy and affection to the arch deceiver right down through
those four thousand years of time.
The point is, though, that the fact that they did have this sympa-
thy and affection for the devil himself did not make them sinners, nor
did it fill them with that sinfulness which would have required their
expulsion from heaven. Though they had reservations about God,
they remained loyal to Him; being prepared to trust Him to work
things out to the place where they could see for themselves that that
which He had declared to be so was actually so. While they had both
sympathy with and affection for the arch deceiver, in no sense of the
word had they gone over to his side to join him in his work of rebel-
lion against God. Therefore they had not become sinful. Yet, while
they did not need to be cleansed from sinfulness, they did need to be
cleansed or freed from this affection and sympathy before the king-
dom of God could be established in absolute and eternal security.
That this might be achieved, the controversy was permitted to go on
until this objective should be reached. For the angels and the inhabi-
tants of the unfallen worlds, it was largely reached when righteous-
ness gave its fullest and most powerful demonstration on the cross of
Calvary.
That which had to be done for the pure and the perfect angels
must also be done for men, both for those who have joined Satan in
his rebellion against the government of God and for those who have
broken with him and have joined God in His warfare against sin. For
the vast majority of mankind this will be done at the end of the thou-
sand years, when they are given a full and complete view of the great
controversy from its very inception, but in order for that picture,
then, to really tell the story, there has to be a time when the issues on
each side are fully developed during the period of the great contro-
versy itself. This is to say, that things must come to that point where
no question is left while men are still living upon the earth; so that
both the righteous and the wicked will see things as the angels saw
them—that Satan and his ways are no good at all.
There will be a difference, though, between the way in which the
wicked will see this and the way in which the righteous will view it.
For the wicked, the regret over the loss and the anger projected
CLEANSING FROM EARTHLINESS 389

toward the one who has caused them the ruin will not be because
they hate the sin, but only because they do not want to suffer its
consequences.
On the other hand, the righteous will hate the sin itself, and will
want nothing at all to do with it forever. They will be totally and eter-
nally cured from it by this final experience, when they will be forever
deprived of all affection and sympathy for Satan and his ways.
Today we may think that we have no sympathy with or affection
for Satan. We may think that we are wholly on the Lord's side, but
this is only because we do not yet understand that every time we fol-
low out a principle in our dealings with others which in the least de-
gree sets self and self interest first, then, to that very degree, are we
showing affection for and sympathy with Satan. Let us never forget
that we were born of our father the devil, as well as of our flesh and
blood human parents. Satan is the husband of the human race, and
we have produced much in connection with him. Therefore, just as
there was a deep bond of union and fellowship formed between Sa-
tan and the angels before he fell, so there is a deep bond of fellow-
ship between Satan and the human family today. Even though we
have been born again, and come into the family of God, much of that
affection remains and must be taken away. But this is only partially
achieved in the lives of those who have gone down into the grave,
and are scheduled to rise in the resurrection of the just.
Even so, in order that heaven may be eternally secure, every one
who shall reside therein must be totally cleansed from both sinful-
ness and earthliness, even though every such person had gone down
into his grave without this work being completely done in and for
him. The question is: "How will these acquire the same total deliver-
ance from sinfulness and earthliness as those who will learn it first-
hand under fearful pressure?"
First of all, there was a sanctuary service designed to take care of
sins of ignorance so that, if a person died with an unknown sin in his
life, he could still come up in the resurrection of the just. For further
study on this point, see the chapter, "The Atonement for Sins of Ig-
norance", in the book God's Way in the Sanctuary, by F. T. Wright.
However, while those faithful ones who died with sins of igno-
rance, can still be cleansed and taken to heaven, they still need to see
the real nature of those sins to the point where they totally and per-
manently abhor those sins, so much so that they will never be in dan-
ger of committing them again. To accomplish this God will keep a
faithful and complete record of the achievements of those who will
be cleansed from all sinfulness before probation closes, and from
earthliness after it closes. This will be available for study by all the
angels, and by the righteous of all ages. What they will thus learn will
390 LAST DAY EVENTS

reveal God's glorious character at its radiant best, while exposing Sa-
tan's evil character at its ugly worst. From this, they will uncondi-
tionally lose all sympathy with the devil, and will withdraw all sup-
port from him. Just as the angels could be in a sinless state and yet
be cleansed from all sympathy with Satan when Jesus was crucified,
so the righteous who are resurrected will, in their sinless state in
heaven, be cleansed from all sympathy with Satan.
Seeing that the earthliness must be removed from an already sin-
less people, we are led to understand that more than righteousness is
necessary in God's people before the end can come. The angels of
God lived for four thousand years in righteousness before the time
came when they lost all affection and sympathy for the devil. During
that time they were able to see far more of the devil and his works
than we can upon this earth; for so much that is hidden to us is open
to them. The righteous dead will likewise have become fully and eter-
nally righteous before they see the true and real character of the devil
and thus lose all affection for him, for it will not be until after their
resurrection unto eternal life that this will be achieved for them.
This, then, would indicate to us that no man, while he still has
any sinfulness in him, can possibly be fully and completely divorced
from the devil to the point where any sympathy or affection is forever
taken away. These facts are in perfect harmony with the experience
of the righteous during the period of Jacob's trouble. They will enter
that period a perfected and wholly righteous people in whom there
will be no sin whatsoever. It will all have been cleansed away during
the hours of probation, so that, search their hearts as they will, they
will find nothing of any remembrance of sin in them at all during that
period. Thus they will be as pure and holy as the angels, but, like the
angels before the cross, will still need to be cleansed from all sympa-
thy with, and affection for the devil. This is the work which must be
done for them through the time of Jacob's trouble. This is the remov-
ing of their earthliness, not their sinfulness.
The question now is: "What is earthliness?"
It is probably easier to say what it is not, in the light of the forego-
ing facts, which reveal that it is not sinfulness and cannot be; for the
righteous will be a sinless people, even though still needing to be
cleansed of earthliness.
If earthliness is not sinfulness, then what is it? In the light of that
which we have been studying in the foregoing paragraphs, it is evi-
dent that there must be some connection between earthliness and af-
fection for and sympathy with Satan. We know that he is the prince
of this earth, and we also know that:
"In all ages, temptations appealing to the physical nature have
CLEANSING FROM EARTHLINESS 391

THE FINAL
CLEANSING
WILL BE FROM
EARTHLINESS
Fall of
Lucifer Calvary
For Over 4000 Years

The loyal angels still retained a measure of

sympathy with Satan's claims and propositions.

This led them to consider that there might be

some light in the ministry of self-service, which is
earthliness.

But, on the cross, Jesus demonstrated that only

in selfless service is eternal life to be found.

This demonstration was so effective that the

angels were then fully and finally delivered from
Satan's sophistries.

However, mankind was not delivered then but will

be by the cleansing from earthliness during
Jacob's Trouble.

Then the last link of sympathy between the saints

and Satan will be forever broken.

End of
The End of the Great
Probation Controversy
The Period of Jacob's Trouble

When All Earthliness Shall be

Completely Cleansed From God's People
392 LAST DAY EVENTS

been most effectual in corrupting and degrading mankind." Desire

of Ages, 122.
Built into the human nature—which is the earthly nature—is the
powerful law of self-preservation as well as the possibilities of illicit
and self-destroying pleasures, which are very attractive in varying
degrees to the humanity of everyone of us. We depend upon the
earth and its productivity to sustain the physical life, and when there
is the threat of the removal of this, then there is a cold fear which
grips the heart and creases the brow with the furrows of anxiety. Un-
der such circumstances there is the tendency to take matters into our
own hands and to adopt measures which are motivated by self-inter-
est alone.
In our humanity we have a tendency to quickly forget that it is not
the soil but the God of heaven who is the real sustainer and provider
of all our needs—both physical and spiritual. We do not realize that
any and every tendency to depend upon the physical environment
for support is showing a sympathy for Satan and his ways, and a lack
of trust and dependence upon the God of heaven. The law of self-
preservation is not sinful in itself, nor is it actually sinful to have fear
grip our hearts when the threat of loss faces us, (provided that that
fear is not due to sinful unbelief but is only from our humanity) but it
does become sinful when we let that fear decide what course we shall
follow when the threat of loss faces us. The presence of the fear is
but the pressure of temptation, and temptation is not sin. It only
leads us into sin when we yield to the pressure, and do what the
temptation is directing us to do.
The time is coming, however, when, during the time of Jacob's
trouble, the people of God will have become so completely divorced
from Satan and his earthliness that the law of self-preservation will
have no pull upon them whatsoever anymore. Our only trust will be
in God, and into His hands will our lives be so completely surren-
dered, that, come what may, it will be all the same to us, provided
that His righteousness is forever established and sin and sinfulness
brought to a complete and proper end.
Today we may think that our lives are completely surrendered to
God, but let your mind dwell for a moment upon a picture, such as
the receiving of notice that you have lost your job; a black ban has
been placed upon your services; you are to be evicted from your
home without compensation; or to be exiled off without a penny in
your pocket to a poverty stricken, overcrowded country where they
speak a foreign language. Let your mind dwell on this and then study
your feelings. If your mind could really imagine this happening to you
in reality, and then you found that it left you perfectly calm and rest-
CLEANSING FROM EARTHLINESS 393

ing in God, then you could believe that earthliness had been
cleansed out of you, and you were ready for translation.
However, it will require an exceedingly tough training course to
produce this quality of experience—a course available only to those
who shall be alive upon the earth during Jacob's trouble. The latter
rain must revive and strengthen them to face this gruelling pressure
of temptation, the severest any believers will have ever faced apart
from Christ's incredible agony in Gethsemane. Therefore, no person
has yet been fully cleansed from earthliness, nor will be until the end
of Jacob's trouble.
What a people they will be, who, while living upon this earth,
come to this place where they have the fullness of the character of
Christ within, and have become completely divorced from all sympa-
thy with, and affection for the enemy of all souls. They will be the
means whereby the Lord will be able to display the fullness of His
righteousness to the place where even the wicked will see the real na-
ture of Satan and his principles, and will leave him forever even
though they will still retain their enmity against the Lord of heaven
and earth. Then the purpose of the great controversy will have been
achieved, and the Lord will be able at last to return and take His faith-
ful children home to be with Him in eternity. Here are the one hun-
dred and forty four thousand who will fulfill their special role of re-
vealing in a special way the wonders of God's love and compassion
throughout eternity. May the Lord give to the faithful of the present
generation the privilege of being that company.
Chapter 36

The Seventh
Plague
Thus far we have traced through the successive plagues as they
have fallen one by one in their order. We saw that the first four will
not be universal, but it is very clear that the last three will be. As we
have traced through these events, we have seen the very decided dif-
ference between the experience through which the people of the
Lord will be passing and the experience which will be the portion of
the wicked.
While on the one hand the wicked will suffer the full weight of the
plague which is present in their particular area, so far as the first four
are concerned, they will at the same time be very sure that they are
wholly on the right side, being, as they will be, fully deceived by Sa-
tan through the medium of Babylon the Great. Instead of reading in
their sufferings the message that they are receiving punishment for
their sins, they will blame all their troubles upon the righteous,
whom they will be convinced are the full cause of the calamities in
the earth. That which will help to convince them of this will be the
fact that the righteous themselves will not be wholly free from suffer-
ing either. They will be suffering from hunger and thirst to some ex-
tent, and the great mental and spiritual agony through which they
will be passing will be looked upon by the wicked as indicating a very
troubled conscience on their part.
While on the one hand the wicked are so certain that they are
right, the righteous are filled with the very real fear that they are
what they are accused of being—the troublers of the people. This
state of affairs will continue right up until the drying up of the great
river Euphrates, when things will take a very different turn indeed.
When the Lord shall turn the captivity of His people, the wicked will
see that they themselves are eternally lost, and it is then that they
will recognize that those whom they had thought to be the children
of the devil are in fact, God's elect with the right to eternal life in
Paradise above.
Then it will be that the words of Revelation 3:9 will be fulfilled.
THE SEVENTH PLAGUE 395

"Indeed I will make those of the synagogue of Satan, who say they
are Jews and are not, but lie—indeed I will make them come and wor-
ship before your feet, and know that I have loved you."
What a complete reversal of things this will be. From now on and
with increasing intensity, right up until the time of the deliverance of
the people of God from their enemies, those who claim to be the true
people of God, but who, in fact, are on the side of the great apostate,
will deride and accuse God's true people of being children of Satan
and the cause of all their calamities because of their stubborn refusal
to bow to the Sunday law.
These counterfeit religionists, empowered by the considerable
authority of civil governments and the awesome might of spiritual-
ism, will clothe themselves and their cause in a religious sanctity de-
signed to bring back spiritual life and interest among the people.
They will be able to make it appear that the people of God are indeed
on the side of the enemy of all righteousness, and, as such, are under
Heaven's curse.
But then will come the time when the very ones who have
heaped all these accusations upon the people of God and who have
sought so desperately to destroy them, will come and actually bow
down and acknowledge before all that they have been mistaken and
that the very ones whom they accused as being the enemies of God
are, in fact, the only true children of God in the earth. Naturally, the
ministry, who will have led out in the promotion of the Sunday law,
will be the ones who will be foremost in their accusations against the
people of God on the one hand, and in their claims to their own sanc-
tity on the other.
Therefore they will be the ones in particular who will come and
throw themselves at the feet of the saints and acknowledge how
wrong they have been in their evil work of maligning the characters
of the truly righteous. This will be a very terrible hour for them,
darker than which one could not imagine, yet they will have no ex-
cuse, for the warning will have been sounding in the messages of the
first, second, third, and fourth angels of the fearful consequences of
setting up the beast and his image in these last days. God will have
done all on His side and for His part which could ever be done to save
them from this; if only they would accept that which the Lord has for
them. Yet, in the face of that final warning, given in the fullness of
the power of the latter rain, they will be determined to set up the im-
age of the beast, and in doing this, they will reap the fearful conse-
quences of their actions.
Today is their day in which it will appear as if they have all things
their way. But the day of reckoning is coming when the situation shall
be so dramatically and eternally reversed.
[LDE26]
396 LAST DAY EVENTS

"I saw that the priests who are leading on their flock to death are
soon to be arrested in their dreadful career. The plagues of God are
coming, but it will not be sufficient for the false shepherds to be tor-
mented with one or two of these plagues. God's hand at that time
will be stretched out still in wrath and justice, and will not be brought
to Himself again until His purposes are fully accomplished, and the
hireling priests are led to worship at the feet of the saints, and to ac-
knowledge that God has loved them because they held fast the truth
and kept God's commandments, and until all the unrighteous ones
are destroyed from the earth." Early Writings, 124.
So it will be, that the time will come when every man and woman
and child upon the earth will know just where they stand. The
wicked shall know that they are eternally and hopelessly lost with no
chance ever to gain salvation. They will know that they have made
the wrong choice and, worse still, have persecuted and sought to de-
stroy the very ones who did make the right choice and who threw in
their lot with the God of Heaven—the all-powerful One. So fully will
this knowledge be known to each one, and so fully will each under-
stand it, that none will see any further use in pretense or hypocrisy at
all. Thus they will acknowledge it fully and openly to themselves and
to all around.
As we have seen previously, the ministry will not only confess be-
fore the saints that they have done an evil work, but they will confess
this even to the very ones whom they have deceived and led into the
pathways of death and destruction.
"Ministers and people see that they have not sustained the right
relation to God. They see that they have rebelled against the Author
of all just and righteous law. The setting aside of the divine precepts
gave rise to thousands of springs of evil, discord, hatred, iniquity, un-
til the earth became one vast field of strife, one sink of corruption.
This is the view that now appears to those who rejected truth and
chose to cherish error. No language can express the longing which
the disobedient and disloyal feel for that which they have lost for-
ever—eternal life. Men whom the world has worshiped for their tal-
ents and eloquence now see these things in their true light. They re-
alize what they have forfeited by transgression, and they fall at the
feet of those whose fidelity they have despised and derided, and con-
fess that God has loved them.
"The people see that they have been deluded. They accuse one
another of having led them to destruction; but all unite in heaping
their bitterest condemnation upon the ministers. Unfaithful pastors
have prophesied smooth things; they have led their hearers to make
void the law of God and to persecute those who would keep it holy.
Now, in their despair, these teachers confess before the world their
THE SEVENTH PLAGUE 397

work of deception. The multitudes are filled with fury. 'We are lost!'
they cry, 'and you are the cause of our ruin;' and they turn upon the
false shepherds. The very ones that once admired them most will
pronounce the most dreadful curses upon them. The very hands that
once crowned them with laurels will be raised for their destruction.
The swords which were to slay God's people are now employed to
destroy their enemies. Everywhere there is strife and bloodshed."
Great Controversy, 655, 656.
The anger which will be generated at this point will be beyond
the imagination. With uncontrolled fury, the masses fall upon those
who have led them to this point of no return. It will be the horror
story of all time.
"It is impossible to describe the horror and despair of those who
have trampled upon God's holy requirements. The Lord gave them
His law; they might have compared their characters with it and
learned their defects while there was yet opportunity for repentance
and reform; but in order to secure the favor of the world, they set
aside its precepts and taught others to transgress. They have endeav-
ored to compel God's people to profane His Sabbath. Now they are
condemned by that law which they have despised. With awful dis-
tinctness they see that they are without excuse. They chose whom
they would serve and worship. Then shall ye return, and discern be-
tween the righteous and the wicked, between him that serveth God
and him that serveth Him not.' Malachi 3:18." Great Controversy,
639, 640.
As surely as the wicked will know that they are lost, just as surely
the righteous will know at this point of time that they are eternally
saved. They will know that they now cannot and will not be lost, but
that they will soon enter into and enjoy the glories of the eternal
home created anew for them. For the righteous, all suffering and
anxiety will be ended. Their minds will now be at perfect rest in the
knowledge that the battle has been fought and the victory won and
that their cases are sealed forevermore. This will bring them joy un-
speakable as they realize that the long dark night of sin is about to
end and that the devil is at last brought to utter defeat.
Here are the prophetic words describing that moment when the
message shall reach them that they are eternally secure:
"By the people of God a voice, clear and melodious, is heard,
saying, 'Look up,' and lifting their eyes to the heavens, they behold
the bow of promise. The black, angry clouds that covered the firma-
ment are parted, and like Stephen they look up steadfastly into
heaven and see the glory of God and the Son of man seated upon His
throne. In His divine form they discern the marks of His humiliation;
and from His lips they hear the request presented before His Father
398 LAST DAY EVENTS

and the holy angels: 'I will that they also, whom Thou hast given Me,
be with Me where I am.' John 17:24. Again a voice, musical and tri-
umphant, is heard, saying: They come! they come! holy, harmless,
and undefiled. They have kept the word of My patience; they shall
walk among the angels;' and the pale, quivering lips of those who
have held fast their faith utter a shout of victory.
"It is at midnight that God manifests His power for the deliver-
ance of His people. The sun appears, shining in its strength. Signs
and wonders follow in quick succession. The wicked look with terror
and amazement upon the scene, while the righteous behold with sol-
emn joy the tokens of their deliverance. Everything in nature seems
turned out of its course. The streams cease to flow. Dark, heavy
clouds come up and clash against each other. In the midst of the an-
gry heavens is one clear space of indescribable glory, whence comes
the voice of God like the sound of many waters, saying: 'It is done.'
Revelation 16:17." Great Controversy, 636.
But for the wicked, the knowledge that they are eternally lost
brings no relief, no abatement to their sufferings, no cessation of the
great time of trouble; so much of which they will have already en-
dured. On the contrary, their very worst sufferings will at this time be
coming upon them, for prior to this point they had the belief that
they were right to buoy them up and the supposed assurance that
they had but to destroy the saints in order to regain the favor of
heaven and the return to temporal prosperity.
Now they will know that all such hopes were in vain and that they
are facing a terrible and an eternal extinction without God and with-
out hope in the world. They will know that they have forfeited
heaven to gain this world, and in doing so will lose all of that too. To
suffer when one has a cause and when one has the hope that there
will be an end to it with a better beyond is one thing. This makes the
suffering tolerable, purposeful, and endurable, but it is quite another
thing to have to suffer the ultimate in destructive horrors when the
end of it all is total and eternal annihilation.
In order for us to comprehend the experience of the wicked as
the last plague descends upon their shelterless heads, we need to un-
derstand the state of mind in which they will be when it comes upon
them. Now we are to see that the seventh plague is, from their point
of view, the very worst calamity which could befall them.
To the man of the world who has sacrificed the truth of God, the
most important thing is material possessions and the security which
they represent to him. They are to him the assurance of life, and the
guarantee of the perpetuity of his name and influence. To assure the
personal control and possessions of the largest possible amount of
this world's goods is the all-consuming passion of unconverted men.
THE SEVENTH PLAGUE 399

We have seen how they will scheme and cheat, how they will rob and
defraud, and how they will murder and lie to gather it all together. To
hold all this treasure, they will in the end totally repudiate and reject
the call of God and seek to destroy the people of the Lord from off
the face of the whole earth.
While they will have been attempting to do this, they will have
been enduring the first of the plagues, but none of these plagues ut-
terly destroy the possessions of mankind. True, they do take away
his temporal prosperity. The fierce burning of the sun with no rain,
for instance, destroys the crops, dries up the streams, and kills thou-
sands upon thousands of earth's inhabitants through the oppressive
heat. But men have passed through such droughts before and better
days have followed, though not this time.
But now the time will have come when men see that they have
lost heaven and God eternally and that the plagues which have been
falling upon them have been because of their own sins and rebellion.
Now that they know where they stand and why they have been suffer-
ing as they have, their hearts are filled with the greatest dread as to
what might yet be coming. They look with trembling fear at their
proud cities, their fine homes, their banks with their treasures of
gold and precious things, their cars and aircraft, their boats and their
trains. Is this all to go too? So far these things have survived the first
of the plagues. They look so solid and so fine and so permanent. Per-
haps the thought might pass through their minds, that at least, if they
have lost God and heaven, they still have all this and can live on with-
out God anyway. After all, it was by their own power that they had
built all this. So they will think as did Nebuchadnezzar of old. Thus
they will reason that since they had built it without God, then they
could continue in the enjoyment of it without God.
But if these thoughts shall pass through their minds, they will be
but short-lived, for there shall descend upon them the last and most
terrible of all the plagues—the seventh. It will come upon a people,
who, having given up God in preference to this world and its treas-
ures, will see in this last plague everyone of those treasures swept
away in utter and total destruction; for the seventh plague will liter-
ally and actually destroy the earth.
"Then the seventh angel poured out his bowl into the air, and a
loud voice came out of the temple of heaven, from the throne, say-
ing, 'It is done!'
"And there were noises and thunderings and lightnings; and
there was a great earthquake, such a mighty and great earthquake as
had not occurred since men were on the earth.
"Now the great city was divided into three parts, and the cities of
400 LAST DAY EVENTS

the nations fell. And great Babylon was remembered before God, to
give her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of His wrath.
"Then every island fled away, and the mountains were not found.
"And great hail from heaven fell upon men, every hailstone about
the weight of a talent. And men blasphemed God because of the
plague of the hail, since that plague was exceedingly great." Revela-
tion 16 .-17'-21.
Of all the destructive forces known to man, a great earthquake is
the most sudden, the most terrifying, the most violent, and the most
destructive. Furthermore, an earthquake never comes alone. It
brings with it fire and tidal waves and, in this case, savage storms and
tempests, the shrieking of the hurricane, and the bombardment by
huge hailstones; the like of which men have never seen before in the
total history of this planet.
In the past, fearful earthquakes have shattered portions of the
earth, but the geographical areas have always been limited. Here is
coming an earthquake which is to have no geographical limitations.
There will be no corner of the earth free from its heavings. In de-
scribing this, The Great Controversy states: "The whole earth
heaves and swells like the waves of the sea." page 637.
"The mountains shake like a reed in the wind, and ragged rocks
are scattered on every side. There is a roar as of a coming tempest.
The sea is lashed into fury. There is heard the shriek of the hurricane
like the voice of demons on a mission of destruction. The whole
earth heaves and swells like the waves of the sea. Its surface is break-
ing up. Its very foundations seem to be giving way. Mountain chains
are sinking. Inhabited islands disappear. The seaports that have be-
come like Sodom for wickedness are swallowed up by the angry wa-
ters. Babylon the great has come in remembrance before God, 'to
give unto her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of His wrath.'
Great hailstones, every one 'about the weight of a talent,' are doing
their work of destruction. The proudest cities of the earth are laid
low. The lordly palaces, upon which the world's great men have lav-
ished their wealth in order to glorify themselves, are crumbling to
ruin before their eyes." Great Controversy, 637.
Can any mind today picture the destruction involved in this last
and most terrible plague? Those who would come nearest to it would
be those who had experienced one of this earth's terrible earth-
quakes, but for the rest of us it is beyond the power of the human
mind to even begin to conceive.
Try to picture, if you can, a situation where the whole surface of
the earth is in the fluid state of rolling waves. See the tall and stately
trees rolling this way and that as the earth moves beneath them, and
as they are wrenched by the violence of it all; huge limbs will be torn
THE SEVENTH PLAGUE 401

from them and flung with crushing force upon whatever is below.
The great mountain chains sink down as if their very supports had
been taken away, while entire islands with their inhabitants sink like
bottomless ships into the depths of the ocean.
Great open fissures will appear in the ground, bridges will col-
lapse, and roads will be rent and ruined beyond repair. Great and
lordly palaces, skyscrapers, and other great monuments to man's
wealth and skill will literally be torn apart to collapse in great heaps
of ruins and clouds of smothering dust, burying countless of their
owners and tenants beneath them. The great caverns, opening and
shutting beneath the sea, will send colossal tidal waves surging
across the surface of the oceans to crash against the continental
shores and flood inland over vast areas. The great seaport cities, no-
torious for their sinfulness and immorality, will be buried beneath
millions of tons of turbulent, boiling water which will carry away all
before it. Great ocean liners will be lifted up and carried far inland to
be left dumped and wrecked far from the sea by the receding waters.
Buildings, already overthrown by the earthquake, will be swept
along as so much rubble to be piled in indiscriminate heaps of rub-
bish here and there.
Thus, on land and by sea, the destruction will come, but this is
final and total war, and such war today involves land, sea, and air. So
while these forces are working on the surface, the earth will be sub-
jected to the most terrible bombardment it has ever experienced.
Great hailstones, each the weight of a talent, will batter and pulver-
ize the whole surface of the earth. A talent is estimated to be about
sixty-six pounds or thirty kilograms in weight. There are those of us
who have experienced the effect of a hailstorm when the stones
weighed a mere two or three ounces in weight, and we have read and
seen photographs of the effect of a hailstorm when the stones were
as large as a cricket or a baseball, weighing perhaps a pound or a
pound and a half. The destruction was unbelievable. Crops were cut
right down to the ground, roofs were punctured, windows smashed,
and animals killed. But imagine the effect of great blocks of ice, each
a talent in weight, smashing at high speed from thousands of feet
above in an unending barrage upon the surface of the entire earth.
To the eternally lost, it will be the horror of all horrors, the terror
of all terrors, the full fruit of their course of sinfully neglecting their
obligations to the God of heaven. It will be the fullest realization of
the Bible principle, that any man who seeks to save his life shall as
certainly lose it, while those who are prepared to lose their lives and
all of this world's goods for the sake of Christ, will save it unto life
eternal.
While the wicked are perishing by their millions and vainly en-
THE SEVENTH PLAGUE 403

deavoring to find a place of refuge from the tempest, the righteous

are kept safe and secure by the protective hand of God. They simply
stand and see the destruction of the wicked, experiencing at this
time the fullness of the promises contained in Psalm 91:
"He who dwells in the secret place of the Most High Shall abide
under the shadow of the Almighty.
"I will say of the Lord, 'He is my refuge and my fortress; my God,
in Him I will trust.'
"Surely He shall deliver you from the snare of the fowler and
from the perilous pestilence.
"He shall cover you with His feathers, and under His wings you
shall take refuge; His truth shall be your shield and buckler.
"You shall not be afraid of the terror by night, nor of the arrow
that flies by day,
"Nor of the pestilence that walks in darkness, nor of the destruc-
tion that lays waste at noonday.
"A thousand may fall at your side, and ten thousand at your right
hand; but it shall not come near you.
"Only with your eyes shall you look, and see the reward of the
wicked.
"Because you have made the Lord, who is my refuge, even the
Most High, your dwelling place,
"No evil shall befall you, nor shall any plague come near your
dwelling;
"For He shall give His angels charge over you, to keep you in all
your ways.
"In their hands they shall bear you up, lest you dash your foot
against a stone.
"You shall tread upon the lion and the cobra, the young lion and
the serpent you shall trample underfoot.

OPPOSITE PAGE: The seventh plague will be the most destructive and
terrifying of them all. Firstly, there will be the great and terrible earth-
quake the violence of which has never been previously experienced in all
of earth's history. Mountain chains will sink from sight, inhabited islands
will disappear, and the lands of earth will heave, swell, and roll like the
waves of an angry sea.
These awesome convulsions of nature will be as active below the
mighty oceans as they will be on land. The ocean floor will be opening and
closing, alternatively gulping in and spewing out enormous volumes of
water. The sea will be boiling. Gigantic tidal waves many, many times
greater and more destructive than the wave pictured here, will slam onto
the shores carrying all before them as they penetrate great distances
inland.
Nothing the most imaginative mind among men can picture will ade-
quately portray the sheer horror of the seventh plague.
404 LAST DAY EVENTS

"Because he has set his love upon Me, therefore I will deliver
him; I will set him on high, because he has known My name.
"He shall call upon Me, and I will answer him; I will be with him
in trouble; I will deliver him and honor him.
"With long life I will satisfy him, and show him My salvation."
Verses 1-16.
Today is the day when every believer should memorize that
Psalm, so that when the Lord delivers His people from the destruc-
tion which shall waste at noonday, and we see a thousand fall at our
side and ten thousand fall at our right hand, without the plague com-
ing near to us, then these words will be a very precious stay to our
faith, and will call forth a strong song of praise and thankfulness to
God.
So will come the seventh and last plague and into which both the
righteous and the wicked will enter. The former will know that they
are eternally saved, while the other will know that they are eternally
and irretrievably lost. Knowing that they have lost all hope of eternal
life, they will then witness the full loss of all earthly things for which
they have sacrificed all that was worthwhile and eternal. Millions will
perish with their possessions, but there will be some who will survive
that holocaust to witness the Saviour return in the clouds of heaven
and to flee in terror from His presence.
 Chapter 37

The Special

Thus far we have studied the seventh plague in its role of the
great and fearful destroyer of the beast, his image, and the multi-
tudes who have been seduced by that master deception. We have
seen how the earthquake and the hail, together with the resulting
storm, tempest, and tidal waves, will obliterate so much of the
world's great and beautiful structures, and will annihilate a vast pro-
portion of the inhabitants of the earth. When it is finished, the earth
will have been reduced to an uninhabitable wreck.
But the earthquake does more than this. It opens the prison
walls, and those who have been incarcerated for their refusal to bow
to the beast and his image are set free, never more to be bound or fet-
tered. They emerge triumphant and rejoicing.
But these are not the only prison walls which are to be opened by
the earthquake. "Graves are opened, and 'many of them that sleep
in the dust of the earth . . . awake, some to everlasting life, and some
to shame and everlasting contempt.' Daniel 12:2. All who have died
in the faith of the third angel's message come forth from the tomb
glorified, to hear God's covenant of peace with those who have kept
his law. 'They also which pierced Him,' (Revelation 1:7), those that
mocked and derided Christ's dying agonies, and the most violent op-
posers of His truth and His people, are raised to behold Him in His
glory, and to see the honor placed upon the loyal and the obedient."
Great Controversy, 637.
This event will be a fulfillment of a prophecy made long before
this time. The first reference to it is in Daniel 12:1, 2.
"At that time Michael shall stand up, the great Prince who stands
watch over the sons of your people; and there shall be a time of
trouble, such as never was since there was a nation, even to that
time. And at that time your people shall be delivered, every one who
is found written in the book.
"And many of those who sleep in the dust of the earth shall
406 LAST DAY EVENTS

awake, some to everlasting life, some to shame and everlasting

contempt."
It is to be noted that here is a resurrection in which both right-
eous and wicked will share. Some will rise to everlasting life, but oth-
ers to shame and everlasting contempt. We know from 1 Thessalo-
nians 4:13-18, that when Jesus comes in the clouds of heaven, then
all those who will yet be sleeping in their graves will come forth in
the resurrection of the just. Whereas Revelation 20, tells us that the
rest of the wicked dead remain in their graves until the end of the one
thousand years.
But those who share in this resurrection, as the statement above
tells us, do so a little time before the actual appearing of the Lord in
the clouds of heaven, as a distinct and separate resurrection from the
one in which the majority of the righteous dead participate. The
righteous who participate in this resurrection—which is generally
termed the special resurrection—are those who have died in the faith
of the third angel's message. That is, it involves those who have died
since 1844 with a saving knowledge of the three angels' messages of
Revelation 14:6-12. Not one of the righteous who died before 1844
will have a part in this resurrection. There is a special reason for this,
which we will discuss very shortly.
It is important that we do not rest satisfied with a superficial view
of what it means to be in the faith of the third angel's message. All
too many think that this specification is met by simply believing in a
list of doctrines such as the Sabbath, the sanctuary, the second ad-
vent of Christ, and so forth, together with the discontinuance of
worldly pleasures and ambitions.
To go thus far is to be a Laodicean. It is to be wretched, miser-
able, poor, blind, and naked, while believing that you are spiritually
rich and in need of nothing.
The third angel follows the first and has all the light of the first
two. The first comes having the everlasting gospel which is the
power of God to literally save from sin by rooting out the old spiritual
nature, and replacing it with the new, divine nature.
Without this inner transformation, a person does not live in the
faith of the third angel, no matter what doctrines he subscribes to, or
how many evil practices he might abolish from his life. For a more
detailed description of this experience and how to obtain it, study
From Bondage to Freedom, by F. T. Wright.
Along with the righteous who are raised at this special time prior
to the actual appearing of Christ in the clouds of heaven, are a cer-
tain number of the wicked who have died in the past. They are raised
to witness His appearing in glory, and are the ones who are raised to
shame and everlasting contempt. Looking forward with prophetic
THE SPECIAL RESURRECTION 407

eye, Jesus, on the night of His betrayal and condemnation, declared

to His persecutors that the time would come when they would wit-
ness His coming, and see a very different situation from the one pre-
vailing on the night of His arrest and condemnation.
The high priest, anxious to have Jesus condemn Himself, said to
Him, " 'I adjure You by the living God that You tell us if You are the
Christ, the Son of God.'
"Jesus said to him, 'It is as you said. Nevertheless, I say to you,
hereafter you will see the Son of Man sitting at the right hand of the
Power, and coming on the clouds of heaven.' " Matthew 26:63, 64.
Caiaphas has long since passed to his grave, while the appearing
of Christ in the clouds of heaven is still a future event. Therefore, for
him to be a witness to that wonderful spectacle—although it will be
far from wonderful in his eyes—he will have to be specially raised to
life again for that purpose. And he will be, along with many others of
those who have been in the forefront of the terrible work of warring
against the Son of God.
Thus it will be, that when Jesus comes again, those who had
most effectively and diligently worked to destroy Him will be wit-
nesses to the power and the glory which will then attend him.
"Behold, He is coming with clouds, and every eye will see Him,
and they also who pierced Him. And all the tribes of the earth will
mourn because of Him. Even so, Amen." Revelation 1:7.
To them who had warred against Him without remorse, it will be
the most terrible experience possible, and then they will seek to hide
from the face of Jesus. The situation will be reversed then, and they
will feel the condemnation for their evil deeds. For them there will be
no hiding place, and they will be destroyed to remain unburied in
death until the thousand years shall be ended.
"There are those who mocked Christ in His humiliation. With
thrilling power come to their minds the Sufferer's words, when, ad-
jured by the high priest, He solemnly declared: 'Hereafter shall ye
see the Son of Man sitting on the right hand of power, and coming in
the clouds of heaven.' Matthew 26:64. Now they behold Him in His
glory, and they are yet to see Him sitting on the right hand of power.
"Those who derided His claim to be the Son of God are speech-
less now. There is the haughty Herod who jeered at His royal title
and bade the mocking soldiers crown Him king. There are the very
men who with impious hands place upon His form the purple robe,
upon His sacred brow the thorny crown, and in His unresisting hand
the mimic scepter, and bowed before Him in blasphemous mockery.
The men who smote and spit upon the Prince of life now turn from
His piercing gaze and seek to flee from the overpowering glory of His
presence. Those who drove the nails through His hands and feet, the
408 LAST DAY EVENTS

Under the terms of living in

mortality on this sin-cursed
planet, everyone is born to die
sooner or later, and all men
know this. What is less well
known is the fact that all are des-
tined in the plan and purpose of
God to be resurrected again,
some for a short period; others unto eternal life.

soldier who pierced His side, behold these marks with terror and
remorse.
"With awful distinctness do priests and rulers recall the events of
Calvary. With shuddering horror they remember how, wagging their
heads in satanic exultation, they exclaimed: 'He saved others; Him-
self He cannot save. If He be the King of Israel, let Him now come
THE SPECIAL RESURRECTION 409

down from the cross, and we will believe Him. He trusted in God; let
Him deliver Him now, if He will have Him.' Matthew 27:42, 43.
"Vividly they recall the Saviour's parable of the husbandmen
who refused to render to their lord the fruit of the vineyard, who
abused his servants and slew his son. They remember, too, the sen-
tence which they themselves pronounced: The lord of the vineyard
'will miserably destroy those wicked men.' In the sin and punishment
of those unfaithful men the priests and elders see their own course
and their own just doom. And now there rises a cry of mortal agony.
Louder than the shout, 'Crucify Him, crucify Him,' which rang
through the streets of Jerusalem, swells the awful, despairing wail,
'He is the Son of God! He is the true Messiah!' They seek to flee
from the presence of the King of kings. In the deep caverns of the
earth, rent asunder by the warring of the elements, they vainly at-
tempt to hide.
"In the lives of all who reject truth there are moments when con-
science awakens, when memory presents the torturing recollection
of a life of hypocrisy and the soul is harassed with vain regrets. But
what are these compared with the remorse of that day when 'fear
cometh as desolation,' when 'destruction cometh as a whirlwind'!
Proverbs 1:27. Those who would have destroyed Christ and His
faithful people now witness the glory which rests upon them. In the
midst of their terror they hear the voices of the saints in joyful strains
exclaiming: 'Lo, this is our God; we have waited for Him, and He will
save us.' Isaiah 25:9." Great Controversy, 643, 644.
The purpose of the resurrection of this class of wicked people is
perfectly obvious, but it may well be asked why it is that there is a spe-
cial resurrection of a section of the righteous, that is, those who have
died in the faith of the third angel's message, before the remainder?
Something of the answer to this question may be found in the dif-
ference between the shout of victory uttered by those who have been
raised in the special resurrection prior to the second advent, and the
shout of victory uttered by those who are raised when Christ actually
appears. Let us compare them.
The shout of victory given by those who come up in the special
resurrection is not given at the very moment when they come forth
from the tomb. It follows after a little time during which things con-
tinue to develop from the seventh plague of the earthquake and hail.
Following through the description as given in The Great Contro-
versy, 637-640, it is found that there is a terrible storm following the
great earthquake. The heavens are wrapped in dark, angry clouds
lashed by fierce lightnings and shaken by the roll of the deep toned
thunder.
"Above the terrific roar of the thunder, voices, mysterious and
410 LAST DAY EVENTS

awful, declare the doom of the wicked. The words spoken are not
comprehended by all; but they are distinctly understood by the false
teachers. Those who a little before were so reckless, so boastful and
defiant, so exultant in their cruelty to God's commandment-keeping
people, are now overwhelmed with consternation and shuddering in
fear. Their wails are heard above the sound of the elements. Demons
acknowledge the deity of Christ and tremble before his power, while
men are supplicating for mercy and groveling in abject terror." Great
Controversy, 638.
To all this, the newly resurrected ones are witnesses. It is difficult
to imagine the impression this must make upon their minds. They
went to their graves, and the last conscious impressions on their
minds were those of the surroundings as they were at the time of
their deaths, as far back as the middle of the last century. It was a
relatively peaceful, well-ordered world from which they departed.
Then, suddenly they are awakened into this scene of indescribable
destruction and chaos. It will certainly take them a little time to ad-
just to it all, to grasp just what is going on, and to figure out where
they are. At first they might think it all to be a dream.
Then as they watch, the heavens begin to change. At first there is
a rift in the clouds, through which there beams a star of great bril-
liance. "It speaks hope and joy to the faithful, but severity and wrath
to the transgressors of God's law. Those who have sacrificed all for
Christ are now secure, hidden as in the secret of the Lord's pavilion.
They have been tested, and before the world and the despisers of
truth they have evinced their fidelity to Him who died for them. A
marvelous change has come over those who have held fast their in-
tegrity in the very face of death. They have been suddenly delivered
from the dark and terrible tyranny of men transformed to demons.
Their faces, so lately pale, anxious, and haggard, are now aglow with
wonder, faith, and love. Their voices rise in triumphant song: 'God is
our refuge and strength, a very present help in trouble. Therefore
will not we fear, though the earth be removed, and though the moun-
tains be carried into the midst of the sea; though the waters thereof
roar and be troubled, though the mountains shake with the swelling
thereof.' Psalms 46:1-3." Great Controversy, 638, 639.
In response to this song of praise and victory, the rift in the
clouds widens, and the stars shine through. "Then there appears
against the sky a hand holding two tables of stone folded together."
Great Controversy, 639. These are the tables of the law, and as all
watch spellbound, the hand opens the tables and there the law is be-
fore all to read.
"The words are so plain that all can read them. Memory is
aroused, the darkness of superstition and heresy is swept from every
THE SPECIAL RESURRECTION 411

mind, and God's ten words, brief, comprehensive, and authoritative,

are presented to the view of all the inhabitants of the earth." Great
Controversy, 639.
This now brings the great final moment of truth to the minds of
all men upon the earth who have despised and trampled upon the
law of God, and in doing so, thought that they were doing the service
of God. Now it is seen by each and everyone with vivid clarity who
are in truth the children of God.
"It is impossible to describe the horror and despair of those who
have trampled upon God's holy requirements. The Lord gave them
His law; they might have compared their characters with it and
learned their defects while there was yet opportunity for repentance
and reform; but in order to secure the favor of the world, they set
aside its precepts and taught others to transgress. They have endeav-
ored to compel God's people to profane His Sabbath. Now they are
condemned by that law which they have despised. With awful dis-
tinctness they see that they are without excuse. They chose whom
they would serve and worship. 'Then shall ye return, and discern be-
tween the righteous and the wicked, between him that serveth God
and him that serveth Him not.'
"The enemies of God's law, from the ministers down to the least
among them, have a new conception of truth and duty. Too late they
see that the Sabbath of the fourth commandment is the seal of the
living God. Too late they see the true nature of their spurious Sab-
bath and the sandy foundation upon which they have been building.
They find that they have been fighting against God. Religious teach-
ers have led souls to perdition while professing to guide them to the
gates of Paradise. Not until the day of final accounts will it be known
how great is the responsibility of men in holy office and how terrible
are the results of their unfaithfulness. Only in eternity can we rightly
estimate the loss of a single soul. Fearful will be the doom of him to
whom God shall say: Depart, thou wicked servant." Great Contro-
versy, 639, 640.
Thus the victory over the beast and his image will be absolutely
complete. There is not one of them now who will still fight for the
cause which they see is totally and completely lost and finished.
Those righteous who have been raised in the special resurrection will
have had an opportunity by this time to grasp the significance of the
scenes before them. They will see that the end of the beast and his
image has come, and they are prepared to join in with the living
righteous in the great shout of victory over the beast and his image.
This comes immediately after the announcement of the day and the
hour of the return of Jesus.
This announcement immediately follows the events described
[LDE27J
412 LAST DAY EVENTS

just above. At the same time as this announcement is made, God de-
livers the everlasting covenant to His people.
"And when the blessing is pronounced on those who have hon-
ored God by keeping His Sabbath holy, there is a mighty shout of vic-
tory." Great Controversy, 640.
The Great Controversy does not tell us just what that shout of
victory is, but in Early Writings, 286, it is made clear. There it reads
of the same shout, at the same point of time: "And when the never-
ending blessing was pronounced on those who had honored God in
keeping His Sabbath holy, there was a mighty shout of victory over
the beast and over his image.
But this is not the shout of victory which comes from the lips of
those who are raised in the general resurrection. Theirs is a different
cry for very good reasons. "The earth mightily shook as the voice of
the Son of God called forth the sleeping saints. They responded to
the call and came forth clothed with glorious immortality, crying,
'Victory, victory, over death and the grave! O death, where is thy
sting: O grave, where is thy victory:' " Early Writings, 287.
Why is there this difference? Why does one group of resurrected
saints shout the victory over the beast and his image, and the other
group shout the victory over death and the grave?
The light of the third angel's message, which reveals the rise of
the beast and his image, was not understood prior to the preaching of
the great second advent message in the latter half of the last century.
Those who received that message went forth to fight that last battle
with the beast and his image, and their life-long hope was to witness
that victory. Men like Elder James White, for instance, devoted their
entire life's energies and resources to that battle, but they died with-
out seeing the victory won. So, in His great love and mercy, the Lord
will raise them to life in time to see the victory achieved. As they rise
from their dusty beds, the very thing for which they had hoped and
worked will be seen before them as a consummated reality.
Of this great and final battle the earlier, protestant reformers
were ignorant. Their great enemy was death. It is true that they bat-
tled against the Papacy in the Dark Ages, but this was different from
the battle to be waged in these last days of the earth's history. There-
fore, if they were to be raised in time to see the defeat of the beast
and his image, it would all be a mystery to them, which they would
neither understand nor appreciate. Therefore they remain in their
graves until such time as the great victory is gained over death and
the grave. They went to their graves looking for the day when death
and the grave would have no more power over them, and they come
forth in their immortal state to shout the mighty shout of victory over
the last enemy—death.
THE SPECIAL RESURRECTION 413

Of course, the living saints and those who come forth in the spe-
cial resurrection join in the shout of victory over the tomb along with
the saints who are raised at the actual appearing of Christ.
There is a further reason why they reserve their shout of victory
over death and the grave until this time. It is because immortality,
which is the full victory over death and the grave, is not conferred till
this time. When they came up in the special resurrection, it is not
said that they were then immortalized, but only glorified. At the gen-
eral resurrection, those who had previously been glorified will then
be made immortal or, in other words, given the complete and final
victory over death and the tomb.
"The living righteous are changed 'in a moment, in the twinkling
of an eye.' At the voice of God they were glorified; now they are
made immortal and with the risen saints are caught up to meet the
Lord in the air." Great Controversy, 645.
That glad day for the righteous, when all shall be reversed from
what it is now so far as the apparent triumph of evil is concerned, is
not too far away. How well worthwhile it is for us to strive to have our
part and place in that great and glorious company who will be able to
shout victory over the beast and his image and then victory over
death and the grave.
Chapter 38

Last Hours
of the Wicked
The study of the special resurrection, which is to precede the
general resurrection at the actual second advent of Christ, shows
that a little time elapses between this resurrection and the actual ap-
pearing of Jesus, during which time there is a succession of dramatic
and interesting events. It will be the purpose of this chapter to trace
those events through to the actual appearance of Jesus in the clouds
of heaven.
The special resurrection takes place at the very beginning of the
seventh plague; the very first event of which is the sudden onset of
the fearful earthquake, followed and accompanied by the terrible
downpouring of the destructive hail. One would imagine that this
earthquake will gather force and momentum after the first shock.
That which suggests this fact is that there will be many saints of God
who will be in prison cells at this time, and whose release will be ob-
tained by the rending of the walls of the prison by the force of the
first earthquake shock. The fact of this is expressed in the following
words:
"That voice shakes the heavens and the earth. There is a mighty
earthquake, 'such as was not since men were upon the earth, so
mighty an earthquake, and so great.' . . . prison walls are rent asun-
der, and God's people, who have been held in bondage for their
faith, are set free." Great Controversy, 636, 637.
The full force of this earthquake is such as to cause the "whole
earth" to heave and to swell "like the waves of the sea"; mountain
chains to sink; inhabited islands to disappear; the proud cities of the
earth to be laid low; and the lordly palaces of men to crumble to ruin
before their eyes. Great Controversy, 637.
Certainly an earthquake of such force as to effect such ruin as
listed in the paragraph quoted above, would collapse the entire
prison on the heads of the saints before they had any opportunity to
escape, if that earthquake were to strike with its full destructive force
at its first onset. Rather, the first shock will burst great openings in
LAST HOURS OF THE WICKED 415

the walls and spring the doors from their hinges, and the saints of
God will at once make their escape. Then the succeeding shocks will
tear the whole world apart and leave no building to be anything but a
heap of dusty rubble in which no person could survive.
At the very same time as the saints are released from their pris-
ons, the righteous who have died in the faith of the third angel's mes-
sage will come forth from the prison house of death, likewise rent
open by the power of the earthquake. They then take their stand
upon the earth with the living righteous—the one hundred and forty-
four thousand. At the same time, as we have already seen from our
study, those who, because of their special role in their warfare
against the people of God, are called up to see Him come in the
clouds of heaven, also stand upon the earth to witness the final over-
throw of Babylon.
At this point of time all nature is in a state of utter chaos and ruin.
While the earth itself is heaving and rolling like the billows of an an-
gry ocean, the land is lashed by the savagery of the hail storm, and
the sky above is filled with the rolling and jostling of black and angry
clouds. During this time the righteous enjoy special protection or
they would likewise be destroyed by the elements. It is the story of
Noah all over again. Just as his boat rode safely on a sea so storm
tossed and savage as to have swiftly and surely destroyed it but for
the protection of the God of heaven, so it will be again.
Then the people of God will know by experience the truth of the
promise of Psalm 91.
This is a most fearful time for the wicked who are terrified by the
spectacle around them. The blazing lightning which seems to set the
world on fire and the dreadful crashing and booming of the thunder
is not the worst of it, but is only the backdrop of sound for the fearful
pronouncement of their doom.
"Above the terrific roar of the thunder, voices, mysterious and
awful, declare the doom of the wicked. The words spoken are not
comprehended by all; but they are distinctly understood by the false
teachers. Those who a little before were so reckless, so boastful and
defiant, so exultant in their cruelty to God's commandment-keeping
people, are now overwhelmed with consternation and shuddering in
fear. Their wails are heard above the sound of the elements. Demons
acknowledge the deity of Christ and tremble before His power, while
men are supplicating for mercy and groveling in abject terror." Great
Controversy, 638.
Fearful and terrible as this moment is for them, there is worse yet
to come. It will be bad enough for them to hear their own doom, but
the Lord also, at this time, will again declare that the faithful are His
416 LAST DAY EVENTS

own peculiar people and that for them there is the reward of the
righteous.
"Through a rift in the clouds there beams a star whose brilliancy
is increased fourfold in contrast with the darkness. It speaks hope
and joy to the faithful, but severity and wrath to the transgressors of
God's law. Those who have sacrificed all for Christ are now secure,
hidden as in the secret of the Lord's pavilion. They have been tested,
and before the world and the despisers of truth they have evinced
their fidelity to Him who died for them. A marvelous change has
come over those who have held fast their integrity in the very face of
death. They have been suddenly delivered from the dark and terrible
tyranny of men transformed to demons. Their faces, so lately pale,
anxious, and haggard, are now aglow with wonder, faith, and love.
Their voices rise in triumphant song: 'God is our refuge and
strength, a very present help in trouble. Therefore will not we fear,
though the earth be removed, and though the mountains be carried
into the midst of the sea; though the waters thereof roar and be trou-
bled, though the mountains shake with the swelling thereof.' Psalms
46:1-3." Great Controversy, 638, 639
How galling it will be for the wicked to see the very ones whom
they thought to be the cause of their troubles and whom they abso-
lutely sought to do away with, receiving the approbation of God and
the open assurances of His blessing and protection.
But worse is still to come, for there is nothing more terrible to the
transgressor of the law than to have that law presented before him in
its clarity and power. Before those condemning words, he sees him-
self in the full light of what he is, and indescribable terror strikes his
heart.
"While these words of holy trust ascend to God, the clouds
sweep back, and the starry heavens are seen, unspeakably glorious
in contrast with the black and angry firmament on either side. The
glory of the celestial city streams from the gates ajar. Then there ap-
pears against the sky a hand holding two tables of stone folded to-
gether. Says the prophet: 'The heavens shall declare His righteous-
ness: for God is judge Himself.' Psalm 50:6. That holy law, God's
righteousness, that amid thunder and flame was proclaimed from Si-
nai as the guide of life, is now revealed to men as the rule of judg-
ment. The hand opens the tables, and there are seen the precepts of
the Decalogue, traced as with a pen of fire. The words are so plain
that all can read them. Memory is aroused, the darkness of supersti-
tion and heresy is swept from every mind, and God's ten words,
brief, comprehensive, and authoritative, are presented to the view of
all the inhabitants of the earth." Great Controversy, 639.
This will be a most significant moment in the history of the great
LAST HOURS OF THE WICKED 417

conflict. The last great battle will have been fought over the principles
of the law of God itself. This is what the righteous will have stood for,
even to the loss of all things, including life itself, and this is that which
the wicked have striven under the leadership of Satan to obliterate
from existence. Now it will be seen that the principles of God's law
are absolutely eternal and everlasting, and that those who war against
that law, do so to their own most certain self-destruction.
The sequence of revelation to the wicked during this period is
both interesting and fearful. First of all, they will witness the destruc-
tion of all the material things which they hold most dear and for
which they have not only despised and rejected the law of God, but
have sought to destroy it in the belief that this would serve to protect
them from loss. But the loss of their treasure came as a sure and cer-
tain result of their putting out of their lives and of seeking to put out
of existence the law of God and the people who loved and supported
that law.
Next, they see the very people who have stood for that law and
faithfully kept it, being not only preserved in the midst of the total de-
struction around them, but actually blessed and glorified by God
Himself. This cannot help but serve to convey the message to them
that the harvest which they are reaping is the inevitable consequence
of the course they have pursued; just as surely as the course the right-
eous will have pursued will have brought to them protection and
blessing.
The final capstone to their realization of complete and utter loss
will be the presentation of the law before their very eyes. They had
sought to explain it away; to change it; to destroy it; and to hide from
it. They thought they had succeeded, or at the very least, that they
could sin without ever coming face to face with it again.
Now it appears, not merely down here upon this earth where
they could have access to it and attack it, but up there in the heavens
in the hands of God Himself. There it appears in all its shining splen-
dor, unmarked and undamaged by the attacks of the centuries, as
permanent, as real, and as true as it ever was. There can be no ques-
tion now of the eternal indestructibility of that law. There can now be
no possibility of escape from the sure penalty of its transgression. It
is there before their eyes in too real and solid a form to ever pass
away.
"It is impossible to describe the horror and despair of those who
have trampled upon God's holy requirements. The Lord gave them
His law; they might have compared their characters with it and
learned their defects while there was yet opportunity for repentance
and reform; but in order to secure the favor of the world, they set
aside its precepts and taught others to transgress. They have endeav-
418 LAST DAY EVENTS

Summary of the Events

Between the Seventh Plague
and the Second Advent of Christ
The voice of God declares, "It is done".
That voice shakes the heavens and the earth;
There follows the great earthquake, tidal wave, and hail;
Prison walls are burst open freeing many saints;
The special resurrection takes place;
Thick clouds cover the sky;
From time to time the sun breaks through;
Fierce lightnings envelop the earth in a sheet of flame;
Voices, mysterious and awful, declare the doom of the wicked;
The words spoken are not comprehended by all;
But they are distinctly understood by the false teachers;
Demons acknowledge the deity of Christ, and tremble before
His power;
Men supplicate for mercy and grovel in abject terror;
A brilliant star confirms that the righteous are secure;
A marvellous transformation comes over them;
The clouds sweep back and the glory of the city shines
through;
God's holy law is displayed in the sky;
The voice of God announces the day and hour of Christ's
coming;
The everlasting covenant delivered to the saints;
Soon there appears in the East the cloud of Christ's return.
Great Controversy, 636-640

ored to compel God's people to profane His Sabbath. Now they are
condemned by that law which they have despised. With awful dis-
tinctness they see that they are without excuse. They chose whom
they would serve and worship. 'Then shall ye return, and discern be-
tween the righteous and the wicked, between him that serveth God
and him that serveth Him not.' Malachi 3:18.
"The enemies of God's law, from the ministers down to the least
among them, have a new conception of truth and duty. Too late they
see that the Sabbath of the fourth commandment is the seal of the
living God. Too late they see the true nature of their spurious sab-
LAST HOURS OF THE WICKED 419

bath and the sandy foundation upon which they have been building.
They find that they have been fighting against God. Religious teach-
ers have led souls to perdition while professing to guide them to the
gates of Paradise. Not until the day of final accounts will it be known
how great is the responsibility of men in holy office and how terrible
are the results of their unfaithfulness. Only in eternity can we rightly
estimate the loss of a single soul. Fearful will be the doom of him to
whom God shall say: 'Depart, thou wicked servant.' " Great Con-
troversy, 639, 640.
These events bring the situation to the place where in the fullest
way the wicked see that they have been deluded and led astray, and
they abandon all support for the devil and his agents. The full pur-
pose of the great controversy will then have been achieved, and the
way of the coming of the Saviour and His angels fully prepared. The
next event in the drama is the announcement of the actual day and
the hour of Jesus' coming. Up until this point of time no one will
know that date, much as some would like to, and despite the fact that
there are those false prophets who claim that they do. But there is
coming the time, just prior to the actual appearing, when the day and
the hour of Jesus coming will be announced, to the unspeakable re-
joicing of the righteous.
"The voice of God is heard from heaven, declaring the day and
hour of Jesus' coming, and delivering the everlasting covenant to His
people. Like peals of loudest thunder His words roll through the
earth. The Israel of God stand listening, with their eyes fixed up-
ward. Their countenances are lighted up with His glory, and shine as
did the face of Moses when he came down from Sinai. The wicked
cannot look upon them. And when the blessing is pronounced on
those who have honored God by keeping His Sabbath holy, there is a
mighty shout of victory." Great Controversy, 640.
As the final recognition and admission of total defeat, the wicked
now throw themselves at the feet of the saints, whom they had been
so determined to destroy, and acknowledge that they are the true
ones after all and the ones whom the Lord loved. This will be the ful-
fillment of a promise made by the Lord to the Philadelphian church
in these words:
"Indeed I will make those of the synagogue of Satan, who say
they are Jews and are not, but lie—indeed I will make them come and
worship before your feet, and know that I have loved you." Revela-
tion3:9.
The establishment of the fact that this is the time when this does
take place is given in the following statement from Early Writings,
15: "Soon we heard the voice of God like many waters, which gave
us the day and hour of Jesus' coming. The living saints, 144,000 in
420 LAST DAY EVENTS

number, knew and understood the voice, while the wicked thought it
was thunder and an earthquake. When God spoke the time, He
poured upon us the Holy Ghost, and our faces began to light up and
shine with the glory of God, as Moses' did when he came down from
Mount Sinai.
"The 144,000 were all sealed and perfectly united. On their fore-
heads was written, God, New Jerusalem, and a glorious star contain-
ing Jesus' new name. At our happy, holy state the wicked were en-
raged, and would rush violently up to lay hands on us to thrust us into
prison, when we would stretch forth the hand in the name of the
Lord, and they would fall helpless to the ground. Then it was that the
synagogue of Satan knew that God had loved us who could wash one
another's feet and salute the brethren with a holy kiss, and they wor-
shiped at our feet.
This will be a time of terrible anguish for the wicked, and, no
doubt, for the righteous too. While the righteous are rejoicing in the
victory, that rejoining will not be because they have gotten the vic-
tory over other men and women, but only because truth has tri-
umphed over iniquity. While they will be glad that truth has con-
quered, it will be with sorrow that they see men and women, who
might have been with them in the eternal bliss, lose all in the great
conflict of life.
It is clear that while the wicked will bow at the feet of the right-
eous, the minister will also do this, only in a more agonized way even
than the wicked generally.
"I saw that the priests who are leading on their flock to death are
soon to be arrested in their dreadful career. The plagues of God are
coming, but it will not be sufficient for the false shepherds to be tor-
mented with one or two of these plagues. God's hand at that time
will be stretched out still in wrath and justice, and will not be brought
to Himself again until His purposes are fully accomplished, and the
hireling priests are led to worship at the feet of the saints, and to ac-
knowledge that God has loved them because they held fast the truth
and kept God's commandments, and until all the unrighteous ones
are destroyed from the earth." Early Writings, 124.
This, then, will be the end and the beginning. For the wicked it
will be the total and final end of their warfare against the God of
heaven in the persons of His people. Now all their schemes and theo-
ries will have come to their end, and they themselves will be blotted
out of existence. For the righteous, it will be the end of sorrow and
struggle, of ridicule and contempt, of hardship and the frailty of hu-
manity, and for them, the beginning of the wonderful, eternal life
without end in the glory of the kingdom restored.
Then the struggles of this life will appear to be nothing in the
LAST HOURS OF THE WICKED 421

light of the glory which is to be theirs in the fellowship of Christ and

the angels. Glad day indeed, when sin and disobedience will come to
their proper end, and righteousness alone shall reign in the kingdom
of God.
Today, each of us is determining the place in which we shall be
found at that time by the positions we are taking at the moment.
Either we are preparing to stand with the righteous then or with the
wicked. May the Lord help us see the true and the proper path, and
have the courage and the faith to walk in it, so when that time shall
come we shall be found faithful and true.
Chapter 39

Jesus Comes Again

The announcement of the day and the hour of Jesus' coming is
followed quite quickly by the appearing itself: "Soon there appears
in the east a small black cloud, about half the size of a man's hand. It
is the-cloud which surrounds the Saviour and which seems in the dis-
tance to be shrouded in darkness. The people of God know this to be
the sign of the Son of man. In solemn silence they gaze upon it as it
draws nearer the earth, becoming lighter and more glorious, until it
is a great white cloud, its base a glory like consuming fire, and above
it the rainbow of the covenant. Jesus rides forth as a mighty con-
queror. Not now a 'Man of Sorrows,' to drink the bitter cup of shame
and woe, He comes, victor in heaven and earth, to judge the living
and the dead. 'Faithful and True,' 'in righteousness He doth judge
and make war.' And 'the armies which were in heaven' (Revelation
19:11, 14) follow Him. With anthems of celestial melody the holy
angels, a vast, unnumbered throng, attend Him on His way. The fir-
mament seems filled with radiant forms—'ten thousand times ten
thousand, and thousands of thousands.' No human pen can portray
the scene; no mortal mind is adequate to conceive its splendor. 'His
glory covered the heavens, and the earth was full of His praise. And
His brightness was as the light.' Habakkuk 3:3, 4. As the living
cloud comes still nearer, every eye beholds the Prince of life. No
crown of thorns now mars that sacred head; but a diadem of glory
rests on His holy brow. His countenance outshines the dazzling
brightness of the noonday sun. 'And He hath on His vesture and on
His thigh a name written, King of kings, and Lord of lords.' Reve-
lation 19:16." Great Controversy, 640, 641.
When Jesus appears the second time, there will be four general
classes of people. There will be the living righteous and the living
wicked, and there will be the righteous dead and the wicked dead.
This can be broken down into further subdivisions so far as the living
are concerned. There will be among the living righteous, the two
groups consisting of the one hundred and forty-four thousand, who
will have never died, and the ones raised in the special resurrection.
Likewise, there will be the wicked who will not have died so far, to-
gether with those raised in the special resurrection. This would make
JESUS COMES AGAIN 423

six classes altogether, and each class will be subject to the one fate or
the other.
The living saints, which we understand to be the one hundred
and forty-four thousand, and the risen saints, who will be those who
are raised in the special resurrection after having been faithful to the
message of the third angel, will witness the final events of the sev-
enth plague and will see, first of all, the sign of the Son of Man in the
tiny cloud, followed by the fullness of His coming as He draws nearer
to the earth. This will not be seen by those of the righteous who are
still at this time in their tombs, for their resurrection does not take
place until Jesus has actually arrived immediately above their resting
places.
When Jesus first appears in His awful majesty and spotless per-
fection, the scene fills the hearts of every living person with a name-
less dread. This is true of both the righteous and the wicked; al-
though the despair of the wicked is the terror of a completely hope-
less case. But even the "righteous cry with trembling: 'Who shall be
able to stand?' " Great Controversy, 641.
For the wicked, there is no answer to this question except in the
darkest of negatives: "Before His presence, 'all faces are turned into
paleness;' upon the rejecters of God's mercy falls the terror of eter-
nal despair. The heart melteth, and the knees smite together, . . .
and the faces of them all gather blackness.' " Great Controversy,
641.
But as the trembling righteous ask the question, God supplies the
answer which lights up their faces with the joy of the certainty of de-
liverance. This answer comes as "the angel's song is hushed and
there is a period of awful silence. Then the voice of Jesus is heard,
saying: 'My grace is sufficient for you.' The faces of the righteous are
lighted up, and joy fills every heart. And the angels strike a note
higher and sing again as they draw still nearer to the earth." Great
Controversy, 641.
Why do the righteous who have passed successfully through such
a bitter conflict and received such tokens of deliverance, such as the
utter defeat of their enemies and the wonder of the resurrection of
the sleeping saints from their graves, tremble at the thought that no
man could stand in the presence of Jesus and be saved? Is it because
they still have sin in their lives?
For some, such facts may warrant such a conclusion, but it could
only be an erroneous conclusion, for at the close of His high priestly
ministry, prior to this by quite some time, Jesus had declared, "He
who is unjust, let him be unjust still: he who is filthy, let him be filthy
still: he who is righteous, let him be righteous still: he who is holy, let
him be holy still." Revelation 22:11.
424 LAST DAY EVENTS

It is to be observed that the clear wording of this scripture places

the emphasis on the actual state of being in which each class will be
found at this time; not on any standing of righteousness or perfec-
tion which they might hope to have. This is to say, then, that the
ones who do stand there upon the earth will truly be a sinless people
in actual, literal fact. Therefore it will certainly not be on account of
sin in them that they will tremblingly ask this question, for they will
be a sinless people and will remain so for eternity.
But, though they are a sinless people, they will still be living in
mortal, corruptible flesh and therefore in sinful flesh. The conferring
on them of incorruption and immortality does not take place until
the general resurrection when this gift is given to all of God's people
together. This is equally true of the one hundred and forty-four thou-
sand and those raised in the special resurrection.
Confirmation of this fact is given in the following statements, the
first of which describes the condition in which those involved in the
special resurrection come forth from the tomb. It is to be noted that
no mention is made of their receiving incorruption and immortality
at this time, but only that they are glorified. The conferring of im-
mortality and incorruption on them comes at the actual general res-
urrection of the righteous at the coming of Jesus.
Here is the first statement which describes the resurrection of
those who come forth when the earthquake of the seventh plague
opens their graves: "Graves were opened, and 'many of them that
sleep in the dust of the earth . . . awake, some to everlasting life, and
some to shame and everlasting contempt.' Daniel 12:2. All who
have died in the faith of the third angel's message come forth from
the tomb glorified, to hear God's covenant of peace with those who
have kept His law." Great Controversy, 637.
Mark it again, that at this time, even though they have been
raised to receive eternal life, this is not conferred upon them the mo-
ment they come forth from the tomb. They are only glorified and
must wait a little longer for this gift of immortality and incorruption.
This comes when the same gift is given to all the others who are still
at that time sleeping in the tomb, but who will be raised when Jesus
comes in Person to the earth. This is made clear in the following
words:
"The living righteous are changed 'in a moment, in the twinkling
of an eye.' At the voice of God they were glorified; now they are
made immortal and with the risen saints are caught up to meet their
Lord in the air. Angels 'gather together His elect from the four winds,
from one end of heaven to the other.' Little children are borne by
holy angels to their mothers' arms. Friends long separated by death
JESUS COMES AGAIN 425

are united, nevermore to part, and with songs of gladness ascend to-
gether to the City of God." Great Controversy, 645.
One may well ask what the difference is between being glorified
and being immortalized. It is very obvious from the above statements
that there is a very definite difference; one can have the former with-
out having the latter. The answer is given in this statement from
Early Writings, 15, which refers us back to the experience of Moses
when he was so glorified, as the result of being in the presence of
God, that his face shone, so that the children of Israel could not look
upon him except he put a veil over his face. Yet we know that he was
not immortal, for he could die and he did die. The statement reads:
"Soon we heard the voice of God like many waters, which gave
us the day and the hour of Jesus' coming. The living saints, one hun-
dred and forty-four thousand in number, knew and understood the
voice, while the wicked thought it was thunder and an earthquake.
When God spoke the time, He poured upon us the Holy Ghost, and
our faces began to light up and shine with the glory of God, as
Moses' did when he came down from Mount Sinai."
To be glorified, then, is to be so filled with the Spirit of God that
the very outshining of that Spirit through the person is a glory upon
which the unrighteous cannot look. It can be likened to the glory
which shone around Christ on the Mount of Transfiguration, but it
does not mean that the person so glorified has been delivered from
sinful, fallen, corruptible, and mortal flesh. It was while he still re-
tained that flesh that Moses was glorified, and it will be while still in
that flesh that the one hundred and forty-four thousand, together
with those raised in the special resurrection, will be glorified.
All of this serves to give the answer as to why it is that the sinless
righteous will tremblingly ask the question as Christ appears. "Who
shall be able to stand?" They know that in the unshielded presence
of God, sinful, mortal, corruptible flesh cannot live. It will be de-
stroyed, and, knowing that theirs is just that kind of flesh, they ex-
pect that it will be destroyed and they with it. Nor will they be misled
or disappointed in those expectations, so far as the destruction of
that flesh is concerned, for that sinful, corruptible, mortal flesh is to
perish forever, but in that self-same instant the Lord will give them a
newly created flesh and blood body which will be incorruptible and
immortal. So instantaneous will be the passing away of the one and
the receiving of the other, that the saints will not lose one instant of
consciousness through the operation: "The living righteous are
changed 'in a moment, in the twinkling of an eye.' " Great Contro-
versy, 645.
The wicked are also terribly aware at this time of the fact that sin
cannot live in the presence of the pure and the holy God, but while to
426 LAST DAY EVENTS

the righteous comes the comforting words, "My grace is sufficient for
you," no such words of relief are to be found for those who have lived
their whole lifetimes in sin and unrighteousness. They are to pass
away, with no act of recreation to give them immortality in the place
of the corruption which they have ever cherished and cultivated.
Now are fulfilled the words of Revelation 6:15-17, as with des-
perate panic the wicked, from the highest kings and potentates
down to the lowliest slave, seek to hide away from that presence.
They crawl into holes, under the shattered ruins of the buildings, into
cracks and crannies in the mountains, crying to the rocks to crush
them, rather than face that terrible brightness.
"And the kings of the earth, the great men, the rich men, the
commanders, the mighty men, every slave and every free man, hid
themselves in the caves and in the rocks of the mountains,
"and said to the mountains and rocks, 'Fall on us and hide us
from the face of Him who sits on the throne and from the wrath of
the Lamb!
" 'For the great day of His wrath has come, and who is able to
stand?' " Revelation 6:15-17.
But in that day there will be no hiding place from the face of the
Lamb who has come with the power of the Father to execute judg-
ment upon all the ungodly and the unholy. No matter where the
wicked will seek to hide, the seventh plague will find them and de-
stroy them, and there will not be one of them left remaining upon the
earth. "At the coming of Christ the wicked are blotted from the face
of the whole earth—consumed with the spirit of His mouth and de-
stroyed by the brightness of His glory." Great Controversy, 657.
(For an explanation of how the brightness of His glory destroys the
wicked, see the book, Behold Your God, the chapter entitled, "The
Brightness of His Coming", by F. T. Wright.)
At this point of time it is to be understood that there is not one
living wicked person left alive upon the earth. Those who were
raised in the special resurrection to see Jesus come are all slain to-
gether with those who have remained alive during that awful out-
pouring of the seven last plagues. There is not one left to bury an-
other; the bodies lay strewn in profusion over the whole earth.
As Jesus descends to the earth; as the seventh plague is destroy-
ing the wicked; as the righteous with trembling are asking the ques-
tion, "Who shall be able to stand?"; as the answer comes, "My
grace is sufficient for you"; as the faces of the righteous light up with
holy trust and joy; as the angels sing again on a higher note; and as
the whole glorious retinue draws nearer to the earth, the great har-
vest of the righteous dead of all ages are still sleeping in their tombs,
all unconscious of what is going on above them.
JESUS COMES AGAIN 427

But the great glad moment has come for their eternal release
from the prison house of death, the general resurrection—the great
harvest of the ages. This is the hour to which every child of God is
looking with hope-filled hearts; praying, hoping, and working to-
ward the end taking place soon, very soon—within the span of our
own lifetimes. We would do well to contemplate that scene often so
that the picture of it will spur us on to greater and still greater effort
to hasten the day.
Let us think often of that time when: "Amid the reeling of the
earth, the flash of lightning, and the roar of thunder, the voice of the
Son of God calls forth the sleeping saints. He looks upon the graves
of the righteous, then, raising His hands to heaven, He cries:
'Awake, awake, awake, ye that sleep in the dust, and arise!'
Throughout the length and breadth of the earth the dead shall hear
that voice, and they that hear shall live. And the whole earth shall
ring with the tread of the exceeding great army of every nation, kin-
dred, tongue, and people. From the prison house of death they
come, clothed with immortal glory, crying: 'O death, where is thy
sting: O grave, where is thy victory:' 1 Corinthians 15:55. And the
living righteous and the risen saints unite their voices in a long, glad
shout of victory.
"All come forth from their graves the same in stature as when
they entered the tomb. Adam, who stands among the risen throng, is
of lofty height and majestic form, in stature but little below the Son
of God. He presents a marked contrast to the people of later genera-
tions; in this one respect is shown the great degeneracy of the race.
But all arise with the freshness and vigor of eternal youth. In the be-
ginning, man was created in the likeness of God, not only in charac-
ter, but in form and feature. Sin defaced and almost obliterated the
divine image; but Christ came to restore that which had been lost. He
will change our vile bodies and fashion them like unto His glorious
body. The mortal, corruptible form, devoid of comeliness, once pol-
luted with sin, becomes perfect, beautiful, and immortal. All blem-
ishes and deformities are left in the grave. Restored to the tree of life
in the long-lost Eden, the redeemed will 'grow up' (Malachi 4:2) to
the full stature of the race in its primeval glory. The last lingering
traces of the curse of sin will be removed, and Christ's faithful ones
will appear in 'the beauty of the Lord our God,' in mind and soul and
body reflecting the perfect image of their Lord. Oh, wonderful re-
demption! long talked of, long hoped for, contemplated with eager
anticipation, but never fully understood." Great Controversy, 645.
How the numbers of the kingdom will grow in that time! First,
the only ones alive upon the earth will be the one hundred and forty-
four thousand. Then, to them will be added all the faithful who have
[LDE28]
JESUS COMES AGAIN 429

died in the faith of the third angel's message, thus greatly swelling
the ranks of the faithful and the true. Then, to them will be added the
millions of all ages who have been faithful to the Lord in their life-
times but who had to wait in their graves until this time.
"And all these, having obtained a good testimony through faith,
did not receive the promise,
"God having provided something better for us, that they should
not be made perfect apart from us." Hebrews 11:39, 40.
This scripture makes it plain that the final perfecting of the
saints, which will not be experienced in the complete sense until im-
mortality and incorruptibility are conferred upon them, is something
which no part of the redeemed will receive in advance of another.
The exceptions to this are those already in heaven such as Moses,
Enoch, Elijah, and the ones who were raised when Jesus was, and
who serve with Him in the heavenly courts at the present time, as re-
vealed in Matthew 27:52, 53; Desire of Ages, 786; and Revelation
4&5.
So it is, that when Jesus comes, the living righteous will not go
ahead of the resurrected ones, but will wait till the others have been
raised, will receive with them the gift of immortality, and with them
will ascend into the cloud to be with Jesus forever. Paul sets this out
very clearly in 1 Thessalonians 4:13-18.
"But I do not want you to be ignorant, brethren, concerning
those who have fallen asleep, lest you sorrow as others who have no
hope.
"For if we believe that Jesus died and rose again, even so God
will bring with Him those who sleep in Jesus.
"For this we say to you by the word of the Lord, that we who are
alive and remain until the coming of the Lord will by no means pre-
cede those who are asleep.
"For the Lord Himself will descend from heaven with a shout,
with the voice of an archangel, and with the trumpet of God. And the
dead in Christ will rise first.
"Then we who are alive and remain shall be caught up together

OPPOSITE PAGE: The second coining of Christ will be much different

from His first appearing which was in such humility and obscurity that it
was with great difficulty that the wise men from the east were able to find
Him. If they had not had the guidance of the beautiful, glowing star, it is
virtually certain they would never have discovered His lowly place. But,
when He comes again, it will be with a huge retinue of shining angels, and
in both His own glory, and the glory of His heavenly Father. For the saints
yearning for deliverance from this sin-cursed earth, it will be the most glo-
rious fulfillment of their most earnest longings.
430 LAST DAY EVENTS

with them in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air. And thus we shall
always be with the Lord.
"Therefore comfort one another with these words."
Thus the picture is clear. As Christ descends, the living saints
upon the earth await the resurrection of all the rest of the righteous.
They are called forth from the tomb, and then the whole family of the
redeemed are caught up together to meet the Lord in the air, joining
with the angels and with Enoch, Moses, Elijah, and the rest of those
who were raised when Jesus was, as they all surround their Re-
deemer and King.
Below them the earth is one vast field of desolation and ruin with
not a living person upon its surface. It is to be left this way for the
thousand years of Sabbath rest, to fulfill the law of God, which has
been so flagrantly broken during all of the previous six thousand
years.
Who can understand the joy and the gladness which will then be
expressed in the songs of praise which will issue forth from the glori-
fied and immortalized saints in that day? Who can now see how
cheap and worthless the things of this earth will be in their view
then? Who can understand how thankful they will be then, that they
have endured the privation and the troubles and the sacrifices in-
volved in serving the Lord of glory now, when it seems that every-
thing is going the way of the world and the wicked are the ones who
always prosper?
But while the imagination at this time can scarcely picture the
wonder and the marvel of it, yet the certainty of its coming is there
just the same. Come it will. When it comes, it will be the eternal de-
liverance from sickness, sorrow, death, pain, parting, disappoint-
ment, broken hopes, bereavement, sin, unrighteousness, disease,
and a thousand other ills. It will be deliverance from all that the hu-
man heart longs to be delivered from, but let it ever be remembered,
that only those who are being delivered from sin now, will have any
hope of being delivered from all that then. Only they who are first de-
livered from the power of Satan within, while there is still probation-
ary time, can hope then to be forever delivered from Satan's power
without.
 Chapter 40

The Scapegoat
Transaction
Quite a little time has been spent in tracing through the final
events just before the actual appearing of Jesus. So much happens
during the seventh plague that one might gain the impression that
quite a period of time elapses while this is all taking place, but this is
not actually so. These events move in quite rapid succession, and
only a short time passes by before Christ will actually appear in the
clouds of heaven to redeem His faithful ones from the earth.
However, before this glorious retinue of ransomed beings, to-
gether with Christ, the angels, and those of the redeemed who have
previously been taken up to heaven such as Moses, Elijah, and
Enoch, set forth on their journey back to heaven, there is a work for
Christ to perform. It will be the fulfilling of the type represented by
the confession of the sins upon the scapegoat.
On the great Day of Atonement, which took place every year on
the tenth day of the seventh month, after the priest had made an end
of making the atonement for the most holy place, the holy place, and
the altar of sacrifice, he confessed all the sins of Israel upon the head
of the scapegoat and by the hand of a fit man, sent it into perpetual
banishment in the wilderness, nevermore to come into the camp of
Israel again. The record of this is found in Leviticus 16:20-22:
' 'And when he has made an end of atoning for the Holy Place, the
tabernacle of meeting, and the altar, he shall bring the live goat;
"and Aaron shall lay both his hands on the head of the live goat,
confess over it all the iniquities of the children of Israel, and all their
transgressions, concerning all their sins, putting them on the head of
the goat, and shall send it away into the wilderness by the hand of a
suitable [fit; K.J.V.] man.
"The goat shall bear on itself all their iniquities to an uninhabited
land; and he shall release the goat in the wilderness."
One fact which stands forth with great clarity is that every service
in the Old Testament sanctuary was a type of an event to take place
in the New Testament era. Therefore the confession of the sins of Is-
432 LAST DAY EVENTS

rael on the head of the scapegoat after the great day of atonement
likewise finds its fulfillment in an event somewhere in the future. The
point of time for which we can look in general terms is sometime af-
ter the finishing of the ministry of Christ, the High Priest, in the
heavenly sanctuary. So it will be, and this statement from The Great
Controversy, 658, makes it abundantly clear as to just when this will
be.
"Now the event takes place foreshadowed in the last solemn
service of the Day of Atonement. When the ministration in the holy
of holies had been completed, and the sins of Israel had been re-
moved from the sanctuary by virtue of the blood of the sin offering,
then the scapegoat was presented alive before the Lord; and in the
presence of the congregation the high priest confessed over him 'all
the iniquities of the children of Israel, and all their transgressions in
all their sins, putting them upon the head of the goat.' Leviticus
16:21. In like manner, when the work of atonement in the heavenly
sanctuary has been completed, then in the presence of God and
heavenly angels and the host of the redeemed the sins of God's peo-
ple will be placed upon Satan; he will be declared guilty of all the evil
which he has caused them to commit. And as the scapegoat was sent
away into a land not inhabited, so Satan will be banished to the deso-
late earth, an uninhabited and dreary wilderness."
The point has already been made and supported by the statement
quoted above that the placing of the sins of the righteous upon Satan
at the second advent of Jesus is in strict accordance with the typical
ceremony of the great Day of Atonement in ancient Israel. It would
be well now to take a closer look at the type and its fulfillment in or-
der to understand and to appreciate the accuracy of the type and the
lessons to be learned from it. This will be done first of all from the
point of view of the timing of the fulfillment of the event.
In connection with the ancient sanctuary, there were two differ-
ent kinds of activities, which were those which took place in the
courtyard of the sanctuary and those which took place within the
sanctuary itself. The courtyard represents the earth, while the sanc-
tuary itself represents the temple of God in heaven. The fact of this is
testified to by both the writers of Hebrews and of Revelation.
In Hebrews 8 & 9 the subject is the ministry of the sanctuary in
heaven, as a fulfillment of the type provided in the Old Testament
dispensation. Thus it is, in Hebrews 9:1-10, that the structure and
services of the earthly sanctuary are mentioned as the shadow and
the example of good things to come. Now it is to be noted, while de-
scribing that which is the type of the heavenly, that the writer does
not mention anything of the courtyard at all, for the very simple rea-
THE SCAPEGOAT TRANSACTION 433

son that there is nothing in the courtyard which is a type of the heav-
enly, but only things upon the earth.
Verifying this, John was told: "But leave out the court which is
outside the temple, and do not measure it, for it has been given to the
Gentiles. And they will tread the holy city underfoot for forty-two
months." Revelation 11:2.
There is but little need to develop this point in this series, as most
of those who read these words will already understand these facts
and will be prepared to appreciate certain conclusions drawn from
them. For those who would like further details on this subject, it has
already been dealt with in the book, God's Way in the Sanctuary,
chapter twenty-four, available from Destiny Press. However, we can
spend some time looking at this subject here. First of all, it is to be
seen that in the Old Testament times every event which took place in
the courtyard was actually visible to the children of Israel who were
in that courtyard, but every event which took place within the tem-
ple was completely invisible to the people in the courtyard. Only
with the eye of faith could they follow the movements of the priest
within the sanctuary. Likewise, when Zacharias, the father of John
the Baptist, was long in making his appearance because of the angel
visitor's detaining him, the people grew anxious for fear that he had
been struck down within, where they were not able to see him or
even go in to him.
Just as surely as this was so in connection with the earthly sanc-
tuary, so it is true in regard to the heavenly sanctuary. Every event in
the typical service, which took place in the courtyard and was wit-
nessed by the people, will likewise in the antitype take place upon
the earth and be witnessed by the people of God.
Likewise, every event which in the type took place within the
tabernacle hidden from the sight of the people, will, in the antitype,
take place within the heavenly sanctuary hidden from human eyes,
and can only be followed by faith.
An example of this is the sacrifice of the lamb which took place in
the courtyard where all could see it, while its great counterpart, the
death of Christ, took place upon this earth where all who were pre-
sent could see it.
The confession of the sins upon the head of the scapegoat took
place in the courtyard while Israel looked on. Therefore the antitype
of this must take place upon this earth with the righteous people of
God looking on, as witnesses to the event. They will not need the
eye of faith to see this, but will see it with their physical sight. The
fact of this makes it clear that this event cannot take place until
Christ has actually returned to this earth again after He has com-
pleted His ministry on the great Day of Atonement.
434 LAST DAY EVENTS

In the ancient service the priest went into the most holy place of
the sanctuary, and, after completing his ministration there, came out
through the first apartment, right to the courtyard, the symbol of this
earth, and then, and then only, with all the people looking on, con-
fessed the sins upon the head of the scapegoat and sent it away into
perpetual banishment.
Likewise, Jesus will complete His ministration in the heavenly
sanctuary, come out through the first apartment, after having made
the atonement for it as well, and then will come right to this earth of
which the courtyard is the symbol, and there in the presence of all
the redeemed, will lay upon the head of the devil the sins which he
has caused the people of God to commit, and will send him away into
the wilderness of a ruined earth for one thousand years, beyond
which Satan's destruction will be so complete as to render his ban-
ishment from God's kingdom perpetual. Thus the antitype will ex-
actly fulfill the type as given back there in the past, so that we can
know the exact timing of the event.
That Satan is the scapegoat has always been the position of the
third angel's message, and this position is well supported in the Bi-
ble and in the Spirit of Prophecy.
Here is a typical statement in which Satan is named as the scape-
goat:
"It was seen, also, that while the sin offering pointed to Christ as
a sacrifice, and the high priest represented Christ as a mediator, the
scapegoat typified Satan, the author of sin, upon whom the sins of
the truly penitent will finally be placed. When the high priest, by vir-
tue of the blood of the sin-offering, removed the sins from the sanc-
tuary, he placed them upon the scapegoat. When Christ, by virtue of
His own blood, removes the sins of His people from the heavenly
sanctuary at the close of His ministration, He will place them upon
Satan, who, in the execution of the judgment, must bear the final
penalty. The scapegoat was sent away into a land not inhabited,
never to come again into the congregation of Israel. So will Satan be
forever banished from the presence of God and His people, and he
will be blotted from existence in the final destruction of sin and sin-
ners." Great Controversy, 422.
However, strong objection is maintained against this position by
the Protestant churches who believe and teach that Jesus Christ is
the scapegoat.
They base their argument on the fact that, in the type the scape-
goat bore the sins of Israel into the wilderness, and because he is a
bearer of sin, they maintain that to make Satan the scapegoat is to
make him the sin-bearer, a role which they say only Christ can fulfill.
THE SCAPEGOAT TRANSACTION 435

At once the thoughtful student will detect serious difficulties

which must arise if the position is taken that Christ is the scapegoat.
In the type, once the final atonement had been made, the sins of
the believers were laid upon the scapegoat who was then banished
forever from the camp of Israel, nevermore to return; which would
likewise have to be true of the Saviour if He is the antitype of this
animal. He would have to be forcibly banished from the presence of
God and His people forever.
This would be to offer the redeemed a heaven without Christ and
that would never be heaven at all. The fact is, that it is not true that
Christ is to be banished forever from the camp of Israel, but quite the
contrary, He will be King of Israel forevermore throughout the cease-
less ages of an eternity without end. That is what every child of God
would want Him to be, and it is what every child of God knows He
will be.
This still leaves the question of sin-bearing. The charge that Ad-
ventists make Satan to be our sin-bearer is based upon a misunder-
standing of the justice of God in laying these sins upon the devil at
this time. In no sense of the word does this make Satan to be our sin-
bearer. Christ is our sin-bearer, and by His marvelous sacrifice, He
purchased those sins from us on the tree and transferred them to the
sanctuary.
Thus we are freed from the condemnation of the law and can in-
herit eternal life as a result, but every sin which has thus been pur-
chased from us was caused by the devil who tempted and deceived us
into the committal of those things. Those sins which the Saviour has
taken from us must be finally disposed of. Christ does not retain
them forever in His possession, for to do so would be to immortalize
sin.
Likewise, the very purpose of the final atonement is to cleanse
the sanctuary of those sins as they cannot stay there. They must be
sent away somewhere, and the only just thing to do is to give them
back to Satan who brought them into existence in the first case. So,
they are laid upon him, and he suffers the final punishment for all the
sins which he has caused the righteous to commit.
The wicked, of course, do not obtain this deliverance, but must
suffer for the sins which the devil has caused them to commit. Know-
ing as he does that he must in the end suffer the punishment of every
sin of which the finally saved will have been delivered, Satan labors
very hard to prevent our salvation, for he has a very personal interest
in seeing that our sins do not finally wind up on him so that he will be
forced to suffer the dreadful penalty of them in the all consuming
flames at the very end.
Who is to be the fit man who binds the devil and leads him away
436 LAST DAY EVENTS

into his final captivity? As surely as there was a fit man in the type in
the Old Testament, so surely is there to be a fit man in the antitype in
the final events.
The record of the fulfillment of the antitype is recorded in Reve-
lation 20:1-3: "Then I saw an angel coming down from heaven, hav-
ing the key to the bottomless pit and a great chain in his hand.
"He laid hold of the dragon, that serpent of old, who is the Devil
and Satan, and bound him for a thousand years;
"and he cast him into the bottomless pit, and shut him up, and
set a seal on him, so that he should deceive the nations no more till
the thousand years were finished. But after these things he must be
released for a little while."
This does indeed bring to view some interesting facts in the case.
In the Old Testament it was one of the children of Israel, a person
taken from among men, who led the scapegoat away captive, yet
here in Revelation 20, it is an angel coming down from heaven who
does this. This would certainly seem to produce a situation where
the type was not truly fulfilled.
Yet the fact is, that the putting of these two pictures together
tells us in the clearest way just who the fit man actually is. There is an
Angel who has been taken from among men, and His name is Jesus,
the Son of God and man. He is the only One who could fulfill the
type given in the Old Testament and at the same time answer to the
description given in Revelation 20, for He is the only Being in exist-
ence who is fit enough, a man, and an angel.
He who was chosen to be the fit man had to be a man of such ex-
cellent physical strength and experienced alertness, that he had
greater power than the goat and could maintain command and vic-
tory over the goat, so that the goat had no choice but to go into the
wilderness.
Inasmuch as the goat represented Satan, it is proper to ask, Who
alone has the power to lead Satan away? We know that the devil is a
mighty foe, far greater in power and might than any human being or
company of human beings. We only have the victory over him be-
cause Christ defeated him when upon this earth and that victory
Christ gives to us as a gift.
"But thanks be to God, who gives us the victory through our
Lord Jesus Christ." 1 Corinthians 15:57.
"Beyond the cross of Calvary, with its agony and shame, Jesus
looked forward to the great final day, when the prince of the power
of the air will meet his destruction in the earth so long marred by his
rebellion. Jesus beheld the work of evil forever ended, and the peace
of God filling heaven and earth.
"Henceforward Christ's followers were to look upon Satan as a
THE SCAPEGOAT TRANSACTION 437

conquered foe. Upon the cross, Jesus was to gain the victory for
them; that victory He desired them to accept as their own. 'Behold,'
He said, 'I give unto you power to tread on serpents and scorpions,
and over all the power of the enemy; and nothing shall by any means
hurt you.' " Desire of Ages, 490.
Jesus alone, then, could qualify as the fit man. It is He who, as
the Priest, lays the sins upon the scapegoat, the devil, and it is He, as
the fit man, who leads the devil away and chains him for one thou-
sand years.
It may be objected, that in the sanctuary service the high priest is
the type of Christ, so if we desire to understand the work of Christ,
then we study the work of the high priest, and the high priest is not
the fit man. The fact is, this is but a part of the truth. The truth is, if
we desire to study a certain part of the work of Christ, then we study
the work of the high priest, but if we desire to understand other parts
of the work of Christ, then we study other types in the sanctuary. For
instance, if we desire to study the great sacrifice of Christ in giving
His very life to save the sinner, then we study the submissive sacrifice
of the lamb at the door of the sanctuary. In other words, not one, but
many types are employed to teach us the many faceted work of
Christ.
When the work of the high priest ends, with the confession of the
sins upon the head of the scapegoat, then the work of Christ in an-
other role begins—that of leading the devil away into his banishment.
It is not as the High Priest that Christ does this, but as the fit man.
Therefore, just as certainly as the lamb symbolized one role of Christ,
and the high priest another, so the fit man is the symbol of yet an-
other of His great and marvelous works for our salvation.
Thus it will be, as the last act before the glorious retinue returns
with Christ to heaven, Jesus, as the great fit man of all time—this
Mighty Angel who has come down from heaven and yet was taken
from among men—will place all the sins of the righteous upon the
head of the scapegoat, and will bind him in banishment for the whole
of the millennium at the termination of which he will be loosed but a
little season to receive his final reward.
One statement which may come to some as a problem is found in
Early Writings, 280, 281: "Jesus tarried a moment in the outer
apartment of the heavenly sanctuary, and the sins which had been
confessed while He was in the most holy place were placed upon Sa-
tan, the originator of sin, who must suffer their punishment.
"Then I saw Jesus lay off His priestly attire and clothe Himself
with His most kingly robes. Upon His head were many crowns, a
crown within a crown. Surrounded by the angelic host He left
heaven."
438 LAST DAY EVENTS

If we were to take this statement on its own without reference to

the type in the Old Testament and the statement in The Great Con-
troversy, 658, then we would perhaps be justified in believing that
the sins of the righteous are laid upon Satan before Jesus actually
leaves the sanctuary and while, in fact, He is in the first apartment
still. On the other hand, to the minds of some it may appear that here
we have once again an apparent contradiction between what is writ-
ten in one place and what is written in another.
However, reference to the way in which both the Bible and Spirit
of Prophecy are written clears up any such difficulty. It is the way of
the Word of God to pursue a subject through to its end and then go
back a little to pick up an alternative or accompanying course of
action.
An excellent example of this is in Matthew 22:1-10. Here, the
story of the calls to the bidden ones and their rejection of those calls
is prophesied. Upon the second rejection, the prophecy stays with
the subject of the bidden ones, right through until their destruction
and then returns to tell of the giving of the call to an alternative
group, which event actually takes place before the destruction of the
bidden ones, even though it is related after. If this is not understood,
then one is apt to think that the call to the highways comes after the
destruction, which it does not. See Christ's Object Lessons, 308-
309, for full verification of this in respect to the fulfillment in regard
to the Jewish nation.
Likewise, in this paragraph in Early Writings, the subject of the
disposal of the sins is dealt with through to the point where they are
laid upon the scapegoat, and then it returns to tell of the laying off of
the priestly robes and the departure from the sanctuary for this
earth. It must not be understood that the sins are laid upon Satan in
the first apartment of the sanctuary for two reasons. In the first case,
that is not where he is to be found, and in the second, it would be at
variance to the type in the Old Testament.
This statement says very little, and it is in what it does not say
rather than in what it does say that one could be mistaken regarding
what will happen. What it does tell you is that Jesus tarries a mo-
ment in the first apartment. He gathers up the sins which He had
confessed in behalf of His people while He was in the most holy
place. These sins were placed upon Satan, who must suffer their
punishment.
Now it did not say just when and where they were to be placed
upon Satan, and because it does not say this, the reader is apt to
think that it is done in the first apartment while Christ is still there.
But the statement does not actually say so, and therefore we must
not assume that this is what is meant. We must go elsewhere to find
THE SCAPEGOAT TRANSACTION 439

the where and the when, and this is made very clear both in the type
and in the statements in The Great Controversy, and in Revelation
20:1-3.
What a blessed and wonderful day it will be then, as we wing our
way through the vast domains of space, with the knowledge that our
sins are forever separated from us, as they are fastened upon Satan
who has no power to reach us any more to return them to us. May the
Lord of Heaven give us the grace and the faith to be true till that time
of wondrous rejoicing.

For further study on this subject, see Early Writings, 178, 280,
281, 290, 294, 295; Great Controversy, 485, 486, 658, 660, 673;
Prophets and Kings, 591; and Patriarchs and Prophets, 358.
Chapter 41

The Millennium
With the scapegoat securely fastened in his bonds, and the saints
on their way to their heavenly home, the millennium begins. While
the condition of total desolation which will exist upon this earth and
the events which take place during this period are very plainly de-
scribed in the inspired writings, yet today there are in the world the
presentation of certain prophetic positions, which speak of the
world being inhabited and flourishing during this time. Furthermore,
it is a theory which proposes that a second chance for salvation will
be given to mankind.
Now, it is not the purpose of this study to examine in detail the
actual theories themselves, but rather to present the actual truth on
the subject, so that when the error is presented to the mind, then it
will be possible to discern very quickly the unscriptural nature of
these errors. That this is important is evident from the fact that
these theories are becoming more and more common, and will be
the very theories which the armies of the Lord will have to combat in
the last days.
The truth on this matter, as presented in the clearest possible
terms in the Scriptures, is that during the one thousand years after
the second coming of Christ, this earth will be a totally uninhabited
and ruined wilderness, and not a thriving, peace-filled world of happy
inhabitants, with Jesus ruling as King of kings from Jerusalem.
In the first case, when Jesus descends from heaven, every wicked
person who has managed to survive the terrible destruction of the
seven last plagues will seek to hide from Him in the rocks and moun-
tains which quaking earth will fall on them and destroy them so that
not one of them will be left by the time Christ actually gets here. The
picture of the total nature of the annihilation of the wicked is set
forth in Revelation 19. Inverses 11-16 there is given the description
of the setting forth of Christ and His armies as they return to this
earth just prior to the opening of the thousand year period:
"Now I saw heaven opened, and behold, a white horse. And He
who sat on him was called Faithful and True, and in righteousness
He judges and makes war.
THE MILLENNIUM 441

"His eyes were like a flame of fire, and on His head were many
crowns. He had a name written that no one knew except Himself.
"He was clothed with a robe dipped in blood, and His name is
called The Word of God.
"And the armies in heaven, clothed in fine linen, white and
clean, followed Him on white horses.
"Now out of His mouth goes a sharp sword, that with it He
should strike the nations. And He Himself will rule them with a rod
of iron. He Himself treads the winepress of the fierceness and wrath
of Almighty God.
"And He has on His robe and on His thigh a name written: KING
OF KINGS AND LORD OF LORDS." Revelation 19:11-16.
As John witnesses the descent of the King of kings in all his
glory, he sees an angel who calls the carrion birds to their last great
feast—the bodies of all those who are destroyed in the final war be-
tween Christ on the one hand and Satan and his followers on the
other. This is described in the remaining verses of the chapter. As
these are studied, it is to be seen that the destruction of all living hu-
man beings is so complete as to omit no one. There will be included
kings, captains, mighty men, horses and horsemen, and all men,
free and bond, small and great.
"Then I saw an angel standing in the sun; and he cried with a
loud voice, saying to all the birds that fly in the midst of heaven,
'Come and gather together for the supper of the great God,
" 'that you may eat the flesh of kings, the flesh of captains, the
flesh of mighty men, the flesh of horses and of those who sit on
them, and the flesh of all people, free and slave, both small and
great.'
"And I saw the beast, the kings of the earth, and their armies,
gathered together to make war against Him who sat on the horse and
against His army.
"Then the beast was captured, and with him the false prophet
who worked signs in his presence, by which he deceived those who
received the mark of the beast and those who worshiped his image.
These two were cast alive into the lake of fire burning with brim-
stone.
"And the rest were killed with the sword which proceeded from
the mouth of Him who sat on the horse. And all the birds were filled
with their flesh." Revelation 19:17-21.
As if to make certain that there is no misunderstanding of the
message of the verse, the truth of it is repeated in these last two
verses. There, the total destruction of the beast and the false prophet
is prophesied. This will be a very great destruction of mankind, but
not total in itself. After they have been destroyed, there will still be a
442 LAST DAY EVENTS

remnant of the wicked left, but they will all perish with the sword
which proceeds out of the mouth of Christ as He comes from
heaven. That sword is the power of His word, the brightness of His
coming. (For an explanation of how the sword from Christ's mouth
kills the remnant of the wicked, see the chapter, "The Brightness of
His Coming", in the book Behold Your God, by F. T. Wright.)
Thus, as the people of God ascend on their flight through space,
they will leave behind them a depopulated earth to which the devil
will be bound for the following thousand years with no one to tempt
and nothing upon whom to vent his destructive passions.
Not only is this truth so well and clearly expressed in the New
Testament, but it is also to be found just as clearly stated in the Old
Testament. To the prophet Jeremiah, as he contemplated the future
of Israel, was given a view of the way things were to be when the final
judgments of God descended upon the earth. This prophecy is re-
corded in Jeremiah 4:23-27:
"I beheld the earth, and indeed it was without form, and void;
and the heavens, they had no light.
"I beheld the mountains, and indeed they trembled, and all the
hills moved back and forth.
"I beheld, and indeed there was no man, and all the birds of the
heavens had fled.
"I beheld, and indeed the fruitful land was a wilderness, and all
its cities were broken down at the presence of the Lord, by His fierce
anger.
"For thus says the Lord: The whole land shall be desolate; Yet I
will not make a full end.'
As the first of these verses is read, it serves to remind us of the
picture given in the first verses of Genesis of the condition of the
world before God shaped it into a productive and beautiful home for
the human family. Therefore it may be supposed that Jeremiah is
casting his eyes backward instead of forward, that he was being given
a view of the earth as it was during the first hours of creation's week.
But a careful reading of the verses shows that this is not so. In the
first case, when the earth was without form and void in the begin-
ning, it was covered with water, whereas in the situation described by
the prophet, there is dry land in the shape of mountains, hills, and
plains all laid out before him.
Furthermore, this cannot be the condition of things at the begin-
ning of creation's week, for there were then no once fruitful places
which had become a wilderness, nor were there populous cities
which had been broken down.
Furthermore, there was no presence of God's fierce anger in the
first creation.
THE MILLENNIUM 443

Therefore, the vision given to Jeremiah was not a revelation of

the creation of the earth, but of its utter desolation at some future
point of time.
Between that portrayal of truth to the prophet and the present
moment, there has been no complete fulfillment of this prophecy, no
time when populous cities were so broken down to the point where
from them all bird life had vanished and all light had been
extinguished.
This can only mean that the fulfillment of this prophecy is yet fu-
ture, and there is no difficulty in determining just when it will be. It
can only be when the earth shall reel before the presence of the King
of kings, when He returns in the glory of His Father to take the re-
deemed out of this world of sin into the eternity of peace.
Then, as this prophecy declares, there will be "no man". While
at first the birds of the heavens shall feast themselves on the unburied
bodies of the dead, the time will soon come when, with their food
supply exhausted, even they will disappear in death, until not one liv-
ing thing is left upon the earth.
There is a very good reason why this period should and will be
one thousand years in length. It is the law of the Sabbath that it
should be so. In ancient times the Lord declared that the seventh day
of the week was His own possession, which the true people of God
have always respected as being the property of God. This day was to
be to them a day of rest from their labors, along with their families
and all their animals. But the land was also to have its Sabbath rest,
which was to be the seventh full year. For six years they were to work
the land, and the seventh year it was to be left in complete rest, as it
is written:
"And the Lord spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai, saying,
" 'Speak to the children of Israel, and say to them: "When you
come into the land which I give you, then the land shall keep a sab-
bath to the Lord.
" ' "Six years you shall sow your field, and six years you shall
prune your vineyard, and gather its fruit;
" ' "but in the seventh year there shall be a sabbath of solemn
rest for the land, a sabbath to the Lord. You shall neither sow your
field nor prune your vineyard.
" ' "What grows of its own accord of your harvest you shall not
reap, nor gather the grapes of your untended vine, for it is a year of
rest for the land.
" ' "And the sabbath produce of the land shall be food for you:
for you, your male and female servants, your hired man, and the
stranger who dwells with you,

[LDE29]
444 LAST DAY EVENTS

" ' "for your livestock and the beasts that are in your land—all its
produce shall be for food." ' " Leviticus 25:1-7.
But the facts are that during the whole of the six thousand years
of human history, that law has never been truly and fully kept the
whole world over, so the land has never had its rest. But it shall have
it when the righteous have been taken home to the far away land of
heaven, and the wicked lie unburied and unmourned upon the earth,
and there will be no sowing of seed or gathering of harvest for all of
one thousand years.
This means that, if there will be one thousand years of rest for the
whole earth, there must be no less than six thousand years of unrest.
This is true! From the moment Adam fell until Christ's appearing in
the clouds of heaven shall be exactly six thousand years. This fact is
actually stated in the Spirit of prophecy. Here are some examples:
"For six thousand years, Satan's work of rebellion has 'made the
earth to tremble.' He has 'made the world as a wilderness, and de-
stroyed the cities thereof.' And 'he opened not the house of his pris-
oners.' For six thousand years his prison house has received God's
people, and he would have held them captive forever, but Christ has
broken his bonds, and set the prisoners free." Great Controversy,
659.
This statement is made in the context of the second advent and is
really saying that, up till that time, six thousand years of death had
reigned under Satan's command, but now, at the end of that period
of time his power to keep them imprisoned was over.
'A noise shall come even to the ends of the earth; for the Lord
hath a controversy with the nations, He will plead with all flesh; He
will give them that are wicked to the sword.' Jeremiah 25:31. For six
thousand years the great controversy has been in progress; the Son
of God and His heavenly messengers have been in conflict with the
power of the evil one, to warn, enlighten, and save the children of
men. Now all have made their decisions; the wicked have fully united
with Satan in his warfare against God. The time has come for God to
vindicate the authority of His downtrodden law. Now the contro-
versy is not alone with Satan, but with men. The Lord hath a contro-
versy with the nations;' 'He will give them that are wicked to the
sword.' " Great Controversy, 656.
"Satan's work of ruin is forever ended. For six thousand years
he has wrought his will, filling the earth with woe and causing grief
throughout the universe. The whole creation has groaned and tra-
vailed together in pain. Now God's creatures are forever delivered
from his presence and temptations. The whole earth is at rest, and
is quiet: they [the righteous] break forth into singing.' Isaiah 14:7.
And a shout of praise and triumph ascends from the whole loyal uni-
THE MILLENNIUM 445

verse. The voice of a great multitude,' 'as the voice of many waters,
and as the voice of mighty thunderings,' is heard, saying: 'Alleluia:
for the Lord God omnipotent reigneth.' Revelation 19:6." Great
Controversy, 673.
With this information, one might conclude it a simple matter to
determine the year of Christ's return, if not the month, week, day, or
hour. It is generally believed that Christ came to earth four thousand
years after creation, leaving just two thousand to expire of the six
thousand. Therefore, according to this reasoning, Christ will come
in the year 2000.
To come to this conclusion, however, is to be guilty of time set-
ting, and, of that I shall never be guilty. I am fully aware of the numer-
ous statements sternly warning against predicting the time of any fu-
ture event including the second advent, and to those warnings I ren-
der complete obedience.
Some may feel somewhat frustrated at being forbidden from pre-
dicting the time for Christ's advent when it seems so obvious that He
will come by a certain time. Such would ask why this should be. The
fact is that the information supplied in the paragraphs above is not
sufficient to determine just when the six thousand years will expire.
One unknown factor is the constancy or otherwise of the length of
days and years.
We are warned by Peter that "... scoffers will come in the last
days, walking according to their own lusts,
"and saying, 'Where is the promise of His coming? For since the
fathers fell asleep, all things continue as they were from the begin-
ning of creation.'
"For this they wilfully forget: that by the word of God the heav-
ens were of old, and the earth standing out of water and in the water,
"by which the world that then existed perished, being flooded
with water.
"But the heavens and the earth which now exist are kept in store
by the same word, reserved for fire until the day of judgment and per-
dition of ungodly men." 2 Peter 3:3-7
So there was the world before the flood, and the very different
world after the flood. That difference must have included the length
of days and years, for three hundred and sixty-five and one quarter
days to the year, is an untidy number. I would expect that three hun-
dred and sixty days would be more like what one would expect. That
would make each year twelve by thirty day months long.
The question is: "Which year length did God use in His calcula-
tion of the six thousand years, or did He use one length up till the
time of the flood and a different one thereafter?" The answers to
these questions are unknown to us. Therefore, it is impossible for us
446 LAST DAY EVENTS

Events Occurring at the Beginning,

During, and at the
End of the Millennium

First Second
Resurrection Resurrection

1000 YEARS

Return Righteous in Christ, Saints,

of Jesus Heaven and City
Descend
Righteous Wicked Remain
Dead Raised Dead Wicked Dead
Raised
Living Saints Satan Bound
Caught Up by a Great Satan Loosed
Chain
Wicked Last Judgment
Slain Earth at
Rest Satan and
Satan Sinners
Bound Destroyed

Earth Earth Cleansed

Desolated and Renewed

to know when the six thousand years will end. But this much is cer-
tain. When that time shall expire, Christ will assuredly appear.
While the earth is thus resting from all the turmoil and struggle of
the history of mankind, the righteous will be in heaven investigating
the cases of the wicked, so that their punishments can be accurately
meted out at the final judgment, at the end of the millennium.
"During the thousand years between the first and the second res-
urrection the judgment of the wicked takes place. The apostle Paul
points to this judgment as an event that follows the second advent.
'Judge nothing before the time, until the Lord come, who both will
bring to light the hidden things of darkness, and will make manifest
THE MILLENNIUM 447

the counsels of the hearts.' 1 Corinthians 4:5. Daniel declares that

when the Ancient of Days came, 'judgment was given to the saints of
the Most High.' Daniel 7:22. At this time the righteous reign as
kings and priests unto God, John in the Revelation says: '1 saw
thrones, and they sat upon them, and judgment was given unto
them.' They shall be priests of God and of Christ, and shall reign
with Him a thousand years.' Revelation 20:4, 6. It is at this time
that, as foretold by Paul, 'the saints shall judge the world.' 1 Corin-
thians 6:2. In union with Christ they judge the wicked, comparing
their acts with the statute book, the Bible, and deciding every case
according to the deeds done in the body. Then the portion which the
wicked must suffer is meted out, according to their works; and it is re-
corded against their names in the book of death.
"Satan also and evil angels are judged by Christ and His people.
Says Paul: 'Know ye not that we shall judge angels?' Verse 3. And
Jude declares that 'the angels which kept not their first estate, but
left their own habitation, He hath reserved in everlasting chains un-
der darkness unto the judgment of the great day.' Jude 6." Great
Controversy, 660, 661.
It may be asked, Why are the righteous given this task over this
period of time? And the answer lies, at least in part, in that thereby
they will see the absolute impartiality and justice of God in His selec-
tion of those who are to have a part in eternal life and those fated to
eternal death. It will be difficult if not impossible to find a person in
heaven without a loved one, friend, or acquaintance who will be ex-
cluded from the kingdom, while they are inside. This will be a natural
sorrow to them, but when they are able to investigate for themselves
the complete life-history of each of these people, they will be more
than satisfied that each had made his own choice, and that heaven
could never admit them except at the fearful peril of a continuation
of the dark and terrible anguish of sin.
There could hardly be a punishment more richly deserved than
the agony suffered by Satan, as he is given the whole of one thousand
years devoid of the least possibility of activity. Heretofore, the fearful
terrors of a guilty conscience have been mollified by his tremendous
activity, which has given him no time to let his thoughts torture him.
But during this time soon to come, he is able to remember the beauty
and the wonder of the home he lost because of his rebellion, the mis-
ery and destruction he has brought upon the fair earth and its popula-
tions, and the utter desolation which now surrounds him, as the end
result of his malicious handiwork. For him and for his angels, this is to
be the most miserable time ever spent by anyone, anytime, any-
where, and he will have one thousand years of it.
Most terrible of all will be the realization that it has all been for
448 LAST DAY EVENTS

nothing, for he will then see that he has failed in all the objectives he
set out to achieve. Yet he is still unrepentant, still defiant, still deter-
mined to fight against God, for when the thousand years come to
their end, he rushes out to work on the billions of subjects which
have been raised from their graves, to deceive them into supposing
that they can yet defeat God and win the eternal kingdom for them-
selves. No doubt he is encouraged to see that at this time he can
command, not just the divided ranks of a single generation, but the
united ranks of the generations of the lost of all ages. Among them
will be the most skillful soldiers and commanders of every age, to-
gether with the most skilled and ingenious scientists of all human
history. They are all there, the brave and the strong, the strategist
and the tactician, the inventor and the builder, all bound by one com-
mon desire to possess the beautiful city which stands in all its glory
on the great plain before them. Yet even here Satan is successful in
this work of leadership, only as he is able to deceive them into think-
ing that he is the true Christ and that he has the power to rescue
them from the "most cruel and terrible tyranny." How well these
truths are expressed in the following statement:
"Now Satan prepares for a last mighty struggle for the suprem-
acy. While deprived of his power and cut off from his work of decep-
tion, the prince of evil was miserable and dejected; but as the wicked
dead are raised and he sees the vast multitudes upon his side, his
hopes revive, and he determines not to yield the great controversy.
He will marshall all the armies of the lost under his banner and
through them endeavor to execute his plans. The wicked are Satan's
captives. In rejecting Christ they have accepted the rule of the rebel
leader. They are ready to receive his suggestions and to do his bid-
ding. Yet, true to his early cunning, he does not acknowledge himself
to be Satan. He claims to be the prince who is the rightful owner of
the world and whose inheritance has been unlawfully wrested from
him. He represents himself to his deluded subjects as a redeemer, as-
suring them that his power has brought them forth from their graves
and that he is about to rescue them from the most cruel tyranny. The
presence of Christ having been removed, Satan works wonders to
support his claims. He makes the weak strong and inspires all with
his own spirit and energy. He proposes to lead them against the
camp of the saints and to take possession of the City of God. With
fiendish exultation he points to the unnumbered millions who have
been raised from the dead and declares that as their leader he is well
able to overthrow the city and regain his throne and his kingdom.
"In that vast throng are multitudes of the long-lived race that ex-
isted before the flood; men of lofty stature and giant intellect, who,
yielding to the control of fallen angels, devoted all their skill and
THE MILLENNIUM 449

knowledge to the exaltation of themselves; men whose wonderful

works of art led the world to idolize their genius, but whose cruelty
and evil inventions, defiling the earth and defacing the image of
God, caused Him to blot them from the face of His creation. There
are kings and generals who conquered nations, valiant men who
never lost a battle, proud, ambitious warriors whose approach made
kingdoms tremble. In death these experienced no change. As they
come up from the grave, they resume the current of their thoughts
just where it ceased. They are actuated by the same desire to conquer
that ruled them when they fell.
"Satan consults with his angels, and then with these kings and
conquerors and mighty men. They look upon the strength and num-
bers on their side, and declare that the army within the city is small in
comparison with theirs, and that it can be overcome. They lay their
plans to take possession of the riches and glory of the New Jerusa-
lem. All immediately begin to prepare for battle. Skillful artisans con-
struct implements of war. Military leaders, famed for their success,
marshall the throngs of warlike men into companies and divisions."
Great Controversy, 663, 664.
It is very obvious that the devil does not lead his subjects into a
hasty and disorganized raid upon the city. He knows very well
against whom he is fighting, that he will never have a second oppor-
tunity, and that, therefore, he must make the most thorough and de-
tailed preparation possible. It must not be supposed that with the sci-
entists present who were alive upon this earth in the closing days of
its history, when the very latest technology was available for destruc-
tive warfare, that the devil will be content to arm his hordes with
stones and sticks. Nothing less than the best will do. To what extent
it will be possible for them to arm themselves with sophisticated
weapons, in view of the desolated condition of the earth, it is not
possible for us to know now, but we can be sure that it will be the best
possible, and it will be quite a little time involved in the preparation
and marshalling of this military might.
How long that period of time will be, we cannot now tell. All we
can know is that it will be a period of time at the end of which Satan,
his angels, and the military geniuses and leaders of mankind will be
satisfied that the best possible preparations have been made under
the conditions available. Then, at last, the order to advance will be
given, and the ordered, organized ranks of the mightiest army ever
mustered on the earth will move into position for the attack.
Thus the stage will be set for the last act in the drama of the ages,
when every knee, including that of the arch rebel himself, will bow to
acknowledge the justice and righteousness of God.
Chapter 42

The Great
Judgment Day
It may well be asked, Why does the Lord raise all the wicked
again at the end of the thousand years, and even permit them to
mount a carefully planned and thoroughly organized attack on the
holy city? God does nothing without a purpose, by which we are as-
sured that as certainly as He does raise them, then just so certainly is
there a purpose in His doing so. More than that, it is strictly neces-
sary that they be raised up for a final settlement of all accounts. That
purpose and that necessity, so far as they are revealed in the Word of
God, are for us to understand.
The detailed description of that final judgment scene around the
city of God reveals that every knee will in the end bow in worship be-
fore God and acknowledge that He is the righteous One after all, and
that the devil did not have any just cause to rebel against Him. Thus
will be obtained the full and final vindication of God and His ways of
doing things. But, while God does have a very definite purpose in
doing all this, it is not to be supposed that God is seeking a vindica-
tion of Himself for the sake of His own pride or such like. To think of
God in these terms is to bring Him down to the mean level of sinful
man, whereas God operates on a far higher level than this. His pur-
poses are not self-oriented, but are carried forward with the security
of His subjects in view. It's for them, and not for Himself that He lives
and works.
In the very beginning when the evil one rebelled, it was a direct
challenge against the law of God and the Word of God which pro-
claimed that there was security and safety only in obedience to that
law. Now God understands that eternal life and the possibilities for
unlimited advancement and happiness in that life are possible only as
the law is respected and obeyed, but as the devil challenged the
Word of God which declared this, the inhabitants of heaven and the
universe were not able to see the full truth of it. To them, the way in
which the devil presented his case cast a very serious doubt upon the
Word of God, which doubt, while ever it continued to exist, main-
THE GREAT JUDGMENT DAY 451

tained a serious condition of danger to the well being of the entire

universe. Therefore, if the security and happiness of God's children
was to be guaranteed, then that doubt must be absolutely removed.
This will be accomplished when both the devil and every one of his
subjects voluntarily acknowledges the righteousness of God and the
truth of His ways.
Closely related to this purpose, and assistant in the accomplish-
ment of it, is the fairness and justice of God in giving every one of the
lost the opportunity to appeal their case before God personally. The
vast majority of mankind will have gone down to their graves with a
very hateful attitude toward God, blaming Him for all of their woes
and troubles. In this life they did not come to see the real truth on the
matter, and, except for those who live in the very closing events of
the time before Christ comes the second time, will not even have had
the opportunity of seeing all these things clearly. Justice demands
that that opportunity be given to them, and it will be.
Very important, too, is that it must be demonstrated that the
wicked are indeed incorrigible, that their salvation is an impossibility,
and that they never will change, no matter what further opportuni-
ties could be given to them. It must be shown that all that could ever
be done, has been done in this time of probation; during which time
the Lord held nothing back which could possibly have brought each
and every person to repentance and consequent harmony with God.
Satan, more than any other, by his actions and activities after the
millennium, will prove the truth of this. The onlooking universe will
remember the loving entreaties by which the Father sought to save
him from his fate before he was first cast out of heaven. They will re-
member his defeat at the cross of Calvary when he, armed with all
the weapons of cruelty and force, was defeated by a Saviour, armed
only with the love of righteousness. Again they will have seen Satan
defeated by those same weapons as the one hundred and forty four
thousand triumph in the last days. Then they will have seen Satan
with a thousand years in which to think things over, yet at the end of
all that he will arise with fresh determination to fight on, as obdu-
rate, and unrepentant, and as wicked as ever. It will be seen that he
has not changed in character in the least, that he is the great liar still,
and that by the deceptive power of lies he will induce the billions to
unite with him in his last great attack against the city of God.
So, unchanged and unchangeable, they make their final, thor-
ough preparations, and then, "at last the order to advance is given,
and the countless host moves on—an army such as was never sum-
moned by earthly conquerors, such as the combined forces of all
ages since war began on earth could never equal. Satan, the mighti-
est of warriors, leads the van, and his angels unite their forces for
452 LAST DAY EVENTS

this final struggle. Kings and warriors are in his train, and the multi-
tudes follow in vast companies, each under its appointed leader.
With military precision the serried ranks advance over the earth's
broken and uneven surface to the City of God. By command of Je-
sus, the gates of the New Jerusalem are closed, and the armies of Sa-
tan surround the city and make ready for the onset." Great Contro-
versy, 664.
The proposed attack is never launched against the city, for as the
wicked advance, the Son of God in all His terrible majesty appears
above the city on a great white throne. In describing this, John says:
"Then I saw a great white throne and Him who sat on it, from
whose face the earth and the heaven fled away. And there was found
no place for them." Revelation 20:11.
This is an unexpected turn of events, so far as the wicked are
concerned, and they are held in their tracks, each eye riveted on the
scene before them. Not only is Christ there, but around Him are all
the souls whom He has redeemed. Now comes the revelation to the
minds of every one of the wicked, as was never possible for them be-
fore, of the whole plan of redemption and of the part which each in-
dividual has played in the contest of the ages. Each is conscious of
every sin which he or she has ever committed. Each is able to see just
where and when the divine invitation came to him to forsake those
sins and turn to God. Upon each of them descends a terrible sense of
condemnation as each recognizes how fully he is to blame for his
own lost condition.
Now they will have the opportunity of advancing their own argu-
ments for the defense, but in the light of the evidence presented be-
fore them, they know that there is nothing hidden from God, that
there is no point in trying to deny the facts of the case or to turn the
truth into a lie. They know that they have absolutely no case to plead
and that their situation is utterly and completely hopeless.
"The whole wicked world stand arraigned at the bar of God on
the charge of high treason against the government of heaven. They
have none to plead their cause; they are without excuse; and the sen-
tence of eternal death is pronounced against them." Great Contro-
versy, 668.
Not only are they unable to question the justice and impartiality
of God in respect to their own eternal fate, for "all see that their ex-
clusion from heaven is just," Great Controversy, 668, but they see
too that the Lord has not been partial in His selection of those who
will not be excluded from heaven and its eternal life.
Imagine the question mark in the mind of Pilate, Caiaphas, An-
nas, or any other of the lost who were present when Peter denied his
Master with curses and swearing, as they see Peter stand close to Je-
THE GREAT JUDGMENT DAY 453

sus in all His glory. They would question the justice of God in con-
demning them to eternal destruction, while Peter, who had done
something equally as terrible as they, is given very different and op-
posite treatment.
But the Lord will not let them go to their eternal deaths without
answering that question and clearing forever any doubts or suspi-
cions in respect to the ways of righteousness. Not only will the books
of sin and death be opened then, with the full and complete records
they contain of all the sinful activities of the condemned, but the
book of life will also be opened with the full and complete record of
all the activities of the saved open to the wondering gaze of the lost.
Therein they will read the full course followed out by Peter, and will
see how that he repented and put away his sin as they might have
done, but did not, so that they could have been where Peter will be,
but will not be because of the course which they themselves will have
fully chosen to follow.
That the book of life will be opened at this time is made very clear
from Revelation 20:12. "And I saw the dead, small and great, stand-
ing before God, and books were opened. And another book was
opened, which is the book of life. And the dead were judged accord-
ing to their works, by the things which were written in the books."
The completeness and the clarity of the evidence not one lost
person can deny, and, as the marvelous song of praise ascends from
the lips of the righteous, the wicked are moved to confess the perfec-
tion and justice of the divine character.
"They witness the outburst of wonder, rapture, and adoration
from the saved; and as the wave of melody sweeps over the multi-
tudes without the city, all with one voice exclaim, 'Great and marvel-
ous are Thy works, Lord God Almighty; just and true are Thy ways,
Thou King of saints' (Revelation 15:3); and falling prostrate, they
worship the Prince of Life." Great Controversy, 668, 669.
At this time the devil does too. At the same time that the wicked
are having the full record of their lives and the history of the work of
salvation pass before their eyes, Satan relives the whole of his past
career.
"Memory recalls the home of his innocence and purity, the peace
and content that were his until he indulged in murmuring against
God, and envy of Christ. His accusations, his rebellion, his decep-
tions to gain the sympathy and support of the angels, his stubborn
persistence in making no effort for self-recovery when God would
have granted him forgiveness—all come vividly before him. He re-
views his work among men and its results—the enmity of man toward
his fellow man, the terrible destruction of life, the rise and fall of king-
doms, the overturning of thrones, the long succession of tumults,
454 LAST DAY EVENTS

conflicts, and revolutions. He recalls his constant efforts to oppose

the work of Christ and to sink man lower and lower. He sees that this
hellish plots have been powerless to destroy those who have put their
trust in Jesus. As Satan looks upon his kingdom, the fruit of his toil,
he sees only failure and ruin. He has led the multitudes to believe that
the city of God would be an easy prey; but he knows that this is false.
Again and again, in the progress of the great controversy, he has been
defeated and compelled to yield. He knows too well the power and
majesty of the Eternal." Great Controversy, 669.
It is at this point that the devil finds himself fully and completely
alone with none to plead his cause or to fight his battles. His mask of
deception is swept away.
"In his last great effort to dethrone Christ, destroy His people,
and take possession of the City of God, the archdeceiver has been
fully unmasked. Those who have united with him see the total failure
of his cause. Christ's followers and the loyal angels behold the full ex-
tent of his machinations against the government of God. He is the
object of universal abhorrence." Great Controversy, 670.
Now for the first time in thousands of years the accusations of
Satan against God and His government are silenced.
"And now Satan bows down, and confesses the justice of his
sentence.
'Who shall not fear Thee, O Lord, and glorify Thy name? for
Thou only are holy: for all nations shall come and worship Thee; for
Thy judgments are made manifest.' " Great Controversy, 670.
At this point the purpose of the controversy and the permitting
of it to develop to the point where it came to full maturity, will have
been finally realized.
"Every question of truth and error in the long-standing contro-
versy has now been made plain. The results of rebellion, the fruits of
setting aside the divine statutes, have been laid open to the view of
all created intelligences. The working out of Satan's rule in contrast
with the government of God has been presented to the whole uni-
verse. Satan's own works have condemned him. God's wisdom, His
justice, and His goodness stand fully vindicated. It is seen that all His
dealings in the great controversy have been conducted with respect
to the eternal good of His people and the good of all the worlds He
has created." Great Controversy, 670, 671.
Even though the devil, all his subjects, and all the sinless dwellers
of heaven and earth clearly see and acknowledge the justice and
goodness of God in all His dealings with sin, the final capstone of
proof is yet to be furnished. It is the proof that when the Lord closed
probation on the wicked and declared that there was no further hope
of salvation for them, that in this, He spoke the truth. It will be clear
THE GREAT JUDGMENT DAY 455

proof of the end result of the outworking of sin in the life which
brings a person to the place where the spirit of hatred and revenge is
so deep seated as to be irremovable.
If there was the least possibility of hope for the wicked at this fi-
nal point of time, then their confession and acknowledgement of
God's righteousness and of their own sinfulness should lead them to
a spirit of submission and resignation to the will of God, but there is
nothing of that spirit in them or their fiendish leader.
"Notwithstanding that Satan has been constrained to acknow-
ledge God's justice and to bow to the supremacy of Christ, his char-
acter remains unchanged. The spirit of rebellion, like a mighty tor-
rent, again bursts forth. Filled with frenzy, he determines not to yield
the great controversy. The time has come for a last desperate strug-
gle against the King of heaven. He rushes into the midst of his sub-
jects and endeavors to inspire them with his own fury and arouse
them to instant battle." Great Controversy, 671, 672.
In other words, the delayed attack on the city is now ordered by
Satan to be put into full and immediate effect, thus demonstrating to
the astonished gaze of the wicked and the righteous the full perversity
of the devil. Never before will it have been so fully and convincingly
shown that the devil is absolutely beyond hope of redemption and
that it is quite impossible for the Lord to save him; much as He would
desire to do so. He will go down to his last moments of consciousness
fighting still. What a grim reminder this is to us even today of the aw-
ful perversity of sin. Today we might declare that we would never be-
have in such a rebellious way, but let sin be entertained and cherished
and this is the point to which it will inevitably bring us.
But Satan finds that the order to advance against the city is not
obeyed. There is not one person who can see the least possibility of
success in this direction. Furthermore, they are fully awake now to
the real nature of their leader, whom they see as the cause of all their
troubles and difficulties.
Satan will deliver his commands then, "but of all the countless
millions whom he has allured into rebellion, there are none now to
acknowledge his supremacy. His power is at an end. The wicked are
filled with the same hatred of God that inspires Satan; but they see
that their case is hopeless, that they cannot prevail against Jehovah.
Their rage is kindled against Satan and those who have been his
agents in deception, and with the fury of demons they turn upon
them." Great Controuersy, 672.
Sin brings a steady decline in power, and it would seem that at
this time the devil will have lost the power of invisibility and of flight,
so the people of earth can both see and reach him, and he will feel
456 LAST DAY EVENTS

the savage rage of those whom he has led to destruction as no mind

could imagine nor pen portray.
Nor will the wicked be content to use their bare hands upon Sa-
tan and his agents who have led them to destruction. The very weap-
ons, so carefully prepared for the attack upon the city, will be used to
satisfy their lust for vengeance against their enemies. Such weapons
very well could be such as have not yet even been invented—cosmic
and nuclear weapons, of a nature which we have not as yet seen, ca-
pable of triggering an atomic chain reaction which will set the world
on fire.
Those who truly understand that the Lord does not destroy the
sinner, but that sin and sinners destroy themselves as the inevitable
result of the outworking of sin itself, do not view the fires of this time
as being directly sent by God, but rather as the bursting forth of a fire
which the sinner himself will set in force. Then how fully and finally
the righteousness of God will be vindicated.
Suffice it to say here, as the wicked turn upon their leaders, there
will be the bursting forth of no ordinary fire which will utterly con-
sume both the sin and the sinner, together with the great leader of
sin from the dawn of its inception. The holy city will ride upon the
flames as did Noah's ark upon the angry billows, until the fire, hav-
ing consumed its victims and purified the earth, dies down and is
extinguished.
" The wicked receive their recompense in the earth.' Proverbs
11:31. They 'shall be stubble: and the day that cometh shall bum
them up, saith the Lord of host.' Malachi 4:1. Some are destroyed
as in a moment, while others suffer many days. All are punished 'ac-
cording to their deeds.' The sins of the righteous having been trans-
ferred to Satan, he is made to suffer not only for his own rebellion,
but for all the sins which he has caused God's people to commit. His
punishment is to be far greater than that of those whom he had de-
ceived. After all have perished who fell by his deceptions, he is still to
live and suffer on. In the cleansing flames the wicked are at last de-
stroyed, root and branch—Satan the root, his followers the branches.
The full penalty of the law has been visited; the demands of justice
have been met; and heaven and earth, beholding, declare the right-
eousness of Jehovah.
"Satan's work of ruin is forever ended. For six thousand years he
has wrought his will, filling the earth with woe and causing grief
throughout the universe. The whole creation has groaned and tra-
vailed together in pain. Now God's creatures are forever delivered
from his presence and temptations. The whole earth is at rest, and
is quiet: they [the righteous] break forth into singing.' Isaiah 14:7.
And a shout of praise and triumph ascends from the whole loyal uni-
THE GREAT JUDGMENT DAY 457

verse. 'The voice of a great multitude,' 'as the voice of many waters,
and as the voice of mighty thunderings,' is heard, saying: 'Alleluia:
for the Lord God omnipotent reigneth.' Revelation 19:6." Great
Controversy, 673.
Then out of the dust shall arise, under the power of God's creator-
ship, a new heavens and a new earth, every inhabitant of which, hav-
ing been witness to what sin can do, will be forever secure against any
possibility of any doubt ever arising in their minds as to the ways and
the works of God. Sin shall never again appear to mar the fair handi-
work of God, and all the redeemed will rejoice forevermore in the
peace and the prosperity and the accomplishments of heaven.
Those who learn today to live by the principles of truth, will be
there to live by them then. May every one of our readers be of such.
" 'I saw a new heaven and a new earth: for the first heaven and
the first earth were passed away.' Revelation 21:1. The fire that
consumes the wicked purifies the earth. Every trace of the curse is
swept away. No eternally burning hell will keep before the ransomed
the fearful consequences of sin.
"One reminder alone remains: Our Redeemer will ever bear the
marks of His crucifixion. Upon His wounded head, upon His side,
His hands and feet, are the only traces of the cruel work that sin has
wrought. Says the prophet, beholding Christ in His glory: 'He had
bright beams coming out of His side: and there was the hiding of His
power.' Habakkuk 3:4, margin. That pierced side whence flowed
the crimson stream that reconciled man to God—there is the Sav-
iour's glory, there 'the hiding of His power.' 'Mighty to save,'
through the sacrifice of redemption, He was therefore strong to exe-
cute justice upon them that despised God's mercy. And the tokens of
His humiliation are His highest honor; through the eternal ages the
wounds of Calvary will show forth His praise and declare His power.
" 'O Tower of the flock, the stronghold of the daughter of Zion,
unto Thee shall it come, even the first dominion.' Micah 4:8. The
time has come to which holy men have looked with longing since the
flaming sword barred the first pair from Eden, the time for 'the re-
demption of the purchased possession.' Ephesians 1:14. The earth
originally given to man as his kingdom, betrayed by him into the
hands of Satan, and so long held by the mighty foe, has been brought
back by the great plan of redemption. All that was lost by sin has
been restored. 'Thus saith the Lord . . . that formed the earth and
made it; He hath established it, He created it not in vain, He formed
it to be inhabited.' Isaiah 45:18. God's original purpose in the crea-
tion of the earth is fulfilled as it is made the eternal abode of the re-
deemed. The righteous shall inherit the land, and dwell therein for-
ever.' Psalm 37:29.
THE GREAT JUDGMENT DAY 459

"A fear of making the future inheritance seem too material has
led many to spiritualize away the very truths which lead us to look
upon it as our home. Christ assured His disciples that He went to pre-
pare mansions for them in the Father's house. Those who accept the
teachings of God's word will not be wholly ignorant concerning the
heavenly abode. And yet, 'eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither
have entered into the heart of man, the things which God hath pre-
pared for them that love Him.' 1 Corinthians 2:9. Human language
is inadequate to describe the reward of the righteous. It will be
known only to those who behold it. No finite mind can comprehend
the glory of the Paradise of God.
"In the Bible the inheritance of the saved is called 'a country.'
Hebrews 11:14-16. There the heavenly Shepherd leads His flock to
fountains of living waters. The tree of life yields its fruit every month,
and the leaves of the tree are for the service of the nations. There are
ever-flowing streams, clear as crystal, and beside them waving trees
cast their shadows upon the paths prepared for the ransomed of the
Lord. There the wide-spreading plains swell into hills of beauty, and
the mountains of God rear their lofty summits. On those peaceful
plains, beside those living streams, God's people, so long pilgrims
and wanderers, shall find a home.
" 'My people shall dwell in a peaceable habitation, and in sure
dwellings, and in quiet resting places.' 'Violence shall no more be
heard in thy land, wasting nor destruction within thy borders; but
thou shalt call thy walls Salvation, and thy gates Praise.' They shall
build houses, and inhabit them; and they shall plant vineyards, and
eat the fruit of them. They shall not build, and another inhabit; they
shall not plant, and another eat: . . . Mine elect shall long enjoy the
work of their hands.'Isaiah 32:18; 60:18; 65:21, 22.
"There, 'the wilderness and the solitary place shall be glad for
them; and the desert shall rejoice, and blossom as the rose.' 'Instead
of the thorn shall come up the fir tree, and instead of the brier shall
come up the myrtle tree.' 'The wolf also shall dwell with the lamb,
and the leopard shall lie down with the kid; . . . and a little child shall

OPPOSITE PAGE: The eternal home of the saved will be a world of in-
credible beauty charged with eternal life, incredible vitality, perfect
health, divine love, and limitless opportunities. It will be the place where
the inexhaustible treasures of truth will be opened to the redeemed, be-
fore whom there will ever be new wonders to admire, new heights to as-
cend, and new glories to behold. Neither shall there be any more pain,
sickness, or death, for all that has passed away. Nothing could be more
wonderful than to be apportioned a mansion there, nor more terrible than
to be excluded from its eternal joys.

[LDE30]
460 LAST DAY EVENTS

lead them.' 'They shall not hurt nor destroy in all My holy mountain,'
saith the Lord. Isaiah 35:1; 55:13; 11:6,9.
"Pain cannot exist in the atmosphere of heaven. There will be no
more tears, no funeral trains, no badges of mourning. There shall be
no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying: . . . for the former things
are passed away.' The inhabitant shall not say, I am sick: the people
that dwell therein shall be forgiven their iniquity.' Revelation 21:4;
Isaiah 33:24.
"There is the New Jerusalem, the metropolis of the glorified new
earth, 'a crown of glory in the hand of the Lord, and a royal diadem
in the hand of thy God.' 'Her light was like unto a stone most pre-
cious, even like a jasper stone, clear as crystal.' The nations of them
which are saved shall walk in the light of it: and the kings of the earth
do bring their glory and honor into it.' Saith the Lord: 'I will rejoice
in Jerusalem, and joy in My people.' The tabernacle of God is with
men, and He will dwell with them, and they shall be His people, and
God Himself shall be with them, and be their God.' Isaiah 62:3;
Revelation 21:11, 24; Isaiah 65:19; Revelation 21:3.
"In the City of God 'there shall be no night.' None will need or
desire repose. There will be no weariness in doing the will of God
and offering praise to His name. We shall ever feel the freshness of
the morning and shall ever be far from its close. 'And they need no
candle, neither light of the sun; for the Lord God giveth them light.'
Revelation 22:5. The light of the sun will be superseded by a radi-
ance which is not painfully dazzling, yet which immeasurably sur-
passes the brightness of our noontide. The glory of God and the
Lamb floods the Holy City with unfading light. The redeemed walk in
the sunless glory of perpetual day.
" 'I saw no temple therein: for the Lord God Almighty and the
Lamb are the temple of it.' Revelation 21:22. The people of God are
privileged to hold open communion with the Father and the Son.
'Now we see through a glass, darkly.' 1 Corinthians 13:12. We be-
hold the image of God reflected, as in a mirror, in the works of nature
and in His dealings with men; but then we shall see Him face to face,
without a dimming veil between. We shall stand in His presence and
behold the glory of His countenance.
"There the redeemed shall know, even as also they are known.
The loves and sympathies which God Himself has planted in the soul
shall there find truest and sweetest exercise. The pure communion
with holy beings, the harmonious social life with the blessed angels
and with the faithful ones of all ages who have washed their robes
and made them white in the blood of the Lamb, the sacred ties that
bind together 'the whole family in heaven and earth' (Ephesians
3:15)—these help to constitute the happiness of the redeemed.
THE GREAT JUDGMENT DAY 461

"There, immortal minds will contemplate with never-failing de-

light the wonders of creative power, the mysteries of redeeming love.
There will be no cruel, deceiving foe to tempt to forgetfulness of
God. Every faculty will be developed, every capacity increased. The
acquirement of knowledge will not weary the mind or exhaust the en-
ergies. There the grandest enterprises may be carried forward, the
loftiest aspirations reached, the highest ambitions realized; and still
there will arise new heights to surmount, new wonders to admire,
new truths to comprehend, fresh objects to call forth the powers of
mind and soul and body.
"All the treasures of the universe will be open to the study of
God's redeemed. Unfettered by mortality, they wing their tireless
flight to worlds afar—worlds that thrilled with sorrow at the spectacle
of human woe and rang with songs of gladness at the tidings of a ran-
somed soul. With unutterable delight the children of earth enter into
the joy and the wisdom of unfalien beings. They share the treasures
of knowledge and understanding gained through ages upon ages in
contemplation of God's handiwork. With undimmed vision they gaze
upon the glory of creation—suns and stars and systems, all in their
appointed order circling the throne of Deity. Upon all things, from
the least to the greatest, the Creator's name is written, and in all are
the riches of His power displayed.
"And the years of eternity, as they roll, will bring richer and still
more glorious revelations of God and of Christ. As knowledge is pro-
gressive, so will love, reverence, and happiness increase. The more
men learn of God, the greater will be their admiration of His charac-
ter. As Jesus opens before them the riches of redemption and the
amazing achievements in the great controversy with Satan, the
hearts of the ransomed thrill with more fervent devotion, and with
more rapturous joy they sweep the harps of gold; and ten thousand
times ten thousand and thousands of thousands of voices unite to
swell the mighty chorus of praise.
'And every creature which is in heaven, and on the earth, and
under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that are in them,
heard I saying, Blessing, and honor, and glory, and power, be unto
Him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and
ever.' Revelation 5:13.
"The great controversy is ended. Sin and sinners are no more.
The entire universe is clean. One pulse of harmony and gladness
beats through the vast creation. From Him who created all, flow life
and light and gladness, throughout the realms of illimitable space.
From the minutest atom to the greatest world, all things, animate
and inanimate, in their unshadowed beauty and perfect joy, declare
that God is love." Great Controversy, 674-678.
Appendix

One's Own Image

of the Beast
As far back as I can remember, I have been aware of the principle
so plainly stated in both the Bible and the Spirit of Prophecy, that,
even if we personally suffer loss by so doing, we are, under no cir-
cumstances whatsoever, to resort to the courts of the civil powers of
this earth to settle disputes among us, or as the means of recovering
that which is ours by right. The Scriptures are so plain on this point
that there can be no excuse of any kind for disobeying the divine
command.
"Dare any of you, having a matter against another, go to law be-
fore the unrighteous, and not before the saints?
"Do you not know that the saints will judge the world? And if the
world will be judged by you, are you unworthy to judge the smallest
matters?
"Do you not know that we shall judge angels? How much more,
things that pertain to this life?
"If then you have judgments concerning things pertaining to this
life, do you appoint those who are least esteemed by the church to
judge?
"I say this to your shame. Is it so, that there is not a wise man
among you, not even one, who will be able to judge between his
brethren?
"But brother goes to law against brother, and that before unbe-
lievers!
"Now therefore, it is already an utter failure for you that you go to
law against one another. Why do you not rather accept wrong? Why
do you not rather let yourselves be cheated?
"No, you yourselves do wrong and cheat, and you do these
things to your brethren!" 1 Corinthians 6:1-8.
For the Spirit of Prophecy illumination on this point, I direct you
to Selected Messages 3:299-305, and recommend that you all read
these pages carefully, and heed the counsel contained in them.
"Christians need not contend for their rights. They stand under
ONE'S OWN IMAGE 463

the protection of the banner of Christ. They are to acknowledge the

supreme authority of the King of kings and Lord of lords. In matters
of difficulty between them and their brethren, they are not to appeal
to Caesar or to Pilate. An account is kept of all these matters; and in
His own good time, Christ will avenge His own elect. God will deal
with the one who defrauds his brother and the cause of God. 'Ven-
geance is mine,' He says; 'I will repay.' " Review and Herald, Janu-
ary 3,1899.
With these principles of operation, I have never had any prob-
lem, but now I have to confess that I have never truly understood the
real implications involved in these instructions. Now that I do under-
stand them much better, the revelation is quite startling. I see now
that for me to turn to the civil powers for justice would be for me to
operate according to the ways of the beast, and would therefore be
my own personal establishment of my image of the beast.
But is that not saying too much? How can this be?
To answer that question we have but to ask another:
What must happen before an image of the beast is formed?
The answer is that the Church appeals to and obtains the power
of the civil authorities to enforce the will of the Church on the peo-
ple. Once that is done, no matter by whom, or when, or where, or on
what scale, an image of the beast exists. It may be a miniature ver-
sion involving only two people, but, as such, it will be the foreshad-
owing of the global version soon to engulf the entire planet. Which-
ever it is, the specifications are the same, as it is written in regard to
the coming global version:
"When the leading churches of the United States, uniting upon
such points of doctrine as are held by them in common, shall influ-
ence the state to enforce their decrees and to sustain their institu-
tions, then Protestant America will have formed an image of the Ro-
man hierarchy, and the infliction of civil penalties upon dissenters
will inevitably result." Great Controversy 445.
Let us now compare the setting up of the image on the national
and global scale, with its being set up on the scale of two people.
The united churches seek and gain the services of the civil pow-
ers to enforce the will of the churches on the people. When this is
done, the image of the beast is formed. That will soon be accom-
plished on the global scale.
Now for the individual case. A believer in Christ is deprived of his
rights by a fellow believer, or any one else for that matter. He seeks
and gains the services of the civil powers to force his will on the one
who has defrauded him.
What difference is there between these two? And the answer is:
There is no difference except in scale.
464 LAST DAY EVENTS

Therefore, any person who, at the present time is operating ac-

cording to the ways of the beast and his image, unless he repents be-
fore it is too late to do so, is daily more deeply committing himself to
becoming a working force in the setting up of the final image of the
beast. All such will be merciless persecutors of all those who accept
God's protection alone. But in the end God's people will emerge tri-
umphant from the coming struggle.
Therefore it is written:
"Dare any of you, having a matter against another, go to law be-
fore the unrighteous, and not before the saints?" 1 Corinthians 6:1.
Therefore, a Christian is never to fight for his rights, but shall
leave all such matters in the Lord's hands.
It is evident that we have not yet realized how serious a matter it
is for anyone of us to make an image to the beast in any shape or
form whatsoever, but we can gain some idea of this from the terrible
warning issued by God against those who do. Ponder well the follow-
ing words:
"The most fearful threatening ever addressed to mortals is con-
tained in the third angel's message. That must be a terrible sin which
calls down the wrath of God unmingled with mercy. But men are not
left in darkness concerning this important matter; the warning
against the worship of the beast and his image is to be given to the
world before the visitation of God's judgments, that all may know
why the judgments are inflicted, and may have opportunity to es-
cape." Signs of the Times, January 25, 1910.
"The third angel's message increases in importance as we near
the close of this earth's history. It is the last offer of mercy to the
world, the most solemn message ever given to mortals." Signs of
the Times, January 25, 1910.
Consider again the solemn warning of the third angel:
"Then a third angel followed them, saying with a loud voice, 'If
anyone worships the beast and his image, and receives his mark on
his forehead or on his hand,
'he himself shall also drink of the wine of the wrath of God,
which is poured out full strength into the cup of his indignation. And
he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the
holy angels and in the presence of the Lamb.
'And the smoke of their torment ascends for ever and ever; and
they have no rest day or night, who worship the beast and his image,
and whoever receives the mark of his name.' '' Revelation 14:9-11.
What, in practical terms, does it mean to "worship" the beast?
It can be said that the actions of reverencing, adoring, venerat-
ing, and exalting are all involved in "worshipping" the beast, and
this is true, but we need to understand far better than we do the
ONE'S OWN IMAGE 465

deep, underlying significance of these actions. In other words, what

is a person saying when he "worships" the union of church and
state! Is it possible for one to unwittingly form such an image, while
thinking he is truly serving God?
One who worships the beast and his image is saying that the way
of kingdom-building and of problem-solving employed by the beast,
is also his way of operating, and unless enlightened by the third an-
gel, will be convinced he is truly serving God, even as did the perse-
cuting priests during the Middle Ages. Just as in the formation of the
image of the beast, the churches enlist the power and authority of
the civil powers "to enforce the decrees and sustain the institutions
of the church", The Signs of the Times, March 22,1910, so individ-
ual Christians seek the power of the state to enforce their will on oth-
ers for the recovery of their rights and to ensure they are justly
treated.
What now strikes the heart with the fear of the Lord, is God's
revelation of how He relates to the procedure by which the image of
the beast comes into being, and by which it works. The Almighty has
warned through the trumpet tones of the third angel, that those who
are in any way involved in setting up the image of the beast will suffer
the full force of God's wrath unmingled with mercy. No more fearful
punishment could befall sinful man than that. It is a retribution to be
avoided at any cost. Escape, or be a tragic sufferer of the seven last
plagues.
The decision as to where we shall stand when the image is
formed, firstly on a national scale as America leads out, and then on
a global scale as the nations follow her lead, is being made today.
Any professed Christian who in any way looks to the power of the
state to enforce his will, is revealing that the spirit of the beast is es-
tablished within him, and, unless he or she sees and accepts the awe-
some warning sounded by the third angel, the evil spirit within him
will lead him on until he fully identifies himself with the beast and his
image.
"With rapid steps we are approaching this period. When the
Protestant churches shall unite with the secular power to sustain a
false religion, for opposing which their ancestors endured the fierc-
est persecution: when the state shall use its power to enforce the
decrees and sustain the institutions of the church,— then will Prot-
estant America have formed an image to the Papacy, and there will
be a national apostasy which will end only in national ruin." Signs of
the Times, March 22,1910.
It is a solemn fact that the fulfillment of these predictions on the
national and international scale is still in the future, and no pen can
adequately portray how terrible will be the conditions which will ex-
466 LAST DAY EVENTS

ist when the image is set up throughout the entire earth. It will be the
initiation of a time of trouble such as truly never was.
One danger faced by us is that our attention may be so fixed on
looking out for the future manifestation of the beast and his image,
that we will overlook his presence in ourselves now. We pride our-
selves that, when the image is set up, there will be no way by which
we will bow to it, but, if we already have our personal image set up,
we will most certainly be an enforcer of the future global version
when it comes. There is nothing more certain than that.
The truth of this was demonstrated in Daniel's day when he and
his three friends were among those selected for special training for
service in the Babylonian kingdom. How many were selected apart
from the faithful four, we are not told, but there could have been quite
a company. No doubt most of them at least would have solemnly
sworn that they would never bow down to a Babylonian idol should
they be required to do so, while at the same time reasoning the expe-
diency of partaking of the king's intemperate eating habits. This
they saw as a means of proving to the king that they were not wild-
eyed fanatics, so that when the time came for them to be excused
from idol-worship, the monarch would gladly grant their request.
What a vain hope was theirs! They failed to understand that
those who, without repentance, choose the wrong side now, will ut-
terly fail when the big tests are pressed upon them. When the image
was erected on the plains of Dura, the only ones who were able to re-
fuse to bow to it were those faithful four who had refused to eat and
drink of the king's provisions. So it will be again that only those who
have been delivered from having their own personal image today,
will be able to withstand the final, international, universal image, and
thus be saved from the awful fate of partaking of her plagues.
Consider very carefully the message in the following statement:
"The Bible is its own expositor. Scripture is to be compared with
scripture. The student should learn to view the word as a whole, and
to see the relation of its parts. He should gain a knowledge of its
grand central theme, of God's original purpose for the world, of the
rise of the great controversy, and of the work of redemption. He
should understand the nature of the two principles that are contend-
ing for supremacy, and should learn to trace their working through
the records of history and prophecy, to the great consummation. He
should see how this controversy enters into every phase of human
experience; how in every act of life he himself reveals the one or the
other of the two antagonistic motives; and how, whether he will or
not, he is even now deciding upon which side of the controversy he
will be found." Education, 190.
 Scripture Index
DANIEL 3:3,4 422
GENESIS 4:18 2
3:4 457
6:3 179 3 2 4
4:23 201 7 3:12 294
32:30 382 3:17,18 324
11:31 456 7 4
EXODUS 23:7 201 5
7 ZECHARIAH
1:15,16 300 3:1-5 281
1:22 301 ISAIAH 7:9,10 82
5:2 (ARV) 346 11:6,9 459 170 3:4 71
460 7:13 82 282
31:18 312 3:4, 5 308
14.7 444 7:22 447
456 7:25 4 10:1 138
LEVITICUS 210
16:11-14 163 14:16, 17 444 7:27 144
1AC
164 24:4, 5 55 145
290 8 4 MALACHI
16:15-19 164 5 3:2,3 217
16:20-22 431 302
338 7 3:18 397
16:21 432 8:14 4 411
25:1-7 443 25:9 54 418
444 409
26:20 331 9 5 4:1 456
30:29, 30 332 7 4:2 427
DEUTERO-
NOMY 32:18 459 9:24 75
33:15,16 324 173 MATTHEW
25:17-19 379 5:16 371
33:25 319 33:24 460 9:24-27 272
35:1 459 274 13:24-30 145
41:2 361 11 7 146
JUDGES 13:38 146
1:27-36 272 41:17 324 12 7
45:1 361 12:1 132 13:39 148
45:13 361 288 13:47-50 152
1 SAMUEL 18:21-35 222
15 380 45:18 457 293
52:1 258 297 223
30 380 382 18:35 224
52:14 131
53:3,4 131 12:1,2 405 21:33-46 71
1 KINGS 406 21:41 409
18:17 253 53:4,5 155
53:7 131 12:2 405 22 232
18:17,18 56 424 263
18:39 27 55:13 459
59:2 86 22:1-10 73
21:8 292 HOSEA 77
320 87
60:18 459 4:17 184 93
438
1 CHRON- 62:3 460
65:19 460 JOEL 22:1-14 70
ICLES 22:3 88
4:43 380 65:21,22 459 1:10-12 322
323 22:4 76
1:17-20 323 81
JEREMIAH 2:23 138 22:7 77
PSALMS 78
34:7 291 4:23-27 442 210
25:12 71 2:28-32 51 22:8,9 95
37:29 457 175 22:8-10 149
46:1-3 410 25:31 444
30:5-7 134 22:10 149
416 24:15 6
50:3,4 155 363 AMOS
30:5-8 294 3:7 1 24:24 48
50:6 416 60 24:31 331
72:4 131 30:6 423 424
77:13 163 30:7 139 8:3 323
212 25:1-13 71
91 415 25:6 82
91:1-16 403 MICAH
4:8 457 83
404
91:7-10 323 EZEKIEL
1:4 170 NAHUM 133
97:11 2 26:63,64 407
14:20 382 2:10 423
18:21-24 224 26:64 407
28:12 328 HABAKKUK 27:42,43 408
PROVERBS 409
28:14 329 2:2 2
1:27 409
468 LAST DAY EVENTS

27:50-53 167 EPHESIANS 1 PETER 13:11-17 17

27:52,53 429 1:12,13 190 1:10-12 7 134
32:38 179 195 2:2 196 142
1:14 457 143
MARK 3:15 460 2 PETER 189
4:28 138 5:27 80 1:19 1 238
13:14 6 6:12 49 3:3-7 445 13:11-18 9
12
LUKE PHILIPPIANS JUDE 13:13 49
9:62 65 2:15 122 6 447 13:13, 14 54
10:19 437 13:15 10
21:8-19 319 COLOSSIANS REVELATION 13
21:16 279 1:27 84 1:1-3 8 13:16 122
23:21 409 1:6 362 235
1:7 405 14 217
JOHN 1 THESSALO- 407 14:6 32
8:32 229 NIANS 3:7 179 34
11:50 133 2:3 30 182 119
291 4:13-18 406 3:9 395 14:6-12 5
14:30 201 429 419 60
17:24 336 430 3:18 261 61
398 5:4-6 1 3:19 37 101
19:6 409 5:23,24 87 j 3:21 169 406
170 14:8 63
ACTS 362 98
2:1-4 51 2 THESSALO- 4 82 99
2:4 53 NIANS 429 100
2:14-16 52 1:7,8 155 4:2-6 168 102
2:16 175 2:3 20 4:5 168 233
3:19 144 2:9-11 244 5 82 243
190 429 244
5:28 247 5:8-10 171 14:9 119
8:1 76 1 TIMOTHY 172 14:9,10 236
6:20 66 5:13 461 297
ROMANS 6:11 320 329
1:16 24 6:15-17 426 14:9-11 464
32 2 TIMOTHY 7:2 144 14:14 294
5:1,2 385 3:1-5 37 190 15:3 453
5:3 385 3:4, 5 234 8:3 168 16 45
8:17 362 3:12 252 169 16:1-21 316
9:28 272 9:4 190 16:2-6 321
290 9:5 191 16:5-7 317
TITUS 9:14 355 318
1 CORIN- 3:5 223 10:6 191 16:9-11 318
THIANS 289 16:10 333
2:9 459 10:7 83 16:10,11 325
4:5 446 HEBREWS 11:8 346 16:12 344
447 1:1-3 169 355 355
6:1 464 1:3 82 11:12 433 16:12-16 42
6.-1-8 462 4:1 273 11:13-17 135 16:14 6
6:2 447 274 11:19 169 43
6:3 447 4:7 272 11:24 460 16:17 341
10:13 196 274 12:9 329 342
13:12 460 4:8 274 12:10 369 398
15:52 413 8 432 386 16:17-21 399
425 8:1 82 13 40 400
15:55 412 8:1,2 166 45 16:18 414
427 169 13:1-10 12 16:19 400
15:57 436 9 432 45 16:21 400
9:1-10 432 13:4 117 17 45
2 CORIN- 11:14-16 459 13:7 117 17:5 43
THIANS 11:39,40 429 13:8 117 100
13:1 69 185 112
326 17:12-14 46
GALATIANS JAMES 13:11-14 48 17:15 352
6:7 108 l.-13(RV) 204 49
 469
INDEXES

62 19:11 45 21:1 457

18 45 18:4
21:3 460
98 66 19:11,14 422
102 19:11-16 46 21:4 97
101 460
243 233 440
234 441 21:11 460
61 19:16 422 21:22 460
18:1 102 18:5
460
233 102 19:17,18 47 22:5
234 19:17-21 441 22:6,7 8
18:1-3 18 297
61 18:8 288 19:19 47 22:11
18:1-4
289 19:20 48 423
99 18:10
22:11,12 288
107 18:17 289 20:1-3 436
289 439 307
18:2 102 18:19
373
104 19 45 20:4 319
445 20:4,6 447 22:12 149
105 19:6
233 457 20:11 452
18:2,5 303 19:9 34 20:12 453

Spirit of Prophecy Index

310 149 16 294 287 412
A WORD TO 290 439
THE LITTLE 150 36 298
333 87 42 216 294 439
FLOCK 295 439
12 293 363 27 55 83
294 411 257 171
412 132 58 197 EDUCATION
133 75 332 29 200
ACTS OF THE 190 466
APOSTLES 144 124 396
11 59 219 420
237 146 178 ELLEN G.
53 107 WHITE 1888
419,420 206 179
178 439 MATERIALS
BIBLE ECHO DESIRE OF 484 319
AND SIGNS 259,260 109
OF THE
AGES 260,261 109 EVANGELISM
115 130 111
TIMES 307 198 5
Febl,93 3 269-271 246 235 16
308 258
4 121,122 124 695 84
259 695,696 273
125 269-272 153
CHRIST'S 122 251 702 218
OBJECT 270 161
390 259 GREAT CON-
LESSONS 392
146 260 TROVERSY
70 124 131 104 41,42 21
72 148 277
308 105 22
256 311 195 106 42,43 22
74 151 324 200 23
108 107
84,85 222 241 43 23
122 162 490 90 269 346
184 280 80
436 292 347
122,123 152 437 355
153 298
633,634 273 439 344 4
239 761 179 7
154 205 280,281 437
386 281 439 8
206 71 768 167 364 382, 383 100
307 74 282
786 429 365 389 31
308 76 98
77 EARLY 282,283 293
WRITINGS 283 366 99
94 100
77 15 419 284 365
308,309 243
78 420 284,285 366
425 286 412 244
438
470 LAST DAY EVENTS
390 101 603, 604 233 628 321 663, 664 448
234 604 61 322 449
402 65 62 323 664 451
414,415 168 66 629 324 452
169 102 631 320 668 314
418 206 234 634 320 452
420 224 235 635 331 668, 669 453
225 236 332 669 453
422 434 604, 605 236 635, 636 332 454
424(1884) 243 237 335 670 454
425 140 605 237 636 336 670, 671 454
141 239 341 671,672 455
142 605,606 107 342 672 455
217 240 357 673 439
373 606 241 359 444
427 83 243 360 445
438 329 606-609 129 397 456
443 29 607 175 398 457
443, 444 20 245 636, 637 414 674-678 457
30 246 637 342 458
445 12 248 400 459
13 608 135 405 460
115 136 414 461
463 252 424
448, 449 13 255 637-640 409 LIFE
457, 458 111 258 638 409 SKETCHES
458 273 259 410 OF JAMES
464 234 262 415 AND ELLEN
235 608,609 265 638, 639 410 WHITE
480 313 266 416 431 215
483 184 278 639 410
185 609 12 411 MARANATHA
485 439 270 416 199 319
486 439 613 190 639, 640 397
489, 490 138 613,614 144 411 OUR HIGH
139 145 417 CALLING
490 184 614 296 418 321 385
230 297 419
490, 491 307 312 640 412 PATRIARCHS
491 310 615 305 419 AND
521,522 2 615,616 133 640,641 422 PROPHETS
581 320 134 641 423 39 178
586 35 291 643, 644 407 201 132
36 292 408 134
587 36 616 134 409 297
38 369 645 413 363
301 618 80 424 339, 340 155
302 273 425 350 165
588 52 275 427 358 439
53 308 654 336 627 379
588, 589 54 619 375 337
589 55 620 378 340 PROPHETS
338 621 174 655 337 AND KINGS
589, 590 55 383 655, 656 340 188, 189 122
290 621-623 381 396 453 312
302 382 397 588 372
338 622 176 656 444 591 439
590 56 270 657 426 686, 687 131
252 271 658 432 714 78
253 623 201 438
291 624 48 439 REVIEW AND
339 337 659 444 HERALD
603 102 627,628 297 660 439 Dec 17, 72 157
233 298 660,661 446 Aug l2,84 385
243 300 447 Nov 25, 84 3
INDEXES 471
Dec 18, 88 15 7:983 14 SPIRIT OF 6:395 15
17 44 PROPHECY 119
103 46 2:226 214 327
Jun 18, 89 3 47 4:290 192 7:141 122
Nov 5,89 103 121 4:407 302 123
Mar 11, 90 87 327 4:444,445 126 7:182 121
Apr 1,90 112 7:984 212 128 327
Apr 15, 90 17 213 4:447 294 9:16 308
Jun 3, 90 3 7:987 186 295 18,19 34
Aug 19, 90 71 7:989 309 91 88
Nov 4,90 223 STEPS TO 407 48
Dec 23, 90 92 SELECTED CHRIST 409 130
Mar 22, 92 192 MESSAGES 62 223
Nov 22,92 113 1:63,64 68 224 TESTIMO-
Jan 3, 99 462 69 STORY OF NIES TO
463 179 MINISTERS
Jul 5,06 177 181 REDEMPTION "11 47 159
178 1:234,235 89 ool 11 91 112
181 273 TESTIMO- 91,92 261
Nov l9,08 308 1:348 386 NIES 234 148
331 2:69 159 1:186 184 300 150
2:372 116 1:187 182 256
2:373 16 183 407 337
SDA BIBLE 2:380 263 218 409 285
COMMEN- 3:299-305 462 1:353 139 307
TARY 3:397 319 2:355 373 448 183
374 467 89
1:1109 312 SIGNS OF 4:583, 584 177 473 131
313 THE TIMES 5:80,81 66 285
2:995 27 Jun 17, 89 168 5:81 67 506 138
4:1161 192 Oct 1,95 3 5:136 264 140
196 May 6, 97 119 5:209, 210 246 208
6:1052 309 120 5:212,213 132 210
7:968 319 121 5:383 106 213
7:971 191 Jan 25, 10 464 5:451 16 214
289 Mar 22, 10 465 103 507 174
7:976 15 5:464,465 17 175
17 SONS AND 18
134 DAUGHTERS 364 THOUGHTS
143 OF GOD 5:472,473 279 FROM THE
189 51 192 5:473 285 MOUNT OF
238 291 BLESSING
248 5:473, 474 369 60 201
327 SPALDING 370 116 204
7:979 177 AND MAGAN 5:681 108 128, 129 261
178 COLLECTION 6:18 15
181 1 125 119
7:982,983 43 126 327

Bibliography
Great Empires of Prophecy, A. T. Jones, Quoted on pages 24, 25, 26, 28, 40, 348,
349
Full Gospel Businessmen's Voice Magazine, September, 1962. Quoted on page
53.
Lessons from the Reformation, A. T. Jones. Quoted on page 260
Write to Destiny Press for other books on this and related subjects,
including the following titles:

From Bondage to Freedom,

Behold Your God,
Revival and Reformation,
Justified by Faith,
The Seven Angels,
Acceptable Confession, by F. T. Wright;

The Consecrated Way to Christian Perfection,

Lessons from the Reformation,
Individuality in Religion, by A. T. Jones;

Bible Studies on the Book of Romans,

Christ and His Righteousness,
The Gospel in Creation, by E. J. Waggoner.
Published by:
SABBATH REST ADVENT CHURCH

Waldstraße 37
57520 Dickendorf
Germany

Internet: www.srac.de

E-Mail: [email protected]